diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:35:14 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:35:14 -0700 |
| commit | 730121c338cc94c222816f6eb78daa1c2041e728 (patch) | |
| tree | 0510430586afc097e14b45249963de7208915493 /10803-h | |
Diffstat (limited to '10803-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 10803-h/10803-h.htm | 20018 |
1 files changed, 20018 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/10803-h/10803-h.htm b/10803-h/10803-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c930469 --- /dev/null +++ b/10803-h/10803-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,20018 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<title>Voyages and Travels Volume II</title> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content= +"text/html; charset=UTF-8"> +<style type="text/css"> +<!-- +body {background: #ffffcc; margin:10%; text-align:justify} +h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {color:green; text-align:center} +blockquote {font-size: .9em} +p.poem {text-align:center} +p.external {font-weight: bold} +--> +</style> +</head> +<body> +<div>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 10803 ***</div> +<p><a name="home" id="home"></a></p> +<h2>A</h2> +<h2>GENERAL</h2> +<h2>HISTORY AND COLLECTION</h2> +<h2>OF</h2> +<h1>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,</h1> +<h2>ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:</h2> +<h2>FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS</h2> +<h2>OF NAVIGATION, DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE,</h2> +<h2>BY SEA AND LAND,</h2> +<h2>FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE PRESENT TIME.</h2> +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<h2>BY</h2> +<h2>ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.</h2> +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<h2>ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.</h2> +<h2>VOL. II.</h2> +<h3>WILLIAM BLACKWOOD, EDINBURGH:</h3> +<h3>AND T. CADELL, LONDON.</h3> +<h3>MDCCCXXIV.</h3> +<hr align="center" width="50%"> +<p><a name="contents" id="contents"></a></p> +<h2>CONTENTS OF VOLUME II.</h2> +<p><a href="#part1"><b>PART I.--(Continued.)</b></a></p> +<p>Voyages and Travels of Discovery, from the Era of Alfred, King of +England, in the Ninth Century, to the Era of Don Henry, Prince of +Portugal, at the commencement of the Fifteenth Century.</p> +<p><a href="#chapter1-20"><b> <i>CHAPTER XX.</i> </b></a></p> +<p>Account of various early Pilgrimages from England to the Holy +Land, between the years 1097, and 1107.</p> +<p><a href="#chapter1-21"><b> <i>CHAPTER XXI.</i> </b></a></p> +<p>Discovery of Madeira</p> +<p><a href="#chapter1-22"><b> <i>CHAPTER XXII.</i> </b></a></p> +<p>Account of the Discovery and Conquest of the Canary Islands</p> +<p><a href="#part2"><b>PART II.</b></a></p> +<p>General Voyages and Travels, chiefly of Discovery; from the era of +Don Henry Prince of Portugal, in 1412, to that of George III. in +1760.</p> +<p><a href="#book2-1"><b>BOOK I.</b></a></p> +<p>History of the Discoveries of the Portuguese along the Coast of +Africa, and of their Discovery of and Conquests in India, from 1412 +to 1505[A]</p> +<blockquote>[A] This title was omitted to be inserted in its proper +place, and may be supplied in writing on the blank page opposite to +page 23 of this volume.</blockquote> +<p><a href="#chapter2-1"><b> <i>CHAPTER I.</i> </b></a></p> +<p>Summary of the Discoveries of the World, from their first +original, to the year 1555, by Antonio Galvano</p> +<p><a href="#chapter2-2"><b> <i>CHAPTER II.</i> </b></a></p> +<p>Journey of Ambrose Contarini, Ambassador from the Republic of +Venice, to Uzun-Hassan King of Persia, in the years 1473, 4, 5, and +6; written by himself</p> +<p><a href="#chapter2-3"><b> <i>CHAPTER III.</i> </b></a></p> +<p>Voyages of Discovery by the Portuguese along the Western Coast of +Africa, during the life, and under the direction of Don Henry</p> +<p><a href="#chapter2-4"><b> <i>CHAPTER IV.</i> </b></a></p> +<p>Original Journals of the Voyages of Cada Mosto, and Pedro de +Cintra, to the Coast of Africa; the former in the years 1455 and +1406, and the latter soon afterwards</p> +<p><a href="#chapter2-5"><b> <i>CHAPTER V.</i> </b></a></p> +<p>Continuation of the Portuguese Discoveries along the Coast of +Africa, from the death of Don Henry in 1463, to the Discovery of the +Cape of Good Hope in 1486</p> +<p><a href="#chapter2-6"><b> <i>CHAPTER VI.</i> </b></a></p> +<p>History of the Discovery and Conquest of India by the Portuguese, +between the years 1497 and 1505, from the original Portuguese of +Hernan Lopez de Castaneda</p> +<p><a href="#chapter2-7"><b> <i>CHAPTER VII.</i> </b></a></p> +<p>Letters from Lisbon in the beginning of the Sixteenth Century, +respecting the then recent Discovery of the Route by Sea to India, +and the Indian trade</p> +<p> <i>Note</i> . In p. 292 of this volume, 1, 2 and 18, the date of +1525 ought to have been 1505.</p> +<hr align="center" width="50%"> +<p><a name="part1" id="part1"></a></p> +<h1>PART I. (CONTINUED.)</h1> +<h2>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS OF DISCOVERY, FROM THE ERA OF ALFRED, KING OF +ENGLAND, IN THE NINTH CENTURY; TO THE ERA OF DON HENRY, PRINCE OF +PORTUGAL, AT THE COMMENCEMENT OF THE FIFTEENTH CENTURY.</h2> +<hr align="center" width="50%"> +<h2><a name="chapter1-20" id="chapter1-20">CHAPTER XX.</a></h2> +<p align="center"><b> <i>Account of Various early Pilgrimages from +England to the Holy Land; between the years 1097 and +1107</i> </b>[1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Hakluyt, I. p. 44. et sequ.</blockquote> +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> +<p>The subsequent account of several English pilgrimages to the Holy +Land.</p> +<p>SECTION I.</p> +<p> <i>The Voyage of Gutuere, or Godwera, an English Lady, towards the +Holy Land, about 1097.</i> </p> +<p>While the Christian army, under Godfrey of Buillon, was marching +through Asia Minor from Iconium, in Lycaonia, by Heraclea, to +Marasia, or Maresch[1], Gutuere, or Godwera, the wife of Baldwin, the +brother of the Duke of Lorain, who had long laboured under heavy +sickness, became so extremely ill, that the army encamped on her +account near Marash, for three days, when she expired. This lady is +said to have been of noble English parentage, and was honourably +interred at Antioch in Syria[2].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Now Konieh, Erekli, and Marash; the two former in +Karamania, the latter in Syria or Room.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] For this story, Hakluyt quotes Hist Bel. Sacr. lib. +iii. c. xvii. and Chron. Hierosol. lib. iii c. xxvii.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION II.</p> +<p> <i>The Voyage of Edgar Aethling to Jerusalem, in 1102</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Hakluyt. I. 44. W. Malmsb. III. 58.</blockquote> +<p>Edgar, commonly called Aethling, was son of Edward, the son of +Edmond Ironside, who was the brother of Edward the Confessor, to whom +consequently Edgar was nephew; Edgar travelled to Jerusalem in 1102, +in company with Robert, the son of Godwin, most valiant knight. Being +present in Rama, when King Baldwin was there besieged by the Turks, +and not being able to endure the hardships of the siege, he was +delivered from that danger, and escaped through the midst of the +hostile camp, chiefly through the aid of Robert; who, going before +him, made a lane with his sword, slaying numbers of the Turks in his +heroic progress. Towards the close of this chivalric enterprize, and +becoming more fierce and eager as he advanced, Robert unfortunately +dropt his sword; and while stooping to recover his weapon, he was +oppressed by the multitude, who threw themselves upon him, and made +him prisoner. From thence, as some say, Robert was carried to Babylon +in Egypt, or Cairo; and refusing to renounce his faith in CHRIST, he +was tied to a stake in the market-place, and transpierced with +arrows. Edgar, having thus lost his valiant knight, returned towards +Europe, and was much honoured with many gifts by the emperors both of +Greece and Germany, both of whom would gladly have retained him at +their courts, on account of his high lineage; but he despised all +things, from regard to his native England, into which he returned: +And, having been subjected to many changes of fortune, as we have +elsewhere related, he <i>now</i> spends his extreme old age in private +obscurity.</p> +<p>SECTION III.</p> +<p> <i>Some Circumstances respecting the Siege of Joppa, about the +year 1102</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Hakluyt, I.45. Chron. Hierosol. IX. ix. xi. +xii.</blockquote> +<p>In the second year of Baldwin, king of Jerusalem, Joppa was +besieged by the Turks of Cairo; and Baldwin embarked from the town of +Assur, in a vessel called a <i>buss</i> , commanded by one Goderic an +English freebooter, intending to proceed to the relief of the +besieged. Fixing the royal banner aloft on a spear, that it might be +seen of the Christians, they sailed boldly towards Joppa, with but a +small company of armed men. The king knew that the Christians in +Joppa were almost hopeless of his life and safety, and he feared they +might shamefully abandon the defence of the place, or be constrained +to surrender, unless revived by his presence. On perceiving the +approach of the royal banner of King Baldwin, the naval forces of the +Turks, to the number of twenty gallies and thirteen ships, usually +called <i>Cazh</i> , endeavoured to surround and capture the single +vessel in which he was embarked. But, by the aid of GOD, the billows +of the sea raged against them, while the kings ship glided easily and +swiftly through the waves, eluding the enemy, and arrived in safety +into the haven of Joppa, to the great joy of the Christians, who had +mourned him as if dead.</p> +<p>While the Saracens continued the siege of Joppa, 200 sail of +Christian vessels arrived there, with pilgrims who wished to perform +their devotions at Jerusalem. Of these, the chief leaders were +Bernard Witrazh of Galatia, Hardin of England, Otho of Roges, +Haderwerck, one of the principal nobles of Westphalia, and others. +This power, by the blessing of God, arrived to succour the distressed +Christians then besieged in Joppa, on the 3d of July 1102, in the +second year of Baldwin king of Jerusalem. When the numerous army of +the Saracens saw that the Christians, thus reinforced, boldly faced +them without the walls, they removed their tents, during the night, +above a mile from the town, that they might consider whether to +retreat to Ascalon, or to continue to harass the citizens of Joppa +with frequent assaults. But they confided in their numbers, and +continued to annoy the Christians by severe and repeated attacks.</p> +<p>Having allowed three days rest and refreshment to this powerful +reinforcement, Baldwin issued out from Joppa early in the morning of +the sixth of July, to the martial sound of trumpets and cornets, with +a strong force, both of foot and horse, marching directly toward the +Saracens, with loud shouts, and attacked their army with great +spirit. The land attack was assisted by the Christian navy, which +approached the shore, making a horrible noise, and distracting the +attention of the Saracens, who feared to be attacked in flank and +rear. After a sharp encounter, the Saracens fled towards Ascalon, +many being slain in the battle and pursuit, and others drowned, by +leaping into the sea to avoid being slain. In this battle 3000 of the +Saracens perished, with a very small loss on the side of the +Christians; and the city of Joppa was delivered from its enemies.</p> +<p>SECTION IV.</p> +<p> <i>Of the Transactions of certain English, Danish, and Flemish +Pilgrims in the Holy Land, in 1107</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Hakluyt, I. 47. Chron. Hierosol. lib. x.</blockquote> +<p>In the seventh year of King Baldwin, a large fleet from England, +containing above 7000 men, many of whom were soldiers, arrived at the +harbour of Joppa, along with whom came other warriors from Denmark, +Flanders, and Antwerp. Having received permission and safe conduct +from King Baldwin, together with a strong band of armed men as a +safeguard, they arrived in safety at Jerusalem and all the other +places of devotion, free from all assaults and ambushes of the +Gentiles; and having paid their vows unto the Lord in the church of +the Holy Sepulchre, they returned with great joy, and without +molestation, to Joppa[2]. Finding King Baldwin in that place, they +made offer to assist him in any military enterprize; for which offer +he gave them great commendations, saying, That he could not give an +immediate answer, without consulting the patriarch and barons, of his +kingdom.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Though not mentioned in the text, it seems presumable +that these pilgrims deemed it necessary for them to proceed unarmed +in execution of their devotions, under an escort.--E.</blockquote> +<p>He therefore called together the Lord Patriarch, Hugh of Tabaria, +Gunfrid the governor of the Tower of David, and the other principal +officers of the kingdom of Jerusalem, to consult together in the city +of Rames, how best to employ this proferred assistance of so +considerable a body of volunteers.</p> +<p>In that assembly, it was agreed upon to lay siege to the city of +Sagitta, otherwise called Sidon; upon which, having directed every +one of the nobles to go home, that they might provide armour and all +other necessaries for the siege, he sent messengers to the English, +requiring them not to remove their fleet and army from Joppa, but to +wait there for his farther commands; informing them, that he and his +nobles had resolved, with their aid, to lay siege to the city of +Sidon, but it would require some time to provide the necessary +engines and warlike instruments, for assaulting the walls of that +place. The pilgrims answered, that they would attend his orders at +Joppa, promising to be obedient to him in all things, even unto +death. The king went soon afterwards, with the patriarch and all his +attendants to the city of Acre; where, during forty days, he was +busily employed in the construction of engines, and many different +kinds of warlike instruments, and of every thing necessary for the +intended siege.</p> +<p>When this intended expedition came to the knowledge of the +inhabitants of Sidon, and they understood that a powerful army of +pilgrims lay in readiness at Joppa, to assist the king of Jerusalem, +they were afraid of being subdued and destroyed by the Christians, as +Caesaria, Assur, Acre, Cayphas, and Tabaria had already been; and +they sent secret emissaries to the king, offering a large sum of +money in gold byzants, and a considerable yearly tribute, on +condition that he would spare their lives and refrain from the +intended siege. After a lengthened negotiation, during which the +inhabitants of Sidon rose considerably in their offers, the king, +being in great straits for means to discharge the pay of his +soldiers, hearkened willingly to the offers of the Sidonians; yet, +afraid of reproach from the Christians, he dared not openly to +consent to their proposals.</p> +<p>In the meantime, Hugh of Tabaria, who was a principal warrior +among the Christians of Palestine, and indefatigable in assaulting +the pagans on all occasions, having gathered together 200 horse and +400 infantry, suddenly invaded the country of a great Saracen lord, +named Suet, on the frontiers of the territory of Damascus, where he +took a rich booty of gold and silver and many cattle, which would +have proved of great importance in assisting the army at the siege of +Sidon. On his return with this prey by the city of Belinas, otherwise +called Caesaria Philippi, the Turks of Damascus, with the Saracen +inhabitants of the country, gathered together in great numbers, and +pursued the troops of Hugh, that they might recover the booty. Coming +up with them in the mountains, over which the infantry belonging to +Hugh of Tabaria were driving their prey, the Turks prevailed over the +Christians, and the plunder was recovered. On receiving this +intelligence, Hugh, who happened to be at some distance, hastened +with his cavalry to succour his footmen, and to recover the spoil: +But happening to fall in with the Turks in a strait and craggy place, +and rushing heedlessly among the enemy, unprovided with his armour, +he was shot in the back by an arrow, which pierced his liver, and he +died on the spot. His soldiers brought back the dead body of Hugh to +the city of Nazareth near Mount Thabor, where he was honourably +interred. Gerard, the brother of Hugh, lay at this time sick of a +dangerous illness, and died within eight days afterwards.</p> +<p>Taking advantage of the death of these two famous princes, King +Baldwin agreed to receive the money which had been offered to him by +the city of Sidon, yet kept his intentions of making peace private, +and sent to Joppa, desiring the chiefs of the English, Danes, and +Flemings, to come with their fleet and army to Acre, as if he had +meant to prosecute the siege. When they arrived, he represented to +their chiefs the great loss he had sustained by the death of two of +his chief warriors, on which account, he was constrained to defer the +siege to a more convenient opportunity, and must now dismiss his +army. On this the strangers saluted the king very respectfully, and, +embarking in their ships, returned to their own countries.</p> +<p>SECTION V.</p> +<p> <i>The Expedition of William Longespee, or Long-sword, Earl of +Salisbury, in the year 1248, under the Banners of St Louis, King of +France, against the Saracens</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Hakluyt, I. 70.</blockquote> +<p>When Louis, King of France, went against the Saracens in 1248, +William Earl of Salisbury, with the Bishop of Worcester, and other +great men of the realm of England, accompanied him in the holy +warfare[2]. About the beginning of October 1249, the French king +assaulted and took the city of Damietta, which was esteemed the +principal strong-hold of the Saracens in Egypt; and having provided +the place with a sufficient garrison, under the Duke of Burgundy, he +removed his camp, to penetrate farther eastwards. In this army +William Earl of Salisbury served, with a chosen band of Englishmen +under his especial command; but the French entertained a great +dislike to him and his people, whom they flouted upon all occasions, +calling them English <i>tails</i> [3], and other opprobrious names, +insomuch, that the King of France had much ado to keep peace between +them. This quarrel originated from the following circumstance: Not +far from Alexandria there was a strong castle belonging to the +Saracens[4], in which they had placed some of their principal ladies, +and much treasure; which fortress the earl and his English followers +had the good fortune to take, more by dexterous policy than by open +force of arms, through which capture he and his people were much +enriched; and when the French came to the knowledge of this exploit, +which had not been previously communicated to them, they were much +enraged against the English, and could never speak well of them +afterwards.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Hakluyt dates this expedition in the 32d year of the +reign of Henry III. of England. He mentions, in a former passage, I. +p. 59. that the same Earl of Salisbury, accompanied Richard Earl of +Cornwall, in the 23d year of the same kings reign into Syria against +the Saracens, with many other English of note, where they performed +good service against the unbelievers, but gives no relation of +particulars.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] The meaning of this term of reproach does not appear; +unless, from some after circumstances, it may have proceeded from +their horses having long tails, while those of the French were +dockt.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] Probably Aboukir.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Not long after this, the earl got secret intelligence of a rich +caravan of merchants belonging to the Saracens, who were travelling +to a certain fair which was to be held near Alexandria, with a +multitude of camels, asses, and mules, and many carts, all richly +laden with silks, precious jewels, spices, gold, silver, and other +commodities, besides provisions and other matters of which the +soldiers were then in great want. Without giving notice of this to +the rest of the Christian army, the earl gathered all the English +troops, and fell by night upon the caravan, killing many of the +people, and making himself master of the whole carts and baggage +cattle with their drivers, which he brought with him to the Christian +camp, losing only one soldier in the skirmish, and eight of his +servants, some of whom were only wounded and brought home to be +cured. When this was known in the camp, the Frenchmen, who had +loitered in their tents while the earl and his people were engaged in +the expedition, came forth and forcibly took to themselves the whole +of this spoil, finding great fault with the earl and the English for +leaving the camp without orders from the general, contrary to the +discipline of war; though the earl insisted that he had done nothing +but what he would readily justify, and that his intentions were to +have divided the spoil among the whole army. But this being of no +avail, and very much displeased at being deprived in so cowardly a +manner of what he had so adventurously gained, he made his complaint +to the king; and being successfully opposed there by the pride of the +Count of Artois, the kings brother, who thwarted his claims with +disdainful spite, he declared that he would serve no longer in their +army, and bidding farewell to the king, he and his people broke up +from the army and marched for Achon[5]. Upon their departure, the +Count d'Artois said that the French army was well rid of these tailed +English; which words, spoken in despite, were ill taken by many good +men, even of their own army. But not long after, when the governor of +Cairo, who was offended with the Soldan, offered to deliver that +place to the French king, and even gave him instructions now he might +best conduct himself to accomplish that enterprize, the king sent a +message in all haste to the Earl of Salisbury, requesting him to +return to the army, under promise of redressing all his grievances; +on which he came back and rejoined the French army.</p> +<blockquote>[5] St John d'Acre.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The king of France now marched towards Cairo, and came to the +great river Nile, on the other side of which the Soldan had encamped +with his army, on purpose to dispute the passage. At this time, there +was a Saracen in the service of the Count of Artois, who had been +lately converted to the Christian faith, and who offered to point out +a shallow ford in the river, by which the army might easily cross +over. Upon receiving this intelligence, Artois and the master of the +Knights Templars, with about a third of the army, crossed to the +other side, and were followed by Salisbury and the English. These +being all joined, made an assault upon a part of the Saracen army +which remained in the camp, and overthrew them, the Soldan being then +at some distance with the greater part of his army.</p> +<p>After this easy victory, Artois was so puffed up with pride and +elated by success, that he believed nothing could withstand him, and +would needs advance without waiting for the coming up of the main +body of the army under the king of France, vainly believing that he +was able with the power he had to conquer the whole force of the +Saracens. The master of the Templars, and other experienced officers, +endeavoured to dissuade him from this rash conduct; advising him +rather to return to the main army, satisfied with the signal +advantage he had already achieved; that thereby the whole army of the +Christians might act in concert, and be the better able to guard +against the danger of any ambushes or other stratagems of war, that +might have been devised for their destruction. They represented to +him that the horses of this vanguard were already tired, and the +troops without food; and besides, that their numbers were utterly +unable to withstand the vastly superior multitude of the enemy; who +besides, having now obviously to fight for their last stake, the +capital of their dominions, might be expected to exert their utmost +efforts. To this salutary counsel, the proud earl arrogantly answered +with opprobrious taunts; reviling the whole Templars as dastardly +cowards and betrayers of their country, and even alleged that the +Holy Land of the Cross might easily be won to Christendom, if it were +not for the rebellious spirit of the Templars and Hospitallers, and +their followers: which, indeed, was a common belief among many. To +these contumelious remarks, the master of the Templars angrily +desired him, in his own name and that of his followers, to display +his ensign when and where he dared, and he should find them as ready +to follow as he to lead. The Earl of Salisbury now remonstrated with +Artois, advising him to listen to these experienced persons, who were +much better acquainted with the country and people than he could be; +and endeavoured to convince him that their advice was discreet and +worthy to be followed. He then addressed his discourse to the master +of the Templars, prudently endeavouring to sooth his anger against +the arrogance of the Count of Artois. But Artois cut him short, +exclaiming in anger with many oaths, "Away with these cowardly +Englishmen with tails; the army would be much better rid of these +tailed people;" and many other scandalous and disdainful expressions. +To this the English earl replied, "Well, Earl Robert, wherever you +dare set your foot, my steps shall go as far as yours; and I believe +we shall go this day where you shall not dare to come near the tails +of our horses."</p> +<p>And it so happened as Earl William said: For Earl Robert of Artois +persisted to march forward against the Soldan, vainly hoping to win +all the glory to himself, before the coming up of the main body of +the host. His first enterprize was ordering an attack on a small +castle, or fortified village, called Mansor; whence a number of the +villagers ran out, on seeing the approach of the Christians, making a +great outcry, which came to the ears of the Soldan, who was much +nearer with his army than had been supposed. In the mean time, the +Christians made an assault on Mansor with too little precaution, and +were repulsed with considerable loss, many of them being slain by +large stones, thrown upon them as they entered the place; by which +the army not only lost a considerable number of men, but was much +dispirited by this unexpected repulse.</p> +<p>Immediately on the back of this discomfiture, the Soldan came in +sight with his whole army; and seeing the Christians in this divided +state, brother separated from brother, joyfully seized the +opportunity he had long wished for, and inclosing them on all sides, +that none might escape, attacked them with great fury. In this +situation, the Earl of Artois sore repented of his headstrong +rashness, when it was too late; and, seeing Earl William Longespee +fighting bravely against the chief brunt of the enemy, he called out +to him in a cowardly manner to flee, as God fought against them. But +William bravely answered, "God forbid that my father's son should +flee from the face of a Saracen." Earl Robert turned out of the +fight, and fled away, thinking to escape from death or captivity by +the swiftness of his horse; and taking the river Thafnis[6], sank +through the weight of his armour, and was drowned. On the flight of +Earl Robert, the French troops lost heart, and began to give ground: +But William Longespee, bearing up manfully against the whole force of +the enemy, stood firm as long as he was able, slaying and wounding +many of the Saracens. At length, his horse being killed, and his legs +maimed, he fell to the ground; yet he continued to mangle their legs +and feet, till at last he was slain with many wounds, being finally +stoned to death by the Saracens. After his death, the Saracens set +upon the remainder of the army, which they had surrounded on every +side, and destroyed them all, so that scarce a single man remained +alive. Of the whole, only two templars, one hospitaller, and one +common soldier escaped, to bring the melancholy tidings to the king +of France. Thus by the imprudent and foolish rashness of Earl Robert, +the French troops were utterly discomfited, and the valiant English +knight overpowered and slain, to the grief of all the Christians, and +the glory of the Saracens; and, as it afterwards fell out, to the +entire ruin of the whole French army.</p> +<blockquote>[6] This is probably meant for that branch of the Nile +which they had previously crossed on their way to +Mansor.--E.</blockquote> +<hr align="center" width="50%"> +<h2><a name="chapter1-21" id="chapter1-21">CHAPTER XXI.</a></h2> +<p align="center"><b> <i>Discovery of Madeira</i> </b>[1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Astley, I. 11. and 586. Clarke, Progress of Maritime +Discovery, I. 167. Although in our opinion a mere romance, we have +inserted this story, because already admitted into other general +collections.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Although the Era of modern discovery certainly commenced under the +auspicious direction of Don Henry of Portugal, who first conceived +and executed the sublime idea of extending the knowledge and commerce +of the globe, by a judicious series of maritime, expeditions +expressly for the purpose of discovery; yet as Madeira is said to +have been visited, and the Canaries were actually discovered and +settled before that era, it appears necessary to give a previous +account of these discoveries, before proceeding to the second part of +this work.</p> +<p>Several authors have left accounts of the real or pretended +original discovery of this island of Madeira, all of whom concur in +asserting that it was first discovered by an Englishman. Juan de +Barros, the Livy of Portugal, mentions it briefly in the first decade +of his Asia. The history of this discovery was written in Latin, by +Doctor Manoel Clemente, and dedicated to Pope Clement V. Manoel Tome +composed a Latin poem on the subject, which he +intitled <i>Insulana</i> . Antonio Galvano mentions it in a treatise of +discoveries, made chiefly by the Spaniards and Portuguese previously +to the year 1550[2]. Manoel de Faria y Sousa, the illustrious +commentator of Camoens, cites Galvano in illustration of the fifth +stanza in the fifth book of the immortal Lusiad, and likewise gives +an account of this discovery in his Portuguese Asia. But the earliest +and most complete relation of this discovery was composed by +Francisco Alcaforado, who was esquire to Don Henry the <i>infant</i> +or prince of Portugal, the first great promoter of maritime +discoveries, and to whom he presented his work. No person was more +capable of giving an exact account of that singular event than +Alcaforado, as he was one of those who assisted in making the second +discovery. His work was first published in Portuguese by Don +Francisco Manoel, and was afterwards published in French at Paris in +1671[3]. From this French edition the following account is extracted, +because the original Portuguese has not come to our knowledge, +neither can we say when that was printed; but as the anonymous French +translator remarked, that "Don Francisco <i>keeps</i> the original MS. +with great care," it may be concluded, that the Portuguese impression +did not long precede the French translation. The French translator +acknowledges that he has altered the style, which was extremely +florid and poetical, and has expunged several useless and tedious +digressions, etymologies, reflections, and comparisons; but declares +that he has strictly presented, the truth and substance of the +history, so as not to vary from it in the least, or to omit the +smallest material circumstance.</p> +<blockquote>[2] This work was printed in 1560, and was translated by +Hakluyt: There is an abstract of it in Purchas his Pilgrims, II. +1671, and it will be found at the commencement of the second part of +this Collection.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] In small duodecimo and large print, under the title +of Relation Historique de la Decouverte de l'Isle de Madere: +containing 185 pages, besides twelve pages of +preface.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>It is remarkable that there is no mention whatever in any of the +English histories of Machin, Macham, or Marcham, the supposed author +of this discovery; so that Hakluyt was beholden to Antonio Galvano +for the imperfect account he gives of that transaction[4]. By the +following abstract the complete history becomes our own, and we shall +be no longer strangers to an event which has for several ages, +rendered an Englishman famous in foreign countries, while wholly +unknown in his own. It must not, however, be omitted to observe, that +some objections may be stated against the authenticity of this +history, on account of certain circumstances which do not quadrate +with the time assigned for Machin's voyage by the author. From these +it is obvious, either that the relation given by Alcaforado is not +genuine, or that it has been interpolated. How far this objection may +be admitted, without prejudice to the authority of the whole story, +must be left to the judgment of our readers; we shall only add, that +so far as relates to Macham it agrees with the tradition of the +inhabitants of Madeira.</p> +<blockquote>[4] Clarke, Progress of Maritime Discovery, I. +167.</blockquote> +<p>According to Alcaforada, Juan Gonsalvo Zarco, a gentleman of the +household of Don Henry, being sent out by that prince upon an +expedition of discovery to the coast of Africa, made prize, in the +year 1420, of a Spanish vessel filled with redeemed captives, on +their way from Morocco to Spain. In this vessel there was one John de +Morales, an experienced and able pilot, whom he detained as an +acceptable present to his master Don Henry, and set all the rest at +liberty. Morales on being made acquainted with the cause of his +detention, entered freely into the service of the prince, and gave an +account to Gonsalvo of the adventures of Machin, and the situation +and land-marks of the new discovered island, all of which he had +learnt from certain English captives in the jails of Morocco, who had +accompanied Macham, or Machin, in his expedition.</p> +<p>The year of this extraordinary adventure is not mentioned by +Galvano, who only says, that in 1344, Pedro IV. reigning in Arragon, +the chronicles of his age reported, that about this time the island +of Madeira was discovered by one Macham, an Englishman. It must be +confessed that an objection arises against this history which is not +easily removed. We are told that, immediately after the death of +Macham, his companions sailed over to Morocco, and that Morales was +in prison when they arrived. Supposing the discovery by Macham to +have been made about 1344, as related by Galvano, from the Castilian +chronicles, Morales must have been no less than seventy-six years a +prisoner when redeemed, and when he was detained by Gonsalvo in 1420. +Herbert places the adventure of Macham in 1328, which would increase +the captivity of Morales to ninety-two years. Alcaforado places the +event in the reign of Edward III. of England, which began in 1327 and +ended in 1378; Even supposing it to have happened in the last year of +Edward, Morales must have remained forty-two years in captivity; +which is not only highly improbable, but is even contrary to the +sense of the historian, who supposes but a small space to have +elapsed between the two events; besides, the records quoted by +Galvano are said expressly to assert that Macham went himself into +Africa, whence he was sent to the king of Castile. This last +circumstance may have been invented by the Spaniards, to give them a +better title to the island of Madeira: But the former objection +remains in full force, and can only be obviated by supposing that +either Morales advanced a falsehood in asserting, that he had the +account of this discovery from the English themselves, instead of +learning it from the other slaves, among whom the tradition might +have been current for many years after the event; or Alcaforado may +have mistaken the report of Morales in this particular. The following +is the substance of the narrative, as given by Alcaforado.</p> +<p>In the glorious reign of Edward III. Robert a Machin, of Macham, a +gentleman of the second degree of nobility, whose genius was only +equalled by his gallantry and courage, beheld and loved the beautiful +Anna d'Arfet[5]. Their attachment was mutual, but the pleasing +indulgence of ardent hope gratified and betrayed the secret of their +passion. The pride of the illustrious family of d'Arfet was +insensible to the happiness of their daughter, and they preferred the +indulgence of their own ambition to the voice of love. The feudal +tyranny of the age was friendly to their cruelty, and a royal warrant +seemed to justify the vanity of her parent. The consolation of an +ingenious mind supported Machin under confinement, and enabled him to +seek after redress without yielding to despondency. On his +releasement from prison, he learned that the beloved cause of his +persecution had been forced to marry a nobleman, whose name he could +not discover, but who had carried her to his castle near Bristol. The +friends of Machin made his misfortune their own, and one of them had +the address to get introduced into the service of the afflicted Anna +under the character of a groom. The prospect of the ocean during +their rides, suggested or matured the plan of escape and the hope of +a secure asylum counteracted the imagined dangers of a passage to the +coast of France. Under pretence of deriving benefit from the sea air, +the victim of parental ambition was enabled to elude suspicion, and +embarked without delay, in a vessel procured for the purpose, along +with her lover.</p> +<blockquote>[5] In a note, Mr Clarke says the name of this lady has +been supposed by some writers to have been Dorset, corrupted by a +foreign orthography into D'Orset, and thence into D'Arfet. It may +have been D' Arcy.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the successful completion of this anxious design, Machin was +alike insensible to the unfavourable season of the year, and to the +portentous signs of an approaching storm, which in a calmer moment he +would have duly observed. The gradual rising of a gale of wind, +rendered the astonished fugitives sensible of their rashness; and, as +the tempest continued to augment, the thick darkness of night +completed the horrors of their situation. In their confusion, the +intended port was missed, or could not be attained, and their vessel +drove at the mercy of the winds and waves. In the morning they found +themselves in the midst of an unknown ocean, without skill to +determine their situation, and destitute of knowledge or experience +to direct their course towards any known land. At length, after +twelve anxious mornings had dawned without sight of land, with the +earliest streaks of day an object dimly appeared to their eager +watchfulness in the distant horizon, and when the grey haze, which +had alternately filled them with hope and despondency was dissipated +by the rising sun, the certainty of having discovered land was +welcomed by a general burst of joy. A great luxuriancy of trees of +unknown species, was soon observed to overspread the land, whence +unknown birds of beautiful plumage came off in flocks to the vessel, +and gave the appearance of a pleasing dream to their unexpected +deliverance.</p> +<blockquote>[Illustration: Chart of North Western +Africa]</blockquote> +<p>The boat was hoisted out to examine the new found island, and +returned with a favourable account. Machin and his friends +accompanied their trembling charge on shore, leaving the mariners to +secure the vessel at an anchor. The wilderness and rich scenery of +the adjacent country possessed great charms to these thankful guests, +just escaped from apparently inevitable destruction. An opening in +the extensive woods, which was encircled with laurels and other +flowering shrubs, presented a delightful retreat to the tempest-worn +voyagers; a venerable tree, of ancient growth, offered its welcome +shade on an adjoining eminence, and the first moments of liberty were +employed in forming a romantic residence, with the abundant materials +which nature supplied all around. The novelty of every object they +beheld, induced curiosity to explore their new discovery, and they +spent three days in wandering about the woods, when the survey was +interrupted by an alarming hurricane, which came on during the night, +and rendered them extremely anxious for the safety of their +companions, who had been left in charge of the vessel. The ensuing +morning destroyed all prospect of being ever enabled to get away from +the island; the vessel had broke from her moorings by the violence of +the storm, and was wrecked on the coast of Morocco, where all on +board were immediately seized as slaves.</p> +<p>The afflicted Machin found this last calamity too severe for his +terrified and afflicted companion to endure. Her susceptible mind and +tender frame, overcome by the severity of the scenes she had gone +through, and oppressed by consciousness of having deviated from her +duty, sunk under her afflictive situation. From the moment it was +reported that the vessel had disappeared, she became dumb with +sorrow, and expired after a few days of silent despair. This heavy +stroke was too much for the inconsolable lover to support; though +watched over with the utmost solicitude by his afflicted friends, all +attempts to administer consolation were entirely fruitless, and he +expired on the fifth day after the death of his beloved mistress. +With his parting breath, he earnestly enjoined his surviving +companions, to deposit his body in the same grave, under the +venerable tree, which they had so recently made for the victim of his +temerity; and where the altar which had been raised to celebrate +their deliverance, would now mark their untimely tomb.</p> +<p>Having performed this painful duty, the surviving companions of +these unfortunate lovers fixed a large wooden cross over the grave, +on which they carved the inscription which Machin had composed to +record their melancholy adventures; and added a request, that if any +Christians should hereafter visit the spot, they might erect a church +in the same place, and dedicate it to Christ. Having thus +accomplished the dictates of friendship and humanity, the survivors +fitted out the boat, which had remained ashore from their first +landing, and put to sea with the intention of returning if possible +to England; but either from want of skill, or owing to the currents +and unfavourable winds, they likewise were driven on the coast of +Morocco, and rejoined their former shipmates in slavery among the +Moors.</p> +<p>This story is reported in a somewhat different manner by Galvano +already mentioned. According to him, one Macham, an Englishman, fled +from his country, about the year 1344, with a woman of whom he was +enamoured, meaning to retire into Spain; but the vessel in which the +lovers were embarked, was driven by a storm to the island of Madeira, +then altogether unknown and uninhabited. The port in which Macham +took shelter is still called Machico. His mistress being sea-sick, +Macham landed with her and some of the people, and the ship putting +to sea, deserted them. Oppressed with sickness and grief at seeing +herself in this hopeless state of exile, the lady died; and Macham, +who was extremely fond of her, constructed a chapel or hermitage +dedicated to Jesus the Saviour, in which he deposited her remains, +and engraved both their names, and the cause of their arrival, on a +rude monument which he erected to her memory. He afterwards +constructed a boat or canoe, which he hollowed out from the trunk of +a large tree, in which he, and those of his companions who had been +left on shore along with him, passed over to the opposite coast of +Africa, without the aid of oars, sails, or rudder. He was made +prisoner by the Moors, who presented him to their king, by whom he +was sent to the king of Castile.</p> +<p>Madeira, in the Portuguese language, or Madera in Spanish, +signifies <i>wood</i> ; and this island derived its name from the +immense quantity of thick and tall trees with which it was covered +when first discovered. One of the two capitanias, or provinces, into +which this island is divided, is named Machico, as is likewise the +principal town of that district, supposed to have originated from the +traditionary story of the misfortunes of Macham; the other capitania, +with its principal town, the capital of the island, is named Funchal, +from <i>Funcho</i> , the Portuguese term for Fennel, which abounds on +the adjoining rocks.</p> +<hr align="center" width="50%"> +<h2><a name="chapter1-22" id="chapter1-22">CHAPTER XXII.</a></h2> +<p align="center"><b> <i>Account of the Discovery and Conquest of the +Canary Islands</i> </b>[1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Glas. Disc. and Conqu. passim.</blockquote> +<p>The island of Nivaria, and others mentioned by Pliny, as known to +Juba king of Mauritania, were most probably Teneriffe and the other +Canary Islands; for Pliny notices that the summit of Nivaria was +generally covered with snow, which is frequently the case with the +peak of Teneriffe, and from this circumstance the name of Nivaria is +obviously derived. They appear likewise to have been known in the +middle ages to the Arabs of Morocco; as the Nubian geographer +mentions two islands, under the names of Mastahan and Lacos, as among +the six fortunate islands described by Ptolemy; these probably were +Lancerota and Fuertaventura, the latter of which may be seen in clear +weather from the nearest coast of Africa. All knowledge, however, of +these islands had ceased in Europe, till some time between the years +1326 and 1334, when a French ship happened to be driven among them by +a storm. Upon this discovery, Don Luis de la Cerda, count of +Claramonte, whose father, Don Alonzo, had been deprived of his right +to the inheritance of the crown of Castile, procured a grant of these +islands, with the title of king, from Pope Clement VI., on condition +of causing the gospel to be preached to the natives[2]. Don Luis +equipped a fleet from some of the ports of the Spanish kingdom of +Arragon, in order to take possession of his new kingdom, but the +design failed, and he died soon after.</p> +<blockquote>[2] The Author of the History of the Canaries, omits the +date of this grant. Clement VI. was Pope from 1343 to 1352, between +which years the papal grant must have been made.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In 1385, some Biscayners and inhabitants of Seville joined in the +equipment of five ships at Cadiz, in order to make descents for the +sake of plunder upon the Canary islands, and the adjacent coast of +Africa. After coasting along the African shore, they sailed +westwards, and fell in with the island now called Lancerota, where +they landed; and after a skirmish with the natives, plundered the +town, front which they carried off a large booty of goat-skins, +tallow, and sheep, and 170 of the inhabitants, whom they sold into +slavery. Among these were Guanareme, king of the island, and his wife +Tingua-faya. A similar expedition in quest of plunder and captives +was made to Lancerota from Seville in 1393.</p> +<p>In the year 1400, John de Betancour, a gentleman of Normandy, and +Gadifer de Sala, a person of considerable fortune, fitted out three +small vessels from Rochelle in France, containing 200 persons, +exclusive of the mariners, and made a descent upon Lancerota, where +they erected a fort at a harbour, to which they gave the name of +Rubicon. Leaving there a small garrison, they passed over to the +island of Fuertaventura; but being opposed by the natives, they +prudently retired without fighting. Betancour afterwards applied to +Don Henry III. king of Arragon, for assistance to enable him to make +a conquest of these islands; who made him a grant of them in due +form, with the title of king, and supplied him with money to defray +the expence of an armament to accomplish their subjugation. He easily +effected the conquest of Lancerota, and divided its lands among the +French and Spanish adventurers who had assisted him in the +expedition.</p> +<p>After the death of John de Betancour, his nephew, Mason de +Betancour, sold the Canary Islands to Don Henry de Guzman, Count of +Niebla; who afterwards conveyed them to Guillen Paraza, and from whom +they fell by inheritance to Diego de Herrera, who died in 1485. In +1487, the sovereignty was resumed by the crown of Castile, with the +title of a kingdom[3].</p> +<blockquote>[3] A more extended account or these islands will be +found in Part III. of this work.--E.</blockquote> +<h2><a name="part2" id="part2">PART II.</a></h2> +<h2>GENERAL VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, CHIEFLY OF DISCOVERY FROM THE ERA OF +DON HENRY, PRINCE OF PORTUGAL, IN 1412, TO THAT OF GEORGE III. IN +1760.</h2> +<h2><a name="book2-1" id="book2-1">BOOK I.</a></h2> + +<p><b>HISTORY OF THE DISCOVERIES OF THE PORTUGUESE ALONG THE COAST OF AFRICA, AND OF THEIR DISCOVERY OF AND CONQUESTS IN INDIA, FROM 1412 TO 1505</b> + +<h2><a name="chapter2-1" id="chapter2-1">CHAPTER I.</a></h2> +<p><b> <i>Summary Deduction of the Discoveries of the World, from +their first Original, to the year 1555, by Antonio +Galvano</i> </b>[1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Oxford Collection, II. 353. Clarke, Progr. of Marit. +Disc. I. App 1.</blockquote> +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> +<p>This treatise was written in the Portuguese language, by Antonio +Galvano, who had been governor of Ternate, the chief of the Molucca +Islands, and was first translated into English by the celebrated +Richard Hakluyt, who dedicated it to Sir Robert Cecil, Principal +Secretary of State to Queen Elizabeth. It was afterwards inserted in +Osbornes, or the Oxford Collection of Voyages and Travels, and forms +an appendix to the first volume of Clarke's Progress of Maritime +Discovery; and from these sources the present edition has been +carefully prepared. Of Richard Hakluyt, the original translator, the +following notice is worthy of being preserved. "The <i>great</i> +Richard Hakluyt was descended from an ancient family at Yetton in +Herefordshire, and was educated at Westminster School, from whence he +was elected a student of Christ Church, in the University of Oxford, +where he took the degrees of Bachelor and Master of Arts. Entering +into holy orders, he was first made a prebendary of Bristol, and +afterwards of Westminster, and rector of Witheringset in Suffolk. +Besides this translation, he illustrated the eight decades of Peter +Martyr Angelericus <i>de Novo Orbe</i> with curious notes. He also +translated from the Portuguese, <i>Virginia</i> , richly valued by the +description of Florida, her next neighbour; and wrote notes of +certain commodities, in good request in the East Indies, Molucca, and +China; but what has most deservedly perpetuated his name, is his +great pains, and judgment, in collecting <i>English Voyages, +Navigations, Trafficks, and Discoveries</i> [2]."</p> +<blockquote>[2] Oxford Collection, I. viii.</blockquote> +<p>Both from the nature of this treatise on the origin and progress +of maritime discovery, and from respect to the memory of Hakluyt, the +father of our English collections of voyages and travels, it has been +selected for insertion in this place, as an appropriate introduction +to the <i>Second Part</i> of our arrangement; because its author may +be considered as almost an original authority for the early +discoveries of the Portuguese and Spaniards. Although it may be +considered in some measure as not precisely conformable with our +plan, yet one portion of this summary is directly in point; and, the +whole being curious, and in no respect tedious, it is here given +entire; changing the antiquated English of Hakluyt into modern +language. Although said in its title to extend to the year 1555, the +chronological series of Galvano properly ends in 1545; and the only +subsequent incident, is a very slight notice of the voyage of Sir +Hugh Willoughby and Richard Chancellor, towards the White Sea, in +1553. In the original translation, and in the Oxford collection, this +treatise is preceded by a dedication from Hakluyt to <i>Sir Robert +Cecil</i> ; and another dedication from the Portuguese editor, Francis +de Sousa Tavares, to Don John, Duke of Aveira; both of which are here +omitted, as having no directly useful tendency, except so much of the +latter as refers to the history of Galvano. Besides the present +discourse, Galvano composed a history of the Molucca Islands, of +which he had been governor, which work has unfortunately been lost, +or at least is unknown in this country. He is likewise said to have +published at Lisbon in 1555, an account of the different routes by +which the merchandize of India had been conveyed into Europe at +different periods.</p> +<p>Antonio Galvano, the author of the following Summary of the +Discoveries of the World, was a Portuguese gentleman, who was several +years governor of the Molucca Islands, and performed signal service +to his country in that honourable station, by dissipating a +formidable league, which had been entered into by the native princes +of these islands, for the expulsion of the Portuguese; and, though +possessing very inadequate resources for the protection of so +important a commercial establishment, he confirmed and extended the +dominion and influence of Portugal in these islands. When first +appointed to the command in the Moluccas, Galvano carried with him a +private fortune of 10,000 crusadoes, all of which he expended in the +public service. Though he added a clear revenue to the crown of +500,000 crusadoes, in consequence of his successful, vigilant, and +pure administration, he was so zealous in patronizing the propagation +of the Christian religion among the islands belonging to his +government, that, on his return to Lisbon in 1540, he was reduced to +such extreme poverty, as to be under the necessity of taking refuge +in the <i>hospital</i> , where he died in 1557.</p> +<p>Francis de Sousa Tavares, the original Portuguese editor of this +treatise, in a dedication of the work to Don John Duke of Aveira, +gives the following account of the work, and of its author:</p> +<p>"Antonio Galvano, when on his death-bed, left me this book, along +with his other papers, by his testament; and, as I am certain he +designed that it should be presented to your highness, I have thought +proper to fulfil his intentions in that respect. It was fitting that +this treatise should be written by a native of Portugal, as it treats +of the various ways in which the spiceries and other commodities of +India were formerly brought to our part of the world, and gives an +account of all the navigations and discoveries of the ancients and +moderns, in both of which things the Portuguese have laboured above +all other nations. In this treatise, and in nine or ten other books, +concerning India and the Moluccas, this true Portuguese described the +unfortunate and sorrowful times, before our day, in which he had been +engaged. When he was appointed to the command of the islands and +fortresses of the Moluccas, all the kings and chiefs of these islands +had agreed to make war against our nation, and to drive them out of +the country. Yet he fought against them all in Tidore, though he had +only 130 Portuguese soldiers, against their whole united power, and +gave them a signal overthrow, in which their king, and one Ternate, +the principal author of the war, were both slain; besides which, he +conquered their fortresses, and compelled them all to submit to the +obedience and service of our sovereign. In this war, two great and +wonderful events took place: the <i>first</i> , that all the chiefs and +kings of these islands united against us, who used ever to be at +variance among themselves; and <i>secondly</i> , that Galvano, with +only the ordinary garrison, should obtain the victory against so +great a combination. It has happened to other governors of the +Moluccas, with an extraordinary number of European troops, and +assisted by all the other native lords, to go to war with one king +only, and to come back with loss; whereas he, with a small and +inadequate force, successfully waged war against a confederacy of all +the lords of these islands.</p> +<p>"Three brilliant exploits have been performed in India, beyond all +others. The capture of Muar by Emanuel Falcon; the winning of Bitam +by Peter Mascarenas; and this victory obtained by Galvano. Besides +this great exploit, his father and four brothers were all slain in +the kings service; and he, being the last of his lineage, carried +with him about 10,000 crusadoes into the Moluccas, all of which he +expended in propagating our holy faith, and in preserving these +valuable islands, using all his power and influence to bring all the +cloves into the kings coffers, by which he added 500,000 crusadoes +yearly to the royal revenue. Had he gathered cloves on his own +account, as other governors of the Moluccas have done, he might have +come home very rich; but returning poor, and, in the simplicity of +his nature, expecting to be rewarded for his honest services, he was +entirely neglected, and had to take refuge in an hospital, where he +remained seventeen years, till his death, when he was 2000 crusadoes +in debt; partly for demands upon him from India, and partly borrowed +from his friends to maintain him in the hospital. After his death, +the cardinal desired me to give his other writings to Damien de Goes, +promising to content me for them, which otherwise I should not have +done; yet hitherto I have not received any thing with which to +execute his will. Yet, for all this, as in the prosperity of his +victories he made no boast, so, in his adversity, he always preserved +an unabated spirit. Your grace, therefore, may perceive, that this +treatise, and his other works, were written under great afflictions; +yet was he not willing to use the remedy of Zelim, the son of the +great Turk Mahomet, who took Constantinople, and died in Rome, who +used to make himself drunk, that he might forget the high estate from +which he had fallen. Neither would he follow the councils of many of +his friends, in withdrawing from the kingdom; saying, he had rather +resemble Timocles the Athenian, than the Roman Coriolanus. For all +which, this treatise ought to receive favour from your grace, +allowing for any oversights of the author, if there be any such, as I +am unfit to detect or correct then. God prosper your grace with long +life, and increase of honour."</p> +<p>SECTION I.</p> +<p> <i>Epitome of the Ancient and Modern Discoveries of the World, +chiefly by means of Navigation, from the Flood to the close of the +Fifteenth Century.</i> </p> +<p>When I first desired to compose an account of the ancient and +modern discoveries by sea and land, with their true dates and +situations, these two principal circumstances seemed involved in such +difficulty and confusion, that I had almost desisted from the +attempt. Even in regard to the date of the flood, the Hebrews reckon +that event to have happened 1656 years after the creation: while the +seventy interpreters make it 2242; and St Augustine extends the time +to 2262 years[1]. In regard to geographical situations, likewise, +there are many differences; for there never sailed ten or an hundred +pilots in one fleet, but they made their reckonings in almost as many +different longitudes. But considering that all these difficulties +might be surmounted, by just comparison, and the exercise of +judgment, I at length resolved to persist in my undertaking.</p> +<blockquote>[1] August. de Civit. Dic. I. 15. c. 20.</blockquote> +<p>Some allege that the world was fully known in ancient times; for, +as it was peopled and inhabited, it must have been navigable and +frequented; and because the ancient people were of longer lives, and +had all one law and one language, they could not fail to be +acquainted with the whole world. Others again believe, that though +the world might be once universally known by mankind, yet, by the +wickedness of man, and the want of justice among nations, that +knowledge has been lost. But as all the most important discoveries +have been made by sea, and that chiefly in our own times, it were +desirable to learn who were the first discoverers since the flood. +Some allege the Greeks, others the Phenicians, while others say the +Egyptians. The inhabitants of India, on the contrary, pretend that +they were the first navigators; particularly the Tabencos, whom we +now call Chinese; and allege in proof of this, that they were lords +of all the Indies, even to Cape Bona Speranca, and the island of St +Lawrence[2], which is inhabited by them; as likewise all the coasts +of the Indian seas, also the Javas, Timores, Celebes, Macassar, the +Moluccas, Borneo, Mindanao, Luçones, Lequeos, the Japans, and +many other islands; also the countries of Cochin-China, Laos, +Bramas[3], Pegu, Arracones[4], till you come quite to Bengala. +Besides all these, New Spain, Peru, Brazil, the Antilles, and all the +adjoining lands, are possessed by the same race, as appears by the +fashions and manners both of the men and women, who have small eyes, +flat noses, with other proportions resembling the Chinese. And to +this day, many of these islands and countries are called by such +names, as Bato-China, Bocho-China, and the like, indicating the +countries of, or belonging to China.</p> +<blockquote>[2] The Cape of Good Hope, and the island of +Madagascar--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] Birmahs</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] Arracan</blockquote> +<p>It farther appears, that the ark of Noah rested upon the north +part of the mountains of Armenia, in 40 degrees of latitude or +upwards; and that Scythia, being a high land, and the first that +appeared out of the universal deluge, was first peopled. And as the +province or country of the Tabencos, or Chinese, is one of the +chiefest of all Tartary, its inhabitants may be considered as the +most ancient nation, and the oldest navigators. Their seas are calm; +and, as lying between the tropics, their days and nights are nearly +equal, and their seasons differ little in temperature; and as no +outrageous winds swell their seas into storms, navigation among them +is safe and easy. Their small barks called catamorans have only a +large bough of a tree set up in the middle, serving as mast and sail; +the master steers only with an oar, and the passengers sit on poles +fastened to the bark.</p> +<p>It is said that the people of China were anciently lords of almost +all Scythia, and were in use to sail along that coast, which reaches +from east to west, in seventy degrees of north latitude. Cornelius +Nepos says, that, in the time when Metellus, the colleague of +Afranius, was proconsul of Gaul, the king of the Suevi sent to him +certain Indians, who came to his country in a ship by the north and +the flats of Germany[5]. These people probably came from China; as in +that country, in the latitudes of 20, 30, and 40 degrees, they have +strong and well-fastened ships, which can bear the seas and encounter +the severity of the northern climate. Cambaia also has ships, and its +inhabitants are said to have long used the seas; but it is not likely +they should have gone to Gaul; for they only trade to Cairo, and are +indeed a people of little trade and less clothing.</p> +<blockquote>[5] Pompon. Mela, I. 3. Plin. I. 2. c. 67.</blockquote> +<p>Those who escaped from the flood kept the hills, not daring for a +long time to descend into the plains and low countries; and Nimrod, +an hundred and thirty years afterwards, built the tower of Babel, +intending it as a refuge in case of any future deluge[6]. Upon the +whole, it seems probable that the inhabitants of China and the east +were the first sailors; though others think the inhabitants of the +west, particularly of Syria, were the first to use the sea[7]. This +contest about the antiquity of navigation, I leave to the Scythians +and Egyptians, who each challenge the honour to themselves. But +leaving all contested points in this matter, I now apply to my +proposed deduction, resting only upon what has been recorded in +authentic histories. Ancient history says that Tubal, in the hundred +and forty-third year after the flood, came by sea into Spain[8]; +whence it appears that in these early times navigation was usual from +Ethiopia to our parts of western Europe. It is also said, that +Semiramis invaded the country on the river Indus, whence the Indians +derive their name, and gave battle to king Stabrobates, in which he +lost a thousand ships[9]; by which it clearly appears there were then +many ships in those parts; and that the seas were much +frequented.</p> +<blockquote>[6] Joseph: Ant. Jud. I. 1. c. 5.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] Justin, I. 1.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[8] Berosus.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[9] Diod. Sic. I. 2. c. 5.</blockquote> +<p>In the six hundred and fiftieth year after the flood, there was a +king in Spain named Hesperus[10]; and Gonsalvo Fernandez de Oviedo, +the chronicler of antiquities[11], affirms that he made discoveries +by sea as far as Cape Verde and the Isle of St Thomas, of which he +was prince, and that in his time the islands of the West Indies were +discovered, and called the Hesperides, after his name. He alleges +many reasons in proof of this assertion, and even says particularly, +that these early navigators sailed in forty days from Cape Verde to +these islands. Others say, that the islands of St Thomas and de +Principe are the Hesperides, and not the Antilles; which is the more +probable, as these ancient navigators only sailed along the coast, +not daring to pass through the main ocean, having no compass, nor any +means of taking altitudes for their guidance. It is not to be denied +that many countries, islands, capes, isthmuses, and points, the names +of which are found in histories, are now unknown; because, in course +of ages, the force of the waters has wasted and consumed them, and +has separated countries from each other formerly joined, both in +Europe, Asia, Africa, New Spain, Peru, and other places.</p> +<blockquote>[10] Berosus.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[11] Gons. Fern. I. 2. c. 3. Plin. I. 6. c. +31.</blockquote> +<p>In his dialogue called Timaeus, Plato says there was anciently a +great country and large islands in the Atlantic, named Atlantides, +greater than Europe and Africa, and that the kings of these parts +were lords of a great part of Spain; but that, by the force of great +tempests, the sea had overflowed the country, leaving nothing but +banks of mud and gravel, so that no ships could pass that way for +long after. It is also recorded by Pliny[12], that close by the +island of Cadiz, there was a well inhabited island called +Aphrodisias, towards the Straits of Gibraltar, abounding in gardens +and orchards; but we have now no knowledge of this island, except +from the bare mention of it in ancient authors. The Isle of Cadiz is +said to have been anciently so large as to join the continent of +Spain. The Açores are held to have been a continuation of the +mountains of Estrella, which join the sea coast beside the town of +Cintra; and the Sierra Verde, or Green-mountains, which reach the +coast, near the city of <i>Sasin</i> in the land of <i>Cucu</i> , or the +island of Moudim in which Algarbe is situated, are supposed to have +reached to Porto Santo and Madeira. For it is considered as an +indubitable fact, that all islands derive their roots from the firm +land or continent, however distant, as otherwise they could not stand +firm. Other authors say, that from Spain to Ceuta in Barbary, people +sometimes travelled on foot on dry land; that the islands of Corsica +and Sardinia were once joined; that Sicily was united with Italy, and +the Negropont with Greece[13]. We read also of the hulls of ships, +iron anchors, and other remnants of shipping, having been found on +the mountains of Susa, far inland, where there is now no appearance +of the sea having ever been. Many writers affirm, that in India and +Malabar, which now abounds in people, the sea once reached the foot +of the mountains; and that Cape Comorin and the island of Ceylon were +once united; also that Sumatra once joined with Malacca, by the +shoals of Caypasia; and not far from thence there is a small island +which, only a few years ago, was joined to the opposite coast. +Ptolemy advances the point of Malacca three or four degrees to the +south of the line; whereas its most southerly point, now called +Jentana, is in one degree of north latitude, by which people pass +daily the straits of Cincapura to the coasts of Siam and China; and +the island of Aynan is said to have formerly joined the land of +China; the southern extremity of which Ptolomey placed far to the +south of the line, though it now only reaches to twentieth degree of +north latitude.</p> +<blockquote>[12] Plin. I. 4. c. 22.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[13] Eratosth. ap. Strab. I. 1. p. 26.</blockquote> +<p>It may even have been that Malacca and China, as Ptolemy sets +forth, extended beyond the line to the south; as Malacca might join +with the land called Jentana, and the islands of Bintam, Banca, and +Salistres, and the land might be all slime and ouze; likewise China +might be united with the Luçones, Borneo, Lequeuo, Mindanao, +and others. Some are of opinion, that Sumatra joined with Java, +across what is now the Straits of Sunda; and that Java also joined +with the islands of Bali, Anjave, Cambava, Solor, Hogalcao, Maulva, +Vintara, Rosalaguin, and others in that range, all of which are so +near as to appear continuous, when seen from a small distance; and +they still are so near together, that in passing through the channels +which divide them, the boughs of the trees on each side may be +touched by the hands. It is not long since several of the islands of +Banda in the east were drowned by the sea overflowing them; and in +China, about 180 miles of firm land are said to have become a lake. +All these things are to be considered as coming within the limits of +probability, especially when we take into account what has been +related of similar events by Ptolemy and others, but which I here +omit to return to my subject.</p> +<p>About 800 years after the deluge, the city of Troy was built by +the Dardanians; and even before that time, spices, drugs, and many +other kinds of merchandize, which were then more abundant than now, +were brought from India to Europe, by the Red Sea. Hence, if credit +can be given to these accounts, we may conclude, that the sea of old +was much frequented, those of the east bringing their commodities to +the haven of Arsinoe in the Arabian Gulf, now called Suez[14], in +lat. 30° N. and at the northern extremity of the Arabian Gulf; +from whence the goods were carried by caravans, upon camels, asses, +and mules, to Cassou, a city on the coast of the Levant sea, in lat. +32° N. Allowing seventeen leagues and a half to every degree of +latitude, these two cities are said to have been 35 leagues, or +105[15] miles distant from each other. On account of the heat, these +caravans, or great companies of carriers, travelled only in the +night, directing themselves by the stars, and by land-marks fixed in +the ground for that purpose. But finding this journey attended with +many inconveniencies, the course was twice altered in search of a +more commodious route[16]. About nine hundred years after the flood, +and previous to the destruction of Troy, Egypt was ruled by a king +named Sesostris, who caused a canal to be cut from the Red Sea to +that arm of the Nile which flows past the city of Heroum, that ships +might pass and repass between India and Europe, to avoid the expence +and trouble of carrying merchandize by land across the isthmus of +Suez; and Sesostris had large caraks or ships built for this +purpose[17]. This enterprize, however, did not completely succeed; +for, if it had, Africa would have been converted into an island, as +there are even now only twenty leagues or sixty miles of land between +the Red Sea and the Mediterranean.</p> +<blockquote>[14] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[15] The miles here used are three to the league; but the +league of the text is nearly equal to four English miles, and the +assumed distance of these two ports 140 of our miles--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[16] Strab. I. 17. p. 560.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[17] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.</blockquote> +<p>About this time the Grecians gathered a fleet and army, called the +Argonautic expedition, under the command of Jason and Alceus[18]. +Some say they sailed from Crete, and others from Greece; but they +passed through the Propontis and the <i>sleeve</i> of St George into +the Euxine, where some of the vessels perished, and Jason returned +back to Greece. Alceus reported that he was driven by a tempest to +the Palus Maeotis, where he was deserted by all his company; and +those who escaped had to travel by land to the German ocean, where +they procured shipping; and sailing past the coasts of Saxony, +Friesland, Holland, Flanders, France, Spain, and Italy, returned to +the Peloponnesus and Greece, after discovering a great portion of the +coast of Europe.</p> +<blockquote>[18] Diod. Sic. I. 4. c. 4.</blockquote> +<p>Strabo, on the authority of Aristonicus the grammarian, says, that +king Menelaus, after the destruction of Troy, sailed from the Grecian +sea to the Atlantic, coasted along Africa and Guinea, doubled the +Cape Bona Sperança, and arrived in India[19]; concerning which +voyage many other particulars might be collected from the writings of +the ancients. This Mediterranean Sea was sometimes called the +Adriatic, the Aegean, and the Herculean Sea; and had other names, +according to the lands, coasts, and islands, which it skirted, till, +running through the Straits of Hercules, between Spain and Africa, it +communicated with the great Atlantic Ocean. Thirteen hundred years +after the flood, Solomon caused a navy to be constructed at +Ezion-geber on the Red Sea, which sailed to Tharsis and Ophir, which +some believe to have been islands in the East Indies. This fleet was +three years on its voyage, and on its return brought gold, silver, +cypress-wood, and other commodities[20]. The islands to which the +navy of Solomon traded were probably those we now call the +Luçones, the Lequeos, and China; for we know of few other +places whence some of the things mentioned as forming their cargoes +can be had, or where navigation has been so long practised.</p> +<blockquote>[19] Strab. I. 1. p. 26.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[20] Kings, I. 9. Chron. II. 8.</blockquote> +<p>Necho, one of the kings of Egypt, was desirous to have joined the +Red Sea with the Mediterranean, and is said in history to have +commanded some Phenicians to sail from the Red Sea by the Straits of +Mecca, and to endeavour to return to Egypt by the Mediterranean[21]. +This they accomplished, and sailed along the coast of Melinda, +Quiloa, and Sofala, till they reached the Cape of Good Hope, which +they doubled; and, continuing their course to the north, they sailed +along the coast of Guinea all the way to the Mediterranean, and +returned to Egypt after two years absence, being the first who had +circumnavigated Africa.</p> +<blockquote>[21] Herodot. I. 4.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 590 before the Incarnation, a fleet belonging to +Carthaginian merchants sailed from Cadiz through the ocean, to the +west, in search of land[22]. They proceeded so far that they came to +the islands now called the Antilles, and to New Spain[23]. This is +given on the authority of Gonzalo Fernandez de Oviedo, in his General +History, who says that these countries were then discovered; and that +Christopher Columbus, by his voyages in after times, only acquired +more exact knowledge of them, and hath left us a more precise notice +of their situation, and of the way to them. But all those historians +who formerly wrote concerning the Antilles, as of doubtful and +uncertain existence, now plainly allow them to be the same with New +Spain and the West Indies. In the year 520 before Christ, Cambyses, +king of Persia, conquered Egypt, and was succeeded by Darius, the son +of Hystaspes. This latter prince determined upon completing the +projects of Sesostris and Necho, by digging a canal between the Red +Sea and the Nile: But, being assured that the Red Sea was higher than +the Nile, and that its salt water would overflow and ruin the whole +land of Egypt, he abandoned his purpose, lest that fine province +should be destroyed by famine and the want of fresh water[24]; for +the fresh water of the Nile overflows the whole country, and the +inhabitants have no other water to drink.</p> +<blockquote>[22] Arist. de Mirand.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[23] Gonz. Fern. Ovied. I. 2. c. 3.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[24] Plin. I. 9. c. 58. de Maribus Nili.</blockquote> +<p>It may not be too great a digression from the subject, to say a +few words concerning Egypt. The natives allege that they have in +their country certain animals, of which one half of their bodies seem +earth, and the other like rats, one species of which keeps +continually in the water, while another species lives on the land. In +my opinion, it is these animals which break the serpents eggs, of +which there are many in the Nile, but which serpents are also called +crocodiles. It is said, that in ancient times these animals were +inchanted, so that they could not do harm to any one: But since they +have been freed from the power of inchantment, by the arts and +learning of the Egyptians decaying, they have done much hurt, by +killing people, wild beasts, and cattle, more especially those which +live in the water and come often on land. Those that live continually +on the land become strongly venomous[25]. The people beyond the city +of Cairo used to catch these animals, and even to eat them, setting +up their heads on the walls of the city. Concerning these crocodiles, +it is related[26] that they often lie along the shores of the river +with their mouths wide open; on which occasion, certain white birds, +little larger than our thrushes, fly into the mouths of the +crocodiles, and pick out the filth from between his teeth, to the +great delight of the crocodile; which, however, would surely close +his mouth and devour the bird, had not nature provided the bird with +a sharp sting, growing from the top of his head, which pricks the +roof of the crocodiles mouth, and forces him to gape, so that the +bird flies away unhurt. In this manner, by means of a succession of +these birds, the crocodiles get their teeth cleansed. In this same +river, there are many beasts resembling horses; and upon the land, +there are certain birds like our cranes, which continually make war +upon the serpents, which come thither out of Arabia: Which birds, and +likewise the rats, which eat the eggs of the crocodiles, are held in +great reverence and estimation, by the Egyptians.</p> +<blockquote>[25] Joan. Leo Afric. I. 9. de Nilo.--Our author has got +into a strange dilemma, by confounding crocodiles and serpents under +one denomination. --E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[26] Plin. and Leo, ub. cit.</blockquote> +<p>But now, to return to my subject of discoveries. In the year 485 +before Christ, Xerxes, king of Persia, sent his nephew Sataspis to +discover India; who sailed from the Mediterranean through the Straits +of Hercules, and passed the promontory of Africa, which we now call +the Cape of Good Hope; but, wearying of the length of the voyage, he +returned back again, as Bartholomew Diaz did in our days[27]. In 443 +A. C. Hamilco and Hanno, two Carthaginian commanders who governed +that part of Spain now called Andalusia, sailed from thence with two +squadrons. Hamilco, sailing towards the north, discovered the coasts +of Spain, France, England, Flanders, and Germany; and some allege +that he sailed to Gothland, and even to Thule or Iceland, standing +under the Arctic circle, in 64 degrees north, and continued his +voyage during two years, till he came to that northern island, where +the day in June continues for twenty-two hours, and the nights in +December are of a similar length; on account of which it is there +wonderfully cold. His brother, Hanno, took his course to the south, +along the coast of Africa and Guinea, and discovered the Fortunate +Islands, now the Canaries, and the Orcades, Hesperides, and Gorgades, +now called the Cape de Verde islands. Proceeding onwards, Hanno +doubled the Cape of Good Hope, and went along the eastern coast of +Africa to another cape, called Aromaticum, now called Gardafu, and +thence to the coast of Arabia, and was five years employed in this +voyage before his return to Spain[28]. Others allege, that Hanno +proceeded no farther than Sierra Leona, which he colonized, and +afterwards discovered as far as the equinoctial line; but it would +rather appear, from the length of time he employed, that he must have +accomplished the more extended navigation.</p> +<blockquote>[27] Plin. I. 2. c. 67.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[28] Plin. I. 6. c. 31. This subject will be discussed in +the <i>Fifth</i> Part of our work; being much too extensive to admit +of elucidation in a note.--E.</blockquote> +<p>It is reported that the inhabitants of the country at the Cape of +Good Hope are great witches, and by inchantment bring certain +serpents so much under command, that they preserve their churches, +churchyards, gardens, orchards, barns, and cattle, both from wild +beasts and thieves. When these serpents see any person doing or +intending to do harm, they wind themselves in such a manner around +them as to make them prisoners, and then command their young ones to +give notice to their masters, that they may come and secure the +thieves. But if the thieves be numerous, or the wild beasts of too +much strength, so that the serpents dare not encounter them, they go +to their masters house, and if it happen to be in the night, they +give many strokes with their tails, so as to awaken their masters, +that they may provide for their defence[29].</p> +<blockquote>[29] Hasty readers will have the justice to give the +honour of this story to Galvano.--E.</blockquote> +<p>A certain Italian, named Aloisius Cadamosta, relates, that when he +was upon the discovery of Guinea, and resided in the house of +Bisboral, the grandson of king Budomel, he heard one night, when in +bed, a great noise and many blows given about the house, upon which +Bisboral arose and went out; and, upon his return, Cadamosta demanded +of him where he had been, and he answered that he had been with his +cobras or snakes, which called him[30]. In the Indies there are many +snakes, and some of them very full of poison; yet the Indians carry +them about their necks, and put them in their bosoms, and under their +arms, without fear or injury; and at certain sounds, the snakes will +dance, and do many other strange things at command.</p> +<blockquote>[30] This story will be found hereafter very differently +related by Cada Mosto himself, but with a sufficient spice of the +marvellous.--E.</blockquote> +<p>I was informed by a certain Portuguese, who had been beyond the +Cape of Good Hope, towards Sofala, Quiloa, and Melinda, that there +were certain birds in that country, which would come to the negroes +on a call, and as the negroes moved on through the woods, the birds +would do the same from tree to tree, till at length they would alight +on a tree whence they would not remove: And, on examining that tree, +the negroes were sure to find wax and honey, but knew not whether it +grew there naturally or not[31]. In the same country, they find much +wax and honey in ant-holes, made by the ants, but somewhat bitter. In +the seas of that coast, there are certain fish, known to the +fishermen, which commonly swim upright in the water, having the faces +and breasts of women[32].</p> +<blockquote>[31] The Honey-guide, or Cuculus Indicator, will be +noticed more particularly in the Travels through the Colony of the +Cape.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[32] The Philosophers of the <i>nineteenth</i> century +have <i>fortunately</i> rediscovered the <i>Mermaid</i> in the north of +Scotland! Hitherto, wonderful things used to be confined to barbarous +regions and ignorant ages.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 355 before Christ, the Spaniards are said to have gone +by sea to the flats of India, Arabia, and the adjoining coasts, to +which they carried various merchandizes in great ships; and sailing +to the north- west they came to certain flats which are covered by +the tide, and left bare by the ebb, where they caught +many <i>tunnies</i> of great size; which fishing turned out to their +great profit, as they were very abundant and much esteemed[33].</p> +<blockquote>[33] Arist. de Mirand. Strabo, I. 2. p. 68.</blockquote> +<p>Alexander, who flourished 324 years before Christ, travelled from +Europe into Asia and Africa, passed through Armenia, Assyria, Persia, +and Bactria; whence he descended by the mountains of Imaus and the +vallies of Parapomissus, into India, and prepared a navy on the river +Indus, with which he passed into the ocean. He there turned by the +lands of Gedrosia, Caramania, and Persia, to the great city of +Babylon, leaving the command of his fleet to Onesicratus and +Nearchus, who sailed through the straits of the Persian Sea and up +the river Euphrates, discovering the whole coast between the Indus +and that river.</p> +<p>After the death of Alexander, Ptolemy became king of Egypt, who by +some was reputed to have been the bastard son of Philip, the father +of Alexander: He, imitating the before named kings, Sesostris and +Darius, caused dig a canal from the branch of the Nile which passed +by Pelusium, now by the city of Damieta[34]. This canal of Ptolemy +was an hundred feet broad and thirty feet deep, and extended ten or +twelve leagues in length, till it came to the <i>bitter wells</i> . He +meant to have continued it to the Red Sea; but desisted on the idea +that the Red Sea was three cubits higher than the land of Egypt, and +would have overflowed all the country, to its entire ruin.</p> +<blockquote>[34] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.</blockquote> +<p>Ptolemy Philadelphus, in the year 277 before Christ, changed the +direction of the Indian traffic. The goods from Europe, by his +orders, were carried up the Nile from Alexandria to the city of +Coptus, and conveyed across the desert from thence to the sea-port of +Myos-Hormos on the Red-sea[35]. To avoid the excessive heat, the +caravans travelled only in the night, directing their course by the +stars; and water being very scarce in the desert, they had to carry a +sufficient quantity with them for the journey. Afterwards, to avoid +this trouble, deep wells were dug at certain intervals; and in other +places large cisterns or reservoirs were constructed for the +reception of rain water. Still later, in consideration of the dangers +attending the port of Myos-Hormos, on account of flats and islands, +Philadelphus sent an army into Troglodytica, where he constructed a +haven called Berenice, in which the ships engaged in the Indian +commerce took shelter, as a place of greater security. From thence +the goods were transported to the city of Coptus, and afterwards to +Alexandria, which became rich and famous, through its trade with +India, beyond any other city in the world; insomuch that it is +asserted that the customs of Alexandria yielded every year to Ptolemy +Auletes, the father of Cleopatra, seven millions and a half of gold, +though the traffic had then scarcely subsisted in that direction for +twenty years[36]. After the reduction of Egypt and Alexandria under +the power of the Romans, the customs are said to have advanced to +double that amount; and the trade was so great, that 120 ships used +to be sent yearly from Myos-Hormos to India. The ships set sail every +year from Myos-Hormos about the middle of July, and returned back +within the year[37]. The merchandize they carried amounted to the +value of one million two hundred thousand crowns; and the returns +were an hundred for one; and through this prodigious increase of +wealth, the matrons and noble ladies of those days in Alexandria, +were exceedingly profuse in decorating themselves with purple, +pearls, and precious stones, and in the use of musk, amber, and other +rich perfumes of various kinds; of all which the historians and other +writers of that age treat at great length[38].</p> +<blockquote>[35] Strabo, I. 17. p. 560, 561.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[36] Strab. I. 17. p. 549.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[37] Plin. I. 6. c. 23.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[38] Id. I. 12. c. 18.</blockquote> +<p>Pliny[39], on the authority of Cornelius Nepos, says that one +Eudoxus, flying from Ptolemy Lathyrus, passed by sea through the gulf +of Arabia, and sailing along the eastern coast of Africa, doubled the +cape of Bona Sperança arrived by the Atlantic at Cadiz; and it +would appear that this navigation was as often used in those days as +it now is. Caius Caesar, the son of Augustus, going into Arabia, +found in the Red Sea certain pieces of the ships which had gone +thither from Spain.</p> +<blockquote>[39] Id. I. 2. c. 67.</blockquote> +<p>Long after these days it was usual to pass to India by land. This +was done by the kings of the Sogdians, the princes of Bactria, and +other famous captains and many merchants, who travelled thither and +into Scythia by land. Marcus Paulus Venetus writes largely of these +countries; and though his book at first was reckoned fabulous, yet +what he and others have reported is now found true, by the experience +of travellers, and merchants who have since been to the same +parts.</p> +<p>It is reported that the Romans sent an army by sea to India, +against the great khan of Cathaia, 200 years before the Incarnation; +which, passing through the Straits of Gibraltar, and running to the +north-west, found ten islands opposite to Cape Finisterre; producing +large quantities of tin, which perhaps may have been those afterwards +called the Cassiterides. Being come to 50 degrees of latitude, they +found a strait passing to the west, through which they arrived in +India, and gave battle to the king of Cathaia, after which they +returned to Rome. Whether this story may appear possible or not, true +or false, I can only say that I give it as I found it written in the +histories of these times.</p> +<p>In the year 100 after the incarnation of Christ, the emperor +Trajan fitted out a fleet on the rivers Tigris and Euphrates, whence +he sailed to the islands of Zyzara; and passing the straits of +Persia, entered into the ocean, by which he sailed along the coast to +India, till he came to the place where Alexander had been. He there +took some ships which came from Bengal, and learned the state of the +country from the mariners. But being in years, and weary of the sea, +and because he found it difficult to procure necessaries for his +army, he returned back to Assyria[40].</p> +<blockquote>[40] Ziphilin. in vit. Traj.</blockquote> +<p>After the Romans had subdued most part of the world, many notable +discoveries were made. But then came the Goths, Moors, and other +barbarous nations, who destroyed all A.D. 412, the Goths took the +city of Rome. Thereafter the Vandals went out of Spain, and conquered +Africa. In 450, Attila destroyed many cities in Italy, at which time +Venice began; and in this age the Franks and Vandals entered into +France. In 474, the empire of Rome was lost, and fell from the Romans +to the Goths. In 560, the Lombards came into Italy. About this time +the sect of the Arians prevailed greatly, and Merlin the English +prophet flourished. In 611, the Mahometan sect sprung up, and the +Moresco government, which invaded both Africa and Spain. By this it +may appear that all the world was in a state of war, and all places +so very tumultuous, that traffic and merchandize ceased, no nation +daring to trade with another by sea or land; nothing remaining +stedfast, neither in kingdoms, signories, religions, laws, arts, +sciences, or navigation. Even the records and writings of these +things were burnt and destroyed by the barbarous power of the Goths, +who proposed to themselves to begin a new world, and to root out the +memory and knowledge of all other nations.</p> +<p>Those who succeeded in the government of Europe, perceiving the +great losses of the Christian world by want of traffic and the +stoppage of navigation, began to devise a way of passing into India, +quite different from the route of the Nile and the Red Sea, and much +longer and more costly[41]. The goods of India were brought up the +river Indus as far as it was navigable. They were then carried by +land in caravans through the country of Parapomissus into the +province of Bactria, and shipped on the river Oxus, which falls into +the Caspian, and thence across that sea to the haven of Citracan, or +Astracan, on the river Rha, or Volga. Thence up that river, and to +the city of Novogrod, in the province of Resan, which now belongs to +the great duke of Muscovy, in lat. 54° N. The goods were carried +thence overland to the province of Sarmatia and the river Tanais or +Don, which is the division between Europe and Asia. Being there +loaded in barks, they were carried down the stream of that river into +the Paulus Maeotis to the city of Caffa, anciently called Theodosia, +which then belonged to the Genoese, who came thither by sea +in <i>galliasses</i> , or great ships, and distributed Indian +commodities through Europe.</p> +<blockquote>[41] Ramusio, V. f. 372. p. 2</blockquote> +<p>In the reign of Commodita, emperor of Armenia, a better course was +provided for this traffic: The goods being transported by land from +the Caspian, through the country of Hiberia, now Georgia, and thence +by the Phasis into the Euxine, and to the city of Trebisond, they +were thence shipped for the various parts of Europe[42]. It is +recorded that Demetrius Nicanor determined, or actually began, to +open a canal of above 120 miles in length between the Caspian and +Euxine, for the greater convenience of the Indian trade. But he was +slain by Ptolemy Ceraunos, and this famous enterprize fell to +nothing[43].</p> +<blockquote>[42] Strabo, I. 11.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[43] Plin. I. 6. c. 11.</blockquote> +<p>All other ways being lost, by reason of the wars of the Turks, the +spiceries of the Indian Islands, particularly of Java, Sumatra, and +the city of Malacca, were carried up the river Ganges, in Bengal, to +the city of Agra; thence they were carried by land to another city +near the Indus, named Boghar, where they were discharged, because the +city of Cabor, or Laor, the principal city of the Mogores, stands too +far within the land. From thence they were carried to the great city +of Samarcand in Bactria, in which the merchants of India, Persia, and +Turkey met together with their several commodities, as cloth of gold, +velvets, camblets, scarlet and woollen cloths, which were carried to +Cathay and the great kingdom of China; whence they brought back gold, +silver, precious stones, pearls, silk, musk, rhubarb, and many other +things of great value.</p> +<p>In after times these merchandizes, drugs, and spiceries, were +carried in ships from India to the Straits of Ormus, and the rivers +Euphrates and Tigris, and were unladen at the city of Basora; from +whence they were carried overland to Aleppo, Damascus, and Barutti; +and there the Venetian galliasses, which transported pilgrims to the +Holy Land, came and received the goods.</p> +<p>In the year 1153, in the time of the emperor Frederick Barbarossa, +it is said there came to the city of Lubeck, in Germany, a canoe like +a long barge, with certain Indians, who were supposed to have come +from the coast of Baccalaos[44], which is in the same latitude with +Lubeck. The Germans greatly wondered to see such a boat and strange +people, not knowing whence they came, nor being able to understand +their language, especially as there was then no knowledge of their +country. Although the boat was small in comparison with the seas it +had to cross, it is yet possible that it might have been conveyed by +the winds and waves; for in our days the <i>almadias</i> of the +negroes, which are very small boats, venture to navigate from Quiloa, +Mosambique, and Sofala, around the Cape of Good Hope, even to the +island of St Helena, a very small spot in the ocean, at a great +distance from land.</p> +<blockquote>[44] Newfoundland?</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1300 after Christ, the great soldan of Cairo restored +the trade of spiceries, drugs, and merchandize from India, by the Red +Sea; at which time they unloaded the goods at the port of Judea[45], +and carried them to Mecca; whence they were distributed by the +Mahometan pilgrims[46], so that each prince endeavoured to increase +the honour and profit of his own country. The soldans translated this +trade to their own city of Cairo; whence the goods were carried to +the countries of Egypt, Lybia, Africa, Tunis, Tremessen, Fez, +Morocco, and Suz; and some of them were carried beyond the mountains +of Atlas, to the city of Tombuto, and the kingdom of the Jalophos; +till afterwards the Portuguese brought the Indian trade round the +Cape of Good Hope to Lisbon, as we propose to shew more at large in a +convenient place.</p> +<blockquote>[45] Jidda.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[46] Leo Afric. Ramus. v. 1. f. 373.</blockquote> +<p>A.D. 1344, Peter IV. reigned in Arragon, and the chronicles of his +reign report that Don Lewis de Cerda, grandson of Don John de Corda, +requested his aid to go and conquer the Canary Islands, which had +been gifted to him by Pope Clement VI. a Frenchman. About this time, +too, the island of Madeira is said to have been discovered by an +Englishman named Macham; who, sailing from England into Spain with a +lady whom he loved, was driven out of his course by a tempest, and +arrived in a harbour of that island, now called Machico, after his +name. The lady being oppressed with seasickness, Macham landed with +her on the island, accompanied by some of his people; but in the mean +time the ship weighed anchor and stood to sea, leaving them behind. +On this the lady died of grief, and Macham, who was passionately fond +of her, erected a chapel or hermitage on the island, which he named +the chapel of Jesus, and there deposited her remains, engraving both +their names and the cause of their coming to this place on a +monumental stone. After this, he and his companions made a boat or +canoe out of a large tree, and putting to sea without sails or oars, +got over to the coast of Africa. The Moors among whom he arrived, +considering their passage as miraculous, sent him to their king, who +transmitted both him and his company to the king of Castile.</p> +<p>In 1395, while Henry III. reigned in Castile, in consequence of +information given by Macham respecting this island, many persons of +France and Castile were induced to attempt its discovery, and that of +the Grand Canary. Those who went on this expedition were principally +from Andalusia, Biscay, and Guipuscoa, who carried thither many men +and horses; but I know not whether this was done at their own charge, +or that of the king. But however that might be, these people seem to +have been the first discoverers of the Canaries; where they took 150 +of the islanders prisoners. There is some difference among authors +respecting the time of this discovery, as some affirm that it did not +take place till the year 1405.</p> +<p>SECTION II.</p> +<p> <i>Summary of Portuguese Discoveries, from the Commencement of the +Fifteenth Century, to the Discovery of America by +Columbus</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] The only quotations used in this Section in the +original translation by Hakluyt, are from the Asia of John de Barros, +Decade 1. which it has not been deemed necessary to refer to here +more particularly.--E.</blockquote> +<p>According to the chronicles of Portugal, John I. went from Lisbon +in 1415, attended by his sons Don Duarte, or Edward, Don Peter, and +Don Henry, and other lords and nobles of his realm, into Africa, +where he took the great city of Ceuta, which was one of the principal +causes of extending the dominions of Portugal. After their return, +Don Henry, the king's <i>third</i> [2] son, being then in Algarve, and +desirous to enlarge the kingdom by the discovery of unknown regions, +gave directions for discovering the coast of Mauritania; for in those +days none of the Portuguese had ever gone beyond Cape Non, in lat. +29°. N.[3]. For the better accomplishment of this purpose, Don +Henry prepared a fleet, and commanded the officers whom he employed +to proceed in making discoveries to the south of that cape, which +they did; but when they came to another cape, named Bajador, none of +them dared for a long time to go beyond it, at which cowardice the +prince was much displeased.</p> +<blockquote>[2] It is singular that a Portuguese should not be more +correct. Henry was the <i>fifth</i> son.--Clark.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] More accurately 28° 40'.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In 1417, in the reign of John II. of Castile, and while his mother +the lady Catharine was regent of the kingdom, Ruben de Bracamonte, +the admiral of France, craved a grant of the Canary Islands, and the +title of king, for his kinsman John de Betancourt; which being +conceded, he departed from Seville with an armament to attempt the +conquest. The principal motive of this enterprize was to make a +perfect discovery of Madeira, of which Macham had before given so +much information; yet he went to the Canaries, where he carried a +friar named Mendo as bishop, who had received that dignity from Pope +Martin V. He reduced Lançerota, Fuerteventura, Gomera, and +Ferro; whence he sent into Spain many slaves, and considerable +quantities of honey, wax, camphire, hides, orchill, figs, +dragons-blood, and other merchandize, of which he made good profit. +This armament is said to have likewise discovered Porto Santo. The +island first occupied by Betancourt was Lançerota, where he +built a castle of stone for the better defence of the new +settlers.</p> +<p>In the year 1418, John Gonzales Zarco, and Tristram Vaz Teixera, +gentlemen of the household to Don Henry, perceiving the great desire +of their master to discover new countries, requested and obtained a +bark to proceed to the coast of Africa; where they were overtaken by +a violent tempest, and driven into a haven of the island now called +Porto Santo, where they remained two years. In 1420, they discovered +the island of Madeira, where they found the chapel, tomb, and stone +on which Macham had engraved his name. Others write, that a Castilian +had informed Don Henry of having made the discovery of Porto Santo; +and that he sent Bartholomew Perestrello, John Gonzales Zarco, and +Tristram Vaz Teixera, purposely in search of that island, according +to the signs and directions indicated by the Castilian; and that +these persons afterwards discovered Madeira in 1420, where they found +the memorial and monument left by Macham the Englishman.</p> +<p>Betancourt, who begun the conquest of the Canaries, was slain in a +war with the natives, leaving one Menante his heir; who afterwards +sold the islands to one Peter Barba of Seville. But others say, that +John de Betancourt went to France to procure reinforcements, to +enable him to complete his conquests, and left the command of +Lançerota with his nephew; who, hearing nothing of his uncle, +and being unable to continue the contest with the natives, sold the +Canaries to Don Henry, for an estate in the island of Madeira.</p> +<p>It is related that, in 1424, Don Henry sent a squadron with some +land forces, under Don Ferdinando de Castro, on purpose to make a +conquest of these islands; but, being repulsed by the bravery of the +natives, de Castro prudently desisted from the enterprize and +returned home; and that Don Henry afterwards resigned his claim to +these islands in favour of the crown of Castile. The Castilian +writers, however, assert that both Don Henry and the king of Portugal +refused to give up these islands, until the dispute was ended by the +judgment of Pope Eugenius IV. who awarded them to the king of +Castile. These islands, anciently called the Insulae Fortunatae, or +Fortunate Islands, are seven in number, in lat. 28° N. where the +longest day is thirteen hours, and the longest night the same. They +are 200 leagues distant from the coast of Spain, and 18 leagues from +the coast of Africa. The people were idolaters, and eat raw flesh for +want of fire. They had no iron, but raised or tilled the ground with +the horns of oxen and goats, for want of better implements of +husbandry. Every island spoke a separate language, and many pagan +customs prevailed among the natives; but now the Christian religion +is planted among them. The commodities of these islands are wheat, +barley, sugar, wine, and Canary-birds, which are much esteemed for +the sweetness and variety of their song. In the island of Ferro they +have no water but what proceeds in the night from a tree, encompassed +by a cloud, whence water issues, and serves the whole inhabitants and +cattle of the island[4].</p> +<blockquote>[4] Opportunities will occur hereafter, in particular +voyages, to discuss the circumstances of this wonderful +tree.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1428, Don Pedro, the king's <i>eldest</i> [5] son, who +was a great traveller, went into England, France, and Germany, and +thence into the Holy Land and other places, and came home by Italy, +through Rome and Venice. He is said to have brought a map of the +world home with him, in which all parts of the earth were described, +by which the enterprizes of Don Henry for discovery were much +assisted. In this map the Straits of Magellan are called +the <i>Dragons-tail</i> , and the Cape of Good Hope the <i>Front of +Africa</i> , and so of the rest[6]. I was informed by Francis de Sosa +Tavares, that in the year 1528, Don Fernando, the king's eldest son, +shewed him a map which had been made 120 years before, and was found +in the study of Alcobaza, which exhibited all the navigation of the +East Indies, with the cape of Bona Sperança, as in our latter +maps; by which it appears that there was as much discovered, or more, +in ancient times as now[7].</p> +<blockquote>[5] Galvano is again mistaken. Edward or Duarte was +the <i>eldest</i> son; Pedro the <i>third</i> .--Clark.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] Dr Vincent, in his Periplus, considers this as a copy +of the map of Marco Polo, which was exhibited in the church of St +Michael de Murano, at Venice.--Clark.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] Even if this were fact, it proves nothing, as the +Cape of Good Hope must have been inserted merely by the fancy of the +draughtsman.-- Clarke.--It may be added, that in 1528, it was no +difficult matter to wrong date a forged map, on purpose to detract +from the merit of the actual discoverers.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Though attended with much trouble and expence, Don Henry was +unwearied in prosecuting his plan of discoveries. At length Gilianes, +one of his servants, passed Cape Bojador, a place terrible to all +former navigators, and brought word that it was by no means so +dangerous as had been represented, he having landed on its farther +side, where he set up a wooden cross in memorial of his +discovery.</p> +<p>In the year 1433 died John king of Portugal, and was succeeded by +his eldest son Duarte or Edward. In 1434, Don Henry sent Alphonso +Gonzales Balduja and Gillianes, who penetrated from Cape Bajador to +another cape, where they found the country to be inhabited, and went +forward to another point of land, whence they returned to Portugal. +In 1438 king Duarte died, and his son Alphonso being young, the +kingdom was governed during his minority by his uncle Don Pedro. In +1441, Don Henry sent out two ships under Tristan and Antonio +Gonzales, who took a prize on the coast, and sailed to Cape Blanco, +or the White Cape in lat. 20° N.[8]. From thence they brought +home some Moors, from whom Don Henry learned the state of the +country. Don Henry sent an account of these discoveries to Pope +Martin, by one Fernan Lopez de Savado; and the Pope granted +indulgences and everlasting pardon of sins to all who should die in +attempting the discovery of the land of the infidels. In the year +1443, Don Henry commanded Antonio Gonzales to carry back the Moors to +their own country, where they were ransomed for black Moors with +curled hair, or negroes, and some gold; owing to which that place is +now called Rio de Oro, or the Golden River, that thereby the desire +of discovery might be the more increased. He sent soon afterward one +named Nunnez Tristan, who discovered the islands of Arguin, who +brought more slaves from thence to Portugal in 1444. One Lancarote, a +groom of Don Henrys chamber, and three others, armed certain ships, +with which they sailed along the coast to the islands of Garze, where +they took 200 slaves, which were the first that were brought from +thence to Portugal.</p> +<blockquote>[8] More correctly in lat. 20° 54' N. There is +another Cape Blanco in Morocco in lat. 33° 10' N. and this more +southerly cape on the great desert is named Branca in our best +charts.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In 1445, Gonsalvo de Syntra, an esquire belonging to Don Henry, +went captain of a bark into these parts; and landing on the coast, +was taken by the natives, with six or seven of his people The place +where he was cut off got the name of Angra de Gonsalvo de Syntra from +him; and this was the first loss sustained by the Portuguese in their +discoveries. In 1446, three caravels were sent out under Antonio +Gonsales, Diego Aloizio, and Gomes Perez; who were ordered to refrain +from going to Rio de Oro, to carry themselves peaceably to the +natives, to traffic with them peaceably, and to endeavour to convert +as many infidels as possible to Christianity; but in this they had no +success. In the same year, Dennis Fernandes of Lisbon, an esquire to +the king, entered upon these discoveries, more to acquire fame than +for profit. In the course of his voyage he discovered the +river <i>Sanaga</i> or Senegal, between 15 and 16 degrees of +latitude[9]; and proceeding onwards, discovered Cape Verde, in 14 +degrees[10], upon which he erected a wooden cross, and then returned, +much elated at the success of his voyage. In 1447 Nunnez Tristan +passed beyond Cape Verde to Rio Grande, and went beyond that river to +another in twelve degrees[11]. He was here taken and slain, with +eighteen other Portuguese, and the ship was brought home in safety by +four or five of the crew who escaped the hands of the negroes.</p> +<blockquote>[9] The mouth of the Senegal is in lat. 15° 45' +N.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[10] More correctly, 14° 45' N.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[11] It is difficult to ascertain these two rivers: The +Rio Grande here meant is properly named Gambia. The river in 12° +N. may be the Casamansa, the Santa Anna, or the St Dominico: which +last is exactly in 12° N. the two others a little farther north, +and nearer the Gambia. --E.</blockquote> +<p>In this year 1447, a Portuguese ship, in coming through the +Straits of Gibraltar, was forced a great way to the westwards by a +violent tempest, and came to an island having seven cities, the +inhabitants of which spoke the Portuguese language, and they inquired +of our mariners if the Moors still infested Spain, whence their +ancestors had fled to avoid the distresses which occurred subsequent +to the death of Don Roderigo, king of Spain. The boatswain of this +ship brought home some of the sand from this island, and sold it to a +goldsmith in Lisbon, who procured from it a good quantity of gold. +Don Pedro, who then governed the realm, being made acquainted with +this circumstance, caused the whole to be recorded in the house of +justice[12]. Some think that this island belonged to what is now +called the Antilles or New Spain; but though their reasons for this +opinion are good, I omit them here, as not connected with my present +purpose.</p> +<blockquote>[12] This is one of the many palpable and clumsy fables +which were advanced to defraud Columbus of the honour of having +discovered the new world, and is even more ridiculous, if possible, +than the voyages of Zeno, adverted to in our <i>First</i> +Part.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1449, King Alphonso granted license to his uncle, Don +Henry, to colonize the Açores, which had been formerly +discovered. In the year 1458, this king went into Africa, where he +took the town of Alcaçer; and in the year 1461, he commanded +Signior Mendez to build the castle of Arguin, in the island of that +name, on the coast of Africa. In the year 1462, three Genoese +gentlemen, of whom Antonio de Noli was the chief, the others being +his brother and nephew, got permission from Don Henry to take +possession of the Cape de Verde islands, which some believe to be +those called Gorgades, Hesperides, and Dorcades, by the ancients. But +they named them Mayo, Saint Jago, and Saint Philip, because +discovered on the days of those saints. Some call them the islands of +Antonio. In the year following, 1463, that excellent prince, Don +Henry, died; having discovered, by his exertions, the whole coast of +Africa, from Cape Non to the mountain of Sierra Liona, which is on +this side of the line, in lat. 8° 30' N. where no man had been +before.</p> +<p>In 1469, the king of Portugal let out the trade of Guinea, +afterwards called the Minas, to Fernan Gomez, for five years, at the +yearly rent of 200,000 rees[13]; and under the express condition that +he was every year to discover 100 leagues farther along the coast of +Africa to the south. In 1470, this king went into Africa, accompanied +by his son Prince John, where he took the town of Arzila; and the +inhabitants of Tangier having fled from fear, he took possession of +it also. In the year 1471, John de St Aren and John de Scovar, under +the orders of Fernan Gomez, continued the discovery of the coast of +Guinea as far as St George del Mina, in lat. 5° N. and 2° W. +long.; the coast from Cape Verde to Cape Palmas trending S.E. after +which it goes to the east, with even a small northerly inclination +for about twelve degrees of longitude. In 1472, one Fernando da Poo +discovered the island now called after his name, beyond Cape Formosa, +in lat. 3° 40' N. and about the same time the islands del +Principe and St Thomas were discovered, the latter of which is +situated under the equinoctial line. The firm land also was explored +at the same time, all the way from the kingdom of Benin to Cape St +Catherina, in lat. 1° 40' S. This last discovery was made by +Sequetra, a person in the king's immediate service. Many suppose that +then were these countries and islands discovered which had never been +before known since the flood.</p> +<blockquote>[13] Equal to L.138: 17: 9-1/4 d. English +money.--Halk.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1480, the valiant King Don Alphonzo died, and was +succeeded by his son Don John II. who, in 1481, gave orders to Diego +d'Azambuxa to construct the castle of St George del Mina, on the +African coast. In 1484, Diego Caon, a knight belonging to the court, +discovered the coast as far as the river Congo, on the south side of +the line, in seven or eight degrees of latitude[14], where he erected +a stone pillar, with the royal arms and titles of Portugal, with the +date of his discovery. He proceeded southwards from thence along the +coast, all the way to a river near the tropic of Capricorn, setting +up similar stone pillars in convenient places. He afterwards returned +to Congo, the king of which country sent ambassadors by his ship into +Portugal. In the next year, or the year following, John Alonzo +d'Aveiro brought home from Benin pepper with a tail[15], being the +first of the kind ever seen in Portugal.</p> +<blockquote>[14] Only 6° 45' S.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[15] Mr Clarke explains this as <i>long pepper</i> ; but +besides that this by no means answers the descriptive name in the +text, long pepper certainly is the production of the East Indies. The +article here indicated was probably one of the many species, or +varieties of the Capsicum; called Guinea pepper, Cayenne pepper, Bird +pepper, and various other names. --E.</blockquote> +<p>In 1487, King John sent Pedro de Covillan and Alphonzo de Payva, +both of whom could speak Arabic, to discover India by land. They left +Lisbon in the month of May, and took shipping in the same year at +Naples for the island of Rhodes, and lodged there in the hotel of the +Knights of St John of Jerusalem, belonging to Portugal. From thence +they went to Alexandria and Cairo, and then along with a caravan of +Moors to the haven of Toro. There they embarked on the Red Sea, and +proceeded to Aden, where they separated; de Payva going into +Ethiopia, while Covillan proceeded to India. Covillan went to the +cities of Cananor and Calicut, and thence to Goa, where he took +shipping for Sofala, on the eastern coast of Africa. He thence sailed +to Mosambique, and the cities of Quiloa, Mombaza, and Melinda, +returning back to Aden, where he and Payva had formerly separated. +Thence he proceeded to Cairo, where he hoped to have rejoined his +companion; but he here learnt by letter from the king his master, +that de Payva was dead, and he was farther enjoined by the king to +travel into the country of Abyssinia[16] He returned therefore, from +Cairo to Toro, and thence to Aden; and hearing of the fame of Ormuz, +he proceeded along the coast of Arabia by Cape Razalgate to Ormuz. +Returning from the Gulf of Persia to the Red Sea, he passed over to +the realm of the Abyssinians, which is commonly called the kingdom of +Presbyter John, or Ethiopia, where he was detained till 1520, when +the ambassador, Don Roderigo de Lima, arrived in that country. This +Pedro de Covillan was the first of the Portuguese who had ever +visited the Indies and the adjacent seas and islands.</p> +<blockquote>[16] In the original this is called the country of +Prester or Presbyter John. We have formerly, in the <i>First</i> Part +of this work, had occasion to notice the strange idea of a Christian +prince and priest, who was supposed to have ruled among the pagan +nations of eastern Tartary. Driven from this false notion, by a more +thorough knowledge of Asia, the European nations fondly transferred +the title of Prester John to the half Christian prince or Negus of +the semi-barbarous Abyssinians. --E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1490, the king sent Gonzalo de Sosa to Congo with +three ships, carrying back with him the ambassador of the king of +Congo, who had been brought over to Portugal in 1484, by Diego Caon. +During his residence in Portugal, this ambassador and others of his +company had been instructed in the Christian religion, and baptized. +Gonzalo de Sosa died during the outward-bound voyage; and Ruy de +Sosa, his nephew, was chosen to the command of the expedition in his +stead. Arriving in Congo, the king of that country received them with +much joy, and soon yielded himself and the greater part of his +subjects to be baptized; to the infinite satisfaction of the +Portuguese, who by these means converted so many infidels from +paganism to Christianity.</p> +<p>SECTION III.</p> +<p> <i>Summary of Discoveries made by the Spaniards and Portuguese, +from the Era of Columbus, in 1492, to the year 1555</i> .</p> +<p>In the year 1492, when Don Ferdinand king of Castile[1] was +engaged in the siege of Granada, he sent <i>one</i> Christopher +Columbus, a Genoese, with three ships, for the discovery of Nova +Spagna. This Columbus had first offered his service lot a western +discovery to John king of Portugal, who refused to employ him. Being +sufficiently furnished for his enterprize, Columbus set out from the +town of Palos on the third of August 1492, having with him, as +captains and pilots, Martin Alionzo Pinzon, Francis Martinez Pinzori, +Vincent Yannes Pinzon, and Bartholomew Columbus his brother[2] with +an hundred and twenty other persons in the three ships. Some persons +affirm, that this was the first voyage which was ever conducted by +the observation of latitudes[3]. They took the Canaries in their way, +whence shaping their course for Cipango, or towards Japan, they were +much amazed to find the sea all full of weeds, and with great fear +arrived at the Antilles on the tenth day of October; the first island +they descried, called Guanahany by the natives, they named San +Salvador. This island is in 25° N. latitude. After that they +found many islands, which they called the Princes. The savages of +those parts call these islands by the name of Lucaios, having indeed +several names for them, and they stand on the north side of the line, +almost under the tropic of Cancer. The island of St James, or +Jamaica, lies between the 16th and 17th degrees of northern +latitude[4]. Thence they went to the island which the natives call +Cuba, named Ferdinando by the Spaniards, after the king, which is in +22 degrees; from whence they were conducted by the Indians to another +island called Hayti, named Isabella by the Spaniards, in honour of +the queen of Castile, and afterwards Hispaniola, or Little Spain.</p> +<blockquote>[1] Ferdinand was hereditary king of Arragon; but, by +marrying Isabella, queen of Castile, had united the several +monarchies of Spain, under one government. Ferdinand had no share +whatever in the honour of sending out Columbus, the sole charge being +defrayed by his consort, Isabella, hereditary queen of Castile and +Leon; and who had even to borrow money for the purpose. The +contemptuous notice of <i>one</i> Christopher Columbus, must be +pardoned to the patriotic rivalry of a Portuguese.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] Galvano is here inaccurate: It will be seen in the +sequel, that Bartholomew Columbus did not accompany his brother in +this voyage, being then in England.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] It is certainly possible, that Columbus may have used +that mode in his course to the Canaries: But as his run across the +Atlantic was nearly on a parallel, he must have kept that part of his +voyage by what is called dead reckoning, or by the +log.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] The middle of Guanahana is in lat. 24° 30' N. The +centre of Jamaica in 18° 10' N. The latitudes of Galvano are +generally inaccurate; and he never pretends to assign any longitudes +whatever. The series, likewise, in which he arranges the discoveries +of Columbus is very inaccurate. --E.</blockquote> +<p>In that island the admirals ship was wrecked, and Columbus caused +a fort to be constructed of her timbers and planks, in which he left +Roderigo de Arana with a garrison of thirty-eight men, to learn the +language and customs of the country. Columbus then returned to Spain, +carrying with him samples of gold and pearls, and other productions +of the country, with ten Indians, six of whom died on the voyage; the +rest were brought to Spain and baptized. On their way home, Columbus +touched at the Açores; and on the fourth of March 1493, +entered the port of Lisbon. This discovery gave much discontent to +the king of Portugal. Immediately on his arrival, Columbus went into +Castile, where he informed the king of his discoveries and of the +dissatisfaction of the king of Portugal. On this he and his queen +Isabella sent word of the recent discovery to Pope Alexander VI, at +which information he and all the Italians were much astonished, as +they marvelled that there should be any land besides what had been +known to the Romans. Alexander made a grant of all these countries to +the crowns of Castile and Leon, under condition that they should +labour to extirpate idolatry, and establish the holy faith of Christ +among the natives.</p> +<p>On the report of this discovery, so universal a desire of +travelling arose among the Spaniards, that they were ready as it were +to leap into the sea, that they might swim if possible to the newly +discovered islands. After receiving the authority of the Pope, King +Ferdinando sent Columbus a second time to the newly-discovered +country, of which he made him admiral, giving him many other honours, +and a particular coat of arms, having this motto,</p> +<p>For Castile and for Leon<br> +A new world discovered Colon[A].</p> +<blockquote>[A] Gomara, I. 1. c. 15.</blockquote> +<p>Columbus set out on his second voyage to the Antilles on the 25th +October 1493, taking his course from Cadiz, with seventeen ships and +fifteen hundred men, accompanied by his brothers Bartholomew and +Diego Columbus, with many other knights, gentlemen of the law, and +priests; having chalices, crosses, and other rich religious +ornaments, and with great power and dignity from the Pope. The tenth +day after commencing their voyage, they reached the Canaries; and +from thence, in twenty-five or thirty days, they sailed to the +Antilles, the first island they saw being in 14° N. due west from +Cape de Verd in Africa. They called this island Deseada[5], or +the <i>desired island</i> , which is said to be 800 leagues from the +Canaries. They afterwards discovered many more islands, which they +called the Virgins, but which are named the Caribbee islands by the +natives, from a nation of that name, who are bold warriors, and +excellent marksmen with bows and arrows. They poison their arrows +with the juice of a certain herb, and whoever is wounded with these +is sure to die, biting himself like a mad dog. From thence they went +to the principal island in these parts, named Boriquen by the +natives, and St John by the Spaniards; and thence to Hispaniola, or +Isabella, where they found all the men dead whom they had left on +returning from the former voyage. Columbus left most of his people +here to establish a colony, under the command of his brothers; and +went with two ships to continue his discovery of Cuba and Jamaica. +All these islands are between 16 and 20 degrees of northern +latitude[6]. While the admiral was sailing in quest of discoveries, +his brethren and those who were left in Hispaniola, were much +incommoded by an insurrection among the savages; and Columbus went +back to Spain, to give an account of his proceedings to the king and +queen.</p> +<blockquote>[5] Cape de Verd is in 14° 30' N. Deseada in 16° +30' N. a difference of two degrees of latitude. Dominica, in 15° +30' is the first land said to have been discovered by Columbus in +his <i>second</i> voyage, in the authentic original narrative by his +son, which will be found in the sequel.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] Counting from Dominica to the north side of Cuba, +between 15° 30' and 23° 15'.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In January 1494, a congress of ambassadors from Spain and Portugal +was held at Tordesillas, for the settlement of all disputes between +the two countries respecting the new discoveries. The +plenipotentiaries from Spain were Don Henry Henriques, Don John de +Cardenas, and the Doctor Maldonado; those from Portugal, Ruy de Sosa, +his son Don John, and the doctor Ayres de Almada. After some +conference, these plenipotentiaries divided the world between the two +crowns, by a meridian line drawn from north to south, 300 leagues to +the west of the islands of Cape Verd, all to the east of this line +being appropriated to Portugal, and all to the west to Spain; +leaving, however, the liberty of navigation equally to both[7]. In +1495, John II. King of Portugal, died, and was succeeded by his +cousin Emanuel.</p> +<blockquote>[7] The negociators of the two crowns, as here related, +seem to have been ignorant that this loose division of the globe gave +the whole reciprocally to each of the parties.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1496, a Venetian named John Cabota, or Gabota, went to +England; and having acquired a knowledge of the new discoveries, and +perceiving by the globe that the islands of the Antilles were almost +in the same latitude with his own country, and lay much nearer to +England than Spain and Portugal, he acquainted Henry VII. with this +circumstance, and offered his services to make discoveries for the +crown of England. Henry was much pleased with the proposal, and +furnished him with two ships and three hundred men, with which he set +sail in the spring of that year, and sailed west till he came in +sight of land, in lat. 45°N. Whence he sailed northwards till he +came into the latitude of 60 degrees, where the day is 18 hours long, +and the night is very clear and bright. He there found the air very +cold, with great islands of ice, and found no bottom with a line of +100 fathoms. From thence, finding the land turn eastwards, he coasted +along it, discovering all the bay and river named Deseado[8], to see +if it passed on to the other side of the land. Cabot afterwards +sailed down the coast to the lat. of 38°N. though some people +allege that he reached Cape Florida, in 25°N.</p> +<blockquote>[8] The apparent object seems to have been in search of a +passage to the East Indies by way of the north-west, a chimera long +and anxiously sought after. It is needless to make any observations +on these indistinct notices, as the voyage of Cabot will be +afterwards given at full length.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1497, Columbus was again sent out on discovery, with +six ships furnished by the crown of Spain, and two others fitted out +at his own expence. Sending his brother before, he sailed from Cadiz, +taking his son Don Diego along with him. It was then reported, that +he meant to take the island of Madeira, because he distrusted the +Frenchmen, and therefore sent three ships thither; others say, that +his object was for the Canaries. However this may be, he went with +four ships to the Cape de Verd islands, whence he ran along a +parallel, finding great rains and calms, and the first land he came +to in the Antilles was an island in nine degrees of north latitude, +called Trinidada,[9] which lies close to the main land. Here he +entered the Gulf of Paria, and came out by the Bocca de Dragone, or +Dragons-mouth. Holding his course westwards along the coast of Paria, +he came to the islands called Los Testigos, or the Witnesses, beyond +which is the island of Cubagua, where there is a great fishing for +pearl-muscles, and where also there is a well of rock oil. Beyond +that he came to the Frailes islands, named Roques, Aruba, and +Curaçoa, and other small islands, along the coast of the main +land, and to the point of land named Cabo de Vela, having discovered +200 leagues of coast. He thence crossed over the Caribbean Sea, +directly north for Hispaniola, passing by the island Beata.</p> +<blockquote>[9] The centre of Trinidada is in 10° 30'N. its S.W. +point in 10° 12', and the N.E. cape in 10º 45' +N.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In this same year[10] 1497, on the 20th day of June[11], King +Emanuel sent a squadron of three ships for India, commanded by one +Vasques de Gama, having under his command his brother Paulus de Gama +and Nicolas Coello, as captains of the other two ships, the whole +having a complement of 120 men. They were accompanied by a fourth +ship laden with provisions. In fourteen days they reached the island +of St Jago, one of the Cape Verds, whence they went along the coast +beyond the Cape of Good Hope, erecting pillars of stone in proper +places, as marks of discovery and possession, and came to Mosambique +in lat. 15° S. After staying only a short time there, de Gama +went to Mombaza and Melinda, the king of which last place gave him +pilots, who conducted him to India, in which passage he discovered +Los Baxos do Padua, or the Flats of Padua. In the month of May 1498, +de Gama came to anchor before the city of Calicut, <i>and +Panama</i> [12], where they remained till the first day of September, +when they sailed towards the north, discovering all the coast till +they came to the island of Angediva, on the western side of India, in +15° N. where they came to an anchor in the beginning of October. +They remained here till February 1499, when they departed on their +voyage homewards; coming first to Melinda, and so by Mosambique and +along the coast to the Cape of Good Hope, and by the islands of Cape +de Verd, and lastly to the city of Lisbon, in September of that year, +having been absent on their voyage for twenty- six months.</p> +<blockquote>[10] De Barros, Dec. I. 1. 4. c. 2. and to the end of ch. +11.--Hakl.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[11] Osorius says this voyage commenced on the 9th of +July.--Clark.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[12] This Panama seems a blunder of some ignorant +copyist, for Panarame. --E.</blockquote> +<p>On the 13th of November 1499, Vincent Yannez Pinzon, who had +sailed with Columbus in his first voyage of discovery, and his nephew +Aries Pinzon, departed from the port of Palos with four well +appointed ships, fitted out at their own cost, having a license from +the king of Spain to prosecute discoveries in the new world, but with +express orders not to touch anywhere that had been visited by +Columbus. Going first to the islands of Cape de Verd, they passed the +line and stood over towards the new world, which they fell in with at +Cape St Augustine, in lat. 8° 30' S. where they carved on the +barks of trees the date of their arrival, and the names of the king +and queen of Spain. They had several skirmishes with the inhabitants +of Brazil, but got no advantage. Following the coast westwards[13], +they entered the river named Maria Tambal, by which time they had +made above thirty prisoners. The chief places where they touched were +Cape St Augustine, Cape St Luke, Tierra de los Humos; the rivers of +Marannon and of the Amazons, and the Rio Dolce, or Sweet river[14], +and other places along the coast. At last, being come to 10° N. +they lost two of their ships with their crews, and returned home, +after having employed ten months and fifteen days in their +voyage.</p> +<blockquote>[13] The coast here is nearly N. and S. and their course +must have been to the north.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[14] The Marannon and Amazons are the same river. Perhaps +by the Rio Dolce the Orinoco may be meant; but in these slight +notices of discovery it is impossible at times to ascertain the real +positions, through the alteration of names.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In March 1500, Pedro Alvarez Cabral sailed from Lisbon with +thirteen ships for India, being ordered not to go near the coast of +Africa, that he might shorten the voyage. Losing sight of one of his +ships, he deviated from his course in hopes to rejoin it, and sailed +till he unexpectedly fell in with the coast of Brazil, where he sent +a bark in, search of a safe harbour, which they found in 17° S. +and called it Puerto Seguro. From thence they made sail for the Cape +of Good Hope and Melinda, whence they crossed over to the river of +Cochin, which was not before known. Here they loaded with pepper; and +on their return Sancho de Thovar discovered the city of Sofala, on +the eastern coast of Africa.</p> +<p>It is reported, that in the year 1500, one Gaspar Cortereal got a +general license from King Emanuel to make discoveries in the new +world. He fitted out two stout ships at his own cost, from the island +of Tercera, and sailed to that part of the new world which is in +50° N. which has been since known by his name, and came home in +safety to Lisbon. In a second voyage, his own immediate vessel was +lost, and the other came home. Upon this, his brother Michael +Cortereal went to seek him with three ships, fitted out at his own +charges; and finding many creeks and rivers on the coast, the ships +divided for the more effectual search, agreeing that they should all +meet again at an appointed time and place. The other two ships did +so; but after waiting a reasonable rime for Michael Cortereal, it was +concluded that he was also lost, on which the other two ships +returned to Lisbon, and no news was ever afterwards heard of the two +brothers; but the country where they were lost is still called the +land of Cortereal[15].</p> +<blockquote>[15] From the latitude indicated by Galvano, the land of +Cortereal may have been somewhere on the eastern side of +Newfoundland.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In March 1501, John de Nova sailed from Lisbon with four ships for +India. In his outward-bound voyage he discovered an island in the +Atlantic, in lat. 8° S. to which he gave the name of +Ascension[16]. On his return from India, he fell in with another +island in the Atlantic in 17° S. called St Helena, which, though +very small, is yet of great importance from its situation. In the +month of May of the same year 1501, three ships were sent from Lisbon +by King Emanuel, to make a discovery of the coast of Brazil, which +had been accidentally fallen in with, by Cabral: Passing by the +Canaries, they stopped for refreshments at the town of Bezequiche in +the Cape Verds; and passing southwards from thence beyond the line, +they fell in with Brazil in five degrees of south latitude, at Cape +St Roquo, and sailed along the coast southwards, till they reckoned +themselves to have reached 32° S. Finding the weather cold and +tempestuous, they turned back in the month of April 1502, and got to +Lisbon In September of that year, having been out fifteen months on +their voyage.</p> +<blockquote>[16] Barros, Dec. 1. I. 5. c. 10.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year 1502, Alfonso Hojeda went to discover the Terra +Firma, and followed its coast till he came to the province of Uraba +I7. In 1503, Roderigo Bastidas of Seville went with two caravels at +his own cost, to the Antilles, where he first came to the Isla Verde, +or the Green island, close by Guadaloupe; whence he sailed westwards +to Santa Martha and Cape do la Vela, and to the Rio Grande or Great +river. He afterwards discovered the haven of Zamba, the Coradas, +Carthagena, the islands of S. Bernard de Baru, the Islas de Arenas, +Isla Fuerta, and the Point of Caribana, at the end of the Gulf of +Uraba, where he had sight of the Farrallones, close by the river of +Darien. From Cape de la Vela to this last place, which is in lat. +9° 40' N. is 200 leagues. From thence he stood over to Jamaica +for refreshments. In Hispaniola he had to lay his ships on the ground +to repair their bottoms, because a certain species of worms had eaten +many holes in the planks. In this voyage Bastidas procured <i>four +hundred marks</i> [18] of gold; though the people were very warlike, +and used poisoned arrows.</p> +<blockquote>[17] Gomara, I. 2.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[18] About 8200 ounces, worth about L. 16,000 sterling; +equal in modern efficacy, perhaps, to L. 100,000.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year 1502, Columbus entered upon his fourth voyage of +discovery, with four ships, taking with him his son Don Ferdinando. +The particular object of this voyage, by command of King Ferdinand, +was to look out for the strait which was supposed to penetrate across +the continent of the new world, and by which a route to India by the +west was expected to be discovered. He sailed by Hispaniola and +Jamaica to the river Azua, Cape Higueras, the Gamares islands, and to +Cape Honduras, which signifies the Cape of the Depths. From thence he +sailed eastwards to Cape Garcias a Dios, and discovered the province +and river of Veragua, the Rio Grande, and others, which the Indians +call Hienra. Thence to the river of Crocodiles, now called Rio de +Chagres, which rises near the South Sea, within four leagues of +Panama, and runs into the Caribbean Sea. He went next to the Isle of +Bastimentos, or of Provisions, and after that to Porto Bello; thence +to Nombre de Dios and Rio Francisco, and the harbour of Retreat. Then +to the Gulf of Cabesa Cattiva, the islands of Caperosa and Cape +Marmora; having discovered two hundred leagues along the coast. He +thence returned to the island of Cuba, and from that to Jamaica, +where he laid his ships aground, on account of their bottoms being +much eaten by the worms.</p> +<p>On the tenth of February 1S02, Don Vasques de Gama, now admiral, +sailed from Lisbon for India, with nineteen or twenty caravels. On +the last day of February he reached Cape de Verd, whence he went to +Mosambique, and was the first who crossed over from thence to India. +In this passage he discovered the islands of Amirante, in four +degrees of south latitude. Having taken in a cargo of pepper and +drugs, de Gama returned to Lisbon, leaving Vincent Sodre to keep the +coast of India, with four stout ships. These were the first of the +Portuguese who navigated the coast of Arabia Felix, which is so +barren, that the inhabitants are forced to support their camels and +other cattle on dried fish. The sea on that coast is so abundant in +fish, that the cats are in use to take them. One Antonio de Saldania +is reported to have discovered Socotora, formerly named Coradis, and +the Cape of Guardafu in 1503.</p> +<p>In 1504, Roderigo de Bastidas, formerly mentioned, with the aid of +John de Ledesma, and others of Seville, fitted out two ships, and +taking John de Cosa as his pilot, went on discovery to the Terra +Firma of America, where Carthagena now stands. He is said to have +here met with Lewis de la Guerra, and they in conjunction landed in +the island of Codego, where they made prisoners of 600 savages. Going +a little farther along the coast, they entered the Gulf of Uraba, +where they found sand mingled with gold, being the first of that kind +which was brought to Spain. From thence they sailed for St Domingo, +loaded with slaves, but almost famished for want of victuals, as the +natives refused to traffic with them for any. In the end of this year +Isabella, queen of Castile, died. While she lived, no subject of +Arragon, Catalonia, Valencia, or any other of the provinces, +depending on her husband King Ferdinand, was allowed to sail to any +of the newly-discovered countries; but only her own subjects of +Castile and Biscay, by whom all these lands were discovered; +excepting only such of her husbands subjects as might be in a servile +capacity to her own, or a few that could procure special +licenses.</p> +<p>In 1505, on the twenty-fifth of March, Francisco de Almeida, the +viceroy of India, sailed from Lisbon with a fleet of twenty-two sail. +On his way to India, he stopped at Quiloa, where he built a fort, +appointing Peter Fereira to command it. From beyond Melinda he passed +over to the island of Anguediva, of which he appointed Emanuel +Passavia to be captain. He built a fort also at Cananor, of which he +gave the command to Laurence de Brito; and one at Cochin, which was +given in charge to Alphonso de Noronha. This year likewise, Peter de +Anahay built a fort at Sofala, of which he was made captain. In the +latter end of this year the viceroy commanded his son Laurenço +to go to the islands of Maldivia. Beating up against contrary winds, +he arrived at these islands which in ancient times were called +Traganæ[19], but Ytterubenero by the Moors, and by us Ceilan. +Here he went on shore, and entered into treaty with the people, and +returned to Cochin. In the middle of this island there is a high +rock, having the print of a mans foot, said to have been that of Adam +when he ascended to heaven, which the Indians hold in great +reverence.</p> +<blockquote>[19] Probably an error for Taprobana; the same by which +Ceylon was known to the ancients.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In 1506, after the death of Isabella, King Philip and Queen Joan +came to take possession of the crown of Castile, and. King Ferdinand +retired into his own dominions of Arragon. In that same year Philip +died, and Ferdinand resumed the government, giving license to all +Spaniards to go to the new discovered countries; but not allowing the +Portuguese to go there. In this year, likewise, Christopher Columbus +died, in the month of May, and was succeeded in his dignities by his +son Don Diego.</p> +<p>In March 1506, Tristan de Acunha and Alphonso de Albuquerque went +to India with fourteen ships, and refreshed by the way at Bezequiche, +in the Cape de Verd islands. Before reaching the Cape of Good Hope +they discovered certain islands, in 37° S. which are now called +the islands of Tristan de Acunha. During this voyage, the fleet was +dispersed by a tempest, and Alvaro Teliz ran so far that he came to +Sumatra, whence he returned to Cape Guardafu, having discovered many +islands, seas, and countries, not known before that time to the +Portuguese. At the same time, Emanuel Telez de Meneses was driven on +the outside of the great island of St Lawrence, or Madagascar, and +having surveyed its coasts, came to Mosambique, where he met with +Tristan de Acunha, who was the first captain that wintered there. +Meneses, having reported that there was plenty of ginger, cloves, and +silver in Madagascar, was sent back there, and traversed a +considerable part of the island; but not finding any thing of value, +returned to Mosambique, whence he went to Melinda, and Brava, and +thence to Socotora, where he built a fort, of which he appointed one +Antonio de Noronha to be captain. In 1507, Tristan de Acunha returned +to Europe, and Alphonso de Albuquerque remained in India with five or +six ships, to keep the command of the sea. In the course of that year +or the next, Albuquerque stood over to discover the coast of Arabia, +which he explored, and doubled the Cape of Rosalgate, which is under +the tropic of Cancer.</p> +<p>In 1509, Diego Lopez de Sequiera went from Lisbon for India with +four ships; and stopping at the island of Madagascar was almost a +year on his voyage. Arriving at Cochin in the month of May, the +viceroy gave him another ship, in which he went to Malacca in +September passing between the islands of Nicubar and many others. He +went also to Sumatra; to the cities of Pedir and Pacem; and all along +that coast to the island of Puloreira, and the fiats of Capacia; +thence he stood over to the city of Malacca, in lat. 2° N. where +the people took and slew some of his men. After this he returned to +Cochin, having discovered five hundred leagues in this voyage. The +island of Sumatra is the first land in which we knew of mens flesh +being eaten, by certain people in the mountains called Bacas, who +gild their teeth. In their opinion the flesh of the blacks is sweeter +than that of the whites. The flesh of the oxen, kine, and hens in +that country is as black as ink. A people is said to dwell in that +country, called <i>Daraqui-Dara</i> , having tails like sheep[20]. +There are likewise springs of rock oil or bitumen. In the kingdom of +Pedir, likewise, there is said to be a river of oil; which is not to +be wondered at, as we are assured there is also a well of oil in +Bactria. It is further said that there is a tree in that country, the +juice of which is a strong poison if it touch a mans blood; but if +drank, it is a sovereign antidote against poison. They have here also +certain gold coins, called drachms, brought, as they say, into their +country by the Romans[21], which seems to have some resemblance to +truth, because beyond that country there are no gold coins.</p> +<blockquote>[20] The Cakerlaka of other writers, which can only be +large monkeys or baboons, called men with tails, through ignorance or +imposture.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[21] Rumi still continues the eastern name of the Turkish +empire, as the successor of the Roman emperors, in Assyria and Egypt. +Hence these Roman gold coins may have come in the way of trade from +Assyria or Egypt, or may possibly have been Venetian +sequins.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In 1508, Alphonso de Hojeda went with the license of King +Ferdinand, but at his own charges, to conquer the province of Darien, +in the Terra Firma of the new world. Landing in the country of Uraba, +he called it Castilia del Oro, or Golden Castile, because of the gold +found in the sand along its coast. He went first from the city of San +Domingo, in Hispaniola, with four ships and three hundred soldiers, +leaving behind him the bachelor Anciso, who afterwards compiled a +book of these discoveries. He was followed by a fourth ship with +provisions and ammunition, and a reinforcement of 150 Spaniards. +Hojeda landed at Carthagena, where the natives took, slew, and +devoured seventy of his men, by which his force was much weakened. +Some time after but in the same year, Diego de Niquesa fitted out +seven ships in the port of Beata, intending to go to Veragua with 800 +men; but coming to Carthegana, where he found Hojeda much weakened by +his losses, they joined their forces, and avenged themselves of the +natives. In this voyage Niquesa discovered the coast called Nombre de +Dios, and went into the sound of Darien, on the river Pito, which he +named Puerto de Misas. Coming to Veragua, Hojeda went on shore with +his soldiers, and built there the town of Caribana, as a defence +against the Caribbees; being the first town built by the Spaniards on +the continent of the new world. He also built another at Nombre de +Dios, and called it Nuestra Seniora de la Antigua. A town was built +at Uraba, in which Francis Pisarro was left with the command, who was +there much annoyed by the natives. They likewise built other towns, +the names of which I omit. In this enterprize the Spaniards did not +meet with the success they expected.</p> +<p>In 1509, Don Diego Columbus, the second admiral of New Spain, went +to the island of Hispaniola with his wife and household; and she, +being a noble woman, carried with her many ladies of good families, +who were there married; by which means the Spaniards began to +multiply in their new colony, and Hispaniola became famous and much +frequented. Columbus likewise reduced Cuba into order, and took +measures for its colonization, where he placed one Diego Velasques as +his lieutenant, who had accompanied his father in his second voyage +of discovery.</p> +<p>In April 1511, Alphonso de Albuquerque went to Malacca from +Cochin; and finding certain Chinese about to return from Malacca into +their own country, he sent a Portuguese along with them, named Duarte +Fernandes, with letters for the king of the Mantias, now called Siam. +They passed through the Straits of Cincapura, and sailed northwards +along the coast of Patane to the city of Cuy, and thence to Odia, the +chief city of the kingdom, in 14° N.[22]. The king of this +country received Duarte with great honour, as he was the first +Portuguese who had been in these parts, and sent back ambassadors +along with him to Albuquerque. They travelled overland to the +westwards, till they came to Tanacerim, on the Bay of Bengal, in +12° N. where they embarked in two ships and sailed to Malacca. +The inhabitants of Siam, through which they travelled, eat of all +kinds of beasts, and even of what we repute to be vermin. The people +of this country are reputed the most virtuous and honest of any in +those parts of the world, and pride themselves much on their poverty +and chastity; yet have a strange practice of carrying round bells +within their foreskins, which is not permitted to the king and +priests. They do not rear any poultry or pigeons about their houses. +The kingdom is 250 leagues in length and 80 in breadth[23].</p> +<blockquote>[22] The author must here mean Cochin China by the coast +of Patane.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[23] About 1000 by 320 English miles.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Elephants are so numerous in this country, that on going to war, +the king is said to carry 30,000 into the field, besides others which +are left in the several garrisons. This king has great pride in the +possession of a white elephant, having red eyes, which glare like a +flame of fire. In this country there is a certain species of small +vermin, which attaches itself to the trunks of the elephants, to suck +their blood, by which many elephants die. The skull of this +insect[24] is so hard as to be impenetrable to a musket shot. They +have on their livers the figures of men and women, which the natives +call Toketa, resembling a mandrake; and it is affirmed, that whoever +has one of these about him cannot be killed by an iron weapon. They +have also wild kine in this country, in the heads of which certain +stones are found, which have the virtue to bring good fortune to +merchants.</p> +<blockquote>[24] This story of the skull of a small insect is quite +unintelligible, and must have been misunderstood entirely by Hakluyt, +the translator: It is the Elephant, probably, that is here +meant.--E.</blockquote> +<p>After the return of Duarte Fernandes from Siam, Albuquerque sent a +knight named Ruy Nunnez de Acunha, as ambassador to the king of the +Sequies, the country we now call Pegu. He went in a junk of the +country, passing Cape Rachado, and thence to the city of Pera, on the +river Salano, on which river are many other villages, where Duarte +had been before; and he afterwards went by Tanaçerim to the +city of Martavan, in 15° N. and the city of Pegu in 17° N. +This was the first Portuguese who travelled in that kingdom, and who +brought back a good account of the country and people.</p> +<p>In the end of 1511, Albuquerque sent three ships to the islands of +Banda and Molucca, under command of Antonio de Breu and Francis +Serrano, with an hundred and twenty men. Passing through the Straits +of Saban, and along the island of Sumatra, and other islands on their +left, named the Salites, they came to the islands of Palimbang and +Lu-Suparam, whence they sailed by the noble island of Java, and +eastwards between it and the island of Madura. In this last island +the men are strong and warlike, and care little for their lives, even +their women going out to war. These people are almost continually +engaged in war and mutual slaughter, like the Mocos, and seem to +place their only delight in bloodshed. Beyond Java they came to +another island called Bali, and afterwards to Avajave, Sambaba, +Solor, Galao, Malva, Vitara, Rosalanguin, and Arus; whence are +brought beautiful birds, in much estimation on account of their +feathers[25]. Beyond these islands they came to numbers of others, +lying in 7 or 8 degrees of south latitude, all so close together as +to appear like one entire mainland, and stretching near 500 leagues +in length. The ancient cosmographers describe all these islands by +one general name, the <i>Javos</i> ; but more recent knowledge has +found that they have all separate names. Beyond these, and more to +the north, there are other islands, which are inhabited by a whiter +people, clothed in shirts, doublets, and trowsers, something like the +Portuguese dress, and who also have silver money. Their magistrates +carry red staves in their hands, as badges of command, and seem to +have some affinity in this respect with the people of China. There +are other islands in these parts, or which the inhabitants are red; +and it is reported they are the same people with the Chinese.</p> +<blockquote>[25] Probably the bird of Paradise.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>De Breu went northwards to the small island of Gumnape or Ternate, +from the highest part of which flakes or streams like fire fell +continually into the sea. He went thence to the islands of Burro and +Amboyna, and came to anchor in the haven of Guliguli, where, in a +village near a river, they found dead men hanging up in the houses, +as the people are cannibals. Here they burnt the ship of Serrano, as +she was old and rotten; and going to a place on the other side of the +island, in 8° S. they loaded cloves, nutmegs, and mace, in a junk +or barque, which Serrano bought. It is said, that in an island not +far from Banda, there are immense quantities of snakes, especially in +a cave in the centre of the island. The same is said of Formentera, +in the Mediterranean, anciently Ophiusa, between Majorca and Minorca. +On their return from Banda towards Malacca, in 1512, Francis Serrano +perished with his junk on the flats called Baxos de Luçapinho, +nine or ten of the Portuguese crew escaping to the island of +Mindanao, who were sent for by the kings of the Moluccas. These were +the first of the Portuguese who came to the Islands of Cloves, which +are in lat. 1° N. and they remained there seven or eight years. +Some Portuguese and princes of the Moors once endeavoured to go near +that part of the isle of Ternate which throws out fire, but could not +accomplish it. But Antonio Galvano accomplished this enterprise, and +found a spring so cold that he could not bear his hand in the water, +nor suffer any of it in his mouth, though almost directly under the +line.</p> +<p>In these Molucca islands, there are certain men who have spurs on +their ancles like cocks; and I was told by the king of Tidore, that +in the islands of Batochina, there are people with tails, who have a +lactiferous nipple on the scrotum. There are small hens also in these +parts, many of which are black in the flesh, and lay their eggs, +larger than those of ducks, in holes above nine feet under ground. +They have likewise hogs with horns, and excellent talking parrots, +which they call <i>Noris</i> . There is also a river so very hot that +it takes off the skin of any living creature that bathes in its +waters, and yet contains living fish. Their crabs are very sweet to +eat, yet their claws are so strong that they will break the iron of a +pickax; and there are small hairy crabs in the sea which are rank +poison, as whoever eats of them immediately dies. In these seas are +certain oysters, called <i>Bras</i> , having shells of so great size, +that they might serve as fonts for baptizing children. In these seas +there are certain living stones, which grow and increase like plants, +of which excellent lime may be made by burning in the usual manner, +when taken fresh from the sea; but, if allowed to remain long in the +air, it loses all its strength, and will not afterwards burn into +line. There is a tree which bears flowers only at sunset, which fell +off immediately when blown. There is likewise a certain fruit, +whereof if a woman who has conceived shall eat, the child by and by +moves. There is, farther, a certain herb which followeth the sun, and +removes after it, which is a strange and marvellous thing.</p> +<p>In 1512, while on the voyage from Malacca to Goa, the ship in +which Albuquerque embarked was lost. Simon de Andrada and a few +Portuguese were driven among the Maldivia islands, where they +remained till they learnt the fate of the viceroy. These islands are +low, small, and very numerous, and are full of palm trees, +or <i>Cocoas</i> , which are good against all kinds of poison.</p> +<p>In this year 1512, John de Solis, a native of Lisbon, and chief +pilot to King Ferdinand, went from Spain by license to discover the +coast of Brazil. Following the course of the Pinsons, he went to Cape +St Augustine, and thence sailed along the whole coast to the harbour +of De Lagoa; and in lat. 35° S. he discovered a river called +Parana-guaçu, or the Great River, and from signs of silver he +gave it the name of Rio de la Plata, or the River of Silver. It is +even said that he went farther at this time; and returning into +Spain, gave an account of his discovery to King Ferdinand, from whom +he demanded and obtained leave to colonize the country, and received +the appointment of governor. On this he provided three ships, and +returned to that country in 1515, but was slain by the natives. The +family of de Solis produced several great discoveries in these +parts[26].</p> +<blockquote>[26] P. Martyr, Dec. 3. c. 10.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year 1512, John Ponce de Leon, who had been governor +of the island of St John in the Antilles, armed two ships, with which +he went in search of the island of Boyuca, where it was reported +there was a spring which made old men young again; but after +searching for six months he could not find it. In 25° N. he +discovered a point of the continent upon Easter-day, which he called +the country of Florida; and because he expected the land would yield +gold and silver, he begged it from King Ferdinand, but died in the +discovery of the country, as many had done before.</p> +<p>In the year 1513, Vasco Nunnes de Valboa, or Balboa, hearing of +the <i>South Seas</i> , determined to go thither; and being a man of +courage, though strongly dissuaded by several of his company, he +marched on the enterprize with 290 men. Leaving Darien on the first +of September, and taking some Indians along with him as guides, he +marched directly across the isthmus, sometimes without opposition, +and having at other times to fight his way. In a certain place called +Careca, he found some negroes with curled hair, who were captives +among the Indians. At length, on the 25th of the same month of +September, being the festival of St Michael, he came in sight of the +South Sea: He there embarked in a canoe, much against the will +of <i>Chiapes</i> , the cacique of that part of the coast, who +endeavoured to persuade him that the navigation was very dangerous; +but he persisted in his design, that he might be the first who had +navigated this new discovered sea, and came back in safety. He +returned thence to Darien, bringing with him a good store of gold, +silver, and pearls, which he had taken during the march; and for this +good service, he was much honoured and favoured by King +Ferdinand.</p> +<p>In February 1513, Alphonsus de Albuquerque went from Goa towards +the Straits of Mecca with twenty ships, and arriving at the city of +Aden, battered it with his cannon, and passing the Straits entered +the Red Sea, and wintered at the island of Camaran. This was +the <i>first</i> Portuguese captain who gave an account of the Red Sea +and the Persian Gulf, which are of great importance in regard to +trade.</p> +<p>In May 1514, Pedro Arias de Avila was sent out from St Lucar, as +governor of Castilia del Oro, or the Golden Castile, for so the +Spaniards named the countries of Darien, Carthagena, and Uraba. He +carried with him fifteen hundred men and seven ships; and Vasco +Nunnes de Balboa, who discovered the South Seas, was sent out at the +same time as admiral of the coasts of that newly discovered sea. In +the beginning of the year 1515, de Avila sent Gaspar Morales with 150 +men to the Gulf of St Michael, to discover the islands of +Tararequi[27], Chiapes, and Tumaccus. A cacique, the friend of +Balboa, gave him many canoes, or boats made of one tree, with which +they passed to the Isle of Pearls, where they were at first resisted; +but Chiapes and Tumaccus pacified the cacique of that island, who +submitted himself, and received baptism, taking the name of the +governor, Pedro Arias, and presented Morales with a basket of pearls +weighing 110 pounds, some of which were as large as hazel nuts, +weighing 20, 25, 26, and even 31 carats, each of four grains; and one +of these pearls was sold for 1200 ducats. In March 1515, de Avila +sent Gonsalva de Badajos, with 80 soldiers, to discover new lands, +who went to Nombre de Dios, where he was joined by Lewis de Mercado +with a reinforcement of 50 men. They resolved to proceed to the +south, as the richest country; and taking some Indians as guides, +they found some slaves along the coast marked with the irons used by +the Portuguese. They marched a considerable way through the country +with much difficulty, but made a considerable booty in gold, and took +forty serviceable slaves. But a caçique, named Pariza, +attacked them and slew or took most of the party. After this the +governor sent out his son, John Arias de Avila, to be revenged and to +explore the country. This party went westwards to Cape de Guerra, in +little more than 6° N. and thence to Punta de Borica, and to Cape +Blanco, in 8° 30' N. having, as they affirm, discovered 250 +leagues; and besides this they founded the city of Panama.</p> +<blockquote>[27] The island of Tararequi is in lat. 5° +N.</blockquote> +<p>In the month of May 1515, Alphonsus de Albuquerque, the Portuguese +viceroy of India, sent Fernando Gomes de Limos from Ormus, as +ambassador to the Xec or Shah Ismael, king of Persia; and it is said +they travelled 300 leagues through a country as pleasant as France. +This Xec, or Shah Ismael, went much a-hunting, and was fond of trout +fishing, which are abundant in the rivers of his kingdom. The women +of Persia are the most beautiful in the world; insomuch that +Alexander the Great used to call them the <i>golden-eyed women</i> . In +this year died the viceroy Alphonsus de Albuquerque, who was +succeeded by Lopez Suares.</p> +<p>In 1516, Fernando Perez de Andrada was commanded by the king of +Portugal to pass to the great kingdom of China and likewise to +Bengala, with a dispatch to John Coelo, who was the first Portuguese +who drank of the waters of the Ganges. In April 1517, Andrada took in +a loading of pepper at Cochin, as the principal merchandize for sale +in China, for which country he sailed with eight ships, four +Portuguese and four Malayans. On his arrival in China, finding he +could not be allowed to land without an embassy, he dispatched Thomas +Perez, with instructions for that purpose, from the city of Canton, +where they came to anchor. The embassy travelled 400 leagues by land +to the city of Pekin, where the king resided; for China is the +largest kingdom in the world. From Sailana in the south, which is in +20° N. it reaches to the latitude almost of 50° N. which must +be 500 leagues in length, and it is said to be 300 leagues in +breadth[28]. Fernando Perez was fourteen months in the isle of +Veniaga, endeavouring to acquire as much knowledge as he could of the +country; and although one Raphael Perestrello had formerly been +there, in a junk belonging to some merchants of Malacca, yet Perez +certainly deserves the merit of this discovery; as well because he +acted by the command of the king his master, as in discovering so +much by land by means of Thomas Perez, and by sea through George +Mascarenhas, who sailed to the city of Foquiam, in 24° N.</p> +<blockquote>[28] These leagues are elsewhere explained as 17-1/2 to +the degree, or about 4 English miles: Hence the estimate of Galvano +is 2000 miles long by 1200 miles broad; certainly a very extensive +dominion. China Proper may be said to extend in length from lat. +27° to 41° N. and in breadth from long. 97° to 121° +E. not very inferior to the above estimate; but including the +immeasurable bounds of its dependencies, Chinese Tartary, Thibet, and +almost the whole of central Asia, it prodigiously exceeds the +magnitude here assigned by Galvano.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1517, in which Charles, afterwards emperor, came into +Spain, Francis Fernandes de Cordova, Christopher Morantes, and Lopez +Ochoa, armed three ships from Cuba, at their own expence, having also +with them a barque belonging to the governor Diego Velasques, with +which they came to land in Jucutan, in 20° N. at a place which +they called Punta de las Duennas, which was the first place in which +temples and houses of stone and lime had been seen in the new world. +The people here, who were better clothed than in any other place, had +crosses which they worshipped, and set upon the tombs of their dead, +whence it appeared as if they had formerly been in the faith of +Christ; and some suppose that this had been the situation of +the <i>seven cities</i> . In this expedition they were upon the north +coast of Jucutan, being the first discovery of New Spain, or Mexico; +and they returned thence to Cuba with some samples of gold, and some +prisoners.</p> +<p>In the year 1518[29], Lopez Suares commanded Don John de Silveira +to go and make peace with the Maldive islands, which he did +accordingly. From thence Silveira went to the city of Chatigam, or +Chittigong, on one of the mouths of the Ganges, under the tropic of +Cancer; for it is to be noted, that this river, and the Indus, which +lies 100 leagues beyond Diu, and the river of Canton in China, all +fall into the sea under one parallel of latitude. Although, before +this period, Fernando Perez had been commanded to sail to Bengal, yet +Silveira must be looked upon as the actual discoverer of that +country; for he went as captain-general, and remained there long, +making himself acquainted with the manners of the people, and the +commodities of the country.</p> +<blockquote>[29] Castagnada, I. 4. c. 36. 37. Osorius, I. 11. f. 315. +p. 2.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year 1518[30], Diego Velasquez, governor of the island +of Cuba, dispatched his nephew, John de Grisalva, on the first of +May, with four ships and two hundred soldiers, to discover Jucutan. +On the 3d of May, he fell in with the island of Cozumel, in 19° +north latitude, which he named Santa Cruz, because discovered on the +3d of May, being the anniversary of the holy cross. Grisalva coasted +along the land, on the west side of the bay of Honduras, and came to +an island, which he named Ascension, because discovered on Ascension +day. They went unto the end of that island, in 16° of latitude, +whence they came back, finding no passage[31], and proceeded to a +river in lat. 17° N. which they called the river of Grisalva. +They were boldly opposed by the people on this coast; yet they +brought thence some gold, silver, and feathers, and returned to Cuba. +In the same year, Francis Garay fitted out three ships from Jamaica +at his own expence, and went to Cape Florida, in lat. 25° N. +which seemed a most pleasant island; and thinking it better to people +islands than the firm land, because more easily conquered and kept +under subjection, he went on land; but the inhabitants of Florida +killed a great many of his people, and he was forced to re-embark and +go away. Sailing from thence he came to the river of Panuco, 500 +leagues from Cape Florida, sailing all the way along the coast, and +endeavouring to land in various places, but the natives repulsed him +in every place. Many of his people were killed and eaten by the +savages in Chila, the natives hanging up their skins in the temples +of their gods, as a memorial of their own valour. Yet Garay visited +this place next year, as he had seen some indications of gold and +silver, and even applied to the emperor to be appointed governor of +the coast he had discovered. In February 1519[32], Fernando Cortez +sailed from Cuba for the country now called New Spain, with eleven +ships and 550 Spaniards. He landed first in the island of Cozumel, +where he immediately destroyed all the idols, and planted crosses and +images of the Virgin on all the altars. From thence he went to the +Cabo de las Duennas, on the peninsula of Yucatan, and thence to the +river of Tabasco, where he attacked a city called Potoncion. This +place was surrounded with wood; the houses were built of stone and +lime, and roofed with tiles, and the people resisted the assailants +manfully; but St James appeared on horseback to the assistance of the +Spaniards, and they took the place. This, as the first town subdued +by them on the continent, they named Vittoria. From thence they went +to a place named St Juan de Vilhua, said to be 60 or 70 leagues from +Mexico, where one Tendilli was governor for King Muteçuma. +Though the Spaniards and he could not understand each other, yet +Tendilli gave them good entertainment. Cortes had twenty women along +with his expedition, one of whom, named Marine, was born in the +country of the Indians, and was the first native of New Spain who +received baptism. She and Anguilar served as interpreters between +Cortes and the natives. Tendilli sent immediate intelligence to +Muteçuma, that there had arrived in his country a bearded +people, for so they called the Castilians. On the reception of this +news, Muteçuma was greatly troubled, for his gods, or devils +rather, had revealed that a people of the description of these +Spaniards was to overthrow his law and dominion, and to become lords +of the country; wherefore Muteçuma sent gifts to the value of +twenty thousand ducats to Cortes, but refused any interview.</p> +<blockquote>[30] Pet. Mart. IV. iv. Gomar. II. xiv. and +xvii.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[31] The text is obscure, and seems to indicate that they +were unable to pass between the island of Ascension and the main of +Yucatan. The latitudes are extremely erroneous: Cozumel is in lat. +20° N. The island of Ambergris, perhaps the Ascension of the +text, is in 18° 30'. From errors in latitude and alterations of +nomenclature, it is often impossible to follow distinctly the routes +of these early voyagers.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[32] Pet. Mart. IV. vi. Gomar. II. xviii, +&c.</blockquote> +<p>As the ships could not ride in safety at St Juan de Vilhua, Cortes +sent Francis de Montejo, and the pilot Antonio Alaminos, in two +brigantines, to look out for a safe anchorage. They went to Panuco, +in lat. 23° N. whence they came back to Culvacan as a safer +harbour. But Cortes went by land westwards to a city named +Zempoallan, where he was well received. From thence he went to +Chiavitztlan, with the lord of which town, and of all the surrounding +country, he entered into a league against Muteçuma. On the +arrival of his ships at the appointed haven, he went there and built +a town, which he named <i>Villa rica de la Vera Cruz</i> . From thence +he sent a vessel to Spain with presents, and a letter to the Emperor +Charles V. giving an account of his proceedings, and of his +determination to visit Muteçuma, and soliciting a commission +as governor of the country[33].</p> +<blockquote>[33] Gomar. II. xxi, xxii, xxiii, xxiv.</blockquote> +<p>Before proceeding on his march to Mexico, Cortes destroyed all his +ships, lest his men might mutiny, as they seemed disposed; and +leaving 150 Spaniards in Vera Cruz, with as many Indians to serve +them, he began his march. Going first to Zempoallan, he learnt that +Francis Garay was on the coast with four ships, and he contrived to +inveigle nine of his men, from whom he understood that Garay, who had +been in Florida, was now at the river Panuco, where he had got some +gold, and meant to remain and build a town, now called Almeria. +Cortes destroyed the idols of Zempoallan, and overthrew the tombs of +their kings, whom the people worshipped as gods, and exhorted them to +worship the true God. He set out from Zempoallan for Mexico on the +16th of August 1519, and after three days march came to the city of +Zalapan, and thence to another named Sicuchimatl; at both of which +places he was well received, and was offered to be conducted to +Mexico, such being the orders of Muteçuma. Going from thence +he ascended a hill three leagues high, on which vines were seen +growing; and in another place he saw above a thousand load of wood +ready cut. Beyond this he passed a plain country, which he named +Nombre de Dios. At the foot of this mountain, he rested his troops at +a place called Teuhixuacan; whence, through a desert country, he came +to another mountain, which was covered with snow and excessively +cold, and where the troops rested in a town named Zacotlan. Marching +thus from town to town, he arrived at a territory called Tlaxcallan, +which was at war with Muteçuma; and as the people were +valiant, they fought against Cortes; but at length they agreed, and +formed a league with him against the Mexicans.</p> +<p>Thus, from country to country, he came at length within sight of +Mexico; and Muteçuma, being afraid, received him kindly, +giving him and all his people lodgings in the capital, and all things +necessary. After a time, fearing to be slain, Cortes made +Muteçuma prisoner, and brought him to his own quarters, +keeping him under a secure guard. Cortes inquired at Muteçuma +the extent of his dominions, where the mines of gold and silver were, +and the number of kings who dwelt in the land. And joining eight +intelligent Spaniards with an equal number of Indians, he sent them, +in four companies, to travel into four separate countries, Zucolla, +Malinaltepec, Tenich, and Tututepec. The messengers to Zucolla had 80 +leagues to travel, and those who went to Malinaltepec 70; both of +which provinces were under subjection to Muteçuma: they found +both of these countries fertile and well peopled, and they brought +back samples of gold, which the natives found in the rivers. The +country of Tenich was at war with Muteçuma, and would not +admit the Mexicans into their country; but they sent ambassadors to +Cortes with presents, offering him their amity, at which +Muteçuma was much displeased. Those who went to Tututepec, +near the South Sea, brought back samples of gold, and praised the +pleasantness of the country; reporting that there were many good +harbours on the coast, and they presented to Cortes a beautiful cloth +of cotton, on which the coast, with all its harbours and creeks, was +distinctly represented. But at this time, by the coming of Pamphilus +de Narvaez, the whole kingdom of Mexico was thrown into +confusion.</p> +<p>On the 10th August 1519, Fernando de Magellanes went from Seville +with five ships, on a voyage for the islands of, Malacca[34]. Going +along the coast of Brazil, he came to the Rio Plata, which had been +previously discovered by the Spaniards. Thence prosecuting his voyage +of discovery, he came to Port St Julians, in lat. 49° S. where he +lost one of his ships. With the remaining four he came to the straits +named after himself, in 52° 80' S. and wintered in that place, +where he and his people endured much distress from snow and ice, and +extreme cold. They found the people of the country of extraordinary +stature and great strength, insomuch that they took men by the legs, +and rent them asunder as easily as one of us could tear a hen in two. +These people, named <i>Pataganes</i> , but called <i>Morcas</i> by the +Brazilians, live on fruits and by the produce of the chase. In the +beginning of September of the following year, 1520, the weather +became somewhat temperate, and leaving Port St Julian, Magellanes +went to the straits which now bear his name; whence one of the ships +returned to Spain, of which Stephen de Porto, a Portuguese, was +captain and pilot. The other three passed through into a vast sea +called the <i>Pacific</i> ; where they found no inhabited land till +they arrived in lat. 13° N. when they came to certain islands +named <i>Los Jardines</i> . They sailed thence to the archipelago of St +Lazarus, where, in an island named <i>Matan</i> , Magellanes was slain +and his ship burnt. The remaining two ships went to Borneo, and +thence to the Moluccas, leaving many others discovered, which I do +not mention, because I have not seen any exact account of this +voyage[35].</p> +<blockquote>[34] This certainly ought to be called the Molucca +islands; but Galvano uniformly applies the same name, Malacca, both +to the spice islands and the city of Malacca on the +Continent.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[35] Gomar. IV. iii. Pet. Mart. V. vii.</blockquote> +<p>About this time Pope Leo X. sent Paulus Centurio on an embassy to +the great duke of Muscovy, requiring him to send an army along the +coast of Tartary into India; and the duke was almost persuaded to +have made the attempt, if certain inconveniencies had not +hindered[36].</p> +<blockquote>[36] Ramusio, I. 874.</blockquote> +<p>In February 1520, Diego Lopez de Sequeira, governor of India, +sailed by the strait of Mecca[37], carrying with him the ambassador +of Prester John and Roderigo de Lima, who was sent ambassador to that +prince. They came to the island of Maçua or Massoua, on the +African shore of the Red Sea, in lat. 17° N. where the +ambassadors and their Portuguese attendants were set on shore. Peter +de Covillan had been sent there formerly by John II. of Portugal; but +the best account of that country was furnished by Francis +Alvarez.</p> +<blockquote>[37] This seems to mean the Straits of Babelmandel. +Having lost sight of Prester John in Tartary, the Portuguese were +delighted with the discovery of a Christian king in Africa, the Negus +of Abyssinia; and transferred to him that popular +fable.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In this year 1520, the licentiate Lucas Vasques de Aillon, and +others of St Domingo, sent two ships to procure slaves at the Lucayos +or Bahama islands; but finding none there, they passed on along the +continent, beyond Florida, to certain countries called Chicora and +Gualdape, and to the river Jordan and Cape St Helena, in lat. 32° +N.[38]. The Spaniards landed here, and were hospitably received by +the natives, who furnished them with every thing they needed: but, +having inveigled many of the unsuspecting natives on board their +ships, they carried them away for slaves. In their way back to St +Domingo, one of these vessels was lost, and the other was in great +danger. On learning the news of this discovery, the licentiate Aillon +made application to the emperor for the government of that country, +where he expected to find much wealth, and received the +appointment.</p> +<blockquote>[38] These countries, with the river and cape mentioned +in the text, are now unknown, these arbitrary names having merged in +the nomenclature of more recent settlers. If the latitude be nearly +accurate, it may have been on the confines of Georgia and South +Carolina.--E.</blockquote> +<p>About this time, learning the success of Cortes in Mexico, and +that he had applied to the emperor for the commission of governor, +Diego Velasques, governor of Cuba, who considered that it ought to +belong to him, fitted out an armament of eighteen ships, under the +command of Pamphilus de Narvaez, already mentioned, with a thousand +men and eighty horses, whom he sent to Mexico in order to supersede +Cortes. Landing in the neighbourhood of Vera Cruz, he sent an order +to the garrison to receive him as governor; but they made his +messenger prisoner, and sent him to Cortes, then at Mexico. On this +Cortes wrote to Narvaez, desiring him not to raise any disturbance in +the country, and offering to submit to his authority if he held a +commission from the emperor. But Narvaez corrupted the people of the +country; upon which Cortes went from Mexico, and took Narvaez +prisoner in the town of Zempoallan, putting out one of his eyes. +After this the soldiers of Narvaez submitted to Cortes; who detached +two hundred soldiers to the river of Garay or Panuco, and a similar +detachment under John Vasquez de Leon to Cosualco. He sent likewise a +messenger to Mexico with an account of his victory; but the natives, +having risen in rebellion, killed his messenger.</p> +<p>Cortes now set forwards on his return to Mexico, with one thousand +foot soldiers and two thousand horsemen, and found Peter de Alvarado +and the garrison he had left in Mexico in charge of Muteçuma, +in safety. But the Mexicans continued their insurrection, and on one +occasion Muteçuma was killed by a stone thrown by one of his +own subjects. They then elected another king, and the Spaniards were +forced to evacuate the city with great difficulty and danger. Driven +out of Mexico, and having only 504 footmen and 40 horse remaining, +Cortes retired with much difficulty to Tlaxcallan, where he was well +received. He here mustered a force of 900 Spanish infantry and 80 +cavalry, and gathered 200,000 Indians among the friends and allies +whom he had secured, enemies of the Mexicans, and marched back to +Mexico, which he took in August 1521[39].</p> +<blockquote>[39] Gomar. II. l.</blockquote> +<p>In October 1521, Cortes sent 200 foot and 35 horse, with a number +of his Indian allies, under the command of Gonsalo de Sandoval, +against Tochtepec and Coazacoalco, which had rebelled, and which +Sandoval reduced to obedience. To retain this country under +subjection, he built a town called <i>Medelin</i> , 120 leagues from +Mexico, and another named <i>Santo Spirito</i> , on a river four +leagues from the sea[40]. In this year 1521, died Emanuel, king of +Portugal, and was succeeded by his son, John III.</p> +<blockquote>[40] Id. II. lx.</blockquote> +<p>In this same year, one of Magellan's ships sailed from Malacca +with a loading of cloves. They victualled at the island of Burro, and +went from thence to Timor, in lat. 11° S.[41]. Beyond this +island, about 100 leagues, they came to other islands, all inhabited, +one of which was called <i>Eude</i> . Passing on the outside of +Sumatra, they found no land till they arrived at the Cape of Good +Hope, where they took in wood and water; and sailing thence by the +islands of Cabo Verde, they arrived at Seville, where they were +received with great honour, both on account of their valuable cargo +of cloves, and because they had circumnavigated the whole +world[42].</p> +<blockquote>[41] Malacca of the text ought certainly to be Molucca: +Bouro is in lat. 3° 20' S. Timor between 8° 30' and 10° +20' S.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[42] Gomar. IV. viii.</blockquote> +<p>In January 1522, Gil Gonzales fitted out four ships from +Tararequi, on the South Sea, intending to discover the coast of +Nicaragua, and especially to search for a strait or passage, which +was said to communicate between the South and North Seas. Sailing +along the coast, he came to a harbour which he named St Vincent, +where he landed with 100 Spaniards, some of whom had horses, and +penetrated 200 leagues inland, whence he brought back to the value of +200 pesoes in gold. On his return to the harbour of St Vincent, he +found his pilot, Andrew Nigno, who had been to Tecoantepec, in lat. +16° N. and had sailed 300 leagues. From thence Gonzales returned +to Panama, and so overland to Hispaniola[43].</p> +<blockquote>[43] Id. VI. iv. li.</blockquote> +<p>In April 1522, the Trinity, commanded by Gonzala Gomez de +Espinosa, another of the ships of Magellan, sailed from Tidore for +New Spain. And, as the wind was scanty, they steered towards the N. +E. in lat. 16° N. where they found two islands, which they named +the Islands of St John. In lat. 20° N. they came to another +island, which they called <i>la Griega</i> , where some of the simple +natives came on board, whom they kept to shew in New Spain. +Continuing their course to the N. E. for four months, they came into +lat. 42° N. where they saw numbers of seals, and tunnies; and the +climate appeared to them so cold and inhospitable, that partly on +that account, and partly owing to contrary winds, they returned +towards Tidore, having been the first Spaniards who had been in so +high a northern latitude in these seas. On their return to Tidore, +they found one Antonio de Britto employed in building a fortress, who +took their goods from them, and sent forty-eight of them prisoners to +Malacca[44].</p> +<blockquote>[44] Gomar. IV. viii, and xii. Castagn. VI. +xli.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year 1522, Cortes was desirous to possess some +harbours on the South Sea, on purpose to open a trade with Malacca, +Banda, Java, and the other spice islands. For this purpose he sent +four Spaniards with Indian guides to Tecoantepec, Quahatemallan, and +other harbours, where they were well received, and whence they +brought back some of the natives to Mexico. These people were much +caressed by Cortes; who afterwards sent ten pilots to examine the +coast, but they could find no good harbour, after a survey of seventy +leagues. A cacique, named; Cuchadaquir, used them hospitably, and +sent two hundred of his people to Cortes with presents of gold and +silver; and the people of Tecoantepec did the same. Not long +afterwards, this friendly cacique sent to Cortes, requesting aid +against his neighbours, who warred against him. Cortes accordingly, +in the year 1523, sent Peter de Alvarado to his assistance, with 200 +foot and 40 horse, who built a town called St Jago, in which he left +a garrison. The caciques of Tecoantepec and Quahutemallan inquired at +Alvarado concerning certain <i>sea monsters</i> that had been on their +coast the year before; meaning the ships of Gil Gonzales de Avila, at +which they had been much amazed; and they wondered still more on +being informed that Cortes had many such, and much larger than those +they had seen. They displayed a painting of a mighty carak, having +six masts, with sails and shrouds, and having armed horsemen on +board[45]. In May 1523, Antonio de Britto, the Portuguese governor of +the Molucca isles, sent Simon de Bru to discover the passage from +thence by the island of Borneo to Malacca. They came in sight of the +islands of Manada and Panguensara, and thence through the strait of +Treminao and Taquy to the islands of St Michael, in 7° S. and +then to the island of Borneo, where they came in sight of <i>Pedra +Branca</i> , or the <i>white stone</i> ; whence, passing through the +strait of Cincapura, they came to the city of Malacca[46].</p> +<blockquote>[45] Gomar. VI. xii.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[46] Castagn. VI. xlii.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year 1523, Cortes went with 300 Spanish foot, 150 +horse, and 20,000 Mexicans, to make a complete discovery and conquest +of Panuco, and to punish the inhabitants for having killed and +devoured the soldiers of Francis Garay. The natives resisted him, but +were overthrown; and to keep the country under subjection, he built a +town on the river, near Chila, which he named Santo Stephano del +Puerta, in which he left a garrison of 100 foot and 30 horse, under +the command of Peter de Valleia. In this expedition he lost many of +his people, both Spaniards and Mexicans, and several horses[47].</p> +<blockquote>[47] Gomar. II. lxi. The text, in Hakluyt's translation, +has the absurd number of 76,000 Castilians lost in this war; 76 is a +more probable number, and is considerable out of his small force: +yet, the text may mean 76,000 <i>Castellans</i> of gold, as the sum +expended on the expedition; and which Hakluyt, or his printer, +changed to that number of <i>Castilians</i> .--E.</blockquote> +<p>In this same year 1523, Francis de Garay, having a commission from +the emperor as governor of all the coast he had discovered from +Florida to Panuco, fitted out nine ships and two brigantines, with +850 soldiers and 150 horses, on purpose to take possession of his +government. Some men joined him from Jamaica, where he had furnished +his squadron with warlike ammunition; and sailing thence to the +harbour of Xagua, in the island of Cuba, he there learnt that Cortes +had taken possession of the coast of Panuco. That he ought not meet +with the fate of Narvaez, he sent the doctor Zuazo to Mexico, to +endeavour to enter into treaty with Cortes. Garay arrived in the Rio +de las Palmas on St Jameses day, and sent Gonçalo de Ocampo up +the river to explore the country, who reported, on his return, that +the country was bad and desert. Yet Garay landed with 400 foot +soldiers and some horse, and commanded John de Grijalva, to explore +the coast, while he marched by land to Panuco, in which march he +crossed a river to which he gave the name of Rio Montalto. In this +march he came to a large town, in which he found much poultry, to the +great refreshment of his troops. Here, likewise, he took some of the +inhabitants of Chila, whom he employed as messengers to different +places. After a long and difficult march, he arrived at Panuco, but +found no provisions; the country having been exhausted in the war +with Cortes, and by being plundered by the soldiers. From this place +he sent Gonçalo de Ocampo to St Stephano, or Istevan del +Puerto, to inquire if the garrison would submit to his authority. +They sent him a favourable answer; but, by means of an ambush, they +made forty of his cavalry prisoners, alleging that they had come +unwarrantably to usurp the government which belonged to another. +Besides this misfortune, Garay lost four of his ships, by which he +was greatly disheartened. While Cortes was preparing an expedition to +Panuco, to resist Garay, Francis de las Casas and Roderigo de la Paz, +brought letters-patent to Mexico, by which the emperor gave him the +government of New Spain, including Panuco. On this he desisted from +going personally on the expedition, but sent Pedro de Alvarado with a +respectable force, both of infantry and cavalry, to defend his +government against aggression, and dispatched Diego de Ocampo to +communicate the letters-patent to Garay; who thought it better for +him to yield himself to Cortes, and went accordingly to +Mexico[48].</p> +<blockquote>[48] Gomar. Conqu. de Mex. f. 226.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year, 1523, Gil Gonçales de Avila, discovered +and peopled a town called <i>San Gil da Buena-vista</i> , in lat. +14° N. almost in the bottom of the bay of Ascension or +Honduras[49]. Likewise, on the 6th December of this year, Peter de +Alvarado was sent by Cortes from Mexico with 300 foot, 170 horse, +four field-pieces, and some Mexican nobles, to discover and conquer +Quahutemallan, Utlatlan, Chiassa, Xochnuxco, and other towns towards +the South Sea. After a most fatiguing march of 400 leagues, passing +by Tecoantepec to Xochnuxco, he discovered and conquered the whole of +that country, where he built a city called St Jago de Quahutemallan, +now Guatimala, of which and of the country he subdued, he is said to +have got the government. In this expedition they passed some rivers, +the water of which was so hot that they could scarce endure to wade +them. They found likewise certain hills which produced alum, and one +out of which a liquor like oil distilled; likewise sulphur in great +abundance, from which the Spaniards made excellent gunpowder[50]. On +the 8th December of the same year, Cortes sent Diego de Godoy, with a +hundred foot, thirty horse, two field-pieces, and many friendly +Indians, to Spiritu Santo; where, joining the captain of that town, +they went to Chamolla, the capital of a province of the same name, +which they reduced under subjection[51].</p> +<blockquote>[49] Id. 242. This bay reaches no farther to the S. than +148 10' N.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[50] Id. f. 229. 230.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[51] Id. f. 233.</blockquote> +<p>In February 1524, Cortes sent Roderigo Rangel, with 150 Spaniards, +and many Tlaxcallans and Mexicans, against the Zapotecas and +Nixtecas, and other provinces not yet well discovered. They were at +first resisted, but soon defeated the natives, and reduced the +country to subjection. In the same year, Roderigo de Bastidas was +sent to discover and reduce the country of Santa Martha; but refusing +to allow the soldiers to plunder a certain town, he was assassinated +in his bed by Peter Villaforte, formerly his fast friend, who joined +in the conspiracy against him. Pedro de Lugo and his son Don Alfonso +were afterward governors of that place, where they conducted +themselves as covetous tyrants, and became much disliked[52]. In the +same year, the licentiate Lucas Vasques de Aillon obtained the +government of Chicora from the emperor, on which he fitted out some +vessels from St Domingo, and proceeded to explore and colonize that +country; but he was lost with all his people. I know not how it +should have happened, except by the righteous judgment of God, that +so little should now remain of all the gold and precious stones which +were got in the Antilles by the Spaniards; but much the greater part +has been dissipated to little purpose, and nothing great or valuable +has ensued from the discovery[53].</p> +<blockquote>[52] Gomar. Conqu. f. 234. and Hist. Gen. III. +xxi.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[53] Id: Hist. Gen. II. vii.</blockquote> +<p>In this same year, 1524, Cortes sent a fleet under the command of +Christopher de Olid, to Cuba, to transport provisions and ammunition +to Mexico, which had been purchased there by Alonso de Contreras; and +Olid had orders to discover and colonize the country about Cape +Higueras, and the Coast of Honduras, and likewise to send Diego +Hartado de Mendoça by sea, in search of a strait towards +Darien, which was reported to pass that way into the South Sea, which +object of research had been commanded by the emperor to be attended +to. He sent also two ships from Panuco, to explore the coast from +thence to Florida; and he commanded other vessels to examine the +coast of the South Sea, between Zacatullan and Panama. On the arrival +of Olid at Cuba, he entered into a league with Diego Velasquez +against Cortes: and, instead of prosecuting the orders he had +received, he set sail for Puerto de Cavallos, in lat. 10° N. 54, +near which he built a town, which he named <i>Triumpho de la Cruz</i> . +He made Gil Gonzales de Avila prisoner, and killed his nephew, and +all the Spaniards who were with him, except one child; thus acting in +direct opposition to Cortes, who had expended, in fitting out the +present expedition, the sum of 80,000 castellans of gold, entirely to +gratify Olid[55]. On learning this treachery, Cortes went by land +from Mexico in the month of October 1524, to take revenge on Olid, +carrying with him a force of 300 Spaniards, part foot, and part +horse, and accompanied by Quahutimoc, king of Mexico, and many of the +chief Mexican nobles. On coming to the town of Spiritu Santo, he +procured ten guides from the caciques of Tavasco and Xicalanco, who +likewise gave him a map painted on cotton cloth, delineating the +situation of the whole country, from Xicalanco to Naco and Nito, and +even as far as Nicaragua, with their mountains, hills, fields, +meadows, rivers, cities, and towns; and Cortes ordered three ships +from the harbour of Medellin to follow him along the coast[56]. When +he had reached the city of Izancanac, Cortes learned that King +Quahutimoc and his Mexicans had conspired to betray or destroy him +and his Spaniards; wherefore he hanged the king and two of his +principal nobles. Cortes then proceeded to Mazatlan; and from thence +to Piaca, which stands in the middle of a lake, and is the chief city +of a province of the same name, and hereabout he began to learn +tidings of the Spaniards under Olid, of whom he was in search. From +thence he proceeded to Zuzullin, and came at length to Nito; from +whence he went to a bay on the coast, called St Andre, where, finding +a good haven, he built a town called Natividad de nuestra Sennora. He +went thence to Truxillo, on the coast of Honduras, where he was well +received by the Spanish settlers. While here, a ship brought +intelligence of an insurrection having broke out in Mexico during his +absence; on which, he ordered Gonsalo de Sandoval to march with his +company by land, from Naco to Mexico, by the ordinary and safest road +of Quahutemallan, or Guatimala, towards the South Sea; and, leaving +his cousin Férdinando de Saavedra to command in Truxillo, he +went himself by sea along the coast of Yucutan to Chalchicocca, now +called St Juan de Ullhua, and thence to Medellin and Mexico, where he +was well received. Cortes was absent eighteen months on this +expedition, during which he travelled 500 leagues[57], and suffered +many hardships.</p> +<blockquote>[54] In this latitude, on the shore of Costa Rica, there +is a town now called Porto Cartago; but whether that indicated in the +text it is difficult to say, as Galvano is not always perfectly +accurate in his latitudes.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[55] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. lxv. and Conqu. f. +243.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[56] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. lxvi, and Conqu. f. +256-261.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[57] The Spanish leagues are 17-1/2 to the degree of +latitude, hence this march exceeded 2000 English miles.--E. Gomar. +Hist. Gen. II. lxvi. Id. Conqu. 246-273.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1525; Francis Pizarro, and Diego de Almagro, went from +Panama to discover Peru, on the south of the fine, which they +called <i>Nueva Castillia</i> . Pedro Asias, governor of Panama, +refused to take any concern in this expedition, on account of certain +evil news which had been brought to him by Francis Vezerra. Pizarro +went first in a ship with 124 soldiers, and was followed by Almagro +with seventy men in another ship. Almagro came to Rio de San Juan, in +lat. 3° N., where he got 3000 pezoes of gold; and not finding +Pizarro, of whom he was in search, he lost heart, and returned to +Panama. Pizarro went first to the island of Gorgona, and thence to +the isle of Gallo, from whence he proceeded to the river called + <i>Rio del Peru</i> , in lat. 2° N. from which the rich and famous +country of Peru derives its name. He sailed thence to the river of St +Francis, and Cape <i>Passaos</i> , where he passed the equinoctial +line, and came to <i>Puerto Vejo</i> , in lat. 1° S. and sailed on +to the rivers of Chinapanpa, Tumbez, and Payta, in four or five +degrees of southern latitude, where he received intelligence +concerning King Atabalipa, and of the vast riches of his palace. On +receiving this intelligence, Pizarro returned to Panama, from whence +he went to Spain, where he solicited and obtained the government of +the rich country he had discovered; having spent above three years in +the discovery, with much labour and great danger[58].</p> +<blockquote>[58] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. i. and ii.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year, 1525, seven ships were fitted out from Spain, +under the command of Garcia de Loaisa, for a voyage to the Molucca +Islands. Sailing from Corunna, and passing by the Canaries, they came +to the coast of Brasil, where they discovered an island in lat. +2° S. which they named St Matthew; and, finding orange trees, +hogs, and European poultry, they concluded it to be inhabited; but, +by inscriptions oil the bark of trees, they learnt that the +Portuguese had bean there seventeen years before. A small pinnace of +this squadron, commanded by Juan de Resaga, passed the straits of +Magellan, and ran along the whole coast of Peru and New Spain, +carrying the intelligence to Cortes of the expedition of Loaisa to +the Moluccas: But the admiral ship only of this squadron, commanded +by Martin Mingues de Carchova, arrived at its destination, where the +Moors of the Moluccas received the Spaniards hospitably; Loaisa and +all the other captains died by the way.</p> +<p>In the same year Stephen Gomez sailed from Corunna, to endeavour +to discover a strait in the northern parts, by which ships might sail +from Europe to the Moluccas. This person had been refused employment +in the fleet commanded by Loaisa; but the Count Ferdinando de +Andrada, with the Doctor Beltram, and a merchant named Christopher de +Sarro; fitted out a galleon for him at their joint expence. He went +first to the island of Cuba, whence he sailed to Cape Florida, +sailing only by day, as he was ignorant of the coast. He passed Cape +Angra, and the river Enseada, and so went over to the other side; and +it is reported that he came to Cape Razo[59] in lat. 46° N. +whence he returned to Corunna with a cargo of <i>slaves</i> . But news +spread through Spain that he was come home laden with <i>cloves</i> , +which occasioned much joy at the court of Spain, till the mistake was +discovered. Gomez was ten months engaged in this voyage. In this same +year, Don George de Menesses, governor of Molucca, and Don Henriques, +sent a vessel on discovery towards the north, commanded by Diego de +Rocha, having Gomez de Sequiera as pilot. In lat. 9° or 10° +N. they discovered several islands in a group, which were called the +islands of Sequiera; whence they returned to the island of +Bato-China. In 1526, Sebastian Gabota, chief pilot to the emperor, a +native of Bristol in England, whose father was a Venetian, sailed +from Seville with four ships, intending to have gone to the Moluccas +by a western course. Gabota came to Pernambuco in Brasil, where he +waited three months for a favourable wind to get round Cape St +Augustine. In the Bay of <i>Patos</i> , or of ducks, the admirals ship +was lost; and despairing of being able to accomplish the voyage to +the Moluccas, he built a pinnace for the purpose of exploring the Rio +Plata. Gabota accordingly ran sixty leagues, or 120 miles up that +river; when coming to a bar, he left the large ships there, and went +with the boats of the squadron 120 leagues, or 480 miles farther up +the river Parana, which the inhabitants considered to be the +principal river. He here constructed a fort, and remained in that +place above a year; From thence he rowed still farther up the Parana, +till he came to the mouth of another river called <i>Paragioa</i> , or +Paraguay; and, perceiving that the country produced gold and silver, +he kept on his course, sending one of the boats in advance, which was +taken by the natives. On this, Gabota thought it more prudent to +return to his fort, after having penetrated 200 leagues or 800 miles +up this river. He took on board the people he had left at the fort, +and returning to the ships at the bar, sailed back to Seville in +1530. He reported that the Rio Plata was navigable for a great way, +and that it rises from a lake named <i>Bombo</i> [60] in the kingdom +of Peru, whence, flowing through the valleys of Xauxa, it receives +the rivers Parso, Bulcasban, Cay, Parima, Hiacax, and several others, +by which its waters are greatly increased. It is also said that the +river of San Francesco comes from the same lake, which likewise is +very great; because rivers that flow from lakes are larger than those +which proceed from springs.</p> +<blockquote>[59] The ambiguity of the language is here utterly +inexplicable.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[60] Meaning probably the lake of Titicaca in Peru. It is +hardly necessary to say that this slight survey of the Plata must be +erroneous, especially in its reports. The Rio San Francisco, alludes +to one of the sources of the Great Maranon, or river of the +Amazons.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1527, Panfilo de Narvaez sailed from St Lucar de +Barameda with five ships, having 600 soldiers, 100 horses, and great +abundance of provisions, ammunition, and all other necessaries, to +take possession of Florida, as far as the river Palmas, of which he +was appointed governor. Not being able to land at the place he +wished, he went on shore with 300 of his soldiers, some horses, and a +supply of provisions, nearer Cape Florida, ordering the ships to +proceed to the river Palmas, in which voyage they were nearly all +lost Those who escaped shipwreck, suffered extreme hardships from +hunger and thirst on a dry barren island, called Xamo by the natives, +and which the Spaniards named <i>Malhada</i> . In this island they were +attacked by the natives, and many, both of the Spaniards and natives, +were slain.</p> +<p>Narvaez, and his people, saw some gold among the Indians of +Florida, who said they had it from <i>Apalachen</i> . He therefore went +to that town in search of gold, where they found abundance of bay +trees, and others of many different kinds, and plenty of beasts and +birds, but neither gold nor silver. From Apalachen, he went to a town +called Aute, and from: thence to Xamo, a poor and barren country. In +this place, the natives requested the Spaniards to cure their sick, +of whom they had great numbers; and the Spaniards being in extreme +poverty and distress, prayed for the sick, and used such endeavours +as were in their power, towards their relief: And it pleased God that +many, both of the sick, and those who were ill from wounds, +recovered; nay, even one that was supposed to be dead, was, by them, +restored to life. Owing to this, the Spaniards were greatly esteemed, +and even reputed as gods, so that the people offered them no injury, +and even gave them such things as they had. By these means, they +passed through many countries, and many strange nations, differing +from each other in language, customs, and dress, and came at length +among a people that lived continually among their flocks and herds, +like the Arabs. Many of the tribes through which they travelled were +so poor as to feed on snakes, lizards, spiders, ants, and all kinds +of vermin, yet were well contented with their hard fore, and were +much given to singing and dancing. This people are reported to +purchase all their wives from their enemies, and to kill all their +own daughters, lest by marrying into hostile tribes their enemies +should increase in numbers. In some places, the women continued to +suckle their children till they were ten or twelve years old; and +there were certain men, being hermaphrodites, who married each other. +In this manner, the Spaniards penetrated above 800 leagues, or 3200 +miles through the country, till at length, not above seven or eight +of the whole armament reached the city of St Michael of Calvacan, in +lat. 23°. N. or higher, on the coast of the South Sea[61].</p> +<blockquote>[61] Ramusio, III. 310. Ramusio gives a long and minute +account of this unfortunate expedition, entitled, Relation made by +Alvaro Nunez, of what befel the armament sent to the <i>Indies</i> +(America) under Pamphilo Narvaez in the year 1527, to the end of +1536; when he returned to Seville with <i>three</i> only of his +companions.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>Learning, as has been formerly mentioned, that Garcia de Louisa +had passed through the Straits of Magellan, on a voyage to +the <i>Islands of Cloves</i> , Cortes fitted out three ships from +Civitlanejo, now St Christophers, in lat. 20°. N. on the western +coast of New Spain, intending to send there in search of Loaisa, and +that they might discover the way to the Moluccas, and open up the +spice trade with New Spain. Leaving Civatlanejo, on All Saints day, +1527, under the command of Alvaro de Saavedra Ceron, the cousin of +Cortes, they fell in with the islands formerly discovered by +Magellan, which he had named <i>the Pleasures</i> ; whence they sailed +to the islands which had been discovered by Gomez de Sequeira, and +called by his name, but not knowing of this previous discovery, he +named them <i>Islas de los Reyes</i> , or the Isles of the Kings, +because discovered on Twelfth day. During this part of the voyage, +two ships of the squadron separated from Saavedra, and were never +more heard of. Sailing on from island to island, he arrived at the +Island of Candiga, where he ransomed two Spaniards for seventy +ducats, who had belonged to the crew of Loaisa, who was shipwrecked +in that neighbourhood. Saavedra reached the Moluccas in March 1528, +and anchored at the Island of Gilolo, where he found the sea calm, +the winds moderate, and no tempests; and he estimated the distance +from thence to New Spain at 2050 leagues, or 8200 miles. At this +period, Fernando de la Torre was governor of the Molucca islands, and +lived in the city of Tidore, having been chosen instead of Martin +Yniguez de Carquiçano, who was recently dead. Torre waged a +fierce war with Don George de Meneses, captain of the Portuguese; and +in a fight of the fourth of May, Saavedra took a Portuguese galliot, +and slew Fernando de Baldaya the captain. In June, Saavedra set sail +on his return towards New Spain, taking with him Simon de Brito, +Patalin, and other Portuguese prisoners; but, after several months +sail, he was forced back to Tidore by contrary winds, where Patalin +was beheaded and quartered, and the rest of the Portuguese prisoners +hanged. In this year, 1528, Cortes sent 200 infantry, and sixty +cavalry, with a large force of Mexicans, to explore and subdue the +country of the Chihimecas, which was reported to be rich in gold. He +then took shipping for Spain, where he landed with great pomp, +bringing with him 250,000 marks in gold and silver. On his arrival at +Toledo, where the emperor then resided; he was very graciously +received. The emperor created him marquis <i>della Valle</i> , and +married him to the lady Jane de Zuniga, daughter to the Conde de +Aguilar; after which he returned to resume the government of New +Spain.</p> +<p>Saavedra, of whom we have lately made mention, returned from the +Moluccas towards New Spain, in May 1529: and, during, the voyage, +came in sight of land, in lat. 2°S. He ran along the coast to the +S.S.E. from that time to the end of August, upwards of 500 leagues, +finding a clean coast, free from shoals and rocks, with good +anchoring ground, inhabited by a black people, with curled hair. The +people of the Moluccas named the inhabitants of this +coast <i>Papuas</i> because they are black with frizzled hair and both +Portuguese and Spaniards have adopted the same name. Having reached +to four or five degrees south of the line, he returned northwards; +and near the equinoctial he discovered an island, which he +called <i>de los Pintados</i> , or of the painted people, as the +inhabitants were of a white complexion, but marked with a hot +iron[62]; and, from various circumstances, he concluded that they +were originally from China. A kind of boat put off from the shore, +containing a number of these islanders, making many threatening signs +and gestures, as if ordering the Spaniards to go away from their +land, and even proceeded to throw stones from slings at the ship, +but, as the stones did no harm, Saavedra would not allow his people +to fire upon them. A little beyond this island, in 10° or 12° +of north latitude, they discovered a group, consisting of many small +low islands, covered with grass, and full of palm trees, to which +they gave the name of <i>Los Jardines</i> , or the gardens[63]. +Saavedra came to anchor in the midst of these islands, where he +remained several days, and concluded that the people had come +originally from China, but had, by long residence, degenerated into +lawless savages, using no labour or industry. They wear a species of +white cloth, made of grass, and are quite ignorant of fire, which put +them in great terror. Instead of bread they eat cocoas, which they +pull unripe, burying them for some days in the sand, and then laying +them in the sun, which causes them to open. They eat fish also, which +they catch from a kind of boat called <i>parao</i> , or <i>proa</i> , +which they construct with tools made of shells, from pine wood that +is drifted at certain times to their islands, from some unknown +regions. The wind and weather becoming more favourable for his return +to New Spain, Saavedra resumed his voyage thither, intending to have +gone to Panama, to unload the cloves and other merchandize he had +brought from the Moluccas. His purpose was to have carried this +merchandize in carts from Panama, about four leagues, or sixteen +miles overland, to the river Chagre, which is said to be navigable, +and which discharges itself into the North Sea not far from Nombre de +Dios, where the goods could be reshipped for Spain; by which means +all kind of goods might be brought from India in a shorter time, and +with less danger, than by sailing round the Cape of Good Hope, as the +voyage from the Moluccas to Panama is almost a perfectly straight +course between the line and the tropics. But, in the present voyage, +they were never able to procure a favourable wind, and were therefore +forced back to the Moluccas, where they arrived in great affliction, +as Saavedra died by the way[64]. Had Saavedra lived, he intended to +have opened a navigable communication from sea to sea, through the +land of Castilia del Oro and New Spain, which might have been done in +one or other of the following places:--1. From the gulph of St +Michael to Uraba, which is 25 leagues, or 100 miles. 2. From Panama +to Nombre de Dios, which is 17 leagues, or 68 miles, much the greater +part consisting of the river Chagre, navigable for small craft. 3. +Through the river Xaquator, now St Juan, in the province of +Nicaragua, which springs out of a lake that reaches to within three +or four leagues of the South Sea, and falls into the North Sea, being +navigable by large boats and lighters. 4. The other place is from +Tecoantepec, through a river, to Verdadera Cruz, in the bay of +Honduras[65].</p> +<blockquote>[62] The inhabitants of this island were most +probably <i>tatooted</i> , of which custom a particular description +will be given hereafter, in the particular voyages of discovery in +the South Sea.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[63] The longitudes being altogether neglected in these +relations by Galyano, it is impossible to form any conjecture as to +the islands indicated in text. They may possibly have belonged to the +Carolines of modern maps, which extend between long. 135° and +180° E. and about the latitudes of the text.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[64] The account which Galvano gives of this voyage is +very vague and inconclusive. We shall find afterwards that the +Spaniards found out the means of counteracting the perpetual eastern +trade winds of the Pacific within the tropics, by shaping a more +northerly course from the Philippine islands, where they established +the staple of their Indian commerce, between Acapulco and +Manilla.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[65] Galvano certainly mistakes here in assigning +Tecoantepec, which is at least 340 miles from the nearest part of the +bay of Honduras. If a navigation were practicable from Tecoantepec, +it would more probably be towards Tabasco, at the bottom of the bay +of Campechy. Perhaps he ought to have said from Guatimala to the gulf +of Dolse, at the bottom of the bay of Honduras. This splendid +navigation between the Atlantic and Pacific, within the tropics, like +that between the Mediterranean and Red Sea, still remains an unsolved +problem. It will be resumed hereafter, among the voyages and travels +to Spanish America.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1529, Damiano de Goes, a Portuguese, travelled over +all Spain, and went from Flanders into England and Scotland, being at +the courts of the kings of these countries; after that he returned +into Flanders, and travelled through Zealand, Holland, Brabant, +Luxemburgh, Switzerland, and through the cities of Cologne, Spires, +Strasburg, Basil, and other parts of Germany, and so back to +Flanders. He went thence into France, through Piccardy, Normandy, +Champagne, Burgundy, the dukedom of Bourbon, Gascony, Languedoc, +Dauphiny, and Savoy; passing into Italy by Milan, Ferrara, and +Lombardy, to Venice. Turning back, he passed through the territory of +Genoa, the dukedom of Florence, and all Tuscany, to Rome and Naples. +Thence back, through Italy, to Ulm, in Germany, and through Swabia, +Bavaria, Austria, Bohemia, Moravia, and Hungary, to the confines of +Greece. Thence through Poland, Prussia, and Livonia, to the great +dukedom of Moscovy; and thence back into Germany, and through the +dominions of the Landgrave, and the dukedom of Saxony, into Denmark, +Gothland, and Norway, penetrating to lat. 70°.N. In the course of +these travels, which occupied him during 22 years, he saw, spoke to, +and was conversant with, all the kings, princes, nobles, and chief +cities of all Christendom; for which reason, I thought the great +extent of his travels was worthy of remembrance.</p> +<p>In 1529 or 1530, Melchior de Sosa Tavarez went from Ormus to +Bassora, and the islands of Gissara, with some ships of war, and +sailed up to where the Euphrates and Tigris unite together, being the +first of the Portuguese who had sailed so far on the fresh water in +these parts. Not long after this, a Portuguese, named Ferdinando +Coutinho, being at Ormus, determined to return overland from thence +to Portugal. For this purpose he went to Arabia, and up the river +Euphrates, for the space of a month, and saw many countries and +kingdoms that had not been before visited by the Portuguese. He was +made prisoner at Damascus; whence he crossed the province of Syria to +the city of Aleppo. He had been at the holy sepulchre in Jerusalem, +in the city of Cairo, and at Constantinople, where the Great Turk +resides. After seeing that Court, he passed over to Venice; and, from +thence, through Italy, France, and Spain, to Portugal, he came back +to Lisbon. This person, and Damiano de Goes, were the most +adventurous of the Portuguese, who, in our time, had seen and +discovered the greatest extent of foreign realms for their own +satisfaction.</p> +<p>About the year 1530, Francis Pizarro, who has been already +mentioned as having gone to Spain to obtain the government of Peru, +returned to Panama, having procured all things as he wished, carrying +with him four brothers, Ferdinand, John, Gonsalvo, and Francis +Martines de Alcantara[66]. They were not well received by Diego de +Almagro and his friends, because Pizarro had not sufficiently +represented his merits in the discovery of Peru to the emperor, in +which he had lost an eye, but took the whole merit to himself. In the +end, however, they agreed; and Almagro supplied Pizarro with seven +hundred pezoes of gold, providing him likewise with provisions and +ammunition, and other necessaries towards his intended expedition +against Peru. Soon after this arrangement with Almagro, Pizarro, and +his four brothers before-mentioned, set out with such soldiers and +horses as they could procure on their expedition. Being unable, from +contrary winds, to reach Tumbez, where he proposed to have landed, he +was under the necessity of disembarking at the river of Peru; whence +he marched along the coast with great difficulty, on account of many +rivers and marshes, in which some of his men were drowned in +crossing. Coming to the town of Coache, they found much gold and +emeralds in that place; some of which they broke, to see if they were +perfect. From thence Pizarro sent twenty thousand pezoes of gold to +Almagro at Panama, to enable him to send supplies of men, horses, +ammunition, and provisions, and went from Coache to the haven +named <i>Porte Viejo</i> , where he was joined by Sebastian Benalcazar, +with all the supplies he had sent for. In the year 1531, after the +arrival of these reinforcements, Pizarro passed over from Porto Viejo +to the rich island of Puna, in the bay of Guayaquil, where he was +outwardly well received by the governor, who yet conspired to kill +him and his men; but Pizarro prevented him, and took many of the +Indians, whom he bound with chains of gold and silver. Such was the +jealousy of the governor of Puna, that he caused those who had the +charge of his wives to have their noses and privities cut off. In +this place, Pizarro found above six hundred prisoners belonging to +king Atabalipa, who was then at war with his eldest brother Guascar. +Pizarro set these prisoners at liberty, on promise of procuring him a +friendly reception in Peru; but they forgot their engagements +afterwards, and excited the people to war against the Spaniards. From +Puna, Pizarro sent three Spaniards to Tumbez, in Peru, to treat of +amity; but the Peruvians seized them, and put them to death. On +hearing of this cruel action, Pizarro crossed over to the main, and +made a sudden attack, during the night, on the city of Tumbez, +killing great numbers of the inhabitants. The remainder submitted and +made peace, presenting him large gifts of gold and silver, and other +riches. Pizarro then built a town on the river Cira, which he named +St Michael of Tangarara, which was the first habitation of the +Christians in these parts; and he appointed Sebastian de Benalcazar +to the command. After this, he made search for a secure haven on the +coast, and found one every way to his wish at Payta.</p> +<blockquote>[66] These seem all to have been brothers to Pizarro, and +named from the town of Alcantara in Spain.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year, 1531, Diego de Ordas went, with 600 soldiers and +35 horses, to settle the country on the Maranon, or river of the +Amazons; but, dying on the voyage, this expedition proved fruitless. +Afterwards, in the year 1534, Hierom Artal was sent thither with 130 +soldiers, yet he came not to the river, but formed settlements +at <i>St Michael de Neveri</i> , and other places in Paria. Aries +d'Acugna, a Portuguese gentleman, went likewise to the Maranon, with +ten ships, 900 men, and 130 horses, where he spent much, and did +little to purpose; but the greatest loser in this expedition was John +de Barros. This great river Maranon is in lat. 3° S.[67], its +mouth being 15 leagues, or 60 miles across, with many inhabited +islands, on which there are many trees producing incense, much larger +than those of Arabia. It produces gold and precious stones, and an +emerald was found there as large as the palm of the hand. The people +of that country make a kind of drink of a species of oats that are as +large as quinces.</p> +<blockquote>[67] The mouth of the Maranon is exactly under the +line.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Nunnez de Gusman was sent from Mexico, in 1531, with 500 soldiers, +half of whom were cavalry, and 6000 Indians to carry his baggage and +provisions, to discover and subdue the countries to the northwest of +the kingdom of Mexico. In this expedition he reduced the countries of +Xalisco, Ceintiliquipac, Ciametlan, Tovalla, Cnixo, Ciamolla, +Culhuacan, and other places. On this expedition he marched through +Mechuacan, where he acquired much gold, and 10,000 marks of silver. +To the country of Xalisco he gave the name of New Galicia, because it +was rugged and mountainous, and the people robust and hardy. He built +many towns in the conquered countries; particularly Compostella, +Guadalajara, after the place of his own birth in Spain, Santo +Espirito de la Conception, and St Michael, which last is in lat. +24° N. In 1532, Cortes sent Diego Hurtado de Mendoça in +two ships from Acapulco, which is 70 leagues from Mexico, on purpose +to explore the coast of the South Sea, as he had been ordered to do +by the emperor. Mendoça sailed from Acapulco to the harbour of +Xalisco, or Xalis, on the river Barania, in lat. 22° N. where he +wished to take in wood and water. But he was resisted there, by the +orders of Nunnes de Gusman, and obliged to proceed on his voyage. +Some of his men mutinied, and he put them all on board one of his +ships, that they might return to New Spain. Being in want of water, +these people put in at the bay of Vanderas, not far south from Xalis, +where they were all slain by the Indians. In this voyage of +discovery, Hurtado sailed 200 leagues along the coast, but did +nothing worthy of being recorded.</p> +<p>In 1533, Pizarro went from Tumbez to Caxamalca, where he took king +Atabalipa prisoner, who engaged to pay a vast sum in gold and silver +for his ransom. On purpose to procure this, Pedro de Varco and +Ferdinando do Sotto were sent to the city of Cusco, in lat. 17° +S.[68], a journey of 200 leagues, all upon causeways of stone, with +bridges wherever necessary, and having lodging-places at proper +distances for the conveniency of the <i>Yngas</i> , by which name the +kings of Peru are distinguished. The armies of the Peruvians are very +numerous, as they often bring more than 100,000 men into the field; +and they lodge on these causeways, as already mentioned, where they +always have abundance of provisions and other necessaries, as is said +to be the custom in China. Ferdinando Pizarro went with some horsemen +to Paciacama, 100 leagues from Caxamalca, to discover the country; +and, on his return, he learnt that Guascar, the brother of Atabalipa, +had been put to death by his command; and that Ruminaguy, the general +of the army of Atabalipa, had risen in arms, in the city of Quito, +against the Spaniards. After the reception of this intelligence, +Atabalipa was strangled by the orders of Pizarro[69]. After the death +of the two kings of the Peruvians, Pizarro continually extended his +authority over the dominions of Peru, and built many cities, towns, +and forts, in convenient situations, to hold the country under +subjection. He detached Sebastian de Benalcazar, whom he had before +made governor of St Michael de Tangarara, with 200 infantry and 80 +horse, to Quito, against Ruminaguy. Benalcazar proceeded successfully +in reducing the country to subjection from one city to another, +eastwards, for 120 leagues, not far from the equinoctial line; where +Peter Alvarado found certain mountains so cold, and loaded with such +quantities of snow, that 70 of his men were frozen to death. Having +reduced the city of Quito, he established himself and his people in +that place, calling it the city of St Francis; and it seemed very +strange to the Spaniards to find, in that country, abundance of +cattle, wheat, barley, and other plants, similar to those of Spain. +After sending Benalcazar to reduce the city of Quito, Pizarro himself +undertook to reduce the royal residence of Cusco, in about 13° +20' S. in which expedition he was opposed by Quisquiz, a Peruvian +general, whom he easily defeated; and he soon afterwards took +possession of Cusco, the exceedingly rich and wealthy capital of the +Peruvian monarchy. About this time Mango, a brother of Atabalipa, +joined Pizarro, who made him Ynga, or king of the country, in name +only, while he assumed the whole authority and revenues of the +kingdom to himself[70].</p> +<blockquote>[68] The latitude of Cusco is only 13° 30' +S.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[69] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. vi. vii. viii. ix</blockquote> +<blockquote>[70] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. xvi. xviii. xix.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year, 1534; Jaques Cartier, a native of Britanny, went +with three ships to the land of Corterealis[71], and the gulf of St +Lawrence, otherwise called <i>Golfo Quadrato</i> , or the square gulf, +which he fell in with in lat. 48° 30' N. He proceeded northwards +to the latitude of 51°, in the hope of being able to penetrate in +that direction to China, by a north- west passage, to bring drugs and +other merchandize from thence to France. Next year Cartier made a +second voyage to the same regions, and found the country pervaded by +many large rivers, and abounding in provisions. He sailed 300 leagues +up one of these rivers, in a south-west direction, and named the +country New France, now Canada; but finding the water to become +fresh, he was satisfied there could be no passage that way to the +South Sea; and having wintered in the country, he returned next year +to France.</p> +<blockquote>[71] So named from the two brothers, Caspar and Michael +Cortereal, who are said to have been lost on this coast of North +America in 1500, as formerly mentioned by Galvano.--E.</blockquote> +<p>About the end of the year 1535, or beginning of 1536, Don Anthony +de Mendoça came from Spain to the city of Mexico, as Viceroy +of New Spain, being appointed to supersede Cortes, the discoverer and +conqueror of that rich and extensive territory. At this time Cortes +was absent from the seat of government, having gone to Tecoantepec, +on purpose to fit out two ships on a voyage of discovery. These he +sent out under the command of Fernando de Grijalva and Diego Bezerra +de Mendoça, the former having a Portuguese pilot, named +Acosta, and the pilot to the latter being Fortunio Ximenez, a +Biscayan. On the first night after leaving Tecoantepec, the two ships +separated. Ximenez raised a mutiny against his captain, in which +Bezerra was slain, and many of the crew wounded. Some time +afterwards, Ximenez went on shore in the bay of Santa Cruz, for wood +and water, where he, and more than 20 of his people, were slain by +the Indians. Two of the mariners, who were in the boat, escaped to +Xalisco, and told Nunnes de Gusman, who commanded at that place, that +they had seen indications of pearls during the voyage. Gusman went +accordingly with, a ship in search of pearls, and explored above 150 +leagues of the coast[72].</p> +<blockquote>[72] Xalis, or Xalisco, the residence of Gusman is in +lat. 21°45'N. The mouth of the river St Francis, on the +north-eastern shore of the gulf of California, is in lat. 26° 40' +N. so that the discovery on the present occasion seems to have +comprised about 350 miles to the north of Xalis.--E.</blockquote> +<p>It is said that Grijalva sailed 300 leagues from Tecoantepec, +without seeing any land, except one small island in 20° N. to +which he gave the name St Thomas, as having been discovered on the +day of that saint[73].</p> +<blockquote>[73] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. Lxxiv. xcviii.</blockquote> +. +<p>In the year 1535, Pizarro built the city which he named <i>Ciudad +de los Reys</i> , or of the kings, on the river of Lima, in lat. +20° S; to which he removed the inhabitants of Xauxa, as a more +convenient situation for the residence; of the government, and in a +better country[74]. He built also the city of St Jago in Porto Viejo, +and many other towns, both along the coast and in the inland country; +and he procured from Spain horses, asses, mules, cattle, hogs, goats, +and sheep, to stock his territories, and many kinds of trees and +plants, such as rosemary, oranges, lemons, citrons, vines, and other +fruits, wheat, barley, and other grains, with radishes, and many +other kinds of vegetables, which were disseminated all over the +country[75]. in the same year, Diego de Almagro went from the city of +Cusco to the provinces of Arequipa and Chili, in lat. 30° S. The +march was of great length, and he discovered a great extent of +country; but he suffered great extremities of cold, hunger, and +fatigue, in consequence of the ruggedness of the mountains, and the +ice and snow, insomuch that many of his men and horses were frozen to +death. About this time Ferdinando Pizarro came from Spain to the city +of Lima, bringing with him the patent of Marquis of Atanillos, for +his brother, Francis Pizarro, and a commission for Diego de Almagro, +by which he was appointed governor of all the land he had hitherto +discovered, and 100 leagues beyond, under the name of the <i>New +kingdom of Toledo</i> . Ferdinando Pizarro went to the city of Cusco, +of which he was made governor, and John de Rada went into Chili to +Almagro, carrying with him the orders of the emperor. On receiving +the letters patent of the emperor, Almagro marched directly for +Cusco, which he considered to be included in his government, by which +a civil war was kindled between him and Pizarro. On this march he and +his people were severely oppressed by famine, and were even forced to +feed upon their horses which had died four months and a half before, +when on their march southwards into Chili[76].</p> +<blockquote>[74] Xauxa or Jauja, stands on the high table land of +Peru; Lima, or de los Reys, near the coast of the South Sea, in the +maritime valley, or low country, and on the river Rimac, called Lima +in the text.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[75] Gomar. Hist. Gen. IV. xxiii. and V. +xxii.</blockquote> +. +<blockquote>[76] Gomar. H. G. V. xxiv. and xxv. Almagro appears, both +on his march to Chili and back to Cusco, to have gone by the high +mountainous track of the Andes, and the carcases of his dead horses +must have been preserved from corruption amid the ever during ice and +snow of that elevated region.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In this same year, 1535, Nunnez d'Acunha, who was governor of +India for the crown of Portugal, while building a fortress, in the +city of Diu, sent a fleet, under the command of Vasquez Perez del San +Paio, to the river Indus, which is under the tropic of Cancer, 90 or +100 leagues to the north- west from Diu. He also sent an army against +Badu, the king of Cambaia, or Guzerat, of which a renegado named +Cosesofar was captain[77]. The fleet came to the bar of the great +river Indus in December, where the same phenomena were observed as +were formerly experienced by Alexander, according to the relation of +Quintus Curtius[78].</p> +<blockquote>[77] The text seems ambiguous, and it appears difficult +to say whether Galvano means, that Cosesofar, or Coje Sofar, was +captain under D'Acunha, or general of the Guzerat army, belonging to +Badu.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[78] This probably refers to the <i>Bore</i> , or great and +sudden influx of the sea, after a great recession.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year, Simon de Alcazava sailed from Seville, with two +ships and 240 men. Some say he was destined for New Spain, others for +the Moluccas, and others again that he meant to have proceeded for +China, where he had formerly been, along with Ferdinando Perez de +Andrada. However this may have been, he went first to the Canaries, +and from thence to the straits of Magellan, without touching at +Brazil, or any other part of the coast of South America, and entered +into these straits in the month of December, having contrary winds, +and very cold weather. Under these difficulties, the soldiers +entreated him to turn back, which he refused, and went into a haven +on the south side of the straits, in lat. 53° S. where he ordered +Roderigo de Isla to land, with 60 of the people, to explore the +country; but the people mutinied against Alcazava, and slew him; and, +having appointed such captains and officers as they thought proper, +they returned back. In their voyage homewards, one of the ships was +lost on the coast of Brazil, and such of the Spaniards as escaped +drowning, were killed and eaten by the savages. The other ship went +to St Jago, in the island of Hispaniola, and thence returned to +Seville, in Spain[79]. In the same year, Don Pedro de Mendoça +went from Cadiz for the river Plata, with twelve ships and 2000 men, +being the largest armament, both of ships and men, that had ever been +sent from Spain to the new world. Mendoça died on his return +to Spain, but most part of his men remained in the country on the Rio +Plata, where they built a large city, containing now 2000 houses, in +which great numbers of Indians dwell along with the Spaniards. From +this place they discovered and conquered the country to a great +extent, even to the mines of Potosi and the town of La Plata[80], +which is at the distance of 500 miles from Buenos Ayres.</p> +<blockquote>[79] Gomar. H. G. IV. xiii.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[80] Probably a mistake for La Paz, the principal town of +the north- western district, or mining province, belonging to the +Viceroyalty of La Plata.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Cortes having learnt, in the year 1536, that his ship, of which +Fortunio Ximenez was pilot, had been seized by Nunnez de Guzman, sent +three ships to Xalisco, while he marched thither by land with a +respectable force; and, on his arrival there, he found his ship all +spoiled and rifled. When his small squadron was come round to +Xalisco, he went himself on board, and left Andrew de Tapia to +command his land force. Setting sail from thence, he came, on the +first of May, to a point of land, which he named Cape St Philip, and, +to an island close by this cape, he gave the name of St Jago. Three +days afterwards, he came to the bay where the pilot Ximenez was +killed, which he named Bahia de Santa Cruz, where he went on land, +and sent out Andrew de Tapia to explore the country. Cortes again set +sail, and came to the river now called <i>Rio de San Pedro y San +Paulo</i> , where the ships were separated by a tempest. One was +driven to the bay of Santa Cruz, another to the river of Guajaval, +and the third was stranded on the coast near Xalisco, whence the crew +went overland to Mexico. After waiting a long while for his other two +ships, Cortes made sail, and entered into the gulf of California, +otherwise called <i>Mar Vermejo</i> , or the Vermilion Sea, and by +some, the sea of Cortes. Having penetrated 50 leagues within that +gulf, he espied a ship riding at an anchor, and, on his approach +towards her, had nearly been lost, if he had not received assistance +from that other ship. Having repaired his own ship, he departed from +thence with both ships; and, having procured provisions at a very +dear rate, at St Michael de Culiacan, he went to the harbour of Santa +Cruz, where he received information that Don Antonio de +Mendoça had arrived from Spain as Viceroy of Mexico. He +therefore left Francis de Ulloa with the command of his ships, +ordering him to proceed on discoveries; and going to Acapulco, he +received a messenger from Don Antonio de Mendoça, the new +viceroy, certifying his arrival, and the assumption of his authority. +Mendoça likewise sent him the copy of a letter from Francis +Pizarro, stating that Mango, the Inca of Peru, had risen in arms, and +assailed the city of Cusco with 100,000 fighting men, having slain +his brother, John Pizarro, and above 400 Spaniards, with 200 horses; +and that he himself, and the Spanish dominions in Peru, were in +imminent danger, unless speedily and effectually assisted.</p> +<p>Cortes, not yet resolved on submitting to the authority of +Mendoça, fitted out two ships, under the command of Ferdinando +de Grijalva and one Alvarado, on purpose to discover the route to the +Moluccas by the way of the equinoctial line, because the islands of +Cloves are under that parallel. They went first to St Michael de +Tangarara, in Peru, where they landed succours for Pizarro, and +thence, all along the line, to the Moluccas, as they were ordered; +and they are said to have sailed above 1000 leagues without sight of +land on either side the whole way. At length, in lat. 2° N. they +discovered an island named <i>Asea</i> , which was believed to be one +of the islands of Cloves. Five hundred leagues farther, more or less, +they came to another, which they named <i>Isla de los Pescadores</i> , +or island of Fishers. Going still in the same course, they saw +another island, called <i>Hayme</i> , on the south side of the line, +and another named <i>Apia</i> , after which they came in sight +of <i>Seri</i> . Turning one degree to the north, they came to anchor +at an island named <i>Coroa</i> , whence they came to another under the +line named <i>Memousum</i> , and thence to <i>Busu</i> , still holding on +the same course[81].</p> +<blockquote>[81] The only island mentioned in this voyage, which can +be traced by the names in our modern maps, is the Piscadores, about +lat. 11° N. long. 167° E.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The people of all these islands are black, with frizzled hair, +whom the people of the Moluccas call Papuas. Most of them are +witches, and eat human flesh; and are so much given to wickedness, +that the devils walk among them as companions. Yet when these wicked +spirits find any of the Papuas alone, they kill him with cruel blows, +or smother him; for which reason they always go out in companies of +two or three together. There is in this country a bird as large as a +crane, which has no wings wherewith to fly, but runs on the ground +with the swiftness of a deer, and, of the small feathers of this +bird, the natives make hair for their idols. They have likewise a +particular herb, the leaf of which, after being washed in warm water, +if laid on any member, and licked with the tongue, will even draw out +the whole blood of a mans body; and, by means of this leaf, the +natives let blood of themselves, when afflicted by sickness.</p> +<p>From these islands they came to others named the <i>Guellas</i> , in +lat. 1° N. <i>east and west</i> [82], from the island of Ternate, +in which the Portuguese have a fortress. These islands are 124 +leagues from the island of <i>Moro</i> , and between forty and fifty +leagues from Ternate. From thence they went to the island +of <i>Moro</i> [83], and the islands of Cloves, going about from one +island to another; but the natives would not permit them to land, +desiring them to go to the fortress, where captain <i>Antonio +Galvano</i> , the author of this work, would receive them in a +friendly manner, who was, as they stiled him, <i>factor</i> of the +country, and they could not be allowed to land without his license. +This circumstance is worthy of being noticed, that the natives were +so well affected to the Portuguese as to venture their lives, with +their wives, children, and goods, in their service.</p> +<blockquote>[82] This strange expression is quite inexplicable, and +must have been misunderstood by Hakluyt.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[83] Probably Morty, of our present +maps.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1537, John de Vadillo, the governor of Carthagena, +went with a powerful armament from the port called <i>St Sebastian de +Buena Vista</i> , in the gulf of Uraba, to the Rio Verde, whence he +went by land, without previously knowing any part of the way, and +without carriages, to the very extremity of Peru and the town of La +Plata, a distance of 1200 leagues, a most memorable journey. The +whole country, from the Rio Verde to the mountains of Abibe, is full +of rugged hills, thick forests, and many rivers, through which they +had to pierce their way with infinite toil. The mountains of Abibe +are said to be twenty leagues broad, and can only be passed over in +the months of January, February, March, and April, as from incessant +heavy rains at all other times of the year, the rivers are so swelled +as to be quite impassable. In these mountains there are many herds of +swine, many dantes, lions, tigers, bears, ounces, large wild-cats, +monkeys, vast snakes, and other vermin. There are also abundance of +partridges, quails, turtle-doves, pigeons, and other birds of many +different kinds. The rivers also were so full of fish that they +killed them with staves; and they affirmed, if they had been provided +with rods and nets, that a very large company of men might be +subsisted, without ever being in distress for want of food. In this +expedition they noted the diversities of people, languages, dress, +and other circumstances, during the whole way, through many +countries, kingdoms, and, provinces, and the great difficulties and +dangers they encountered till their arrival at the <i>Villa de la +Plata</i> , and the adjoining sea. This was the most extensive +discovery which has been ever heard of by land, and in so short a +time; insomuch that, if it had not been performed in our own days, it +could hardly have been credited[84].</p> +<blockquote>[84] Chron. del Peru, c. ix, xx.</blockquote> +<p>In 1538, certain friars of the order of St Francis went from +Mexico to preach to the natives in the northern part of New Spain, +and to convert them to the Catholic faith. One Mark de Nizza +penetrated farther than any of the rest.--Passing through Culvacan, +or Culiacan, he came into the province of Sibola, or Cinaloa, where +he pretended to have found seven cities, and that the farther he went +the richer was the country in gold, silver, and precious stones, with +many sheep bearing wool of great fineness. On the fame of this +wealth, the viceroy Don Antonio de Mendoça, and Cortes, +determined to send a force to take possession of the country; but, as +they could not agree on this subject, Cortes and his wife went over +to Spain in 1540, where he died seven years afterwards[85].</p> +<blockquote>[85] Ramus. III. 356.</blockquote> +<p>In 1538, I, Antonio Galvano, being governor of the Molucca +islands, sent a ship, commanded by Francis de Castro, towards the +north, with orders to convert as many as he could to the Christian +Faith. Castro himself baptized many; as the lords of Celebes, +Maccassar, Amboina, Moro, Moratax, and of several other places. On +his arrival at the island of Mindanao, six kings received the water +of baptism from de Castro, with their wives, children, and subjects; +and I gave orders that most of these should receive the name of John, +in honour of king John III. who then reigned in Portugal.</p> +<p>The Portuguese and Spaniards who have been in these islands, +affirm that there are in them a certain species of hogs, which, +besides the ordinary teeth in their jaws, have two others growing out +of their snouts, and other two behind their ears, of a large span and +a-half in length[86]. There is likewise said to be a certain tree, +that part of which that grows towards the east is a sure antidote +against all kinds of poison, while the western half of the same tree +is itself a deadly poison. The fruit of this tree is like large +pease; of which is made the strongest poison on earth. There is +another tree of a very singular nature, for if any one eat of its +fruit, he becomes twelve hours mad; and, on regaining his senses, +cannot remember any thing that happened during his madness. There are +likewise certain land-crabs, which have the same effect of producing +temporary madness when eaten. The islanders also pretend that there +is a certain stone in these islands of so wonderful a property, that +whoever happens to sit upon it is sure to be afflicted with rupture. +It is farther worthy of remark, that the inhabitants of these islands +gild their teeth.</p> +<blockquote>[86] This obviously refers to an inaccurate description +of the Babyroussa. --E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1539, three ships which had been ordered by Cortes to +discover the coast northwards from Culiacan, and which sailed from +Acapulco, under the command of Francis Ulloa, having touched at <i>St +Jago de Buena Sperança</i> , entered into the gulf of +California, which Cortes discovered, and sailed up that gulf till +they came almost to the farther end of it, in lat. 32° N. at a +place which they named <i>Ancon de San Andres</i> , because they came +there on the day of that Saint. They returned southward along the +other, or western coast of the gulf of California; and, having +doubled the point of that peninsula, called <i>Cabo de San Lucas</i> , +within certain islands, they sailed northwards, along the external +coast of California, till they again reached to the same latitude of +32° N. whence they returned into New Spain; forced to this +measure by contrary winds and want of provisions, after having been +absent a whole year on this voyage. In these discoveries, Cortes +expended 200,000 ducats, according to his own account[87]. Cortes and +his captains explored the coast of New Spain, from the lat. of +12° N. to 32° or 700 leagues; all of which was rather warm +than cold, although snow is found on some of the mountains for the +greater part of every year. From Cabo del Enganno to Cabo de Liampa +in China, the distance is 1000 or 1200 leagues.</p> +<blockquote>[87] Gomar. H. G. II. lxiv. Ramus. III. 329.</blockquote> +<p>In New Spain there are many trees, flowers, and fruits of various +kinds, that are useful to man. The principal tree is +named <i>Metl</i> , which does not grow either very tall or very thick. +The natives plant and dress this tree as we do our vines; and they +allege that it has forty different kinds of leaves, resembling woven +cloth, which serve for many useful purposes. When tender, these +leaves are made into conserves. From it they make a kind of paper, +and a substance like flax; and it is also manufactured into mantles, +mats, shoes, girdles, and cordage. This tree produces such strong and +sharp prickles, that they are used instead of needles for sewing. The +roots are used as fuel; and their ashes make excellent ley for the +manufacture of soap. The natives open up the earth from the roots of +this tree, and, by scraping or wounding them, they extract a juice +which is a rich syrup. By boiling this juice, it is converted into +honey; and, when purified, it becomes sugar; and may likewise be made +into wine and vinegar. The fruit of this tree is called <i>Coco</i> . +The rind roasted, crushed, and applied to sores or wounds, has a most +healing quality. The juice of the roots and tops, mixed with incense, +is a sovereign antidote against the bite of a viper and other +poisons. From all these useful properties, this is the most +profitable tree that is known in these parts[88].</p> +<blockquote>[88] Gomar. H. G. VI. xvii.</blockquote> +<p>There are certain birds in New Spain called Vicmalim, having a +long small bill, which live on dew and the juice of roses and other +flowers; their feathers are very small, and of beautiful colours, and +are much esteemed to work up into ornaments with gold. These birds +die, or sleep rather, every year in the month of October, sitting on +a small bough in some warm and close place; and they revive again in +the month of April, when the flowers appear. There are snakes +likewise in this country, which sound as if they had bells attached +to them, when they creep along. There are other snakes also, which +are said to engender by the mouth, as vipers are reported to do with +us. There are likewise certain hogs, which have a navel on the ridge +of the back; which the hunters cut out the moment they are killed, as +otherwise the carcase would corrupt and stink, so as to be uneatable. +Besides which, there are certain fishes which are named + <i>Snorters</i> , because they make a snorting noise like +hogs[89].</p> +<blockquote>[89] In this paragraph we have very vague indications of +humming birds, rattlesnakes, and of the animal now called +Pecari.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1538, a civil war broke out in Peru, between Pizarro +and Almagro; in the course of which, Almagro was taken prisoner and +beheaded. After which, in the year 1539, Pizarro sent Peter to +Baldivia into Chili; where he was at first well received, but the +people afterwards rose against him, and sought to put him to death by +treason. Notwithstanding the long and severe war he had to wage +against the natives of Chili, Baldivia explored the country to a +great extent, discovering the whole coast as far as lat. 40° S. +and even further. While Baldivia was occupied in these discoveries, +he received intelligence of a king called <i>Lucengolma</i> , who +commonly brought 200,000 men into the field, when engaged in war +against another neighbouring king. Lucengolma was likewise said to +have a temple in an island, in which there were 2000 priests. It was +farther reported, that beyond the dominions of this king, there lay a +country inhabited by a nation of Amazons, whose queen was named + <i>Guanomilla</i> , which signifies <i>the golden heaven</i> . But, +hitherto, these things rest merely on report, and have not been +ascertained for truth, by actual discovery. About this time Gomez de +Alvarado reduced the province of <i>Guanaco</i> to obedience; and +Francis de Chavez subdued the <i>Conchincos</i> , who often vexed the +town of Truxillo and its adjoining country, by various inroads. Peter +de Vergara reduced the <i>Bracamores</i> , a people to the north of +Quito; John Perez de Veragara subdued the <i>Ciaciapoians</i> ; +Alfonsos de Mercadiglio subdued the people of <i>Mulubamba</i> ; +Ferdinando and Gonsalvo Pizarro reduced <i>Collao</i> , a country rich +in gold; the lower part of which was subdued by Peter de Candia; +Peranzures went also on an expedition into the same country. In this +manner the Spaniards dispersed themselves over the whole country, and +conquered an extent of more than 700 leagues; yet not without much +labour, and considerable loss of men[90].</p> +<blockquote>[90] Gomar. H. G. V. xxxv. and Chron. del Peru, c. +103.</blockquote> +<p>The countries of Brazil and Peru stand east and west from each +other, their coasts being almost 800 leagues distant at the nearest +points, which are the Cape of St Augustine and the harbour of +Truxillo, nearly in the same parallel of latitude. The greatest +extent of Peru, measuring from the river of Peru in the north, to the +Straits of Magellan in the south, is 950 leagues. Through the whole +of this country certain mountains, called the Andes, extend from +north to south, which divide Brazil on the east, from Peru, or the +empire of the Incas on the west. In the same manner, the mountains of +Taurus and Imaus divide Asia into two parts; which mountains begin on +the Mediterranean, in 36 or 37 degrees of north latitude, over +against the islands of Rhodes and Cyprus, and extend eastwards to the +sea of China. Thus, likewise, the mountains of Atlas in Africa divide +the <i>tawny</i> moors from the <i>black</i> moors, or negroes who +have frizzled hair. These mountains begin at Mount <i>Moies</i> , near +the desert of Barca, and extend under the tropic of Cancer to the +Atlantic; The mountains of the Andes are high and rugged, and barren +in some places, without trees or even grass; and it almost always +either rains or snows on their highest ranges, accompanied with +sudden and violent tempests of wind. There is so great a scarcity of +wood in these parts, that the inhabitants use turf or peats for fuel, +as is done in Flanders. In these mountains and countries, the soil is +in some places black, in others white, or red, blue, green, yellow, +and violet; and, with some of these earths, the natives dye various +colours, without using any other mixture. From the bottoms of these +mountains, but principally on the east side, there flow many rivers, +both small and great. Among these are the rivers Amazons, St Francis, +and La Plata, and many others, which pervade the country of +Brasil[91], which are much larger than those of Peru, or of Castilia +del Oro. The country of Peru, between the Andes and the western sea +or Pacific, is from 15 to 20 leagues in breadth, all of a hot sandy +soil, yet fertile, as being well watered, and produces many excellent +trees and fruits. It produces many turnips, rapes, and other such +herbs and roots; likewise abundance of flags, rushes, herbs, and +flowers, of so loose and tender a texture, that the leaves drop off +on the slightest touch. Among these herbs and fresh flowers, the +natives often dwell without beds or houses, even like cattle in the +fields, and some of them have tails[92]. These people are gross, and +wear long hair, but have no beards; and they speak divers languages. +One of the plants of this region called <i>aipo</i> , resembles rue, +and bears a yellow flower, which cures all kinds of rotten sores; +yet, if applied to sound flesh, will eat it to the bone.</p> +<blockquote>[91] The word Brazil in the text obviously includes the +whole flat country to the east of the Andes, Guiana, Brazil, +Paraguay, Buenos Ayres, and Patagonia.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[92] This idea, ever since the time of Lord Monboddo, has +been renewed, and occupies the attention of the explorers of Africa; +links may exist, in creation, with which we are yet +unacquainted.--Clark.<br> +The fancy of tailed men has probably arisen from inattentive +observers, seeing people clothed in the skins of beasts, with the +tails hanging down. The natives of New South Wales wear tails in +imitation of the Kangaroo: Yet, having been closely observed, are not +described as tailed men--E.</blockquote> +<p>They say that these mountains abound in tigers, lions, bears, +wolves, wild- cats, foxes, dantes, ounces, hogs, and deer; and with +many birds, both ravenous and others, most of them being black; while +under the north, both birds and beasts are mostly white. There are +also great numbers of large and terrible snakes, which are said to +have destroyed a whole army of one of the Incas, that was marching +this way: Yet, according to report, an old woman did so enchant them, +that they became quite harmless and gentle, insomuch that they would +allow people to sit upon them. It is reported that, from Tumbez to +Chili, there are no peacocks, hens, cocks, nor any eagles, hawks, +kites, or other ravenous birds; but there are many ducks, geese, +herns, pigeons, partridges, quails, and many other kinds of birds. +There is likewise a certain fowl like a duck, which has no wings, but +is covered all over with fine thin feathers. A certain species of +bitterns are said to make war upon the sea-wolf or seal; for when +this bird finds them on land, it tries to pick out their eyes, that +they may not see their way back to the water, and then kills them; +and the fight between the bitterns and the seals is said to be a +pleasant sight.</p> +<p>Those who live on the tops of the Andes, between the cold and the +heat, are mostly blind of one eye, and some are totally blind; so +that hardly can two men be found but one of them at least is half +blind. Notwithstanding the great heat of the sand in Peru, it yields +good crops of Maize and Potatoes, and an herb called <i>cocoa</i> , +which the natives carry continually in their mouths, as those in the +East Indies do <i>Betle</i> , and which they say satisfies both hunger +and thirst. It is affirmed that, from Tumbez southwards, for the +space of 500 leagues, there is neither rain, thunder nor lightning, +with only some light showers. In Peru, there are certain animals, +called <i>xacos</i> [93] by the natives, and sheep by the Spaniards, +because they are covered with wool; but their shape resembles that of +deer, and they have saddle backs like a camel, and are capable of +carrying burdens of about a hundred weight each. The Spaniards ride +upon them; and, when weary, they turn their heads backward, and void +a wonderfully stinking liquor from their mouths. From the rivers La +Plata and Lima, or Rimac, inclusively to the southwards, there are no +crocodiles, lizards, snakes, or other venomous reptiles; but the +rivers produce great store of excellent fish. On the coast of St +Michael on the South Sea, there are many rocks of salt, covered with +eggs. At the point of St Helena, there are springs from which a +liquor flows, that serves instead of pitch and tar. It is said that +there is a fountain in Chili which converts wood into stone. In the +haven of Truxillo, there is a lake of fresh water, the bottom of +which is good hard salt; and in the Andes, beyond Xauxa, there is a +fresh water river which flows over a bottom of white salt. It is also +affirmed that there formerly dwelt giants in Peru, of whom statues +were found at Porto Vejo; and that their jaw bones were found in the +haven of Truxillo, having teeth three or four fingers long.</p> +<blockquote>[93] This word ought to have been <i>Pacos</i> . Of these +animals, with the Llamas and Vicugnas, different species of the camel +genus, a more extended account will occur, when we come to the +particular travels in Peru.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1540, the viceroy, Don Antonio de Mendoça, sent +Ferdinando Alorchon with two ships, to explore the bottom of the +gulph of California, and divers other countries. In the same year, +Gonsalvo Pizarro went from Quito to discover the <i>Cinnamon</i> +country, of which there ran a great fame in Peru. Taking with him a +force of 200 Spaniards, partly horse and part foot, with 300 Indians +to carry the baggage, he marched to <i>Guixos</i> , the most distant +place or frontier of the empire of the Incas; in which place there +happened a great earthquake, accompanied with much rain and dreadful +lightning, by which seventy houses were swallowed up. From that place +they passed over a chain of cold and snowy mountains, where they +found many Indians frozen to death, and they wondered much at finding +so much snow immediately under the equinoctial line. From thence they +proceeded to a province called <i>Cumaco</i> , where they were detained +two months on account of constant rain; and beyond this, they came to +the cinnamon trees, which are of great size, with leaves resembling +those of the bay tree. The leaves, branches, roots, and every part of +this tree, tasted like cinnamon, but this taste and flavour was +particularly strong in the root; yet that was still stronger in +certain knobs, like <i>alcornoques</i> , or acorns, which were good +merchandize. This appears to have been of the same nature with wild +cinnamon, of which there is great abundance in the East Indies, +particularly in the island of <i>Jaoa</i> , or Java. From this cinnamon +country, they proceeded onwards to the province and city of Coca, +where they halted for fifty days; after which they travelled for +sixty leagues along a river, without being able to find any bridge or +ford at which they could pass over. In one place they found this +river to form a cataract of 200 fathoms in perpendicular fall, making +such a noise as was almost sufficient to deafen any person who stood +near. Not far beyond this fall, the river was found to glide in a +smooth channel, worn out of the rock; and at this place they +constructed a bridge by which they passed to the other side, and +entered into a country called Guema, which was so poor, that they +could only get fruit and herbs to subsist upon. Travelling onwards +from that place, they came to a district where the people had some +degree of civilization, and wore cotton clothing of their own +manufacture, and used canoes. They here built a brigantine, in which, +and in some canoes, procured or taken from the natives, they embarked +their sick, with their treasure, provisions, and spare apparel, under +the charge of Francis de Orellana; while Gonsalvo Pizarro marched by +land with the rest of the people along the river, going every night +into the boats. In this manner they proceeded for about 200 leagues; +when one night, on coming to the river side, in hopes of joining the +boats as usual, Pizarro could not see or hear of them. He and his +people were reduced, by this unfortunate incident, to a state of +almost utter despair: In a strange, poor, and barren country, without +provisions, clothing, or any other convenience, and at a vast +distance from their friends, with a prodigious extent of difficult +and dangerous road interposed between them and Quito, they were +reduced to the necessity of eating their horses, and even their dogs. +Yet holding a good heart, they proceeded onwards in their journey for +eighteen months, penetrating, as is said, almost 500 leagues, without +ever seeing the sun or any thing else to comfort them. At length, of +the 200 men who had set out from Quito, only ten returned thither; +and these so weak, ragged, and disfigured, that they could not be +recognized. Orellana went 5 or 600 leagues down the river, passing +through various countries and nations on both sides, among whom he +affirmed that some were Amazons[94]. From the mouth of that river, +Orellana went home to Spain, and excused himself for having deserted +Pizarro, and those who marched by land, by alleging, that he had been +forced down the river by the strength of the current, which he was +utterly unable to stem. By some, this river is named after Orellana, +who first navigated its waters; and others call it the river of the +Amazons, on account of a female nation of warriors, who are said to +inhabit its banks[95].</p> +<blockquote>[94] It will be seen afterwards, in the account of the +West India Islands, and the Continent of Guiana, that there are many +warlike tribes of Caribs, or Caraibs, constantly engaged in predatory +warfare; whose women, when their husbands are absent in search of +prisoners for <i>food</i> , take arms for the protection of themselves +and children; whence they have been reported as nations of female +warriors, or Amazons.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[95] Gomar. H.G.V. xxxvi.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1541, Don Stephen de Gama, the Portuguese governor of +India, went with a squadron into the Red Sea, by the strait of Mecca, +or of Babelmandel, and came to anchor off the island of Maçua, +or Massoua; from whence he sailed along the coast of Abyssinia, or +Ethiopia, to the island of Suachem, in lat. 20° N. and to the +harbour of Cossier, in 27°. From thence, he crossed over to the +Arabian shore, and the city of Toro, and sailed from that place to +Suez, at the farther end of the Red Sea, and returned from thence to +India, having extended the Portuguese knowledge of that sea farther +than had ever been done before. On the way between Cossier and Toro, +Gama is said to have found an island of brimstone, which had been +dispeopled by Mahomet, wherein many crabs are bred, which increase +nature, on which account, they are much sought after by the +unchaste.</p> +<p>It is true that Lopez Suarez, when governor of India, had +navigated the Red Sea, as far as Judda, the haven of Mecca, in lat. +23° N. 150 leagues from the straits of Babelmandel; but Gama +penetrated to the very northern extremity of the gulph[96]. In the +same year, Diego de Almagro killed the Marquis Francis Pizarro, and +his brother Francis Martinez de Alcantara, in the city of Lima, +or <i>de los Reyes</i> , and usurped the government of Peru.</p> +<blockquote>[96] The true latitudes of the places mentioned in the +text are, Suakim, 19º 30', Massoua, 15º 20', Cossier, +26° 16', Judda, 21º 20', Suez, 30°. --E.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year, 1541, Don Antony de Mendça, viceroy of +Mexico, sent an army of Spaniards and Indians from Mexico, under the +command of Francis Vasquez de Coronado, by way of Culiacan, into the +province of Sibola, or Cinaloa, which is in lat. 30° N.[97]. +Coronado endeavoured to treat on friendly terms with the natives, and +requested to be furnished with provisions; but received for answer, +that they were not accustomed to give any thing to those who came +unto their country in a warlike manner. Upon this, the Spaniards +assaulted and took the town, to which they gave the name of New +Granada, because the general was a native of Granada in Old Spain. +The soldiers found themselves much deceived by the reports of the +friars who had been in those parts, as already mentioned under the +year 1538, who said that the country was rich in gold, silver, and +precious stones. Not being willing, therefore, to return empty-handed +to Mexico, they went to the town of <i>Acuco</i> , where they heard +of <i>Axa</i> and <i>Quivira</i> , the king of which was reported to +worship a golden cross, and the picture of the Queen of Heaven, or +the blessed Virgin. In this journey, the Spaniards endured many +hardships, but the Indians fled every where before them, and one +morning, they found thirty of their horses had died during the night. +From <i>Cicuic</i> they went to <i>Quivira</i> , a distance of 200 +leagues in their estimation, the whole way being in a level country; +and they marked their route by means of small hillocks of cow dung, +that they might be the better able to find their way back. At one +time they had a storm of hail, the hailstones being as large as +oranges. At length they reached Quivira, where they found the +King <i>Tatarax</i> , whose only riches consisted in a copper ornament, +which he wore suspended from his neck. They saw neither cross, nor +image of the virgin, nor any indication whatever of the Christian +religion. This country, according to their report, was very thinly +inhabited, more especially in its champaign or level parts, in which +the whole people wandered about with their cattle, of which they have +great abundance, living much in the same manner with the Arabs in +Barbary, removing from place to place according to the seasons, in +search of pastures for their cattle. The cattle belonging to these +Indians are almost as large as horses, having large horns, and bear +fleeces of wool like sheep, on which account the Spaniards gave them +that name. They have abundance of another kind of oxen or cattle, +very monstrous in their form having hunches on their backs like +camels, with long beards, and long manes like horses. The Indians +live by eating these oxen, and by drinking their blood, and clothe +themselves in their skins. Most of their food is raw, or at least +slightly roasted, as they have no pots in which to boil their food. +They cut their meat with certain knives made of flint. Their fruits +are damsons, hazel-nuts, melons, grapes, pines, and mulberries. They +have dogs of such vast strength, that one of them will hold a bull, +be he never so wild. When the Indians remove from place to place, +these dogs carry their wives, children, and household stuff on their +backs; and are so strong as to carry fifty pounds at once[98]. I omit +many other circumstances of this expedition, because the plan I have +prescribed requires brevity[99].</p> +<blockquote>[97] The latitude of 30° N. would lead to the idea of +Sonora being the district, or province, indicated in the text by +Sibola; Cinaloa is only in 26° N. yet, from the context, appears +to be the country intended by Galvano--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[98] The idea that a dog, even able to bear a load of +fifty pounds, should carry a woman, is truly absurd. If there be any +truth in the story, the dogs must have performed the services in the +text by drawing sledges; yet nothing of the kind has hitherto been +found in North America, though common in North-east +Asia.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[99] Gomar. H.G. VI. xviii. and xix.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1542, when Diego de Frietas was in the port of Dodra, +in the kingdom of Siam, three Portuguese of his crew deserted, and +went in a junk towards China. The names of these men were, Antonio de +Mota, Francis Zeimoro, and Antonio Pexoto; who directed their course +for the city of Liampa, in lat. 30° N. or upwards[100]. Having +encountered a great storm, they were driven to a distance from land +distance from land, and came in sight of an island far to the east, +in lat. 32° N. which they called Japan, and which seems to be the +isle of Zipangri, mentioned by Marco Polo the Venetian, which in +exceedingly rich in gold and silver, and other valuable +commodities.</p> +<blockquote>[100] In other writers Liampa and Siampa, or Tsiompa, are +synonimous; but that place is in lat. 12° N. The latitude of the +text would lead us to the eastern coast of China, between Ningpo and +Nankin.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year, 1542, Don Antonio de Mendoça, the viceroy +of New Spain, sent certain sea captains and pilots to explore the +Coast of Cape del Engannon, where a fleet, sent by Cortes, had been +before. They sailed as far as the latitude 40° N. when they came +in sight of a range of mountains covered in snow, which they +name <i>Sierras Nevadas</i> , or the snowy mountains in lat. 40°N. +They here met with certain merchant ships, which carried on their +stems the images of a kind of birds called <i>Aleutarsi</i> , and had +their yards gilded, and their bows laid over with silver. These +seemed to belong to the islands of Japan or to China, as the people +said that their country was within thirty days sail[101]. In the same +year, the viceroy Mendoça sent a fleet of six ships, with 400 +Spanish soldiers, and as many Mexicans, under the command of his +brother-in-law, Rui Lopez de Villa Lobos, a person in high +estimation, to the Mindanao islands. They sailed on the eve of All +Saints, from the harbour of Natividad, in lat. 20°N. and shaping +their course towards the west, they came in sight of the island of St +Thomas, which had been before discovered by Hernando de Girijalva; +and beyond that, in 17°N, they got sight of another island, which +they named <i>La Nebulata</i> or the Cloudy Island; and from thence, +they came to another island, which they named <i>Roca Partalia</i> , or +the cloven rock. On the 3rd. of December, they discovered certain +shoals, having only six or seven fathoms water. On the fifteenth of +the same month, they had sight of the islands which were discovered +by Diego de Roca, Gomez de Sequieira, and Alvaro de Saavedra, +called <i>Los Reyes</i> or islands of the kings, because discovered on +Twelfth day. And beyond these, they found a cluster of islands, in +10° of latitude, and came to an anchor in the midst of them, +where they took in wood and water. In January 1548 leaving these +islands, they came in sight of certain other islands, from which the +natives came off to them, in a kind of boats, bearing crosses in +their hands, and they saluted the mariners in the Spanish language, +saying, <i>Buenos dias Matelotes</i> , or, good day companions. The +Spaniards were much surprised at being thus accosted in their own +language, and seeing such indications of Christianity, at no great a +distance from Spain, not knowing that many of the natives in these +parts had been baptised by Francis de Castro, at the command of me, +Antonio Galvano, an formerly mentioned. From these unlooked- for +circumstances, some of the Spaniards named these islands <i>Islas de +los Cruzos</i> , or the Islands of Crosses and others called +them <i>Islas de los Matelotes</i> , or the Islands of Companions[101]. +On the first of February, Ruy Lopez came in sight of the noble island +of Mindanao, in 9º N.[102]. But he could neither double that +inland, owing to contrary winds, nor would the natives permit him to +come to anchor on their coast, because the five or six christened +kings and their people had promised obedience to me Antonio Galvano, +and were unwilling to incur my displeasure. On this account, and +constrained by contrary winds, Lopez sailed along the coast in quest +of a place of safety; and, in four or five degrees of latitude, he +found a small island called Sarangam by the natives, which he took +possession of by force, and named it Antonio after the viceroy of +Mexico. Ruy Lopez, and his people remained here a whole year, during +which many things occurred worth notice; but as these are treated of +in other histories, I refrain from mentioning them, confining myself +entirely to discoveries.</p> +<blockquote>[101] Gomez, H. G. VI. xviii. This story, which Galvano +has reported from Genoa, seems altogether unworthy of +credit.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[102] The Matelots are laid down in our modern maps, in +lat. 9° N. Long 137° E. not far E.N.E. of the Pelew, or +Pillelew islands.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the month of August of the same year, 1548, Ruy Lopez, sent +Bartholomew de la Torre in a small ship to New Spain, to acquaint the +viceroy of his proceedings. Torre went first to the islands +named <i>Siria, Gaonala, Bisaia</i> , and many others, in 11° and +12° N. lat. where Magellan and de Castro had both been formerly, +and where the latter baptized many of the natives; and the Spaniards +called these the <i>Phillipinas</i> , in honour of the prince of +Spain[104]. In these islands Torre procured provisions, and wood and +water, whence he sailed for several days with a fair wind, edging +towards the north-east, till he came right under the tropic of +Cancer. On the 25th of September, they came in sight of certain +islands, which they named <i>Malabrigos</i> , or the evil roads; beyond +which they discovered <i>Las dos Hermanas</i> , or the Two Sisters; and +beyond these again, four islands which they called <i>las +Volcanes</i> . On the second of October they came in sight +of <i>Farfana</i> , beyond which there is a high pointed rock, which +throws up fire in five places. Sailing in this manner, for some time, +in 16° of north latitude, they were obliged by continual contrary +winds, to bear up again for the Philippine islands, and in their way +back, had sight of six or seven additional islands, but did not +anchor at any of them. They found also an archipelago, or numerous +cluster of islands, in 15 or 16 degrees of north latitude, well +inhabited by a white people, with beautiful well-proportioned women, +and much better clothed than in any other of the islands of these +parts; and they had many golden ornaments, which was a sure sign that +there was some of that metal in their country. These people likewise +had barks or vessels of forty-three cubits long, by two fathoms and a +half in breadth, constructed of planks five inches broad, and which +were rowed with oars. The people told the Spaniards that they were in +use to sail in these vessels to China, which was not above five or +six days sail from thence, and offered to supply them with pilots, if +they were inclined to go thither. Several of these barks, handsomely +decked, came off to the Spanish ship, in which the master, and other +principal people, sat on a high platform, while the rowers sat +underneath, who were <i>blackamoors</i> or negroes with frizzled +hair. Being asked whence they had these negroes, they answered that +they were brought from certain islands near Sebut, where there were +abundance to be had. The Spaniards wondered much at finding negroes +in this place, being above 300 leagues from the nearest land of the +negroes. It is therefore probable that these people were not +originally natives of this part of the world; but that they have been +scattered somehow in various places over the circuit of the earth, as +they are found in the islands of Nicobar and Andaman, in the bay of +Bengal. From thence, for the space of 500 leagues, we do not know of +any other black people: Yet Vasco Nunnez de Valboa pretends to have +discovered them, when he went to explore the coast of the South Sea, +in a country which he named <i>Quareca</i> ; but there never were any +found in New Spain, Castilia del Oro, or in Peru.</p> +<blockquote>[103] This great inland of Mindanao, to the south of the +Philippines, reaches from 9° 30' N. to 5° 30', and from long. +122° to 126° 20' E. being about 300 miles long, by 270 miles +broad.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[104] The Philippines, exclusive of Mindanao and Palawa, +extend from Lat. 9° to 18º 40' both N. and are in E. long. +122º but their present geographical names, Luzon, Samar, Leyte, +Zebu, Negros, Pany, Mindora, and several other smaller isles, have no +resemblance whatever with those of the text.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1544, Don Gutierre de Vargas, bishop of Placenza, the +cousin of Mendoça, sent a fleet from Seville to the straits of +Magellan, instigated by the advice of the viceroy. Some said that +this fleet was destined for the Moluccas, others for China, and +others again, that it was meant only to explore the coast from the +straits along Chili to Peru. However this may have been, the fleet +was unable, from contrary winds, to get through the straits, except +one small bark which got into the South Sea, and sailed along the +whole coast, till it came to <i>Chirimai</i> and <i>Arequipa</i> , +which is above 500 leagues, which were now explored; all the rest of +the coast having been formerly discovered by Diego de Almagro, +Francis Pizarro, and their people, at various times[105].</p> +<blockquote>[105] Gomar. H.G. IV. xiv.</blockquote> +<p>In January of the year 1545, Ruy Lopez de Villa Lobos, formerly +mentioned, came with his Spaniards to the isle of <i>Moro</i> [106], +and the city of <i>Camato</i> , where he was well received by the +kings of Gilolo and Tidore, and the people of the country; for I, +Antonio Galvano, had then left the Moluccas; and they put the +governor Don George de Castro to much trouble, and great expence. In +the same year, 1545, Ruy Lopez de Villa Lobos, sent another ship from +Tidore for New Spain, under the command of Ignatius Ortez de Rotha, +and having Jaspar Rico as pilot, with orders to attempt the passage +by the south side of the line. Ortez sailed to the coast of Papua, +which he explored; and, as he knew not that Saavedra had been there +formerly, he challenged the credit and honour of the discovery. +Finding the natives of a black colour, with frizzled hair, he named +the country on that account New Guinea. Thus, the memory of Saavedra +was then almost lost, as every thing is apt to fall into oblivion, +unless put upon record, and illustrated by writing.</p> +<blockquote>[106] Probably Morty, the most north-easterly of the +Moluccas.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In June of this year, 1545, one Pedro Fidalgo, a Portuguese, +sailed in a junk from the city of Borneo; but being driven to the +north by contrary winds, he fell in with a large island, the south +extremity of which lay in nine or ten degrees of north latitude, +while it stretched to lat. 22° N. at its other end, which is +called the island of Luçones, from the name of the nation by +which it is inhabited. Perhaps it may have some other name, of which, +as yet, we have not been informed. This island runs from the north +for a great way directly south, and then takes a turn towards the +south-east. It is said that Fidalgo sailed for 250 leagues along the +coast of this island, which is in the midway-between Mindanao and +China, and he reported that the land was fruitful, and well clothed +with trees and verdure; and that the inhabitants will give two pezoes +of gold for one of silver, although so near China, in which the +relative value of these metals is so well understood.</p> +<p>In the year 1553, certain ships were sent out from England, which +sailed to the northward, along the coast of Norway and Finmark, and +from thence east, in seventy or eighty degrees of north latitude, +till they came to Muscovy, to which country one of the ships +penetrated; but I have not been able to learn what became of the +rest. From the land of Muscovy, a ship may sail eastwards to Tartary, +at the farthest extremity of which China is situated. It is reported +that there is a wall above 200 leagues in length, between Tartary and +China, in about lat. 50° N.</p> +<p>From all the preceding discoveries, it may be concluded, that, as +the whole earth is 360 degrees, and the ancient writers allow 17-1/2 +leagues for every degree, the entire circuit of the earth would thus +be 6300 leagues; but as, in my opinion, each degree is exactly +seventeen leagues, the circuit will then be only 6120 leagues. +However this may be, the whole circuit of the globe has been +discovered and sailed over, from east to west, even almost as it is +encompassed and visited by the sun in its diurnal course. It is quite +otherwise, however, in respect to the northern, and southern parts of +the earth. For, towards the north pole, there has only been +discovered hitherto to the latitude of 77° or 78°, which make +an extent of 1347 leagues; and between the equinoctial and the south +pole, there has only been discovered to the latitude of 52° or +53° south, or to the Straits of Magellan; which amounts to no +more than 960 leagues. Now, adding these two together, their sum is +just 2257 leagues: And, deducting this sum from 6300 leagues, there +still remains to be discovered, in the north and south, 4043 +leagues.</p> +<h2><a name="chapter2-2" id="chapter2-2">CHAPTER II.</a></h2> +<p><b> <i>The journey of Ambrose Contarini, ambassador from the +republic of Venice to Uzun-hassan, king of Persia, in the years 1473, +4, 5, and. 6, written by himself.</i> </b></p> +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> +<p>This relation of a journey into Persia, between the years 1473 and +1477, is from a collection of voyages and travels, principally in +Asia, made in the <i>twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth</i> , +and <i>fifteenth centuries</i> , which was published at the Hague, in +the French language, in 1735. That collection usually goes under the +name of <i>Bergeron</i> , whose name appears on the title somewhat +equivocally as the author; but who is mentioned in the advertisement +as a writer belonging to the middle of the preceding century; and the +only part of the work that can, be attributed to him, is a <i>Treatise +of Navigation, and of the Modern Voyages of Discovery and Conquest, +especially those made by the French, &c.</i> which serves as an +introduction to this compilement. The editor of this collection gives +no account of himself, or of the sources from whence he has derived +his different articles; and only says, that the journal of Contarini +was translated into French, that it might be published along with the +other contents of his volume. From the <i>Bibliotheque Universelle des +Voyages</i> , by G. Boucher de la Richarderie, a new work of great +research, published at Paris in 1808, we learn that the journal of +Contarini was published in Italian at Venice, in a duodecimo volume, +in 1543. So far as is known to us, it now appears for the first time +in an English translation. This article might have been more aptly +placed towards the close of <i>first</i> part of the present +collection, but escaped notice in proper time and it appears of too +much importance, both in itself, and as an early document, to be +omitted from punctilious attention to rigid systematic +arrangement.</p> +<p>PREFACE OF THE AUTHOR.</p> +<p>"The illustrious republic of Venice, having done me the honour to +appoint me ambassador to Uzun-Hassan, king of Persia, I accepted the +employment with much pleasure, both that I might do acceptable +service to my own country and for the general good of Christendom. I +neither considered the difficulties nor the dangers of the journey, +but placed my trust solely on the assistance of God; preferring the +interests of my country, and of the Christian world, to my own ease +and safety. On purpose to render my discoveries useful to the public, +I have carefully and briefly recorded every circumstance deserving of +attention, that occurred during my long and laborious journey; as +relative to the provinces, cities, and places through which I +travelled, and the manners and customs of the different nations among +whom I sojourned. In short, I have omitted nothing deserving of +notice, that occurred during my three years journey, having left +Venice on the first day of Lent, in the year 1473, and having +returned to my beloved country on the 24th of February in the year +1476[1]."</p> +<blockquote>[1] In the latter part of this journey, the date of his +return to Venice is the 10th of April.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION I.</p> +<p> <i>The Ambassador, after passing through Germany, Poland, Russia, +and the Tartarian Deserts, or Upper European Sarmatia, arrives at +Caffa or Theodosia.</i> </p> +<p>I left Venice on the 23d of February, in the year 1473, +accompanied by the venerable priest Stephen Testa, who acted as my +chaplain and secretary, and by Demetrius de Seze, my interpreter, +together with two servants, Maffei de Bergamo, and John Ungaretti, +all of us disguised in ordinary German dresses, our money being +concealed in the clothes of Stephen Testa. We went by water in the +first place to the church of <i>St Michael in Murano</i> , where we +heard mass, and received the benediction of the prior; after which, +we mounted our horses, which were there in waiting, and reached +Treviso[2] the same day. I anxiously wished to have procured some +person to accompany us on the journey who knew the road, but could +not meet with any, nor could I even procure a guide for hire. Leaving +Treviso on the 24th, we arrived that day at Cogiensi, now called +Cornegliano[3]; and knowing the dangers and difficulties we must +experience during our long journey, we here confessed, and partook of +the holy sacrament of the eucharist, after which we resumed our +journey. We fortunately overtook a German, named Sebastian, who said +he knew me and the object of my journey, and offered to keep us +company to Nuremburgh. I gladly accepted of this person as a +companion of our journey, inwardly thanking God for affording us a +guide. We continued our journey to the frontiers of Germany, passing +through several cities and castles, belonging to different princes +and bishops, vassals of the empire, among which the city of Augsburg +seemed one of the most beautiful. Not far from that place our German +companion, Sebastian, left us, taking the road for Francfort. We +parted from him with many embraces, giving him thanks for his +numerous attentions, and mutually wishing each other a good +journey.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Called Tarvisin, in the original.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] Called Conigiano, in the edition of +Bergeron.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Having procured a new guide, we arrived at Nuremburg on the 10th +of March. This is a fine city, having a river running through the +middle of it, and is defended by an excellent citadel. While here, I +inquired of my landlord if there were any travellers going our way. +He informed me that there were two ambassadors from the king of +Poland then in the city, who, he was certain, would be happy to +receive a visit from me. I therefore sent my chaplain, Stephen Testa, +to inform these gentlemen of my being in Nuremburg, and of the +purpose of my journey, and of my desire to pay them a visit. They +received my message with much civility, and I accordingly went to +wait upon them. These gentlemen were counsellors of state to his +Polish Majesty, one of whom was an archbishop, and the other a +knight, named Paul. After mutual compliments, I informed them that I +proposed paying my respects to their sovereign, and was furnished +with a passport. Notwithstanding the sorry equipage in which I +travelled, they received me with much honour. I remained four days in +Nuremburg, during which I formed a friendly intimacy with the Polish +ambassadors, and then resumed my journey in their company, being +likewise accompanied by an ambassador belonging to the king of +Bohemia, eldest son of the king of Poland.</p> +<p>Departing from Nuremburg on the 14th of March, now nearly sixty +horsemen in company, we crossed through Germany, always lodging in +good cities or castles, some of which were extremely beautiful, both +in respect to their situation and the excellence of their +fortifications; but I omit describing them, as they are well known to +travellers. The journey across Germany took us twelve days, during +which we passed through the greater part of the dominions of the +Maregrave of Brandenburg, and arrived at the imperial city of +Francfort, a tolerably good and well fortified city on the Oder. We +rested here till the 29th of March. As this city is near the confines +of Poland, we had an escort of cavalry belonging to the Maregrave of +Brandenburg, which accompanied us to the frontiers. These soldiers +were well mounted and armed, and marched in good order. On the last +day of March we arrived at Miedzyrzyez[4], which is a small city, but +strong and pleasant, and is the first place on the frontiers of +Poland. From that place till we reached <i>Stragone</i> , or Poznan, +which took us three days journey, we saw no place worth notice. +Poznan is particularly remarkable on account of a great fair, which +is resorted to by many merchants. Leaving Poznan on the 3d of April, +we arrived on the 9th at Lenczycz[5], where Casimir, king of Poland, +then resided. In this journey we found neither cities nor +considerable castles, and had much reason to remember Germany with +regret, both on account of bad lodgings and every other circumstance. +When my arrival was announced to the king, he sent two of his +gentlemen to wait upon me, who assigned me a tolerably commodious +lodging. Next day being Easter, when no business of any kind is +transacted, I rested after the fatigues of the journey. On the +following morning the king sent me a robe of black damask, according +to the custom of the country, that I might go to court, which I did, +accompanied by several persons of distinction, and had the honour to +pay my respects to the king, according to the ceremonies of that +court; after which I presented the letters of our illustrious +republic to his majesty, and explained to him the nature of my +commission. The king was pleased to invite me to dinner, which was +served much in the same manner as with us, the dishes being in great +abundance, and well dressed. As soon as dinner was over, I asked +permission to retire, which was accordingly granted. Two days +afterwards I was again sent for to court, when the king gave orderly +answers to all the proposals which I had made in the name of our +republic, and with so much benevolent attention towards me, that I +learned by experience that he justly deserved the character of the +best king who had reigned in Poland for a great many years. He was +pleased to appoint me two guides, one of whom was to accompany me +through Poland, and the other through lower Russia, to Kiow[6], or +Magrano, which is the key of the kingdom. I humbly thanked his +majesty in the name of the republic, and took my leave.</p> +<blockquote>[4] This small city stands on a small river which runs +into the Werta, at the western extremity of what was Poland, about +sixty-seven miles from Poznan. It is called Messaricie in the +original.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] Lausicie in the original.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] Named Chio in the original. The second name, Magrano, +is afterwards called Magraman by Contarini, or his French +translator.--E.</blockquote> +<p>I left Lenczycz on the 14th of April, on my journey through +Poland, which is a flat country, ornamented with many forests; but +the great want of convenient lodgings is a sure proof that it is not +very fertile, nor much abounding in the necessaries of life. On the +19th I arrived at Lublin, a tolerable city, defended by a citadel. +The three sons of the king resided there at this time for their +education. The eldest of these princes was about fourteen years of +age, and the two others considerably younger. Learning that they +wished to see me, providing that their father had not forbidden, I +waited upon them, and was received with much politeness, the eldest +conversing with me in the most obliging manner, and I observed that +they behaved with much respect to their preceptor. I took my leave of +them, returning thanks for their civilities, and they parted from me +with as much courtesy as I had experienced in my reception. Leaving +Lublin, and continuing our journey through Poland, we arrived on the +20th of April in lower Russia, which is subject to the king of +Poland. In this part of our journey we travelled five whole days +through thick woods, and, except meeting with a very few castles, we +lodged for the most part in country houses. On the 25th, we came to a +town named <i>Jusch</i> , which is defended by a wooden castle. We +rested here for some time, yet not without danger, as the inhabitants +were quite mad with drunkenness, on account of celebrating certain +marriages. This country produces no wine, but the natives prepare a +liquor from honey, which is stronger and more intoxicating even than +wine. Leaving this place, we came to another village +named <i>Aitomir</i> , in which likewise there is a wooden castle. +During the whole of our journey of the 29th, we travelled through +forests, in constant danger of robbers who infested all the roads, +and we knew not where to pass the night, or to procure any +refreshments, insomuch that we had to sleep in the woods, keeping +strict watch lest we might be surprised by the banditti. On the 30th +of April we reached <i>Belligraoch</i> , which signifies +the <i>white</i> fort, where we were lodged in the royal palace, and +passed the night with much inconvenience.</p> +<p>On the first of May we reached the city of <i>Kiow</i> [7], or +Magraman. The governor of this city, which stands beyond the +frontiers of Polish Russia, was a Polander and Catholic, +named <i>Pamartin</i> . Immediately on learning my arrival from the +guides sent along with me by the king, he appointed me a lodging, +which was sufficiently small, considering the size of the city. He +here visited me, and sent me a sufficient supply of provisions. This +city serves as a barrier or frontier garrison against the Tartars, +and is celebrated for a great fair, to which the merchants bring rich +furs, and other goods from Upper Russia. From hence the merchants +travel in a large caravan to Caffa or Theodosia in the Crimea; but +are often surprised and very ill treated by the Tartars during their +journey. The country about Kiow abounds in grain and cattle. The +inhabitants of this place occupy the whole day in their affairs till +three o'clock, employing all the rest, till night, in drinking and +quarrels, the natural consequence of drunkenness. On the day of my +arrival, governor Pamartin sent some of his gentlemen to invite me to +dinner, which I accepted with as much politeness as I could express. +He received me very honourably, offering me every service in his +power, in the most obliging manner; saying, that he was ordered by +the king of Poland to treat me in every thing as well as possible; on +which I thanked him for his polite attentions, and endeavoured to +recommend myself to his friendship. From him I was informed that he +was in daily expectation of the arrival of an ambassador from +Lithuania, going with presents to the prince of the Tartars, who was +to have an escort of 200 Tartar horse; and, if I were inclined to +take advantage of this opportunity, by which means I should travel in +much greater safety, I had better wait the arrival of this +ambassador. I accepted of this offer most willingly; and we then sat +down to a magnificent entertainment; at which the bishop of Kiow, who +was brother to the governor, and many other persons of consequence +were present. We wanted nothing which could contribute to make the +dinner pleasant. Good company, good cheer, and music during the +repast. The only circumstance I did not like was, that it lasted too +long; as I had more need for sleep and rest, after my fatiguing +journey, than of all the good cheer that could be offered. In +consequence, as soon as dinner was ended, I took my leave, and +retired to my lodgings in the city; the governor living in the +castle, which is only of wood. The city of Kiow stands on the river +named anciently Boristhenes, and Danambre by the natives, which we +Italians call Lerissa, and which falls into the Euxine.</p> +<blockquote>[7] Named Chio in the original, but which must +necessarily be Kiow, or Kieu, now belonging to Russia. The three +formerly mentioned stages Jusch, Aitomir, and Belligraoch, must +either be villages of too little importance to find a place in +geographical maps, or their names are so corrupted as to be +unintelligible. The direct road from Lublin to Kiow, passes through +the palatinates of Russia, Wolhynia, and Kiow, provinces of ci-devant +Poland, now annexed to the Russian empire.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the 10th of May[8], the ambassador of Lithuania arrived; and, +as he was to set out next day after mass, I went to pay him my +compliments, accompanied by M. Pamartin; who directed him, on the +part of the king of Poland, to take care of me, and to conduct me in +perfect safety to Theodosia. To this the ambassador answered, that he +had every respect for the orders of his majesty, the sovereign +arbiter of his life and death, and would carefully obey his orders. I +thanked M. Pamartin for all his kindnesses, as he had frequently +visited me, and had supplied me with every thing I needed for +subsistence during my stay; and, as some token of my gratitude, I +made him a present of a tolerably good German horse, which had +carried me hitherto. We here parted with the rest of our horses, +which were quite unfit for our farther use, and procured horses of +the country for the remainder of our journey; and, on parting with +the guides who had accompanied us to Kiow by orders of the king, I +rewarded them for their attention and good conduct.</p> +<blockquote>[8] The original says April, but attention to the context +distinctly points out this necessary correction.--E.</blockquote> +<p>I left Kiow on the 11th of May, along with the Lithuanian +ambassador; and as I was unable to travel on horseback, on account of +pains in my feet, I travelled in a carriage, which had served me for +that purpose ever since I left the king of Poland at Lenczycz. The +first place we came to was <i>Cerca</i> , belonging to the king of +Poland, where we waited till the 15th, for the Tartar horse who came +to escort us on our journey. After their arrival we set out on our +journey through the great desert of Tartary, and came to the +Boristhenes, which separates Tartary from Russia, and which is some +miles broad[9]. As it was necessary to pass the river, our Tartars +cut down some trees, the stems of which they fastened together into a +raft, which was covered over by the branches, and upon which the +whole of our baggage was placed. They fastened their horses by the +tails to this raft, by which means it was dragged across the river, +they themselves swimming along-side of their horses, and holding by +their manes. We had likewise to swim our horses across, in which we +succeeded, by the blessing of God, but in much fear and danger at +this, to us, unusual mode of navigation. When we got over, we had to +remain a whole day on the other side to collect and replace our +baggage.</p> +<blockquote>[9] From this circumstance it evidently appears that the +journey from Kiow had hitherto been on the right or west of the +Dnieper or Boristhenes, through the country of the Nogais Tartars, +now forming the western portion of the Russian province of +Catharinoslau; and we may suppose the wide part of that river they +had now to cross to have been somewhere about +Cherson.--E.</blockquote> +<p>While among the Tartars, their officers eyed me with much +attention and suspicion; and, during our new journey through the +desert beyond the river, the Lithuanian ambassador informed me, by +means of the interpreter, that the Tartar officers had come to a +resolution to carry me to their prince, as they could not allow a +person of my appearance to go on to Theodosia without his permission. +I was much alarmed by this intelligence, believing that I should +incur considerable risk of having the purposes of my journey +frustrated by this measure, and, therefore, earnestly recommended to +the ambassador to keep in mind the orders he had received on the part +of the king of Poland respecting me, and the promises he had made to +Pamartin; and I promised to make a present of a sword to the +interpreter if he succeeded to extricate me from my embarrassment. +The interpreter reported my fears and wishes to the ambassador, who +succeeded, after drinking with the Tartars, in persuading them that I +was of Genoa; and, by means of a present of fifteen ducats, he +obtained permission for me to go direct for Theodosia. Our journey +through the desert continued till the 9th of June, during which we +suffered many hardships, having, at one time, been a whole day and +night without water. At length it became necessary for us to part +company, the Lithuanian ambassador and his escort taking the direct +road to Bachiserai[10], at which place the prince of the Tartars +resided. On this occasion, a Tartar was appointed to be our guide to +Theodosia, and we parted from the escort, not without considerable +apprehensions of some sudden attack from the Tartars, yet much +satisfied at getting rid of that crew, for they smelt so abominably, +from feeding on horse flesh, that it was quite intolerable to come +near them.</p> +<blockquote>[10] Named Arcercheriher in the French translation of +Contarini; but which must necessarily be some corruption of +Baschiserai, the residence of the khan of the Crim +Tartars.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Our whole company passed the ensuing night in carts covered with +skins, in which we were soon surrounded by a great number of persons, +inquiring who we were. On being informed by our Tartar guide that I +was of Genoa, they supplied us with milk, and left us. Resuming our +journey next morning early, we arrived that day, which was the 16th +of June, at the suburbs of Theodosia, otherwise called Kaffa. Filled +with gratitude for our preservation through so many dangers, we went +privately into a church to give thanks to God for our safe arrival; +and from thence I sent my interpreter to inform the Venetian consul +of my arrival. He immediately sent his brother to wait upon me, +advising me to remain where I was till night, when he carried me +privately to a house belonging to him in the same suburb, where I was +exceedingly well received. I here found Paulus Omnibamus, who had +left Venice three months before me, under the orders of our +illustrious republic.</p> +<p>SECTION II.</p> +<p> <i>Contarini, leaving Kaffa, crosses the Euxine to the city of +Phasis, whence he pursues his journey through Mingrelia, Georgia, and +part of Armenia, into Persia</i> .</p> +<p>It is impossible for me to give any exact description of the city +of Kaffa, or Theodosia, or of its government, as the danger of +incurring suspicion obliged me to remain continually at home; on +which account I can only mention such particulars as I learned from +others. It is situated on the Euxine, and is celebrated for a great +fair, which is much frequented, on which account the city is very +populous, and is said to be very rich and powerful. I hired a vessel +belonging to Anthony Valdat, which lay in the Palus Meotis, to carry +me to the city of <i>Phasis</i> . When I was ready to embark, I met +with two Armenians, one of whom had been on an embassy to Rome, from +Uzun Hassan, and was persuaded by them to prefer disembarking +at <i>Tina</i> , about an hundred miles from Trebisond, instead of +Phasis, alleging that from Tina it was only four hours journey to a +castle named <i>Arrius</i> , which depended upon the king of Persia, +and promising to conduct us to that place in safety. Although I was +by no means satisfied with this advice, I allowed myself to be guided +by the consul and his brother, who agreed in opinion with the +Armenians. I accordingly left Kaffa on the 4th of June[1], +accompanied by the consul, who went with me to the river, where our +vessel was in waiting. I had formerly agreed with the master for our +passage to Phasis at seventy ducats, but on occasion of the change in +our destination, I was now obliged to pay an hundred. Being aware +that I should not be able to meet with any person to serve us at the +place we were going to, I used the precaution to hire nine men from +Kaffa, to assist the mariners of our vessel, and to procure +provisions for us in our journey through Georgia and Mingrelia.</p> +<blockquote>[1] We have already seen that it was the 16th of that +month when Contarini arrived at Kaffa. Much confusion has occurred in +the dates of this journey, which we have no means of correcting, and +must, therefore, be contented with them as they are--E.</blockquote> +<p>We embarked on the 15th of June, and made sail across the Euxine, +direct for Tina, but had hardly got twenty miles on our voyage, when +a contrary wind sprung up from the east. Observing the mariners +consulting together in an extraordinary manner, I became curious to +know the purpose of their discourse. Accordingly, one Bernard, the +brother-in-law of our captain, said to me that he understood we +proposed going to Tina, but advised me by no means to do so; as a +certain <i>Subassa</i> roamed about that neighbourhood with a band of +cavalry, who would certainly make us slaves if we fell into his +hands. On this advice I changed my purpose, and the wind becoming +more favourable, we made sail for Liasi and Phasis, and arrived +at <i>Varsi</i> on the 29th of June, where I disembarked my horses and +baggage, and sent them from thence by land to Phasis, which is sixty +miles from that place. <i>Varsi</i> is a castle, with a small village +in Mingrelia, belonging to a lord named <i>Gorbola</i> , to whom +likewise <i>Caltichea</i> [2], a place of small importance on the coast +of the Euxine, is subject. The inhabitants of this country are very +miserable, and the only productions are hemp, wax, and silk.</p> +<blockquote>[2] The names of places in this journal are so corrupted +as to be often quite unintelligible. Varsi may possibly be Vardon, in +the district to the northwest of Mingrelia, named Abkhas; and +Caltichea may perhaps be Sulhuali, a sea port about 30 miles to the +east. Phasis probably refers to some town on the river of that name, +perhaps Subastei.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the 1st of July we arrived near Phasis, followed by a vessel +filled with Mingrelians, who seemed all to be fools or drunk. +Quitting the vessel, we went up the river in a boat, passing an +island in the mouth of the river, where Oetes, the father of Medea +the enchantress, is said to have reigned. On this island we spent the +night, and were sadly infested by midges. Next day we went up the +river in the boat, passing the city of Asso, which stands on its +banks in the midst of a forest. I here found one Nicholas Capella, of +Modena, who commanded in these parts, and a Circassian woman named +Martha, who had been the slave of a person of Genoa, but was now +married. This Martha received me with much kindness, and with her I +staid two days. Phasis is a city of Mingrelia, subject to prince +Bendian, whose dominions extend only about three days journey in +length. The country is very mountainous, and full of forests. The +inhabitants are so fierce and savage, that they might be accounted +wild beasts. Their principal drink is beer; they have some corn and +wine, but in very small quantities; boiled millet being their +ordinary food, which is a very poor kind of nourishment. They +sometimes procure wine and salted fish from Trebisond, and import +salt from Kaffa, without which they could not exist. Their only +productions consist in a small quantity of hemp and wax. If they were +industrious, they might procure abundance of fish, which are very +numerous in their river. They are Christians, according to the Greek +ritual, to which they have added many gross superstitions.</p> +<p>I left Phasis on the 4th of July, accompanied by Nicholas Capella, +and crossed the river <i>Mare</i> on a float. That day and the next, +we travelled through a considerable portion of Mingrelia, always +among woods and mountains. Towards the evening of the 5th, we came to +the habitation of prince Bendian, whom we found, with all his court, +reclining on a plain, under the shade of some trees. I sent Nicholas +Capella to inform him of my quality, and to ask permission to pay him +my respects, which was accordingly granted. I saluted him, therefore, +with great respect, as he sat on the ground with his wife and +children, and he made me sit down beside him. After explaining the +purpose of my journey, I requested he would have the goodness to +appoint me a guide. He expressed his satisfaction at my arrival in +his dominions, and granted my request. He afterwards sent me some +bread, a piece of beef, and the head of a sow, but so under done, +that it required the extreme necessity in which we then were to +induce us to eat of his provisions; but when we cannot get what we +like, we must put up with what can be had. We had to wait a whole day +for the promised guide. The plain in which we found prince Bendian, +is surrounded by very fine trees, resembling box, but much more +lofty. The prince seemed about fifty years of age, and had a +tolerably handsome countenance, but his manners were perfectly +ridiculous.</p> +<p>On the 7th of July we continued our journey, always among woods +and mountains, and next day passed the river which divides Mingrelia +from Georgia, having to pass the night in the open air, and, what was +worse, we had nothing to eat. On the 9th, we arrived at a small city +named <i>Cotachis</i> [3], which is defended by a stone fort, and +where we saw a temple that seemed very ancient. We had here to pass a +bridge over a large river, before reaching the plain in which the +huts of Plangion, king of Georgia, are situated. The fort and city of +Cotachis belong to Plangion. I waited upon the commander of this +place who invited me to dinner. He was seated on the ground, on which +I, and those of my suite who accompanied me, and some friends of the +governor, all sat down. Before us was laid a greasy skin, on which +they served us with bread, radishes, some flesh, and other execrable +articles with which I was not acquainted. They continually offered me +wine in large goblets, to fill me drunk, according to their +abominable customs, as they are as foolish and beastly as the +Mingrelians. Finding that I would not join them in deep drinking, +they held me in great contempt, insomuch that I found it extremely +difficult to get leave to retire and to continue my journey. But at +length they brought me a guide to conduct me to the king of +Georgia.</p> +<blockquote>[3] Probably Cutais in Imeritia, on the river +Riene.--E.</blockquote> +<p>I left Cotachis on the 12th of July; and, after travelling the +whole day through woods and mountains, we rested for the night in a +meadow at the foot of a mountain, near a castle +named <i>Scandes</i> [4], in which king <i>Pangrates</i> [5] resides. My +guide here left me on purpose to inform the king of my arrival; +promising to return immediately with another guide to serve me during +the rest of the journey. We had accordingly to pass the whole night +in the wood, starving of hunger, and full of anxiety. The guide came +back early in the morning, accompanied by two of the kings +secretaries, who informed me that the king was gone to Cotachis, and +had ordered them to make an inventory of all our baggage, and of +every thing we had about us; after which we should be provided with a +passport, to travel free from payment of any duties through the whole +country. They proceeded accordingly in their examination and +inventory with the most rigorous exactness, even noting down the very +shirts we then wore. After this they ordered me to mount my horse, +and to go along with them to the king, leaving all my people behind. +I used my best endeavours to be excused from this; but, instead of +listening to me, they loaded me with insolence; and the only favour I +could obtain, and that with the utmost difficulty, was permission to +take my interpreter along with me. We accordingly resumed our +journey, without meat or drink, and arrived much fatigued at Cotachis +towards night; where my interpreter and me were left all night to our +repose under a tree, where, indeed, they sent us some bread and +fish.</p> +<blockquote>[4] Perhaps Sarassan, about forty miles S. E. from +Cutais.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] Apparently the same prince named Plangion a little +before.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The remainder of my people were taken to a miserable village, +where they were left in charge of the priest; and our mutual anxiety +may be easily guessed.</p> +<p>Next morning I was carried before the king, whom I found sitting +on the ground in a hut, surrounded by several of his nobles. After +paying my respects, he asked me a great number of questions, and +among the rest, how many kings there were in the world? It came into +my fancy to answer that there were twelve. On which he signified that +I was right, and that he was one of the number; and that he was much +surprised that I should come into his dominions without bringing him +a letter from my sovereign. To this I answered, that when I left my +own country, I did not expect to travel through his dominions, +otherwise my sovereign would assuredly have given me letters in +charge for his majesty; and with this answer he seemed satisfied. He +asked many other extraordinary questions, from which I conjectured +that my guide had maliciously represented me as carrying many +valuable things; and it is probable, if this had been the case, that +I had never been allowed to escape out of their hands. The royal +secretaries endeavoured to persuade me that I ought to make the king +a present of any article that might strike his fancy among my small +baggage; but I got off without making any present, except +compliments, and requesting him to appoint some one to conduct me +through his dominions. This he was pleased to promise, as likewise to +give me a free passport, without paying any duties, as I carried no +merchandize. Accordingly, I took my leave of the king on the 14th of +July, returning to the tree I formerly mentioned as my lodging, where +the secretary brought me the promised passport and a guide. I then +returned to my people at the village where they were kept in my +absence, and was received with much joy, as the priest had +represented the king as the cruellest tyrant in the world. My people +could not contain themselves for excess of joy at my safe return, and +even the miserable priest was so touched at the scene, that he +provided us with something to eat, and we slept there that night as +well as we could.</p> +<p>Next day, being the 15th of July, we provided ourselves with some +bread and wine, to comfort ourselves on the way, and resumed our +journey through thick forests and terrible mountains, which continued +for two days. In the evening of the 16th, we stopt near a spring, +where we remained during the night in the open air, being obliged to +light a fire on account of the coldness of the weather, though in the +middle of summer. On the 17th of the same month we arrived +at <i>Goride</i> [6], which belongs to the king of Georgia. This city +is built on a plain, watered by a large river, and is defended by a +citadel which is built upon a rock. Our guide notified our arrival to +the commandant, who ordered us a house for our lodgings, apparently +for the purpose of extorting a present; for shortly afterwards he +informed me that he had letters from the king, by which he was +ordered to receive twenty-six ducats from me for himself, and that I +should pay six to my guide. I endeavoured to evade this demand, by +saying that the king had received me favourably, to whom I had +already given seventy ducats, and could not give any thing more, and +urged my free passport. But he would listen to nothing I could urge, +and I was forced to comply with his extortion. He even detained me +till the 19th of the month, and even then I had extreme difficulty to +get leave to depart. The inhabitants of the city, who deserve rather +to be ranked among beasts, looked at us with as much astonishment as +if they had never seen any other men than ourselves. They told us +that, on the top of a high mountain in a neighbouring forest, there +was a great church, in which was an image of the Virgin, which worked +many miracles, and that the church was served by forty monks, whom +they named <i>Calojeriens</i> [7]. But our anxiety to get out of this +abominable country, prevented us from paying our devotions at that +famous church. Georgia, indeed, is a somewhat better country than +Mingrelia, but the manners of the people and their way of living is +equally brutal; and such were the distresses and difficulties I +encountered in travelling through both, that it would be tedious to +relate them. On the 20th of July we left the abominable city of +Goride, where we had suffered so many vexations, and continued, our +journey through forests and over mountains, occasionally falling in +with villages where we purchased provisions. We had always to pass +the nights on the ground near some spring or rivulet, during most +part of our journey through Mingrelia and Georgia.</p> +<blockquote>[6] Gori in Georgia, on the river Kur. The journey +hitherto must have been through Mingrelia, then apparently subject to +the prince or king of Georgia.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] Probably Caloyers.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION III.</p> +<p> <i>Arrival of Contarini at Tauris or Ecbatana, the royal city of +Uzun- Hassan, and continuation of his journey through Persia to +Ispahan, where the king then resided.</i> </p> +<p>On the 22d of July we began to ascend a mountain of prodigious +height, insomuch, that when night came on we had scarcely reached the +top, where we had to pass the night without water. Resuming our +journey in the morning, we descended the other side of the mountain, +and entered the province of Armenia, which is under the dominion of +Uzun-Hassan[1]. In the evening we were conducted to a fort named Reo, +which stands in the plain, between a deep river and a high mountain, +and which is garrisoned by Turks in the service of Uzun-Hassan, but +the neighbouring village is inhabited by Armenians. We rested in this +place till the 25th of July, waiting the arrival of a guide to direct +us in the remainder of the journey, and being well treated by the +inhabitants, we rewarded them to their satisfaction. The Armenian who +had joined us at Kaffa, under pretence of being an ambassador from +Uzun-Hassan to the Pope, was recognized by the inhabitants of this +village as an impostor and a notorious robber, and many were +astonished how we had escaped from his machinations: I got rid of him +therefore immediately, and made him restore me a horse which I had +lent him for the journey; after which I procured a priest of an +honest character to conduct me to Tauris. Leaving Reo with my new +guide on the 26th of July, we ascended a mountain, and came on the +other side to a plain surrounded by hills, where we found a village +inhabited by Turks, near which we had to pass the night in the open +air, though the inhabitants treated us with decent civility. Next +morning we departed before day, having to pass another mountain, on +the side of which was a village inhabited by Turks, among whom we +should have run extreme hazard of our lives if they had seen us; but +by using much diligence we avoided this danger, and got down into an +extensive plain, full of fine pastures, and travelled with great +expedition that we might pass the night at a respectable distance +from the lawless inhabitants of the hills. On the 29th we passed the +mountain of Noah, or <i>Ararat</i> , which is so lofty that it is +covered with snow the whole year. We were told that many who had +attempted to reach the top of this mountain had never been more heard +of, while others, on making the same attempt, said, on their return, +that it was quite inaccessible.</p> +<blockquote>[1] Uzun-Hassan in the Turkish language signifies Hassan +the long, which prince was likewise named Hassan-beg, or Lord Hassan, +and Ozun-Azembeg, or the long lord Azem or Hassan. By different +European writers his name has been corrupted into Unsun Cassan, +Uxun-Cassan, and Usum- Chasan. He was a Turkman emir of the +Ak-koyunla dynasty, or white sheep tribe, whose ancestor, the +governor of a province under the descendants of Timor, had rendered +himself independent in the north and west of Persia.--E.</blockquote> +<p>From this place forwards we travelled through extensive plains +intermixed with hills, and arrived on the 30th of July at a castle +named <i>Chiagri</i> , inhabited by Armenians. Finding abundance of +bread, wine, and poultry in this place, we rested here for a day, and +then set out with a new guide for Ecbatana or Tauris. Leaving Chiagri +towards evening of the 1st August, we came next day to an Armenian +village at the foot of a mountain, where we had to cross a river in +boats, and were informed that Uzun-Hassan had formerly gained a great +victory near this place over the Tartars, having hemmed them into a +corner, where their army wasted away with famine and disease. The +ruler of these Tartars, named Sultan <i>Buzech</i> [2], was made +prisoner, and was afterwards put to death. We here saw, on our left +hand, eleven Armenian villages, near each other, who were Catholic +Christians, their bishop being under submission to the Roman pontiff. +The country is extremely agreeable, and is the most fertile of all +the provinces of Persia. We arrived on the 3d of August at a large +village called Marerich, near which we passed the night, and had to +ride all the next day through a plain country exposed to great heat, +which was greatly aggravated, as we could not procure a single drop +of water for ourselves or our horses. On the way we met several +Turkmans, whose custom it is to encamp here and there about the +country, wherever they can find pasture for their cattle, and to +change their residence as the pastures become exhausted. These people +are abominable robbers, and look upon rapine as their highest glory; +and as we had great reason to be afraid of them, I gave orders to all +my people to tell whoever we met, that I was journeying to wait upon +their sovereign, which was the only expedient for saving us from +their violence.</p> +<blockquote>[2] This prince, whose real name was probably Abu Said, +was the emir of the Kara-koyunla dynasty, or black sheep tribe of the +Turkmans, who had risen to independence after the death of Timor, and +who had long contended with the prince of the white sheep tribe for +ascendancy. These two tribes derived their distinctive appellations +of the black and white weathers, from some peculiarity in their +ensigns or dress, equivalent to the distinguishing uniforms and +banners of our European armies.--E.</blockquote> +<p>We arrived on the 4th of August at the city of Ecbatana +or <i>Tauris</i> [3], which stands in a plain, and is surrounded by an +earthen rampart in bad repair. There are high mountains in its +neighbourhood, which are said to be the Taurus of the ancients. I +here lodged with a very good man, who gave us two sleeping chambers, +a convenience we had been long unused to. He was quite astonished how +we should have been able to escape the dangers of our journey, as all +the roads were blocked up; and on asking him the reason, he told us +that Ogurlu Mohammed[4], the eldest son of Uzun-Hassan, had rebelled +against his father, and had taken possession of <i>Sylas</i> [5] or +Persepolis, of which he had appointed his younger brother + <i>Khalil</i> [6] as governor. Uzun-Hassan had assembled an army to +reduce Persepolis and his sons to obedience; but a certain satrap +named <i>Zagarli</i> who commanded in the neighbouring mountains, +favoured the cause of Ogurlu, and had ravaged the whole country, to +the very gates of Tauris, with a body of 3000 horse, owing to which, +all the roads were obstructed and unsafe. He farther informed us, +that the governor of Tauris had one day issued forth to endeavour to +put a stop to the marauders, but had been defeated by Zagarli, with +the loss of most of his troops, and had even great difficulty in +escaping back to the city. I inquired why the inhabitants of Tauris +did not take arms in their own defence, in a time of so much danger; +but he answered, although they were obedient to the governor, they +were quite unused to war. On learning the state of affairs in this +place, I resolved to leave it as soon as possible, that I might get +to the king; but I could neither procure a guide, nor prevail on the +governor to shew me any favour. By the advice of my landlord I kept +myself very much concealed, and employed my interpreter and Augustin +of Pavia, whom I had brought with me from Kaffa because he understood +a little Persian, to purchase our provisions, in which employment +they were exposed to much ill treatment, and were often in hazard of +their lives.</p> +<blockquote>[3] Called Tebriz in modern times.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] In the original this name is corrupted to +Gurlumamech; but we learn from the Modern Universal History, that his +real name was that expressed in the text of our +translation.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] The ruins supposed to be those of Persepolis are +situated near Istakar, about forty miles north from the modern city +of Shiraz, in the province of Fars or Persia proper; but the names in +the original are often so corrupted as to defy even conjecture. Sylas +is probably meant for Shiras.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] Named Chali in the original; but it is to be noted +that the <i>ch</i> of the Italian is pronounced as <i>k</i> in +English.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Some days afterwards, one of the sons of Uzun-Hassan, named +Masu-beg[7], came to Tauris with 1000 horse, to defend the city from +the incursions of Zagarli. I waited on this prince, having great +difficulty to obtain an audience, telling him that I was sent as +ambassador to his father, and had need of guides, whom I prayed him +to provide me; but it was quite ineffectual, as he hardly deigned to +answer me, and took no kind of interest in me or my affairs, so that +I was obliged to return disappointed to my lodgings. Masu-beg +endeavoured to raise money from the inhabitants of Tauris for the +purpose of levying soldiers, but they resisted his demands, and all +the shops of the city were shut up. In this emergency, being unable +to procure provisions, I was obliged to quit my lodgings, with all my +people, taking refuge in an Armenian church, where they gave us a +small place in which to keep our horses; and I ordered all my people +to keep constantly within doors, to avoid meeting with injury. My +apprehensions on this occasion may easily be conceived; but God, who +had already protected us in so many dangers, was mercifully pleased +to deliver us from that which now hung over us. On the 7th of +September, <i>Bertonius Liompardus</i> [8], whom I had before seen at +Kaffa, and who had been sent by our illustrious republic, arrived at +Tauris. He was accompanied by his nephew, named <i>Brancalione</i> , +and having come by way of Trebisond was a month later than me in +reaching Tauris. I now dispatched Augustin de Pavia, of whom I have +before made mention, with letters to the republic of Venice, in which +I gave an account to the senate of all that had happened to us +hitherto. I sent this man by way of Alapia, where he at length +arrived in good health, after having escaped many dangers.</p> +<blockquote>[7] It is difficult to determine whether Contarini here +means Maksud-beg or Masih-beg, as Uzun-Hassan had two sons of these +names; Maksad was the elder, and may have been the person named in +the text Masu. Bec or Beg signifies Lord or Prince.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[8] The person mentioned before by Contarini as a +messenger from Venice, and whom he met with at Kaffa, was named on +that occasion Paulus Omnibamus, totally dissimilar from the name in +this part of the text. --E.</blockquote> +<p>Although I remained in Tauris till the 22d of September, I was not +able to acquire any exact knowledge of the city, having been forced +to conceal myself the whole time. It is a large city, but its +territory in some places is uncultivated, and I believe nowhere very +populous; it abounds, however, in all the necessaries of life, but +these are dear. Much silk is produced in this neighbourhood, which is +exported by way of Alapia. A considerable quantity of cloth is +manufactured in the place, which likewise abounds in various +merchandize, but I did not hear of any pearls or precious stones. +Fortunately for us a Cadilaskir, one of the counsellors of +Uzun-Hassan, arrived about this time at Tauris, who returned from an +embassy into Turkey, where he had unsuccessfully endeavoured to +negociate a peace between his master and the Turkish government. +Immediately on learning the arrival of this person, I used every +effort to procure an interview, in which I succeeded, and by means of +a present, I prevailed on him to admit me and my retinue into his +suite. He received me with much civility, and granted all I asked, +assuring me that, with the blessing of God, he would conduct me in +safety to the king. Among his slaves there were two Illyrian +renegadoes, who formed a strict intimacy with my people, to whom they +promised to give every assistance in their power, and to give us due +notice of the departure of their master, which they faithfully +performed, and for which I rewarded them.</p> +<p>On the 22d of September we departed from Tauris with the Persian +counsellor, accompanied likewise by a great many merchants and +others, who took the advantage of travelling under his protection, +from fear of being plundered by the rebels. This country in which we +now travelled was quite level, with very few hills, so dry that we +saw no trees except along the sides of rivers, and having only a few +small villages, in which we purchased what was necessary for our +journey, and always rested before mid-day in the open air, being +unable to travel during the height of the sun, on account of the +great heat. Travelling in this manner, we arrived at <i>Sultanie</i> +on the 27th of September. This city appeared to be very handsome, +surrounded by walls, and defended by a good citadel. We saw here +three most curious brazen gates, which had been made at Damascus, the +finest things I ever beheld, which must have cost a great deal of +money. The city of Sultanie stands in a plain at the foot of a range +of mountains, some of which are exceedingly steep and precipitous, +and the inhabitants of which are forced to remove into lower +situations during winter, on account of the severity of the cold. We +remained there for three days, and resumed our journey on the 30th of +September, travelling sometimes in plains, and sometimes among hills, +but always taking up our quarters for the night in the open air.</p> +<p>On the 6th of October we arrived at <i>Sena</i> [9], a city without +walls, situated in a plain on the banks of a river, and surrounded by +trees, in which city we passed the night in tolerably bad quarters. +We departed from thence on the 8th, and stopping, according to our +usual custom, in the fields, I was seized with a violent intermittent +fever, insomuch that I could hardly get on horseback next day, and +that with infinite distress. We arrived early next day at Kom, where +I was forced to stop, all my attendants being seized in a similar +manner with myself, except our priest Stephen Testa, who took care of +us all. Our fever was so malignant that we were all delirious during +the height of the access or hot fit. I was afterwards informed that +the royal counsellor sent to visit me, begging my excuse that he +could not wait for me, because it was necessary for him to repair +without delay to the king; but that he had left one of his attendants +with me as a guide, and that I need not now be under any +apprehension, as there were none in that part of the country to do me +harm. I remained here a long time sick. The city of Sena or Sava is +not large, and has mud walls, being situated in a champaign country, +which is well peopled, and abounds in every thing necessary to +life.</p> +<blockquote>[9] Assuredly the Sava of modern maps, a city of +Irac-agemi, which stands upon one of these extraordinary rivers, so +numerous in Persia, which lose themselves in the sands, after a short +but useful run.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the 24th of October, being much recovered, we resumed our +journey, though I was still so weak as to find much difficulty in +sitting on horseback. Next day we arrived, at the city of Cashan[10], +which very much resembles Kom, except that it is somewhat handsomer. +On the following day, we came to <i>Nethas</i> , or Nathan. This city +stands likewise in a flat country, which produces much wine. I +remained here one day, both to recruit my strength, and because I +felt some return of my fever. On the 28th of October, I prepared as +well as I was able to finish my journey, which was all on plain +ground, and arrived at Ispahan, where Uzun-Hassan then resided, on +the 3d of November, having employed twenty- four days in our journey +from Tauris to this place. I immediately sought out the dwelling of +Josaphat Barbaro[11], the ambassador of Venice, and went to him. He +received, me with much joy, and many embraces were mutually given and +received, and we rejoiced together on my safe arrival. But as I had +much need of rest, I very soon went to bed. When the king heard of my +arrival, he sent some of his slaves to congratulate me, who presented +me with some refreshments sent by his majesty.</p> +<blockquote>[10] About sixty miles S. S. E. from Kom. I am disposed +to think that Contarini has slumpt his journey on the present +occasion; as it is hardly to be believed a person in the weak state +he describes himself could have travelled with so much rapidity. +Besides, so far as we can learn from his journal, he travelled always +with the same set of horses. Indeed the sequel immediately justifies +this suspicion, as the subsequent dates are more distant than the +travelling days of the text would warrant.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[11] See Travels of Josaphat Barbaro to Asof in 1436, in +our Collection, Vol I. p. 501, in the introduction to which article, +it will be seen that he had been sent on an embassy from Venice to +Uzun-Hassan in 1572, two years before Contarini; and appears to have +remained in the east for fourteen years in that capacity, after the +departure of Contarini on his return to Venice.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Early in the morning of the 4th November, some of the kings slaves +came to require that Josaphat Barbaro and I should come to court. On +being introduced to an audience, we found the king attended by eight +of his principal officers. Having made my obeisance after the manner +of the country, I presented the letters of the republic, and +explained the subject of my mission[12]. When I had finished +speaking, he answered me in every point, and in few words; and, among +other things, he excused his conduct in having been obliged to retire +to this part of his kingdom. After this we were ordered to be seated, +and his courtiers gave us an entertainment according to the Persian +fashion, which consisted of many dishes tolerably well dressed. After +the repast, we took leave of the king, and retired to our quarters. +Two days afterwards, we were again sent for to court, when most of +the royal apartments were shewn me. The king then resided in a very +pleasant country palace, situated on the banks of a river. In one of +the rooms, there was a painting of Ogurlu- Mohammed, the kings eldest +son, leading the sultan <i>Busech</i> , or Abu Saïd, tied with a +rope; and in another picture the decapitation of <i>Busech</i> was +represented. We were again invited to an entertainment, at which many +different kinds of confections were served up. We remained at Ispahan +till the 25th of November, during which period we were frequently +invited to court. The city of Ispahan, like the rest of the Persian +cities, is surrounded by earthen-ramparts. It stands in a plain, and +is abundantly supplied with all the necessaries of life. Having +rebelled against the king, it was besieged and suffered much injury; +for, being obstinately defended, it was subjected to the resentment +of the conqueror and the fury of the soldiers.</p> +<blockquote>[12] This nowhere distinctly appears; but we may easily +understand incidentally, and from the history of the period, that the +Venetian republic endeavoured to stir up enemies to the Turkish +empire in the east, being unable to resist its power, now exerted +against them in the Morea and the Greek islands; and we may even +surmise that Uzun- Hassan was subsidized by the Venetians to make war +upon the Turks.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Persia is a very flat and arid country, in many parts of which +there are salt lakes. In such parts as can be supplied with water, +grain and other fruits of the earth are produced in abundance, and +there are plenty of beasts of all kinds, as it is everywhere +intersected and surrounded by fertile mountains, but every thing is +very dear. The Venetian quart of wine is sold for three or four +ducats; but bread is not so dear in proportion. A camels load of wood +costs a ducat. Flesh is dearer than with us, and seven hens cost a +ducat; but other articles of provisions are cheaper. The Persians are +a civil and humane people; and though Mahometans, they do not hate +the Christians. The women are very modestly dressed, and ride on +horseback with even more grace than the men; and, judging from the +good appearance of the men, the women are probably handsome.</p> +<p>SECTION IV.</p> +<p> <i>Contarini accompanies Uzun-Hassan from Ispahan to Tauris, where +he finds Ambassadors from the Duke of Burgundy and the Prince of +Muscovy, and gets leave to return to Venice.</i> </p> +<p>The king left Ispahan with all his court on the 25th of November +for Tauris, and we travelled along with him, passing through most of +the places which we had seen in going to Ispahan. In this journey we +always slept in tents in the fields, and the camp was well supplied +with provisions, as many merchants had received orders to provide +grain, victuals of all kinds, and all sorts of necessaries. On the +14th of November we arrived at Kom, where we remained two days under +tents, exposed to extremely cold weather, and experienced much +difficulty to procure a small house in which to shelter ourselves. We +continued at this place till the 21st of March 1474, during which +interval we went frequently to court, to pay our respects to the +king, on which occasions we were generally invited to dinner. The +Persian court is very magnificent, being attended by many high +officers of state, and every day 400 persons dine along with the +king. These are all seated on the ground, and are served in copper +basons with boiled rice, or some other mess made of flesh and grain +boiled together; but the king is served in great magnificence at a +separate table, with a great variety of dishes of different kinds of +meat. During his meals, the king is often served with wine, and then +the musicians sing and play upon flutes such songs and tunes as the +king pleases to order. The king is of a good size, with a thin visage +and agreeable countenance, having somewhat of the Tartar appearance, +and seemed to be about seventy years old. His manners were very +affable, and he conversed familiarly with every one around him; but I +noticed that his hands trembled when he raised the cup to his lips. +It is not needful that I should enumerate all the audiences which I +had on the subject of my mission, of which I shall make occasional +mention hereafter.</p> +<p>On the 21st of March the king and all the court left Kom, on their +journey towards Tauris, the baggage being carried by camels and +mules. Each day we hardly exceeded ten or twelve, or at the most +twenty Italian miles, and always stopt at each encampment till the +forage in the neighbourhood was consumed. The Persian mode of +travelling is thus: The women always arrive first at the new camp, +where they set up the tents and cook provisions for their husbands. +They are well clothed and ride upon good horses, which they manage +with much dexterity. The Persian nation is very magnificent, and +exceedingly fond of pomp, and shew, and it is very agreeable to see +their march at some distance. They are very careful of their camels, +of which they have great numbers, even the poorest seldom travelling +with less than seven of these animals; by this means, the prodigious +train which attends the court appears to consist of many more persons +than it actually contains. When the king entered Ecbatana, his suite +consisted of about 2000 persons, but many left the camp on the march, +as it suited their fancy or convenience, and the king never had above +500 horse along with him. The royal tents were exceedingly beautiful +and magnificent, and his bed was ornamented with scarlet hangings. +The merchants who attended the camp sold every thing at a high price. +All of our party were accommodated with tents, as we belonged to the +suite of the king, who often honoured us with an invitation to +supper, and at other times frequently sent us refreshments. We were +always treated with much civility, and never received any injuries or +affronts.</p> +<p>On the 31st of May the king encamped about fifteen miles from +Tauris, when a certain monk of the Boulonnois named Louis, who called +himself patriarch of Antioch, and envoy from the Duke of Burgundy, +arrived at the camp, attended by five horsemen. The king asked if we +knew him, and we accordingly told what we knew without dissimulation. +Next day the king gave him an audience, at which we were present by +command. This patriarch presented to the king three robes of gold +tissue, three others of scarlet silk, and some of fine cloth, and +opened his commission, making many great offers of service from his +prince, and many fine promises in very magnificent terms, which do +not appear proper for me to repeat, and which the king did not seem +to care much about. We were all invited to dinner, during which the +king started many questions, to which he gave very pertinent answers +himself. After dinner we returned to our tents.</p> +<p>On the 2d of June we arrived at Tauris, in which place lodgings +were appointed for us. Six days afterwards, Uzun-Hassan sent for the +patriarch and us to court; and although he had three or four times +informed me already that I must prepare to return into Italy, leaving +my colleague Barbaro at his court, I could not reconcile myself to +the journey, and had done every thing in my power to put off my +departure. When we went to court, the king addressed himself first to +the patriarch, whom he ordered to return to his prince, and to say +from him, that he, the king, would very shortly declare war against +the Turks, having already taken the field with that view, and that he +never failed in performing his promises. He then turned to me, +saying, "Return to your country, and tell your masters that I shall +very soon make war upon the Ottomans, and desire them to do their +duty as I shall do mine. I know no one better fitted to carry this +message than you, who have accompanied me from Ispahan, and have seen +my preparations; so that you are able to inform the Christian princes +of all that you have seen, and of my good intentions." I offered +several reasons for excusing myself from obeying these commands, +which gave me much vexation; but the king looked at me with a severe +expression of countenance, saying, "It is my pleasure for you to go, +and I command you. I shall give you letters for your masters, which +will inform them of my sentiments and the reasons of your return." In +this state of embarrassment, I was advised by the patriarch and M. +Josaphat to comply with a good grace; on which I replied to the king +as follows: "My departure, Sir, gives me much distress; but since you +judge it proper, I make no more objections, and am ready to obey your +orders. Wherever I may go, I shall speak of your great power and +goodness, and the honours I have received from your majesty, and +shall exhort all the princes of Christendom to join their forces with +you against the common enemy." My speech pleased the king, and he +answered me kindly according to his wonted manner. After retiring +from this andienqe, the king sent some Persian robes to the patriarch +and me, made of fine stuff and very beautifully ornamented, and +presented each of us with a horse and some money to assist us during +our journey.</p> +<p>We remained two days at Tauris after the kings departure, and set +out on the 10th of June to rejoin the court, which was then encamped +in a pleasant spot among excellent pastures and plenty of fine wells; +about twenty-five miles from Tauris. We remained there till the +pastures were eaten bare, and then marched about fifteen miles +farther. On the 27th of June the king gave us our final audience, at +which he gave us presents for our respective sovereigns; that is to +say, to the patriarch for the Duke of Burgundy; to myself for the +republic; and to one Marcus Ruffus, who had come with an embassy from +the prince of Muscovy. The presents consisted in certain pieces of +workmanship made in the European fashion, two swords, and certain +ornaments for the head, which are usually fastened to bonnets. There +were two Persian ambassadors in the audience- chamber, one of whom +was destined on a mission into Russia. At length the king turning +towards the patriarch and me, addressed us nearly as follows: "You +will return with all speed to your masters, and will tell them and +all the other Christian princes from me, that I have used all +diligence in taking the field to make war on the Turks, as it had +been concerted between them and me. The emperor of the Turks is at +present in Constantinople, and will make no enterprize of importance +this year. As for myself, I propose sending one part of my army to +reduce my rebellious son, and another against the Turkish generals, +while I shall remain here at hand, to act against the enemy as +occasion may require." He gave orders, both to us and to his own +ambassadors, to report this to all the princes of Christendom. I did +not receive these orders with more satisfaction than I had done the +former; but I had no means of escape and must necessarily obey. +Wherefore, having taken our leaves, we prepared for our departure, +and were unexpectedly commanded to remain till next day. In the mean +time, he conveyed a great part of his infantry during the night to +the other side of a mountain. Next morning early, the + <i>Ruiscasson</i> , or conductor of ambassadors, carried us to the top +of the hill, as meaning to confer with us on some important subject, +and on the appearance of the Persian infantry under march, he pointed +them out to us as if he had been surprised at seeing so many +additional troops coming to the royal camp. The better to favour this +deception, some of his slaves exclaimed as astonished, that there +were a great many soldiers, and that at least 10,000 were coming to +reinforce the army. But we easily saw through the contrivance, and +were certain that these pretended new troops were merely the ordinary +royal escort, which had only changed their position to impose upon +us. After this little comedy, the <i>Ruiscasson</i> gave us the royal +letters for our masters, and we returned to our tents. From the +information of M. Josaphat and others, the military force of this +king cannot exceed 20,000 cavalry, some of whom have wooden bucklers +about eighteen inches long. Others have a kind of cuirasses made of +very thin plates of steel, which they wear over their ordinary +habits. Their usual arms are bows and arrows, and cimeters, while +some have small leathern targets covered with silk, and others carry +helmets and cuirasses. Their horses are beautiful and vigorous, and +very numerous. In regard to the manners of the Persians, and the +state of the kingdom, I shall mention what I know of these subjects +as occasion may offer during the recital of my travels; but I do not +think it proper to weary my readers with any lengthened detail.</p> +<p>SECTION V.</p> +<p> <i>Journey of Contarini from Persia, through Georgia and +Mingrelia, to the city Phasis.</i> </p> +<p>Being entirely ready to depart on the 1st of July, we took leave +of M. Josaphat Barbaro in his tent, when we mutually shed tears in +sincere grief at our separation. Having recommended myself to the +protection of God, I mounted on horseback, and began my journey, +accompanied by the patriarch of Antioch, Marcus Ruffus the Muscovite, +and the two Persian ambassadors, intending to return by way of +Phasis, which is under the dominion of Uzun-Hassan. To this route we +were advised by certain birds of bad augury, who were omens of the +terrible dangers we had to encounter in the sequel. Coming to the +villages of the catholic Armenians, formerly mentioned, we were well +received by their bishops, and attended the mass regularly during +three days that we had to remain here, laying in a stock of +provisions for the journey. From thence we came to the frontiers of +Georgia, travelling through plains interspersed with hills, and +arrived on the 12th of July at <i>Typsi</i> [1], which is subject to +the king of the Georgians. This city stands upon a hill, at the foot +of which runs the river <i>Tigre</i> , and it is defended by a good +castle on the summit of an eminence. It was formerly a celebrated +place, but is at present almost utterly ruined, though beginning to +revive, and contains many good catholics. In this place we took up +our lodgings with a person named Arminius, of the catholic faith. In +travelling through Georgia, we found a few villages composed of huts, +and some castles among the mountains, but these were rare and +distant.</p> +<blockquote>[1] This in all probability is a corruption of Tiflis, or +Teffliz, the capital of Georgia Georgia, which is situated on the +river Kur or Cyrus, erroneously named <i>Tigre</i> in the text. The +proper name of this country is Gurgi-stan, or the country of the +Gurgi which has been corrupted by the Europeans into +Georgia.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the 19th of July, being near the frontiers of Mingrelia, we +chanced to meet with Pangratius, king of Georgia, in the midst of a +forest surrounded by mountains, and went to pay our respects to him, +when he invited us to dinner. We had to sit on the ground, having a +skin spread before us instead of a table-cloth, and were served with +roasted meat and fowls, very ill dressed; but, by way of making +amends, they frequently presented us with large goblets of wine, as +they seem to place all dignity and merit in deep drinking. For this +reason it is their custom, at the conclusion of their meals, to +challenge one another to drink, and he who empties the greatest +number of goblets, is held in highest esteem. As the Turks drink no +wine, their presence was some restraint that day on their usual +bacchanalian contests, and as we neither could nor would compete with +them, we were held in great contempt. The king was about forty years +old, and of large make, with a strong resemblance to the Tartar +countenance. We parted from the king of Georgia next day, and on the +22d of July, on the confines of Mingrelia, we fell in with a Georgian +commander at the head of some troops, both cavalry and infantry who +was posted in this place to prevent injury from the disorders that +had broke out in Mingrelia, in consequence of the death of Bendian, +prince of that country. These people stopped, and frightened us with, +many cruel menaces; but at length, after being robbed of two quivers +full of arrows, and having to gratify them with some money, we +escaped from them, and made the best of our way to a distance. +Leaving the public road, we struck off into a thick wood, where we +passed the night in prodigious apprehension.</p> +<p>On the following day, while approaching the city +of <i>Cotati</i> [2], we met some peasants in a narrow pass, who +prevented us for some time from going forwards, and even threatened +to put us to death. After much altercation, and many threats, they +seized three horses belonging to the Turks[3], which were with great +difficulty redeemed for twenty ducats. On the evening we reached +Cutais, which is a royal fortress. While passing a bridge over a +river, early in the morning of the 24th of July, we were again +attacked by robbers, who came upon us suddenly, and, after many +threats, forced us to pay the full value of our horses, before they +would allow us to continue our journey. After passing this bridge, we +entered Mingrelia, where we followed our wonted custom of sleeping +under the canopy of heaven, though we had many worse inconveniencies +and dangers to encounter: for, on the 25th of July, having passed +over a river by means of rafts, we were conducted to the dwelling of +a certain lady, named <i>Maresca</i> , sister of the deceased prince +Badian, who received us at first with much civility, and treated us +with bread and wine, after which we were conducted into a field +belonging to her, which was close shut on all sides. On the morrow, +when we were about to depart, we offered her a present of twenty +ducats, as a return for her hospitality, which at first she pretended +to refuse; but we soon discovered her treachery, as she insisted on +our paying two ducats as a ransom for each of our horses. We +expressed our astonishment at this rapacity, and endeavoured to +represent our inability to comply with such exorbitant demands, but +all to no purpose, and we were forced to comply, being afraid that +she might even have plundered us of every thing.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Cutais in Imeritia, named Cotachis on a former +occasion in the text. --E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] These Turks must have been the Persian ambassadors of +Uzun-Hassan;--E.</blockquote> +<p>Leaving this rapacious dame, we arrived at <i>Phasis</i> on the +27th of July, some on horseback and others in boats, where we again +lodged with <i>Martha</i> the Circassian lady, whom I formerly +mentioned. After having run many risks in our journey, we here learnt +a piece of most afflictive news, that the Turks had taken possession +of Kaffa or Theodosia in the Crimea, by which we were deprived of our +last resource, and shut out apparently from every hope of continuing +our voyage homewards. Our distress on receiving this intelligence may +easily be conceived, and, in fact, we were so much cast down, as not +to know what measures to pursue, or to which hand to turn us. Louis, +the patriarch of Antioch, resolved upon going through Tartary and +Russia, with which route he was acquainted. It was to no purpose that +I urged the promises we had mutually come under at the beginning of +our journey, never to separate on any account. To this he answered, +that the unforeseen circumstances which had occurred, were a +sufficient warrant to every one to consult his own individual safety. +I insisted and beseeched him not to treat me with such unfeeling +cruelty, but all in vain, for he prepared to set off along with the +Turkish ambassador, who had been sent by Uzun-Hassan as his +particular companion. In this extremity I went to Marcus Ruffus, and +the Turkish ambassador who was joined with him by the king of Persia, +to whom I mentioned my intention of returning back to Uzun-Hassan. +They pretended to approve my plan, and even to join me, and we +embraced as entering, into promise of keeping together; but they +secretly came to a determination of taking their journey through the +province of <i>Gorgore</i> , which is subject to <i>Calcicanus</i> , and +to the city of <i>Vati</i> ,[4] which is on the frontiers of the Turks, +and pays tribute to the Grand Signior.</p> +<blockquote>[4] This proposed route seems to have been through the +province of <i>Guria</i> to Batum; and, from the sequel, to have +returned to Georgia and Shirvan, passing through Derbent and the +Caspian gates, or Daghisten, into western Tartary. But the names in +the text are too corrupt for any certainty. Calcicanus, in the text, +is probably a corruption of Kalo Johannes, who was then prince, or +emperor, of Trebisond.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The patriarch set out on the 6th of August, and the next day +Marcus Ruffus followed him, accompanied by several Russians, partly +on horseback, and partly by means of boats. Their intentions were to +travel from Vati, by Shamaki, anciently Cyropolis, and thence into +Tartary. Thus left alone in a strange land, I leave any reasonable +person to think what were the embarrassments with which I was +surrounded. I was unacquainted with a single individual, having no +company but that of my domestics, and had very little money +remaining. In short, I was reduced almost to despair, of ever being +able to get out of the country. In this state of distress I fell into +a violent fever, and could get no other nourishment but bread and +water, and a pullet occasionally with much difficulty; and my fever +increased to such a degree that I became delirious. All my domestics +were attacked soon after with the same fever, the priest Stephen only +excepted, who had to take care of us all. My only bed was a wretched +mattress, which had been lent me by a person named John Volcan; and +my life was despaired of by every one, till the 9th of September, +when, by the cares of Stephen and of Martha, my good hostess, or +rather through the mercy of God, the fever abated, and I soon +recovered my former health, to the astonishment of every one. My +domestics likewise recovered, and we began again to consult on the +best means of escaping out of our present situation. Some proposed to +take the road of Syria, but I deemed this too dangerous; and we at +length came to the determination, of going by Shamaki, into Tartary, +and thence by Russia, Poland, and Germany. I got accordingly on +horseback on the 10th of September, but had hardly rode two miles +when I was forced to dismount and rest myself on the ground. I was, +therefore, obliged to return to my lodging in Phasis, where we +remained till the 17th, when, being all of us restored to health and +strength, we again resumed our journey, after having implored the +protection and assistance of God. I now took a certain Greek into my +service, who could speak the Mingrelian language, who occasioned me a +thousand troubles, which it were tedious to recount.</p> +<p>SECTION VI.</p> +<p> <i>Leaving Phasis, Contarini travels through Mingrelia and +Georgia, into Media, and, passing the Caspian, arrives in +Tartary.</i> </p> +<p>Leaving Phasis, as before mentioned, on the 17th of September; and +taking the road of Mingrelia, we came to <i>Cotati</i> , or Cutais, on +the 21st of that month, extremely worn out through the consequences +of our late illness, and the fatigues of the journey; and as the +Greek whom I had hired never ceased to give me vexation, I here +parted with him as handsomely as I could. We remained two days at +Cutais, among people who knew us not, and whose language we were +quite ignorant of. Leaving that place, and tracing back our former +steps, we passed over several mountains in much fear, and arrived at +Tiflis on the 30th of September, where we took shelter in the chapel +of a certain Armenian catholic, who had more the appearance of a dead +person than of a living man, but who rendered us every possible +service. This man had a son who lived with him, and who, +unfortunately for us, was seized with the plague, which had raged in +that part of the country this year. From him one of my servants, +named Maffeo of Bergamo, caught the distemper, who still kept about +me during two days, though ill, as he was my own particular domestic. +At length, growing worse, he had to take to his bed, when the +distemper shewed itself; and as he lay in the same room with me, and +the house could not afford me another, I was forced to take refuge in +a hovel where some cows were kept at night; and as the Armenian +refused to allow Maffeo to remain in his house, I was constrained to +take him into the same place with myself, where Stephen took care of +him, till God pleased to take him out of the world. After the death +of Maffeo, I experienced great difficulty to procure another stable +for myself, that I might get away from the morbid air of that in +which my poor servant died. In this extremity we were utterly +abandoned, except by one old man, who understood a little of our +language, and who served us with much affection.</p> +<p>We remained at this place till the 21st October, and on the +evening before our intended departure, the Persian ambassador, who +had accompanied the patriarch, came to Tiflis. He complained +grievously of having been plundered, through the fault of the +patriarch, with whom he had travelled to <i>Lavógasia</i> , +where he had left him, and was now on his road to complain to +Uzun-Hassan. We agreed to travel in company from Tiflis, a city +belonging to Pancratis[1]. From thence in two days we entered the +territories of Uzun-Hassan, as we took the road towards Shamaki, or +Cyropolis, which is situated in a fertile and pleasant country. On +the 26th of October we separated, as the Persian went to Uzun- Hassan +at Tauris, and I took the road for the dominions of <i>Sivanse</i> , in +which Shamaki stands; but by means of the Persian ambassador I +procurred a <i>molah</i> , or Mahometan priest, to guide me on the road +to Shamaki. This country is greatly more beautiful and more fertile +than the dominions of Uzun-Hassan, and is ruled over +by <i>Sivanse</i> , king of Media[2]. Of this country Shamaki is the +capital, at which place I arrived on the 1st November 1474. This city +is not so large as Tauris, but, as far as I could judge, surpasses +that place in the goodness and abundance of every thing, especially +in excellent cattle. It produces great quantities of excellent silk, +of which they manufacture various kinds of very slight stuffs. While +here, I had the good fortune to be rejoined by Marcus Ruffus, the +Muscovite ambassador, who had parted from me at Phasis, as formerly +related. Immediately on learning that I was in the city, he came to +visit me, and we embraced with cordiality. I now earnestly entreated +him to receive me and my domestics into his society for the remainder +of the journey, to which he very readily agreed.</p> +<blockquote>[1] This name is probably corrupted for Bagration, or +Bagrathion, which was once the family name of the sovereigns of +Georgia, and, if I mistake not, there is, or was lately, a prince of +that family and name in the service of Russia.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] The kingdom of Media in the text, is obviously meant +to indicate the province of Shirvan, on the west of the +Caspian.--E.</blockquote> +<p>We left Shamaki on the 6th of November, for the city of Derbent, +which is called, in the language of the country, the Caucassian +Gates, or the Iron Gates. This city is under the dominion +of <i>Sivanse</i> , and stands on the frontiers of Tartary. On our +journey we travelled sometimes over plains and sometimes on +mountains, and were tolerably well treated by the Turkish +inhabitants, with whom we lodged by the way. About mid-way between +these two cities we came to a large village, where we found great +abundance of excellent fruits, particularly admirable apples. We +arrived on the 12th of November at Derbent, and were advised to pass +the winter in that place; as it was necessary, in our way to Russia, +to cross the desert of Tartary, which is much easier in the spring of +the year, and likewise because it was proper for us to cross over the +Caspian to the Tartar city of Citracan. The city of Derbent is +situated on the shore of the Caspian, which the Mardians call the sea +of Bachaan or Bacou. This city is said to have been built by +Alexander the Great, and is called the <i>Iron Gate</i> , because it +entirely closes up the only passage from Tartary into Media and +Persia, by means of a deep valley reaching from Circassia. Derbent is +fortified with a thick well built wall, reaching from the castle at +the foot of the mountain all the way to the sea; but not above a +sixth part of the space within the walls is inhabited, all that end +nearest the sea being in ruins, among which are several tombs. The +country about this city produces abundance of all kinds of fruits, +among which are plenty of grapes, from which the inhabitants make +wine.</p> +<p>The Caspian, or Sea of Hircania, which has no communication +whatever with the ocean, is about the same size with the Euxine or +Black Sea, and is very deep. They catch in this sea great quantities +of sturgeons, and sea- wolves as they are called; and there are +prodigious quantities of sea- dogs, or seals, having the head, feet, +and tail like ordinary dogs. The only other remarkable fish is of a +round form, about a yard and a half in diameter, with no perceptible +head or other member, from which the natives extract a great quantity +of oil, which they use in their lamps, and with which they anoint +their camels. The inhabitants of this country, who are all +Mahometans, are neither cruel nor barbarous, and used us exceedingly +well; having once asked us who we were, and being answered that we +were Christians, they troubled us with no farther inquiries. My dress +at this time consisted of coarse and much worn cloth, lined with +lambs skin, above which I wore a leathern robe, and my hat was of +skin; in which dress I frequently went to the market to purchase +flesh and other provisions, which I carried home myself. On one of +these occasions a person eyed me attentively, and, turning to some of +his comrades, said, this man was not born to the employment of +carrying meat. Marcus Ruffus, who happened to be along with me, +explained what the man had said; and I was astonished at being +recognized in so shabby a dress, which I thought must have proved a +sufficient concealment: but, in truth, as I have said before, they +are a very good kind of people.</p> +<p>During my residence in Derbent, I was anxious to learn some +certain intelligence respecting the state of affairs at the court of +Uzun-Hassan, for which purpose I sent Demetrius de Seze, my +interpreter, with letters to Josaphat Barbaro at Tauris, which is +twenty days journey from Derbent. He returned at the end of fifty +days, bringing answers from Barbaro, informing me that the king still +remained at Tauris, but that he was utterly ignorant of his +affairs.</p> +<p>Spring being arrived, we began to think of pursuing our journey, +and Marcus procured a boat for transporting us to <i>Curere</i> [3]. +The boats which are used in this country are drawn up on the shore +all winter, as the sea is then too rough for their use. They are +sharp at both ends, and wide in the middle, their planks being +fastened with tree-nails, and their bottoms payed over with pitch; +and as the natives use no compasses, or other maritime instruments, +they always creep along the coast. These boats, which are very crazy +and dangerous, are moved forwards by means of oars; and the people +are very ignorant of navigation, though they believe themselves the +best mariners in the world.</p> +<blockquote>[3] Perhaps Saray, on the eastern branch of the +Wolga.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the 5th of April 1475, we embarked, and departed from Derbent, +being thirty-five persons in all, including the master of the boat +and the crew. The rest of the passengers were merchants, carrying +rice, silk, and silken goods to <i>Citrarchan</i> [4], where they +proposed to sell their commodities to the Russians and Tartars, or to +barter them for other articles. Having coasted along during three +days, with a favourable wind, always keeping about fifteen miles from +the shore, the wind became contrary on the third evening, and +increased during the night to so violent a tempest that we expected +to have been lost. Although we had all reason to believe our bark +would be dashed to pieces on the shore, we made every effort to gain +the land, and fortunately our vessel ran into a kind of ditch or dock +between sand banks, very near the beach, where she stuck fast, +impelled by the united force of the winds and waves, and of our oars. +Between us and the shore there was a pool, through which we had to +wade, carrying our baggage on our shoulders; and we were almost +perished with cold, owing to the wind, and our being drenched with +water; yet we unanimously agreed to refrain from making a fire, lest +that circumstance might attract the notice of the Tartars, whom we +feared to meet with. At day light we noticed traces of horses having +been on the spot, and the recent fragments of a ruined skiff, from +which we were led to conclude, that some persons must have been here; +but some other circumstances gave us reason to believe that the +Tartars were not near the shore.</p> +<blockquote>[4] Probably Astracan is here meant.--E.</blockquote> +<p>We remained undisturbed at this place till the 14th of April, when +the wind and weather becoming favourable, we got our bark from the +creek, and again resumed our voyage, and advanced near thirty miles +the same day. Towards evening the wind became again contrary, but we +avoided the dangers of an impending storm, by taking refuge amidst +some reeds, among which our mariners hauled the boat, so as to be out +of danger from the waves, and we made our way to the land through the +reeds, in doing which we were much fatigued and thoroughly drenched +in water. We rested here all that night and the day following, which +was Easter day, having nothing on which to commemorate that festival, +except some butter, and a few eggs which we fortunately gathered on +the sandy beach. The mariners and passengers were often inquisitive +to know who I was; and, pursuant to the advice of Marcus Ruffus, I +passed myself among them as the physician and servant +of <i>Despima</i> , the consort of the grand duke of Moscovy, to whom I +was going. A short time after this, one of our mariners happened to +be afflicted by a large boil, and came to consult me in my assumed +character; and as I had the good fortune to discover some oil in our +bark, I made a poultice for him with bread and flour, by which he was +soon cured. From this circumstance they actually believed me to be a +physician, and were very anxious that I should remain among them; but +Marcus drew me out of this difficulty, by saying that I had no +medicinal preparations with me, but would soon return from Russia +with a proper assortment.</p> +<p>SECTION VII.</p> +<p> <i>Arrival of Contarini at Citracan, and journey from thence, +through several dangers among the Tartars, to Muscovy along with some +merchants</i> .</p> +<p>On the 15th of April we put again to sea with a favourable wind, +and coasting along a series of reedy islands, we arrived on the 26th +of that month at the mouth of the Wolga, a large river which flows +from Russia into the Caspian. From the mouth of this river it is +computed to be seventy-six miles to the city of Citracan[1], which we +reached on the 30th. Near this city there are +excellent <i>salines</i> [2], from which all the neighbouring provinces +are supplied with salt. The Tartars who commanded in the city would +not permit us to enter that evening, so that we had to pass the night +in a hut without the walls. In the morning three broad- faced Tartars +came and ordered us to go along with them to their prince. They +treated Marcus with respect, saying that he was a friend of their +sovereign; but alleged that I was his slave, as they consider all the +Franks or Christians as their enemies. These news were most cruelly +mortifying for me, and afflicted me severely; but I was obliged to +submit in spite of me, and Marcus advised me to allow him to speak +for me. Forced in this manner to return disconsolate to my hut, I was +long exposed to every indignity and danger, to my great mortification +and distress. The Tartars insisted that I was possessed of pearls, +and even plundered me of some merchandize I had purchased in Derbent, +intending to have bartered it in this place for a good horse to carry +me during the rest of my journey. They informed me afterwards, by +means of Marcus, that they intended to sell us all to certain people +whom they waited for, and who were to go into Muscovy with other +merchants. After many mortifications and distresses, it was resolved +to hold a grand consultation concerning us at a large village +named <i>Alermi</i> , about two miles from the city, where their lord +resided. At this time I was not possessed of a single farthing, and +was obliged to borrow money from the Russian and Tartar merchants, at +a high interest, to supply our urgent necessities, for which Marcus +became my bondsman.</p> +<blockquote>[1] Called Citrarchan in the former section, but +certainly what we now call Astracan, then the capital of a Tartar +principality, which now forms one of the provinces of the vast +Russian empire.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] These are large shallow ponds, in which sea water is +exposed to evaporation, to procure salt.--E.</blockquote> +<p>One day, while Marcus was absent, the khan or prince of the +Tartars[3], broke open the door of our hut, and endeavoured to compel +me by threats to deliver up the pearls which he believed I was +possessed of, and I had infinite difficulty to escape out of his +hands, and to persuade him not to put me to death. The Tartars used +often to come to our hut in the night, when drunk with mead, +demanding with loud outcries to deliver up the Franks to them, and +the bravest among us were terrified at the dangerous situation in +which we were among these savages. In this horrible situation we +remained from the 1st of May to the 10th of August. The city of +Citracan belongs to three brothers, who are sons to the brother of +the Tartar emperor, and the inhabitants often make plundering inroads +into the plains of <i>Cinassia</i> [4], and along the borders of the +Don. During the height of summer they travel with their flocks in +search of pasturage, to the northern parts of Russia, and hardly +spend above a month every year in Citracan. That city, which stands +on the banks of the Wolga, is by no means large, its houses being +built of earth: It is surrounded by a slight wall, and does not +appear to have had any better buildings for a long time past. It is +said to have had a very considerable fair formerly, and that the +perfumes and spiceries which used to be brought to Venice, came first +to this place from the east, whence they were carried to the Tanais +or Don, which is only eight days journey from the Wolga. The prince +of Citracan, whose name is <i>Casinach</i> , sends every year an +ambassador to the grand duke of Muscovy, on purpose to extort a +present; and on this occasion, several Tartar merchants accompany the +ambassador, carrying silk, silken vestments, and other articles of +trade, which they barter for saddles, furs, and other things which +are in request among their countrymen.</p> +<blockquote>[3] In the original this person is called the cham of +the <i>Camercheriens</i> . The Tartar government of Astracan belonged +to one of the Mongal tribes of Kipschak; but the word used in the +original may have been a local term, not now +explicable.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] Perhaps the kingdom or province of Cazan, higher up +the Wolga.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The only way of travelling into Russia from this place, is through +extensive deserts, on which account travellers have to go in large +bands or caravans for mutual security, and to carry provisions for +the journey. The Tartars care little for the latter precaution, as +they have always plenty of spare horses, and kill one when needed, as +they live entirely on flesh and milk, without caring for any other +food. They use no bread, and only a few of their merchants who have +been in Russia know any thing of this article. Previous to the +commencement of our journey[5], we provided provisions for the +journey as well as we could. In this view we procured some rice with +much difficulty, which, boiled in milk, and then dried in the sun, +makes, when afterwards boiled in water, an excellent and nourishing +food. We had likewise some onions, a small quantity of biscuit, and +some other trifles, and I bought, during the journey, the salted tail +of a sheep[6]. The usual road from Citracan to Russia lay between two +branches of the Wolga, but the roads were then exceedingly dangerous, +as the Tartar emperor was then at war with his nephew, who pretended +a right to the throne, as his father had once been emperor. On this +account it was proposed to pass over to the other side of the river, +and to travel towards the straits between the Don and the Wolga, +which are about five days journey from Citracan, after which it was +presumed we should be out of danger. Our baggage was accordingly +carried across the river on rafts, and Marcus desired me to keep +always along with him and the Tartar ambassador, +named <i>Auchioli</i> . I and my interpreter accordingly set out about +mid-day along with the ambassador, to go to the place where the boats +waited for us, which was about twelve miles from the city, our other +companions having already gone there. On our arrival about sunset, +while I prepared to go into one of the boats on purpose to cross the +river, Marcus seemed suddenly struck with an extraordinary panic, and +commanded the interpreter and me to take to flight instantly to avoid +inevitable danger. We mounted therefore immediately, having likewise +a Russian woman along with us and a Tartar guide of a most horrible +aspect, and set out at full speed. In this manner we followed our +guide the whole of that night and part of the next day, without being +ever allowed to stop. I frequently asked our guide, by means of my +interpreter, what was the reason of all this, and where he proposed +to carry me? At length he explained the cause of Marcus having made +us set off, with such precipitation; as the khan had sent an order to +examine all the boats, and he was apprehensive they would have +detained me as a slave if I had been found.</p> +<blockquote>[5] Contarini has forgot to give us any account in what +manner he procured leave to quit Astracan. Perhaps, by means of +Marcus, he was permitted to pass for one of his +attendants.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] It may be necessary to remark, that the tails of a +peculiar species of sheep, O. Platyurus, or the broad-tailed sheep, +common among the Tartars, and other parts of the world, are said +sometimes to weigh twenty-five pounds.--E.</blockquote> +<p>About mid-day of the 13th of August 1475, we arrived at the banks +of the river, and our Tartar guide endeavoured to find a boat in +which to carry us into an island in which the flocks of Auchioli were +kept; but not finding one, he cut down some branches, which he tied +together so as to form a raft. On this he placed the saddles of our +horses, and tying this raft to his horses tail, he mounted the horse, +on which he swam across the river to the island, which lay a bow-shot +from the shore. He then came back with the raft, on which he carried +over the Russian woman; after which he came back for me, and I +stripped myself naked before trusting myself to the crazy raft, that +I might be in readiness to save myself by swimming, in case of any +misfortune. He afterwards returned for our horses; and my interpreter +swam across. The passage of the river being thus happily effected, +the Tartar carried us to a wretched hovel, covered by a miserable +woollen cloth, where he gave us some sour milk, which we found very +refreshing, as we had been long without food, and were much fatigued. +Immediately on our arrival in the island being known, several Tartars +left their flocks to come and see us, seeming infinitely surprized +and much gratified by the sight, as we were probably the first +Christians who had ever been on the island. Being exceedingly +fatigued and distressed in mind, I did not care to speak with them, +yet our Tartar guide treated me with much kindness, and made me as +good cheer as he was able. Next day, being the eve of the festival of +the Virgin, he killed a fat lamb to entertain me, part of which he +roasted, and part was boiled; and though contrary to the rules of our +religion to eat meat on that day, I made a hearty meal, +notwithstanding that every thing was disgustingly dirty. We had +likewise sour milk to drink, and the Tartars drank mares milk, of +which they are very fond; but I would not drink this, though I could +easily perceive my dislike did not please the Tartars.</p> +<p>I remained here two days; and at last, on the 26th of August, +Marcus and the rest made their appearance on the other side of the +river, and sent a boat for me in which were two of his servants, a +Russian and a Tartar. Stephen Testa and John Ungaret, my two +attendants, were very much rejoiced at seeing me again, as they +believed me entirely lost, and we rested two days at this place +before entering upon the desert. Marcus had been so attentive as to +provide a horse for me, of which I stood in great need. In this +caravan, which was under the command of the Tartar ambassador, there +were about three hundred persons, Russians and Tartars, who carried +with them above two hundred[7] horses, partly intended to serve as +food by the way, and partly for sale in Russia. We arrived in good +order at night on the banks of the river, and we rested every day at +noon during the fifteen days of our journey, as we were now +considered to be out of danger from any attack by the Tartars. I do +not recollect the name of the emperor of the Tartars who inhabit this +part of the country between the Wolga and the Tanais. This nation has +no fixed place of abode, but shift their encampments from place to +place, wherever they can find pasture and water for their cattle, on +which they have their whole dependence, as they subsist entirely on +flesh and milk. They have cows, heifers, and sheep of admirable +beauty, the flesh of which is excellent, as they feed on fine +pastures; but these people prefer mares milk to every other delicacy. +Though I have not been in the country of these Tartars, I have been +informed that it is flat and agreeable, having neither hill nor +mountain; but the inhabitants addict themselves excessively to +robbery and plunder, as their sole occupation, and continually infest +the borders of Russia and Circassia by predatory incursions. Their +horses are very wild and unmanageable, and are never shod. We were +told that there is another tribe of Tartars beyond the Wolga, named +wild Tartars, who allow their hair to grow extremely long. In the +middle of winter they often make inroads to the very skirts of the +city of Citracan, whence they carry off cattle, but do no other +damage. These people, like all the Tartars, shift their encampments +in search of pasturage and water.</p> +<blockquote>[7] Probably an error for 2000.--E.</blockquote> +<p>After travelling for fifteen days along the eastern bank of the +Wolga, we came to a small forest, where the Tartars and Russians of +the caravan cut down trees to construct rafts for crossing the river. +While they were at this work, we discovered a small bark which was by +no means in good repair, by means of which our company proposed to +convey our baggage across. Marcus crossed over with a part of our +baggage, leaving me in charge of the rest, and sent back the boat +when he was landed. In my trip with the remainder of our baggage, the +boat began to leak when we were about half way over, the breadth of +the river at this place being about two miles. Stephen and two +Russians accompanied me in the boat, leaving Demetrius, my +interpreter, and John Ungar in charge of the horses. We had much ado +to bale out the water, but by the blessing of God, we got over in +safety. After our baggage was landed, the Russians put off, to go +back for the rest of our people and the horses; but the boat fell to +pieces. This necessarily delayed our other servants and the horses +from getting over till next day, during which interval they were +badly off, as all our provisions were on our side. It was fortunate +that I now examined the state of our provisions, which I found +diminished much beyond expectation, so that we were under the +necessity of abridging our allowance for the remainder of the +journey, that we might not run short altogether. Our principal food +consisted of millet, with garlic and onions, and some sour milk; and +we found some wild apples at this place, which we roasted. In the +course of two days, the whole baggage of the caravan was transported +to the western side of the river by means of seven rafts, drawn by +horses, and directed by the Tartars, the horses swimming and having +the rafts tied to their tails. The sight of this was very amusing, +but seemed very dangerous to those who were employed. After resting +some time, we quitted the banks of the river, and resumed our +journey. This river Wolga is certainly the largest and deepest river +in the world, being, as well as I could judge, two miles broad, and +has very high banks.</p> +<p>SECTION VIII.</p> +<p> <i>Contarini, after crossing European Sarmatia, arrives at Moscow, +the capital of White Russia, and is presented to the Grand +Duke.</i> </p> +<p>After recommending ourselves to the protection of God, we +continued our journey, through immense and terrible deserts, +sometimes towards the north, and sometimes westerly[1], always +resting at noon, and taking up our quarters for the night on the bare +ground, without any protection against the weather. To prevent us +from being surprized in the night by the wandering Tartars, outguards +were placed every night in three directions around our resting-place. +During the greater part of this long and dreary journey, we were very +ill off for water both for ourselves and our cattle, and we never saw +any wild animals. One day we saw about forty horses, which we were +told had escaped from a caravan of merchants the year before. We fell +in one day with a small horde of Tartars, having twenty waggons, but +I was not able to learn where they were going. As our provisions +decreased rapidly, we were forced to use the remainder very +sparingly, and were consequently reduced to a very short +allowance.</p> +<blockquote>[1] This journey appears to have been through the country +on the west of the Wolga, which they probably passed about Czariein, +through the provinces of Saratov, Woronez, and Penza, avoiding the +Ilafla, to Rezan or Riazan.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the 22d of September 1475, we entered Russia, and discovered a +few huts in the middle of a wood. On the inhabitants learning that +Marcus, their countryman, was in our caravan, they came to see him +that he might protect them from the Tartars, and brought him a +present of honey and wax, a part of which he gave to us. This was a +most providential supply, as we were so much reduced by fatigue and +spare diet, that we were hardly able to sit on horseback. The first +city we came to in this country was <i>Rezan</i> [2], the prince of +which place had married a sister of the Grand Duke of Russia. The +castle and all the houses of this city are built of wood. We here +procured bread and meat, and mead in abundance, to our great comfort +and satisfaction. The next city we came to was <i>Kolomna</i> , passing +a very large bridge over the <i>Monstrus</i> [3] which flows into the +Wolga. At this place, Marcus quitted the caravan, which travelled too +slowly in his opinion, and pushed on for Moscow, where we arrived on +the 26th of September, after a journey of forty-seven days through +the desert, from the 10th of August, on which day we left Citracan. +In a great part of this journey we found no wood, and were forced to +cook our victuals with fires made of dried cow dung. We returned +thanks to God on our arrival, for our preservation through so many +and great dangers. On our arrival, Marcus procured a dwelling for us, +consisting of a small stove- room and some chambers, with stabling +for our horses. Though small and mean, I felt as if lodged in a +palace, when I compared my present state of tranquil security with +the dangers and inconveniences I had been so long subjected to.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Rezan or Riazan, in the province of that name, on the +Oka. In a considerable, part of the track of this journey, there are +now towns and villages; but the whole of this south-eastern frontier +of European Russia, appears to have been then entirely waste, and +pervaded by the wandering Tartars. We are quite in the dark +respecting the particulars of the route from Astracan to Rezan. It +was certainty on the east of the Wolga at the first, to avoid the +Tartars which occupied the country between the Caspian and Euxine. +The passage of that vast river may have been at Czariein, at its +great elbow, in lat. 48° 30'N. or about Saratov in 51° 20'N. +neither of which towns seem to have then existed. From thence they +would probably proceed, to avoid the larger rivers, between where +Penza and Tchenbar now stand, and by the scite of Morbansk, towards +Riazan.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] In the original this large bridge is said to have +been at Kolomna, which is on the river Mosqua, of very inferior +magnitude; and flows into the Oka, which most probably is the +Monstrus of the text.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Marcus made me a visit two days afterwards, and supplied me with +some necessaries, exhorting me, as on the part of his sovereign, to +keep a good heart. I returned his visit next day; and being very +desirous to return home to Venice, I requested him to introduce me to +the grand duke, which he promised to do as soon as possible, and I +soon afterwards was desired to go to court. Immediately on my getting +there, I was conducted to an audience; on which I made my obeisance +in due form to the grand duke, to whom I returned thanks for all the +attentions I had received from his ambassador, Marcus, in the course +of my journey, by whose assistance and advice I had escaped a +thousand dangers; assuring his highness that I attributed these marks +of kindness as done to the republic of Venice, whose ambassador I +was, and that the republic would unquestionably evince a due sense of +the obligations, to which I owed my life and safety. The grand duke +interrupted my harangue, by complaining with much emotion of the +conduct of <i>John Baptista</i> of Treviso, and said a great deal on +this subject, which is not proper for me to report. After a +conversation of some length, in which I spoke to his highness about +my departure, he closed my audience, postponing his answers to my +requests to a future opportunity. The grand duke was very shortly to +quit Moscow, on purpose to visit several parts of his dominions, and +particularly the Tartar frontier, where one of his officers was +stationed, with the command of 500 horse[4], to repress the +incursions of robbers on that side: I therefore endeavoured to +procure an answer about my departure, and solicited a second audience +for that purpose. On this occasion I was very politely received by +the grand duke, accompanied by three of his principal barons. At +first they expatiated at some length on the subject of John Baptista, +formerly mentioned; but at length I received liberty to remain or to +depart as I thought proper. They dismissed me with this vague answer, +and the grand duke set out from Moscow soon afterwards. I owed a +great deal of money to Marcus, which he had expended for me and my +people, as he had defrayed the whole expences of our journey, and had +supplied me with many things of which I stood in need. I requested +permission from him to go away, giving him the most solemn assurance +that I would transmit full payment to him immediately after my +arrival at Venice. But he declared this was not in his power, as he +was under the necessity of repaying the Tartarian and Russian +merchants, who had advanced all these things for us, and to whom he +had become security for payment. Finding every application to the +duke and Marcus on this subject ineffectual, as I could not procure +the necessary funds for my journey from either, I was under the +necessity of sending Stephen Testa to Venice, to solicit a remittance +from our illustrious senate, by which I might be enabled to pay my +debts. Stephen left Moscow on the 7th of October, accompanied by +one <i>Nicolas Leopolitain</i> [5], who knew the country.</p> +<blockquote>[4] In the original, the commander of this body of +cavalry is said to have been a Tartarian general--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] The word Leopolitain, may possibly be a corruption +for Neopolitan, or a native of Naples. Perhaps it may refer to +Leopol, in that part of Poland now belonging to Austria, and called +Galicia.--E.</blockquote> +<p>I became acquainted at Moscow with one Triphon, a goldsmith, a +native of Ascravia or Cathara, who was employed in making several +articles of silver plate for the grand duke. I likewise formed +acquaintance with a very ingenious architect of Bologna, named +Aristotle, who was building a new church in the market-place. As the +house in which I lodged was small and disagreeable, I went to live +with this person by the advice of Marcus: But I was soon after +obliged to change my quarters by order from court, to a house near +the castle, in which I remained for the rest of my stay at Moscow. +This city, which is the capital of the Russian dominions, and the +residence of the grand duke, or sovereign, is built on a small +elevation, on the banks of the Mosqua, over which there are several +bridges; the castle and all the houses of the city being built of +wood, which is procured from several thick forests near the place. +The soil of this country is fertile, and produces abundance of corn +of all kinds, which sell here much cheaper than with us; The country +abounds in cattle and swine, and with incredible numbers of poultry, +ducks, geese, and hares; but they have no venison, either because +there are no deer, or because the natives are ignorant of the art of +taking them. But they have no vines, and their only fruits are +cucumbers, wild apples, and nuts. The country is extremely cold, and +the inhabitants are under the necessity of living for nine months of +the year in stoves. They provide during winter for their living in +summer[6]. When the whole country is enveloped in frost and snow, +they use sledges drawn by horses, which are very convenient and +useful for travelling; and are even used in summer on account of the +miry bad roads, which are exceedingly difficult and unpleasant. The +river ordinarily freezes over about the end of October, when the +merchants erect booths on the ice, in which they expose their wares +of all kinds for sale, as in a fair or market; and they here sell +great numbers of cattle and swine, and great quantities of corn, +timber, and all other necessaries of life; every thing being +procurable in great abundance all the winter. About the end of +November, they kill all the cattle, sheep, and other animals that are +required for winter provision, and expose them for sale on the river +in a frozen state; and the rigour of the season preserves these +provisions for two or three months, without any risk of spoiling. +Fish, poultry, and all other articles of food, are kept in the same +manner. The horses run with great ease and swiftness on the ice yet +they sometimes fell and break their necks. Both men and women of this +country have very good faces, but their manners are exceedingly +bad.</p> +<blockquote>[6] Such is the expression in the original, which ought +perhaps to be reversed. Yet Contarini possibly meant to say, that the +inhabitants of Moscow laid up a sufficient stock of money from the +profits of their long winter labours, for their subsistence during +summer; when, by the absence of the court, they had little +employment.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The Russian church is ruled over by a patriarch, whose election or +appointment is dependent on the grand duke, and who does not +acknowledge subjection to the Roman pontiff; and they hold all +sectaries in abhorrence, as people doomed to perdition. The natives +are much addicted to drunkenness, and he who excels in drinking is +much esteemed among them. They have no wine, as I have said before, +instead of which they drink mead, made of honey and water, which is +very pleasant when sufficiently kept. It is not allowed to every one +to make this liquor, for which purpose a license or permission must +be had from the grand duke; for if every person had liberty to make +mead, they would drink perpetually like so many beasts, and would +kill one another. From morning till noon, they are employed in the +market-place, occupied in their various businesses and employments, +after which they adjourn to the taverns, in which they spend all the +rest of the day. Every winter, great numbers of merchants come to +Moscow from Germany and Poland, who purchase furs of all kinds, which +are indeed exceedingly beautiful. Among these furs, are the skins of +foxes, wolves, martins, sables, ermines, and many others, from +Scythia and the alpine regions, many days journey to the north of +Moscow. Many of these are likewise carried for sale to Novogorod[7], +a city towards the frontiers of Germany, eight days journey west from +Moscow. The government of that city is democratic, and only pays a +stipulated yearly tribute to the grand duke.</p> +<blockquote>[7] There are two cities named Novogrod or Novgorod in +Russia, nearly at equal distances from Moscow, one to the northwest, +and the other to the southwest; the latter of which, named Novgorod +Sieverskov, is probably meant in the text, and which ought rather to +have been described as towards the frontiers of Poland. The other +Novgorod did not then belong to the Russian +sovereignty.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The country subject to the grand duke of Russia is of vast extent, +and an infinite number of people are subject to his dominions, but +they are by no means warlike. This empire extends from the north +towards the west, to that part of Germany which is under the dominion +of the king of Poland[8]; and some reckon among his subjects a +wandering nation of idolaters, who acknowledge no sovereign, not even +submitting to the authority of the grand duke, but when it suits +their own convenience. These wandering tribes are said to worship +during the day whatever first presents itself to their view, on going +out in the morning; many other ridiculous things are reported of +them, which I do not repeat, as I have not seen them, and can hardly +give credit to the reports. The grand duke[9] appeared to be about +thirty-five years of age, was handsomely made, and had very dignified +manners, and an air quite royal. His mother was still alive, and he +had two brothers. By a former wife he had two sons, who did not agree +with Despina, the reigning grand duchess, and were not therefore on +very friendly terms with their father. Despina, his second wife, had +brought him two daughters, and was said to be again with child.</p> +<blockquote>[8] The geographical ideas of Contarini are very vague +and superficial. This is perhaps the only instance wherein Poland; a +portion of European Sarmatia, is considered as belonging +geographically to Germany.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[9] The reigning sovereign of Russia at the period was +John III. who began to reign in 1463, and was succeeded in 1505 by +Basil IV.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The grand duke returned to Moscow from his journey to the +frontiers about the end of December; and, as I could not reconcile +myself to the manners and mode of life of the Russians, I became +exceedingly impatient to leave the country, and could not persuade +myself to stay for the return of Stephen from Venice with money. For +this reason, I made interest with one of the lords of the court, to +prevail on the grand duke to supply me with money, and to give me +leave to depart. A few days afterwards, the grand duke sent for me to +court and invited me to dinner, when he agreed, from respect to the +republic, to lend me as much money as was necessary to clear all my +debts to the Tartarian and Russian merchants, and to enable me to +return to Venice. The dinner was quite magnificent, consisting of +every delicacy, and of abundance of exquisitely dressed dishes. When +the repast was finished, I retired according to custom. Some days +afterwards, I was again invited to court, and the grand duke gave +orders his treasurer to give me all the money necessary for paying my +debts, besides which, he presented me with 1000 ducats, and a +magnificent dress of Scythian squirrels skins, to wear in his +presence when I came to court. Before returning to my quarters, he +ordered me to be presented to the grand duchess, who received me very +graciously, and desired me to offer her respectful salutations to our +illustrious republic, which I promised to do.</p> +<p>SECTION IX.</p> +<p> <i>Contarini leaves Moscow, and having passed through Lithuania, +Poland, and Germany, arrives at Venice.</i> </p> +<p>On the day before that which I had fixed for my departure, I was +invited to dine at court. Before dinner, I was taken into one of the +halls of the palace, where I found the grand duke, accompanied by +Marcus and a secretary. His highness addressed me very graciously, +and desired me to report all the marks of esteem and friendship he +had shewn me, from respect to our illustrious republic, and offered +me every thing I could desire, and which lay in his power to grant. +While speaking, I drew back from respect; but as I retired he always +advanced. I answered every thing to his satisfaction, and humbly +offered my most grateful thanks for all his benevolence to me. He +treated me with the utmost politeness and familiarity, and even +condescended to shew me some robes of gold tissue, magnificently +lined with Scythian sables; after which we went to dinner. The repast +was extraordinarily magnificent, at which several of the barons and +great officers of state assisted. When we rose from table, the grand +duke called me to him, and gave me my audience of leave in the most +gracious terms, speaking so loud as to be heard by all the company, +and expressing his high esteem for the illustrious republic of +Venice. After this, by his order, a silver cup was brought to me +filled with mead, of which he made me a present, as a mark of high +regard with which he honours ambassadors, and other persons to whom +he shews favour. This present was to me a matter of very serious +consideration, as the etiquette required me to empty its contents, +and the cup was very large. When I had drained about a quarter of the +liquor, knowing the sobriety of the Italians, and perceiving that I +was much difficulted, the grand duke had the goodness to order the +remainder to be emptied, and the goblet given to me. Having thanked +the grand duke in as respectful terms as I was able, I took my leave +and retired, accompanied by several barons and other persons of +rank.</p> +<p>Every thing was now in readiness for my departure, but Marcus +would by no means hear of my leaving Moscow, without taking a dinner +with him, and accordingly gave me a magnificent entertainment. Louis, +the patriarch of Antioch, of whom I have before made mention, came +about this time to Moscow, and was detained there by order of the +grand duke; but I made interest through Marcus for his release, which +I obtained, and he was to have travelled along with me. But as he +delayed too long, I set off without him. At length, on the 21st +January 1476, we set out from Moscow in sledges, made like small +huts, each drawn by a horse, and guided by a driver. In these sledges +we carried our baggage and provisions along with us, and in them, +journeys of great length may be made in a wonderfully short time. By +order of the grand duke, I had a guide appointed to conduct me on the +right road, and this was continued from place to place all, through +his dominions. We slept the first night in a small village, where we +found our lodgings exceedingly cold, but that was the smallest of our +inconveniencies, and on this account I hastened our journey as much +as possible. On the 27th of January, we arrived at <i>Vieseme</i> , and +a few days afterwards at Smolensk on the frontiers of Lithuania, in +the dominions of Casimir king of Poland. From Smolensk, till we +arrived at <i>Trach</i> [1], a city of Lithuania, we travelled +continually in a plain interspersed with some hills, the whole +country being covered with wood, and our only lodgings were in +miserable hovels; dining always about noon wherever we could meet +with a fire, which had been left burning by travellers who had passed +before us. We had generally to break the ice to procure water for our +horses; we lighted fires to warm ourselves; and our sledges served us +instead of beds, as without them we must have slept on the ground. We +went with such expedition, over the frozen snow, that we were assured +we had travelled 300 miles in three days and two nights.</p> +<blockquote>[1] This almost certainty a corruption of +Troki--E.</blockquote> +<p>Casimir king of Poland, who then resided at <i>Troki</i> , +immediately on learning my arrival, sent two of his gentlemen to +compliment me in his name, and to congratulate me on my safe return. +They likewise invited me to dine with his majesty on the following +day, which was the 15th of February, and presented me on the part of +the king with a robe of purple damask, lined with Scythian furs, in +which I dressed myself to go to court. On this occasion, I went in a +coach and six, accompanied by four noblemen and several other +persons. The king himself did me the honour to receive me, and +conducted me into a magnificent apartment, where he introduced me to +two of his sons in presence of many nobles, knights, and gentlemen of +the court. A chair was placed for me in the middle of the room; and +when I offered to kneel on one knee while addressing the king, his +majesty had the goodness to insist that I should sit down in his +presence, which I did after some hesitation. I then gave a recital of +all that had occurred in my travels, with some account of the +dominions of Uzun-Hassan, and of the number of his forces, and of the +empire and manners of the Tartars. The king and his courtiers +listened to me with much attention during my whole speech, which +lasted more than half an hour. I then thanked his majesty for the +present he had made me, and for all his kindnesses to me, attributing +his attentions to the esteem he entertained for our illustrious +republic. His majesty was pleased, by means of an interpreter, to +express great satisfaction at my safe arrival, as he hardly expected +I should ever have been able to return; and that he was much pleased +with the information I had given him respecting Uzun- Hassan and the +Tartars, which he believed to be more authentic than any he had +received before. After some other discourse, I was conducted to the +hall where the dinner was served; soon after which his majesty came +into the hall with his two sons, preceded by several trumpets. The +king sat down at the head of the table, having his two sons on his +right hand; the primate of the kingdom sat next on his majestys left, +and I was placed next the bishop. The remainder of the table was +occupied by about forty of the nobles. Each service was ushered in +with the sound of trumpets, and all the meats were served on large +silver dishes.</p> +<p>After dinner, which lasted two hours, I rose to depart, and asked +the king if he had any farther orders to honour me with; when he was +pleased to say very graciously, that he charged me to assure the +senate that his most anxious desire was to cultivate perpetual +friendship and good-will with our illustrious republic, and he was +pleased to make his sons express the same friendly wishes. Having +respectfully taken leave of the king, I was conducted back to my +lodgings by several of the courtiers.</p> +<p>Being supplied with a guide, I departed from Troki on the 16th of +February, and in nine days, passing through the city of <i>Ionici</i> , +I arrived at Warsaw on the 1st of March. The country of Poland +appeared very pleasant, and abundant in every, thing except fruit. +During our journey we saw many villages and castles, and were well +received everywhere, but we found no considerable city. After +remaining four days in Warsaw, where I purchased horses for the rest +of our journey, we set out from that place on the 5th of March, and +came that day to a town call <i>Messarig</i> , where we began to +travel with less assurance of safety, as this place is on the +frontiers towards Germany. On the 9th I arrived at Frankfort on the +Oder, from which place we found more commodious lodgings in +traversing Germany, than we had been accustomed to for a long time. +While passing the city of <i>Gia</i> [2], on the 15th of March, I had +the good fortune to meet with Stephen Testa, whom I had sent from +Moscow to Venice for money. I was quite delighted at this meeting, as +from him I received good accounts from home. We now entered the city +of <i>Gia</i> , where we rested two days. On the 22d we reached +Nurenburgh, where we remained four days; from whence we went by +Augsburgh, and several other fine cities of Germany, and arrived at +Trent on the 4th of April, where we celebrated the festival of +Easter. Being extremely anxious to revisit my beloved country, I set +out from thence after three days stay, and reached <i>Scala</i> , in +the dominions of our republic. In discharge of a vow that I had +entered into, I went to visit the church of the blessed Virgin on +Mount Arthon, and presented the offerings which I had promised at her +holy shrine. I had already sent notice to my brother Augustine, that +he might expect me in Venice towards evening of the 10th of April; +but my extreme desire of getting back to my country, made me get home +considerably earlier. Embarking at break of day, I arrived at three +in the afternoon at <i>Lucafusina</i> ; and, before going to my own +house, I went, in the discharge of another vow, to the church of +our <i>Lady of Grace</i> , and met my brother on my way in the Jews +street. We embraced with great affection, and went together to the +church. After finishing my devotions, I went to the palace, as +the <i>Pregadi</i> were then assembled, it being on a Thursday. I was +admitted into the council, to which I gave an account of the success +of my embassy; after which, as our serene Doge was indisposed, I paid +my respects to him in his apartment, and gave him a short history of +my travels, and particularly concerning those things on which I had +been commissioned. From thence I went to my own house, where I gave +thanks to God for his infinite mercy, in having permitted me to +return in health and safety, after so many dangers. To conclude: +Although I might have composed this narrative of my travels in a more +eloquent style, I have preferred truth in few words, to falsehood +dressed up in ornamented language. I have been very brief in relation +to Germany, as that country is in our neighbourhood, and is therefore +well known to many, on which account it would have been both +superfluous and tiresome to have given a minute description of what +every one knows.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Though this place must assuredly be a town in +Germany, between Frankfort on the Oder and Nurenburgh, its name is so +disguised as to be quite unintelligible.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION X.</p> +<p> <i>Recapitulation of some circumstances respecting Persia.</i> </p> +<p>The empire of Uzun-Hassan is very extensive, and is bounded by +Turkey and Caramania, belonging to the Sultan, and which latter +country extends to Aleppo. Uzun-Hassan took the kingdom of Persia +from <i>Causa</i> [1], whom he put to death. The city of Ecbatana, or +Tauris, is the usual residence of Uzun-Hassan; Persepolis, +or <i>Shiras</i> [2], which is twenty-four days journey from thence, +being the last city of his empire, bordering on the Zagathais, who +are the sons of Buzech, sultan of the Tartars, and with whom he is +continually at war. On the other side is the country of Media, which +is under subjection to <i>Sivansa</i> , who pays a kind of yearly +tribute to Uzun-Hassan. It is said that he has likewise some +provinces on the other side of the Euphrates, in the neighbourhood of +the Turks[3]. The whole country, all the way to Ispahan, six days +journey from Persepolis, is exceedingly arid, having very few trees +and little water, yet it is fertile in grain and other provisions. +The king seemed to me about seventy years of age, of large stature, +with a pleasant countenance, and very lean. His eldest son, named +Ogurlu Mohamed, was much spoken of when I was in Persia, as he had +rebelled against his father. He had other three sons; Khalil Mirza, +the elder of these was about thirty-five years old, and had the +government of Shiras. Jacub beg, another son of Uzun- Hassan, was +about fifteen, and I have forgotten the name of a third son.[4] By +one of his wives he had a son named <i>Masubech</i> , or Maksud beg, +whom he kept in prison, because he was detected in corresponding with +his rebellious brother <i>Ogurlu</i> , and whom he afterwards put to +death. According to the best accounts which I received from different +persons, the forces of Uzun-Hassan may amount to about 50,000 +cavalry, a considerable part of whom are not of much value. It has +been reported by some who were present, that at one time he led an +army of 40,000 Persians to battle against the Turks, for the purpose +of restoring <i>Pirameth</i> to the sovereignty of Karamania, whence +he had been expelled by the infidels.[5]</p> +<blockquote>[1] Uzun-Hassan, as formerly mentioned, was prince of the +Turkmans of the white sheep tribe, and acquired the dominion of +western Persia, by the defeat of Hassan-ali prince of the black sheep +Turkmans, who is probably the person named Causa in the +text.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] This is a mistake, Persepolis is supposed to have +been at, or near Istakar, above twenty miles N.N.E. from +Shiras.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] Diarbekir, with the cities of Arzunjan, Mardin, Roha, +or Orfa, and Siwas, are said to have been committed by Timour to the +government of Kara Ilug Ozman, the great grandfather of Uzun-Hassan, +who may have retained the original possessions of his tribe after the +acquisition of western Persia.--Mod. Univ. Hist. VI. +111.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] According to the authors of the Modern Universal +History. B. VIII. ch. i. sect. 3. Uzun-Hassan had seven sons: Ogurlu +Mohammed, Khahil Mirza, Maksud beg, Jakub beg, Masih beg, Yusuf beg, +and Zegnel. Contarini strangely corrupts almost every name that +occurs. Uzun-Hassan, he makes Unsuncassan; Ogurlu Mohammed, Gurlu +mamech; Kalil mirza, Sultan chali; Yakub beg, Lacubei; Maksud beg, or +Masih beg, Masubech; and omits three of the seven.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] Uzun-Hassan is said to have been defeated in battle +by the Turks, in 1471, near Arzenjan.--Mod. Univ. Hist. VI. +113.</blockquote> +<h2><a name="chapter2-3" id="chapter2-3">CHAPTER III.</a></h2> +CHAPTER III. +<p><b> <i>Voyages of discovery by the Portuguese along the western +coast of Africa, during the life, and under the direction of Don +Henry.</i> </b>[1]</p> +<blockquote>[1] Astley. I. 9. Clarke, I. 140. Purchas, I. 6. Harris, +I. 662.</blockquote> +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> +<p>The knowledge possessed by the ancients respecting India, will be +the subject of discussion in a future portion of this work. We have +now to contemplate the tedious, yet finally successful efforts of the +Portuguese nation, in its age of energetic heroism, to discover a +maritime passage to that long famed commercial region, some general +knowledge of which had been preserved ever since the days of the +Persian, Macedonian, and Roman empires. Of all the great events which +have occurred in the modern ages, previous to our own times, the +voyages and discoveries which were made by the Europeans, in the +fifteenth and sixteenth centuries of the Christian era, are justly +entitled to preference, whether we appreciate the vast improvements +which they made in navigation, and, consequently, in commerce,--the +astonishing abundance of wealth which they brought into Europe,--the +surprising feats of bravery which were performed in their various +expeditions and conquests,--the extensive, populous, and valuable +territories which were subdued or colonized,--or the extended +knowledge, which was suddenly acquired of the greater part of the +earth, till then either altogether unknown, or very partially and +erroneously described. By these discoveries, we allude to those of +the southern and western hemispheres, a new heaven and a new earth +were opened up to the astonishment of mankind, who may be said to +have been then furnished with wings to fly from one end of the earth +to the other, so as to bring the most distant, and hitherto utterly +unknown nations, acquainted with each other. In the ordinary course +of human affairs, it has been observed that similar events frequently +occur; but the transactions of these times which we now propose to +narrate, were as singular in their kind as they were great, +surprising, and unexpected; neither can any such ever happen again, +unless Providence were to create new and accessible worlds for +discovery and conquest, or to replunge the whole of mankind for a +long period into the grossest ignorance.</p> +<p>The merit and glory of these wonderful achievements are +unquestionably due to the Portuguese nation, and the first and +principal share to the sublime genius of their illustrious prince, +the infant DON HENRY, <i>Duke of Viseo and Grand Master of the order +of Christ</i> , whose enlarged mind first planned the fitting out of +maritime expeditions for discovery, and by the imitation of whose +example all subsequent discoveries have been accomplished. Every +thing of the kind before his time was isolated or accidental, and +every subsequent attempt has been pursued on scientific or known +principles, which he invented and established. Although America was +discovered by Columbus, in the service of Spain, some years before +the Portuguese were able to accomplish their long sought route to +India; and although the discovery of America was performed infinitely +quicker than that of southern Africa and the route to India, Columbus +having accomplished his design at the very first attempt, and even +without any previous knowledge of the countries he went in search of; +while the endeavours of the Portuguese occupied a great number of +years in almost fruitless attempts, and extremely tedious +progression; yet Don Henry first set on foot the navigation of the +ocean through unknown seas, and inspired, other nations with the idea +of making discoveries of distant and unexplored regions; and +ultimately great as were the discoveries of Columbus, they may be +said to have been accidentally made in the erroneous attempt to go by +a nearer route to the regions of which Don Henry and his successors +had long been in search.</p> +<p>These attempts of the Portuguese had been continued for nearly +fourscore years before any of their neighbours seem to have +entertained the most distant idea of engaging in foreign discoveries, +even viewing their endeavours as downright knight-errantry, +proceeding from a distempered imagination, as well in the first +promoter as in those who continued to prosecute his scheme. In a +word, the relation of these discoveries forms one of the most curious +portions of modern history, as comprizing a great number of the most +extraordinary transactions that ever happened in any period of the +world. For this reason they are well worthy of being particularly +narrated, that the curious may be made acquainted with every +successive step in such important enterprizes, and by what almost +insensible degrees such vast undertakings were ultimately +accomplished. And as the intercourse of Europeans has operated a +great change in the countries to which they penetrated, and upon +their original inhabitants, so that both now appear in a very +different light from what they did before these expeditions and +discoveries; therefore, every circumstance belonging to these +transactions deserves the most serious notice.</p> +<p>John 1. of Portugal, married Philippa, the eldest daughter of John +of Gaunt, Duke of Lancaster, son to Edward III. of England, by whom +he had several sons, of whom Don Henry was the <i>fifth</i> . After +serving with great bravery under his father at the capture of Ceuta, +he was raised to the dukedom of Viseo, and was sent back with a large +reinforcement to preserve the conquest to which his courage had +largely contributed. During his continuance in command at Ceuta, he +acquired much information, by occasional converse with some Moors, +relative to the seas and coasts of Western Africa, which raised and +encouraged the project of maritime discoveries; and these became +afterwards the favourite and almost exclusive pursuit of his active +and enlarged mind. From the Moors he obtained intelligence respecting +the Nomadic tribes who border upon and pervade the great desert, and +of the nations of the Jaloofs, whose territories are conterminous +with the desert on the north, and Guinea to the south. By one +ingenious author[2], he has been supposed instigated to his first +attempts at maritime discovery, by the desire of finding a way by sea +to those countries from whence the Moors brought ivory and gold dust +across the desert. It unfortunately happens that we have no record of +the particular voyages themselves, and are therefore reduced to the +necessity of giving the relation of this great discovery historically +from the best remaining sources of information. The writings of Cada +Morto, which will be found in the sequel, form a pleasing exception +to this desideratum in the history and progress of early navigation +and discovery.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Wealth of Nations, II. 347.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION I.</p> +<p> <i>Commencement of Portuguese Discoveries, from Cape Non to Cape +Bojador</i> </p> +<p>Three years before the reduction of Ceuta, the Duke of Visco had +sent a vessel in 1412 to explore the western coast of Africa, being +the first voyage of discovery undertaken by the Portuguese, or by any +other nation in modern times. The commander was instructed to +endeavour to follow the western coast of Africa, to the southward of +Cape Chaunar, called by the Portuguese mariners Cape Nao, Non, or +Nam, which, extending itself from the foot of Mount Atlas, had +hitherto been the <i>non plus ultra</i> or impassable limit of +European navigation, and had accordingly received its ordinary name +from a negative term in the Portuguese language, as implying that +there was no navigation beyond; and respecting which a proverbial +saying was then current, of the following import:</p> +<p>Whoe'er would pass the Cape of Non<br> +Shall turn again; or else be gone.</p> +<p>The success of this earliest voyage, fitted out for the purpose of +discovery, is not recorded; but Don Henry continued to send some +vessels every year to the same coast, with the same instructions of +endeavouring to explore the coast beyond Cape Non. Not daring to +trust themselves beyond sight of land, the mariners crept timorously +along the coast, and at length reached Cape Bojador, only sixty +leagues, or 180 miles beyond Cape Non. This cape, which stretches +boldly out into the ocean, from which circumstance it derives its +name[1], filled the Portuguese mariners with terror and amazement; +owing to the shoals by which it is environed for the space of six +leagues, being perpetually beaten by a lofty and tremendous surge, +which precluded them, from all possibility of proceeding beyond it in +their ordinary manner of creeping along the coast; and they dared not +to stretch out into the open sea in quest of smoother water, lest, +losing sight of land altogether, they might wander in the trackless +ocean, and be unable to find their way home. It is not impossible +that they might contemplate the imaginary terrors of the torrid zone, +as handed down from some of the ancients, with all its burning soil +and scorching vapours; and they might consider the difficulties of +Cape Bojador as a providential bar or omen, to warn and oppose them +against proceeding to their inevitable destruction. They accordingly +measured back their wary steps along the African coast, and returned +to Portugal, where they gave an account of their proceedings to Don +Henry, in which, of course, the dangers of the newly discovered cape +would not be diminished in their narrative[2].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Explained by the celebrated Dr Johnson, as "so named +from its progression into the ocean, and the circuit by which it must +be doubled." Introduct. to the World Displayed.--Clark.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] Cape Bojador is imagined to have been +the <i>Canarea</i> of Ptolemy.-- Clarke I. 15</blockquote> +<p>Returning from Ceuta, where his presence was no longer necessary, +and where he had matured his judgment by intercourse with, various +learned men whom his bounty had attracted into Africa, and having +enlarged his views by the perusal of every work which tended to +illustrate the discoveries which he projected, Don Henry fixed his +residence at the romantic town of Sagres, in the neighbourhood of +Cape St Vincent, where he devoted his leisure to the study of +mathematics, astronomy, cosmography, and the theory of navigation, +and even established a school or academy for instructing his +countrymen in these sciences, the parents of commerce, and the sure +foundations of national prosperity. To assist him in the prosecution +of these his favourite studies, he invited, from Majorca, a person +named Diego, or James, who was singularly skilful in the management +of the instruments then employed for making astronomical observations +at sea, and in the construction of nautical charts. Some traces of +nautical discoveries along the western coast of Africa still remained +in ancient authors; particularly of the reported voyages of Menelaus, +Hanno, Eudoxus, and others. From an attentive consideration of these, +Don Henry and his scientific coadjutor were encouraged to hope for +the accomplishment of important discoveries in that direction; and +they were certainly incited in these views by the rooted enmity which +had so long rankled among the Christian inhabitants of Spain and +Portugal against the Moors, who had formerly expelled their ancestors +from the greatest part of the peninsula, and with whom they had waged +an incessant war of several centuries in recovering the country from +their grasp.</p> +<p>SECTION II.</p> +<p> <i>Discovery of the Madeira Islands.</i> </p> +<p>After some time usefully employed in acquiring and diffusing a +competent knowledge of cosmopographical, nautical, and astronomical +science, Don Henry resolved to devote a considerable portion of the +revenue which he enjoyed as Grand Master of the Order of Christ, in +continuing and extending those projects of nautical discovery which +had long occupied his attention. Accordingly, about the year 1418, a +new expedition of discovery was fitted out for the express purpose of +attempting to surmount the perils of Cape Bojador. In this expedition +Juan Gonzales Zarco and Tristan Vaz Texeira, two naval officers of +the household of Don Henry, volunteered their services; and, +embarking in a vessel called a <i>barcha</i> [3], steered for the +tremendous cape. The Portuguese were hitherto ignorant of the +prevailing winds upon the coast of Africa, and the causes by which +their influence is varied or increased. Near the land, and between +the latitudes of 28° and 10° north, a fresh gale almost +always blows from the N.E. Long sand-banks, which extend a great way +out to sea, and which are extremely difficult to be distinguished in +the mornings and evenings, and the prevailing currents, were powerful +obstacles to the enterprise of these navigators. About six leagues +off Cape Bojador, a most violent current continually dashes upon the +breakers, which presented a most formidable obstacle to the brave but +inexperienced mariners. Though their voyage was short, they +encountered many dangers; and, before they could reach the cape, they +were encountered by a heavy gale from the east, by which the billows +of the Atlantic became too heavy to be resisted by their small +vessel, and they were driven out to sea. On losing sight of their +accustomed head lands, and being forced into the boundless ocean for +the first time, the ships company gave themselves up to despair; but, +on the abatement of the tempest, they found themselves unexpectedly +within view of an island, situated about 100 leagues west from the +coast of Africa. With extreme joy they beheld the coast of this +island extending about twenty miles in length, to which they gave the +name of Puerto Santo, because first discovered upon the feast of All +Saints. This is the smaller of the Madeiras, being only about two +miles broad; and, as the only roadstead is upon the south-west side, +the Portuguese probably anchored upon that side to be under the lee +shelter of the island from the remnants of the tempest from which +they had happily escaped.</p> +<blockquote>[3] The <i>barcha</i> is a sort of brig with topsails, +having all its yards on one long pole without sliding masts, as still +used by tartans and settees. The <i>barcha longa</i> is a kind of +small galley, with one mast and oars.--Clark. I. p. 153.</blockquote> +<p>The island of <i>Puerto Santo</i> , or of the Holy Haven, is almost +directly west from Cape Cantin; whence it would appear that these +Portuguese navigators could hardly have passed much beyond Cape de +Geer, when driven off the coast by this fortunate easterly tempest. +Had they even advanced as far as Cape Non, they would almost +certainly have been driven among the Canaries. It is perfectly +obvious that they never even approached Cape Bojador in this voyage; +unless we could suppose, after having been driven directly west from +that cape, that they shaped a northern course, after the subsidence +of the tempest, and fell in with Puerto Santo while on their return +to Portugal.</p> +<p>Greatly pleased with the soil and climate of this island, and with +the gentle manners of the natives, whom they described as in an +intermediate state of civilization, and entirely destitute of any +appearance of savage ferocity, Zarco and Vaz immediately returned to +Portugal, where they made a report of the incidents of their voyage; +and to confirm their opinion of the value of their discovery, they +requested permission from Don Henry to return for the purpose of +establishing a settlement in Puerto Santo. By this discovery an +advanced and favourable station was secured towards the south, whence +any discoveries along the coast of Africa might be prosecuted with +greater ease and safety, and from whence the dangers of the hitherto +formidable cape Bojador might be avoided, by keeping a southerly or +S. W. course from Puerto Santo. From these considerations Don Henry +granted their request; and, yielding to the adventurous spirit which +this accidental discovery had excited, he permitted several persons +to join in a new projected voyage, among whom was Bartholomew +Perestrello, a nobleman of his household.</p> +<p>Three vessels were soon fitted out[4], which were placed under the +respective commands of Zarco, Vaz, and Perestrello. These commanders +had orders to colonize and cultivate the newly discovered island, and +were furnished with a considerable assortment of useful seeds and +plants for that purpose. They happened likewise to take with them a +female rabbit great with young, which littered during the voyage; and +which being let loose with her progeny, multiplied so rapidly, that, +in two years, they became so numerous as to occasion serious injury +to the early attempts at cultivation, and to baffle every hope of +rendering Puerto Santo a place of refreshment for the Portuguese +navigators; insomuch that a resolution was formed to abandon the +newly established settlement. After having landed the different +animals and seeds which had been sent out by Don Henry, and seeing +them properly distributed, Perestrello returned into Portugal to make +a report to the prince, and Zarco and Vaz remained to superintend the +infant colony.</p> +<blockquote>[4] Clarke says in the same year 1418. But this could not +well be, as the Discovery of Puerto Santo was made so late as the 1st +of November of that year. The truth is, that only very general +accounts of these early voyages remain in the Portuguese +historians.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Soon after the departure of Perestrello, the attention of Zarco +and Vaz was strongly excited by observing certain clouds or vapours +at a great distance in the ocean, which continually presented the +same aspect, and preserved exactly the same bearing from Puerto +Santo, and at length occasioned a conjecture, that the appearance +might proceed from land in that quarter. Gonsalvo and Vaz accordingly +put to sea and sailed towards the suspected land, and soon discovered +that the appearances which had attracted their notice actually +proceeded from a considerable island entirely overgrown with wood, to +which, on that account, they gave the name of Madeira[5]. After +bestowing considerable attention upon the soil and other +circumstances of this island, which was utterly destitute of +inhabitants, Gonzalvo and Vaz returned to Portugal with the welcome +intelligence, and gave so favourable a report of the extent, +fertility, and salubrity of Madeira, that Don Henry determined to +colonize and cultivate it. Accordingly, with the consent of the king +of Portugal, the island of Madeira was bestowed in hereditary +property upon Zarco and Vaz; one division named <i>Funchal</i> being +given to Zarco, and the other moiety, named <i>Machico</i> , to +Vaz.</p> +<blockquote>[5] Such is the simple and probable account of the +discovery of Madeira in Purchas. Clarke has chosen to embellish it +with a variety of very extraordinary circumstances, which being +utterly unworthy of credit, we do not think necessary to be inserted +in this place. See Progress of Maritime Discovery, I. +157.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the year 1420 Zarco began the plantation of Madeira, and being +much impeded in his progress by the immense quantity of thick and +tall trees, with which it was then everywhere encumbered, he set the +wood on fire to facilitate the clearing of the surface for +cultivation. The wood is reported to have continued burning for seven +years[6], and so great was the devastation as to occasion great +inconvenience to the colony for many years afterwards, from the want +of timber. Don Henry appears to have been a prince of most uncommonly +enlarged and liberal views; not only capable of devising the means of +making maritime discoveries, which had never been thought of before +his time, but of estimating their value when made, and of applying +them to purposes the most useful and important for his country. +Reflecting upon the reported fertility of the soil, and the +excellence of the climate of Madeira, and comparing both with the +judicious foresight of a philosopher, politician, and naturalist, in +reference to the most valuable productions of similar climates and +soils, he wisely conceived, and successfully executed the idea of +introducing the cultivation of sugar and wines into this new colony; +For these purposes, Portugal would readily supply him with vines; and +with people conversant in their management: But he had to procure +sugar canes, and persons experienced in their cultivation, and in the +process of manufacturing sugar from their juice, from the island of +Sicily, into which that article of culture had been introduced by the +Arabs.</p> +<blockquote>[6] In the Introduction to the World Displayed, Dr +Johnson remarks on this story, that "green wood is not very apt to +burn; and the heavy rains which fall in these countries must surely +have extinguished the conflagration were it ever so violent." Yet in +1800 Radnor forest presented a conflagration of nearly twenty miles +circumference, which continued to spread for a considerable time, in +spite of every effort to arrest its progress.--E.</blockquote> +<p>So great was the success of this new subject of industry in +Madeira, that the fifth part of the produce of one district only, +little more than nine miles in circumference, which proportion the +prince reserved as the patrimony of his military order, amounted, in +some years, to 60,000 arobas of twenty-five pounds each; giving the +entire acknowledged produce of one district only, of the island at +7,500,000 pounds, or 2350 tons. This, at the modern price of +eightpence a-pound, amounts to the enormous sum of L. 250,000 value +of merchantable produce, from a district which could not contain +above 5760 English acres; or above the value of L. 43 of average +yearly value from every acre of that district. This astonishingly +valuable produce was in the infancy of the sugar trade, when that +bland and wholesome condiment was still an article of luxury, and not +as now almost an indispensable necessary, even in the lowest cottages +of modern Europe. The sugars of Madeira were long famous; but after +the establishment of the sugar plantations in Brazil, and the +destructive ravages of a worm which infested the sugar canes of +Madeira, that article, of cultivation had to be abandoned, and the +principal attention of the islanders was transferred to the grape, +which still continues to supply Europe, America, and the East Indies +with the justly celebrated Madeira wine.</p> +<p>At the same time with the grant of Madeira to Zarco and Vaz, +Perestrello received a donation of the island of Puerto Santo, on +condition of colonizing it and bringing it into culture. But so great +was the multitude of rabbits, all said to have been produced from one +doe transmitted in a pregnant state from Portugal, that cultivation +was attended with peculiar difficulties occasioned by their ravages; +insomuch, that in one islet only, 3000 are reported to have been +killed at one time.</p> +<p>SECTION III.</p> +<p> <i>Prosecution of Discovery in Africa, to Cape Branco</i> .</p> +<p>Partly diverted from the original object of prosecuting +discoveries along the African coast, by the attentions requisite for +forming this first establishment of modern colonization, but chiefly +owing to the extreme difficulties of the navigation in the infancy of +that art, fifteen years were passed from the first discovery of Cape +Bojador before that formidable obstacle could be surmounted. In all +ages of the world, ignorant and indolent men have represented new and +unusual enterprises in scientific pursuits as rash or improper +deviations from the established experience and vaunted wisdom of +antiquity; and those who promoted them have been held out as +dangerous, or even impious innovators. It so fared with Don Henry, +who far outstripped the science, or ignorance rather, of his day. At +home, the discontented spirits, ignorant of his enlarged views, +perhaps envious of the reputation his very limited discoveries had +already attained, represented that the tempestuous seas, strong +currents, and whirlpools, which they fancied must prevail on the +other side of Cape Bajadore, would necessarily destroy every vessel +which should attempt to penetrate beyond that absolute limit of human +navigation; they alleged that all the country to the south of that +cape was utterly unfit for the habitation of mankind, sterile, burnt +up, and destitute of soil and water, like the sandy deserts of Lybia; +and they pretended to object on principles of patriotism, that the +natives of Portugal were improvidently wasted on idle discoveries, +which, if at all advisable, would have been undertaken by their +former, wise sovereigns; who, contented with the known world, did +not, vainly seek for conquests in the torrid zone, which was +altogether unfit for the habitation of mankind. They insinuated, that +the expences which had been lavished upon those fruitless and +dangerous maritime expeditions, might lave been much more profitably +employed for the improvement of some of the more barren parts of +Portugal. Even the probable profits and advantages derivable from the +new colonies of Madeira and Puerto Santo, as they were only eventual +and contingent, did not satisfy the minds of those discontented +detractors from the merits and enlightened views of the prince. But +Don Henry despised those vain endeavours to misrepresent and +counteract the important enterprise in which he was engaged, and +undismayed by the natural difficulties which had hitherto retarded +the progress of his mariners, continued his laudable endeavours to +extend his discoveries along the coast of Africa. The people, +likewise, whom he employed in his service, frequently made predatory +invasions on the coast, taking every Moorish vessel which they were +able to master, and made many slaves, by the sale of which, the +charges attending those maritime expeditions were partly +defrayed.</p> +<p>About the year 1433, one Gilianez, a native of Lagos, whom the +prince had entrusted with the command of a vessel, returned from an +unsuccessful attempt to conquer the invincible obstacles which +obstructed the passage round Cape Bojador. He had been driven by +stress of weather into one of the Canary islands, and had imprudently +seized some of the inoffending natives, whom he brought captives to +Sagres. Don Henry was much offended by this conduct of Gilianez, whom +he received with much coldness and reserve; insomuch that Gilianez, +on purpose to retrieve the princes favour, and to make ample amends +for the fault he had committed, made a vow, that if entrusted with a +new expedition, he would perish rather than return unsuccessful in +the enterprize which the prince had so much at heart. The date of the +second expedition of Gilianez, in which he surmounted the terrors and +difficulties of Cape Bajador, is variously referred by different +authors to the years 1433 and 1434[7]. However this may have been, he +succeeded in this herculean labour, as it was then esteemed, and +returned with great exultation to Sagres, where he was again received +into the favour and confidence of Don Henry. Contrary to the +assertions, or suppositions rather, of the discontented opposers of +the patriotic and enlightened efforts of Don Henry, Gilianez reported +that the sea beyond Cape Bojador was perfectly susceptible of +navigation, and that the soil and climate were both excellent.</p> +<blockquote>[7] De Barros; Lafitan; Vincent, in the Periplus of the +Erythrean sea; Meikle, in his translation of the Lusiad. Harris, in +his Collection, Vol. I. p. 663, postpones this discovery to the year +1439.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>In the following year Gilianez again sailed for the coast of +Africa, accompanied by Alphonzo Gonzales Baldaya[8], cupbearer to the +prince. The weather continued favourable during the voyage, and they +were able to penetrate ninety miles to the south of Cape Bojador. On +landing to take a view of the country, and in search of inhabitants, +they found the former to consist for the most part of an extended +desert plain, and they were much disappointed in not being able to +meet with any of the inhabitants, though they saw evident traces of +them in the sand. To the bay in which they landed they gave the name +of Angra dos Ruyvos, or Bay of Gurnets, from the great abundance of +fish resembling gurnets which were taken by the seamen.</p> +<blockquote>[8] In Purchas this person is named Antonio Gonsalvo; but +the authority of Clarke, I. 188, is here preferred.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Gilianez and Baldaya were again ordered in the year 1435 to +prosecute their discoveries, with instructions to prolong their +voyage, if possible, till they should meet with inhabitants. Having +proceeded about forty miles to the southward of the Angra dos Ruyvos, +without being able to see a single inhabitant, they adopted an +expedient which had been suggested by Don Henry, and for which they +were provided with the means. Two horses were landed, and two youths +named Hector Homen and Diego Lopez d'Almaida, who had been educated +in the household of Don Henry, and were scarcely sixteen years of +age, were directed to penetrate into the interior of the country, +that they might endeavour to ascertain whether it were inhabited. +They were directed to keep close together, and on no account to leave +their horses, and if possible to bring back some of the Moors; and +lest they should rashly expose themselves to unnecessary danger, they +were only allowed each a sword and spear, without any defensive +armour. After wandering almost a whole day in the barren sandy +desert, they at length descried nineteen Africans, armed with +assagays or javelins, whom they ventured to attack, though contrary +to their orders. The natives retreated into a cave where they were +safe from the farther assaults of the rash Portuguese youths; and as +one of them had received a wound in the foot, they thought it prudent +to return to the shore, which they were unable to reach before the +next morning. Gilianez and Baldaya then dispatched a stronger force +to the cave in which the Africans had taken shelter, where nothing +was found but some weapons which had been left by the fugitives. +Owing to this event, the place where the two cavaliers were landed +was named Angra dos Cavallos, or the Bay of Horses; which is in +latitude 24° N.</p> +<p>The navigators proceeded along a rugged coast to the south of the +Bay of Horses, upon which the sea breaks with a terrible noise, and +which, on account of being entirely composed of a hilly shore, faced +with rocks and small rocky islands, is called <i>Otegado</i> , or the +Rocky Place. At about twelve leagues distance from the bay of +Cavallos they entered the mouth of a river, where they killed a +number of sea wolves or seals, the skins of which they took on board +in defect of any other productions of the country; these seals were +found on an island at the mouth of this river, on which the mariners +are said to have seen at least 5000 asleep on the shore. The voyage +was continued to Punta de Gale, forming the western head-land of the +Rio de Ouro, immediately under the tropic, where a fishing net was +found constructed of twine, made from the inner bark of some tree of +the palm tribe, but no natives were met with; and as provisions began +to grow scarce, the adventurous mariners were constrained to return +into Portugal, after ranging for some time up and down the rocky +coast of Otegado, without making any important discovery.</p> +<p>About this period, or perhaps considerably earlier, Don Henry +obtained a bull from Pope Martin V. by which the sovereign pontiff +made a perpetual donation to the crown of Portugal, of all lands and +islands which had been or might be discovered between Cape Bojador +and the East Indies, inclusively, and granted a plenary indulgence +for the souls of all who might perish in the prosecution of the +enterprize, and in achieving the conquest of these extensive regions +from the infidel and pagan enemies of Christ and the church. In this +measure, the philosophical genius and enlarged political views of Don +Henry are plainly evinced; and, undismayed by the obstacles which had +so long opposed his grand project of discoveries, and the length of +time which had been employed in making so very small progress, he +shewed himself to have looked steadily forwards to the full +accomplishment of his hopes of discovering the route by sea from +Europe to India, around the still unknown shores of Southern Africa. +The date of this papal grant does not certainly appear. De Barros and +Lafitau are of opinion that it must have been posterior to 1440; +Purchas places it in 1441; and de Guyon in 1444. But Martin V. died +in 1431; and these writers seem to have confounded the original grant +from that pontiff, with subsequent confirmations by his successors +Eugenius IV. Nicholas V. and Sextus IV[9].</p> +<blockquote>[9] Progr. of Nav. Disc. I. 184.</blockquote> +<p>The gradual progress of these discoveries were interrupted for a +time by an unsuccessful attempt of Edward I. or <i>Duarte</i> , king of +Portugal, to gain possession of Tangier in the kingdom of Fez. But +the history of this war, in which the Portuguese arms suffered much +misfortune and dishonour, are quite irrelevant to the present +subject. The plague likewise, which raged at Lisbon in 1438, +contributed to the suspension of the patriotic enterprizes of Don +Henry. At length, in 1440, Don Henry resumed his project of maritime +discovery, and dispatched two caravels from Sagres, which were forced +back by unfavourable weather, apparently without even reaching the +coast of Africa.</p> +<p>In 1441, a young officer named Antonio Gonzales made a voyage in a +small vessel, with a crew of twenty-one men, to the island where so +great a number of sea wolves had been seen in the former voyage of +Alphonzo Gonzales Baldaya in 1435. In this voyage Alphonzo Gotterez, +a gentleman of the bed-chamber to Don Henry, acted as secretary, and +the two adventurers were instructed to endeavour to obtain an account +of the country and its inhabitants, and to procure a cargo of the +skins of the seals or sea wolves, that the voyage might not be +entirely destitute of some commercial advantages. After accomplishing +this part of his instructions, Gonzales determined to use his utmost +efforts for procuring some of the inhabitants of the country to carry +back with him to Sagres. For this purpose, he landed at the beginning +of the night with nine associates, and having advanced about ten +miles into the interior, discovered a native following a camel. The +sudden appearance of the Portuguese rendered the astonished Moor +perfectly motionless, and before he could recover from his surprize +he was seized by Gotterez. On their return to the shore with their +prisoner, they traced some recent footsteps on the sand, which led +them in view of about forty natives, who withdrew to an adjoining +hill, but the Portuguese secured a female Moor who had strayed from +the party. With these two prisoners they returned to their vessel, +not choosing to run any unnecessary risk, or to make any needless +attack upon the natives, which was contrary to the express orders of +Don Henry.</p> +<p>When preparing next morning to set sail on their return to +Portugal, another Portuguese ship arrived, which was commanded by +Nuno Tristan, a gentleman of the princes household. Encouraged by +this reinforcement, a second expedition into the interior was +immediately resolved upon, in which Nuno Tristan, Diego de +Vigliadores, and Gonzales de Cintra, joined with Alphonzo Gonzales +and Alphonzo Gotterez. Advancing again under night, they soon +perceived a party of the natives whom they immediately attacked, +shouting out Portugal! Portugal! San Jago! San Jago! The Moors were +at first stupified with fear and surprise; but recovering from their +panic, a struggle ensued, in which three of the Moors were slain, and +ten made prisoners, the Portuguese being indebted for their safety to +their defensive armour. After endeavouring, in vain, to establish an +intercourse with the Moors for the redemption of the prisoners, +Alphonzo Gonzales returned to Sagres with a cargo of skins and the +Moorish prisoners, and was honourably rewarded by his discerning +master. The place of this exploit was named Puerto del Cavallero, or +the Knights Harbour, on occasion of Gonzales being there knighted by +Nuno Tristan.</p> +<p>After careening his vessel, Nuno Tristan proceeded along the coast +according to his orders, and reached a cape in lat. 20° 50' N. to +which he gave the name of Cabo Branco, or the White Cape, on account +of the whiteness of its cliffs. He there landed and found some +fishing nets on the shore; but after repeated incursions into the +country, being unable to meet with any of the natives, he made a +survey of the coast, and returned to Portugal with an account of his +proceedings.</p> +<p>Three of the prisoners carried to Portugal by Gonzales were Moors +of some rank and considerable opulence; who each promised to pay +ransoms for their safe return to their native country, and to give, +besides, six or seven slaves each to the captors. Don Henry, as grand +master of the order of Christ, was eager for the acquisition of so +many converts from the religion of Mahomet, and was in hopes that the +favourable report which the Moors might make on their return to +Africa, would induce the natives to enter into trade with his +navigators; and that, among the slaves which were to be given in +exchange, some certain knowledge might be acquired of the burning +regions of Africa, about which such strange reports were then +prevalent. Antonio Gonzales was therefore dispatched on another +voyage in 1442, accompanied by a German gentleman named Balthazar, +who had distinguished himself in the late unfortunate attempt on +Tangier, and who was anxious to carry home some account of the newly +discovered countries. After being forced to return to port, to repair +the damages they had sustained in a dreadful tempest, they again +sailed, and reached the coast where the Moors had been made +prisoners. The principal Moor was landed, and was received with great +deference and respect by his countrymen; but he forgot all his +promises on regaining his liberty, and never returned to pay the +ransom he had bargained for. It would appear, however, that he had +informed the natives of the return of the other two chiefs; as at the +end of nine days, above an hundred natives appeared on the coast, and +entered into treaty for the ransom of their two countrymen who +remained captives, and for whom ten negroes, natives of different +parts of Africa, were given in exchange. During these transactions, +the sight of a considerable quantity of gold dust in the possession +of the Moors, excited the most lively emotions in the Portuguese, as +being the first intimation of that valuable commodity being +procurable on the coast of their new discoveries. From this +circumstance, Gonzales gave the name of <i>Rio del Ouro</i> , or Gold +River, to the deep arm of the sea in which he now lay, which +penetrates about six leagues N. N. E. from the tropic of Cancer.</p> +<p>SECTION IV.</p> +<p> <i>Continuation of Discovery to Cape de Verd</i> .</p> +<p>On the return from this voyage, the sight of gold placed the fame +and advantage of the enterprizes and discoveries of Don Henry beyond +the reach of prejudice and detraction, and the former murmurings and +discontents against his proceedings were changed into admiration and +applause. In 1443 Nuno Tristan was again sent out, with orders to +prosecute, the discovery of a coast which now seemed so likely to +prove advantageous to the commerce of Portugal. He now doubled Cape +Blanco, or Branco, which he had discovered in his former voyage, and, +about ten leagues farther to the south-east, fell in with an island, +or rather cluster of seven islands, called <i>Adeget</i> by the +natives, but which have since, with the bay in which they lie, +received the name of Arguim, or Arguin. The small canoes which were +used by the natives of this coast were at first mistaken for some +strange kind of birds, as the people sit upon them astride, using +their feet instead of paddles, to urge them along. To one of the +islands in this bay Tristan gave the name of <i>De las</i> +Garças, on account of the seasonable supply which he there +received. From this place Nuno Tristan returned into Portugal, with +some of the natives of the country.</p> +<p>Don Henry, in 1444, made an exchange with Massiot de Betancour, +lord of the Canary Islands, for the islands of Lancerota, +Fuertaventura, and Ferro, giving him some possessions in the island +of Madeira in their stead; and immediately fitted out a powerful +squadron, commanded by the grand master of his household, Fernand de +Castro, to take possession of this new acquisition, and to subdue the +remaining islands, Canaria, Palma, Gratioso, Inferno, Alegrazze, +Santa-Chiara, Rocca, and Lobos. But, as the king of Castile +afterwards laid claim to the Canaries, Don Henry resigned his +conquests, finding the value of these islands by no means answerable +to his expectation.</p> +<p>So greatly had the fame of the new discoveries extended in +consequence of the small quantity of gold which had been procured by +Gonzales at the Rio del Ouro, that several of the inhabitants of +Lagos petitioned Don Henry, in 1444, to be erected into a trading +company, engaging to carry on the discoveries along the coast of +Africa at their own expence. The prince granted their request, and a +company was accordingly formed, the prototype of those celebrated +East India companies which have since carried on trade to such vast +amount. Among the partners were, Juan Diaz, the ancestor of him who +afterwards discovered and passed the Cape of Good Hope, Gilianez, who +had so boldly overcome the obstacles of Cape Bajador, +Lançerot, a gentleman of the household of Don Henry, Estevan +Alfonso, and Rodrigo Alvarez. A squadron of six caravels was fitted +out under the command of Lançerot, which sailed from Lagos in +the year 1444, and reached the isle of Garças, in the bay of +Arguin, where they captivated an hundred and fifty Africans, and +returned to Lagos, after very slightly extending their knowledge of +the coast of Africa to the desart island of Tider, in 19° 30' +N.</p> +<p>In 1445, the subsequent voyage of Gonzales da Cintra, likewise a +gentleman in the household of Don Henry, in some measure expiated the +wanton outrage which had been committed in that of Lançerot. +The merit of Gonzales had raised him to the rank of a gentleman in +the household of Don Henry, and his character was held in much +estimation; but his confidence was obtained and betrayed by a moor of +the Assanhaji tribe[10], whom he had taken on board to serve as an +interpreter with the natives on the coast of Africa. Misled by this +crafty African, who held out great hopes of acquiring plunder, +Gonzales steered for the island of Arguin, and put into a creek or +bay on the coast, in lat. 22° 48' N. about fourteen leagues to +the south of Rio del Ouro, and forty-five to the north of Cape +Branco. The Moor got leave to go on shore, under pretence of visiting +some relations, but escaped in the night with another of his +countrymen. Gonzales was much mortified at allowing himself to be +circumvented by the cunning of his interpreter, and rashly embarked +in a boat with only twelve men, with the intention of pursuing the +fugitive. Pressing onwards with too much eagerness, he neglected to +attend to the tide, which happened then to be on the ebb. His boat +stuck fast, and when the morning broke, he was surrounded by two +hundred Moors. Unable to extricate himself, or to contend against +such mighty odds, Gonzales and seven of his men were slain; the other +five made their escape by swimming to the ship, which immediately set +sail for Lagos. The clumsy denomination of <i>Angra de Gonzales da +Cintra</i> , to this bay, still commemorates the death of this +commander.</p> +<blockquote>[10] This tribe of Assenhaji, or Azanaghi, are the +Zenhaga of our maps, and the Sanhagae of Edrisi and Abulfeda. They +are at present represented as inhabiting at no great distance from +the coast of Africa, between the rivers Nun and +Senegal.--Cl.</blockquote> +<p>In the subsequent year, 1446, Don Henry sent out a small squadron +of three caravels, under the command of Antonio Gonzales, assisted by +Diego Alfonso, and by Gomez Perez, the kings pilot. They were +directed to proceed for the Rio del Ouro, and were strictly enjoined +to cultivate the friendship of the natives by every possible means, +to establish peace with them and to use their utmost endeavours to +convert them to the Christian religion; among other instructions, +they were urged to pass unnoticed the insults or neglect of honour +which they might experience from the negroes. The Portuguese +endeavoured, but ineffectually, to conciliate the natives, and to +remove the angry prejudices which they entertained. They returned to +Lagos with no other fruit from their voyage except one negro whom +they had received in ransom, and an aged Moor who requested +permission to accompany them to Portugal. One of their own +companions, Juan Fernandez, from an ardent desire to procure +information for the prince, got leave to remain among the Assanhaji +Arabs.</p> +<p>Next year, 1447, Antonio Mendez was ordered to return in search of +Juan Fernandez, from whose inquisitive disposition much information +was expected. In this expedition he was accompanied by two other +caravels, commanded by Garcia Mendez and Diego Alfonso, but they were +separated by a storm in the early part of the voyage. Alfonso was the +first who reached the coast at Cape Branco, where he landed, and set +up a wooden cross as a signal to his consorts, and then proceeded to +the islands of Arguin, which afforded shelter from the tremenduous +surf which breaks continually on the coast of Africa. While waiting +at Arguin for the other ships, Alfonso paid many visits to the +continent, where he made prisoners of twenty-five of the natives. +When the other two ships of the squadron had joined, they went to the +Rio del Ouro in search of their countryman, Juan Fernandez, who had +been several days anxiously looking out for a vessel to carry him +off.</p> +<p>After experiencing many hardships, Fernandez had succeeded in +gaining the friendship of a considerable person among the Moors, and +was accompanied to the shore by that mans slaves in a body. The +natives exerted themselves to procure the release of some of their +countrymen who were prisoners with the Portuguese, to whom they gave +nine negroes and a quantity of gold dust by way of ransom. To the +place where this transaction took place, the navigators gave the name +of <i>Cabo do Resgati</i> , or Cape Ransom; where likewise Fernam +Tavares, an aged nobleman, received the honour of knighthood, a +distinction he had long been entitled to, but which he would only +receive upon the newly discovered coast. During the homeward voyage, +Gonzales touched at a village near Cape Branco, where he increased +his captives to ninety.</p> +<p>Juan Fernandez described the natives of the coast as wandering +shepherds, of the same race with the Moor who had been brought over +to Portugal by Antonio Gonzales in the former voyage. After he had +been conveyed to a considerable distance inland, he was stripped of +all his clothes, and even deprived of all the provisions he had taken +on shore. A tattered coarse rug, called an <i>alhaik</i> , was given +him instead of the clothes he had been deprived of. His food was +principally a small farinaceous seed, varied sometimes by the roots +which he could find in the desert, or the tender sprouts of wild +plants. The inhabitants, among whom he lived as a slave, unless when +better supplied by means of the chase, fed on dried lizards, and on a +species of locust or grasshopper. Water was bad, or scarce, and their +chief drink was milk. They only killed some of their cattle on +certain great festivals; and, like the Tartars, they roamed from +place to place in quest of a precarious sustenance for their flocks +and herds. The whole country presented only extensive wastes of +barren sand, or an uncultivated heath, where a few Indian figs here +and there variegated the dreary and extensive inhospitable plain. A +short time before he rejoined his countrymen, Fernandez acquired the +protection and kindness of Huade Meimon, a Moor of distinction, who +permitted him to watch for the arrival of the ships, and even +assigned him a guard for his protection.</p> +<p>In the interval between these two voyages of Gonzales, Denis +Fernandez, a gentleman of Lisbon, who had belonged to the household +of the late king, fitted out a vessel for discovery under the +patronage of Don Henry, with a determination to endeavour to +penetrate farther to the southwards than any preceding navigator. He +accordingly passed to the southwards of the Senegal river, which +divides the Azanhaji moors from the Jaloffs, or most northern +negroes, and fell in with some almadias or canoes, one of which he +captured, with four natives. Proceeding still farther on, without +stopping to satisfy his curiosity in visiting the coast, he at length +reached the most westerly promontory of Africa, to which he gave the +name of Cabo Verde, or the Green Cape, from the number of palm trees +with which it was covered. Alarmed by the breakers with which the +shore was everywhere guarded, Denis did not venture to proceed any +farther, especially as the season was already far advanced, but +returned with his captives to Portugal, where he met with a +flattering reception from Don Henry, both on account of his discovery +of the Cape de Verd, and for the natives he had procured from the +newly discovered coast, without having been traded for with the +Moors.</p> +<p>SECTION V.</p> +<p> <i>Progress of Discovery from Cape de Verd to the Gambia</i> .</p> +<p>Soon after the return of Denis from the Cape de Verd, Gonzales +Pachecos, a wealthy officer belonging to the household of Don Henry, +fitted out a ship at his own expence, of which he gave the command to +Dinisianez da Gram, one of the princes equerries, who was accompanied +by Alvaro Gil, an essayer of the mint, and Mafaldo de Setubal. After +touching at Cape Branco, they steered along the coast for the isle of +Arguin, making descents in several places, where they made a +considerable number of captives from the Moors. At the isle <i>De las +Garças</i> they found another caravel, commanded by +Lourenço Dias, which formed part of a considerable squadron +that had been lately fitted out from Lagos. Two days afterwards, the +admiral of that squadron, Lançarot, and nine other caravels +arrived. Gram informed Lançarot of his success in making fifty +prisoners, whom he had dearly purchased by the loss of seven of his +men, who had been murdered by the Moors. Lançarot immediately +sailed for Arguin, bent on revenge, and sacrificed the lives of +eight, and the liberty of four of the natives, to the memory of +Gonzales da Cintra and the mariners of Gram. On this occasion two of +the Portuguese officers were knighted on the newly discovered coast, +which seems then to have been a fashionable ambition among them, no +doubt arising from the prevailing zeal for maritime discovery. From +Arguin Lançarot passed over to the isle of Tider, whence the +inhabitants made their escape to the adjacent continent; but the +Portuguese soon followed, and the astonished Moors fled on all sides, +after a sharp skirmish, in which a good many of them were slain, and +sixty taken prisoners.</p> +<p>The fleet now separated, a part returning home by way of the +Canaries, while Lançarot, with several other caravels, +advanced along the coast of Africa southwards, till he got beyond +what the Moors called the Çahara, or Sahara, of the Assenaji. +This Moorish nation is mentioned by Abulfeda as the ruling tribe in +Audagost, or Agadez, and as inhabiting the southern part of Morocco. +They are therefore to be considered as the peculiar people of the +great desert and its environs, at its western extremity on the +Atlantic. The latter part of their name, <i>aji</i> , or rather +aspirated <i>haji</i> , signifies a pilgrim, and is now the appropriate +title of one who has made the great pilgrimage of Mecca. In the +present case, the name of Assenaji probably signifies the <i>Wanderers +of the Desert</i> . The Sanhaga, or Assenaji tribe, is now placed at +no great distance from the African coast, between the rivers Nun and +Senegal; and this latter river has probably received its Portuguese +name of Sanaga from that tribe. Ptolemy likewise probably named Cape +Verd <i>Arsinarium</i> , from the same people, from which it may be +inferred that they anciently occupied both sides of the Senegal +river, which is named <i>Dardalus</i> by that ancient geographer.</p> +<p>Twenty leagues beyond the southern boundary of the great desert, +Lançarot came to the mouth of a large river, which had been +formerly seen by Denis Fernandez, and named by him <i>Rio +Portugues</i> , or the Portuguese river; which was +called <i>Ouedech</i> by the natives, and afterwards got the name of +Canaga, Zanaga, Sanhaga, Sanaga, or Senega, now the Senegal. +Lançarot passed in safety over the bar of this river, and +endeavoured to explore its course upwards, but the weather became +unfavourable, and forced him again to sea, when he proceeded with +part of his squadron to Cape Verd, near which place he took in a +supply of water and goats flesh. The fleet was again dispersed by a +second storm, and only three vessels remained under the command of +Lançarot. With these he made a descent on the island of Tider, +where he captured fifty-nine Moors; and with these, and some natives +he had made prisoners on the banks of the Senegal, he returned into +Portugal.</p> +<p>In the year 1447, Nuna Tristan made another voyage to the coast of +Africa; and, advancing beyond <i>Cabo dos Mastos</i> , or the Cape of +Masts, so named from some dead palms resembling masts, seen there by +Lançarot, who made this discovery in the former voyage, Nuna +Tristan proceeded southwards along the coast of Africa, 180 miles +beyond Cape Verd, where he reached the mouth of a river which he +called Rio Grande, or the Large River, since called Gamber, Gambra, +or Gambia. Tristan came to anchor at the mouth of this river, and +went in his boat with twenty-two armed men on purpose to explore its +course. Having reached to a considerable distance from his ship, he +was environed by thirteen almadias or canoes, manned by eighty +negroes, who advanced with dreadful yells, and poured in continual +vollies of poisoned arrows, by which he, and almost every man in his +boat were wounded before they could regain the ship. Nuno Tristan and +all the wounded men died speedily of the effects of these poisoned +weapons, himself only living long enough to recount the nature of the +terrible disaster to the small remainder of the crew who had been +left in charge of the caravel; which was brought home by only four +survivors, after wandering for two months in the Atlantic, scarcely +knowing which way to steer their course.</p> +<p>There appears some difficulty and contradiction in regard to the +river discovered by Nuna Tristan, from the vague name of Rio Grande. +Instead of the Gambia, in lat. 13° 30' N. some of the Portuguese +historians are inclined to believe that this fatal event took place +at another river, in lat. 10° 15' N. at least 500 nautical miles +beyond the Gambia, to the S.S. E. which was afterwards called Rio de +Nuno. This is scarcely probable, as no notice whatever is taken of +the great archipelago of shoals and islands which extend from Cabo +Rosso to beyond the mouth of that river which is still called Rio +Grande. Yet it must be acknowledged that our remaining information +respecting these early Portuguese voyages of discovery, is +unfortunately vague and unsatisfactory.</p> +<p>In the same year, 1447, Alvaro Fernando proceeded to the coast of +Africa, and is said to have advanced forty leagues beyond Tristan, +having arrived at the mouth of a river called Tabite[11], 100 miles +to the south of Rio Nuno. Notwithstanding the appearance of a +determined opposition on the part of the natives, who had manned five +almadias, Alvaro resolved to explore its course in his boat, and +proceeded up the river for that purpose, with the utmost +circumspection. One of the almadias stood out from the rest, and +attacked his boat with great bravery, discharging a number of +poisoned arrows, by which Alvaro and several of his men were wounded, +which forced him to desist and return to his ship. Being, however, +provided with <i>theriac</i> and other antidotes against the poison, +Alvaro and all his men recovered from their wounds. He resolved, +after leaving the river Tabite, to proceed along the coast, which he +did to a sandy point; and, apprehending no danger in so open a +situation, was preparing to land, when he was suddenly assailed by a +flight of poisoned arrows, from 120 negroes who started up from a +concealment. Alvaro, therefore, desisted from any farther attempt to +explore the coast, and returned to Lagos to give an account of his +proceedings.</p> +<blockquote>[11] No such name occurs in the best modern charts, +neither is there a river of any consequence on the coast which +answers to the distance. The first large river to the south of the +Nuno is the Mitomba, or river of Sierra Liona, distant about 130 +maritime miles.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the same year, ten caravels sailed from Lagos for Madeira, the +Canaries, and the coast of Africa, but returned without making any +progress in discovering the coast. Under this year likewise, 1447, +the Antilles, or Caribbee islands, are pretended to have been +discovered by a Portuguese ship driven, thither by a storm. But the +fact rests only on the authority, of Galvano, a Portuguese historian, +and is not at all credible. Indeed the story is an absolute fable; as +the inhabitants are said to have spoken the Portuguese language, and +to have had <i>seven cities</i> in their island. In the same year, +Gomez Perez went with two caravels to Rio del Ouro, whence he carried +eighty Moors to Lagos as prisoners.</p> +<p>About this period the progress of discovery was arrested by +political disputes in Portugal, which ended in a civil war between +Don Pedro, Duke of Coimbra, and King Alphonso V. his nephew and +son-in-law, in the course of which Don Pedro was slain. Don Henry +appears to have taken no share in these disputes, except by +endeavouring to mediate between his nephew and brother; and, after +the unhappy catastrophe of Don Pedro, Don Henry returned to Sagres, +where he resumed the superintendence of his maritime discoveries.</p> +<p>SECTION VI.</p> +<p> <i>Discovery and Settlement of the Açores</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] So called from the number of hawks which were seen on +these islands when first discovered, <i>Açor</i> signifying a +hawk in the Portuguese language; hence Açores or +Açoras, pronounced Azores, signifies the Islands of +Hawks.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>These nine islands, called the Açores, Terceras, or Western +islands, are situated in the Atlantic, 900 miles west from Portugal, +at an almost equal distance from Europe, Africa, and America. The +Flemings pretend that they were discovered by a navigator of their +nation, John Vanderberg, who sailed from Lisbon in 1445 or 1449. +Santa Maria, one of these islands, 250 leagues west from Cape St +Vincent, was first seen on the 15th August 1432, by Cabral, who +sailed under the orders of Don Henry. San Miguel was taken possession +of by the same navigator on the 8th May 1444; and Ponta Delgada its +capital, received its charter from Emanuel in 1449. Tercera was given +to Jacome de Brujes in 1450, by Don Henry, in which year St George +was discovered. Pico and Gracioso were discovered about the same +time. Perhaps Fayal may actually have been first explored, as many of +the inhabitants are of Flemish descent, under the command and +protection of the Portuguese. Flores and Corvo, which lie seventy +leagues west from Tercera, are not reckoned among the Açores +by some writers. In this latter island, the Portuguese pretend that +there was discovered an equestrian statue made from one block of +stone. The head of the man was bare, his left hand rested on the mane +of his horse, and his right pointed towards the <i>west</i> , as if +indicating the situation of another continent. In addition to all +this, an inscription appeared to have been traced on a rock beneath +the statue, but in a language which the Portuguese did not +understand.</p> +<p>In the slow progress of discovery, the perils endured by the +officers and men employed by Don Henry, from the Moors and Negroes, +frequently occasioned murmurs against his plans of discovery; but the +several clusters of islands, the Madeiras, Cape Verd, and +Açores, formed a succession of maritime and commercial +colonies, and nurseries for seamen, which took off from the general +obloquy attending the tedious and hitherto unsuccessful attempts to +penetrate farther into the southern hemisphere, and afforded a +perpetual supply of navigators, and a stimulus to enterprize. The +original prejudices against the possibility of navigating or existing +in the torrid zone still subsisted, and although the navigators of +Don Henry had gradually penetrated to within ten degrees of the +equator, yet the last successive discovery was always held forth by +the supporters of ignorant prejudice, as that which had been placed +by nature as an insurmountable barrier to farther progress in the +Atlantic. In this situation, the settlement of the Açores was +of considerable importance. In 1457, Don Henry procured the grant of +many valuable privileges to this favourite colony, the principal of +which was the exemption of the inhabitants from any duties on their +commerce to the ports of Portugal and even of Spain.</p> +<p>In 1461, a fort was erected in the isle of Arguin on the African +coast of the Moors, to protect the trade carried on there for gold +and negro slaves. Next year, 1462, Antonio de Noli, a Genoese, sent +by the republic to Portugal, entered into the service of Don Henry, +and in a voyage to the coast of Africa, discovered the islands which +are known by the name of the Cape de Verd Islands, though they lie +100 leagues to the westward of that Cape. In the same year Pedro de +Cintra, and Suera de Costa, penetrated a little farther along the +coast of Africa, and discovered the river or Bay of Sierra Liona or +Mitomba, in lat. 8° 30' N. This constituted the last of the +Portuguese discoveries, carried on under the direct influence and +authority of Don Henry, the founder and father of modern maritime +discovery, as he died next year, 1463, at Sagres, in the +sixty-seventh year of his age; and, for a time, the maritime +enterprise of the Portuguese nation was palsied by his death.</p> +<p>Thus, during a long period of fifty-two years, this patriotic +prince devoted almost his whole attention, and the ample revenues +which he enjoyed as Duke of Viseo end grand master of the military +order of Christ, in extending the maritime knowledge, and +consequently the commercial prosperity of his country. The incidents +of the last seven years of the life of this distinguished prince, are +involved in uncertainty, and we know very little with regard to the +progress of his maritime discoveries from 1456, the date of the +second of the voyages of Cada Mosto, of which we propose to give a +separate account, till the year of his death, 1463. From the year +1412, when he began his operations, at which time he could scarcely +exceed fifteen years of age, the navigators who had been formed under +his auspices and direction, and often instructed by himself in the +theory of navigation and cosmography, gradually explored the western +coast of Africa, from Cape Nam or Non, in lat. 28° 15', certainly +to Rio Grande, in lat. 11° N. or rather to Rio de Nuno, not quite +a degree farther south; but it is highly probable that the southern +limit of discovery in his time extended to Cabo Verga, in lat. +10° N. the northern boundary of the country usually called the +Sierra Liona, or the Ridge of Lions, perhaps to the gulf of Mitomba, +or bay of Sierra Liona, in lat. 8° 30' N. an extent of 29° +15' of latitude, or 1185 nautical miles; a mere nothing certainly +when compared with modern navigation, but a wonderful effort in the +infancy of the science, when even coasting voyages of any extent +along well known shores, and in frequented seas, were looked upon as +considerable efforts. No brilliant discovery, indeed, rewarded the +perseverance of Don Henry, and the courage of his servants; but an +indestructible foundation of useful knowledge was laid, for +overthrowing the ignorant prejudices of the age, and by which, not +long afterwards, his plans were perfected by completing the +circumnavigation of Africa, and by the discovery of the <i>New</i> +World. Dr Vincent, the learned editor and commentator of the Periplus +of the Erythrean Sea, is disposed to limit the discoveries of Don +Henry to Cape Verd[2], but Ramusio believed that the Island of St +Thomas was settled in his time; and the ingenious translator of the +Lusiad of Camoens is of opinion that some of his commanders passed +beyond the equator[3]. According to Mickle, it was the custom of his +navigators to leave his motto, <i>Talent de bien faire</i> , wherever +they came; and in 1525 Loaya, a Spanish captain, found that device +carved on the bark of a tree in the island of St Matthew, or Anabon, +in the <i>second</i> degree of southern latitude. But this proof is +quite inconclusive, as the navigators long reared in the school of +this great prince might naturally enough continue his impress upon +the countries they visited, even after his lamented death.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Peripl. of the Erythr. Sea, 193.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] Hist. of the Disc. of India, prefixed to the +translation of the Lusiad, I. 158.</blockquote> +<p>About seven years before the decease of Don Henry, two voyages +were made to the African coast by Alvise da Cada Mosto, a Venetian +navigator, under the auspices of the Duke of Viseo; but which we have +chosen to separate from the historical deduction of the Portuguese +discoveries, principally because they contain the oldest nautical +journal extant, except those already given in our First Part from the +pen of the great Alfred, and are therefore peculiarly valuable in a +work of this nature. Their considerable length, likewise, and because +they were not particularly conducive to the grand object of extending +the maritime discoveries, have induced us to detach them from the +foregoing narrative, that we might carry it down unbroken to the +death of the great Don Henry. These voyages, likewise, give us an +early picture of the state of population, civilization, and manners +of the Africans, not to be met with elsewhere.</p> +<p>To this we subjoin an abstract of the narrative of a voyage made +by Pedro de Cintra, a Portuguese captain, to the coast of Africa, +drawn up for Cada Mosto, at Lagos, by a young Portuguese who had been +his secretary, and who had accompanied Cintra in his voyage. The +exact date of this voyage is nowhere given; but as the death of Don +Henry is mentioned in the narrative, it probably took place in that +year, 1463.</p> +<h2><a name="chapter2-4" id="chapter2-4">CHAPTER IV.</a></h2> +<p><b> <i>Original journals of the voyages of Cada Mosto, and Piedro +de Cintra to the coast of Africa; the former in the years 1455 and +1456, and the latter soon afterwards</i> </b>[1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Astley, Col. of Voy. and Trav. I. 573. Clarke, Prog. +of Marit. Disc. I. 235.</blockquote> +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> +<p>Alvise Da Cada Mosto, a Venetian, in the service of Don Henry of +Portugal, informs us in his preface, that he was the first navigator +from the <i>noble city of Venice</i> , who had sailed on the ocean +beyond the Straits of Gibraltar, to the southern parts of Negroland, +and Lower Ethiopia. These voyages at Cada Mosto are the oldest extant +in the form of a regular journal, and were originally composed in +Italian, and first printed at Venice in 1507. This first edition is +now exceedingly scarce, but there is a copy in the kings library, and +another in the valuable collection made by Mr Dalrymple. These +voyages were afterward published by Ramusio in 1613, and by +Grynæus in Latin. The latter was misled in regard to the date; +which he has inadvertently placed in 1504, after the death of Prince +Henry, and even subsequent to the discovery of the Cape of Good Hope +by Bernal Diaz. Even Ramusio, in his introduction to the voyages of +Cada Mosto, has made a mistake in saying that they were undertaken by +the orders of John king of Portugal, who died in 1433.</p> +<p>Ramusio imagined that the discoveries of Cada Mosto might tend to +great importance, as he considered the rivers Senegal and Rio Grande +to be branches of the Niger, by which means the Europeans might open +a trade with the rich kingdoms of Tombuto and Melli on that river, +and thus bring gold from the countries of the Negroes, by an easier, +safer, and more expeditious manner, than as conveyed by the Moors of +Barbary by land, over the vast and dangerous deserts that intervene +between the country on the Niger and Senegal rivers, and Barbary. As, +by the account of Leo, salt is the most valuable commodity throughout +the countries of the Negroes, Ramusio proposed that the ships should +take in cargoes of salt at the island of <i>Sal</i> , one of the Cape +de Verds, and thence supply the countries on the Niger, which was +reported to be navigable for 500 miles into the interior; and that +they should bring back gold and slaves in return; the latter to be +brought to market at St Jago, another of the Cape de Verd islands, +where they would be immediately bought up for the West Indies. All +this fine speculation, however, rested on mistaken foundations; as +the Niger is altogether an inland river, running to the east, and has +no communication with the Senegal and Gambia, which run west into the +Atlantic. Yet time, and the civilization of the natives on the +Senegal and Gambia, may hereafter realize this scheme of a valuable +traffic into the interior of Africa; but it is fervently to be hoped, +that the trade in slaves may never be revived.</p> +<p>In his preface, after an apology for his performance, and making a +declaration of his strict adherence to truth in all the particulars +he relates, Cada Mosto gives some account of the infant Don +Henriquez, or Henry, of Portugal, the great author and promoter of +maritime discoveries. He praises him, as a prince of a great soul and +sublime genius, and of great skill in astronomy; and adds, that he +applied himself entirely to the service of Christ, by making war +against the Moors. While on death- bed, in 1432, Don John, king of +Portugal, exhorted his son Don Henry to pursue his laudable and holy +purpose, of <i>persecuting</i> the enemies of the Christian faith, +which he promised to perform; and, accordingly, with the assistance +of his brother Don Duarte, or Edward, who succeeded to the throne of +Portugal, he made war in Fez with success for many years. Afterwards, +the more effectually to harass the Moors, he used to send his +caravels, or ships of war, annually, to scour the coasts of Azafi, or +Al Saffi, and Messa, on the coast of Africa, without the +Mediteranean, by which he did them much damage. But, having in view +to make discoveries along that western coast, he ordered them every +year to advance farther towards the south. They accordingly proceeded +till they came to a great cape, which put a stop to their progress +southwards for several years, being afraid to go beyond it; whence it +took the name it still retains of Cape Non[2]; meaning, that such as +went beyond should never return. Don Henry, however, was of a +different opinion, and adding three other caravels to those which had +been at the cape, sent them again next year to make the attempt. They +accordingly penetrated about 100 miles beyond that cape, where they +found only a sandy coast with no habitations, and returned back to +Portugal.</p> +<blockquote>[2] According to De Faria, as already mentioned in Chap. +II. Sect. I Cape Non was doubled, and Cape Bojador discovered in +1415, many years before the death of King John. The present +recapitulation by Cada Mosto has been left in his own words, without +insisting on the exactness of his chronology.--Astl.</blockquote> +. +<p>Encouraged by this commencement of successful progress, Don Henry +sent the same fleet back next year, with orders to extend their +discoveries 150 miles farther to the south, and even more if they +found it proper; and promised to enrich all who should embark in this +navigation. They went again; and, although they obeyed the +instructions of the prince, they could not improve the discoveries. +Yet, firmly persuaded by the strength of his own judgment, that +people and habitations would certainly be found at length, Don Henry +continued to send out his caravels from time to time, and they came +at length to certain coasts frequented by the Arabs of the desert, +and to the habitations of the Azanaghi, a tawny race. Thus the +countries of the negroes were discovered; and different nations +afterwards, which will be mentioned in the following relation.</p> +<p>Thus far the preface of Cada Mosto, as given in the collection of +Astley, from the edition of Ramusio, with which we must be satisfied +in this work, as that in the royal library is inaccessible for our +use. The present version has been carefully formed, by a comparison +of Astley, with the original in Ramusio, and with the summary by the +Reverend James Stanier Clarke, in his curious work on the progress of +maritime discoveries, which only gives a selection of what he +considered to be its most material parts. In this edition, the +narrative style of Cada Mosto, in his own person, is restored as much +as possible. It may be noticed, that Alvise is the Portuguese form of +the name Louis, or Lewis.</p> +<p>In addition to the two voyages of Cada Mosto himself, there is a +third voyage included in the present chapter, performed by Piedro de +Cintra to the same coast, the narrative of which was communicated to +Cada Mosto by one who had accompanied Cintra, and had been clerk to +Cada Mosto in the two former voyages.</p> +<p>SECTION I.</p> +<p> <i>Voyage of Cada Mosto from Venice to Cape St Vincent: He enters +into the service of Don Henry, and sets out for the New Discoveries: +Relation of the Voyage to Madeira and the Canaries; with some Account +of these islands, and their Inhabitants</i> .</p> +<p>I, Alvise Da Cada Mosto, after visiting many parts of our +Mediterranean Sea, being in our city of Venice in the year 1454, at +which time I was about twenty-two years of age, determined to return +into Flanders, a country which I had formerly visited as a merchant; +for my constant attention was, in the first place to acquire wealth, +and secondly to procure fame. On the 8th of August in that year 1454, +I embarked in one of the gallies belonging to the republic, commanded +by Marco Zen, a Venetian cavalier. Contrary winds detained us for +some days off Cape St Vincent; during which, I learnt that Don Henry, +the infant of Portugal, resided in the adjoining village of Reposera, +or Sagres, to which he had retired in order to pursue his studies +without interruption from the tumult of the world. Hearing of our +arrival, the prince sent on board of our galley Antonio Gonzales his +secretary, accompanied by Patricio de Conti[1], a Venetian, who was +consul for the republic in Portugal, as appeared by his commission, +and who also received a salary or pension from Don Henry. These +gentlemen brought on board, and exhibited to us samples of Madeira +sugar, dragons blood, and other commodities of the countries and +islands belonging to the prince, which had been discovered under his +patronage. They asked us many questions, and informed us that the +prince had caused some lately discovered and uninhabited islands to +be settled and cultivated, as a proof of which, they had shewn us the +before-mentioned valuable productions; adding, that all this was next +to nothing, in comparison of the great things which Don Henry had +performed; as he had discovered seas which had never been navigated +before, and the countries of divers strange, and hitherto unknown +nations, where many wonderful things were found. They told us +farther, that the Portuguese who had been in these remote parts, had +reaped great advantages by trading with the inhabitants; having +gained as high as 700 or even 1000 per cent, on the capitals +employed. We were all much astonished at these things; and I Cada +Mosto in particular, being inflamed with the desire of visiting these +newly discovered regions, inquired if the prince permitted any person +who might be so inclined to embark for these places? To this they +answered in the affirmative; and they likewise stated to me the +conditions on which any one would be allowed to make the adventure. +These were, either to be at the whole expence of fitting out and +freighting a vessel; or at the expence of the freight only, the +prince providing a vessel. In the former case, the adventurer had to +allow on his return one quarter of his cargo, as duty to the prince, +the rest remaining his own entire propriety; in the latter case, the +homeward cargo was to be equally divided between the prince and the +adventurer. In case of no returns, the prince was at the entire +expence of the voyage; but that it was hardly possible to make the +voyage without great profit. They added, that the prince would be +much pleased to have any Venetian in his service, and would shew him +great favour, being of opinion that spices and other rich merchandise +might be found in these parts, and knowing that the Venetians +understood these commodities better than any other nation.</p> +<blockquote>[1] In Grynaeus, this person is called a patrician or +nobleman of Venice, and his surname is omitted.--Astl.</blockquote> +. +<p>Influenced by all this, I accompanied the secretary and consul on +shore, and waited on the prince, who confirmed all those things which +they had said, and encouraged me to embark in the voyage to his new +countries, by promises of honour and profit. Being young, and of a +constitution to endure fatigue, and desirous to visit those parts of +the world which had never been even known to any Venetian, and +likewise in hopes to advance my fortune, I accepted of the +invitation. Having, therefore, procured information respecting the +commodities which it was proper to carry with me on such a voyage, I +returned to the gallies, where I disposed of all the goods I had +shipped for the low countries, and carried to land such things as +were necessary for my intended expedition; and leaving the gallies to +pursue their voyage to Flanders, I landed in Portugal. The prince +evinced much satisfaction at my resolution, and entertained me +handsomely at Sagres for a considerable time. At length he ordered me +to fit out a new caravel, of about ninety tons burden, of which +Vincent Diaz, a native of Lagos, about sixteen miles from Sagres, was +commander. The caravel being in readiness, and furnished with every +thing necessary for the voyage, we set sail on the 22d of March 1455, +having a favourable wind at north-east, and by north[2], and steered +our course for the island of Madeira. On the 25th of that month we +came to the island of <i>Puerto Santo</i> , which is about 600 miles +southward from Cape St Vincent, whence we took our departure.</p> +<blockquote>[2] <i>Con Veuto da greco et tramantana in poppe</i> ; +literally, having a Greek, and <i>beyond the mountain</i> wind in the +poop. The points of the compass, in Italian maps, are thus named, +N. <i>Tramontana</i> . N. E. <i>Greco</i> . E. <i>Levante</i> S. +E. <i>Sirocco</i> . S. <i>Mezzoni</i> . S. W. <i>Libeccio</i> . W. + <i>Ponente</i> . N. W. <i>Maestro</i> .--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>Puerto Santo was discovered by the Portuguese on All Saints day, +about the year 1418[3], and Don Henry first sent inhabitants to +settle there under Bartholomew Perestrello, whom he appointed +governor. It is about fifteen miles in circuit[4]. It bears good +bread corn, and a sufficiency of oats for its own use; and abounds +with cattle and wild hogs, and innumerable rabbits[5]. Among other +trees, it produces the drago or dragon tree, the sap or juice of +which is drawn out only at certain seasons of the year, when it +issues from cuts or clefts, made with an axe near the bottom of the +tree in the preceding year. These clefts are found full of a kind of +gum; which, decocted and depurated, is the dragons- blood of the +apothecaries[6]. The tree bears a yellow fruit, round like like a +cherry, and well tasted. This island produces the best honey and wax +in the world, but not in any quantity. It has no harbour, but a good +road in which vessels may moor in safety, being well sheltered on all +sides, except the quarters between the south and east, all of which +winds make it unsafe to ride here at anchor. There is plenty of +excellent fish on its shores; such as dentili, gilded fish, and +others.</p> +<blockquote>[3] This date ought to have been +1413.--Astl.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] Barbot says eight leagues; other authors say more, +and some less. It is about twelve leagues to the north-east of +Madeira.--Astl.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] When Sir Amias Preston took this island in 1595, it +abounded in corn, wine, and oil, and had good store of sheep, asses, +goats, and kine. There was also plenty of fowl, fish, and +fruits.--Astl.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] From this account it seems to be an inspissated +juice.--Astl. This tree has probably received its name from the bark +being like the scales of a serpent. About the full of the moon it +exudes a vermilion coloured gum. That which grows on the islands and +coasts of Africa is more astringent than what comes from Goa. It is +found on high rocky land. Bartholomew Stibbs met with it on the banks +of the Gambia river, and describes it under the name of <i>Par de +Sangoe</i> , or blood-wood tree. The gum is a red, inodorous, and +insipid resin, soluble in alcohol and oils; and when dissolved by the +former, is used for staining marble. --Clark.</blockquote> +<p>From Puerto Santo, which was discovered twenty-seven years before, +we sailed on the 28th of March, and came the same day +to <i>Monchrico</i> or Machico, one of the ports of the island of +Madeira, forty miles distant from Puerto Santo. In fair weather these +islands may be seen from each other. This latter island was only +inhabited within the last twenty-four years, when the prince +appointed two of his gentlemen to be its governors. Tristan Vaz +having the government of that half of the island in which the port of +Monchrico is situated; and the other district of the island, in which +Fonzal, Fonchial, or Funchal stands, is under the government of John +Gonzales Zarcho. The island of Madeira is inhabited in four several +places: Monchrico, Santa Cruz, Fonzal, and Camera-di-Lupi, which are +its principal places, though there are other minor establishments; +and is able to muster about 800 men able to bear arms, of whom an +hundred are horse. There are about eight rivers, which pervade the +island in different places; by means of which they have many +saw-mills, from which Portugal and other places are supplied with +boards of many different sorts. Of these boards, two sorts are in +particular estimation, and turn most to account. The one is cedar, +which has a strong odoriferous smell, and resembles the cypress tree; +of this they make fine, large, and long boards or deals, which they +employ for building houses, and for various other purposes. The +other, called nasso[7], is of a red-rose colour, and extremely +beautiful; of which they make excellent and very beautiful bows and +cross-bows, which are sent into the west. In order to clear the land, +the first settlers set fire to the woods, and the fire spread with +such fury, that several persons, with their families, and Gonzales +Zarcho among the rest, were forced to take shelter in the sea to save +themselves from the flames, where they stood up to their necks for +two days and two nights without sustenance. Though this island is +mountainous, its soil is rich and fertile, and it produces yearly +30,000 Venetian <i>staras</i> [8] of bread corn. At first, the newly +cultivated land yielded seventy for one, but has since been reduced +to thirty or forty, for want of good husbandry. Owing to the +excellence of its soil and climate, and the abundance of springs and +rivers, Prince Henry procured sugar canes from Sicily, which he sent +to this island, where they have yielded abundant produce; insomuch, +that 400 cantaros of sugar, each containing 112 pounds large weight +of Venice, have been made at one boiling, and the quantity was likely +to increase[9]. They have likewise good wines, considering how +shortly this culture has been introduced; and in such abundance, that +large quantities are exported. Among other kinds of vines, Don Henry +sent thither <i>Malvasia</i> plants, procured from the island of +Candia, which have succeeded well. The soil has turned out so +favourable for the vine, that in general there are more grapes than +leaves, and the bundles are very large, even from two to four spans +long. They have likewise the black <i>Pergola</i> grape, without +stones, in great perfection; and so well is the climate adapted to +this culture, that they begin their vintage about Easter, or at least +by the octave after.</p> +<blockquote>[7] The woods of Madeira are cedar, vigniatico, laurus +Indicus, which has a considerable resemblance to mahogany, barbuzano, +chesnut, and the beautiful mirmulano, and +paobranco.--Clark.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[8] This measure is said to weigh about thirty-three +English pounds, so that the quantity mentioned in the text amounts to +1850 quarters English measure.--Astl.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[9] I suppose he means at one crop. The quantity in the +text, reduced to avoirdupois weight, amounts to twenty-eight +hogsheads, at sixteen hundred weight each.--Astl.</blockquote> +<p>We sailed from Madeira, following a southerly course, and arrived +at the Canary islands, which are at the distance of about 320 miles +from Madeira. There are seven of these islands in all, four of which +have been settled by the Christians, Lançerotta, +Fuerteventura, Gomera, and Ferro; over which Herrera[10], a Spanish +gentleman, is lord. Large quantities of an herb called <i>Oricello</i> +or Orchel[11], are annually sent from these islands to Cadiz and +Seville, which is used in dying, and is sent from these places to all +parts of Europe. Great quantities of excellent goat skins are +exported from these islands, which likewise produce abundance of +tallow, and good cheese. The original inhabitants of the four islands +that are subject to the Christians, are <i>Canarians</i> [12], who +speak various languages or dialects, not well understood between the +different tribes. These people have only open villages, without any +fortifications; except on the mountains, which are exceedingly high, +and there they have a kind of rude walls or redoubts, to flee to in +case of need. The passes of these mountains are so difficult of +access, that a few resolute men might defend them against an army. +The other three islands of this group, Grand Canaria, Teneriffe, and +Palma, which are larger and better peopled than the other four, are +still unsubdued and possessed by the aboriginal idolaters. Grand +Canaria has between eight and nine thousand souls, and Teneriffe, +which is the largest of all these islands, is said to contain +fourteen or fifteen thousand, and is divided into nine separate +lordships. Palma, however, has very few inhabitants, yet it appears +to be a very beautiful island. Every lordship seems to have its own +mode of religious worship; as in Teneriffe, there were no less than +nine different kinds of idolatry; some worshipping the sun, others +the moon, and so forth. They practise polygamy, and the lords have +the jus primae noctis, which is considered as conferring great +honour. On the accession of any new lord, it is customary for some +persons to offer themselves to die as a sacrifice to his honour. On +this occasion, the lord holds a great festival on his accession day; +when all who are willing to give this cruel proof of their +attachment, are attended to the summit of a high cliff in a certain +valley, where, after some peculiar ceremonies, and certain words +muttered over them, the victims precipitate themselves from the +cliff, and are dashed to pieces. In reward of this sanguinary homage, +the lords consider themselves bound to heap extraordinary honours and +rewards on the parents of the victims.</p> +<blockquote>[10] In Clarke, this person is named Ferrero; perhaps the +right name of this person was Fernando Pereira, who subdued Gomera +and Ferro.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[11] A species of moss, or lichen rather, that grows on +the rocks, and is used by dyers.--Clark.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[12] Other authors call the natives of the +Canaries <i>Guanchos</i> .--E.</blockquote> +<p>Teneriffe, which is the largest of these islands, and the best +inhabited, is one of highest islands in the world, and is seen in +clear weather from a great distance; insomuch, that I was informed by +some mariners, that it had been descried at the distance of between +sixty and seventy Spanish leagues, which make about 250 Italian +miles. In the middle of the island, there is a prodigiously high +peaked mountain, shaped like a diamond, which is always burning. I +received this account from some Christians, who had been prisoners in +the island, who affirmed that it was fifteen Portuguese leagues, or +sixty Italian miles, from the bottom of the mountain to the top of +the peak.</p> +<p>They have nine lords on this island, who are called dukes, and who +do not succeed by inheritance or descent, but by force; on which +account they have perpetual civil wars among themselves, in which +they commit great slaughter. Their only weapons are stones, maces or +clubs, and darts or lances, some of which are pointed with horn, and +others have their points hardened in the fire. They all go naked, +except a few who wear goat skins before and behind. They anoint their +skins with goats tallow, mixed up with the juice of certain herbs, +which thickens the skin, and defends them against the cold, of which +they complain much, although their country is so far to the south. +They have neither walled, nor thatched houses, but dwell in grottos +and caverns of the mountains. They feed on barley, flesh, and goats +milk, of which they have abundance, and some fruits, particularly +figs. As the country is very hot, they reap their corn in April and +May.</p> +<p>We learnt all these things from the Christians of the four settled +islands, who sometimes go over by night to the three other islands, +and make prisoners of the natives, whom they send into Spain to be +sold as slaves. Sometimes the Spaniards are themselves made prisoners +on these expeditions, on which occasions the natives do not put them +to death, but employ them to kill and flea their goats, and to cure +the flesh, which they look upon as a vile employment, and therefore +condemn their Christian prisoners to that labour in contempt. The +native Canarians are very active and nimble, and are exceedingly +agile in running and leaping, being accustomed to traverse the cliffs +of their rugged mountains. They skip barefooted from rock to rock +like goats, and sometimes take leaps of most surprising extent and +danger, which are scarcely to be believed. They throw stones with +great strength and wonderful exactness, so as to hit whatever they +aim at with almost perfect certainty, and almost with the force of a +bullet from a musket; insomuch that a few stones thrown by them will +break a buckler to pieces. I once saw a native Canarian, who had +become a Christian, who offered to give three persons twelve oranges +a-piece, and taking twelve to himself, engaged, at eight or ten paces +distance, to strike his antagonists with every one of his oranges, +and at the same time to parry all theirs, so that they should hit no +part of him but his hands. But no one would take up the wager, as +they all knew he could perform even better than he mentioned. I was +on land in Gomera and Ferro, and touched also at the island of Palma, +but did not land there.</p> +<p>SECTION II.</p> +<p> <i>Continuation of the Voyage by Cape Branco, the Coast of +Barbary, and the Fortia of Arguin; with some account of the Arabs, +the Azanaghi, and the Country of Tegazza.</i> </p> +<p>Leaving the Canaries, we pursued our course towards Ethiopia, and +arrived in a few days at Cape Branco, which is about 870 miles from +these islands. In this passage, steering south, we kept at a great +distance from the African shore on our left, as the Canaries are, +far-advanced into the sea towards the west. We stood almost directly +south for two-thirds of the way between the islands and the Cape, +after which we changed our course somewhat more towards the east, or +left-hand, that we might fall in with the land, lest we should have +overpassed the Cape without seeing it because no land appears +afterwards so far to the west for a considerable space. The coast of +Africa, to the southwards of Cape Bronco, falls in considerably to +the eastwards, forming a great bay or gulf, called the <i>Forna of +Arguin</i> , from a small island of that name. This gulf extends about +fifty miles into the land, and has three other islands, one of which +is named <i>Branco</i> by the Portuguese, or the White Island, on +account of its white sands; the second is called <i>Garze</i> , or the +Isle of Herons, where they found so many eggs of certain seabirds as +to load two boats; the third is called <i>Curoi</i> , or Cori. These +islands are all small, sandy, and uninhabited. In that of Arguin +there is plenty of fresh water, but there is none in any of the +others. It is proper to observe, that on keeping to the southwards, +from the Straits of Gibraltar, the coast of exterior Barbary is +inhabited no farther than Cape Cantin[1], from whence to Cape Branco +is the sandy country or desert, called <i>Saara</i> or <i>Saharra</i> +by the natives, which is divided from Barbary or Morocco on the north +by the mountains of Atlas, and borders on the south with the country +of the Negroes, and would require a journey of fifty days to +cross,--in some places more, in others less. This desert reaches to +the ocean, and is all a white dry sand, quite low and level, so that +no part of it seems higher than any other. Cape <i>Branco</i> , or the +White Cape, so named by the Portuguese from its white colour, without +trees or verdure, is a noble promontory of a triangular shape, having +three separate points about a mile from each other.</p> +<blockquote>[1] This is erroneous, as there are several towns on the +coast of Morocco beyond this Cape, as Saffia, Mogadore, Santa Cruz, +and others. Cape Cantin is in lat. 32°30'N. and the +river <i>Sus</i> in 30°25', which is 140 miles to the south. There +are no towns on the coast beyond that river; but the northern limit +of the <i>Sahara</i> , or great desert, is in lat. 27°40', 186 +miles to the south of the river <i>Sus</i> , and is surely inhabited by +wandering Arabs. Even the great desert, which extends 750 miles from +north to south, almost to the river Senegal, is thinly interspersed +by several wandering tribes of the <i>Azanhaji</i> .--E.</blockquote> +<p>Innumerable quantities of large and excellent fish of various +kinds are caught on this coast, similar in taste to those we have at +Venice, but quite different in shape and appearance. The gulf of +Arguin is shallow all over, and is full of shoals both of rocks and +sand; and, as the currents are here very strong, there is no sailing +except by day, and even then with the lead constantly heaving. Two +ships have been already lost on these shoals. Cape <i>Branco</i> lies +S.W. of Cape Cantin, or rather S. and by W. Behind Cape Branco there +is a place called Hoden, six days journey inland on camels, which is +not walled, but is much frequented by the Arabs and caravans, which +trade between Tombucto,[2] and other places belonging to the Negroes, +and the western parts of Barbary. The provisions at Hoden are dates +and barley, which they have in plenty, and the inhabitants drink the +milk of camels and other animals, as they have no wine. They have +some cows and goats, the former being greatly smaller than those of +Italy; but the number of these is not great, as the country is very +dry. The inhabitants are all Mahometans, and great enemies to the +Christians, and have no settled habitations, but wander continually +over the deserts. They frequent the country of the Negroes, and visit +that side of Barbary which is next the Mediterranean. On these +expeditions they travel in numerous caravans, with great trains of +camels, carrying brass, silver, and other articles, to Tombucto and +the country of the Negroes, whence they bring back gold +and <i>melhegette</i> , or cardamom seeds[3]. These people are all of a +tawny colour, and both sexes wear a single white garment with a red +border, without any linen next their skins. The men wear turbans, in +the Moorish fashion, and go always barefooted. In the desert there +are many lions, leopards, and ostriches, the eggs of which I have +often eaten, and found them very good.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Called Tombuto in the original, and Ataubat in +Grynaeus.--Astl. Hoden stands in an <i>ouasis</i> , or watered island, +in the sea of sand, or great desert, about lat. 19°20'N. and W. +long. 11°40'.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] Under the general name of <i>Azanhaji</i> , which +probably signifies the pilgrims or wanderers of the desert, the +Nomadic Arabs or Moors are distinguished into various tribes; as +Beni-amir, Beni-sabi, Hilil Arabs, Ludajas, and Hagi; sometimes +called Monselmines, Mongearts, Wadelims, Labdessebas, and Trasarts; +all named in their order from north to south, as occupying the desert +towards the Atlantic.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Don Henry has farmed out the trade of the island of Arguin, under +the following regulations. No person must enter this gulf to trade +with the Arabs, except those who are licensed according to the +ordinance, and have habitations and factors on the island, and have +been accustomed to transact business with the Arabs on that coast. +The articles of merchandize chiefly provided for this trade are, +woollen cloth and linen, silver trinkets, <i>aldtizeli</i> or frocks, +and cloaks, and other things, and above all, wheat; and the Arabs +give in return negro slaves and gold. A castle has been built on the +isle of Arguin, by order of the prince, to protect this trade, on +account of which caravels or ships arrive there every year from +Portugal.</p> +<p>The Arabs of this coast have many Barbary horses, which they carry +to the country of the Negroes, which they barter with the great men +for slaves, receiving from ten to eighteen men for each horse, +according to their goodness. They also carry thither silken staffs of +Granada and Tunis, with silver, and many other things, in return for +which they receive great numbers of slaves and some gold. These +slaves are brought first to Hoden in the desert, and thence by the +mountains of Barka into Barbary, whence they are transported across +the Mediterranean into Sicily. Part of them are sold in Tunis, and in +other places along the coast of Barbary; and the rest are brought to +Arguin, where they are sold to the licensed Portuguese traders, who +purchase between seven and eight hundred every year, and send them +for sale into Portugal. Before the establishment of this trade at +Arguin, the Portuguese used to send every year four or more caravels +to the bay of Arguin, the crews of which, landing well armed in the +night, were in use to surprise some of the fishing villages, and +carry off the inhabitants into slavery. They even penetrated +sometimes a considerable way into the interior, and carried off the +Arabs of both sexes, whom they sold as slaves in Portugal.</p> +<p>Leaving Arguin we sailed along the coast to the river Senegal[4], +which is very large, and divides the people called Azanaghi, or +Azanhaji, from the first kingdom of the Negroes. The Azanhaji are of +a tawny colour, or rather of a deep brown complexion, and inhabit +some parts of the coast beyond Cape Branco, ranging through the +deserts, and their district reaches to the confines of the Arabs of +Hoden. They live on dates, barley, and the milk of camels; but as +they border likewise on the country of the Negroes, they carry on +trade with these people, from whom they procure millet and pulse, +particularly beans. Owing to the scarcity of provisions in the +desert, the Azanhaji are but spare eaters, and are able to endure +hunger with wonderful patience, as a poringer of barley-meal made +into hasty-pudding will serve them a whole day. The Portuguese used +to carry away many of these people for slaves, as they were preferred +to the negroes; but for some time past this has been prohibited by +Don Henry, and peace and trade has been established with them, as he +is in hopes they may be easily brought over to the catholic faith by +intercourse with the Christians, more especially as they are not +hitherto thoroughly established in the superstitions of Mahomet, of +which they know nothing but by hearsay. These Azenhaji have an odd +custom of wearing a handkerchief round their heads, a part of which +is brought down so as to cover their eyes, and even their nose and +mouth; for they reckon the mouth an unclean part, because it is +constantly belching and has a bad smell, and ought therefore to be +kept out of sight; even comparing it to the posteriors, and thinking +that both ought alike to be concealed. On this account they never let +their mouths be seen except when eating, as I have often had occasion +to observe. They have no lords among them, but the rich men are +respected somewhat more than the rest. They are of ordinary stature, +and very lean, wearing their black hair frizzled over their shoulders +like the Germans, and grease it daily with fish oil, which gives them +a nasty smell; yet they consider this as modish. They are extremely +poor, egregious liars, the greatest thieves in the world, and very +treacherous. They have never heard of any Christians except the +Portuguese, with whom they had war for thirteen or fourteen years, in +which many of them were carried off as slaves, as has been already +mentioned. Many of these people informed me, that, when they first +saw ships under sail, which had never been beheld by any of their +ancestors, they took them for large birds with white wings, that had +come from foreign parts; and when the sails were furled, they +conjectured, from their length, and swimming on the water, that they +must be great fish. Others again believed that they were spirits, who +wandered about by night; because they were seen at anchor in the +evening at one place, and would be seen next morning 100 miles off, +either proceeding along the coast to the southwards, or put back, +according as the wind changed, or the caravels might happen to steer. +They could not conceive how human beings could travel more in one +night than they were able to perform themselves in three days; by +which they were confirmed in the notion of the ships being spirits. +All this was certified to me by many of the Azanhaji who were slaves +in Portugal, as well as by the Portuguese mariners who had frequented +the coast in their caravels.</p> +<blockquote>[4] In the text this river is named Senega, and its name +probably signifies the river of the Azanhaji. It Is called in +Ramusio <i>Oro Tiber</i> .--F.</blockquote> +<p>About six days journey by land from Hoden, there is a place called +Teggazza[5], which in our language signifies a chest or bag of gold. +In this place large quantities of salt are dug up every year, and +carried by caravans on camels to <i>Tombucto</i> and thence to the +empire of <i>Melli</i> , which belongs to the Negroes. Oh arriving +there, they dispose of their salt in the course of eight days, at the +rate of between two and three hundred <i>mitigals</i> , or ducats, for +each load, according to the quantity, and then return with their +gold.</p> +<blockquote>[5] The name of this place is explained as signifying a +chest or bag of gold. There is a place marked in the Saharra, or +great sandy desert; under the name of <i>Tisheet</i> , where there are +salt mines, in lat. 17° 40' N. and long. 6° 40' W. which may +possibly be Teggazza. The distance of Tisheet from Hoden in our maps +is about 375 miles E. S. E. But there are other salt mines in the +desert still farther to the east. --E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION III.</p> +<p> <i>Of the Empire of Melli, and some curious particulars of the +Salt Trade: Of the Trade in Gold: Of the, Azanhaji; and concerning +swarms of Locusts</i> .</p> +<p>The empire of Melli, of which some mention has been made in the +preceding Section, is situated in an extremely hot climate, and +affords very bad nourishment for beasts; insomuch, that out of an +hundred camels which go from the desert into that country, scarcely +twenty-five return; several even of the Arabs and Azanhaji, belonging +to the caravans, sicken and die likewise every year. There are no +quadrupeds kept by the natives of the country, as indeed none can +live there for any time. It is reckoned to be forty days journey on +horseback from Tegazza to Tombuctu, and thirty from thence to +Melli[1]. Having inquired what use the merchants of Melli made of +this salt, the traders of the desert informed me, that a part of it +was consumed in that country, which lying near the line, where the +days and nights are of equal length, certain seasons of the year are +so excessively hot that the blood of the inhabitants would putrify, +if it were not for the salt, and they would all die. They have no art +or mystery in its use; but every one dissolves a small piece every +day in a porringer of water, and drinks it off, which in their +opinion preserves their health.</p> +<blockquote>[1] The distance between Tisheet and Tombuctu, according +to our best maps, is about 560 miles E. and by S. In the same +proportion, supposing Tisheet to be Teggazza, the distance between +Tombuctu and Melli ought to be about 420 miles. Of Melli we have no +traces in our modern maps, but it may possibly be referred +to <i>Malel</i> , the apparent capital of Lamlem; see Pinkert. Geogr. +II. 917, as laid down from the Arabian geographers, nearly 1200 miles +E.S.E. from Tombuctu.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The remainder of the salt is carried a long way in pieces on mens +heads, every piece being as large as a man can well bear. As brought +from Teggazza, the salt is in large pieces as taken out of the mine, +each camel being loaded with two pieces, and the negroes break these +down into smaller pieces, for the convenience of carrying them on +their heads, and muster a large number of footmen for this yearly +traffic. These porters have each a long forked stick in their hands; +and, when tired, they rest their loads on these sticks. They proceed +in this manner till they arrive on the banks of a certain water, but +whether fresh or salt my informer could not say, yet I am of opinion +that it must be a river, because, if it were the sea, the inhabitants +could not be in want of salt in so hot a climate. The negroes are +hired to carry it in this manner for want of camels or other beasts +of burden, as already mentioned; and, from what has been said, it may +easily be concluded that the number, both of the carriers and +consumers must be very great. When arrived at the water side, the +proprietors of the salt place their shares in heaps in a row, at +small distances, setting each a particular mark on his own heap; and +when this is done, the whole company retires half a days journey from +the place. Then the other negroes, who are the purchasers of the +salt, who seem to be the inhabitants of certain islands, but who will +on no account be seen or spoken to, come in boats to the place where +the heaps of salt are placed, and after laying a sum in gold on each +heap as its price, retire in their turns. After they are gone, the +owners of the salt return, and if the quantity of gold on their heaps +is satisfactory to them, they take it away and leave the salt; if +not, they leave both and withdraw again. In this manner they carry on +their traffick, without seeing or speaking to each other, and this +custom is very ancient among them, as has been affirmed to me for +truth by several merchants of the desert, both Arabs and Azanhaji, +and other creditable persons[2].</p> +<blockquote>[2] This story is probably a fiction, proceeding upon a +trade of barter between parties who did not understand the languages +of each other. The succeeding part of the story seems a mere fable, +without the smallest foundation whatever.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On inquiring how it came to pass that the emperor of Melli, whom +they represented as a powerful sovereign, did not find means, by +friendship or force, to discover who these people were who would not +suffer themselves to be seen or talked to, I was informed that this +emperor, not many years ago, resolved to procure some of these +invisible people, and held a council on the occasion, in which the +following plan was devised and carried into execution. Before the +salt caravan returned the half days journey from their salt heaps, +some of the emperors people made certain pits by the water side, and +near the place where the salt was left, and when the negroes came to +deposit their gold on the salt, those who were concealed in the pits +attacked them suddenly and took four of them prisoners, all the rest +making their escape. Three of those who were thus taken were +immediately set free by the captors, who judged that one would be +quite sufficient to satisfy the curiosity of their emperor, and that +the negroes would be the less offended. But after all, the design +proved abortive; for though spoken to in various languages, the +prisoner would neither speak or take any victuals, and died at the +end of four days. On this account, the Melli negroes concluded that +these other negroes were dumb; but others were of opinion, that being +endowed with the human form, they must necessarily have the power of +speech; but, that finding himself treated in this manner, so contrary +to ancient custom, he refused to speak from indignation. This +untoward result was much regretted by the negroes of Melli, because +it prevented them from gratifying the curiosity of their emperor; +who, on being informed of this persons death, was much dissatisfied, +yet asked what manner of men the prisoners were. He was accordingly +informed that they were of a deep black colour, well shaped, and a +span taller than the natives of Melli. That their under lip was +thicker than a mans fist, of a very red colour, and hung down on +their breasts, with something like blood dropping from it; but that +their upper lips were small, like those of other men. That the form +of the under lip exposed their gums and teeth, which were larger than +their own, having great teeth in each corner of their mouth, with +large black eyes, and altogether a terrible appearance, as the gums +dropped blood continually, as well as the great hanging under +lip.</p> +<p>This cross accident prevented all the succeeding emperors of Melli +from making any farther attempt of the kind; because, from that time, +these negroes forbore, for three years, from coming to buy salt as +usual. It is believed that their lips began to putrify, through the +excessive heat of the climate; and being no longer able to endure a +distemper, of which some must have died for want of the effectual +remedy which they had experienced from the use of salt, they returned +of their own accord to traffic for that commodity in the old way. All +this has established an opinion that they cannot live without salt; +the negroes of Melli judging of the case of others by their own. As +for the emperor of Melli, he cares not whether these blacks will +speak, and be seen or not, so that that he has the profit of their +gold[3]. This is all I could learn on this subject, which I think may +be credited, as so many persons have vouched for its truth, of which +I, who have both seen and heard of many wonderful things in this +world, am perfectly satisfied.</p> +<blockquote>[3] Few persons, perhaps, will be disposed to think the +credit of the Africans, however positive, or the belief of the +author, however strong, sufficient evidence of the truth of this +story. Yet it certainly is a common report of the country, and not +the invention of Cada Mosto. Jobson, who was at the Gambra or Gambia +in 1620, repeats the whole substance of this story; and Movette +relates the circumstances of the blacks trafficking for salt without +being seen, which he had from the Moors of Morocco. He leaves out, +however, the story of the frightful lips. Every fiction has its day; +and that part is now out of date.--Astl.</blockquote> +<p>The gold brought to Melli is divided into three parts. One part is +sent by the caravan which goes annually from Melli +to <i>Kokhia</i> [4], which lies on the road to Syria and Cairo. The +other two parts go first to Tombuctu, whence one of them goes +by <i>Toet</i> [5] to Tunis and other ports of the Barbary coast, and +the other portion is carried to Hoden, and from thence to <i>Oran</i> +and <i>One</i> [6], towns in Barbary, which are within the Straits of +Gibraltar, and to Fez, Morocco, Arzila, Azafi, and Messa, towns on +the African coast of the Atlantic, where the Italians and other +Christians procure it from the Moors, in return for various +commodities. Gold is the best and principal commodity which comes +through the country of the Azanhaji, and a part of it is brought +every year from Hoden to Arguin, where it is bartered with the +Portuguese[7].</p> +<blockquote>[4] Melli being itself unknown, we can hardly look to +discover the situation of Kokhia or Cochia; but it may possibly be +Kuku, a town and district to the N.E. of Bornou, which lies in the +direction of the text; or it may be Dar Kulla, greatly more to the +S.W. but still in the same track.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] In Grynaeus this place is called Ato. As in the +direction of the caravan from Tombuto towards Tunis, it may possibly +be Taudeny, an ouasis or island of the great desert, in lat. 21° +30' N.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] Called Hona in Grynaeus. What part of Barbary this +name may refer to does not appear. But the passage ought perhaps to +run thus, " <i>to Oran by the Mountain of Wan</i> ," as there is a +range mountains of that name to the S. E. of Oran, which joins the +chain of Atlas, or the Ammer Mountains.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] This is the earliest account of the places from +whence gold is brought, and of the course of its trade through +Africa, and thence into Europe; and is even more particular and exact +than any that has been given by later authors.--Astl.</blockquote> +<p>No money is coined in the land of the <i>Tawny Moors</i> , or +Azenhaji; nor is any money used by them, or in any of the +neighbouring countries; but all their trade is carried on by +bartering one commodity against another. In some of their inland +towns, the Arabs and Azanbaji use small white porcelain shells, or +cowries; which are brought from the Levant to Venice, and sent from +thence into Africa. These are used for small purchases. The gold is +sold by a weight named <i>mitigal</i> , which is nearly equal in value +to a ducat. The inhabitants of the desert have neither religion nor +sovereign; but those who are richest, and have the greatest number of +retainers and dependents, are considered as chiefs or lords. The +women are tawny, and wear cotton garments, which are manufactured in +the country of the Negroes; but some of them wear a kind of cloaks, +or upper garments, called Alkhezeli, and they have no smocks. She who +has the largest and longest breasts, is reputed the greatest beauty; +on which account, when they have attained to the age of seventeen or +eighteen, and their breasts are somewhat grown, they tie a cord very +tight around the middle of each breast, which presses very hard and +breaks them, so that they hang down; and by pulling at these cords +frequently, they grow longer and longer, till at length in some women +they reach as low as the navel. The men of the desert ride on +horseback after the fashion of the Moors; and the desert being +everywhere very hot, and having very little water, and extremely +barren, they can keep very few horses, and those they have are short +lived. It only rains in the months of August, September and October. +I was informed that vast swarms of locusts appear in this country +some years, in such infinite numbers as to darken the air, and even +to hide the sun from view, covering the horizon as far as the eye can +reach, which is from twelve to sixteen miles in compass; and, +wherever they settle they strip the ground entirely bare. These +locusts are like grasshoppers, as long as ones finger, and of a red +and yellow colour. They come every third or fourth year, and if they +were to pay their visits every year, there would be no living in the +country. While I was on the coast, I saw them in prodigious and +incredible numbers.</p> +<p>SECTION IV.</p> +<p> <i>Of the River Senegal and the Jalofs, with some Account of the +Manners, Customs, Government, Religion, and Dress of that +Nation</i> .</p> +<p>Leaving Cape Branco, and the Gulf of Arguin, we continued our +course along the coast to the river Senegal, which divides the desert +and the tawny Azanhaji from the fruitful lands of the Negroes. Five +years before I went on this voyage, this river was discovered by +three caravels belonging to Don Henry, which entered it, and their +commanders settled peace and trade with the Moors; since which time +ships have been sent to this place every year to trade with the +natives[1]. The river Senegal is of considerable size, being a mile +wide at the mouth, and of sufficient depth. A little farther on it +has another entrance, and between the two, there is an island which +forms a cape, running into the sea, having sand- banks at each mouth +that extend a mile from the shore[2]. All ships that frequent the +Senegal ought carefully to observe the course of the tides, the flux +and reflux of which extend for seventy miles up the river, as I was +informed by certain Portuguese, who had been a great way up this +river with their caravels. From Cape Branco, which is 280 miles +distant, the whole coast is sandy till within twenty miles of the +river. This is called the coast of <i>Anterota</i> , and belongs +entirely to the Azanhaji or Tawny Moors. I was quite astonished to +find so prodigious a difference in so narrow a space, as appeared at +the Senegal: For, on the south side of the river, the inhabitants are +all exceedingly black, tall, corpulent and well proportioned, and the +country all clothed in fine verdure, and full of fruit trees; +whereas, on the north side of the river, the men are tawny, meagre, +and of small stature, and the country all dry and barren. This river, +in the opinion of the learned, is a branch of the <i>Gihon</i> , which +flows from the Terrestrial Paradise, and was named the Niger by the +ancients, which flows through the whole of Ethiopia, and which, on +approaching the ocean to the west, divides into many other branches. +The <i>Nile</i> , which is another branch of the Gihon, falls into the +Mediterranean, after flowing through Egypt[3].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Cada Mosto is incorrect in the chronology of this +discovery, and even de Barros is not quite decided as to the first +discovery of the Senegal. He says that Denis Fernandez <i>passed</i> +it in 1446, and that Lancerot <i>discovered</i> it in 1447; the latter +of which is eight years before the visit of Cada +Mosto.--Clark.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] The northern mouth of the Senegal is in lat. 16° +40'. The southern in 15° 45', both N. so that the distance +between them, or the length of the island mentioned in the text, is +about sixty-two miles.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] This fancy of all the great rivers in Africa being +branches from one principal stream, is now known to be entirely +erroneous.--Astl.</blockquote> +<p>The first kingdom of the Negroes is on the banks of the Senegal, +and its inhabitants are called <i>Gilofi</i> or Jalofs. All the +country is low, not only from the north to that river, but also +beyond it, as far south as Cape Verd, which is the highest land on +all this coast, and is 400 miles from Cape Branco. This kingdom of +the Jalofs, on the Senegal, is bounded on the east by the country +called <i>Tukhusor</i> ; on the south by the kingdom of <i>Gambra</i> or +Gambia; on the west by the Atlantic Ocean; and on the north by the +river Senegal and the Azanhaji[4]. The king who reigned in Senegal in +my time was named Zukholin, and was twenty-two years old. This +kingdom is not hereditary; but for the most part, three or four of +the principal lords, of whom there are many in the country, choose a +king, in the event of a vacancy, but always fix their choice on a +person of noble lineage, who reigns only as long as he gives +satisfaction to these great lords. They often dethrone their kings by +force; who, on the other hand, often render; themselves so powerful +as to stand on their defence. This renders the government unsettled, +and is productive of civil wars; similar to Egypt, where the Soldan +of Cairo is always in fear of being killed or banished.</p> +<blockquote>[4] Although the first kingdom, or kingdoms of the +Negroes lies on the Senegal, Senega, or Sanaghas, and others along +the Gambia, yet there were not properly any kingdoms of these names. +On the north, indeed, of the Sanagha, lay the country of the Sanhaga, +Azanaghi, or Azanhaji, from whence the river seems to have taken its +name; but was divided among various tribes of people, and not under +any one sovereign. Geographers, however, have since continued to +propagate this first error.--Astl.<br> +The Jalofs and Foulahs inhabit the country between the Senegal and +Gambia, on which latter river the Feloops reside. What is meant by + <i>Tukhusor</i> in the text does not appear, unless it may obscurely +indicate Karta.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The people are savages, and extremely poor, having no walled +towns, and their villages are entirely composed of thatched cottages. +They use neither lime nor stone in building, not knowing how to make +the one, or to form the other. The kingdom of the Jalofs is small, +and, as I was informed, extends only 300 miles along the coast, and +about the same distance inland. The king has no settled revenue; but +the lords of the country court his favour, by making him yearly +presents of horses, which being scarce, are in high estimation, +together with horse furniture, cows, and goats, pulse, millet, and +other things. He likewise increases his wealth by means of robbery, +and by reducing his own subjects, and those of neighbouring provinces +to slavery, employing a part of these slaves to cultivate the lands +which are assigned to him, and selling the rest to the Arabs and +Azanhaji traders, who bring horses and other things for sale; as +likewise to the Christians, since they have established a trade in +these parts.</p> +<p>Every man may keep as many wives as he pleases. The king has +always upwards of thirty, and distinguishes them according to their +descent, and the rank of the lords whose daughters they are. He keeps +them in certain villages of his own, eight or ten in one place, each +having a separate house to dwell in, with a certain number of young +women to attend her, and slaves to cultivate the land which is +assigned for her maintenance, which they sow and reap, and to tend +her cows and goats. When the king comes to any of these villages, he +brings no provisions along with him, as his women are obliged to +support him and his retinue whenever he visits them. Every, morning +at sunrise, each of his wives in the village where he happens to +reside, prepares three or four dishes of various viands, such as +flesh, fish, or other dainties, cooked in their fashion; which are +carried by the slaves to the kings pantry; so that in less than an +hour, thirty or forty dishes are provided, and when the king has a +mind to eat, he finds every thing ready at his command. When he has +eaten of such things as he likes best, the remainder is given to his +retinue; but as this, diet is never very plentiful, they are but +poorly fed. He travels about in this manner, from place to place, +visiting his several wives, by which means he has a very numerous +issue and whenever one of his wives happens to fall with child, he +visits her no more. The lords or chiefs of the country live in a +similar manner.</p> +<p>These negroes profess me Mahometan religion, but are not even so +well instructed in it as the tawny Moors, more especially the common +people. The lords have always about them some Arabs or Azanhaji for +this purpose, who inculcate on their minds that it would be +disgraceful for men of their quality to live in ignorance of the laws +of God, like the common people who have no religion. They have become +Mahometans merely by means of their intercourse with the Azanhaji and +Arabs; for since they became acquainted with the Christians, they are +by no means so fond of the Mahometan faith. The generality of the +negroes go quite naked, except a piece of goat skin before; but the +lords who are able to procure such, wear cotton shirts, which are +spun and manufactured by their women. Their webs are only a span in +width, as they have not sufficient art to construct and use wider +looms; so that they are obliged to sew five, six, or more of these +webs together, when it is required to make any large piece of work. +The shirts reach half way down the thighs, and have wide sleeves +which; cover only half of their arms. They wear also cotton drawers, +reaching to the small of their legs; and these drawers are made +preposterously wide, being often thirty-five or forty palms in +circumference; so that, when tied on, they are full of plaits, and +though like A sack before the hinder part trails on the ground like +the train of a large petticoat. Thus, though making a most ridiculous +appearance, they think nothing comes up to their dress for elegance, +and they often ask the Europeans if they ever saw a finer dress. +Their women, both married and unmarried, go naked from the waist +upwards, and wear a piece of cotton which covers them from the waist +to the middle of the legs. Both sexes go barefooted, and have no +coverings to their heads; and weave and tie their hair, though short, +into neat tresses. The men often employ themselves in womens work, +such as spinning, washing clothes, and such like employments.</p> +<p>This country is extremely hot, the month of January being not so +cold as it is with us in Italy in the month of April; and the farther +we went to the south, the weather became so much the hotter. Both men +and women wash themselves four or five times a-day, and are very +cleanly in their persons; but are by no means so in regard of eating, +in which they observe no rule. Although very ignorant, and extremely +awkward in any thing, to which they have not been accustomed, they +are as expert as any European can be in their own business, and in +all things with which they are acquainted. They are full of words, +and extremely talkative, and are for the most part liars and cheats. +Yet they are exceedingly hospitable, and charitably disposed, as they +will most readily give a dinner, or a supper, or a nights lodging, to +any stranger who comes to their houses, without expecting any +remuneration or reward. The chiefs of these negroes are often at war +against each other, or against the neighbouring tribes or nations; +but they have no cavalry, for want of horses. In war, their only +defensive armour is a large target, made of the skin of an animal +called <i>Danta</i> , which is very difficultly pierced; and their +principal weapons are <i>azagays</i> or light darts, which they throw +with great dexterity. These darts are pointed with iron, the length +of a span, and barbed in different directions, so that they make +dangerous wounds, and tear the flesh extremely when pulled out. They +have also a Moorish weapon, much-bent like a Turkish sword or +cimeter, and made of iron, without any steel, which they procure from +the negroes on the river Gambia, as they either have no iron in their +own country, or want knowledge or industry in working it. Having but +few weapons, or rather no missiles, their wars are very bloody, as +they soon come to close quarters, and their strokes seldom fall in +vain; and, being extremely fierce and courageous, they will rather +allow themselves to be slain as save themselves by flight; neither +are they disheartened by seeing their companions slain. They have no +ships, nor had they ever seen any before the Portuguese came upon +their coast; but those who dwell upon the river Senegal, and some who +are settled on the sea coast, have <i>zoppolies</i> or canoes, +called <i>almadias</i> by the Portuguese, which are hollowed out of a +single piece of wood, the largest of which will carry three or four +men. They use these almadias for catching fish, and for transporting +themselves up or down the river. The negroes of this country are the +most expert swimmers in the world, as I can vouch from frequent +experience of their dexterity.</p> +<p>SECTION V.</p> +<p> <i>Continuation of the Voyage to the country of a King named +Budomel, with some account of his Territory, and the Manners of his +People</i> .</p> +<p>Having passed the river Senegal, we sailed about 800 miles farther +south along the coast, which was all low land without mountains, till +we came to the territory or kingdom of Budomel[1]. As some +Portuguese, who had dealt with Budomel, represented him as a very +just person, who paid for any goods he might receive, and might +therefore be confided in, I stopped at his country, that I might +endeavour to dispose of some Spanish horses I had on board, which are +in great request among the Negroes; besides which, I had some cloth, +Moorish wrought silks, and other commodities for sale. We came, +therefore to anchor, at a place on the coast, called Palma di +Budomel, which is only an open roadstead, and not a port. I +immediately dispatched my negro interpreter on shore to inform this +lord of my arrival, and of the goods I had on board for sale. Not +long afterwards Budomel came himself to the beach, attended by about +fifteen horsemen and an hundred and fifty foot, and sent a message +desiring me to land, with professions of a friendly disposition, and +promising to render me every attention and service in his power. I +went accordingly on shore immediately, and was received with great +civility. After some discourse, I delivered to him seven horses, with +their furniture; and every other article for which he expressed an +inclination, all of which had cost me 300 ducats, trusting to his +honour for payment, which was to be in slaves, and which he promised +to deliver at his own residence, which was twenty-five miles distant +from the shore, whither he invited me to accompany him. To this +invitation I readily agreed, induced as much by a desire of seeing +the country, as on account of receiving payment. Before setting out +however, Budomel made me a present of a beautiful negress, about +twelve years of age, who, he said, was meant to serve me in the +cabin; and I received the gift, and sent her on board the +caravel.</p> +<blockquote>[1] The text seems corrupted in giving so large a +distance between the Senegal river and this country of king Budomel, +as 800 miles to the south, or rather S. S. E. would carry us to what +is called the <i>grain</i> , or windward coast of Guinea, in lat. +6° N. and, from the sequel, Cada Mosto does not appear to have +passed Cape Verd till after quitting the country of Budomel. +According to Brue, as quoted by Clarke, the king of Kayor or Kayhor +was styled Damel. Kayor or Cayor appears on our maps above an hundred +miles up the Senegal, and on its north side, which therefore can have +no reference to the place in the text. I am disposed to believe, that +the distance in the text ought only to have been 80 miles, and that +the territory of Budomel was in the country of the Jalofs, between +the Senegal and Cape Verd, at the mouth of a small river, on which +our charts place two towns, Masaye and Enibaul, in lat. 15° 20' +N.--E.</blockquote> +<p>I was furnished by Budomel with horses and every thing necessary +for the journey; and when we arrived within four miles of his +residence, he gave me in charge to his nephew Bisboror, who was lord +of a small town or village at which we stopped. Bisboror took me to +his own house, where I was treated with much civility and attention, +during twenty-eight days which I tarried in that place. This was in +November 1455. In that time I went often to visit Budomel, +accompanied by his nephew, and had many opportunities to observe the +produce of the country, and the manners of the inhabitants, more +especially as, on account of the tempestuous weather, I was under the +necessity of travelling back by land to the river Senegal. For, +finding it impossible to get on board at the coast by reason of the +surf, I had to order the ship to return to that river, and went there +by land to re-embark. On this occasion, being very desirous to +transmit instructions to those on board the ship to meet me at the +river Senegal, I inquired among the negroes if any one would +undertake to carry a letter from the shore. Several of them readily +offered their services, though the ship lay three miles from the +shore, and, owing to a strong wind, the sea broke on the shore with a +tremendous surf, insomuch that I thought it impossible for any one to +succeed in the attempt. Besides the surf, there were several sand +banks near the shore, and other banks about half way to the ship, +between which there ran a strong current, sometimes one way and +sometimes the other, along shore, so that it was extremely difficult +for any one to swim through without infinite danger of being carried +away by the stream; and the sea broke with such violence on the +banks, that it seemed quite impossible to surmount such complicated +obstacles. Yet two of the negroes offered to go, and only demanded +two <i>mavulgies</i> of tin for each of them, one mavulgi being worth +no more than a <i>grosso</i> [2], at which price they engaged to carry +my letter in safety to the ship. I cannot express the difficulties +which they encountered in passing the sand bank. They were sometimes +out of sight for a considerable space, so that I often thought they +were both drowned. At last, one of them, finding himself unable to +resist the violence with which the waves broke over him, turned back; +but the other, being stronger, got over the bank after struggling a +whole hour, and, having carried the letter to the caravel, returned +with an answer. This seemed to me very wonderful, and made me +conclude that the negroes of this coast must be the most expert +swimmers in the world.</p> +<blockquote>[2] The grosso, or Venetian groat, is worth about three +farthings.--Astl.</blockquote> +<p>It has been already observed, that those who are called lords in +this country have neither castles nor cities, the king even having +nothing but villages with thatched houses. Budomel is lord of one +part of this kingdom, yet his place of residence was not a palace, +nor even a walled house. These great men are not lords on account of +their riches or treasure, as they possess neither, nor have they any +coin in use among them; but they are considered as such out of +courtesy, and on account of the great retinues by which they are +always attended, being more feared and respected by their subjects +than any of the lords in Italy. Budomel has several villages +appointed for his own habitation and that of his wives, as he never +fixes in one place. The village in which I resided with Bisboror was +one of his habitations, containing between forty and fifty thatched +cottages, built near one another, and surrounded with ditches and +strong pallisades, having only one or two passages left for entering; +and every house had a court-yard, inclosed by a hedge. According to +report, Budomel had nine wives in this place, and more or less in +several other villages. Each of these wives had five or six young +negresses to attend upon her, with all of whom he might sleep when he +pleased, without giving offence to the wives, for such is the custom +of the country. Both sexes are extremely amorous; and Budomel +strongly importuned me for philacteries, in which he had been +informed the Europeans were very expert, and offered any reward +within his power for my compliance. They are very jealous, and suffer +no man to enter the houses which are inhabited by the women, not even +their own sons.</p> +<p>Budomel is always attended by a retinue of at least 200 negroes, +who are changed from time to time some going away and others coming +back in their room; besides which, many people repair to wait upon +him from the adjacent places which are under his government. Before +arriving at his particular apartment there are seven large courts, +one within the other, having a tree in the middle of each, where +those wait who come to him on business. His family is distributed in +these courts, according to their several ranks; the most considerable +having their station in the court nearest his dwelling, and the +meanest in the outermost court of all. Few people are allowed to +approach his own particular apartment, except the Christians and +Azanhaji, who have free admission and more liberty is allowed to them +than to the negroes. This lord affects great state and gravity in his +deportment, and does not allow himself, to be seen except an hour +every morning, and for a short while in the evening; at which times +he appears near the door of an apartment in the first court, into +which only persons of note are permitted to enter. On these occasions +of giving audience, every person who come to speak to him, however +high may be his rank, is in the first place obliged to strip himself +stark naked, except the small cloth in front formerly mentioned; and, +immediately on entering the court, he falls down on his knees, bows +down his head to the ground, and scatters dust with both hands on his +own head and shoulders; neither is even the nearest relations of the +lords exempted from this humiliating expression of their duty and +obedience. The person, who receives an audience continues in this +humble posture a great while, strewing himself with sand and crawling +on his knees, till he approaches the great man; and when within two +paces of his lord, he stops and begins to relate his case, still +continuing on his knees, with his head down, and throwing sand an his +head in token of great humility. All the time the lord scarcely +appears to notice him and continues to discourse with other persons; +and when the vassal has related his story, the lord gives him an +answer in two words, with an arrogant aspect. Such is their affected +pride and grandeur, and such the submission which is shewn him, +which, in my opinion, proceeds from fear, as their lords, for every +little fault they commit, take away their wives and children, and +cause them to be sold as slaves.</p> +<p>Budomel treated me with the utmost attention and civility, and +used to carry me in the evenings into a sort of mosque, where the +Arab and Azanhaji priests, whom he had always about his person, used +to say prayers. His manner on these occasions was as follows. Being +entered into the mosque, which was in one of the courts belonging to +his residence, and where he was attended by some of the principal +negroes, he first stood some little time with his eyes lifted up as +if it were to heaven, then, advancing two steps, he spoke a few words +in a low tone; after which, he stretched himself on the ground, which +he kissed; the Azanhaji and the rest of his attendants doing the +same. Then rising up, he repeated the same series of actions +repeatedly, for ten or twelve times, which occupied about half an +hour. When all was over, he asked my opinion of their manner of +worship, and desired one to give an account of the nature of our +religion. On this I told him, in the presence of all his doctors, +that the religion of Mahomet was false, and the Romish the only true +faith. This made the Arabs and Azanhaji extremely angry; but Budomel +laughed on the occasion, and said, that he considered the religion of +the Christians to be good, as God alone could have gifted them with +so much riches and understanding. He added, however, that in his +opinion the Mahometan law must be good also; and he believed, that +the Negroes were more sure of salvation than the Christians, because +God was just, who had given a paradise to the Christians in this +world, and would certainly give one to the Negroes in the next, as +they possessed scarcely any good in this world in comparison. In all +his discourse he shewed a good understanding, and took great pleasure +in hearing the customs of the Christians described. I firmly believe +he might easily have been converted to Christianity, had it not been +from fear of losing his power, as I was often told by his nephew, +with whom I lodged, and he took great delight in hearing me discourse +of our religion. The table of Budomel, like all other lords and +people of condition in this country, is supplied by his wives, in the +same manner as has been already mentioned in regard to Zukholin, the +king of Senegal; each wife sending him a certain number of dishes +every day. He and the other lords eat on the ground, without any +regularity or company, except the Arabs and Azanhaji, who are their +teachers and priests, and one or two of their principal negro +attendants. The inferior people eat in messes of ten or twelve each, +having a basket full of victuals set in the midst, into which all put +their hands at the same time. They eat but little at one meal, but +repeat these four or five times a day.</p> +<p>SECTION VI.</p> +<p> <i>Account of the Country of Budomel continued</i> .</p> +<p>On account of the great heats in the kingdom of Senegal, and all +the other countries of the Negroes on the coast, no wheat, rye, +barley, or spelt, can grow, neither are vines cultivated, as we knew +experimentally from a trial made with seeds from our ship: For wheat, +and these other articles of culture, require a temperate climate and +frequent showers, both of which are wanting here, where they have no +rains during nine months of the year, from October to June both +included. But they have large and small millet, beans, and the +largest and finest kidney beans in the world, as large as hazle nuts, +longer than those of the Venetian territory, and beautifully speckled +with various colours as if painted. Their beans are large, flat, and +of a lively red colour, and they have likewise white beans. They sow +in July, at the beginning of the rains, and reap in September, when +they cease; thus they prepare the soil, sow the seed, and get in the +harvest, all in three months; but they are bad husbandmen, and so +exceedingly averse to labour, that they sow no more than is barely +sufficient to last them throughout the year, and never lay up any +store for sale. In cultivating the ground, four or five of them go +into a field with spades, with which they turn up the soil about four +inches deep; yet such is the fertility of the soil, that it makes +ample returns for this slight culture, without any farther +trouble.</p> +<p>The liquors of the Negroes are water, milk, and palm wine, which +they call mighol, or migwol, which is taken from a tree of the palm +tribe, very numerous in this country, somewhat like the date tree, +but not the same, and which furnishes this liquor the whole year +round. The trees are tapped in two or three places near the root, and +from these wounds a brown juice runs out, as thin as skimmed milk, +into calabasses that are placed to receive the liquor, which drops +but slowly, as one tree will only fill two calabasses from morning +till night. This migwol, or palm- wine, is an exceedingly pleasant +drink, which intoxicates like wine unless mixed with water. +Immediately after it is drawn from the tree it is as sweet as any +wine whatever; but the luscious taste goes off more and more as it is +kept, and at length it becomes sour. It drinks better than at first +after three or four days, as it depurates by keeping, and is not so +sweet. I have often drank of it, indeed every day that I remained in +the country, and liked it better than the wines of Italy. This liquor +is not so abundant as that every one may have it at discretion; yet +all may have some, especially the chiefs, as the trees are not +planted in gardens, like vines and fruit trees in Europe, but are +found wild in the forests, and are consequently accessible to +all.</p> +<p>In this country there are several sorts of fruit which resemble +those of Europe, though not exactly the same, and which are very +good, though they grow wild; and, were they to be cultivated as ours +are, would prove much better than such as are produced in the +northern climates, the quality of the soil and air in this part of +Africa being more nutritive. The whole country is plain and fertile, +abounding in good pasture, and is covered by an infinite number of +large and beautiful trees, that are not known in Europe. It contains +several lakes of fresh water, none of them large, but very deep, and +full of excellent fish, which differ much from those that are caught +in Italy, and many water serpents, which the natives call + <i>Kalkatrici</i> . They use a kind of oil with their victuals, which +tastes like oil of olives, has a pleasant flavour of violets, and +tinges the food even better than saffron, but I could not learn what +it was produced from[1]. There is likewise a plant which produces +large quantities of small kidney-beans.</p> +<blockquote>[1] This is almost certainly palm oil, the origin of +which will appear in another division of this work.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In this country there are many kinds of animals, but serpents are +particularly numerous, both large and small, some of which are +venomous. The large ones are more than two paces long[2], but have +neither legs nor wings, as has been reported by some persons, but +some of them are so very thick as to have swallowed a goat at one +morsel. These serpents retire in troops, as the natives report, to +certain parts of the country where white ants are found in prodigious +swarms, and which, by a kind of instinct, are said to build houses +for these serpents, of earth which they carry in their months for +that purpose, resembling ovens, and often to the number of 150 in one +place[3]. The Negroes are great enchanters, and use charms upon +almost all occasions, particularly in regard to serpents, over which +they have great power. A Genoese, worthy of credit, who was in this +country the year before my arrival, and who likewise lodged with +Bisboror, the nephew of Budomel, told me he once heard a load noise +of whistling about the house in the middle of the night. Being +awakened by the noise, he saw Bisboror get out of bed and order two +negroes to bring his camel. Being asked where he meant to go at that +time of night, he said he had business which must be executed, but +would soon return. On coming back after some time, and the Genoese +expressing curiosity to learn the object in which he had been +engaged, Bisboror asked if he had heard the hissing noise about the +house during the night, and said that it had been made by the +serpents, which would have killed a great many of his cattle, if he +had not sent them back to their quarters by the employment of certain +enchantments. The Genoese was astonished at this story, but Bisboror +said he had no need to wonder at this small matter, as Budomed could +do a great deal more extraordinary things with the serpents than he +could. In particular, when he had a mind to envenom his weapons, he +used to draw a large circle, into which, by means of his +enchantments, he brought all the serpents of the neighbourhood, from +which he selected those he thought most poisonous, and allowed all +the others to go away. With the blood of these serpents, mixed up +with the seeds of a certain tree, he infected his weapons with so +deadly a poison, that, if they drew but the least drop of blood, the +person or animal wounded by them was sure to die in a quarter of an +hour. Bisboror farther offered to shew him an example of the efficacy +of this art, but the Genoese declined witnessing the experiment. This +story of the serpents is the more probable, that I have heard of +persons in Italy who could charm them in a similar manner; but I am +apt to believe that the Negroes are the most expert sorcerers in the +world.</p> +<blockquote>[2] The text must be here erroneous, as two paces, or ten +feet, will scarcely suffice in describing the boa constrictor, +sometimes near thirty feet long.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] An account of the termites, or white ants of Africa, +will appear hereafter. The circumstance of serpents taking up their +abode in the large anthills, must be entirely +accidental.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The only tame animals in the kingdom of Senegal are oxen, cows, +and goats; having no sheep, which love a temperate or cold air, and +could not live in this hot climate. Nature, however, has provided +mankind with necessaries fitted for their various occasions; having +furnished the Europeans with wool, as they have need of warm +clothing, while the Negroes, who live in such intense heat, have been +supplied with cotton by the Almighty. Owing to the heat, in my +opinion, the cattle of this country are much smaller than those of +Italy. It is a great rarity to see a red cow in this country, as they +are all black or white, or mottled with black and white spots. Beasts +of prey, such as lions, leopards, and wolves, are numerous, and there +are plenty of hares. Wild elephants go about in troops, like the wild +swine in Italy, but can never be tamed, as they are in other parts of +the world. As the elephant is a well-known animal, I shall only +observe in general, that those of Africa are of a very large size, as +may be easily conceived by the size of their teeth, which are +imported into Europe. Of these large teeth, or tusks rather, each +elephant has two in the lower jaw, the points of which turn down, +whereas those of the wild boar are turned up. Before my voyage to +Africa I had been told that the elephant could not bend its knee, and +slept standing; but this is an egregious falsehood for the bending of +their knees can be plainly perceived when they walk, and they, +certainly lie down and rise again like other animals. They never shed +their large teeth before death; neither do they do any harm to man +unless provoked. In that case the elephant makes his attack with his +trunk, which is a kind of nose, protruded to a great length. He can +contract and extend this proboscis at pleasure, and is able to toss a +man with it as far as a sling can throw a stone. It is in vain to +think of escape by running, let the person be ever so swift, in case +the elephant pursues in earnest, as his strides are of prodigious +length. They are more dangerous when they have young ones in their +company than at any other time; of which the females have only, three +or four at a birth. They feed on the leaves and fruit of trees, +pulling down the large boughs with their trunks, and bringing them to +their mouths. This trunk is composed of a very thick cartilage, and +is pliable in every direction.</p> +<p>There are many kinds of birds in this country, and parrots are +particularly numerous, which are much hated by the negroes, because +they do much damage to their crops of pulse and millet. There are +said to be several kinds of parrots, but I never saw more than two. +One of these is like the kind which is brought into Italy from +Alexandria in Egypt, but rather smaller. The other kind is much +larger, having a brown head, neck, bill, and legs, with a yellow and +green body. I procured a considerable number of both sorts, +particularly of the smaller kind, many of which died; but I brought +150 back to Portugal, where I sold them for half a ducat each. These +birds are very industrious in constructing their nests, which they +build with bulrushes and the small leaves of the palm, and other +trees, in a very curious and ingenious manner. Choosing the +slenderest branch of a tree, the parrot fastens a bulrush of about +two spans long to its outer extremity, at the depending end of which +rush it weaves its nest in a most beautiful manner, suspended like a +ball, and having only one passage for entering. By this means they +contrive to preserve their young from being devoured by the serpents, +as the small twigs from which the nests are suspended are unable to +bear the weight of the serpents. There are likewise abundance of +those birds called Pharaoh's hens[4] in Europe, which come to us out +of the Levant. They have likewise other birds, both large and small, +which are quite different from any that are known in Italy.</p> +<blockquote>[4] Probably the Pintado, or Guinea +fowl.--E.</blockquote> +<p>As I was long on shore, I went several times to see their markets +or fairs, which were held every Monday and Friday in a meadow, not +far from where I resided. The men and women, from four or five miles +around, came to this place with their various commodities, and those +who lived at a greater distance, went to other markets nearer their +habitations. The great poverty of the natives appeared manifest in +the goods they brought to these fairs; consisting of small quantities +of cotton cloth, and cotton yarn, pulse, oil, millet, wooden tubs, +palm matts, and every thing else useful to life, according to their +manners, likewise arms, and some small quantities of gold. Having no +money or coin of any kind, all their trade was carried on by way of +barter, or exchange of one thing for another, sometimes two or three +things for one, according to their different values. All these blacks +used to gaze on me, as if I had been a prodigy, having never seen a +white man before. Some took hold of my hands, which they rubbed with +spittle, to see if the whiteness was natural or artificial, and +expressed their wonder to find that my skin was not painted. They +were as much astonished at my dress, being clothed in the Spanish +fashion, with a black damask waistcoat, and a cloak over it: They +seemed much surprised at the waistcoat, and greatly admired the +woollen cloth, which they had never seen any of before. My chief +purpose in going to these fairs, was to see what quantity of gold was +brought thither.</p> +<p>Horses are very scarce, and of great value in the country of the +Negroes, being brought all the way from that part of Barbary which +lies nearest to Europe, by the Arabs and Azanhaji. Owing to the great +heat, horses do not live long here; for they grow so fat that they +cannot stale, and so burst. They are fed with bean leaves, which are +gathered after the beans are brought from the fields; and, being +dried like hay, are cut small, and given to the horses instead of +oats. They give millet also, which contributes greatly to make them +fat. A horse and his furniture sells for from nine to fourteen +negroes, according to his goodness and beauty; and when a negro lord +buys a horse, he sends for his horse sorcerers, who cause a fire to +be kindled of the stalks of certain herbs, and hold the horses head +by the bridle over the smoke, while they repeat over some few words +by way of incantation. They afterwards have him anointed all over +with fine oil, and having kept him eighteen or twenty days, without +allowing any one to see him, they affix some Moorish charms to his +neck, which have the appearance of small square billets of writing, +folded up and covered with red leather; and affirm, that, they will +go into battle with greater safety by means of these scrolls or +annulets.</p> +<p>The women of this country are very pleasant and merry, especially +the young ones, and delight in singing and dancing, taking this +diversion only at night by moonlight; and their manner of dancing is +very different from that of the Italians. Many things in our ships +seemed wonderful to the Negroes, particularly our cross-bows; but +much more our artillery. When some of them were on board my ship, I +caused one of the guns to be fired off, which threw them into a +dreadful panic; and their terror was much increased on being told +that one cannon-shot could kill an hundred men. On which account, +they alleged that it must be something belonging to the devil. They +were likewise greatly astonished at a bag-pipe, which, one of our +sailors played upon to divert them; and, on examining the several +parts and ornaments of the instrument, they conceived that it was a +living animal, which sung in different voices. Observing their +simplicity, I told them it was a musical instrument, and put it into +their hand unblown to examine. They then perceived that it was a work +of art, but believed that it was something supernatural, and could +only have been devised by a superior being, it sounded so sweetly, +and in so many different tones, having never heard any thing which +could be compared to it in their estimation. The ship, also, and its +various contrivances, as its anchors, masts, sails, and shrouds, +afforded them great subjects for admiration and wonder. They looked +upon the port-holes in the stern as real eyes, by which the vessel +was able to find her way in the sea; and observed, that travellers on +land found difficulty to find the road from one place to another, +while we were able to travel along the trackless ocean; and that the +whites must therefore be the greatest of sorcerers, not inferior to +the devil himself. They shewed great admiration on seeing a lighted +candle in a candlestick, having themselves no other artificial light +but that proceeding from a fire. They have honey-combs, but when they +find these, they suck out the honey, and throw away the empty comb as +useless. At one time, I bought some honey-combs from a negro, and +shewed him how to extract the honey; after which, on asking him if he +knew what remained, he said it was good for nothing: But he was +greatly astonished on seeing it made into candles, and lighted in his +presence; saying, that the Europeans knew every thing. Their only +musical instruments are two, one of which they have from the Moors, +which is like a large drum[5]; the other is somewhat like a fiddle, +having only two strings, which they play on with their fingers, but +gives no sounds that can be called harmonious.</p> +<blockquote>[5] This in Ramusio is called Tabacche, and Sambuka in +Grynaeus.--Astl.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION VII.</p> +<p> <i>Continuation of the Voyage from Senegal, by Cape Verd, the +river Barbasini, and to the river Gambia; and, returns to +Portugal.</i> </p> +<p>Having seen a considerable part of the dominions of Budomel, and +received the slaves which, were bargained for, in exchange for my +horses and other merchandize, I resolved to proceed on my voyage, +round Cape Verd, and to prosecute discoveries along this dangerous +coast, and in particular, to go in search of the kingdom of Gambia or +Gambia, which Don Henry had pointed out, on the information of a +person who was well acquainted with the country of the Negroes, as +not far from Senegal, and from whence, it was reported, that +considerable quantities of gold might be procured. Longing to go in +quest of this gold, I took my leave of Budomel, and repaired to the +river Senegal, where I went on board the caravel and got under weigh, +as soon as possible. Soon after leaving the river Senegal, as we were +standing onward with a press of sail towards Cape. Verd, we descried, +one morning two ships in the offing. On joining company, we found +that one of these belonged to Antonio, an experienced Genoese +navigator, and the other to some gentlemen in the service of Don +Henry, and that they had sailed in company, with the intention of +passing Cape Verd, to explore the coast beyond it, in search of new +discoveries. Our intentions being similar, I offered to join company, +and we accordingly proceeded together along the coast to the +southward, in sight of land.</p> +<p>We came in sight of that cape next day, being about thirty Italian +miles from our last anchorage[1]. Cape Verd was so named by the +Portuguese, who discovered it about a year before[2], because it is +covered with trees which continue green all the year. This is a high +and beautiful cape, which runs a considerable way into the sea, and +has two hills or small mountains at its outer extremity. There are +several villages of the Senegal negroes, or Jalofs, upon and about +this promontory, which are composed of thatched cabins close by the +shore, and in sight of those who sail past. There are also some sand +banks, which extend about half a mile into the sea[3].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Cape Verd is about 100 miles from the southern mouth +of the river Senegal; so that the voyagers probably anchored every +night within sight of the scarcely known coast.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] This is erroneous, as it was discovered in 1446 by +Denis Fernandez, nine years before.--Clark.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] It is necessary to be cautious with respect to these +early voyages, which, having gone through various transcriptions and +translations, are liable to numerous errors. In our best charts, this +sand bank, intermixed with sunk rocks, extends two miles out to +sea.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Having doubled the cape, we came to three small uninhabited +islands, full of green trees[4]; and being in want of water, we +anchored at that which seemed the largest and most fruitful, in hopes +of meeting with a spring, but could find none to answer our purpose. +We met, however, with the nests and eggs of several kinds of birds, +such as we had never seen before. This was in the month of July 1456, +and we continued here all day, fishing with lines and large hooks, +catching a prodigious number of fish, among which were <i>dentali</i> , +and gilded fish[5], some of which weighed from twelve to fifteen +pounds each. On the next day we proceeded in our course, keeping +always in sight of land, and found a kind of gulf formed by the coast +on the south side of the cape[6]. This coast is all low, and full of +fine large trees, which are continually green, as the new leaves grow +before the old ones fall off, and they never wither like those in +Europe; and the trees grow so near the shore, that they seem to drink +as it were the water of the sea. The coast is most beautiful, +insomuch that I never saw any thing comparable to it, though I had +sailed much both in the Levant and the western parts of Europe. It is +well watered every where by small rivers, but these are useless for +trade, as they do not admit ships of any size. Beyond this little +gulf, the coast is inhabited by two negro nations, called Barbasini +and Serreri, which are not subject to the king of Senegal, neither +have they any king or lord of their own; but one person is more +honoured than another, according to his condition or quality. They +are great idolaters, without laws, and living in almost a state of +nature, and extremely cruel, and refuse to become subjected to any +lord. That their wives and children may not be taken from them and +sold as slaves, as is the custom among all the negro nations which +are under subjection to kings or lords, they use bows and poisoned +arrows, the wounds from which are incurable, if even the smallest +blood is drawn, and the wounded person or animal soon dies. Their +colour is jet black, and their persons are well made. The country is +full of woods, lakes, and streams, from which they derive great +security, as they can only be invaded through narrow defiles, by +which means they set the neighbouring lords at defiance. In former +times, the kings of Senegal often attempted to reduce these two +nations under obedience, but were always worsted, owing to the +natural strength of the country, and their arrows. Running along the +coast to the south with a fair wind, we discovered the mouth of a +river about a bow-shot wide, but not deep, to which we gave the name +of the <i>Barbasini</i> river, and have marked it on the chart which I +made of the coast, as sixty miles from Cape Verd[7]. In sailing along +the coast, we only made sail at sun rise, having a man continually on +the top, and two others on the prow or head, to look out for +breakers, and always came to anchor at sun set, about four or five +miles from the land, in ten or twelve fathoms water.</p> +<blockquote>[4] Called the Birds islands, or the +Magdalens.--Clark.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] In Ramusio these fish are called Orate vecchis, and +in Grynaeus Ostreas veteres.--Astl.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] This appears to indicate the gulf between Cape +Emanuel, near the isle of Goree, and the Red Cape.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] The river named Barbasini is above eighty-five miles +S.S.E. from Cape Verd, measuring to its northern entrance, and forms +a small island or delta at its mouth, having another entrance about +eighteen miles farther south. There is a small island +named <i>Fetti</i> , off its northern entrance, of which no notice is +taken by Cada Mosto. The natives on this part of the coast, to the +north of the Gambia, are now called Barras.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Proceeding on our voyage in this cautious manner, we came to the +mouth of a river which appeared to be as large as the Senegal[8]; and +struck by the fineness of its appearance, and its rich woods which +came down to the very shores, we cast anchor, and determined to send +one of our negro interpreters on shore, to endeavour to establish a +friendly intercourse with the natives. Every ship which sails from +Portugal for the coast of Africa is supplied with some of these negro +interpreters, who consist of slaves that had been sold by the lords +of Senegal to the first Portuguese who touched on the coast, and who +have learnt the Portuguese language and become Christians. These are +hired from their masters in Portugal, who receive, for their hire, a +prime slave from the cargo on returning from the voyage; and when any +of these interpreters have thus earned four slaves for their master, +they become free. Having cast lots to determine which of the three +ships should send an interpreter on shore, it fell on the ship +commanded by the Genoese gentleman; on which he sent an armed boat, +ordering the men not to touch the shore, but to push off as soon as +they had landed the interpreter; who was charged to inform himself +respecting the condition and government of the country, and to +inquire whether it produced gold or any other commodity worth coming +for. No sooner was the interpreter landed, and the boat shoved off to +some distance as ordered, than several natives came out of the wood, +who had been in ambush, with bows, arrows, and other weapons, from +the time they saw our ships approach the coast, as if they had been +in hopes that some of our people might land upon the coast. After a +short parley with our interpreter, they furiously assaulted him with +their <i>gomies</i> , or short Moorish swords, and slew him; our people +in the boat being unable to give him any assistance. This +intelligence was brought to the ships, where it excited much +surprise; and, concluding that these people must be extremely +barbarous, who could treat one of their own race with so much +barbarity, and would consequently use us cruelly if in their power, +we immediately weighed anchor, and stood on our voyage farther to the +south, which improved in the beauty and verdure of the trees as we +advanced, always sailing within sight of the coast, which is +everywhere low land covered with trees.</p> +<blockquote>[8] From the sequel, I am apt to conclude that this +second river is the Barbasini of our charts; and that the river named +Barbasini in the text of Cada Mosto, is that named <i>Joall</i> in +modern charts.--E.</blockquote> +<p>We came at length to the mouth of a very large river, which is not +less than six or eight miles wide at the entrance, and narrows a +little way within to three or four miles, and finding that it could +be safely entered, we determined to cast anchor for the night; and to +endeavour to learn next day if this were the river and kingdom of +Gambra, or Gambia, of which we were in search[9]. We judged, however, +from its noble river, that we had now attained the so anxiously +desired country of Gambia, and flattered ourselves in the hope of +finding a country of vast riches, where we might make our fortunes at +once, by returning laden with gold, and other rich commodities. Next +day, having but little wind, we sent on the small caravel before, +well manned, with directions, as their ship was small and drew little +water, that they were to proceed as far as possible up the river, +observing whether there were any bar or sand banks at its mouth, and +to take the soundings with great care; and if the river were found +navigable, they were to return and make signals to that effect. +Finding four fathoms water at the entrance, the caravel brought to, +and made the concerted signal; on which it was thought proper, as +that caravel was small, to send another boat well armed along with +her up the river, and they were strictly enjoined, in case the +natives were hostile, to enter into no conflict with them, but to +return immediately to the other ships, as the object of our voyage +was to cultivate friendship and trade with the country, which could +only be accomplished by policy, not by force. The boats accordingly +proceeded up the river for two miles, leaving the small caravel at +anchor, and found the banks everywhere beautiful, with sixteen +fathoms water. But as the river above this made several returns or +reaches, they did not think it prudent to venture any higher.</p> +<blockquote>[9] Cada Mosto betrays strange ignorance of the previous +discoveries of the Portuguese, considering that he had resided some +time with Don Henry at Sagres. This fine river was discovered in +1447, nine years before, by Nuno Tristan, who ascended it some way, +and was slain there by the poisoned arrows of the Negroes. Perhaps +even Don Henry was misled by the name of Rio Grande which it then +received, and confused the Venetian in his search for the +Gambia.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>When on their way back, they saw three <i>almadias</i> or canoes +near the mouth of a small river which runs into the large one. These +almadias resemble the skiffs used in Italy which are +called <i>zoppoli</i> , and are hollowed out of one large piece of +wood. Although our boats were strongly armed, yet, in obedience to +their orders, and for fear of being attacked with poisoned arrows, +which the Negroes of Senegal had told us were used by all the natives +of Gambia, they took to their oars, and made all possible haste back +to the ship. By the time they got on board, the almadias, which +followed them close, were within arrow flight. There were about +twenty-five or thirty negroes in these three almadias, who stopped +for some time gazing at the caravel, which was quite a new sight to +them; but would neither speak nor come nearer, notwithstanding every +endeavour by signs, to induce them to approach, and at length they +returned to the shore. About three next morning, the other three +caravels that had remained at anchor without the river, sailed with +the rising tide and a light breeze, into the river, to rejoin the +small caravel, and to proceed up the river, hoping to meet with a +more civilized people than had been seen in the almadias. In this way +we sailed up the river, one after the other, the small caravel +leading; and when we had got about four miles up, we perceived +ourselves to be followed by a number of <i>almadias</i> , without +knowing whence they came. On this, we tacked about, and bore down +towards the almadias, having first fortified ourselves in the best +manner we could, to defend us against their poisoned arrows, and made +every thing ready for battle, in case of need, though by no means +well provided with arms. Our order of sailing was now reversed, and +my ship was foremost in going down the river. We soon came to the +almadias, which separated into two divisions, having my ship between +them, when I had an opportunity to count their numbers, as they gave +over rowing, raised their oars, and gazed in wonder at our ship: +There were in all fifteen almadias of considerable length, having +from 130 to 150 negroes, all well made, of a good size, and very +black. They wore white cotton shirts, having white caps, like those +worn by the Germans, on their heads; but with a wing on each side, +and a feather in the middle, which I supposed to be a distinguishing +mark of their being soldiers. There stood a negro on the prow of each +almadia, having a round target, apparently of leather, on his arm; +and for some time they neither attacked us, nor we them. When they +saw the other caravels bearing down upon them, they dropped their +oars, and taking up their bows, sent a flight of arrows on board. +Seeing this attack, our ships discharged four pieces of cannon, at +them, and they were so stupified by the report, that they threw down +their bows, and stared about in amazement, at the effect which the +stones from the cannon made on the water around them. They continued +in this astonishment for some time; but seeing that the cannon ceased +to fire, they plucked up courage, and renewed the fight, advancing +within a stones throw of the ship. On this our sailors began to use +their cross-bows; and the first shot, which was made by the natural +son of the Genoese gentleman, hit a negro on the breast, who +instantly fell down dead. Those in the almadia where he fell, took up +the dart and gazed at it with wonder; yet they continued the attack +with great vigour, and were courageously opposed by our caravels, +insomuch that many of the Negroes were soon killed, without the loss +of one man on our side. The Negroes now changed their mode of attack, +and made a furious united attack on the stern of our smallest +caravel, which was both ill manned, and insufficiently armed. On +observing this, I brought up my ship to her assistance, and the other +large caravel doing the same, we placed the small one between us, and +we all vigorously plied our cannon and cross-bows against the +almadias, which were at last forced to retire. We now linked all the +three caravels together, and dropped one anchor, which was sufficient +for us all, as it was calm weather, and the current by no means +strong.</p> +<p>We next endeavoured to enter into some conversation with the +Negroes, and often hailed them by means of our interpreters. At +length one of the almadias drew near, and on being asked the reason +of their hostility to strangers, who came among them only to trade in +a friendly manner, as they had already done with the Negroes of the +kingdom of Senegal, and were desirous of being on the same friendly +terms with them, if they thought proper, and were come from a far +distant country, with presents for their king or lord, from the king +of Portugal, who was desirous of peace and friendship with them. Our +interpreters also entreated the Negroes to inform us what country we +were in, who was their king, and what was the name of the river; and +desired them to come freely on board, and take what goods they +pleased; adding, that they might make a return in any commodities +they thought proper, and in any quantities they pleased, or might +have our goods for nothing. To all this they made answer, "That they +had some intelligence of the Christians already, and of their +dealings with the Negroes of Senegal, who must be very wicked people +for entering into friendship with them; as they were well assured the +Christians were meneaters, who bought the Negroes only to devour +them, and, for this reason, they were resolved to have no +correspondence with them, except to destroy them, and then to send +their effects to their lord, who dwelt three days journey up the +country." They added, that the name of their country was Gambra, but +I have forgotten the name they gave the river[10]. At this time a +brisk breeze sprung up, and, as we now thoroughly knew the hostile +dispositions of the Negroes, we bore down upon their almadias; but +they fled to the shore, and we dropt down to the mouth of the +river.</p> +<blockquote>[10] From this it would appear, that Gambra or Gambia is +the name of the country, not of the river. Johnson says that the +natives always call it <i>Gee</i> , which merely signifies the +river.--Astl.</blockquote> +<p>While we remained off the mouth of this river, we only once saw +the north star in clear weather, and it was then so low as hardly to +appear above the height of a lance above the sea[11]. We likewise +observed, in about the same elevation, due south by the compass, a +constellation of six large bright stars, in the figure of a cross, in +this form: (Illustration)</p> +<blockquote>[11] The centre of the mouth of the Gambia is in lat. +13° 30' N.--E.</blockquote> +<p>We conjectured this to be the <i>southern chariot</i> , but could +not expect to observe the principal star, as we had not yet lost +sight of the north pole. In this place, on the <i>first</i> of July, +we found the night to be eleven hours and a half long, and the day +twelve hours and a half. The climate is always hot, and I was told, +that even the rain in the inland parts falls warm, in consequence of +the great heat of the air. It is true, that there is some difference +of the heat at different seasons, and when the heat is a little +diminished, the natives call it winter. The rains begin in July, and +continue till the end of October, and fall every day about noon; at +which time certain clouds arise in the N.E. by E. or E.N.E. which are +accompanied by prodigious thunder and lightning, and vast torrents of +rain. In this season, which is in the beginning of July, the Negroes +sow their grain, in the same manner with the people in Senegal. Their +provisions consist of millet, pulse, flesh and milk. There is not so +much dawn at break of day in this southern latitude as with us in +Italy; for, within half an hour after the darkness of the night +begins to dispel, the sun appears, and during all that dawn the +atmosphere is turbid, as if filled with smoke, and the moment the sun +appears this mist is dissipated. I could only account for this +phenomenon, by attributing it to the low and flat surface of this +country, which is destitute of mountains, and my companions were of a +similar opinion.</p> +<p>On holding a consultation among the commanders of the three +caravels, we came to a resolution of proceeding about an hundred +miles up the river, in hopes of meeting with a less ferocious, and +better disposed people in the interior, than those we had encountered +at the mouth of this river: But the sailors were impatient to return +home, without incurring any farther dangers, and unanimously and +loudly refused their consent to our determination, declaring that +they had already done enough for the present voyage. Upon this being +made known to us, and being well aware that seamen are of headstrong +and obstinate dispositions, we conceded to their clamours, and +steered next day for Cape Verd, on our return to Portugal[12].</p> +<blockquote>[12] It may be noticed, that during the whole of his +narrative, Cada Mosto constantly speaks of Spain, and the Spanish +language, as if forgetting that the ships and crews were +Portuguese.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION VIII.</p> +<p> <i>The Second Voyage of Cada Mosto, in 1456, to the coast of +Africa, in which the Cape de Verd Islands were Discovered</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] There is some difficulty respecting the date of this +second voyage. In the former, Cada Mosto sailed from Portugal in +March 1455. In the course of his proceedings, the month of November +is mentioned, and some subsequent transactions are said to have +happened in July, which, on this arrangement, must necessarily have +been of the year 1456. If, therefore, the dates of the former voyage +be accurate, the second ought to have been dated in +1457.--E.</blockquote> +<p>As I could say little or nothing about the condition of the +country of Gambia, on my return to Portugal, on account of being +obliged to leave it so suddenly; partly owing to the intractable and +fierce disposition of the natives, and partly through the perversity +of our sailors, who refused to proceed in exploring the river; the +Genoese gentleman, Antonio, who had been with me in the former +voyage, and I, resolved next season to fit out two caravels, in order +to return to the river Gambia, and Don Henry, who was much pleased +with our intentions, determined to send one of his caravels along +with us. Every thing being made ready for our voyage, we sailed from +Lagos, near Cape St Vincent, with a favourable wind, in the beginning +of May, and steered for the Canaries, which we made in a few days; +but, as the wind continued favourable, we did not touch there, and +continued our course, to the southward; and, as we were favoured by a +current setting to the S. W. we sailed on at a great rate. At last we +came in sight of Cape Branco, keeping well out at sea, and on the +following night we were assailed by a great storm from the S. W. +which occasioned us to steer W. by N. for two days and three nights, +in order to weather the tempest, rather than turn back. On the third +day, to our great joy and surprise, we descried land, being much +astonished to discover land in a quarter where no person could have +expected it[2]. Two men were immediately sent aloft, who cried out +that two large islands were in sight. This news was communicated +through the ships, to our great satisfaction, as we were sensible +these islands were unknown in Portugal. Judging it probable that +these islands might be inhabited, and eager to try our fortune, we +steered towards one of them, which we soon came up with, and sailed +round a part of it, till we found safe anchorage. The weather being +now much calmed, we sent our boat on shore, well manned and armed. +The men landed, and having examined some part of the island, brought +back word that they could meet with no signs of inhabitants +whatever.</p> +<blockquote>[2] This part of the narrative is involved in difficulty, +and most be erroneous. A storm from the S. W. off Cape Branco, almost +in lat. 21° N. and a N. W. course, could not possibly lead to the +discovery of the Cape Verd islands, almost six degrees farther south, +and at least six degrees farther west. This difficulty may be solved, +by supposing the storm from the N.E. and that the ships drove to the +S.W. from off Cape Branco.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Next morning, to clear up all doubts, I sent ten men to land on +the island, well armed with guns and cross-bows, whom I ordered to go +to the top of some mountains within sight, and to look from thence, +not only for people, but for more islands. These men executed my +commands, but found no appearance of any inhabitants. They found, +however, an incredible number of pigeons, which were so tame, being +strangers to man, that they readily allowed themselves to be caught, +and our people brought great numbers of them to the caravels. But, +what was of much more importance, they brought intelligence of having +discovered three other islands; one of which being to leeward, +towards the north, could not be seen from the ships, while the other +two lay to the south, all within sight of each other. These men +likewise noticed something resembling islands towards the west, but +at so great a distance that they could not be clearly distinguished, +neither did I think proper to sail in that direction, lest I should +lose time in visiting uninhabited islands, like this at which we had +touched. The fame of my discovery of these four islands, brought +other navigators afterwards to explore this group; who round them to +be ten in number, both large and small included, and altogether +uninhabited, except by pigeons and other birds, and having a fine +fishery[3].</p> +<blockquote>[3] This passage alludes to the voyage of Antonio de Noli +in 1462. And it may be remarked, that de Faria, who mentions the +discovery of these islands by Noli, takes no notice of the actual +discovery by Cada Mosto. --Astl.</blockquote> +<p>Leaving the first island, we came in sight of the other two, and +searched for an anchoring place near one of them, which was full of +trees. Discovering the mouth of a river, and being in want of water, +we came to anchor, and sent our boats on shore to supply our wants. +Some of our people went a little way up the river, where they found +some small lakes containing remarkably fine white salt, of which they +brought large quantities to the ships, laying in what store was +thought necessary, as we did likewise of water. We found here great +numbers of tortoises, or turtle, the shells of which were larger than +a target. The sailors cooked these into different dishes, as they had +done before in the gulf of Arguin, where these animals are found in +plenty, but not so large as here. Out of curiosity I eat some of the +flesh of these tortoises, which seemed very good, having a good smell +and taste, and was not inferior to veal. We salted a great number of +them, which proved a valuable addition to our stock of provisions +during the voyage. We caught likewise a prodigious quantity of fish, +both off the mouth of the river and in the stream; and, though we +knew not the kinds, they were large and well-flavoured. The mouth of +this river is a good arrow-shot across, and it is deep enough to +admit a vessel of 150 tons. We remained two days in this place for +refreshments, taking in a good stock of tortoises and fish, and large +quantities of pigeons, which we killed without number. To the first +island at which we anchored we gave the name of <i>Bona Vista</i> , as +being the first we got sight of; and to this other, which seemed the +largest of the four, the name of St Jago, having cast anchor there on +the day of St Philip and St James. Every thing being in readiness for +pursuing our voyage, we took our departure from these islands, and +shaped our course for Cape Verd. We arrived at <i>Spedegar</i> , and +keeping within sight of land, we came to a place named the <i>Two +Palms</i> , which is between Cape Verd and the river Senegal. Being +perfectly acquainted with the coast, we doubled the Cape next day, +and came once more to the river Gambia, into which we immediately +entered; and, finding no opposition from the Negroes or their +almadias, we sailed up the river, always by day, and continually +sounding. Such of the almadias as we saw on the river kept at a +distance, close to the banks of the river, and never ventured to +approach. About ten miles up the river we cast anchor on a Sunday +morning, at an island where one of our sailors was buried who had +died of a fever; and as his name happened to be Andrew, we called it +the island of St Andrew[4].</p> +<blockquote>[4] The editor of Astleys Collection considers this as +having been St Jameses island, which is about twenty miles up the +Gambia: But there is a small island near the northern bank, now +called Charles I. which exactly corresponds with the distance in the +text.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Leaving this island we proceeded up the river, followed by some of +the Negroes in their almadias, yet always keeping at a considerable +distance. Our interpreters often hailed them, and shewed them various +trinkets, which were offered for their acceptance, and endeavoured to +entice them to come near, by telling them that we were good-natured +civilized people, from whom they had nothing to fear. Wrought upon by +these representations, the Negroes at length approached, and came up +with my caravel; and at last one of them, who understood the language +of our interpreter, came on board. He was greatly surprized at every +thing he saw in and about the caravel, especially with the sails and +rigging, having no other idea of moving a vessel on the water but by +means of oars. He was no less amazed at our colour and dress, as his +nation mostly go stark naked, or with a single white cotton shirt as +their sole dress. We were exceedingly kind and attentive to this +Negro, and made him many presents of trinkets, and other things of +small value, with which he was much delighted. I asked him many +questions respecting the country, through our interpreter, and at +length learnt that we were in the country of Gambia, of which +Forosangoli was chief lord; and, by what we could learn from him, the +residence of Forosangoli was at the distance of nine or ten days +journey, in a direction between the south and the southwest. He said +that Forosangoli was tributary to the king of Melli, who is the great +emperor of the Negroes; that there were many inferior lords, who +dwelt near the river on both sides, and, if we pleased, he would +conduct us to the residence of one of these lords, named Battimansa, +and would endeavour to negociate a treaty of peace and friendship +between him and us. Being much pleased with this offer, we carried +this Negro along with us, and treated him with much attention; and, +sailing up the river, we came to the place where Battimansa resided, +which, in my opinion, was above forty miles from the mouth of the +river. In going up the river, into which several lesser rivers fall, +we sailed to the eastwards, and at the place where we came to anchor, +we found it much narrower than at the mouth, being not above a mile +in breadth, by our estimation[5]. On coming to this place, we sent +one of our interpreters and the native Negro to Battimansa, with a +present of a handsome garment, called an <i>alzimba</i> , made of +Moorish silk, in the form of a shirt; and they were desired to inform +him of the reason of our coming into his country, signifying, "That +the Christian king of Portugal had sent us thither, to enter into a +treaty of friendship and peace with him, and that if he had any call +for our commodities, our king would supply him with them every +year."</p> +<blockquote>[5] According to our best maps or charts of the Gambia, +this river is never less than four miles broad, and generally above +five, till we get near 100 miles up the river, to the reach which +encircles the Devils Point, where it still is two miles wide. It is +possible that the original journal of Cada Mosto may have had leagues +of three marine miles each, in which case the residence of Battimansa +may have been at or near the Devils Point, above 100 miles up the +river.--E.</blockquote> +<p>As soon as our messengers had discharged their commission, +Battimansa sent some of his Negroes to the caravel, with whom we +entered into friendship, and bartered several things for Negro slaves +and some gold; but gold was by no means to be had in any thing like +the plenty we expected, from the account given of this country by the +natives of Senegal, who, being themselves extremely poor, consider +that to be a large quantity which we think very trifling. The Negroes +value their gold as a very precious thing, even at a higher rate than +the Portuguese, yet we got it in barter very reasonably for things of +very small value. We continued here eleven days, during which the +caravels were continually resorted to by great numbers of Negroes +from both sides of the river, who came to see the novelties, and to +sell their goods, among which there were a few gold rings. Part of +their commodities consisted of cotton cloth and cotton yarn; some of +the pieces being all white, some striped blue and white, and others +again with red, blue, and white stripes, all very well wrought and +coloured. They likewise brought civet for sale, the skins of +civet-cats, monkies, large and small baboons of various sorts; and +these last being very plenty they sold them cheap, or for something +not exceeding ten <i>marquets</i> in value, for each; and the ounce of +civet for what was not worth more than forty or fifty marquets; not +that they sold their commodities by weight, but I judged the quantity +to be about an ounce. Other Negroes brought various sorts of fruit +for sale, among which were many small wild dates, which they seemed +to think much of, but which our people thought not good, as the taste +was different from those of Europe: As for me, I would not venture to +eat any of them, lest they might have given me the flux, or some +other distemper. Our ships were every day crowded with people of +different aspects and languages[6], and the natives were continually +going up and down the river from one place to another, both men and +women, in their almadias. They have no sails, and propel their +almadias entirely with oars, which they use on both sides, all the +rowers standing up. One man stands at the stern, who rows sometimes +on one side, sometimes on the other, to keep the almadia steady in +her course. They have no pins or row- locks to steady their oars, but +hold them fast with both hands; their oar being a pole, like a half +lance, seven feet and a half long, with a round board like a trencher +fastened to one end, and with these they row with great safety and +swiftness, in the mouths of their rivers, which are very numerous; +but they seldom go out to sea, or to any distance from their own +coasts, lest they should be taken by their neighbours and sold for +slaves.</p> +<blockquote>[6] Though this country will be amply described in other +voyages in our Collection, it may be proper to remark, that both +sides of the river Gambia are inhabited by a mixed population of +three nations, the Feloops, Foleys, and Mandingoes, each of whom have +their own separate villages interspersed. This population is divided +into many states, lordships, or little kingdoms; as Joalli, Barrah, +Kolar, Badibu, Barsalli, &c. on or near the northern bank; Kumbo, +Fonia, Kaen, Jagra, Yamini, &c. on the southern.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION IX.</p> +<p> <i>Some Account of the Manners and Customs on the Gambia, and of +the Elephant and Hippopotamus.</i> </p> +<p>It now remains for me to relate what I observed and was informed +of concerning this country, during my short stay. The religion of the +Negroes of Gambia consists of various kinds of idolatry; they place +great reliance on sorcery and other diabolical things, yet all +believe in God. There are many Mahometans among them, who trade to +many countries, yet are not settled in houses, because the natives +are ignorant[1]. They live very much in the same manner with the +natives of Senegal, and have the same kinds of provisions; but they +cultivate more sorts of rice. They eat dogs flesh, which I never +heard of being used anywhere else. They are clothed in cotton +garments, and have great abundance of cotton in their country, which +may be the reason of the Gambians not going naked, as those of +Senegal do, where cotton is very scarce. The women dress in the same +manner; and, when they are very young, take great delight in +delineating figures on their necks, breasts, and arms, with the point +of a hot needle, which are never obliterated, and which resemble the +flowers and ornaments which are wrought on silk handkerchiefs. The +country is excessively hot, and the heat increases as we go to the +south; besides which, we found it much hotter up the river than at +sea, owing to the immense number of trees with which the country +everywhere abounds. Some of these trees are of very great dimensions. +Near a spring where our sailors were in use to fill our water casks, +not far from the banks of the river, there grew an exceedingly large +tree, but its height was by no means proportional to its thickness; +for, though it measured seventeen cubits in girth near the ground, +its height, by estimation, was only twenty paces. This tree was +hollow, but the branches were very large, avid extended to a great +distance, forming a thick and ample shade. But there were many other +trees much larger than this, by which the richness and fertility of +the soil may be easily conceived; and the country is intersected by +numerous streams.</p> +<blockquote>[1] The meaning of this expression is obscure. Perhaps it +implies that their Mahometan teachers had no mosques, because the +Negroes were ignorant of the means and method of construction. The +knowledge of God among the northern Negroes was assuredly due +exclusively to the Mahometan missionaries.--E.</blockquote> +<p>There are many elephants in this country, but the natives are +ignorant of the art of taming these animals, as is practised in other +countries. One day, while we lay at anchor in the middle of the +river, we observed three elephants come out from the wood and walk by +the river side, on which we sent our boat with some of the people +towards them, but they immediately returned into the wood. These were +all I ever saw alive; but, sometime afterwards, Guumi-mensa[2], one +of the Negro lords, shewed me a dead young elephant, which he had +killed after a chase of two days. The Negroes hunt on foot in the +woods, using only arrows and assagays, or javelins, which are all +poisoned. When they hunt the elephant they conceal themselves behind +trees, and even sometimes mount to their tops, leaping from one tree +to another in pursuit of the elephant, which, being a large unweildy +animal, is often wounded in many places before it can turn round, or +place itself in a posture of defence; but, in an open field, no +person dare attack one, nor could even the swiftest escape from their +pursuit, as I have been informed by many of the Negroes. The teeth of +this dead elephant, which was shewn me by Guumi-Mensa, one of which +still remained in the jaw, did not exceed three spans long, which +distinctly shews that it was quite young in comparison of those whose +teeth are from ten to twelve spans in length; yet, small as it was +for an elephant, we computed that the weight of its carcass was equal +to five or six oxen. Guumi-Mensa made me a present of what part of +this elephant I liked best, and gave the remainder to his huntsmen to +feast on. Understanding that elephants flesh was eaten by the +Negroes, I had some both roasted and boiled, of which I tasted, that +I might be able to say that I had fed upon the flesh of an animal +which had never been eaten by any of my countrymen; but I found it +hard, and of an unpleasant relish. I brought one of the legs and a +part of the trunk on board our caravel, together with some of the +hair from its body, which was a span and a half long, of a black +colour, and very thick. On my return to Portugal, I presented this +hair to Don Henry, together with a part of the flesh salted up for +that express purpose, which he received with much satisfaction, as it +was the first of the kind that had been brought from the countries +that were discovered under his auspices. The foot of the elephant is +round, like that of a horse, but without hoofs; instead of which it +is covered by a very thick, hard, black skin, and defended by five +nails on the fore part, which are round and of the size of +a <i>grossone</i> [3]. Though young, the foot of this elephant measured +a span and a half in diameter. From the same Negro lord I received +the foot of a full-grown elephant, the sole of which was three spans +and an inch in diameter; which, together with a tooth of twelve spans +long, I presented to Don Henry on my return, who sent it afterwards +as a great curiosity to the Dutchess of Burgundy.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Called Gnumi-Mensa in Grynaeus. According to Jobson, +Mensa, or Mansa, signifies a king in the Mandingo +language.--Astl.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] A Venetian silver coin, not exceeding a silver +penny.--Astl.</blockquote> +<p>In the river Gambia, and in other rivers on this coast, besides +the <i>Calcatrici</i> [4] and other animals, there is one called +the <i>river horse</i> , or hippopotamus, of the same nature almost +with the sea cow, and which lives both on land and in the water. This +animal is as large in the body as a cow, with very short legs and +cloven feet, having a large head like that of a horse, and two huge +teeth like the tusks of a wild boar, some of which I have seen +upwards of two spans long. This animal, when it gets out of the +river, walks on the land like any other fourfooted beast; and, so far +as I know, was never before discovered by any Christian traveller, +except perhaps in the Nile. We saw likewise a number of bats, or +rather owls, upwards of three spans long; and many other birds, quite +different from those of our country, both in appearance and taste, +yet very good to eat.</p> +<blockquote>[4] This animal is nowhere explained. Perhaps the +crocodile or alligator.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION X.</p> +<p> <i>Continuation of the Voyage from the Gambia to the river +Kasa-Mansa, Cape Roxo, the rivers of St Ann and St Domingo, and the +Rio Grande.</i> </p> +<p>Having continued eleven days in the river Gambia, and many of our +people becoming affected by acute fevers, we dropt down the river on +the evening of the eleventh day, departing from the country of +Batti-Mansa[1], and got out of the river in a few days, so stocked +with commodities as to encourage us to proceed farther; and indeed, +having been so far successful, and having a plentiful supply of +provisions, and every thing necessary for prosecuting the voyage, we +considered as incumbent on us to attempt some farther discoveries +towards the south. We accordingly steered southwards with a +favourable wind; but finding the land to run a considerable way to +the S.S.W. from the mouth of the Gambia, to a certain point which we +took for a cape[2], we stood out to the west to gain the open sea, +the whole coast to the south of the Gambia being low, and covered +with trees to the waters edge. On gaining an offing, we found that +the beforementioned point was no actual cape or promontory, as the +shore appeared perfectly straight on the other side; yet we kept at +some distance out to sea, as we observed breakers for several miles +out to sea[3]. On this account we had to proceed with great caution, +keeping always two men at the head of the ship, and one in the +main-top, to look out for shoals and breakers; and as a farther +precaution, we sailed only during the day, and came to anchor every +night. In this cautious progress, our caravels sailed always one +before the other, having fixed the order of sailing by lot, and +changed the leader every day, in order to avoid all disputes.</p> +<blockquote>[1] At this place Grynaeus calls him Batrinense; though +he had named him rightly Bati-mansa before.--Astl.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] This is now called Cape St Mary.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] This seems to allude to what is now called Bald Cape, +about twenty miles south from Cape St Mary, and stretching somewhat +farther west; from which there extends breakers or sunken rocks a +considerable distance from the land.--E.</blockquote> +<p>At the end of two days sail in this manner, always in sight of +land, we discovered on the third day the mouth of a river about half +a mile wide[4], and towards evening we observed a little gulf or +inlet, which we supposed might be the entrance of another river; but +as it grew late, we came to anchor for the night. Next morning we +sailed into this gulf, and found that it was the mouth of a large +river, not a great deal less in my opinion than the Gambia, and both +its banks were full of very beautiful tall trees. We cast anchor +within the mouth of this river, and agreed to send two armed boats on +shore with our interpreters to get intelligence respecting the +country, according to our usual practice. This was done accordingly, +and our interpreters, brought back word that the river was called +Kasamansa, from a Negro lord of that name who resided at a place +about thirty miles up the river; but who was absent from his +residence, on a warlike expedition against the lord of a neighbouring +territory.</p> +<blockquote>[4] Between the mouth of the Gambia and that of the +Casamansa, there are three inlets, which appear to be smaller mouths +of the latter river. The most northern of these is named St Peter, +the most southerly Oyster river; the intermediate one has no +name.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On receiving this intelligence, we sailed from this river next +day, without attempting any traffic with the natives. This river of +Kasamansa is twenty-five leagues, or 100 miles to the south of the +Gambia[5]. Standing on about twenty-five miles farther, we came to a +cape which is a little more elevated than the rest of the coast, and +as its front had a red colour, we named it Cape <i>Roxo</i> , +or <i>Rosso</i> . Proceeding forwards, we came to the mouth of a pretty +large river about a crossbow-shot wide, which we did not enter, but +to which we gave the name of the river of St Ann. Farther on still, +we came to the mouth of another river, not less than the former, +which we named St Dominic, or St Domingo[7]; distant from Cape Rosso, +by our estimation, between fifty-five and sixty miles. In another +days sailing, we came to a very large river, which at first appeared +to be a gulf, and was judged to be about twenty miles in breadth; but +we could observe the beautiful trees on the south side, and it took +us a considerable time to sail across to that side. On getting over +to that side, we observed several islands in the sea, and as we +wished to procure some intelligence concerning the country, we came +to an anchor. Next morning two almadias came off to us from the land, +one of which was as long as a caravel, and carried about thirty +hands; the other was smaller, and was manned by sixteen Negroes. They +came towards us with great eagerness; and, not knowing what might be +their design, we took to our arms and waited their approach. As they +drew near, they fixed a white cloth to the end of an oar, which they +held up as a signal of peace, and we answered them in a similar +manner. The Negroes then came alongside of our ships, the largest of +the almadias coming up to the caravel in which I was. They gazed at +every thing they saw, examining the form of the ship, the masts, +yards, sails, and rigging with much attention, and they seemed +astonished at seeing the white colour of our people. Our interpreters +spoke to them, in order to learn the name of the country, but could +not understand a word of their language, which was a great +mortification to us, as we were obliged to leave the place without +getting any intelligence; but we purchased a few gold rings from one +of the Negroes, agreeing about the price by signs.</p> +<blockquote>[5] The actual distance is barely a degree of latitude, +or less than seventy English miles. Cada Mosto probably estimated by +the log, the more circuitous track by sea.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] Cada Mosto does not mention the remarkable change +which takes place here in the direction of the coast. From the Gambia +to Cape Rosso, the coast runs direct south; after which its direction +is E.S.E. to the mouth of the river St Ann.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] Called in modern charts, Rio S. +Dominica.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Finding ourselves in a country where our interpreters were of no +use, and considering therefore that it would be to no purpose for us +to proceed any farther, we determined to return. We stayed two days +in the mouth of this large river, which we therefore named Rio +Grande[8], and where we found the north pole very low[9]. In this +place we found great irregularity in the tides; for, whereas at +Venice, and all other places in Europe, the flux and reflux are each +of six hours continuance, the tide here only flows four hours, and +ebbs eight, and the violence of the flowing tide is quite incredible, +insomuch that we had great difficulty to stem it with three anchors +a-head. Nay, such was its impetuosity, that we were sometimes obliged +to hoist our sails, and even then it exceeded the force of the +wind.</p> +<blockquote>[8] According to de Faria, Rio Grande was discovered by +Nunez Tristan in 1447, nine years before it was visited by Cada +Mosto.--Astl.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[9] Cada Mosto is exceedingly superficial in his account +of the Rio Grande; and it even seems dubious if he ever saw or +entered this river, as he appears to have mistaken the navigable +channel between the main and the shoals of the Rio Grande for the +river itself; which channel extends above 150 English miles, from the +island of Bulam in the E.S.E. to the open sea in the W.N.W. This +channel agrees with his description, in being twenty miles wide, +whereas the real Rio Grande is greatly smaller than the +Gambia.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Taking our departure from the mouth of this vast river, on our way +back to Portugal, we directed our course to two large islands and +some small ones, which lay about thirty miles distance from the +continent, which we found quite low, yet full of large and beautiful +green trees, and inhabited by Negroes[10]. Encountering here the same +difficulty of intercourse, for want of knowing their language, we +made no stop, but took our departure for Portugal, where we arrived +in safety.</p> +<blockquote>[10] These may be the island of Waring and the Marsh +islands, at the north-western entry of the channel of the Rio Grande, +forming part of the Bissagos islands.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION XI.</p> +<p> <i>The Voyage of Piedro de Cintra to Sierra Leona, and the +Windward coast of Guinea; written by Alvise da Cada Mosto.</i> </p> +<p>The two voyages to the coast of Africa in which Cada Mosto was +engaged, and which have, been narrated in the foregoing Sections of +this Chapter, were followed by others; and, after the death of Don +Henry, two armed caravels were sent out upon discovery by orders from +the king of Portugal, under the command of Piedro de Cintra, one of +the gentlemen of his household, with injunctions to proceed farther +along the coast of the Negroes than had hitherto been effected, and +to prosecute new discoveries. In this expedition, Piedro de Cintra +was accompanied by a young Portuguese who had formerly been clerk to +Cada Mosto in his two voyages; and who, on the return of the +expedition to Lagos, came to the house of his former employer, who +then continued to reside at Lagos, and gave him an account of the +discoveries which had been made in this new voyage, and the names of +all the places which had been touched at by Piedro de Cintra, +beginning from the Rio Grande, the extreme point of the former +voyage[1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] For this exordium or introduction, we are indebted to +the editor of Astley's Collection of Voyages and Travels, said to +have been a Mr John Green. The infant Don Henry of Portugal died in +1463; so that there must have been an interval of six or seven years +between the second voyage of Cada Mosto and this of Piedro de Cintra: +Though de Faria seems to put this voyage as having been executed +before the death of that excellent prince, yet Cada Mosto, who then +actually resided at Lagos, could not be mistaken is this important +particular.-- Astl.</blockquote> +<p>De Cintra first went to the two large inhabited islands at the +mouth of the Rio Grande which I had discovered in my second voyage, +where he landed, and ordered his interpreters to make the usual +inquiries at the inhabitants; but they could not make themselves +understood, nor could they understand the language of the natives. +Going therefore into the interior, they found the habitations of the +Negroes to consist of poor thatched cabins, in some of which they +found wooden idols, which were worshipped by the Negroes. Being +unable to procure any information in this place, Cintra proceeded, in +his voyage along the coast, and came to the mouth of a large river +between three and four miles wide, which he called Besegue, from a +lord of that name who dwelt near its mouth, and which he reckoned to +be about forty miles from the mouth of the Rio Grande[2]. Proceeding +about 140 miles from the river Besegue, along a very hilly coast; +clothed with high trees, and having a very beautiful appearance, they +came to a cape to which they gave the name of Verga[3]. Continuing +along the coast, they fell in with another cape, which, in the +opinion of all the seamen, was the highest they had ever seen, having +a sharp conical height in the middle like a diamond, yet entirely +covered with beautiful green trees. After the name of the fortress of +Sagres, which was built by the deceased Don Henry on Cape St Vincent, +the Portuguese named this point Cape Sagres of Guinea. According to +the account of the Sailors, the inhabitants of this coast are +idolaters, worshipping wooden images in the shape of men, before +which they make offerings of victuals as often as they eat or drink. +These people are more of a tawny colour than black, having marks on +their faces and bodies made with hot irons. They go almost entirely +naked, except that they wear pieces of the bark of trees before them. +They have no arms, as there is no iron in their country. They live on +rice, millet, beans, and kidney beans, larger than ours; and have +also beef and goats flesh, but not in any great abundance. Near to +Cape Sagres there are several very small uninhabited islands.</p> +<blockquote>[2] In a note to the second voyage of Cada Mosto, it has +been already noticed that he seems to have given the name of Rio +Grande to the channel between the Bissagos islands, or shoals of the +Rio Grande and the Main. This river Besegue, may possibly be the +strait or channel which divides the island named particularly +Bissagos, or more properly Bissao, from that of Bassis or Bussi. Yet, +this river Besegue may even have been that now called Rio Grande, in +which, about twenty-four leagues above its mouth, there is an island +called Bissaghe.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] It is strange that the Rio de Nuno, close by this +cape, the estuary of which is not less than seven or eight miles +wide, should be here omitted; but the present voyage is very +superficially narrated throughout.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The inhabitants of this river have large almadias, carrying from +thirty to forty men, who row standing, without having their oars +fixed to any thing, as formerly noticed. They have their ears pierced +with many holes, in which they wear a variety of gold rings. Both men +and women have also a hole through the cartilage of the nose, in +which they wear a gold ring, just like that of iron in the noses of +our buffalos, which they take out when eating. The ladies belonging +to the kings and great men, by way of extraordinary grandeur, have +gold rings on other parts of their body, which decorum prevents us +from particularizing.</p> +<p>Passing Cape Sagres, they sailed about forty miles farther along +the coast, and came to the Rio de San Vincents, which is about four +miles wide; and about five miles farther they found another, which +they called Rio Verde, larger at the mouth than the former[5]. Both +of these rivers were so named by the sailors in the caravels. About +twenty-four miles beyond the Rio Verde, they came to another cape +which they called <i>Cape Liedo</i> , signifying the <i>cheerful</i> , +because of the beautifully verdant country in its neighbourhood[6]. +From Cape Liedo there extends a large mountain for about fifty miles +along the coast, all of which is very high, and covered with tall +verdant trees. At the end of this mountain, and about eight miles +from the shore, there are three small islands, the largest of which +does not exceed ten or twelve miles in circumference. To these the +sailors gave the name of <i>Saluezze</i> [7]; and they named the +mountain <i>Sierra Leona</i> , or the Lion Mountain, on account of the +continual roaring of thunder on its summit, which is always enveloped +in clouds.</p> +<blockquote>[4] The text is here obviously defective, as no river is +mentioned before; but the allusion must be to the river Pongo, +Pongue, or Pougue, at the mouth of which Cape Sagres is situated; +indeed that cape seems to be formed by one of the islands off the +mouth of the river.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] There are a number of small rivers on the coast, +between Cape Sagres and Cape Tagrin, such as Tofali, Dania, Buria, +Berrea, Tanna, Pogone, Cagrance, dos Casas; but our modern charts +have none named as in the text on this part of the +coast.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] This is now called Cape Tagrin, and forms the +northern point at the entrance of the Sierra Leone river, otherwise +called the Mitomba or Tagrin river. The southern point is named Cape +Sierra Leone; and in some maps is likewise named Liedo very +improperly. It is necessary to distinguish carefully between +the <i>Cape</i> of Sierra Leone, and the mountainous ridge of the same +name, which appears to extend a considerable way along the coast to +the S. E. near fifty miles, to the river Kates, or Sa. Ma. della +Neue. But, from the baldness of the narrative, there is great +difficulty in tracing out this voyage.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] These are now called Bananas islands, in lat. 8° +N.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Proceeding beyond Sierra Leona, the coast was quite low, and the +shore full of sand banks running out into the sea. About thirty miles +from the southern extremity of the mountain, they found a river near +three miles wide at the entrance, and because the water had a red +colour, they called it Rio Roxo[8]. And farther on they found a cape, +likewise of a red colour, which they named Cape Roxo[9]. And they +gave the same name of Roxo to a small uninhabited island, about ten +miles off at sea, where the north polar star seemed only the height +of a man above the horizon. Beyond Cape Roxo, the sea forms a gulf, +about the middle of which there enters a river, which the seamen +called St Mary del Nievos, or of the snow, as having been discovered +on the day of that Saint. On the other side of the river there is a +cape, with an island close beside it[10]. This gulf is full of sand +banks, running ten or twelve miles along the coast, on which the sea +breaks with considerable violence, and has a strong current both in +the ebb and flow of the tide; and the little island just mentioned is +named <i>Scauni</i> , on account of these sand banks. Twenty-four +miles distant from this river is a large cape called St Ann, having +been discovered on the day of that saint; and the whole coast between +is low, with very shallow water. Twenty-four miles beyond this cape +is the river of <i>Palms</i> , so named from the abundance of these +trees which were seen there. The mouth of this river, though of +sufficient width, is so full of shoals; and sand banks as to render +its entrance very dangerous. About seventy miles farther on, there is +another small river called <i>Rio de Fumi</i> , or Smoke River; so +named, because at the time of its discovery, they saw nothing but +smoke along this coast, made by the Negroes[11]. Beyond this river, +about twenty-four miles, there is a cape which runs a great way out +into the sea, on which stands a high mountain, on which account it +was called <i>Cabo del Monte</i> , or Cape Mount About sixty miles +still farther on, to the S. E. there is another and smaller cape, on +which is a small mountain or hill, which was named +Cape <i>Cortese</i> , or <i>Misurado</i> . The first night after their +arrival at this place, the voyagers saw many fires among the trees, +made by the Negroes on seeing the ships, as they had never seen such +objects before.</p> +<blockquote>[8] Perhaps the Camaranca.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[9] Probably that now called Tassa Point, or Cabo de S. +Anna.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[10] This account seems again to refer to the river +Camaranca and Tassa Point; otherwise called Cape St Ann; yet this +cape is brought in immediately afterwards. Indeed this voyage is +inextricably confused, probably incorrect or +corrupt.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[11] The large island of Sherbro, with Sherbro Strand and +Shoals, a very prominent feature of this part of the African coast, +is here entirely overlooked; unless we suppose de Cintra to have gone +on the outside of that island, considering the sound as a river, and +naming the N. W. point of Sherbro island Cape St +Ann.--E.</blockquote> +<p>About sixteen miles beyond Cape Misurado, there is a large forest +of trees close to the shore, to which they gave the name of St Mary's +Grove. The caravels came to anchor beyond this wood, and several +almadias came off from the shore towards them. There were two or +three naked negroes in each, having sharp pointed sticks in their +hands, which our seamen supposed to be darts; some of them had small +knives, and they had only two targets and three bows among them all. +These Negroes, had their ears and noses pierced, from which hung some +strange ornaments resembling human teeth. The interpreters spoke to +them, but could not understand their language. Three of these Negroes +ventured on board one of the caravels, one of whom was detained by +the Portuguese, and the other two allowed to go away; for Cintra had +been ordered by the king, in case of discovering any country where +the interpreters did not understand the language, that he was to +bring away one of the natives either by force or fair means, that he +might be able to give an account of his country, either by some of +the Negroes in Portugal happening to understand his language, or +after he had acquired the Portuguese.</p> +<p>Piedro de Cintra, having determined to proceed no farther, +returned back to Portugal from Cape Misarado, to which he had traced +the coast of Africa from the Rio Grande. Upon his return, this negro +who had been detained off Cape Misurado, was examined by several +Negroes, and at length was understood by a Negress who belonged to an +inhabitant of Lisbon; not indeed by his own proper language, but by +means of another which was known to them both. Whatever intelligence +may have been procured on this occasion, was not made public, except +that there were unicorns in his country. After this Negro had been +kept for some months in Lisbon, and had been shewn many of the +curiosities of Portugal, the king ordered him to be supplied with +clothes, and sent him back in a caravel to his own country. But from +that coast no other ship had arrived before my departure, which was +on the first of February 1463[12].</p> +<blockquote>[12] We have already seen that Don Henry died in this +year, which must, therefore, be here an error of the press, either in +the original publication by Cada Mosto, or in some of the after +editions.--E.</blockquote> +<h2><a name="chapter2-5" id="chapter2-5">CHAPTER V.</a></h2> +<p><b> <i>Continuation of the Portuguese discoveries along the coast +of Africa, from the death of Don Henry in 1463, to the discovery of +the Cape of Good Hope in 1486</i> </b>[1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Astley, I. 15. Clarke, I. 290. Purchas, I. Harris, I. +664.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION I.</p> +<p> <i>Progress of Discovery from Cape Verga to Cape St Catherine; +from the Death of Don Henry to that of King Alphonzo V</i> .</p> +<p>After the decease of Don Henry, the illustrious father of maritime +discovery, the progress of the Portuguese along the coast of Africa +received a considerable check, as the military ardour of Alphonzo the +Fifth was principally directed to the support of his pretensions to +the throne of Castile, the circumstances of which are unconnected +with the plan of this work. King Alphonzo was not however entirely +inattentive to the trade for gold and slaves, which his illustrious +uncle Don Henry had commenced with that part of Africa which is now +called Guinea. The origin of this name of Guinea, or <i>Ghinney</i> , +is unknown. It is not in use among the natives, and seems to have +been imposed by the Portuguese from the appellation +of <i>Ghenchoa</i> , given to a country on the south side of the +Senegal, us first mentioned by Leo and afterwards by Marmol. Ever +since the year 1453, as already mentioned, considerable importations +of gold had been made to Portugal from the coast of Africa; but +little or no progress had been made in extending the discoveries +farther south, for some time previous to the decease of Don Henry. In +1470, King Alphonzo sailed with a considerable army, in a fleet of +above 300 ships, and carried the strong fort of <i>Arzila</i> on the +Atlantic coast of Africa, a little way to the south of the Straits of +Gibraltar. But of his military exploits in Africa, from which he +acquired the appellation of <i>Africanus</i> , and assumed the +additional title of <i>Lord of the coasts on both seas</i> , our +present purpose does not call for any recital. In 1479, the disputes +between the crowns of Portugal and Castile were compromised by a +treaty entered into by Alphonzo V. king of Portugal, and Ferdinand +king of Castile; by which the trade of Guinea, and the navigation of +its coast, with the proposed conquest of <i>Fez</i> , were guaranteed +to Portugal, and the Canary islands were annexed to the crown of +Castile.</p> +<p>From the want of any accurate history of the progress of the +Portuguese discoveries, it is utterly impossible to determine the +dates or circumstances of many of the progressive discoveries along +the western coast of Africa, and of its islands. In 1469, Alphonzo +farmed the Guinea trade for five years to Fernando Gomez, for the +yearly rent of 500 ducats, or about 138 pounds; taking, him bound at +the same time, to extend the discoveries for 500 leagues to the +southwards during the period of his exclusive privilege. In 1471, +according to Marmol, Juan de Santareu and Pedro de Escobar, +discovered the <i>Oro de la Mina</i> , or the <i>Gold coast</i> ; and +advancing still farther, under the guidance of two experienced +pilots, Martin Fernandez and Alvaro Esteves, they discovered <i>Cabo +Catalina</i> , or Cape St Catherine, in lat. 1° 40' S. This +promontory, which is thirty-one leagues to the south of Cabo de Lope +Gonzales, derived its name from the day of the saint on which it was +first seen, and forms the northern boundary of the great kingdom of +Congo. The discovery of this cape is assigned by some writers to +Sequiera, a knight belonging to the royal household.</p> +<p>The celebrated Portuguese historian, Emanuel de Faria, in +his <i>Asia Portuguesa</i> , has recorded all the Portuguese voyages, +from their first attempts under Don Henry, to their developement of +China and Japan, and has even left an account of all the ships that +sailed from Lisbon for Africa and Asia, down to the year 1600; but +was unable to ascertain the dates of many important events. Neither +he nor De Barros have been able to remove the uncertainty respecting +the first discovery of the island of St Thomas on the coast of +Africa, the south end of which touches the equinoctial. During the +remainder of the reign of Alphonzo, the line of coast, from Cape +Verga in lat. 10° N. to Cape St Catherine in 1° 40' S. was +much frequented by the Portuguese. Of this coast an ample account has +been given by Dapper and Barbot, chiefly following a tract published +by Gotard Artus of Dantzick, which is to be found in De Bry's +Collection, and that of David von Nyendael and others. This was the +work of a Dutch navigator, which was first translated in to German, +and thence by Artus into Latin. But our peculiar department is +confined to actual voyages and travels, and the progress of +discovery; and it would both much exceed our proper limits, and would +be an entire deviation from our plan of arrangement, to admit +lengthened geographical and topographical disquisitions; which, so +far as they are at all admissible, must be reserved for the more +particular voyages and travels, after those of general discovery have +been discussed.</p> +<p>There are four principal islands in the Gulf of Guinea, or Bight +of Biafra, as it is usually called by English navigators, Ferdinand +Poo, Princes isle, St Thomas, and Annobon, the discovery of which +have been related as follows by Barbot, and his account seems the +most probable[2]. Fernando Lopez discovered the first of these in +1471, in lat. 3° 40' N. giving it the name of <i>Ilha formosa</i> , +or the Beautiful Island, which was afterwards changed to that +of <i>Fernando Poo</i> , which it still retains. In an account of the +kingdom of Congo, in Churchill's Collection, viii. 527, more properly +named the Oxford Collection, or that of Osborne, v. 2. This island, +and a river on the coast of the continent of Africa, directly east, +now called Cameroon River, are said to have taken their names of +Fernando Poo from their first discoverer. Some writers assign the +discovery of these four islands, and that of St Matthew, to Fernando +Gomez, who formed the Guinea trade. Perhaps they were discovered +under his auspices, by the navigators whom he employed. This island +is composed of very high land, easily seen at a great distance, and +the Portuguese had formerly sugar plantations upon it. The <i>Ilha do +Principe</i> , or Princes Island, in lat. 1° 30' N. was either +discovered by Fernando Lopez, or by Santaren and Escobar, about the +same period, and probably received its name in honour of the +illustrious prince, Don Henry. This island is described as consisting +of high table mountains, pyramidal at their bases, and visible at the +distance of twenty leagues; being about nine leagues long by five +leagues broad. It is said to abound in oranges, lemons, bananas, +cocoa-nuts, sugar-canes, rice, many species of sallad herbs, and to +be susceptible of producing the European grains. The mandioca, or +root of the cassada plant, is generally used for bread, of which the +juice while raw is said to be a virulent poison; while its meal, or +rasped root, after the malignant juice is carefully pressed out, is +used for bread. The inhabitants also, have sheep, hogs, goats, and an +immense number of poultry; but these have probably been introduced by +the Portuguese.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Clarke, I. 295.</blockquote> +<p>The <i>Ilha de San Thome</i> , or island of St Thomas, which is said +to have received its name from the saint to whom the chapel of the +great monastery of <i>Thomar</i> is dedicated, and to which all the +African discoveries are subjected in spirituals, has its southern +extremity almost directly under the equinoctial, and is a very high +land of an oval shape, about fifteen leagues in breadth, by twelve +leagues long.</p> +<p>The most southerly of these islands, in lat. 1° 30' S. now +called Annobon, was originally named Ilha d'Anno Bueno, or Island of +the Happy Year, having been discovered by Pedro d'Escovar, on the +first day of the year 1472. At a distance, this island has the +appearance of a single high mountain, and is almost always topt with +mist. It extends about five leagues from north to south, or rather +from N. N. W. to S. S. E. and is about four leagues broad, being +environed by several rocks and shoals. It has several fertile +vallies, which produce maize, rice, millet, potatoes, yams, bananas, +pine-apples, citrons, oranges, lemons, figs, and tamarinds, and a +sort of small nuts called by the French <i>noix de medicine</i> , or +physic nuts[3]. It also furnishes oxen, hogs, and sheep, with +abundance of fish and poultry; and its cotton is accounted +excellent.</p> +<blockquote>[3] These may possibly be the nuts of the Ricinus Palma +Christi, from which the castor oil is extracted.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Including the voyages of Cada Mosto and Pedro de Cintra, which +have been already detailed, as possibly within the period which +elapsed between the death of Don Henry in 1463, and King Alphonzo, +which latter event took place on the 28th August 1481, and the +detached fragments of discovery related in the present Section, we +have been only able to trace a faint outline of the uncertain +progress of Portuguese discovery during that period of eighteen +years, extending, as already mentioned, to Cape St Catherine and the +island of Annobon. A considerable advance, therefore, had been made +since the lamented death of the illustrious Don Henry; which +comprehended the whole coast of Guinea, with its two gulfs, usually +named the <i>Bights</i> of Benin and Biafra, with the adjacent +islands, and extending to the northern frontier of the kingdom of +Congo[4]. If the following assertion of de Barros could be relied on, +we might conclude that some nameless Portuguese navigators had +crossed the line even before the death of Don Henry; but the high +probability is, that the naval pupils of that illustrious prince +continued to use his impress upon their discoveries, long after his +decease, and that the limits of discovery in his time was confined to +Cape Vergas. Some Castilians, sailing under the command of Garcia de +Loaysa, a knight of Malta, landed in 1525 on the island of St +Matthew, in two degrees of southern latitude[5]. They here observed +that it had been formerly visited by the Portuguese, as they found an +inscription on the bark of a tree, implying that they had been there +eighty-seven years before[6]. It also bore the usual motto of that +prince, <i>talent de bien faire</i> .</p> +<blockquote>[4] Strictly speaking the northern limits of Loango, one +of the divisions of the extensive kingdom of Congo, is at the Sette +river, ten leagues S.S. E. from Cape St Catherine.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] There is no island of that name in this position; so +that the island of St Matthew of de Barros must refer to +Annobon.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] These dates would throw back the discovery of this +island, and the passage of the line by the mariners of Don Henry, to +the year 1438, at a time when they had not reached the latitude of +25° N. which is quite absurd.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the paucity of authentic information respecting these +discoveries, it seems proper to insert the following abstract of the +journal of a Portuguese pilot to the island of St Thomas, as inserted +by Ramusio, previous to the voyage of Vasco de Gama, but of uncertain +date; although, in the opinion of the ingenious author of the +Progress of Maritime Discover, this voyage seems to have been +performed between the years 1520 and 1540. In this, state of +uncertainty, it is therefore made a section by itself, detached in +some measure from the regular series of the Portuguese +discoveries.</p> +<p>SECTION II.</p> +<p>Voyage of a Portuguese Pilot from Lisbon to the Island of St +Thomas[1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Ramusio. Clarke I. 298. This voyage was communicated +by the relator to Count Raimond della Torre, a nobleman of +Verona.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>Before I left Venice, I was requested by letter from Signior +Hieronimo Fracastro of Verona, that, on my arrival at Conde, I would +send, him an account of my voyage to San Thome, to which island our +ships often sail for cargoes of sugar. The passage of the equinoctial +line, under which that island, is situated, appeared to that +gentleman so extraordinary a circumstance as to merit the attention +of men of science; and you likewise made me a similar request. I +began, therefore, immediately after my return, to draw up an account +of my voyage, from those notes which we pilots usual keep of all +occurrences, and I compared it in my progress with the journals of +some friends who had formerly made the same voyage. When I afterwards +attentively perused my manuscript, it did not appear to me worthy of +being communicated to a gentleman of such scientific character as +Signor Hieronimo, whose talents I had duly appreciated, by the +perusal of his publications, which I received from you before my +departure from Venice. I therefore laid my manuscript aside, not +wishing that any one might peruse it; but as you have again urged the +performance of my promise, I now anxiously obey a request, which, as +coming from you, I must always consider a command. Apprehensive, +likewise, of appearing forgetful of your polite attentions, I prefer +the danger of exposing my ignorance, to the possibility of being +charged with ingratitude or want of attention. Being a sailor, and +unused to composition, I pretend to little more than copying the +remarks of those who have sailed from our continent +to <i>Ethiopia</i> , without attempting to reduce my narrative into +lucid order, or to embellish it with fine writing. You will therefore +have the goodness to destroy this account, after its perusal, that +the errors I have committed, by compliance with your commands, may +not draw upon me the imputation of presumption.</p> +<p>The Portuguese ships which sail to the island of St Thomas from +Lisbon, for cargoes of sugar, usually put to sea in February, though +some vessels make this voyage at every period of the year. Their +course is S.S.W. until they reach the Canary Islands; after which +they steer for the island of Palmas, which is opposite to Cape +Bojador on the coast of Africa, and is about ninety leagues from the +kingdom of Castile. This island has plenty of provisions, and abounds +in wine and sugar. The north- west wind prevails most, and a great +sea rages continually on its coast, particularly in the month of +December[2].</p> +<blockquote>[2] A description of the islands of Cape Verd, and an +account of the supply of salt usually taken on board by the +Portuguese ships at the island of Sal, for the purpose of laying in a +sea store of salt fish, is here omitted.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>If the ships which are bound for the island of St Thomas find it +necessary to obtain a quantity of salt after having taken on board a +sufficient supply at the island of <i>Sal</i> , they steer for the +coast of Africa at the Rio del Oro; and, if they have calm weather +and a smooth sea; they catch as many fish in four hours, with hooks +and lines, as may suffice for all their wants during the remainder of +the voyage. But, if the weather is unfavourable for fishing at the +Rio del Oro, they proceed along the coast to Cape Branco; and thence +along the coast to the island of Arguin. The principal sorts of fish +on this coast are <i>pagros</i> , called <i>albani</i> by the +Venetians; likewise <i>corvi</i> and <i>oneros</i> , which latter are +only a larger and darker-coloured species of <i>pagros</i> . As soon as +taken, the fish are opened and salted, and serve as an excellent +supply of provisions to navigators. All the coast of Africa, from +Cape Bojador, otherwise called <i>Cabo della Volta</i> , as far as Cape +Branco and even to Arguin, is low and sandy. At Arguin, which is +inhabited by Moors and Negroes, and which is situated on the confines +between these two nations, there is a capacious harbour, and a castle +belonging to our king of Portugal, in which some Portuguese always +reside with the royal agent.</p> +<p>On leaving the island of Sal, our ships steer next for St Jago, +another of the Cape Verd islands. This island is situated +in <i>fifteen degrees on the equinoctial and thirty leagues towards +the south</i> [3].It is seventeen leagues long, and has a city on the +coast, with a good harbour called <i>Ribiera Grande</i> , or the Great +River, now St Jago. From two high mountains, one on each side, a +large river of fresh water flows into the harbour; and, from its +source, full two leagues above the city, its banks are lined on each +side with gardens, having fine groves of oranges, cedars, +pomegranates, several sorts of figs, and the cocoa-nut palm, which +has been long planted on this island. It produces all kinds of +vegetables in great abundance and perfection; but they do not afford +good seeds, so that it is necessary to procure these every year from +Europe. The city is on the south coast of the island, and is well +built of stone, being inhabited by about 500 families of distinction, +Portuguese and Castilians. Its government is entrusted to a +corregidor or governor, appointed by the king of Portugal; and two +judges are chosen annually, one for the determination of naval and +maritime causes, and the other for regulating the police. This island +is very mountainous, and is very barren in many parts, which are +entirely destitute of wood; but its vallies are fertile and well +cultivated. In June, when the sun enters Cancer, the rains are so +incessant that the Portuguese call that month <i>La Luna de las +Aquas</i> , or the Water Month. Their seed-time begins in August, when +they sow maize, called <i>miglio zaburo</i> . This is a white bean, +which is ready to be gathered in forty days, and is the chief food of +these islanders, and of all the inhabitants of the coast of +Africa[4]. They also sow much rice and cotton; the latter of which +comes to great perfection, and is manufactured into striped cloths, +which are exported to the country of the Negroes, and bartered for +black slaves.</p> +<blockquote>[3] This geographical expression is utterly +unintelligible, but may be a strange mode of denoting its latitude, +which is 15° N. but I know not what to make of the thirty leagues +towards the south, unless the author meant that it was thirty leagues +in extent from north to south, and seventeen leagues from east to +west.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] The description in the text is not applicable to +maize, and must refer to some species of bean, or +kidney-bean.--E.</blockquote> +<p>To give a distinct view of the commercial transactions with the +Negroes, it is proper to inform you, that the western coast of Africa +is divided into several countries and provinces, as +Guinea, <i>Melegote</i> [5], the kingdom of Benin, and the kingdom of +Manicongo. Over all this extent of coast, there are many Negro kings +or chiefs, whose subjects are Mahometans and idolaters, and who are +continually at war with each other. These kings are much respected by +their subjects, almost to adoration, as they are believed to have +originally descended from heaven. When the king of Benin dies, his +subjects assemble in an extensive plain, in the centre of which a +vast pit or sepulchre is dug, into which the body is lowered, and all +the friends and servants of the deceased are sacrificed and thrown +into the same grave, thus voluntarily throwing away their own lives +in honour of the dead. On this coast there grows a species of + <i>melegete</i> , extremely pungent like pepper, and resembling the +Italian grain called <i>sorgo</i> . It produces likewise a species of +pepper of great strength, not inferior to any of that which the +Portuguese bring from Calicut, under the name of <i>Pimienta del +rabo</i> , or <i>Pepe dalla coda</i> , and which African pepper +resembles <i>cubbebs</i> , but so powerful that an ounce will go +farther than a pound of the common sort; but its exportation is +prohibited, lest it should injure the sale of that which is brought +from Calicut[6]. There is also established on this coast a +manufacture of an excellent kind of soap from palm-oil and ashes, +which is carried on for the king's account. All the trade of this +coast, to the kingdom of <i>Manicongo</i> exclusively, is farmed out +every four or five years to the highest bidder. Great Negro caravans +bring gold and slaves to the stations on the coast. The slaves are +either prisoners taken in war, or children whom their parents have +parted with in the hope of their being carried to a more fertile +country. For above ninety years after the first discovery of this +coast, the Portuguese merchants were accustomed to enter the large +rivers by which the country is everywhere intersected, trading +independently with the numerous tribes inhabiting their banks; but +now the whole of this commerce is in the hands of stationary licensed +factors, to whom it is farmed.</p> +<blockquote>[5] Called likewise Maleguette, and named also the +Grain-Coast and the Pepper-Coast. Manicongo is obviously the kingdom +of Congo.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] Some of this is smuggled and sold in +England.--Clark.<br> +This Guinea pepper is probably that now known under the name of +Jamaica pepper; but the extremely pungent kind must be some of the +numerous species of capsicums, usually called Cayenne +pepper.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On quitting St Jago we steer southerly for the Rio Grande, which +is on the north of Ethiopia, beyond which we come to the high +mountain of Sierra Liona, the summit of which is continually +enveloped in mist, out of which thunder and lightning almost +perpetually flashes, and is heard at sea from the distance of forty +or fifty miles. Though the sun is quite vertical in passing over this +mountain, and extremely hot, yet the thick fog is never dissipated. +In our voyage we never lose sight of land, yet keep always at a +considerable distance, carefully observing the declination of the +sun, and keeping a southerly course till we arrive in <i>four degrees +on the equinoctial</i> [7], when we suddenly change our course to the +south-east, keeping the Ethiopian coast always on our left hand in +our way to the island of St Thomas. On this coast, between the tropic +and the equinoctial, we never meet with any hard gales, as storms are +very rarely found within the tropics. On nearing the land, the +soundings in many parts of the coast do not exceed +fifty <i>braccia</i> , but farther out the depth rapidly increases, and +the sea usually runs high at a distance from the land. When we +arrived at Rio del Oro, as mentioned before, we observed four stars +in the form of a cross, of an extraordinary size and splendour, +elevated thirty degrees above the antarctic pole, and forming the +constellation called <i>il Crusero</i> . While under the tropic of +Cancer, we saw this constellation very low; and, on directing +our <i>balestra</i> [8] to the lowermost of these stars, we found it to +be directly south, and concluded that it must be in the centre of the +antarctic polar circle. We observed the same constellation very high +when we were at the island of St Thomas; and remarked that the moon, +after rain, produces a rainbow similar to that occasioned by the sun +during the day, except that the colours were dim and ill-defined. On +leaving the straits of Gibraltar, I did not observe any sensible +change on the ebb and flow of the sea; but when we approached Rio +Grande, which is eleven degrees to the north of the equinoctial, we +observed a considerable tide at the mouth of that river, and the rise +in some places was much the same as on the coast of Portugal, whereas +at the isle of St Thomas it was nearly the same as at Venice.</p> +<blockquote>[7] This strange expression seems to imply 4° of +north latitude.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[8] Called likewise Balestriglia, being the Venetian name +for the cross- staff, or fore-staff, an astronomical instrument which +has been superseded by the quadrant and sextant.--E</blockquote> +<p>The island of St Thomas was discovered above eighty[9] years ago, +by some captains in the royal navy of Portugal, and was altogether +unknown to the ancients. Its horizon or parallel passes at an equal +distance between the arctic and antarctic poles, and its days and +nights are always equal. The arctic polar star is there invisible, +but the <i>guardiani</i> are seen in some measure to revolve, and the +constellation which is known by the name of <i>il crusero</i> , is seen +in the heavens at a high altitude. To the eastwards[10] of St Thomas, +and at the distance of 120 miles, the small island called <i>Il +Principe</i> is situated. This latter island is inhabited and +cultivated, the produce of its sugar canes belonging to the revenue +of the kings eldest son, from which circumstance the island derives +its name. To the S. S. W. or S. and by W. and in the latitude of +almost 2° S. is the uninhabited island of Annobon, on which +numbers of crocodiles and venomous serpents are found. Its rocky +shores abound in fish, and are much resorted to by the inhabitants of +St Thomas on that account. When first discovered, the island of St +Thomas was an entire forest, containing a variety of trees, which, +though barren, were extremely verdant. These trees were all +remarkably tall and straight, their branches all drawn close to the +stems, and not spreading out as with us. After clearing away a great +part of the forest, the inhabitants built a principal town +called <i>Pouoasan</i> , which has an excellent harbour. The principal +dependence of the settlers in this island is upon their sugars, which +they exchange yearly with the merchants who trade thither, for flour +in barrels, wines, oil, cheese, leather, swords, glass beads, +drinking-cups, pater-nosters, and <i>buzios</i> , which are a small +kind of shells, called by the Italians <i>white porcelain</i> , and +which pass in Ethiopia as money. The Europeans who reside on this +island depend much for provisions on the ships, as they cannot +subsist on the fare used by the Negroes. The slaves employed in their +sugar plantations are procured from Guinea, Benin, and Congo; and +some rich planters have from 150 to 300 Negroes. These work five days +in every week for their masters, and are allowed the Saturdays to +themselves, when they cultivate various articles of provision, as +the <i>miglio zaburo</i> , a species of bean formerly mentioned, a root +called <i>igname</i> , and many species of culinary vegetables, the +seeds of which must be imported from Europe, as they do not come to +perfection in this climate.</p> +<blockquote>[9] In an after part of this narrative, the pilot informs +us, that his first voyage to the island of San Thome was in 1520, and +that he made five voyages to that place. If, therefore, the date of +his present voyage were fixed to 1530, it would carry us back to +1450, or even earlier, for the date of this discovery, near thirteen +years before the death of Don Henry.--Clark.<br> +In Mr Clarkes note on this passage, he erroneously calculates on the +above data that the discovery might have been in 1460, which is only +seventy years back from 1530. But the result of the data in the text +shews, that either the pilot was mistaken as to the real date of the +discovery, or that his narrative has been corrupted, so that no +reliance can be placed on his dates.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[10] The direction of <i>Il Principe</i> , or Princes +Island, from St Thomas, is N. N. E. and the distance does not exceed +seventy miles.--Clark.</blockquote> +[Illustration: Chart of North Western Africa] +<p>The soil of St Thomas consists of a red and yellow marl, or clay, +of great fertility, which is kept soft and mellow by the heavy dews +which fall nightly, contributing greatly to vegetation, and +preventing it from being dried up by the great heats; and so great is +the luxuriant fertility of the soil, that trees immediately spring up +on any spots left uncultivated, and will grow as high in a few days +as would require as many months with us. These sprouts are cut down +and burnt by the slaves, and their ashes are used as manure for the +sugarcanes. If planted in January, the canes are ready to be cut in +June, and those which are planted in February become ripe in July; +and in this manner they keep up a succession throughout the whole +year. In March and September, when the sun is vertical, the great +rains set in, accompanied with cloudy and thick weather, which is of +great service to the sugar plantations. This island produces yearly +above 150,000 arobas of sugar, each containing thirty-one of our +pounds, of which the king receives the tenth part, which usually +produces from 12,000 to 14,000 arobas, though many of the planters do +not pay this tythe fully. There are about sixty <i>ingenios</i> driven +by water, for bruising the canes and pressing out the juice, which is +boiled in vast chaldrons, after which it is poured into pans in the +shape of sugar-loaves, holding from fifteen to twenty pounds each, in +which it is purified by means of ashes. In some parts of the island, +where they have not streams of water, the canes are crushed by +machines worked by the Negroes, and in others by horses. The bruised +canes are given to the hogs, which hardly get any other food, yet +fatten wonderfully, and their flesh is so delicate and wholesome as +to be preferred to that of poultry. Many sugar refiners have been +brought here from Madeira, on purpose to endeavour to manufacture the +sugars of St Thomas more white and harder than its usual produce, but +in vain. This is alleged to proceed from the extreme richness of the +soil injuring the quality of the sugar; just as with us, wines +produced in soils of too great fertility are apt to have a peculiar +flavour. Another cause of this is supposed to proceed from the +climate of the island being too hot and too moist, except in the +month of June, July, and August, at which season a fresh dry wind +blows from Ethiopia to this island; and they then make their best +sugars.</p> +<p>The planters are obliged, to ship off their sugars as soon as they +can procure shipping, because they would become liquid if attempted +to be kept for a length of time. At present, not above two-thirds of +the island are appropriated to the cultivation of sugar; but any +person who comes to this island for the purpose of settling, whether +from Spain or Portugal, or any other country, may procure from the +royal intendant as much land as he is able to cultivate, and at a +moderate price. The esculent root which is known in the Spanish +islands by the name of <i>batata</i> , is here named ingame by the +Negroes, and is their principal food, either boiled or roasted under +the ashes. There are different kinds of this root produced on the +island, but that which is known by the name of <i>igname cicorero</i> +is preferred by the merchant vessels, all of which purchase +considerable quantities as a sea-stock for their homeward voyage, and +the Negroes cultivate them largely for the express purpose of +supplying the ships[11]. This island is distinguished by a high +mountain in the middle, thickly covered by tall, straight, and +verdant trees, and its summit is continually enveloped in clouds, +whence water is diffused in numerous streams all over the island. A +large shallow stream flows through the city of Pouoasan, supplying it +with abundance of excellent water, which the inhabitants reckon of a +medicinal quality, and allege that St Thomas would not be habitable +if it were not for this river and its other numerous springs and +rivulets. The native trees are chiefly barren, and though some +olives, peaches, and almonds, were planted by the early settlers, +which soon grew with great luxuriance, they never bore any fruit, and +this has been the case with all stone fruits that have been tried. +But the cocoa-nut palm, brought hither from Ethiopia, has thriven +satisfactorily. Repeated attempts have been made to cultivate wheat, +but always unsuccessfully, though tried at different seasons of the +year; as the ear would never fill, but always ran up to straw and +chaff only.</p> +<blockquote>[11] These <i>batatas</i> are probably a different species +from our potatoes, and may be what are called sweet potatoes in the +West Indies; perhaps the <i>igname cicorero</i> is the West +Indian <i>yam</i> . Four species of <i>igname</i> or <i>batata</i> , are +mentioned in Barbot as originally from Benin, Anwerre, Mani-Congo, +and Saffrance. The first of these is remarkably sweet, and the second +keeps well. A variety of esculent roots might prove of high utility +to navigators, and are too much neglected. Among these, the parsnip +and Jerusalem artichoke deserve notice, as being very nutritive, and +proof against all weathers.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>In March and September, the sky is always overcast with clouds and +mists, and continual rains prevail, which season is considered by the +inhabitants as their winter. In May, June, July, and August, which +they call <i>Mesi di Vento</i> , or windy months, the prevalent winds +are from the south, southeast, and southwest; but the island is +sheltered by the continent from the north, northeast, and northwest +winds; The summer months are December, January, and February, when +the heat is excessive, and the atmosphere being continually loaded +with vapour, occasions the air to feel like the steam of boiling +water. The shores of this island abound in many kinds of fish, and, +during the months of June and July, the inhabitants catch a kind +which they name <i>le chieppe</i> , which are singularly delicate. In +the seas between this island and the coast of Africa, there are +prodigious multitudes of whales, both of the large and small +kinds.--Should you, Sir, be unsatisfied with my ill-written and +confused information, I beg of you to consider that I am merely a +seaman, unpracticed in literary composition.</p> +<p>SECTION III.</p> +<p> <i>Continuation of Portuguese Discoveries, from Cape St Catherine +to the kingdom of Congo</i> .</p> +<p>We are still obliged to continue the account of the Portuguese +discoveries historically, from the want of any regular journals of +their early voyages along the African coast. In the original efforts +of the illustrious Don Henry, although the progress was extremely +slow, we have much to admire in the character of that prince, who +possessed genius to stretch beyond the trammels of custom and +authority, boldly thinking for himself, pointing out the way of +extending the knowledge of our globe by maritime discoveries, and +persevering nobly in his renewed efforts, in spite of the timid +ignorance of his unexperienced pilots and mariners. But it is not +easy to explain the continuance of that slow progress, which was even +retarded during the years which elapsed between the demise of that +prince of mariners in 1463, and that of Alphonso in 1481; when the +increased experience of the Portuguese, in their frequent voyages to +the new discovered Atlantic islands and African coast, ought to have +inspired them with fresh vigour and extended views of discovery and +commerce. The military character of Alphonso may, however, explain +this in a great degree, as all his energies were directed towards the +extension of dominion in the Moorish kingdom of Fez; and the business +of discovery was devolved as a burdensome and unprofitable task on +the farmers of the trade to the coast of Africa, which appears to +have become extensive and lucrative, after the discovery of Guinea +and its islands, and the establishment of the sugar colonies in these +islands. We learn, likewise, from the preceding voyage of the +Portuguese pilot to the island of St Thomas, that the mariners still +confined themselves almost entirely to creeping along the coast, from +cape to cape, and from island to island, not daring to trust +themselves to the trackless ocean, under the now sure guidance of the +heavenly luminaries; but which they then did not sufficiently +understand, nor did they possess sufficient instruments for directing +their course in the ocean. It would appear that they had then no +other method of computing the longitude but by means of the log, or +dead reckoning, which is liable to perpetual uncertainty from +currents and lee-way, and which a storm, even of short continuance, +must have thrown into total confusion. Their instruments and methods +for determining even the latitudes, appear to have then been +imperfect and little understood. In the sequel of this deduction, we +shall find the first Portuguese squadron which sailed for India, +conducted across the Indian ocean by a Moorish pilot.</p> +<p>On the accession of John II. to the throne of Portugal in 1481, +the discoveries along the coast of Africa were resumed with a new +spirit. While infante or hereditary prince, his principal revenue was +derived from the profits of the Guinea trade, and of the importation +of gold from the haven of Mina; and among the first measures of his +reign, he turned his attention to the improvement and extension of +that valuable branch of commerce. For this purpose, he gave orders to +make all necessary preparations for building a fortress and church at +the port of Mina. All the requisite materials, even to stones and +tiles, were accordingly shipped from Lisbon in a squadron of ten +caravels and two transports, with 500 soldiers and 200 labourers or +workmen of various kinds. This expedition was placed under the +command of Don Diego d'Azumbuja, an experienced officer, under whom +were the following naval captains, Gonçalez da Fonseca, Ruy +d'Oliveira, Juan Rodrigues Gante, Juan Alfonso, Diego Rodrigues +Inglez, Bartholomew Diaz, Pedro d'Evora, and Gomez Aires. This last +was a gentleman belonging to the household of Pedro king of Arragon, +all the others being noblemen of the household of King John. Pedro de +Cintra and Fernam d'Alfonso commanded the transports, and a small +vessel attended the squadron as an advice-boat. This squadron sailed +on the 11th December 1481, and reached their destination on the 19th +January 1482, at an African village named <i>Aldea</i> , where they +found Juan Bernardo, who had previously sailed for the coast in quest +of gold.</p> +<p>Bernardo was immediately sent by Azumbuja, to inform +Camarança, the Negro chief of the district, with the arrival +of the Portuguese armament, and to desire a conference, with +directions to endeavour to impress that chief with a high sense of +the rank and character of the Portuguese officers, and of the +irresistible power of the armament now upon his coast. Early next +morning, Azambuja landed with all his followers, who were secretly +armed, in case of meeting with any hostilities from the natives; and +moved forwards in great form to a large tree, not far from the Negro +village of Aldea, on a spot which had been chosen as a convenient +situation for the intended fortress. A flag, bearing the royal arms +of Portugal, was immediately displayed upon the tree, and an altar +was placed under the shade of its boughs, at which the whole company +united in assisting at the first mass that was celebrated in Guinea, +offering up their solemn prayers to God for the speedy conversion of +the idolatrous natives, and for the perpetual continuance and +prosperity of the church which was to be erected on this spot. The +day on which this impressive ceremony was performed being dedicated +to St Sebastian, that name was given to the valley on which the tree +stood, under which they were now assembled.</p> +<p>Soon after the completion of this religious ceremony, +Camarança approached with a numerous train. Azambuja, +sumptuously dressed, and ornamented by a rich golden collar, prepared +to receive the Negro chief, seated on an elevated chair, having all +his retinue arranged before him, so as to form an avenue. The Negroes +were armed with spears, shields, bows, and arrows, and wore a kind of +helmets made of skins, thickly studded with fish teeth, giving them a +very martial appearance. The subordinate chiefs were distinguished by +chains of gold hanging from their necks, and had various golden +ornaments on their heads, and even on their beards. After the +exchange of presents, and other tokens of mutual respect and +confidence, Azambuja made a speech to Camarança, through the +mediation of an interpreter, in which he explained the purpose of his +embassy and expedition, and used every argument he could think of, to +conciliate the friendship of the Negro chief, to make him fully +sensible of the power of the king of Portugal, and to reconcile him +to the intended permanent establishment upon the toast. +Camarança listened to the harangue, and the explanation of it +by the interpreter, in respectful silence, keeping his eyes steadily +fixed on the countenance of Azambuja. After which, casting his eyes +for some time on the ground, as if profoundly meditating on what he +had heard, he is said to have made the following guarded and +judicious answer:</p> +<p>"I am fully sensible of the high honour done me on this occasion +by your sovereign. I have always endeavoured to deserve his +friendship, by dealing strictly with his subjects, and by constantly +exerting myself to procure immediate ladings for their ships. +Hitherto the Portuguese, who have visited my country, were meanly +dressed, and easily satisfied with the commodities we had to give +them; and so far from desiring to remain in the country, were always +anxious to complete their cargoes, and to return whence they came. +This day I observe a wonderful difference. A great number of persons, +richly dressed, are eager for permission to build themselves houses, +and to remain among us. But assuredly, persons of such rank, under +the guidance of a commander who claims his descent from the God who +created the day and the night, would never be able to endure the +hardships of our climate, and could not procure in this country those +luxuries they have been accustomed to in their own. Those passions +which are common to all men, will certainly produce disputes between +us; and it were much better that we should continue on the same +footing as hitherto, allowing your ships to come and go as they have +always done before; in which case, the desire of seeing each other +occasionally, and of mutual intercourse in trade, will preserve peace +between you and us. The sea and the land, which are always +neighbours, are continually at variance, contending for the mastery; +the sea always violently endeavouring to subdue the land, which, with +equal obstinacy, defends itself against the encroachments of the +sea."</p> +<p>The prudential jealousy and distrust displayed on this occasion by +Camarança, astonished and perplexed the Portuguese commander; +and it required the exercise of much address on his part, to prevail +upon the Negro chief to allow the fulfilment of his orders, and to +prevent the necessity of having recourse to violent measures. When +the workmen were making preparations next day to lay the foundations +of the intended fortress on the coast, they observed a large rock, +which lay very commodious for serving them as a quarry, and +accordingly proceeded to work it for that purpose. This happened +unfortunately to be venerated by the Negroes as one of their Gods, +and they immediately flew to arms in opposition against the +sacrilegious violation of the sanctified rock, and many of the +workmen were wounded, before the natives could be pacified by +numerous presents. At length, after the constant labour of twenty +days, the fort began to assume a formidable appearance, and received +the name of <i>Fortaleza de San Jorge da Mina</i> , or Fort St George +at Mina. In a church constructed within its walls, a solemn mass was +appointed to be celebrated annually, in honour of Don Henry, Duke of +Viseo, of illustrious memory. Azambuja continued governor of this +place during two years and seven months, and was honoured, on his +return to Portugal, with particular marks of royal favour. In 1486, +King John bestowed on this new establishment all the privileges end +immunities of a city.</p> +<p>Impressed with the great advantages that might be derived to his +kingdom, through the prosecution of the maritime discoveries in +Africa, and more especially by opening a passage by sea to India, of +which his hopes were now sanguine, the king of Portugal, who had now +added to his titles that of <i>Lord of Guinea</i> , made application to +the pope, as universal father and lord of Christendom, for a +perpetual grant of all the countries which the Portuguese had already +discovered, or should hereafter discover, towards the east, with a +strict prohibition against the interference of any European State in +that immense field of discovery, commerce, and colonization. The pope +conceded this enormous grant, probably without the most distant idea +of its extent and importance: not only prohibiting all Christian +powers from intruding within those prodigious, yet indefinite bounds, +which he had bestowed upon the crown of Portugal, but declaring, that +all discoveries that were or might be made in contravention, should +belong to Portugal. Hitherto, the Portuguese navigators, in the +course of their discoveries along the shores of Western Africa, had +been in use to erect <i>wooden</i> crosses, as indications of their +respective discoveries. But the king now ordered that they should +erect <i>stone crosses</i> , about six feet high, inscribed with, the +arms of Portugal, the name of the reigning sovereign, that of the +navigator, and the date of the discovery.</p> +<p>In the year 1484, Diego Cam or Cano proceeded beyond Cape St +Catherine, in lat. 1° 40' S. the last discovery of the reign of +King Alphonso, and reached the mouth of a considerable river, in lat. +5° 10' S. called <i>Zayre</i> by the natives, now called Congo +river, or the Rio Padron. Diego proceeded some distance up this +river, till he met with some of the natives, but was unable to +procure any satisfactory intelligence from them, as they were not +understood by the Negro interpreters on board his ship. By means of +signs, however, he understood that the country was under the dominion +of a king who resided at a considerable distance from the coast, in a +town or city called Banza, since named San Salvador by the +Portuguese; on which he sent a party of his crew, conducted by the +natives, carrying a considerable present far the king, and meaning to +wait their return. Unavoidable circumstances, however, having +protracted the return of his people far beyond the appointed time, +Diego resolved to return into Portugal with an account of his +discovery; and, having gained the confidence of the natives, he +prevailed on four of them to embark with him, that they might be +instructed in the Portuguese language, to serve as interpreters for +future intercourse with this newly discovered region, and made the +natives understand by means of signs, that, after the expiration of +fifteen moons, these persons should be returned in safety.</p> +<p>These Africans were men of some consequence in their own country, +and were of such quick apprehensions, that they acquired a sufficient +knowledge of the Portuguese language during the voyage back to +Lisbon, as to be able to give a competent account of their own +country, and of the kingdoms or regions beyond it, to the southwards. +The king of Portugal was much gratified by this discovery, and +treated the Africans brought over by Diego with much munificence. +Next year, Diego Cam returned to the river of Congo, where he landed +the four natives, who carried many presents from King John to their +own sovereign, and were directed to express his anxious desire that +he and his subjects would embrace the Christian faith.</p> +<p>Having landed the Negroes, and received back his own men whom he +had left on his former voyage, Diego proceeded to discover the coast +to the southwards of the Congo river; leaving a respectful message +for the king of Congo, that he must postpone the honour of paying his +respects to him till his return from the south. The farther progress +of Diego is very indefinitely related by the Portuguese historians; +who say, that after a run of twenty leagues, he erected two stone +crosses, as memorials of his progress, one at a cape called St +Augustine, in lat. 13° S. but the other on Cape Padron, in +22° S. This last latitude would extend the discovery of Diego +between the latitude of the Congo river and this high latitude, to +280 Portuguese leagues, instead of twenty. Besides, Cape Padron forms +the southern point at the mouth of the river of Congo, and is only in +lat. 6° 15' S. The high probability is, that the first cross +erected by Diego Cam in this voyage, was at Cape Palmerinho, in lat. +9° 15' S. and the other may have been at Rocca Boa, in lat. +13° 20' S. Clarke[1] is disposed to extend the second cross to +Cabo Negro, in lat. 16° S. Either influenced by his provisions +running short, or desirous of forming a friendly, connection with the +king of Congo, Diego measured back his way to the Congo river, where +he was received in a most satisfactory manner by the sovereign of +that country. The reports of his subjects who had been in Portugal, +and the liberal presents which they had brought to him from King +John, had made a deep impression on the mind of this African monarch. +He made many inquiries respecting the Christian religion, and being +highly gratified by its sublime and consolatory doctrines, perhaps +influenced by the reports his subjects had brought him of its +magnificent ceremonies, he appointed one of his principal noblemen, +named <i>Caçuta</i> or <i>Zazut</i> , to accompany Diego Cam, as +his ambassador to King John; anxiously requesting the king of +Portugal to allow this nobleman and his attendants to be baptized, +and that he would be pleased to send some ministers of his holy +religion to convert him and his subjects from their idolatrous +errors. Diego Cam arrived safely in Portugal with Caçuta; who +was soon afterwards baptized by the name of <i>John Silva</i> , the +king and queen of Portugal doing him the honour of attending on him +as sponsors at the holy font; and the splendid ceremonial was closed +by the baptism of his sable attendants.</p> +<blockquote>[1] Prog, of Mar. Disc. I. 329. note r.</blockquote> +<p>Some time previous to this event, Alphonso de Aviero carried an +ambassador from the king of Benin to the king of Portugal, requesting +that some missionaries might be sent for the conversion of his +subjects; and, although the artful conduct of that African prince +threw many difficulties in the way of this mission, many of the +Negroes of that country were converted. From the ambassador of Benin, +the king of Portugal received information of a powerful monarch, +named <i>Organe</i> , whose territories lay at the distance of 250 +leagues beyond the kingdom of Benin, and who possessed a supremacy +over all the adjacent states. Assuming Cape Lopo Gonçalves, in +lat. 1° S. as the southern boundary of the kingdom of Benin, 250 +Portuguese leagues would bring us to the kingdom of Benguela, or that +of Jaa Caconda, about lat. 14° or 15° S. Yet some persons +have strangely supposed that this king <i>Organe</i> +or <i>Ogané</i> was a corruption of <i>Jan</i> or <i>Janhoi</i> , +the title given by the Christians of the east to the king of +Abyssinia. "But it is very difficult to account for this knowledge of +Abyssinia in the kingdom of Benin, not only on account of the +distance, but likewise because several of the most savage nations in +the world, the <i>Galla</i> and <i>Shangalla</i> , occupy the +intervening space. The court of Abyssinia did indeed then reside in + <i>Shoa</i> , the south-east extremity of the kingdom; and, by its +power and influence, might have pushed its dominion through these +barbarians to the neighbourhood of Benin on the western ocean. But +all this I must confess to be a mere conjecture of mine, of which, in +the country itself, I never found the smallest confirmation[2]." To +these observations of the celebrated Abyssinian traveller, it may be +added, that the distance from Benin to Shoa exceeds six hundred +Portuguese leagues.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Bruce's Abyssinia, II. 105.</blockquote> +<p>While the king of Portugal continued to encourage his navigators +to proceed to the southwards in discovering the African coast, he +became anxious lest some unexpected rival might interpose to deprive +him of the expected fruits of these discoveries, which had occupied +the unremitting attentions of his predecessors and himself for so +many years. Learning that John Tintam and William Fabian, Englishmen, +were preparing, at the instigation of the Duke of Medina Sidonia, in +1481, to proceed on a voyage to Guinea, he sent Ruy de Sousa as his +ambassador, to Edward IV. of England, to explain the title which he +held from the pope as lord of that country, and to induce him to +forbid his subjects from navigating to the coast of Africa, in which +negotiation he was completely successful. He likewise used every +exertion to conceal the progress of his own navigators on the western +coast of Africa, and to magnify the dangers of the voyage; +representing that the coast was quite inhospitable, surrounded by +most tremendous rocks, and inhabited by savage cannibals, and that no +vessels could possibly live in those tempestuous seas, in which every +quarter of the moon produced a furious storm, except those of a +peculiar construction, which had been invented by the Portuguese +ship- builders.</p> +<p>A Portuguese pilot, who had often made the voyage to Guinea, had +the temerity to assert, that any kind of ship could make this +redoubted voyage, as safely as the royal caravels, and was sent for +to court by the king, who gave him a public reprimand for his +ignorance and presumption. Some months afterwards, the same pilot +appeared again at court, and told the king, "That being of an +obstinate disposition, he had attempted the voyage to Guinea in a +different kind of vessel from those usually employed, and found it to +be impossible." The king could not repress a smile at this solemn +nonsense; yet honoured the politic pilot with a private audience, and +gave him money to encourage him to propagate the deception. About +this period, likewise, hearing that three Portuguese seamen, who were +conversant in the navigation of the coast of Africa, had set out for +Spain, intending to offer their services in that country, John +immediately ordered them to be pursued as traitors. Two of them were +killed, and the third was brought a prisoner to Evora, where he was +broke on the wheel. Hearing that the Portuguese seamen murmured at +the severity of this punishment, the king exclaimed, "Let every man +abide by his own element, I love not travelling seamen."</p> +<p>Encouraged by the successful progress of Diego Cam in 1484 and +1485, King John became sanguine in his hopes of completing the +discovery of a maritime route to India, around the continent of +Africa, and determined upon using every exertion for this purpose. +His first views were to endeavour to procure some information +respecting India, by means of a journey overland; and with this +object, <i>Antonio de Lisboa</i> , a Franciscan friar, together with a +nameless lay companion, were dispatched to make the attempt of +penetrating into India, through Palestine and Egypt. But, being +ignorant of the Arabic language, these men were unable to penetrate +beyond Jerusalem, whence they returned into Portugal. Though +disappointed in this attempt, by the ignorance or want of enterprise +of his agents, his resolution was not to be repressed by +difficulties, and he resolved upon employing fresh exertions both by +sea and land, for the accomplishment of his enterprise. He +accordingly fitted out a small squadron under Bartholomew Diaz, a +knight of the royal household, to attempt the passage by sea.</p> +<p>SECTION IV.</p> +<p> <i>Discovery of the Cape of Good Hope, by Bartholomew Diaz, in +1486</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Clarke, I. 342.</blockquote> +<p>For this important enterprise, Bartholomew Diaz was only supplied +with two small caravels of fifty ton each, accompanied by a still +smaller vessel, or tender, to carry provisions. Of these vessels, one +was commanded by Bartholomew Diaz, as commodore, the second caravel +by <i>Juan Infante</i> , another cavalier or gentleman of the court, +and Pedro Diaz, brother to the commander in chief of the expedition, +had charge of the tender. The preparations being completed, +Bartholomew sailed in the end of August 1486, steering directly to +the southwards.</p> +<p>We have no relation of the particulars of this voyage, and only +know that the first spot on which Diaz placed a stone pillar, in +token of discovery and possession, was at <i>Sierra Parda</i> , in +about 24°40'S. which is said to have been 120 leagues farther to +the south than any preceding navigator. According to the Portuguese +historians, Diaz sailed boldly from this place to the southwards, in +the open sea, and never saw the land again until he was forty leagues +to the east of the Cape of Good Hope, which he had passed without +being in sight of land. The learned geographer, Major Rennel, informs +us, that Sir Home Popham and Captain Thompson, while exploring the +western coast of Africa in 1786, found a marble cross, on which the +arms of Portugal were engraved, in latitude 26°37'S. near a bay +named Angra Pequena: But, as the Portuguese long continued to +frequent these coasts exclusively, and considered them all as +belonging to their dominions under the papal grant, this latter +cross, on which the inscription was not legible, may have been +erected at a considerably subsequent period. At all events, the track +of Diaz was far beyond the usual adventure of any former navigator, +as he must have run a course of from seven to ten degrees of +latitude, and at least between two or three degrees of longitude, in +utterly unknown seas, without sight of land. The first land seen by +Diaz is said to have been forty leagues to the eastward of the cape, +where he came in sight of a bay on the coast, which he called <i>Angra +de los Vaqueros</i> , or bay of herdsmen, from observing a number of +cows grazing on the land. The distance of forty Portuguese leagues, +would lead us to what is now called Struys bay, immediately east of +Cabo das Agullias, which latter is in lat. 34° 50' S. and long. +20° 16' E. from Greenwich. From this place Diaz continued his +voyage eastwards, to a small island or rock in the bay, which is now +called Zwartkops or Algoa, in long. 27° E. on which rocky islet +he placed a stone cross or pillar, as a memorial of his progress, and +named it, on that account, Santa Cruz, or <i>El Pennol de la Cruz</i> . +In his progress to this place from the Angra de los Vaqueros, he had +set some Negroes on shore in different places, who had been brought +from Portugal for this purpose, and who were well clothed, that they +might be respected by the natives. These Negroes were likewise +provided with small assortments of toys for bartering with the +natives, and were especially charged to make inquiry as to the +situation and distance of the dominions of Prester John. Of the fate +of these Negroes we are nowhere informed, but may be well assured +they would receive no intelligence respecting the subject of their +inquiry, from the ignorant Hottentots and Caffres of Southern +Africa.</p> +<p>It would appear that Diaz was still unconscious that he had +reached and overpassed the extreme southern point of Africa, although +now nearly nine degrees to the east of the Cape of Good Hope, and at +least one degree back towards the north of his most southern range; +but he may have supposed himself in a deep bite or bay of the coast, +similar to the well- known gulf of Guinea. Under this impression, +that he had not accomplished the grand object of his enterprize, he +was anxious to continue his voyage still farther towards the east: +But, as the provisions on board his two caravels were nearly +exhausted, and the victualling tender under the command of his +brother was missing, the crews of the caravels became exceedingly +urgent to return, lest they might perish with famine. With some +difficulty he prevailed on the people to continue their course about +twenty-five leagues farther on, as he felt exceedingly mortified at +the idea of returning to his sovereign without accomplishing the +discovery on which he was sent. They accordingly reached the mouth of +a river, which was discovered by Juan Infante, and was called from +him, <i>Rio del Infante</i> , now known by the name of Great-Fish +River, in about lat. 33°27' N. long. 28°20'E. The coast still +trended towards the eastwards, with a slight inclination towards the +north; so that, in an eastern course of about thirteen degrees, they +had neared the north about six degrees, though still unsatisfied of +having absolutely cleared the southern point of Africa.</p> +<p>From this river, the extreme boundary of the present voyage, Diaz +commenced his return homewards, and discovered, with great joy and +astonishment, on their passage back, the long sought for and +tremendous promontory, which had been the grand object of the hopes +and wishes of Portuguese navigation during <i>seventy-four</i> years, +ever since the year 1412, when the illustrious Don Henry first began +to direct and incite his countrymen to the prosecution of discoveries +along the western shores of Africa. Either from the distance which +the caravels had been from the land, when they first altered their +course to the eastwards, or from the cape having been concealed in +thick fogs, it had escaped notice in the preceding part of the +voyage. At this place Diaz erected a stone cross in memory of his +discovery; and, owing to heavy tempests, which he experienced off the +high table land of the Cape, he named it <i>Cabo dos Tormentos</i> , or +Cape of storms; but the satisfaction which King John derived from +this memorable discovery, on the return of Diaz to Portugal in 1487, +and the hope which it imparted of having opened a sure passage by sea +from Europe through the Atlantic into the Indian ocean, by which his +subjects would now reap the abundant harvest of all their long and +arduous labours, induced that sovereign to change this inauspicious +appellation for one of a more happy omen, and he accordingly ordered +that it should in future be called, <i>Cabo de boa +Esperança</i> , or Cape of Good Hope, which it has ever since +retained.</p> +<p>Soon after the discovery of the <i>Cape</i> , by which shorter name +it is now generally preeminently distinguished, Diaz fell in with the +victualler, from which he had separated nine months before. Of nine +persons who had composed the crew of that vessel, six had been +murdered by the natives of the west coast of Africa, and Fernand +Colazzo, one of the three survivors, died of joy on again beholding +his countrymen. Of the circumstances of the voyage home we have no +account; but it is not to be doubted that Diaz and his companions +would be honourably received by their sovereign, after a voyage of +such unprecedented length and unusual success.</p> +<p>SECTION V.</p> +<p> <i>Journey overland to India and Abyssinia, by Covilham and de +Payva</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] Clarke, i. 384. Purchas, II. 1091.</blockquote> +<p>Soon after the departure of Diaz, King John dispatched Pedro de +Covilham and Alphonso de Payva, both well versed in the Arabic +language, with orders to travel by land into the east, for the +discovery of the country of <i>Presbyter</i> , or <i>Prester John</i> , +and to trace the steps of the lucrative commerce then carried on with +India by the Venetians for spices and drugs; part of their +instructions being to endeavour to ascertain the practicability of +navigating round the south extremity of Africa to the famed marts of +Indian commerce, and to make every possible inquiry into the +circumstances of that important navigation. Some writers have placed +this journey as prior in point of time to the voyage of Diaz, and +have even imagined that the navigator was directed or instructed by +the report which Covilham transmitted respecting India. Of the +relation of this voyage by Alvarez, which Purchas published in an +abbreviated form, from a translation out of the Italian in the +collection of Ramusio, found among the papers of Hakluyt, Purchas +gives the following character: "I esteem it true in those things +which he saith he saw: In some others which he had by relation of +enlarging travellers, or boasting Abassines, he may perhaps sometimes +rather <i>mendacia dicere</i> , than <i>mentiri</i> ." To <i>tell</i> lies +rather than <i>make</i> them.</p> +<p>Covilham, or Covillan, was born in a town of that name in +Portugal, and went, when a boy, into Castile, where he entered the +service of Don Alphonso, duke of Seville. On a war breaking out +between Portugal and Castile, he returned into his native country, +where he got into the household of King Alphonso, who made him a +man-at-arms. After the death of that king, he was one of the guard of +King John, who employed him on a mission into Spain, on account of +his knowledge in the language. He was afterwards employed in Barbary, +where he remained some time, and acquired the Arabic language, and +was employed to negotiate a peace with the king of Tremesen. He was a +second time sent into Barbary on a mission to King + <i>Amoli-bela-gegi</i> , to procure restitution of the bones of the +infant Don Fernando, in which he was successful.</p> +<p>After his return, he was joined in commission, as +before-mentioned, with Alphonso de Payva, and these adventurous +travellers left Lisbon in May 1487. Covilham was furnished with a +very curious map for these times, by the Prince Emanuel, afterwards +king of Portugal, which had been copied and composed, with great care +and secrecy, by the licentiate Calzadilla, afterwards bishop of +Viseo, assisted by Doctor Rodrigo, and a Jewish physician named +Moses; which map asserted the practicability of passing by sea to +India round the southern extremity of Africa, on some obscure +information which had been collected by those who constructed it.</p> +<p>With a supply of 500 crowns in money, and a letter of credit, or +bills of exchange, Covilham and De Payva went first to Naples, where +their bills of exchange were paid by the son of <i>Cosmo de +Medici</i> . From Naples they went by sea to the island of Rhodes, and +thence to Alexandria in Egypt, whence they travelled as merchants to +Grande Cairo, and proceeded with the caravan to <i>Tor</i> [2] on the +Red Sea, near the foot of Mount Sinai. They here received some +information respecting the trade which then subsisted between Egypt +and Calicut, and sailed from that place to Aden, a trading city of +Yemen, on the outside of the Straits of Babelmandeb. The travellers +here separated; Covilham embarking in one vessel for India, while De +Payva took his passage in another vessel bound for Suakem on the +Abyssinian coast of the Red Sea, having engaged to rejoin each other +at Cairo, after having carried the directions of their sovereign into +effect.</p> +<blockquote>[2] El Tor is on the Arabian coast of the Red Sea, near +the mouth of the Bahr Assuez, or Gulf of Suez, in lat. 28° 10' N. +long. 33° 36' E.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The Moorish ship from Aden in which Covilham had embarked, landed +him at Cananor on the coast of Malabar, whence, after some stay, he +went to Calicut and Goa, being the first of the Portuguese nation who +had navigated the Indian ocean; having seen pepper and ginger, and +heard of cloves and cinnamon. From India he went by sea to Sofala on +the eastern coast of Africa, where he is said to have examined the +gold mines, and where he procured some information respecting the +great island of Madagascar, called by the Moors the <i>Island of the +Moon</i> . With the various and valuable information he had now +acquired, relative to the productions of India and their marts, and +of the eastern coast of Africa, he now determined to return to Egypt, +that he might be able to communicate his intelligence to Portugal. At +Cairo he was met by messengers from King John, informing him that +Payva had been murdered, and directing him to go to Ormuz and the +coast of Persia, in order to increase his stock of commercial +knowledge. The two messengers from the king of Portugal whom Covilham +met with at Cairo, were both Jewish rabbis, named Abraham of Beja and +Joseph of Lamego. The latter returned into Portugal with letters from +Covilham, giving an account of his observations, and assuring his +master that the ships which sailed to the coast of Guinea, might be +certain of finding a termination of the African Continent, by +persisting in a southerly course; and advising, when they should +arrive in the <i>eastern ocean</i> , to inquire for Sofala and the +Island of the Moon.</p> +<p>Covilham and Rabbi Abraham went from Cairo, probably by sea, to +Ormuz and the coast of Persia, whence they returned in company to +Aden. From that place, Abraham returned by the way of Cairo to +Portugal with the additional information which had been collected in +their voyage to the Gulf of Persia; though some authors allege that +Joseph was the companion of this voyage, and that he returned from +Bassora by way of the desert to Aleppo, and thence to Portugal.</p> +<p>From Aden, Covilham crossed the straits of Babelmandeb to the +south- eastern coast of Abyssinia, where he found Alexander the king, +or negus, at the head of an army, levying tribute or contributions +from his rebellious subjects of the southern provinces of his +dominions. Alexander received Covilham with kindness, but more from +motives of curiosity than for any expectations of advantage that +might result from any connection or communication with the kingdom of +Portugal. Covilham accompanied the king to Shoa, where the seat of +the Abyssinian government was then established; and from a cruel +policy, which subsists still in Abyssinia, by which strangers are +hardly ever permitted to quit the country, Covilham never returned +into Europe. Though thus doomed to perpetual exile in a strange and +barbarous land, Covilham was well used. He married, and obtained +ample possessions, enjoying the favour of several successive kings of +Abyssinia, and was preferred to some considerable offices in the +government. Frequent epistolary intercourse took place between him +and the king of Portugal, who spared no expence to keep open the +interesting correspondence. In his dispatches, Covilham described the +several ports which he had visited in India; explained the policy and +disposition of the several princes; and pointed out the situation and +riches of the gold mines of Sofala; exhorting the king to persist, +unremittingly and vigorously, in prosecuting the discovery of the +passage to India around the southern extremity of Africa, which he +asserted to be attended with little danger, and affirmed that the +cape was well known in India. He is said to have accompanied his +letters and descriptions with a chart, in which the cape and all the +cities on the coast of Africa were exactly represented, which he had +received in India from a Moor. Covilham was afterwards seen by, and +intimately acquainted with Francesco Alvarez, his historian, who was +sent on an embassy into Abyssinia by Emmanuel king of Portugal. +Alvarez, who appears to have been a priest, calls Covilham his +spiritual son, and says that he had been thirty-three years in great +credit with <i>Prette Janni</i> , so he calls the king of Abyssinia, +and all the court, during all which time he had never confessed his +sins, except to GOD in secret, because the priests of that country +were not in use to keep secret what had been committed to them in +confession. This would protract the residence of Covilham in +Abyssinia, at least to the year 1521, or 1522; but how long he may +have lived there afterwards does not appear.</p> +<h2><a name="chapter2-6" id="chapter2-6">CHAPTER VI.</a></h2> +<p align="center"><b> <i>History of the discovery and conquest of +India by the Portuguese, between the years 1497 and 1525: from the +original Portuguese of Herman Lopes de Castaneda.</i> </b></p> +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> +<p>Although, in strict conformity to chronological arrangement, the +discovery of America by COLUMBUS in 1492, ought to precede our +account of the discovery of the maritime route from Europe to India +by the Portuguese, which did not take place until the year 1498; it +yet appears more regular to follow out the series of Portuguese +navigation and discovery to its full completion, than to break down +that original and vast enterprise into fragments. We might indeed +have stopt with the first voyage of De Gama, which effected the +discovery of India: But as the contents of this Chapter consists of +what may be considered an authentic original record, and carries on +the operations of the Portuguese in India to the year 1525, it seemed +preferable to retain this curious original history entire. It is +obvious that Castaneda must have used the original journals of De +Gama, and other early Portuguese commanders, or of some persons +engaged in the voyages and transactions; as he often forgets the +historical language, and uses the familiar diction of a person +actually engaged, as will appear in many passages of this +Chapter.</p> +<p>The title of this original document, now first offered to the +public in modern English, is " <i>The first Booke of the Historie of +the Discoverie and Conquest of the East Indias by the Portingals, in +the time of King Don John, the second of that name. By Hernan Lopes +de Castaneda; translated into English by Nicholas Lichefield, and +dedicated to Sir Fraunces Drake. Imprinted at London by Thomas East, +1582</i> ."</p> +<p>Though the transactions here recorded are limited in the title to +the reign of John II. they occupied the reigns of his immediate +successor Emmanuel, or Manuel, and of John III. Castanedas history +was printed in black letter at Coimbra, in eight volumes folio, in +the years 1552, 1553, and 1554, and is now exceedingly scarce. In +1553, a translation of the first book was made into French by Nicolas +de Grouchy, and published at Paris in quarto. An Italian translation +was published at Venice in two volumes quarto, by Alfonso Uloa, in +1578[1]. That into English by Lichefield, employed on the present +occasion, is in small quarto and black-letter. The voyage of De Gama +is related by De Barros in his work, entitled Da Asia, and has been +described by Osorius, Ramusio, Maffei, and de Faria. Purchas gives a +brief account of it, I. ii. 26. The beautiful poem of the Lusiad by +Camoens, the Portuguese Homer, is dedicated to the celebration of +this important transaction, and is well known through an elegant +translation into English by Mickle. In the present chapter, the +curious and rare work of Castaneda, so far as his first book extends, +is given entire; and the only freedom employed in this version, +besides changing the English of 229 years ago into the modern and +more intelligible language, has Been to prune a quaint verbosity, +mistaken by Lichefield for rhetorical eloquence. The dedication of +the early translator to the celebrated Sir Francis Drake, is +preserved in its original dress, as a sufficient specimen of the +language of England at the close of the sixteenth century.</p> +<blockquote>[1] Bibl. des Voyages, V. 2.</blockquote> +<p>DEDICATION.</p> +<p> <i>To the right Worshipfull<br> +Sir Fraunces Drake, Knight,<br> +N, L, G, wisheth all prosperitie.</i> </p> +<p>They have an auncient custom in Persia (the which is also observed +throughout all Asia) that none will enterprise to visit the king, +noble man, or perticularly any other person of countenance, but he +carieth with him some thing to present him with all worthy of thanks, +the which is not onely done in token of great humilitie and +obedience, but also of a zealous loue and friendly affection to their +superiours and welwillers. So I (right worshipfull following this +Persian president) hauing taking vpon me this simple translation out +of the Portingale tongue, into our English language, am bold to +present and dedicate the same vnto you as a signification of my +entire good will. The history conteineth the discouerie and conquest +of the East Indias, made by sundry worthy captaines of the +Portengales, in the time of King Don Manuel, and of the King Don +John, the second of that name, with the description, not onely of the +country, but also of every harbour apperteining to every place +whervnto they came, and of the great resistance they found in the +same, by reson wherof there was sundry great battles many times +fought, and likewise of the commodities and riches that euery of +these places doth yeeld. And for that I know your worship, with great +peril and daunger haue past these monstrous and bottomlesse sees, am +therfore the more encouraged to desire and pray your worships +patronage and defence therof, requesting you with all to pardon those +imperfections, which I acknowledge to be very many, and so much the +more, by reason of my long and many years continuance in foreine +countries. Howbeit, I hope to have truly observed the literal sence +and full effect of the history, as the author setteth it forth, which +if it may please you to peruse and accept in good part, I shall be +greatly emboldened to proceede and publish also the second and third +booke, which I am assured will neither be vnpleasant nor vnprofitable +to the readers. Thus alwaies wishing your good worship such +prosperous continuance and like fortunate successe as GOD hath +hitherto sent you in your dangerous trauaile and affayres, and as +maye euery waye content your owne heartes desire, doe euen so take my +leaue. From London the fifth of March. 1582.</p> +<p>Your worships alwayes to commaund,<br> + <i>Nicholas Lichefild.</i> </p> +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>DEDICATION BY CASTANEDA.</p> +<p> <i>To<br> +The most high and mighty Prince,<br> +John III.</i> <br></p> +<p> <i>King of Portugal and Algarve,<br> +&c.</i> </p> +<p>It hath seemed to me, most high and mighty prince, our dread king +and sovereign, so important and weighty a matter to undertake a +history of the great and valiant actions which our Portuguese have +performed in the discovery and conquest of India, that I often +thought to relinquish the attempt. But as these noble deeds were +principally undertaken and performed for the glory of Almighty God, +the conversion of the barbarous nations to the Christian faith, and +the great honour of your highness; and as, by the power and mercy of +the Omnipotent, such fortunate success has been granted to these +famous enterprises, I have been encouraged to proceed. I therefore +trust entirely to the aid and comfort of the divine goodness in +publishing this work, giving the glory thereof to God alone, and its +earthly praise to your excellent highness, and the king Don Manuel +your father, of famous and happy memory.</p> +<p>Although these glorious deeds are well known and spread abroad +over the world, they yet cannot be sufficiently made manifest unless +set forth in writing, by means of which their memory may endure for +ever, and remain always as if present to the readers; as history hath +perpetuated the actions of the Greeks and Romans which are of such +high antiquity. Of other transactions, nothing inferior to theirs, +perhaps even far greater, which have been performed by other nations, +there is little or no memory, because these do not remain recorded by +history: Such are those of the Assyrians, Medes and Persians; of the +Africans against the Romans; of the Suevi against Julius Caesar; of +the Spaniards in recovering their country from the Moors; and +principally of these invincible and pious kings of Portugal, your +glorious ancestors, Don Alonso Henriques, Don Sancho his son, and Don +Alonso, who acquired the kingdoms of Portugal and Algarve by great +and wonderful deeds of arms. Of all which, there hardly remaineth any +memory, for want of having been duly recorded by writing. So likewise +of those actions which have been performed in India, only as it were +of yesterday, the exact memory of them is confined to four persons; +and if they were to die, all remembrance of these transactions must +have ended to their great dishonour. Considering these things, I +resolved to record these noble deeds which the subjects of your +highness have performed in the discovery and conquest of India, which +have never been surpassed in valour, or even equalled, in any age or +country. Leaving all mention of the conquests of Cyrus and other +barbarians, and even taking into the account the deeds of Alexander, +so famous over all the world, which are as nothing compared to what +has been performed since India became frequented by the Portuguese, +no more than a dead lion can be likened to one alive. The conquests +of Alexander were all by land, and achieved by himself in person, +against nations who were little trained or accustomed to feats of +arms. But the Portuguese conquest of India was performed by the +captains of your highness, after a voyage by sea of a year and eight +months, going almost around the globe, from the utmost limits of the +west through the vast and bottomless ocean, seeing only the heaven +and the water; a thing never before attempted by man, and hardly even +imagined. After surmounting hunger and thirst, and daily exposure to +furious storms, and a thousand dangers in the voyage; they had to +encounter great and cruel battles on their arrival in India; not +against men armed only with bows and spears, as in the time of +Alexander, but with people of stout and tried courage and experienced +in war, having ordinance and fire-workers more numerous even than the +Portuguese, besides many other excellent weapons. The power of these +men, against whom the subjects of your highness had to contend, was +infinitely greater than that of King Porus, against whom Alexander +had to encounter; yet the Portuguese, though few in number, uniformly +had the victory, and never retired from the war as was done by +Alexander.</p> +<p>Leaving the actions of the Greeks, and considering what was +performed by the Romans with their innumerable armies and vast +fleets, which seemed to cover the face of the sea, and by means of +which they thought to have conquered the whole earth. Yet they never +adventured beyond the Red Sea; neither was the greatest of their +famous victories comparable to those battles which have been fought +by our men in India; in which, most invincible prince, the great +prosperity of your father and you is well known. As, without moving +from your palace, discoveries and conquests have been achieved by +your captains, more extensive than ever were discovered or conquered +by any prince in person. There never was any conquest, either by the +Barbarians, Greeks, or Romans, of any thing like equal difficulty +with this of India; neither any kings or captains of any of these +nations equal in valour and conduct to those of your father and +yourself, as will manifestly appear from the whole tenor of the +following history.</p> +<p>The great actions which the subjects of your highness have +worthily accomplished, must be deemed to have been permitted and +appointed by the providence of God; that so those barbarians, with +their vain idols, and the false sectaries of Mahomet, might be +brought into the catholic faith, as at this time great numbers have +been added to the Christian religion. For, since these great +exploits, your highness, as a most godly and Christian prince, hath +taken especial care, and hath given command that the Christian +doctrine of the <i>brotherhood of the company of Jesus</i> should be +taught in India, which you ordered to be brought from Rome, and have +always supported at your expence. Thus likewise, you have erected, +and founded the noble and sumptuous university of Coimbra, to augment +the honour and reputation of your kingdom; where, besides many +divines and colleges of poor begging friars to expound the +evangelical law, there are temporal men also to instruct those of +your subjects that defend and enlarge the commonwealth by deeds of +arms, and those who adorn the same by means of learning.</p> +<p>All these heroic virtues of your highness being well known to me, +have encouraged me to publish this work and others, which have some +taste of learning, that they may remain a perpetual memorial of the +noble deeds of so many gentlemen and knights of Portugal, your +subjects. In this I have been much forwarded by having been in India, +where I sojourned with my father, who was sent into that country by +your highness as a judge. I spent all my youth in the pursuit of +learning, and in the study of ancient historians. Being in India, I +set myself with all diligence to learn and understand all that had +been done in regard to the discovery and conquest of that country by +the Portuguese, with the intention of making the same known and +common to all men. By my inquiries, and through the information +derived from sundry gentlemen and captains, both such as were +actually present in the various transactions, and employed in their +execution, as by others who were engaged in counselling and preparing +the means of their being performed, I have derived much authentic +information; as, likewise, by the perusal of many letters and +memorials, which were written by men of credit and reputation, all of +which I have examined as evidences of the authenticity of my work, +both while in India and since my return into Portugal. As the matters +I meant to write of were many, so it became necessary for me to +acquire information from many sources; and as those whom I examined +were upon oath, it is lawful for me to bring them forward as sure +evidence. In these researches some of these men had to be sought +after in almost every part of Portugal; and being separated in sundry +places, my inquiries have occasioned great travel of my person, and +much expence; to which I have devoted the greater part of my life, +and have constituted the preparation for this work my sole +recreation. Since my residence in the university of Coimbra, in the +service of your highness, I have joined together all these +informations; which, together with the duties of my office, have +caused much toil both of body and mind. Having now accomplished the +composition of this book and others, I most humbly offer the same to +your highness; and, after many and most fortunate years of governing, +I pray God to take you from the transitory seignory of this earth, +and to receive you into the perpetual joys of Heaven.</p> +<p> <i>Hernan Lopes de Castaneda.</i> </p> +<p>SECTION I.</p> +<p> <i>Previous steps taken by the King of Portugal, John II. +preparatory to the Discovery of India.</i> </p> +<p>Don John, the second of that name, and thirteenth king of +Portugal, considering that all spices, drugs, precious stones, and +other riches which came from Venice, were brought out of the east, +and being a prince of great penetration, and high emprize, he was +greatly desirous to enlarge his kingdom, and to propagate the +knowledge of the Christian faith to distant regions. He resolved, +therefore, to discover the way by sea to the country whence such +prodigious riches were brought, that his subjects might thereby be +enriched, and that his kingdom might acquire those commodities which +had hitherto been brought by way of Venice. He was much encouraged to +this enterprise, by learning that there were Christians in India, +governed by a powerful monarch called Presbyter John, who was +reported to be a Christian prince, and to whom he thought proper to +send ambassadors, that an intercourse of friendship might be +established between them and their subjects. He consulted, therefore, +with the cosmographers of the time, whom he directed to proceed +according to the example already given in sailing along the coast of +Guinea, which had been formerly discovered by command of the prince +his uncle, Master of the order of Christ. Accordingly, Bartholomew +Diaz, one of the officers of the royal storehouse at Lisbon, was sent +upon this expedition, who discovered that great and monstrous cape, +now called of Good Hope, which was unknown to our ancestors. Finding +it both terrible and dangerous, he yet passed 140 leagues beyond, to +a river which he named <i>Rio del Infante</i> , whence he returned +into Portugal. In this voyage, Diaz gave those names which they still +retain, to the ports, harbours, and rivers where he took in fresh +water, and erected certain marks, with crosses, and the royal arms of +Portugal, the last of which was placed on a rock named <i>El pennol de +la Cruz</i> , fifteen leagues on this side of the before mentioned +river. Diaz returned from this voyage without having procured any +intelligence concerning India, as all the inhabitants of the coast +which he visited and discovered were ignorant black savages.</p> +<p>On the return of Diaz, king John resolved to attempt the discovery +of India by land; for which purpose he had formerly sent friar +Antonio de Lisboa by land, in company with a lay person; but as they +were ignorant of the Arabic language, they could not travel into +those parts, and went no farther than Jerusalem, whence they returned +into Portugal, without having acquired any knowledge of the object of +their journey. Yet the king continued to prosecute this discovery of +India by land, for which he employed two of his own servants, Pedro +de Covillian and Alonso de Payva, both versant in the Arabic +language, who were instructed to search out the dominions of +Presbyter John, and the country whence the spices and drugs were +brought to Venice, and to inquire whether there were any navigation +from the southern extremity of Africa to India. To these men he gave +a chart, which was extracted from a map of the world, by Calsadilla, +bishop of Viseo, an eminent astronomer. He gave them likewise a +general letter of credit and safe conduct, requiring them to be +assisted and protected, and supplied with money, in whatever kingdoms +or countries they might travel; ordering them to receive 400 crowns +from the chest of the orchard of Almeryn, for their charges. Of this +sum, they took what they deemed necessary to bear their expences till +their arrival at Valentia in Arragon, placing the rest in the bank of +Bartholomew of Florence, to be repaid at Valentia.</p> +<p>Receiving their audience of leave from King John, in presence of +Don Manuel, duke of Viseo, afterwards king, they departed from +Santaxen on the 7th May 1487, and came to Naples on St Johns day of +that year; whence they were forwarded by the sons of Cosmo de Medici, +and went to Rhodes, and thence to Alexandria. From this place they +travelled as merchants to Cairo, whence they went in company with +certain Moors of Fez and Tremesen to Toro, a harbour on the Arabian +coast of the Red Sea. They here learned many things respecting the +Indies, and of the trade from the Red Sea to Calicut; and, going from +Toro to a place on the coast of Ethiopia, they went to the port of +Aden. The travellers here separated, Alonso de Payva passing over to +the emperor of Ethiopia, erroneously called Presbyter John: For he, +of whom Marco Polo speaks, under that title, as governing all the +Indies, and whose country joins with the great khan of Kathay, was +vanquished and slain in a battle by that sovereign; at which time his +kingdom was put an end to, and no one of that race or title has since +reigned. Yet Alonso de Payva actually believed that the emperor of +Ethiopia was Presbyter John, having learnt that he was a Christian +king over a Christian nation, as shall be more particularly declared +hereafter. At their separation they agreed to meet again at Cairo, +when each had executed his part of the royal orders.</p> +<p>Pedro de Covillian sailed from Aden for the Indies, in a ship +belonging to the Moors of Cananor, and went to Calicut and the island +of Goa, where he acquired complete information respecting the spices +of India, the commodities which come from other places, and the towns +of the Indies; the names of all which he inserted, but ill written, +in his chart. From India he went to Sofala, where he procured +information respecting the great island of St Lawrence, called the +Island of the Moon by the Moors. Observing that the natives of Sofala +were black, like those of Guinea, he concluded, that all the coast +between was under subjection to the Negroes, and consequently that +navigation was practicable from Guinea to Sofala, and thence to the +Indies. Returning from Sofala, he went to Ormus, and thence to Cairo, +where he learnt that Alonso de Payva was dead, and meant to have +returned to Portugal. He chanced to meet at Cairo two Spanish jews, +Rabbi Abraham, a native of Viseo, and Joseph, born in Lamego; who, +after the departure of Covillian and Payva from Portugal, had told +the king that they had been in Cairo, where they had received much +information concerning Ormus, and of its trade with the Indies. From +these Jews Covillian received letters from the king, directed to him +and Payva, ordering them to return along with the Jews, if they had +seen all that he had given them in charge. If they had not executed +all his original instructions, they were now directed to send by the +Jews an exact account of all the knowledge they had acquired, and to +use their utmost efforts to visit Presbyter John, and to give all the +information in their power respecting Ormus, to Rabbi Abraham, who +had sworn by his law not to return to Portugal without visiting that +place.</p> +<p>On receiving these letters, Covillian changed his intention of +returning into Portugal, and dispatched Joseph there with letters to +the king, giving an account of all that he had seen and learnt in +India and Sofala, and transmitted the chart on which he had inserted +all the places he had visited. In these letters he informed the king +that the emperor of Ethiopia was assuredly the same with Presbyter +John; but my opinion is that this is an error, as this sovereign has +no such name in his own dominions, as I shall more clearly shew +hereafter. On the departure of Joseph, Covillian and Rabbi Abraham +went to Ormus, and thence back to the Red Sea; whence Covillian sent +Abraham into Portugal, with letters to the king, containing all the +information acquired in this part of the expedition, and intimating +his determination to go into the dominions of Presbyter John. This he +accordingly did, and came to the presence of the then emperor of +Ethiopia, named Alexander, to whom he delivered the letters with +which he had been entrusted by the king of Portugal for that monarch. +Alexander received him courteously, and seemed much pleased with the +letters of the king of Portugal, as being from so very distant a +Christian prince, yet did not seem to attach much credit or +importance to them. But he gave all honour, and many gifts to +Covillian.</p> +<p>When Covillian was ready to depart from Ethiopia, and awaited +leave for that purpose, which he had solicited, Alexander died, and +was succeeded by a new emperor named <i>Nahu</i> , who could never be +prevailed on to allow of his departure; neither could he procure +leave for that purpose from the next emperor, David, the son of Nahu, +so that Covillian had to remain in Ethiopia, and never returned into +Portugal. From that time King John never heard more of him, and +therefore concluded that he was dead; nothing having ever been +received from him respecting his travels, except what was contained +in the letters carried by the Jews, as before mentioned.</p> +<p>There came afterwards to Lisbon, a friar from this country of +Presbyter John, who was received courteously by the king, and on +whose reports of great things concerning that country, the king +determined to proceed in making a discovery of the way to the Indies +by sea. He accordingly gave orders to John de Bragança, his +surveyor of the forests, to cut down timber for building two small +ships for that voyage. But King John died, and was succeeded by King +Manuel, of glorious memory, who had been chosen by Divine Providence +to accomplish the discovery of these countries, by which the +Christian faith hath been greatly extended, the royal house of +Portugal much honoured, and the subjects wonderfully enriched.</p> +<p>SECTION II.</p> +<p> <i>Narrative of the first Voyage of Vasco de Gama to India and +back, in the years 1497, 1498, and 1499</i> .</p> +<p>On the death of King John, he was succeeded by Don Manuel, a +prince of a great mind, bent upon high enterprise, and prone to +undertake and execute things beyond the ordinary reach of human +knowledge, even more than was Alexander the Great. Being exceedingly +desirous to prosecute the discovery of the Indies, which had been +begun by his predecessor, and proceeding upon the information left +him by King John, relative to that navigation, he commanded Fernan +Lorenzo, treasurer of the house of Mina, to cause construct two ships +for this voyage, from the timber which had been provided by King +John. These were named the Angel Gabriel and the San Raphael, the +former being of the burden of 120 tons, the latter 100. In addition +to these, a caravel of 50 tons, called the Berrio, and a ship of 200 +tons were purchased. In the year 1497, the king appointed Vasco de la +Gama, as chief captain for the voyage, an experienced navigator, who +had done great service, and a man of great valour, well fitted for +executing the great enterprize intended by the king. Paulo de la +Gama, brother to the captain-general, and Nicholas Coello, both men +of valour and enterprise, were appointed the other captains of the +squadron. Bartholomew Diaz was likewise commanded to accompany the +squadron of discovery in a caravel to the Mirna: And as the three +ships of war appointed for the voyage could not contain a sufficient +supply of provisions for their crews, the ship of 200 tons, which had +been purchased from Ayres Correa, was ordered to accompany de Gama to +a place called St Blaze, at which the squadron was to take in water, +where the victuals with which she was loaded were to be distributed +to the other ships, after which she was ordered to be burnt.</p> +<p>Having received their orders, Vasco de la Gama and the other +captains took their leave of the king at <i>Monte mayor</i> , and +departed for Lisbon, where he embarked his company of 148 persons, at +Belem, on Saturday the 8th of July 1497. At this embarkation all the +religious belonging to the church of our Lady at Belem, went in +procession in their cowls, bare- headed, and carrying wax candles, +praying for the success of the expedition; accompanied by almost the +whole people of Lisbon, weeping and deploring the fate of those who +now embarked, as devoted to certain death in the attempt of so +dangerous a voyage. Thus commended to God and good fortune, the +officers and crews embarked and immediately set sail. Vasco de la +Gama, the captain-general, took the command in the Angel Gabriel, of +which Pedro de Alenquer was pilot, who had been in the same capacity +with Diaz when he passed the Cape of Good Hope, and discovered +the <i>Rio del Infante</i> . Paulo de Gama went captain of the San +Raphael, Nicholas Coello of the caravel Berrio, and Gonsalo Gomes[1], +a servant of Vasco de la Gama, commanded the large victualling ship. +The captain-general gave out instructions, that in case of +separation, they should keep their course for Cape Verd, which was +appointed as their rendezvous.</p> +<blockquote>[1] By Mr Clarke this person is named Gonçalo +Nunez.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[22] De Faria alleges that the people of this river were +not so black as the other Africans, and wore habits of different +kinds of stuffs, both cotton and silk, of various colours, and that +they understood Arabic; and adds, that they informed De Gama there +were white people to the eastwards, who sailed in ships like those of +the Portuguese. Osorius likewise says, that one of the natives spoke +Arabic very imperfectly, and that De Gama left two of his convicts at +this place, which he called San Rafael.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>Proceeding on the voyage, they came in sight of the Canaries in +eight days, whence steering for Rio de Oro, they were separated by a +tempest, during an exceedingly dark night, on which they all shaped +their course for Cabo Verde. Paulo de la Gama, Nicholas Coello, +Bartholomew Diaz, and Gonsalo Gomes rejoined, and sailed together for +eight days, when they came in sight of the captain-general on +Wednesday evening, and saluted him with many guns, and the sound of +trumpets, all heartily rejoicing for their safe meeting and good +fortune in this their first essay of danger. Next day, being the 20th +of July[2], the fleet reached the islands of St Jago, and came to +anchor in the bay of Santa Maria, where it remained seven days, +taking in fresh water, and repairing the yards and other parts of +their rigging which had been damaged in the late storm. On Tuesday +the 3d of August[3], the captain-general went on his voyage, after +taking leave of Diaz, who now returned to Portugal. Proceeding for +the Cape of Good Hope with all his squadron, de la Gama <i>entered the +gulf into the sea</i> [4], and sailed all August, September, and +October, suffering many great tempests of violent wind and rain, so +that they often expected instant death. At length, on Saturday the +4th November, they got sight of land at nine in the forenoon, at +which they were greatly rejoiced; and being all together, the +captains saluted the general, all dressed in their best array, and +having their ships all decorated with flags. Not knowing the coasts +they sailed along until the Tuesday following, when they had a +perfect view of a low shore, in which was a great bay, that appeared +convenient for the ships to take in water, into which they all +entered and came to anchor. This place was afterwards named <i>Angra +de Santa Elena</i> , or St Helen's bay[5]. The people of the country, +as our men afterwards found, were small, black, ill-favoured savages, +clothed in the skins of beasts, somewhat like French cloaks, having +curious wrought wooden cases for their privities; and in speaking +they seemed always, sighing. These natives were armed with oak +staves, hardened in the fire, pointed with the horns of beasts, +somewhat burnt or hardened with fire, which served them for swords. +They lived on the roots of herbs, and on sea wolves and whales, which +are very numerous in this country, likewise on sea crows and gulls. +They also eat of certain beasts, which they call Gazelas, and other +beasts and birds which the land produces; and they have dogs which +bark like those of Portugal. The general, after the squadron was +brought to anchor, sent Coello in a boat along the shore, in search +of water, which he found four leagues from the anchoring ground, at a +place which he named St. Jago,[6] whence all the ships provided +themselves with fresh water.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Mr Clarke alleges, that Lichefield, our original +translator, has fallen into an error in this date, which ought to +have been the 28th July.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] If Saturday were the 5th July, on which the fleet +sailed from Lisbon, the 3d of August must have been on Thursday. But +it does not seem necessary to insist upon such minute critical +accuracy; which, besides, is unattainable.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] This strange expression probably means, that Gama +stretched directly across the gulf of Guinea, not creeping as usual +along the coast, and endeavoured to make a direct course for the Cape +of Good Hope.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] Our old English translator, Lichefield, strangely +mistakes in calling this place the <i>island</i> of Sancta Haelena; +which is assuredly St Elena bay, in lat. 32° 40' S. It has since +been sometimes named St Martin's bay, but the proper and general name +is the bay of St Elena, the S. W. point of entry being called St +Martin's Point.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] Perhaps the Berg river, at the bottom of St Elena +bay.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Next day, the general with the other captains, escorted by some of +the people, went on shore to view the natives, and to endeavour to +learn what distance the Cape of Good Hope was from thence; for the +chief pilot, who had been on the voyage with Diaz, had departed +thence on returning, in the morning, into the open sea, with a fair +wind, and had passed it during the night, and had not come near the +shore when outward bound; wherefore he did not certainly know its +situation, nor was he acquainted with its appearance, but conjectured +it might be thirty leagues from where they then were at the utmost. +When the general was on shore, he overtook one of the natives, who +was going to gather honey at the foot of a bush, where it is +deposited by the bees without any hive. With this person, he returned +to the ship, thinking to have got an interpreter, but no one on board +the squadron could understand his language. The general commanded +this man to have meat and drink, and set him on shore next day well +dressed, that he might return satisfied to his countrymen. +Accordingly, the day following, this man came down to the shore +abreast of the ships, with about fifteen more natives, and the +general went ashore, carrying with him spices, gold, and pearls, to +try if these people had any knowledge of these things. But from the +little estimation with which these articles were viewed, it was +concluded that the natives had no knowledge of them. The general +distributed among the natives some small bells, tin rings, counters, +and such toys, which they received joyfully; and from that time till +next Saturday morning, great numbers of the natives resorted to the +fleet, whence they went back to their towns. One Fernan Veloso craved +leave of the general to accompany the natives to their habitations, +that he might see their manner of living. On going along with them, +the natives took a sea wolf which they roasted at the foot of a hill +for their supper, after which they made Veloso return to the fleet, +and it appeared to him that the natives had armed themselves, meaning +to attack our people. On his return, Veloso saw that he was secretly +followed, wherefore he hastened to the shore and hailed the ships. On +this, the general who was then at supper, looked out towards the +land, where he saw numbers of the savages following Veloso. He +therefore gave orders for all the ships to be in readiness against an +attack, and went himself on shore with several others unarmed, not +dreading any harm. On seeing our boats coming towards the shore, the +savages began to run away with much clamour; but when our people +landed, they returned and set upon them furiously, throwing their +darts, and using other weapons, which constrained our people to take +to their boats in all haste, taking Veloso along with them; yet in +this scuffle the general and three others were wounded. The Negroes +returned to their towns; and during four days after, while our ships +remained in the bay, they never saw any more of the natives, so that +they had no opportunity to revenge the injury they had done.</p> +<p>"Some commerce took place between the Portuguese and the Hottentot +natives around St Elena Bay, by means of signs and gestures; when the +fleet received plenty of excellent fresh provisions, in exchange for +clothes, hawks bells, glass beads, and other toys; but this friendly +intercourse was interrupted through the imprudence of a Portuguese +young man named Veloso. Delighted with the novelty of the scene, and +anxious to see the manners of the natives more intimately, he +obtained permission to accompany them to their huts, where a sea calf +was dressed in the Hottentot fashion, to his great astonishment. +Disgusted at their loathsome cookery, he rose abruptly, and was +impatient to depart, and was accompanied by the natives on his way +back to the ships with the utmost good humour. Veloso, however, +became apprehensive of personal danger, and horridly vociferated for +assistance on his approach to the shore. Coellos boat immediately put +off to bring him on board, and the natives fled to the woods. These +needless apprehensions on both sides were increased by mutual +ignorance of each others language, and led to hostilities. While De +Gama was taking the altitude of the sun with an astrolabe, some +Hottentots sprung from an ambush, and threw their spears, headed with +horn, very dexterously among the Portuguese, by which the general and +several others were wounded. On this occasion, the Portuguese deemed +it prudent to retreat to their ships[7]."</p> +<blockquote>[7] This paragraph is added to relation of Castenada from +the works of Faria and Osorius.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>Having taken in fresh water and provisions in St Elena Bay, the +squadron left that place on the forenoon of Thursday the 16th +November, with the wind at S.S.W. and steered for the Cape of Good +Hope, and on the evening of the following Saturday came in sight of +that cape. But on account of the wind being contrary, he had to stand +out to sea all day, and turned towards the land as night set in. In +that manner he continued plying to windward until the following +Wednesday, which was the 20th of November[8], when he doubled the +cape with a fair wind, sounding the trumpets of all the ships, and +making every demonstration of joy, but placing the chief confidence +in God, that his providence would guide and protect them in +accomplishing the enterprise in which they were engaged.</p> +<blockquote>[8] If the Thursday on which they came in sight of the +Cape were the 16th, the Wednesday following must have been the 22nd +of the month.--E.</blockquote> +<p>"In this part of the voyage the greatest proofs of courage and +resolution were evinced by De Gama. While endeavouring to double this +formidable and almost unknown cape, owing to contrary winds and +stormy weather, the waves rose mountain high. At one time his ships +were heaved up to the clouds, and seemed the next moment precipitated +into the bottomless abyss of the ocean. The wind was piercingly cold, +and so boisterous that the commands of the pilot could seldom be +heard amid the din of the warring elements; while the dismal and +almost constant darkness increased the danger of their situation. +Sometimes the gale drove them irresistibly to the southwards, while +at other times they had to lay to, or to tack to windward, +difficultly preserving the course they had already made. During any +gloomy intervals of cessation from the tempest, the sailors, +exhausted by fatigue, and abandoned to despair, surrounded De Gama, +entreating him not to devote himself and them to inevitable +destruction, as the gale could no longer be weathered, and they must +all be buried in the waves if he persisted in the present course. The +firmness of the general was not to be shaken by the pusillanimity and +remonstrances of the crew, on which a formidable conspiracy was +entered into against him, of which he received timely information +from his brother Paulo. With his assistance, and that of a few who +remained stedfast to their duty, the leading conspirators, and even +all the pilots, were put in irons; whilst De Gama, and his small +remnant of faithful followers remained day and night at the helm, +undismayed at the dangers and difficulties that surrounded them. At +length, on Wednesday the 20th November, all the squadron safely +doubled the tremendous promontory[9]."</p> +<blockquote>[9] This paragraph is an addition to the text of +Castaneda from Osorius-- Clarke, I. 342</blockquote> +<p>Continuing the voyage along the coast beyond the cape, they saw +great numbers of large and small cattle as they passed, all well +grown and fat; but could perceive no towns, as the villages inhabited +by the natives are all farther inland, the houses being of earth +covered with straw. The natives were all somewhat black, clothed like +those they had seen at St Elena Bay, speaking the same language, and +using similar darts, together with some other kinds of arms, both for +defence and assault. The country is very pleasant, being diversified +with wood and water; and adjoining to the cape on the east side, they +found a great harbour now called False Bay, almost six leagues wide +at the mouth, and running about as much into the land. Having thus +doubled the cape, the squadron came, on the Sunday after, being St +Katherine's day, 25th November, to the watering-place of St +Blaze[10], which is sixty leagues beyond the cape, and is a very +large bay, exceeding safe in all winds except the north[11].</p> +<blockquote>[10] From the circumstances in the text, this +watering-place of St Blaze is probably what is now called St +Katherines or St Sebastians Bay; yet that place hardly exceeds +forty-seven Portuguese leagues east from the cape. The sixty leagues +of the text would carry us almost a degree farther east, to what is +now called Kaffercroyts river. Clarke removes this place still +farther to Flesh Bay, otherwise called Angra de St Braz, or Aguada de +St Braz by De Barros. This latter place is seventy Portuguese +leagues, or above eighty marine leagues east from the cape. +--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[11] This account seems erroneous, whether St Katherines +or Flesh Bay be the one in question, as both ought to be safe in +north winds, and the winds between the S and E points give both a lee +shore.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The natives here resembled those already seen in dress and arms. +The country produces many large elephants, and numerous oxen, of vast +size and extremely fat, some of which have no horns. On some of the +fattest of these the natives were seen riding, on pannels stuffed +with rye straw, as is used in Spain, and having a frame of wood like +a saddle. Such of them as they choose to sell they mark by means of a +piece of wood, like the shaft of one of their arrows, put through the +nose. In this harbour, about three cross-bow shots from the shore, +there is a rock much frequented by sea wolves, as large as great +bears, very wild and fierce, with long, great teeth. These animals +are very dangerous, and will attack men, and their skins are so hard +as not to be pierced with spears, unless pushed with much force and +valour. These animals resemble lions, and their young bleat like +kids. One day that our men went to this rock for amusement, they saw +at least three thousand of these animals, old and young. On this rock +also, there are great numbers of birds as large as ducks which do not +fly, having no feathers in their wings, and which bray like so many +asses[12].</p> +<blockquote>[12] Probably a species of Penguins: Lichefield calls +them <i>stares</i> , as large as ducks; Osorius says the natives called +them <i>satiliario</i> , and that they were as big as +geese.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Having thus arrived at the Bay of St Blaze, and lying there at +anchor, the general caused all the provisions to be taken out of the +store-ship and divided among the others, and then burned the +store-ship, as the king had ordered. In this business and other +needful employments, for their safety in the remainder of the voyage, +they were occupied in that bay for ten days. On the Friday after +their arrival, about ninety of the natives made their appearance, +some on the shore, and others on the hills, on which the general and +the captains went to the shore, having their boats crews well armed, +and even taking ordinance with them, to avoid the same accident which +had happened at St Elena bay. When near the shore, the general threw +some bells on the land, which the Negroes pickt up, and some of them +came so near as to take the bells out of his hands. He much wondered +at this familiarity, as Diaz had informed him when he was in those +parts, the natives all ran away and would never approach near enough +to be seen and conversed with. Finding them thus gentle, contrary to +his expectation, he went on land with his men, and bartered red +night- caps with the Negroes, for ivory bracelets which they wore on +their arms. Next Saturday, the natives came to the shore to the +number of more than two hundred, including their children, and +brought with them twelve oxen, and four sheep. When our people went +on shore, some of the natives began to play on four flutes, in four +several tones, making good music; on which the general caused the +trumpets to be sounded, and the natives danced with our people. Thus +the day passed in mirth and feasting, and in purchasing their oxen +and sheep. On Sunday a still greater number of the natives came down +to the shore, having several women among them, and bringing a number +of oxen for sale. After the sale of one of the oxen, some of our +people noticed some young Negroes hidden among certain bushes, who +had with them the weapons of the older people, from which it was +conjectured that some treason was intended. Upon this, the general +caused our people to remove to a place of greater security, and were +followed by the Negroes to the landing place. The Negroes now +gathered together, as if they meant to fight the Portuguese; on which +the general, being unwilling to harm them, embarked in the boats with +all his people, and then commanded two pieces of brass ordnance to be +fired off, on which they were much amazed and scampered off in +confusion, leaving their weapons behind. After this, the general +ordered a cross or pillar, having the arms of Portugal to be set upon +the shore, but the Negroes pulled it down immediately, even before +our people retired.</p> +<p>After remaining ten days here, as before mentioned, the fleet set +sail for the Rio del Infante, on Friday the 8th December, being the +Conception of our Lady, and during this part of the voyage, there +arose a great storm with <i>forewind</i> on the eve of St Lucy, 12th +December, that all the ships run under close reefed courses. During +this storm, they parted company with Nicholas Coello, but rejoined +the next night after. On the 16th December, when the gale abated, +they discovered land near certain small rocks, sixty leagues from the +harbour of St Blaze, and five leagues from the Pennon de la Cruz, +where Diaz set up his last stone pillar[13], and fifteen leagues +short of the Rio del Infante[14]. This country was very pleasant, and +abounded in cattle, becoming more sightly and with higher trees the +further our fleet sailed towards the east, as could be easily seen +from the ships as they sailed along near the shore. On Saturday they +passed close within sight of the rock <i>de la Cruz</i> , and being +loath to pass the <i>Rio del Infante</i> , they stood out to sea till +vespers, when the wind came round to the east, right contrary. On +this, the general stood off, and on plying to windward, till Tuesday +the 20th December, at sunset, when the wind changed to the west, +which was favourable. Next day at ten o'clock, they came to the +before-mentioned rock, being sixty leagues a-stern of the place they +wished to have attained[15].</p> +<blockquote>[13] Probably Rock Point, forming the western boundary of +Algoa or Zwartkops bay, in long. 27° E. bring the rocky extreme +promontory of the Krakakamma ridge.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[14] It is infinitely difficult to guess the course of +these early voyages, without latitudes or longitudes, and only +estimated distances by dead reckoning in uncertain leagues; but the +Rio del Infante of this voyage and that of Diaz, is probably that now +called Great-fish river, in the Zuureveld of Graaff Reynet, in long. +28° 20' E and which, however, is twenty-six Portuguese leagues, +or thirty geographical leagues from Rocky Point, instead of the +fifteen leagues of the text.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[15] The sixty leagues in the text are inexplicable on +any rational supposition, as they seem to have again made the Rocks +de la Cruz, or rather Rocky Point, said just before to be only +fifteen leagues from Infante river, to which they were then +bound.--E.</blockquote> +<p>This rock is the cause of the great currents on this coast, which +were so powerful, that the fleet had much ado with a brisk favourable +wind to stem the current between that place and Rio Infante in three +or four days; but at length they joyfully passed these currents +without damage, as Diaz had done formerly, and the general, +encouraged by his good fortune, gave thanks to God, saying, he verily +believed it was the good pleasure of God that they should attain to +the discovery of the Indies.</p> +<p>Thus continuing the voyage till Christmas day, they had discovered +seventy leagues to the eastwards, and had arrived in the latitude in +which India was said to be in his instructions. The fleet continued +to sail for so long a time without going to land, as to be in want of +water, insomuch that they had to dress their provisions in sea water, +and were forced to reduce the allowance of drink to one pint of water +per man each day. But on Friday the 11th January 1498, drawing near +the land, the boats were sent out to view the coast, where they saw +many Negroes, both men and women, all of whom were of great stature, +and followed our boats along the coast. As these people appeared +quiet and civil, the general called Martin Alonzo, who could speak +many of the Negro languages, and desired him and another to leap on +shore, which they immediately did. Alonzo and his companion were well +received by the natives, especially by their chief, to whom the +general sent a jacket, a pair of breeches, and a cap, all of a red +colour, and a copper bracelet, of which he was very proud, and +returned thanks to the general, saying, "that he might have any thing +he wished for or needed that his country produced." All which, as +Martin Alonzo understood their language[16], he reported to the +general, who was much pleased that by this means an intercourse could +be opened with the natives. Alonzo and another of our people were +accordingly permitted by the general to go for one night along with +the natives to their town, where the chief dressed himself out in his +new garments, and was beheld with much admiration by his people in +his finery, clapping their hands for joy. This salutation was +repeated three or four times on their way to the town, and when +there, the chief made the circuit of the whole village, that all the +people might see and admire his new and strange attire. When this +ceremonial was ended, the chief retired to his own house, where he +commanded Alonzo and his companion to be well lodged and entertained, +and gave them for supper a hen exactly the same as one of ours, and a +kind of pap, or porridge, made of a yellow grain +called <i>Mylyo</i> [17], of which likewise they made bread. Many of +the Negroes repaired that night to their lodging to have a near view +of the strangers; and next day, the chief sent them back to the +ships, accompanied by some Negroes, laden with hens for the general, +who returned thanks for the same by means of Alonzo his interpreter. +During five days that our ships remained off this coast, no kind of +harm was done or offered by the inhabitants, who seemed quiet and +gentle, and to have many <i>noble men</i> , for which reason, he called +this place <i>Terra da boa gente</i> , or the land of Good People[18]. +The town in which Martin Alonzo was had its houses constructed of +straw, yet well furnished within. The women were more numerous than +the men, as in a company of forty women, there were only twenty men. +These people were armed with long bows and arrows, and had darts +headed with iron, having many copper bracelets, on their arms and +legs, with copper ornaments in their hair. They have also iron +daggers, with pewter handles and ivory sheaths; so that it is +manifest they have plenty of copper and tin. They have likewise +abundance of salt, which they make from sea water, which they carry +in gourds to certain caves where the salt is made. They were so fond +of linen, that they gave a great quantity of copper in exchange for +an old shirt, and were so quiet and civil, that they brought water to +our boats from a river about two cross-bow shots from the landing, +which our people named Rio do Cobre, or Copper River.</p> +<blockquote>[16] The Portuguese ships appear to have been now on the +coast of Natal, or the land of the Caffres, certainly a more +civilized people than the Hottentots of the cape. But the +circumstance of Alonzo understanding their language is quite +inexplicable: as he could hardly have been lower on the western coast +than Minz, or perhaps Congo. Yet, as a belt of Caffres are said to +cross the continent of Africa, to the north of the Hottentots, it is +barely possible that some Caffre slaves may have reached the western +coast.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[17] This grain was probably what is now well known under +the name of millet.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[18] According to Barros, <i>Aguada da boa +Paz</i> .--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>"Osorius places the arrival of the Portuguese on this part of the +coast a day earlier than Castaneda, and gives the following +additional information. On the 10th January 1498, they discovered +some small islands, about 230 miles from their last watering-place, +having a very beautiful appearance, and consisting of verdant +meadows, intermixed with groves of lofty trees, where they could see +the inhabitants walking on the shore in great numbers. Here De Gama +landed, and sent one of his men, who was well versant in the Negro +languages to visit the king, and who was received with much civility, +receiving presents of the produce of the country on his dismissal. +Before leaving Lisbon, De Gama received ten malefactors on board who +had been condemned to die, but were pardoned on condition of going on +this voyage, for the purpose of being left wherever De Gama pleased, +that they might examine the country, and be enabled to give him an +account of the inhabitants on his return. On setting sail from this +place, De Gama left two of these exiles on shore, to inform +themselves of the character and manners of the natives[19].</p> +<blockquote>[19] Gibb's Orosius, I. 50.</blockquote> +<p>From this place our fleet departed on the 15th January, and +proceeding on their voyage, came to another country of very low land, +having very thick tall trees; and proceeding onwards, they found a +river which was very open at the mouth, near which he came to anchor +on Thursday the 24th of January, as the general deemed it proper to +examine this country, and to try if any intelligence could be here +procured concerning India. That same evening, he and his brother +Nicholas Coello[20] entered the river; and, at day-break next +morning, the land was observed to be extremely low and covered with +water, having many trees of great height, thickly loaded with various +kinds of fruits, the country appearing very pleasant. They saw +likewise certain boats with some of the natives coming towards the +ship, at which the general was well pleased, as he conceived from +their having some degree of maritime knowledge in these parts, that +he could not now be very far from India, or at least should soon hear +news of that country. The natives were Negroes of good stature, all +naked, except each a small apron of cloth made of cotton. On reaching +the ships, they came on board without hesitation, and behaved +themselves as if they had been long acquainted with our people. They +were well received, and were presented with bells and other toys, but +did not understand any of the languages spoken by Martin Alonzo, or +any of the other interpreters on board, so that the only intercourse +was by signs. They departed after good entertainment, and afterwards +they and many others returned to the ships in their boats, bringing +with them such provisions as their country afforded. The natives +seemed much satisfied with their reception; and besides those who +came to the ships by water, many others came by land[21], among whom +were several women who were tolerably handsome, especially the young +maidens; but all were as naked as the men. They have three holes in +their lips, in which they wear small pieces of tin by way of +ornament. The natives took several of our men along with them to make +merry at one of their towns, whence they brought water to our +ships.</p> +<blockquote>[20] The text here ought probably to be thus amended, "He +and his brother, <i>with</i> Nicholas Coelle," +&c.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[21] These probably swam off to the +ships.--E.</blockquote> +<p>After the general had been three days in this river, two of the +nobles, or head men of the natives, came on board to visit him, who +were naked like the rest, except that their aprons were much larger, +and one of them had a handkerchief on his head, embroidered with +silk, while the other wore a nightcap of green satin[22]. Observing +their cleanliness, or civility, the general treated these people +courteously, and gave them victuals, apparel, and other things, of +which they seemed to make but small account; and by certain signs, +shewn by a young man, it was understood that his country was at a +considerable distance, where he had seen ships as large as ours. This +intelligence gave great hopes to our people that the Indies were not +far off, which was much confirmed by the chiefs who had been on +board, sending off for sale certain cloths made of cotton, on which +there were marks of ochre. In respect of all these encouraging +tokens, the general named this river <i>Ho rio dos bos Sinaes</i> , or +River of Good Signs; and called the place San Rafael, after the name +of his own Ship[23].</p> +<blockquote>[23] There is no circumstance in the text from which the +situation of this river can even be conjectured. Clarke, p.440, +alleges that it was Soffala; and yet, in a note in his preceding +page, says, "That De Gama seems to have passed Cape Corientes during +the night, and to have kept so far from land, on account of a strong +current setting on shore, as not to have noticed Sofala." In the +notes on the Lusiad, this river of Good Signs is ascertained to have +been one of the mouths of the Zambeze, or Cuama River, which divides +Mocaranga from the coast of Mozambique; the different mouths of which +run into the sea between the latitudes of 19° and 18° +S.--E.</blockquote> +<p>From the signs of the before-mentioned young men, that the country +of the head men who had been on board was far off, where they had +seen large ships, the general concluded that the Indies were still at +a great distance; and therefore determined, in consultation with the +other captains, to lay the ships aground, to give their bottoms a +thorough repair, which was done accordingly. In this operation they +employed thirty-two days, during which, our people were much +afflicted with a grievous sickness, thought to proceed from the air +of the country. Their hands and feet became swelled, and their gums +became so sore and putrid that they could not eat, and the smell of +their breath was quite intolerable[24]. With this pestilent infection +our people were much discouraged, and many of them died, the +survivors being in great trouble and perplexity. But De Gama took +much care, and used much diligence for their recovery, and to comfort +their affliction; continually visiting the sick, and giving them such +wholesome and medicinal things as he had provided for his own use; +through all which many recovered who would have died, and the rest +were thereby greatly comforted, and encouraged.</p> +<blockquote>[24] They were evidently afflicted with the scurvy; and +accordingly De Barros refers the disease to its proper cause, "Having +been for so long a time confined to the use of salt fish and +corrupted biscuit.-- Clarke."</blockquote> +<p>Having repaired the ships, and provided them with all necessaries +that could be procured at the river of Good Signs, the fleet departed +from thence on Saturday the 24th of February.</p> +<p>"At this period, two accidents occurred which had nearly +frustrated all the hopes of this expedition. De Gama being along side +of the ship commanded by his brother, with whom he wished to speak, +had hold of the chains, when the boat was carried from under him by +the force of the current, but by immediate assistance, he and his +boats crew were providentially saved. Soon afterwards, when the fleet +was passing the bar of the river, the ship of De Gama grounded on a +sand bank, and her loss was for some time considered as inevitable; +but she floated again with the return of the tide, and to their +inexpressible joy received no damage[25]."</p> +<blockquote>[25] Addition to the narrative of Castaneda, from De +Barros.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>As there was little or no wind, the fleet stood out to sea to +avoid the shore, and about vespers on Sunday, they descried three +small islands out to sea, about four leagues distant from each other. +Two of these were replenished with trees, but the third was quite +bare. Seeing no cause to delay the voyage in examining these islands, +De Gama held on for six days, coming always to anchor at night. On +the evening of Thursday, the first of March, they came in sight of +four islands, two of which were near the land, and the other two +farther out to sea; and the fleet steered through the channel next +morning, the ship commanded by Coello, as being the smallest, going +first. But endeavouring to enter a certain harbour, between the +mainland and one of these islands, Coello missed the channel and ran +aground, on which the other ships put about and went back. They soon +perceived seven or eight boats under sail coming from the island +which was a good league distant from Coello, at which sight they were +much rejoiced, and Coello and his people received them with much +demonstration of friendship and satisfaction, Coello went along with +these people to the general, and presented them, saying, that here +was a quite different kind of people from any they had seen hitherto. +Then the general commanded <i>to let them go a seaboard with their +boats</i> [26], as he proposed to go with them to their island to +anchor with his ships, that he might see what kind of a country it +was, and if he could learn any certain intelligence concerning India. +But the boats continued to follow our ships, making signals, and +calling to our people to wait for them; wherefore the ships came to +anchor, and the boats came to our fleet. The people on board were of +good stature and somewhat black, clothed in dresses of cotton, +striped with sundry colours; some girdled to their knees, while +others carried their apparel on their shoulders like cloaks. Their +heads were covered with kerchiefs, somewhat wrought with silk and +gold thread, and they were armed with swords and daggers like Moors. +In their boats, also, they had certain musical instruments +named <i>sagbuts</i> . They came immediately on board with as much +confidence as if they were long acquainted, and entered into familiar +conversation in the language of Algarve, and would not be known as +Moors[27].</p> +<blockquote>[26] This obscure expression seems to mean that De Gama +wished them to precede the ships, and point out the way into the +harbour.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[27] This expression has probably been misunderstood by +the original translator. It appears that these Moors of Mozambique +spoke Arabic, here called the language of Algarve, and finding +themselves understood and answered by the strangers, mistook the +Portuguese for Moors.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The general ordered these people to be well entertained, and they +eat and drank willingly of whatever was set before them; after which, +by means of Fernan Alvarez, who could speak their language, he +learned that the island to which they belonged was called +Monsambicke, or Mozambique, on which was a town full of merchants, +who traded with the Moors of India, who bring them silver, linen +cloth, pepper, ginger, silver rings, many pearls, and rubies; and +that, from a country behind, they procure gold. They offered likewise +to conduct our people into the harbour, where they would learn the +truth of these things more fully. On consulting with the other +captains, the general determined upon going into this harbour, to +examine more accurately into these reports, and to procure pilots to +carry them on their voyage, as they had no one in the fleet who knew +the way. Nicholas Coello was therefore ordered to make the first +essay, and to take the soundings of the bar, his ship being the +smallest. But in entering, he touched on the point of the island +where he broke his helm, and was in great danger of being lost; but +by good providence he got off with no farther injury. He now found +the bar was quite safe, and got into the harbour, where he anchored +two cross-bow shots from the town, which is in fifteen degrees +towards the south[28]. The harbour is very good, the town is +plentifully supplied with such provisions as the country produces, +the houses being constructed of straw, and the inhabitants Moors, who +trade to Sofala in large vessels that have neither decks nor nails, +their planks being sewed together with <i>cayro</i> or twine, made +from the fibres of the cocoa nut rind, and their sails of mats made +of the leaves of a species of palm. Some of these vessels use +compasses of Genoa, and regulate their voyages by means of quadrants +and sea charts. With these Moors the Moors of India trade, as +likewise do those from the Red Sea, because of the gold which is to +be had here. On seeing our people, the Moors of Mozambique thought +the Portuguese had been Turks, whom they knew of from the Moors who +dwell on the Red Sea; and those who were first at our ships carried +intelligence to the xeque, or sheik, which is the title of the +governor of this island for the king of Quiloa, in whose territories +it is situated.</p> +<blockquote>[28] Mozambique is in lat. 15° 35' S. and in 41° +of E. Long--E.</blockquote> +<p>"Though we shall afterwards have occasion to investigate this +eastern coast of Africa more fully, in editing particular voyages to +its shores, some notices seem here to be proper[29]. Owing to his +keeping at a distance from, the shore for security, the present +voyage gives little knowledge of the eastern coast of Africa, and it +is even difficult to assign the many stations at which De Gama +touched between the Cape of Good Hope and Mozambique. We have already +noticed the river of Good Signs, as being probably the northern mouth +of the Delta of the Zambeze, now called <i>Quilimane</i> , from a fort +of that name on its banks. The mouth of this branch runs into the sea +in lat. 18° 25' S. In his passage from the <i>Terra de Natal</i> , +or Christmas Land, so named from having been discovered on Christmas +day, and named, in this account of De Gamas voyage, <i>the Land of +Good People</i> , De Gama missed Cape Corientes, forming the S.W. +point of the channel of Mozambique, or <i>Inner Passage</i> , as it is +now called, and overshot Sofala, the southern extremity of Covilhams +discoveries, at which he was probably directed to touch, as Covilhams +chart might have been of some use to direct his farther progress to +Aden, and thence to Calicut or Cananor, on the Malabar coast.</p> +<blockquote>[29] The observations here inserted, and marked with +inverted commas, are made by the Editor of the present collection. +They are much too long for insertion in the form of a note, and +appeared of too much importance to be omitted; being chiefly from +Clarke, I. 447.--E.</blockquote> +<p>"The eastern coast of Africa is hitherto very little known to +geography, its trade being entirely confined to the Portuguese, who +have settlements at Sofala, the river Zambeze, Mozambique, Quiloa, +and Melinda, and conceal all the circumstances respecting their +foreign possessions with infinite jealousy. It is said to have once +been in contemplation by the British government, to employ Sir Home +Popham to make a survey of this coast, but this design was never +executed. Commodore Blanket remained on this station for a +considerable time, and much information may be expected from his +journal, some drawings of the coast having been already made for +charts, which are preparing, under the orders of the Admiralty. About +the year 1782, a great mass of geographical information was collected +on the continent of Europe and lodged in the British Museum, from +which information may probably be derived respecting this coast, when +that collection shall have been arranged and submitted to the public. +According to D'Apres, all the eastern coast of Africa, for a great +way south of the equinoctial, is lined by a range of islands, whence +shoals extend to the distance of a league. These islets form an outer +shore, with a winding channel within, and are in some places a league +from the coast of the continent, though very apt to be mistaken for +the real coast. Within this range the boats or almadias of the +country ply backwards and forwards in great safety, in the +intervening channel.</p> +<p>"Ptolemy places the <i>Prasum promontorium</i> , or Green Cape, the +extreme southern boundary of ancient knowledge of the east coast of +Africa, in lat. 15" 30' S. and the Portuguese universally assume +Mozambique as Prasum, by which classical name it is distinguished in +the Lusiad of Camoens, in reference to the voyage of De Gama, and the +near coincidence of situation gives great probability to this +supposition. [Greek: prason] signifies a leek, and is also used to +denote a sea-weed of a similar green colour, and the name may either +have been derived from the verdure of the point, or from the +sea-weeds found in its neighbourhood. At all events, Prasum cannot be +farther south than Cape Corientes, or farther north than Quiloa or +the Zanguebar islands. The harbour of Mozambique has seldom less than +eight or ten fathom water, which is so clear, that every bank, rock, +or shallow can be easily seen.</p> +<p>"The Moors, so often mentioned, are supposed by Bruce to have been +merchants expelled from Spain by Ferdinand and Isabella, who first +fixed their residence on the western coast of Africa, and extending +themselves eastwards, formed settlements in Arabia and Egypt, till +the oppressions of Selim and Soliman, the Turkish emperors, +interrupted their commerce, and obliged them to disperse along the +coast of Abyssinia and eastern Africa. Besides the impossibility, +chronologically, for the assigned causes having produced the supposed +effect, there is no necessity for having recourse to this improbable +hypothesis. From being best acquainted with their Moorish conquerors, +the Spaniards and Portuguese have always been accustomed to name all +the Arabians Moors, wherever they found them, and even gave at first +the name of <i>black</i> Moors to the Negroes, whence our old English +term <i>Black-a-moors</i> . It is well known that the Arabs, especially +after their conversion to Mahometanism, were great colonizers or +conquerors; even the now half-christian kingdom of Abyssinia was an +early colony and conquest of the pagan Arabs, and its inhabitants are +consequently <i>white</i> Moors in the most extended Portuguese sense. +The Arab, or Moorish kingdoms along the African coast of the Indian +ocean, are branches from the same original stem, and the early +Mahometan missionaries were both zealous and successful in +propagating Islaemism among the most distant pagan colonies of their +countrymen. As all zealous Mussulmen are enjoined the pilgrimage of +Mecca, and commerce mixes largely with religion in the holy journey, +by which the faithful from every distant region often meet at Mecca, +and induce each other to extend their commercial adventures to new +regions, it may possibly have been, that some Moors originally from +Spain, may even have reached Mozambique before the time of De Gama; +but it is ridiculous to suppose that all the Moors on the African +coast had been Spaniards. The overthrow of the great Moorish kingdom +of Granada only took place five or six years before the present +voyage.</p> +<p>"The island of Mozambique, which does not exceed a league in +circumference, is described as low and swampy, and was inhabited by +Moors who had come from Quiloa and Sofala. It was afterwards much +resorted to by the Portuguese as a winter station, and became the key +of their Indian trade. The African coast stretches out on both sides +of the island into two points, that on the north-east called Pannoni, +off which a shoal with three islets extends, some way into the sea. +The southern point is called Mangale[30]."</p> +<blockquote>[30] For the materials of this addition to the text of +Castaneda, we are chiefly indebted to the Progress of Maritime +Discovery, p. 447, 458. --E.</blockquote> +<p>When the Moorish governor of Mozambique[31] was informed of the +arrival of the Portuguese, and that Coello was come to anchor in the +harbour, he fully supposed that they were Turks or Moors from some +distant place, and immediately came to visit him, apparelled in fine +silk, with many attendants. Coello received him very courteously; but +as neither he nor any in his ship could speak their language, the +governor soon retired. Coello gave him, however, a red cap, on which +he seemed to set little value, and presented him likewise with some +black beads, which he carried away in his hand, both being given and +received in token of friendship. On leaving the ship, he required +Coello, by signs, to let him have the boat to carry him on shore, +which Coello readily agreed to, and sent some of his men to the land +along with him. These the governor carried to his house, and feasted +them on dates and other things, and sent back with them a pot of +preserved dates to Coello, with which he regaled the general and his +brother when they had entered the harbour. On the arrival of the +other two ships, the governor again sent off some of his people to +visit them, still taking them for Turks, presenting many pleasant and +delicate viands, and asking permission to visit them in person. The +general, in return, sent the governor a present, consisting of red +hats, short gowns, coral, brass basons, hawks bells and many other +things, which he slighted as of no value, and asked why the general +had not sent him scarlet, which he chiefly desired.</p> +<blockquote>[31] His name, as given by Osorius, was <i>Zacocia</i> , +and De Barros adds, that he wore richly embroidered clothes, and had +his sword ornamented with diamonds.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>Soon afterwards the governor came off to visit the general; who, +being apprized of his coming, ordered all the ships to be dressed out +in their flags. He likewise made all the sick and infirm men to be +kept out of sight, and brought a good many of the most alert men from +the other ships, whom he ordered to be secretly armed, in case of any +violence or treachery on the part of the Moors. The governor came on +board, accompanied with many men, all well apparelled in silk, having +many ivory trumpets and other musical instruments, on which they +played almost without ceasing. The governor was a lean man, of good +stature, dressed in a linen shirt down to his heels, over which he +wore a long gown of Mecca velvet, having a cap of silk of many +colours, trimmed with gold, on his head, at his girdle he wore a +sword and dagger, and had silk shoes. The general received him on +entering the ship, and led him to an awning, trimmed up in the best +manner they were able. The general then begged him not to be offended +that no scarlet had been sent, having brought none with him, and that +his ships only contained such merchandize as were fit to be bartered +for victuals for the people; and that his only object at present was +to discover the way to the Indies, for which purpose he had been sent +by a great and mighty king, his master. All this was conveyed through +the interpretation of Fernan Martin[32]. The general then ordered an +entertainment of the best meats and wines which the ship afforded, to +be set before the governor and his principal attendants, of all which +they partook willingly, even drinking wine with good will. The +governor asked whether they came from Turkey, as he had heard say +that the Turks were a fair people like them, and desired to see our +country bows, and the books of our law. To this the general answered, +that he and his men were not from Turkey, but from a kingdom in their +neighbourhood; that he would most willingly shew his bows and other +weapons, but had not the books of our law, as they were not needed at +sea. Then some cross-bows were brought, which were bent, and shot off +in presence of the governor, also some of our harness or defensive +armour, with all of which he was much pleased, and greatly +astonished.</p> +<blockquote>[32] This is probably the same person named Fernan +Alvares on a former occasion.--E.</blockquote> +<p>During this conference, the general learnt that the port of +Calicut in India was 900 leagues distant from Mozambique; and, as +there were many shoals in the course, that it was very necessary to +have a pilot from this place. He learned also that there were many +cities along the coast. He likewise understood, that the kingdom of +Prester John was far from this place, in the inland country[33]. +Considering the expediency of having a pilot, the general requested +to have two from the governor, who agreed to the demand, on condition +that they should be well used. The reason of wishing to have two was, +lest one might die during the voyage, and our people were much +pleased with this promise. The governor came a second time to visit +the general, and brought with him both the pilots whom he had +promised; to each of whom were given thirty crowns and a coat, each +crown being worth five shillings, under this condition, that whenever +one of them should go on shore, the other should remain on board, +that one might always stay by the ship while in harbour.</p> +<blockquote>[33] It is added by De Barros, that three <i>Abexijs</i> , +or Abyssinians, from the territory of <i>Preste Joano</i> , came on +board the fleet, along with the Moors who brought provisions; and, +seeing the image of the angel Gabriel painted on the ship of that +name, and being accustomed to such representations of angels in their +own country, they made their adorations to this holy +picture.--Clark.</blockquote> +<p>Notwithstanding these friendly meetings, speeches, and assurances, +it soon appeared, after the departure of the governor, that the Moors +had learned, during their intercourse with our people, that they were +Christians, on which the former friendship and good will of the Moors +towards them was changed to wrath and fury, and they henceforwards +used every endeavour to kill our men, and to take possession of the +ships. The governor, therefore, and his people, used every effort for +this mischievous purpose, and had certainly succeeded, if the +Almighty had not moved the heart of one of the Moorish pilots who had +been received into the Portuguese fleet, to reveal the same to the +general; who, fearing lest the infidels might suddenly execute their +purpose, as being numerous in comparison to his small company, +determined to remain no longer in the harbour. Wherefore, on Saturday +the 10th March 1498, being seven days after his arrival, he quitted +the harbour of Mozambique, and cast anchor close to an island, at the +distance of a league from that place; intending, on Sunday, to hear +mass on shore, that they might confess and receive the sacrament, +which had not been done since leaving Lisbon.</p> +<p>After the ships were come to anchor in this place of safety from +being burnt by the Moors, which the general greatly dreaded, he +determined to go back to Mozambique in his boat, to demand the other +pilot who had been promised, but who still remained on shore. Leaving +his brother with the fleet, in readiness to come to his aid if +needful, the general went towards Mozambique with his boat, +accompanied by Nicholas Coello, and the Moorish pilot. On their way +they saw six <i>zambucos</i> or boats, filled with Moors, coming +towards them, armed with long bows and arrows, and also with shields +and spears. The Moors called to our people to come along with them to +the town; and the Moorish pilot, who explained their signals, advised +the general to do so, as the governor would not otherwise deliver the +other pilot, who still remained on shore. The general was much +displeased at this advice, believing the pilot only wished him to +approach the shore, that he might be able to run away, and therefore +ordered him to be secured as a prisoner. He likewise gave orders to +fire at the Moorish boats from his ordnance. When Paulo de la Gama +heard the shot, believing the general to be in more danger than he +actually was, he immediately came with the ship Berrio under sail to +his aid. On seeing this, the Moors fled away in such haste that the +general could not overtake them, and therefore returned with his +brother to where the other ships were at anchor.</p> +<p>Next day, being Sunday, the general and all his men went on shore, +where they heard mass, and received the sacrament very devoutly, +having confessed the evening before. After this they re-embarked and +set sail the same day. Having no hope of procuring the other pilot, +the general ordered to release him whom he had confined, and carried +him on the voyage. But he, willing to be revenged for the indignity +he had experienced, determined on carrying the Portuguese fleet to +the island of Quiloa, which was all peopled with Moors; and, as it +seemed, intended to inform the king of that place that our ships +belonged to the Christians, that he might destroy them and kill the +crews. For this purpose, he craftily persuaded the general not to be +in trouble for want of the other pilot, as he would carry him to a +great island, on hundred leagues from thence, which was inhabited +half by Moors, and half by Christians, who were always in war with +each other, and where he might easily find pilots to conduct him to +Calicut. Though the general was much pleased with this information, +he yet did not give implicit credit to the Moor, but promised him +high rewards if he carried him in safety to that country, and so went +forward on the voyage with a scant wind.</p> +<p>On the Tuesday the fleet was still in sight of the land from which +they took their departure, and remained becalmed all that day and the +next. On Wednesday night, a gentle breeze sprung up from the +eastward, on which the fleet stood off to seaward, but on Thursday +morning, on again making the land, they were four leagues to leeward +of Mozambique, whence plying to windward, they came back that evening +to the island where they had heard mass on the Sunday before, where +they cast anchor and remained eight days waiting for a fair wind. +While here at anchor, a white Moor, who was a <i>molah</i> or minister +among the Moors of Mozambique, came on board the generals ship, +representing that the governor was much grieved at the breach of +peace and friendship between them, which he would now gladly renew. +To this the general made answer, that he would make no peace with the +governor unless he sent him the other pilot whom he had hired and +paid. With this answer the <i>molah</i> departed, and never came back. +After this, while still waiting for a fair wind, there came another +Moor on board, accompanied with his son, a boy, and asked the general +to give him a passage to the city of Melinda, which he said was on +his way to Calicut. He said that he was a native of the country near +Mecca, whence he had piloted a ship to Mozambique, and would gladly +go with him, that he might return to his own country; and farther, he +counselled the general not to remain in expectation of any answer +from the <i>zeque</i> , who he was sure would make no peace with him, +on account of his hatred to the Christians. The general was rejoiced +at the coming of this Moor, expecting to acquire information from him +concerning the straits of the Red Sea, and of the towns on the coast +between Mozambique and Melinda, by which he had to sail, and +therefore gave orders to receive this Moor and his son on board.</p> +<p>As the ships were rather short of water, the general and the other +captains determined upon entering the harbour of Mozambique, to take +in what they needed; but ordered strict watch to be kept, lest the +Moors should set the ships on fire. They entered therefore again into +the harbour on Thursday; and when night came, they went in their +boats in search of water, which the Moorish pilot assured them was to +be found on the firm land, and offered to guide them to the place. +Leaving Paulo de la Gama in charge of the ships, and taking Nicholas +Coello and the pilot along with him in the boats, the general went on +shore about midnight to the place where the pilot said that water was +to be had. But it could not be found; whether that the pilot misled +them in hope of escaping, or finding he could not escape, did so out +of malice. Having spent the whole night fruitlessly in search of +water, and day beginning to dawn, the general returned to the ships +for more force, lest the Moors might set upon him and his small +company at a disadvantage. Having furnished his boats with a larger +force of armed men, he returned to the shore, still accompanied by +Coello and the Moorish pilot, who, seeing no means of escaping, now +pointed out the watering-place close by the shore. At this place they +observed about twenty Moors armed with darts, who shewed as if they +meant to prevent them from taking water. The general therefore gave +orders to fire three guns, to force them from the shore, that our men +might be able to land unopposed. Amazed and frightened by the noise +and the effect of the shot, the Moors ran away and hid themselves in +the bushes; and our people landed quietly, and took in fresh water, +returning to the ships a little before sunset. On arriving, the +general found his brother much disquieted, because a Negro, belonging +to John Cambrayes, the pilot of Paulo de la Gama, had run away to the +Moors, though himself a Christian.[34]</p> +<blockquote>[34] Mr Clarke, Progr. of Marit. Disc. I. 464, strangely +misrepresents this story; saying, "that <i>the pilot</i> of Paulo de +la Gama had deserted to the Moors, though a +Christian."--E.</blockquote> +<p>Upon Saturday the 24th of March, being the eve of the annunciation +of our Lady, a Moor appeared early in the morning on the shore, +abreast of the ships, calling out in a loud and shrill voice, "that +if our men wanted any more water they might now come for it, when +they would find such as were ready to force their return." Irritated +at this bravado, and remembering the injury done him in withholding +the promised pilot, and the loss of the Negro, the general resolved +to batter the town with his ordnance in revenge, and the other +captains readily agreed to the measure. Wherefore they armed all +their boats, and came up before the town, where the Moors had +constructed a barricade of boards for their defence on the shore, so +thick that our men could not see the Moors behind. Upon the shore, +between that defence and the sea, an hundred Moors were drawn up, +armed with targets, darts, bows, arrows, and slings, who began to +sling stones at the boats as soon as they came within reach. They +were immediately answered with shot from our ordnance, on which they +retired from the shore behind their barricade, which was soon beaten +down, when they ran into the town, leaving two of their men slain. +The general and his men now returned to the ships to dinner, and the +Moors were seen running from that town to another; and so much were +they afraid of the Portuguese, that they abandoned the island, going +by water to another place on the opposite side. After dinner, our +people went with their captains on shore, to endeavour to take some +of the Moors, with the hope of procuring restitution of the Negro +belonging to Cambrayes, who had run away from the ships, and they +were likewise desirous of recovering two Indians, who were said by +the Moorish pilot to be detained as captives in Mozambique.</p> +<p>On this occasion, Paulo de la Gama seized four Moors who were in a +boat; but a great many Moors in other boats escaped, by hastening on +shore and leaving their boats behind, in which our men found much +cotton cloth, and several books of their Mahometan law, which the +general ordered to be preserved. The general and the other captains +ranged in their boats along side of the town, but did not venture on +shore, not having sufficient force, nor could they get any speech of +the Moors. Next day they went on shore at the watering-place, where +they took what was needed without any opposition from the Moors. +Being now hopeless of recovering the Negro, or of procuring the +Indian captives, it was determined to depart; but the general +resolved to be revenged on the town and people for their enmity. For +which reason, he went against it next day with ordnance, and +destroyed it in such sort that the Moors had to abandon it, and flee +into another island within the country.[35] This being done, the +fleet weighed anchor on Tuesday the 27th of March, and departed from +Mozambique, whence they proceeded to two little rocks, which they +called St George, and where they came to anchor in waiting for a +wind, which was now contrary. Soon afterwards the wind came fair and +they departed, but the wind was so light, and the currents so strong, +that they were forced in a retrograde course.</p> +<blockquote>[35] According to De Burros, after the inhabitants +abandoned the town, the zeque sent De Gama a pilot to navigate +Coello's ship, from whom De Gama learnt that Calicut was a months +voyage from Mozambique.--Clark. I. 464.</blockquote> +<p>The general was much pleased to find that one of the Moors taken +by his brother at Mozambique was a pilot, and was acquainted with the +navigation to Calicut. Proceeding on their voyage, they came, on +Sunday the first of April, to certain islands very near the coast, to +the first of which they gave the name of <i>Ilha da +Açoutado</i> , because the Moorish pilot of Mozambique was here +severely whipt by order of the general, for having falsely said that +these islands were part of the continent, and likewise for not +shewing the way to the watering-place at Mozambique, as before +related. Being cruelly whipt, the Moor confessed that he had brought +them to this place expressly that they might perish on the rocks and +shoals of these islands, which were so numerous and so close +together, that they could hardly be distinguished from each other. On +this the general stood out to sea, and on Friday the 4th of +April,[36] standing to the north- west, he came in sight, before +noon, of a great land, with two islands near the coast, around which +were many shoals. On nearing the shore, the Moorish pilots recognized +it, and said that the Christian island of Quiloa was three leagues +astern; on which the general was much grieved, believing certainly +that the natives of Quiloa had been Christians, as represented by the +pilots, and that they had purposely taken a wrong course that the +ships might not come there. The pilots, to conceal their treachery, +alleged that the winds and currents had carried the ships farther +than they reckoned. But in truth, they were more disappointed in this +than even the general, as they had reckoned upon being here revenged +upon the Portuguese, by having them all slain. In this God preserved +our people from the intended danger most miraculously, for if they +had gone to Quiloa they had all surely perished; as the general was +so fully persuaded of the natives being Christians, as reported by +the pilot, that he would doubtless have landed immediately on his +arrival, and have thereby run headlong to a place where he and all +his people would have been slain. Both parties being thus sorry for +having missed Quiloa, the general because he hoped to have found +Christians, and the Moorish pilots because of their intended +treachery, it was determined to put back with the intention of +seeking for it; but still the wind and currents opposed their +purpose, and they tried a whole day in vain. This doubtless proceeded +from the providence of God, and his merciful goodness to our men, who +were thus preserved by miracle from the malicious and devilish +intentions of the two Moorish pilots of Mozambique.</p> +<blockquote>[36] If Sunday, as above, were the first of April, the +Friday following must have been the 6th.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The fleet being thus baffled and tossed to and fro, it was +determined to bear away for the island of Mombaza, in which the +pilots said there were two towns, peopled both by Moors and +Christians. But they gave out this as before to deceive our people, +and to lead them to destruction; for that island was solely inhabited +by Moors, as is the whole of that coast. Understanding that Mombaza +was seventy miles distant, they bore away for that place, and towards +evening, they came in sight of a great island towards the north, in +which the Moorish pilots pretended there were two towns, one of +Christians and the other of Moors; making this false assertion to +make our people believe that there were many Christians on this +coast. While pursuing their voyage towards Mombaza for some days, the +ship San Raphael chanced one morning, two hours before day, to get +aground on certain shoals, two leagues from the shore of the +continent. Paulo de Gama immediately made signals to apprize the +other ships of his situation and their danger; on which they had the +good fortune to avoid the shoals and got safely to anchor. The boats +from the other ships were immediately sent off to assist Paulo de +Gama in the St Raphael; and, on seeing that the tide was then low, +the general was much rejoiced, as he well knew she would float again +with the tide of flood; whereas, before, he was much afraid she might +be totally lost. He therefore gave orders to carry all their anchors +out to deep water, to prevent her from getting farther on the shoal. +By the time this was done day broke, and soon after at low water the +St Raphael was quite dry on a sand bank, having taken no harm in +striking. While waiting for the tide of flood, our people named these +sands <i>Os baixos de Sam Rafael</i> , or the Shoals of St Raphael, and +named certain islands and hills of the continent, then in sight, the +islands and hills of St Raphael.</p> +<p>While the ship remained thus dry, and the people walking about on +the sand, they saw two boats full of Moors, who came to our ships, +bringing many sweet oranges, much better than those of Portugal. +These men told the general not to fear any damage to the ship which +was aground, as she would float uninjured with the next flood; and +the general was so much pleased with this good heartening, that he +gave them several presents, which they accepted with many thanks; and +understanding that our fleet intended to put in at Mombaza, they +requested to be carried thither. The general granted their request, +and permitted them to remain on board, the others returning from our +ships to their own country.[37] When it was full sea, the St Raphael +floated and got off the shoal, and the fleet proceeded on its +voyage.</p> +<blockquote>[37] The text is here obscure; but it would appear that +only some of the men belonging to these two boats remained on board, +and the rest returned to the coast. Not that the Moorish pilots from +Mozambique were here dismissed, as the text of Lichefild's +translation seems to insinuate.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Following the coast to the north-eastwards, the fleet came to +anchor outside of the bar of the harbour of Mombaza, about sunset of +Saturday the 7th of April. Mombaza is on an island very near the +shore of the continent, and has plenty of provisions, such as millet, +rice, and cattle, both large and small, all well grown and fat, +especially the sheep, which are uniformly without tails; and it +abounds in poultry. It is likewise very pleasant, having many +orchards, abounding in pomegranates, Indian figs, oranges, both sweet +and sour, lemons, and citrons, with plenty of pot-herbs, and it has +an abundant supply of excellent water. On this island there is a city +having the same name, Momabza, standing in lat. 4°S. which is +handsomely built on a rocky hill washed by the sea. The entrance of +the haven has a mark or beacon, and on the very bar there is a little +low fort, almost level with the water.[38]</p> +<blockquote>[38] Motta, in the Portuguese East Indian Pilot, places +this town in lat. 3º 50'S. He says the entrance is much +incommoded with shoals, and so narrow in some places as not to exceed +the length of a ship. This city is said to have once stood on a +peninsula, converted into an island by cutting a canal across the +isthmus.--Clark. I. 469.</blockquote> +<p>Most of the houses of this place are built of stone and lime, +having the ceilings finely constructed of plaster, and the streets +are very handsome. This city is subject to a king of its own, the +inhabitants being Moors, some of whom are white and others brown[39]. +The trade of this city is extensive, and its inhabitants are well +dressed, especially the women, who are clothed in silk, and decorated +with gold and precious stones. The harbour is good and much +frequented by shipping, and it receives from the African continent, +in its neighbourhood, great quantities of honey, wax, and ivory.</p> +<blockquote>[39] This may be understood that part of the inhabitants +were unmixed Arabs, comparatively whites; while others were of a +mixed race between these and the original natives, perhaps likewise +partly East Indian Mahometans, of a similar origin.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The general did not enter the harbour that night because it grew +late, but commanded to hoist the flags in compliment, which the +people did with much mirth and joy, in hope that they had come to an +island in which there were many Christians, and that next day they +might hear mass on shore. They had likewise great hope that the sick, +who were almost the whole crews, might here recover their health; +though, indeed, they were much reduced in number, many having died +during the voyage. Soon after our ships came to anchor, although +night approached, a large boat, containing about a hundred men, all +armed with swords and targets, was seen coming towards the fleet. On +reaching the generals ship, they would have all come on board with +their weapons, but the general only permitted four of their +principals to come aboard, and even they unarmed; causing them to be +told in their own language, that they must excuse his precaution, +being a stranger, and not knowing therefore whom he might trust. To +those whom he permitted to come on board he gave courteous +entertainment, presenting them with such conserves as he had, of +which they readily partook; and he requested of them not to take ill +that he had thus refused entrance to so many armed men. They said +that they had merely come to see him, as a new and rare thing in +their country, and that their being armed was merely because such was +the custom of the country, whether in peace or war. They also said, +that the king of Mombaza expected his arrival, and would have sent to +visit him, if it had not been so late, but certainly would do so next +day. Their king, they added, was rejoiced at his arrival, and would +not only be glad to see him, but would load his ships with spices. +They also said that there were many Christians on the island, who +lived by themselves; at which the general was much pleased, believing +their story, which agreed with what the two pilots had said. Yet he +entertained some jealous doubts, for all their fair speeches, and +wisely suspected the Moors had come to see if they could lay a train +to take our ships. In this he was perfectly right, as it afterwards +appeared that this was their sole intent. The king of Mombaza had +received perfect intelligence that we were Christians, and of all +that we had done at Mozambique, and plotted to be revenged, by taking +our ships and killing our men.</p> +<p>Next day, being Palm Sunday, still prosecuting his wicked purpose, +the king sent some white Moors with a message to the general, +declaring his great joy at our arrival, inviting him into the +harbour, and engaging to supply him with all things he might be in +need of; and, in token of amity, sent him a ring, a sheep, and many +sweet oranges, citrons, and sugar canes. These white Moors were +likewise instructed to pretend that they were Christians, and that +there were many Christians in the island. All this was so well +counterfeited, that our people actually believed them to be +Christians, on which account the general received them with much +courtesy, and made them some presents, sending a message to the king +that he would certainly come farther into the harbour next day. He +also sent a present to the king of a fine branch of coral. And, for +the greater security, he sent along with these white Moors, two of +our banished men, who had been embarked expressly for such hazardous +undertakings, or for being left on shore where it might be deemed +expedient, to become acquainted with the circumstances of various +places, and to be taken on board again. These men, and the Moors who +had been on board, were met in landing by a number of people, curious +to see and examine them, who accompanied them all the way to the +kings palace, where they had to pass through three several doors, +each guarded by an armed porter, before they came to the place where +the king was. They found the king in no very great state, yet he +received them well, and commanded the Moors who had brought them on +shore to show them the city. In going through the streets, our men +saw many prisoners in irons; but, not knowing the language, they +could not ask who or what these were, yet believed they might be +Christians, us our general was informed by the Moorish pilots, and +the kings two messengers, that there were Christians on the island, +and that the Christians and the Moors had wars together. Our men were +likewise carried to the house in which the merchants of India dwelt, +who were said to be Christians. These people, learning that our men +were Christians, shewed much joy at receiving them, embracing and +banqueting them, and shewed them a piece of paper on which the figure +of the Holy Ghost was painted, which they worshipped on their knees, +with great shew of devotion, as if they had been what they pretended. +The Moors then informed our men by signs, that there were many other +Christians at another place, too far for carrying them there; but +that they should be conducted to see them when our ships came into +the harbour. All this was done craftily to entice our people into the +harbour, where they were determined to destroy them all.</p> +<p>After our two men had seen the city, they were conducted back to +the king, who ordered them to be shewn ginger, pepper, cloves, and +wheat, giving them samples of them all to be carried to the general, +with assurance that he had great store of all these commodities, and +would give him his loading if he desired it. They were likewise told, +that he had great plenty of gold, silver, amber, wax, ivory, and +other riches, which he would sell at lower prices than they could be +bought in any other place. This message was brought off on Monday to +the general; who, hearing the kings offer to furnish him with a +loading of these commodities, was much rejoiced, and was much pleased +with the information brought by the two convicts, and their good +report of the people, city, and country, and more especially on +account of the <i>two</i> Christians whom they had seen in the house +of the Indian merchants. After a consultation with the other +captains, it was determined to enter the port next day, and to accept +the spices offered by the king of Mambaza, after which, to continue +the voyage to Calicut; and, if they could not procure similar +articles there, to return contented with what might be got in this +place. In the meantime, several of the Moors visited our ships, +conducting themselves with much gentleness and humility, and evincing +an appearance of friendship and kindness to our people, as if they +had been long and familiarly acquainted.</p> +<p>When the tide of flood was sufficiently advanced on the following +morning, the general gave orders to weigh anchor, intending to carry +the ships into the harbour. But the Almighty Disposer of events, not +willing that he and his company should fall into the snare which the +Moors had laid for their destruction, interposed to avert the danger, +and to work their safety. For, when the generals ship had weighed +anchor, and was about to enter the port, she touched on a shoal by +the stern; upon which, he immediately let fall his anchor again, +which was likewise done by the other captains. Seeing this, the Moors +who were on board concluded that he would not enter the harbour that +day, and instantly took to their boat, which was alongside, and made +for the city: At the same time, the pilot of Mozambique leapt from +the stern of the admirals ship into the water, and was taken into the +boat by the Moors. The admiral called out to them to bring him back, +but all in vain; on which he began to suspect that the Moors and +their king had evil intentions towards him and his people, and was +thankful for the accident which had detained him from the harbour, +and preserved him from the purposed treachery. After explaining his +apprehensions to the other captains, he commanded, in the evening of +this day, that two of the Moors who had been made prisoners at +Mozambique should be put to the torture, to endeavour to ascertain +whether any treachery was intended, and to force them to disclose the +same. This was done by dropping melted bacon upon their flesh; and +they immediately confessed that treason was intended, and that the +pilots had escaped by swimming from the ship, as fearing the same had +been discovered. On this confession, the general resolved on no +account to enter the harbour; yet determined to put another Moor to +the torture, to learn if he were in confederacy with the rest. But +this Moor, on seeing preparations made for the purpose, although his +hands were bound, leapt into the sea; which was likewise done by +another Moor before day-light.</p> +<p>Having thus discovered the secret mischiefs which had been +prepared against him, the general gave thanks to God, by whose good +providence he and his people had been delivered from imminent hazard +of death among the infidels; whereupon he and his company joined in +the <i>Salve regina</i> with great devotion. After this, lest the +Moors might attempt any thing against their safety during the night, +he ordered a strong and vigilant armed watch to be kept. It is worthy +of notice, that all the sick among our people, who were indeed many, +began presently to get well from their first coming to Mombaza; so +that in this time of their great necessity and danger, they found +themselves sound and strong, beyond all human hope, and far above the +ordinary course of nature; for which reason it can only be attributed +to the marvellous and supernatural power of God, miraculously done at +this peculiar instant time of need, for the preservation of these +poor and distressed persons, whose only hope of safety was in him. +After the night watch was set, those of the Berrio felt the cable by +which they lay at anchor swagging, as if shaken by a great tunny, of +which there were many in this place, very large and excellent food: +But, on giving more attention to the circumstance, they perceived +that this was occasioned by their enemies the Moors, some of whom +were swimming about the cable, and were cutting it with knives or +falchions, that the ship might drift on shore and fall a prey to +them. On seeing this, our men scared them away by crying out, and +gave notice to the other ships to be on their guard against similar +attempts. Some people from the San Raphael went immediately to the +assistance of the Berrio, and found some of the Moors about the +chains and tacklings of the foremast, who cast themselves into the +sea, and swam, along with those who had attempted to cut the cable, +to certain boats that were in waiting at a short distance, in which, +as our people afterwards learnt, there were a great number of the +Moors, who now rowed away to the city in all haste.</p> +<p>Our fleet still remained off the harbour of Mombaza, all the +Wednesday and Thursday following; during both of which nights the +Moors came off in boats, which always lay close by the shore, whence +some of them swam to the ships, endeavouring to cut our cables: But +our men kept such strict watch, that they were unable to succeed. Our +people, however, were always in much fear and perplexity, lest the +Moors might burn our ships; and it was wonderful they did not make +the attempt by means of the ships they had in the harbour, which, in +all human probability, they had succeeded in, killing and destroying +us all. It was conjectured that they were deterred from making this +attempt, from fear of the ordnance in our ships; but whatever might +appear to us as the cause of their not using open force, it was +assuredly the good pleasure and favour of God, that put their hearts +in fear against making an open attack, by which we were preserved +from the execution of their cruel purposes towards us.</p> +<p>The reason of the general remaining during the two days off +Mombaza was, that he might endeavour to procure two pilots from +thence to carry him to Calicut, without which assistance the voyage +would have been very difficult, as our pilots had no knowledge of +that country. But finding none were to be had, he took his departure +from that place on Friday morning, though with a very light wind. On +leaving the anchorage, he was forced to leave one of his anchors +behind, as the crew was so completely exhausted by hauling up the +rest, that they were unable to weigh this one. It was afterwards +found by the Moors, and carried into their city, where it was +deposited near the kings palace. When Don Francisco de Almeida, first +viceroy of the Indies, took this place from the Moors, this anchor +was there found, as I shall afterwards relate in the second book of +this work.</p> +<p>Departing thus from Mombaza, the fleet continued its voyage along +the coast to the north-east, and having very light wind, was obliged +to come to anchor in the evening near the shore, about eight leagues +from Mombaza. Towards the dawn of next day, two sambuccos, or little +pinnaces, were seen about three leagues to the leeward of the fleet, +and out at sea; on which, in hope of procuring some pilots who could +carry him to Calicut, the general ordered the anchors to be weighed, +and he and the other captains gave chase to the sambuccos the whole +of that day. Towards vespers, the general came up with and captured +one of these pinnaces, but the other escaped to the land. In the +captured pinnace there were seventeen Moors, among whom was an old +man who seemed master over the rest, and had his young wife along +with him. In this boat there was great store of silver and gold, and +some victuals. On the same evening the fleet came to anchor off +Melinda, which is eighteen leagues from Mombaza, and is in lat. +3° S. This place has no good harbour, being only an almost open +roadstead, having a kind of natural pier or reef of rocks on which +the sea beats with much violence, owing to which the ships have to +ride at a considerable distance from the shore. The city stands in a +broad open plain, along the shore, surrounded with many palms, and +other sorts of trees, which are green the whole year. It has also +many gardens and orchards, abounding with all kinds of herbs and +fruits, and many fountains of good water. Their oranges are +particularly excellent, very large and sweet. They have also +abundance of millet and rice, plenty both of cattle and sheep, and +great store of fine poultry, which are very cheap. Melinda is a large +city, with fair streets, and many good houses of stone and lime, +containing several storeys, with windows, and having terraced roofs +made of lime and earth. The native inhabitants are black, of well +proportioned bodies, having curled hair; but many strangers resort +thither and dwell in the city, who are Moors from Arabia, who conduct +themselves in a commendable manner, especially the gentlemen or +better sort. These, from the girdle upwards, go naked; but below the +girdle they are dressed in silk, or fine stuffs of cotton, though +some wear short cotton cloaks, after the old fashion. On their heads +they wear certain cloths embroidered with silk and gold. They wear +also rich daggers, ornamented with silken tassels of many colours, +and very handsome swords. They are all left-handed, and go constantly +armed with bows and arrows, taking great delight in archery, at which +they are very expert. They account themselves good horsemen; yet +there is a common saying on this coast, <i>the horsemen of Mombaza, +and the women of Melinda</i> , as in Mombaza they are excellent +horsemen, and the women of Melinda are very handsome, and dress +richly.</p> +<p>In this city also there are many Gentiles from the kingdom of +Cambaya in India, who are great merchants and trade to this place for +gold, which is found in this country, as likewise ambergris, ivory, +pitch, and wax; all of which commodities the inhabitants of Melinda +exchange with the merchants of Cambaya for copper, quicksilver, and +cotton cloth, to the profit and advantage of both parties. The king +of this city is a Moor, who is served with far more state than any of +the kings on this coast to the southwards. Being arrived over against +this city, the general and all the people of the fleet were much +rejoiced at seeing a city resembling those of Portugal, and gave +thanks to God for their safe arrival. Being desirous of procuring +pilots to navigate the fleet to Calicut, the general commanded to +come to anchor, meaning to use his endeavours for this purpose. For, +hitherto, he could not learn from the Moors he had lately captured, +whether any of them were pilots; and though he had threatened them +with the torture, they always persisted in declaring that none of +them had any skill in pilotage.</p> +<p>Next day, being Easter eve, the old Moor who had been made +prisoner in the pinnace, told the general that there were four ships +belonging to Christians of the Indies at Melinda, and engaged, if the +general would allow him and the other Moors to go on shore, he would +provide him, as his ransom, Christian pilots, and would farther +supply him with every thing he might need. Well pleased with the +speeches of the old Moor, the general removed his ships to within +half a league of the city, whence hitherto no one came off to our +fleet, as they feared our men might make them prisoners; for they had +received intelligence that we were Christians, and believed our ships +were men of war. On the Monday morning, therefore, the general +commanded the old Moor to be landed on a ledge, or rock, opposite the +city, and left there, expecting they would send from the city to +fetch him off; which they did accordingly as soon as our boat +departed. The Moor was carried directly to the king, to whom he said, +as instructed by the general, what he chiefly desired to have. He +farther said, that the general desired to have amity with the king, +of whom he had heard a good report, hoping by his aid, and with the +will of God, he might be enabled to discover the route to India. The +king received this message favourably, and sent back the Moor in a +boat to the general, accompanied by one of his own servants and a +priest, saying, that he would most willingly conclude a treaty of +amity with him, and should supply him with what pilots he needed. +These messengers likewise presented the general from the king, with +three sheep, and a great many oranges, and sugar canes, which he +thankfully accepted; desiring the messengers to acquaint their +master, that he gladly agreed to the profered amity, and was ready to +confirm the same between them, and promised to enter their harbour +next day. He farther desired them to inform the king, that he was the +subject of a great and powerful sovereign in the west, who had sent +him to discover the way to Calicut, with orders to enter into peace +and amity with all kings and princes on whose territories he might +happen to touch by the way. That it was now <i>two years</i> [40] +since he left his own country, and that the king his master was a +prince of such puissance and worth as he was convinced the king of +Melinda would be glad to have for a friend. He then dismissed the +messengers, sending as a present to their king a hat of the fashion +of the time, two branches of coral, three brass basons, two scarfs, +and some small bells.</p> +<blockquote>[40] This is surely an oversight in Castaneda or his +translator, for <i>one</i> year.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the second day after Easter, the general removed his ships +nearer the city. The king knowing this, and believing that the king +of Portugal must be a high-spirited prince, and the general a worthy +subject, who had hazarded himself in so long and dangerous a voyage, +became desirous of seeing such men; wherefore, he sent a more +honourable message to the general, saying, that he proposed next day +to visit him in person, intending that their meeting should be on the +water; and sent him a present of six sheep, with a considerable +quantity of cloves, ginger, pepper, and nutmegs. Upon this message, +the general removed his fleet still nearer the city, and came to +anchor close to the four ships of the Indies, of which the old Moor +had made mention as belonging to Christians. When the owners of these +ships learnt that we were Christians, they came immediately to visit +our general, who happened then to be in the ship of Paulo de la Gama. +These men were of a brown colour, but of good stature and well +proportioned, dressed in long white cotton gowns, having large +beards, and the hair of their heads long like women, and plaited up +under their turbans or head-dresses. The general received them with +much kindness and attention, asking, by means of an interpreter, who +understood the language of Algarve, or Arabic, whether they were +Christians. These men had some knowledge of that language, though it +was not their own tongue, but had learnt it in the course of their +trade and conversation with the Moors of Melinda, of whom they +advised the general to beware, lest their inward intentions might be +far different from their outward shew. Willing to make trial if these +men were really Christians, the general caused a picture to be shewn +them, on which our Lady was painted weeping, surrounded by some of +the apostles, but without informing them what this was meant to +represent. Immediately on this being set before them, they fell down +and worshipped the picture, praying for some time. The general then +asked if they were of Calicut; on which they answered they were of +Grangalor[41], still farther off, and could give him no information +respecting Calicut. From this time, so long as our fleet remained at +Melinda, these people came every day on board the ship of Paulo de la +Gama, to pay their devotions before this picture, offering to the +images which it represented gifts of pepper and other things. These +Indian Christians, according to their own account, eat no beef.</p> +<blockquote>[41] It is difficult to ascertain what place in India is +here meant. Cranganore comes nearer in sound, but is rather nearer +Melinda than Calicut; Mangalore is rather more distant. The former a +degree to the south of Calicut, the latter not quite two to the +north; all three on the Malabar coast. On a former occasion, +Castaneda says these merchants were of Cambaya or Guzerat, above +eleven degrees north of Calicut.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the last day of the week after Easter, and in the afternoon, +the king of Melinda came off in a great boat to our fleet. He was +dressed in a cassock of crimson damask lined with green satin, and +wore, a rich cloth or turban on his head. He sat in a chair, of the +ancient fashion, very well made and wrought with wire, having a silk +cushion; and on another chair beside him, there lay a hat of crimson +satin. An old man stood by him as his page, who carried a very rich +sword with a silver scabbard. In the boat there were many sacbuts, +and two ivory flutes eight spans long, on which they played by a +little hole in the middle, agreeing and according well with the music +of the sacbuts. The king was likewise attended by about twenty +Moorish gentlemen, all richly dressed. When the king had nearly +attained our ships, the general went to meet him in his boat, gaily +decorated with flags and streamers, himself dressed in his best +apparel, and attended by twelve of the principal officers of the +squadron, leaving his brother in charge of the ships. On the boats +meeting, the two parties made every demonstration of friendship and +respect; and the Moorish king immediately offered to come on board +the generals boat, that he might see him the better. The general +accordingly received him with all respect, and the king shewed as +much honour and courtesy to the general as if he had been likewise a +king. The Moorish king, after examining the dress and appearance of +the general and his men with the utmost attention, asked the general +the name of his king, which he commanded to be immediately written +down. He particularly inquired respecting the power of the king of +Portugal, and the general gave the most satisfactory answers to all +his questions; particularly detailing the reasons of his being sent +to discover Calicut, that Portugal might be thence supplied with +spices, which were not to be had in his own country. The king, after +giving him some information on these points, and respecting the +straits of the Red Sea, promised to furnish the general with a pilot +to carry him to Calicut, and then earnestly solicited him to +accompany him to the city, where he might solace and refresh himself +in the palace, after the fatigues and dangers of so long a voyage; +and promised, if the general would do so, that he the king would +visit him on board. To this the general prudently answered that he +was not authorised by his instructions to go on shore, and that he +could not answer for deviating from the orders of his sovereign. On +this the king observed, that if he were to visit the ships, he could +not well answer for his conduct to the inhabitants of his city; yet, +he was grieved that the admiral refused to go into the city, which +should be at his will and pleasure, and that of the king his master, +to whom he should either write or send an ambassador, if the general +would call in at Melinda on his return from Calicut. The general gave +the king thanks for his politeness, and promised to return that way; +and, while this conversation was going on, he sent for the Moors who +had been taken in the pinnace, whom he presented to the king, saying, +he would most gladly perform any other service that lay in his power +to the king. The king was greatly pleased with this gift, which he +valued as much as if the admiral had given him another city equal to +Melinda.</p> +<p>Having ended their conversation, and confirmed their mutual +friendship, the king rowed through among our ships, examining them +with much pleasure and admiration, and was saluted in passing by many +discharges of the ordnance, at which he and his attendants seemed +much delighted. On this occasion, the general attended upon him in +his own boat out of respect, and the king observed, that he never was +so much pleased with any men as with the Portuguese, and would most +gladly have some of them to help him in his wars. To this the general +answered, that if his highness were to have experience of what they +were able to perform, he would like the Portuguese still better; and +that they should certainly give him aid, if it should please the king +of Portugal to send any of his war ships to Calicut, which he did not +doubt would be the case, if it were Gods will to permit the discovery +of that place. After the king had satisfied his curiosity, he +requested of the general, since he would not go himself into the +city, to permit two of his men to go and see the palace, offering to +leave his own son, and one of his chief priests, which they named +Caçis[42], in pledge for their safe return. To this request +the general consented, and sent two of our men along with the king: +He, at his departure, requested that the general would next day, in +his boat, come close to the shore, when he should be gratified with a +sight of the native horsemen going through their evolutions. After +this they separated.</p> +<blockquote>[42] This seems to be the same office with that named +Kadhi, or Khazi, by the Turks and Persians, which is rather the title +of a judge than of a priest, which is named Moulah.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Next day, being Thursday, the general and Nicholas Coello went in +their boats well armed along the shore, according to the invitation +of the king, keeping at a small distance from each other for mutual +defence in case of need, where they saw many men skirmishing on the +shore. As our boats approached the royal palace, certain of the kings +attendants brought him in a chair down some stone stairs which led to +the water; and, being then very near the generals boat, the king +entered into friendly conversation with him, and once more entreated +him to land and go to the palace; saying, that his father, who was +lame, was exceedingly desirous to see him, and even offered, that, +while the general remained on shore, he and his children would go on +board the ships as hostages for his security. But our general, still +dreading that some bitter treachery might lurk beneath this honied +speech, continued to excuse himself from landing, as he had not +permission from his own prince to do so, and must obey him, in all +things. After this, taking his leave of the king, he rowed past the +ships of the Indian merchants, which he saluted in passing with his +ordnance; and when they saw us pass, they held up their hands, +exclaiming Christe! Christe!</p> +<p>That night, having obtained leave from the king, our men made them +a great feast, with much diversion, also of squibs, firing of guns, +and loud cries. The fleet remained at anchor for two days without any +message from the shore, on which account the general was much +distressed, fearing the king had taken offence at his refusal to go +on shore, and might break the peace and amity between them, and not +send him any pilot. But on Sunday the 21st of April, a person who was +in high credit with the king, came off to visit the general, who was +much disappointed when this person brought no pilot, and again began +to entertain suspicions of the kings intentions. When the king learnt +this, and that the general remained merely for the purpose of having +a pilot, he sent him one who was a Gentile, called <i>Gosarate</i> [43] +in their language, and whose name was <i>Canaca</i> , sending an +apology at the same time for not having sent this person sooner. Thus +the king and the general remained friends, and the peace continued +which had been agreed between them.</p> +<blockquote>[43] It is probable that this passage should be thus +understood, "The king sent him a pilot, who was an idolater from +Guzerate, &c."--E.</blockquote> +<p>"De Barros and Faria give this pilot the name of <i>Malemo +Cana</i> , and say that he belonged to one of the Indian ships of +Cambaya, then at Melinda. De Barros adds, that he shewed De Gama a +very small chart of the coast of India, laid down with meridians and +parallels, but without rhumbs of the winds. This pilot shewed no +surprise on seeing the large wooden and metal astrolabes belonging to +the Portuguese, as the pilots of the Red Sea had long used brass +triangular instruments and quadrants for astronomical observations, +and that he and others who sailed from Cambaya, and the ports of +India, navigated by the north and south stars, and the constellations +of the eastern and western hemispheres; and, though they did not use +these instruments in navigation, they employed one made of three +pieces of board, similar to the <i>balhestillia</i> , or cross-staff of +the Portuguese.</p> +<p>"In a collection of papers published in 1790, called <i>Documentos +Arabicos</i> , from the royal archives of Lisbon, chiefly consisting +of letters between the kings of Portugal and the tributary princes of +the east in the sixteenth century, the <i>zeque, sheik</i> , or king of +Melinda, with whom De Gama afterwards made a treaty of alliance, and +whose ambassador he carried into Portugal, was named +Wagerage[44]."</p> +<blockquote>[44] The addition to, or observations on the text, +inserted in this place within inverted commas, are from Clarke, I. +486, 487.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Having thus procured a pilot, and provided all things necessary +for the voyage, De Gama departed from Melinda for Calicut, on Friday +the 26th of April 1498[45], and immediately made sail directly across +the gulf which separates Africa from India, which is 750 leagues[46]. +This golf runs a long way up into the land northwards; but our course +for Calicut lay to the east[47]. In following this voyage, our men +saw the north star next Sunday, which they had not seen of a long +while; and they saw the stars about the south pole at the same time. +They gave thanks to God, that, whereas it had been represented to +them, that in this season, which was the winter of the Indies, there +were always great storms in this gulf, they now experienced fair +weather. On Friday the 18th of May, twenty- three days after leaving +Melinda, during all which time they had seen no land, they came in +sight of India, at eight leagues distance, the land seeming very +high. Canaca, the pilot, tried the lead and found forty-five fathoms, +upon which he altered his course to the south-east, having fallen in +with the land too far to the north. Upon the Saturday, he again drew +near the land, but did not certainly know it, as the view was +obscured by rain, which, always falls in India at this season, being +their winter. On Sunday the 20th of May, the pilot got view of +certain high hills which are directly behind the city of Calicut, and +came so near the land that he was quite sure of the place; on which +he came up with great joy to the general, demanding +his <i>albrycias</i> , or reward, as this was the place at which he and +his company were so desirous to arrive. The general was greatly +rejoiced at this news, and immediately satisfied the pilot, after +which, he summoned all the company to prayers, saying +the <i>salve</i> , and giving hearty thanks to God, who had safely +conducted them to the long wished-for place of his destination. When +prayer was over, there was great festivity and joy in the ships, +which came that same evening to anchor two leagues from Calicut. +Immediately upon anchoring, some of the natives came off to the ships +in four boats, called <i>almadias</i> , inquiring whence our ships +came, as they had never before seen any resembling their construction +upon that coast. These natives were of a brown colour, and entirely +naked, excepting very small aprons. Some of them immediately came on +board the general, and the Guzerat pilot informed him these were poor +fishermen; yet the general received them courteously, and ordered his +people to purchase the fish which they had brought for sale. On +conversing with them, he understood that the town whence they came, +which was in sight, was not Calicut, which lay farther off, and to +which they offered to conduct our fleet. Whereupon the general +requested them to do this; and, departing from this first anchorage, +the fleet was conducted by these fishermen to Calicut.</p> +<blockquote>[45] In Lichefild's translation this date is made the +22d; but the Friday after Sunday the 21st, must have been the 26th of +the month.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[46] The difference of longitude between Melinda and +Calicut is thirty- four degrees, which at 17-1/2 leagues to the +degree, gives only 575 Portuguese leagues, or 680 geographical +leagues of twenty to the degree. Thus miserably erroneous are the +estimated distances in old navigators, who could only compute by the +dead reckoning, or the log. --E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[47] The course from Melinda to Calicut is about E. N. E. +the former being about three degrees to the S. and the latter almost +eleven degrees to the N. of the line.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Calicut is a city on the coast of Malabar, a province of the +second India, which begins at the mount of Delhi, and ends at Cape +Comory, being sixty- one leagues in length, and fifteen leagues +broad[48]. The whole of this country is very low, and apt to be +covered with water, having many islands in its rivers, which flow +into the Indian Sea. This country of Malabar is divided from the +kingdom of Narsinga by a very high hill. The Indians report that this +land of Malabar was covered by the sea of old, which then reached to +the foot of the hills, and thence to a hill, where now the islands of +the Maldives are found, which were then firm land; and that in after +times it destroyed that latter country, and laid bare the country of +Malabar, in which are many pleasant and rich cities, dependent upon +trade, which they carry on principally with Calicut, which exceeds +all cities of our days in riches and in vice. Its foundation and rise +was as follows: In ancient times, this country of Malabar was +entirely ruled by one king, who dwelt in the city of <i>Coulan</i> . In +the reign of the last king of this race, +named <i>Saranaperimal</i> [49], who died 600 years ago, the Moors of +Mecca discovered India, and came to the province of Malabar, then +inhabited by idolaters, and governed by an idolatrous king. From the +time of the coming of these Moors, they began to reckon their years +as we do, from the birth of our Saviour[50]. After the coming of the +Moors into Malabar, they insinuated themselves so much into the +confidence of the before-mentioned king, that he became a convert to +their law, renouncing the religion of his country, and embracing +Mahometism with such zeal, that he resolved to go and end his days in +the temple of Mecca. Having thus resolved, out of love to the +Mahometan sect, to abandon his kingdom, he called his kindred +together, and divided all his territories among them, reserving only +twelve leagues of country near the place where he intended to embark, +not then inhabited, which he bestowed upon one of his cousins who +acted as his page. To this kinsman he gave his sword and turban, as +ensigns of dignity; commanding all the other nobles, among whom he +had distributed the rest of his territories, to obey this person as +their emperor, the kings of Coulan and Cananor only excepted; whom +also, and all the others, he debarred from coining money, which was +only to be done by the king of Calicut. Having thus given away his +whole dignities and possessions, and set every thing in order, he +embarked from the place where Calicut now stands; and because this +king embarked from that place on his pilgrimage to Mecca, the Moors +have ever since held Calicut in so high devotion, that they and all +their posterity would never take their lading from any other port. +From that time forwards, they discontinued trade with the port of +Coulan, which they had used formerly, and that port therefore fell to +ruin; especially after the building of Calicut, and the settlement of +many Moors in that place[51].</p> +<blockquote>[48] This vague account of the extent of Malabar is +erroneous or corrupt, as sixty-one Portuguese leagues would barely +reach from Cape Comorin to Calicut. The extreme length of the western +maritime vale of India, from Cambay to Cape Comorin, exceeds 250 +Portuguese leagues.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[49] The proper name of this prince who is said to have +thus divided the kingdom of Malabar, was +Shermanoo-Permaloo.--Clark.</blockquote> +I. 395. +<blockquote>[50] This must be erroneous, as the Mahometans reckon +from the year of the Hegira, or flight of Mahomet from Mecca, which +commences in 622 of the Christian era.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[51] This story seems an Arabian tale, perhaps partly +founded upon some real revolution in the government of Malabar. But +it would much exceed the bounds of a note to enter upon disquisitions +relative to Indian history.--E.</blockquote> +<p>As the Moors are merchants of most extensive dealings, they have +rendered Calicut, as the centre of their trade, the richest mart of +all the Indies; in which is to be found all the spices, drugs, +nutmegs, and other things that can be desired, all kinds of precious +stones, pearls and seed-pearls, musk, sanders, aguila, fine dishes of +earthen ware, lacker[52], gilded coffers, and all the fine things of +China, gold, amber, wax, ivory, fine and coarse cotton goods, both +white and dyed of many colours, much raw and twisted silk, stuffs of +silk and gold, cloth of gold, cloth of tissue, grain, scarlets, silk +carpets, copper, quicksilver, vermilion, alum, coral, rose-water, and +all kinds of conserves. Thus, every kind of merchandize from all +parts of the world is to be found in this place; which, moreover, is +very quiet, being situated along the coast, which is almost open and +very dangerous. Calicut is surrounded by many gardens and orchards, +producing all the herbs and fruits of this country in great +abundance, having also many palms and other sorts of trees, and +abounds in excellent water. This part of India produces but little +rice, which is a principal article of food in these parts, as wheat +is with us; but it procures abundance of that and all other kinds of +provisions from other countries. The city is large, but the dwellings +consist only of straw huts; their idol temples, and chapels, and the +kings palace excepted, which are: built of stone and lime and covered +with tiles; for, by their laws, no others are permitted to build +their houses of any other material than straw. At this time, Calicut +was inhabited by idolaters of many sects, and by many Moorish +merchants, some of whom were so rich as to be owners of fifty ships. +These ships are made without nails, their planks being sewed together +with ropes of <i>cayro</i> , made of the fibres of the cocoa-nut husk, +pitched all over, and are flat-bottomed, without keels. Every winter +there are at least six hundred ships in this harbour, and the shore +is such, that their ships can be easily drawn up for repairs.</p> +<blockquote>[52] Laker is a kind of gum that proceedeth of the ant. +This marginal note, in Lichefild's translation of Castaneda, +indicates the animal origin of lac, which has been elucidated of late +by Dr Roxburgh.--E.</blockquote> +<p>"The subjects of the following digression are so intimately +connected with the first establishment of the Portuguese in India, as +to justify its introduction in this place, which will greatly +elucidate the narrative of Castaneda; and its length did not admit of +being inserted in the form of notes. It is chiefly due to the +ingenious and Reverend James Stanier Clarke, in his Origin and +Progress of Maritime Discovery, extracted by him from various +sources."</p> +<p>"The name of this country, Malabar, is said to be derived +from <i>ulyam</i> , which signifies, in the original language of that +part of India, <i>skirting the bottom of the hills</i> , corrupted +into Maleyam or Maleam, whence probably came Mulievar, and Mala-bar. +In a MS. account of Malabar, it is said that little more than 2300 +years ago, the sea came up to the foot of the <i>Sukien</i> mountains, +or the western <i>gauts</i> . The emerging of the country from the +waters is fabulously related to have been occasioned by the piety or +penitence of Puresram Rama, who prayed to <i>Varauna</i> , the God of +the ocean, to give him a track of land to bestow on the Bramins. +Varauna accordingly commanded the sea to withdraw from +the <i>Gowkern</i> , a hill near Mangalore, all the way to Cape +Comorin; which new land long remained marshy and scarcely habitable, +and the original settlers were forced to abandon it on account of the +numerous serpents by which it was infested: But they afterwards +returned, being instructed to propitiate the serpents by worshipping +them."</p> +<p>"At first this country was divided into four <i>Tookrees</i> or +provinces, these into <i>Naadhs</i> or districts, and these again +into <i>Khunds</i> or small precincts. The Bramins established a kind +of republican or aristocratical government, under a few principal +chiefs; but jealousies and disturbances taking place, they procured +a <i>Permaul</i> or chief governor from the prince of Chaldesh, a +sovereignty in the southern Carnatic: Yet it is more likely that this +sovereign took advantage of the divisions among the chiefs of +Malabar, to reduce them under his authority. These permauls or +viceroys were for a long while changed every twelve years; till at +length one of them, named Sheo-Ram, Cheruma Perumal, or Shermanoo +Permaloo, the Sarana-perimal of Castaneda, became so popular that he +set his master <i>Kishen Rao</i> , the rajah of Chaldesh, at defiance, +and established his own authority in Malabar. An army was sent into +Malabar to reduce the country again to obedience, but it was +defeated, and from this event, which is said to have happened 1000 +years ago, all the rajahs, chief <i>nayres</i> , and other lords of +Malabar, date the sovereignty and independence of their ancestors in +that country."</p> +<p>"After some time, Shermanoo-Permaloo, either became weary of his +situation, or from attachment to the Mahometan religion, resolved to +make a division of Malabar among his dependents, from whom the +present chieftains are descended. Such is the current story among the +inhabitants of Malabar; yet it is more probable that his dependent +chieftains, disgusted with his conversion to the religion of Mahomet, +revolted from his authority, and contrived this story of his +voluntary surrender and division of his dominions, to justify their +own assumptions. After this division of his kingdom, it is said that +an <i>erary</i> , or person of the cast of cow-herds, originally from +the banks of the Cavery, near Errode in the Carnatic, who had been a +chief instrument of the success of Shermanoo-Permaloo in the war +against rajah Kishen Rao, made application to Shermanoo for some +support. Having very little left to give away, Shermanoo made him a +grant of his own place of abode at Calicut, and gave him his sword; +ankle-rings, and other insignia of command, and presented him with +water and flowers, the ancient symbols of a transfer of property. It +is said that this cowherd rajah was ordained principal sovereign over +the other petty princes among whom Malabar was divided, with the +title of Zamorin, and was authorized by Shermanoo to extend his +dominion over all the other chieftains by force of arms. His +descendants have ever since endeavoured, on all occasions, to enforce +this pretended grant, which they pretend to hold by the tenure of +possessing the sword of Shermanoo Permaloo, and which they carefully +preserve as a precious relic."</p> +<p>"From the period of the abdication of Shermanoo, to that of the +arrival of the Portuguese at Calicut, the Mahomedan religion had made +considerable progress in Malabar; and the Arabian merchants received +every encouragement from the Samoories or Zamorins, as they made +Calicut the staple of their Indian trade, and brought large sums of +money yearly to that place, for the purchase of spiceries and other +commodities. As the rajahs of Cochin and other petty sovereignties on +the coast, were exceedingly jealous of the superior riches and power +of the zamorins, and of the monopoly of trade enjoyed by Calicut, +they gave every encouragement to the Portuguese to frequent their +ports; from whence arose a series of warfare by sea and land, which +has finally reduced them all under subjection to the Europeans."</p> +<p>"According to an Arabian author, <i>Zeirreddien Mukhdom</i> , who is +supposed to have been sent to assist the zamorins and the Mahomedans +in India, in their wars with the Portuguese, Malabar is then said to +have been divided among a multiplicity of independent princes or +rajahs, whom he calls <i>Hakims</i> , some of whom commanded over one +or two hundred men, and others one, ten, fifteen, or even as high as +thirty, thousand, or upwards. The three greatest powers at that time +were, the <i>Colastrian</i> [53] rajah to the north, the zamorin of +Calicut in the centre, and a rajah in the south, who ruled from +Coulan, Kalum, or Coulim, to Cape Comorin, comprehending the country +now belonging to the rajah of Travancore."</p> +<blockquote>[53] From the sequel in the narrative of Castaneda, this +Colastrian rajah seems to have been the sovereign of +Cananor.--E.</blockquote> +<p>"We now return from this digression, to follow the narrative of +the Portuguese Discovery and Conquest of India, as related by +Castaneda."</p> +<p>So great was the trade and population of Calicut and the +surrounding country, and the revenues of its sovereign through these +circumstances, that he was able to raise a force of thirty thousand +men in a single day, and could even bring an hundred thousand men +into the field, completely equipt for war, in three days. This +prince, in the language of the country, was styled the Zamorin, or +Samoryn, which signifies Emperor; as he was supreme over the other +two kings of Malabar, the king of Coulan and the king of Cananor. +There were indeed other princes in this country, who were called +kings, but were not so. This zamorin or king of Calicut was a bramin, +as his predecessors had been, the bramins being priests among the +Malabars. It is an ancient rule and custom among these people, that +all their kings must die in a pagoda[54], or temple of their idols; +and that there must always be a king resident in the principal +pagoda, to serve those idols: Wherefore, when the king that serves in +the temple comes to die, he who then reigns must leave his government +of temporal affairs to take his place in the temple; upon which +another is elected to take his place, and to succeed in ruling the +kingdom. If the king who is in possession of the temporal authority +should refuse to retire to the pagoda, on the death of the king who +officiated in spirituals, he is constrained to do so, however +unwilling.</p> +<blockquote>[54] This word pagoda, applied by the Portuguese, to +denote an Indian, temple, is said to be derived from a Malabar or +Indian word, <i>Pagabadi</i> , signifying any idol.--Astl., I. +51.</blockquote> +<p>The kings and nobles of Malabar are of a brown complexion, and go +naked from the waist upwards, all the under parts of their bodies +being clothed in silk or cotton Vestments; yet they sometimes wear +short gowns on their upper parts, called <i>basus</i> , of rich silk, +or cloth of gold, or of scarlet, splendidly ornamented with precious +stones, of all which the zamorin hath great store. They shave their +beards, leaving only the hair on their upper lips, and do not shave +the head like the Turks. In general, the natives of this country, +even of the higher ranks, use little state in their households, and +are very sparing in their diet; but the zamorin is served with +considerable splendour. These kings or nobles never marry; but every +one has a mistress of the Nayre cast, which, among the Malabars, are +considered as the gentry; even the zamorin has only a mistress, who +has a house of her own near the palace, and a liberal allowance for +the charges of her household and maintenance at her own disposal. +Upon any dislike or difference, he may always leave her for another. +The children are only considered as the offspring of the mother, and +have no right or title to inherit the kingdom, or any thing else +belonging to the father; and when grown up, are only held in that +rank or estimation which belongs to the blood or parentage of their +mother. Brothers succeed to brothers; and in lack of these, the sons +of their sisters, who do not marry, and have no certainty respecting +the fathers of their children; as they are very free and dissolute in +their manners, choosing paramours as they please.</p> +<p>These sisters of the zamorin, and other kings of Malabar, have +handsome allowances to live upon; and when any of them reaches the +age of ten, their kindred send for a young man of the Nayre cast, out +of the kingdom, and give him great presents to induce him to initiate +the young virgin; after which he hangs a jewel round her neck, which +she wears all the rest of her life, as a token that she is now at +liberty to dispose of herself to any one she pleases as long as she +lives.</p> +<p>When these kings are at war with each other, they often go +personally into the field, and even join personally in fight upon +occasion. When one of them dies, the body is carried out into the +fields, and burned on a pile of sanders, and of another sweet +smelling wood called <i>aguila</i> , all his brothers and kindred, and +all the nobles of the country being present at the ceremony; which is +uniformly postponed to the third day after death, that all may have +time to gather from a distance, and may have an opportunity of being +assured whether his death was natural, or caused by violence: Since, +if he died by the hand of any one, all are bound to prosecute +revenge. After the body is burnt, and the ashes buried, the whole +company shaves every part of their bodies, even to the youngest child +of these idolaters. This is their token of mourning; and during the +ensuing thirteen days, they all refrain from chewing betel, any one +infringing this law being punished by cutting his lips. During this +period of thirteen days, he who is to succeed to the throne must +abstain from all exercise of government, that any one who pleases may +have an opportunity of urging any valid objection why he should not +acquire the vacant government. After, this the successor is sworn +before all the nobles of the country, to preserve and enforce all the +laws and customs of their ancestors, to pay the debts of his +predecessor, and to use his utmost endeavours to recover any portion +of the kingdom that may have been lost. While taking this oath, +having his sword in his left hand, he holds in his right hand a +burning candle, on which is a gold ring, which he touches with his +fingers. After this they throw some grains of rice over him, using +many other ceremonies, and numerous prayers, and then worship the sun +three times. When all these ceremonies are gone through, all +the <i>Caymayles</i> , or lords of noble birth, taking hold of the +candle, take an oath to be true and faithful subjects to the new +king.</p> +<p>After the end of the thirteen days mourning, they all begin to +chew betel, and to eat flesh and fish as formerly, the new king alone +excepted. He is bound to mourn for his predecessor during a whole +year, chewing no betel, eating no flesh or fish, neither shaving his +beard nor cutting; his nails during all that time. He must eat only +once a-day, washing himself all over before this single meal, and +devoting certain hours of every day to prayer. After the expiry of +the year, he uses a certain ceremony for the soul of the king his +predecessor, much like our solemn dirge; at which 100,000 persons are +often assembled, among whom he distributes large alms. When this +ceremony is ended, the prince is confirmed as inheritor of the +kingdom, and all the people depart.</p> +<p>The zamorin of Calicut, and the other kings of Malabar, have each +one especial officer, to whom the administration of justice is +confided, and whose authority in all matters of government is as +ample as that of the king himself. The soldiers employed by these +kings are called <i>Nayres</i> , who are all gentlemen, and who follow +no other office or employ but that of fighting when needed. They are +all idolaters, armed with bows, arrows, spears, daggers of a hooked +form, and targets, and they march in a very regular and warlike +manner; but they go entirely naked and barefooted, wearing only a +piece of painted cotton cloth, which reaches from the girdle to the +knees, and a cloth or kerchief on their heads. All these men live +continually at the charge of the king and nobles of the country, from +whom they have small stipends for their maintenance; and they esteem +themselves so highly on account of their gentility of blood, that +they will not touch an husbandman, nor allow any such to enter into +their dwellings. When any husbandman goes through the streets they +must continually call out aloud <i>hoo hoo</i> ; for if commanded by a +nayre to make way, they may be slain if they refuse. The king cannot +raise any one to the rank of a <i>nayre</i> , who are all such by +descent. These <i>nayres</i> serve very faithfully under those who +give them their wages, not sparing by day or night to use their best +endeavours to serve their chiefs, nor making any account of want of +food or sleep, or of fatigue, when their service is required or may +be effectual. Their expences are so small, that on half-a-crown, +which is their only monthly pay, they can sufficiently maintain +themselves and a boy, whom each has as a servant.</p> +<p>By the laws of this country, these nayres cannot marry, so that no +one has any certain or acknowledged son or father; all their children +being born of mistresses, with each of whom three or four nayres +cohabit by agreement among themselves. Each one of this confraternity +dwells a day in his turn with the joint mistress, counting from noon +of one day to the same time of the next, after which he departs, and +another comes for the like time. They thus spend their lives without +the care or trouble of wives and children, yet maintain their +mistresses well according to their rank. Any one may forsake his +mistress at his pleasure; and in like manner, the mistress may refuse +admittance to any one o£ her lovers when she pleases. These +mistresses are all gentlewomen of the Nayre cast; and the nayres, +besides being prohibited from marrying, must not attach themselves to +any woman of a different rank. Considering that there are always +several men attached to one woman, the nayres never look upon any of +these children born of their mistresses as belonging to them, however +strong a resemblance may subsist, and all inheritances among the +nayres go to their brothers, or the sons of their sisters, born of +the same mothers, all relationship being counted only by female +consanguinity and descent. This strange law prohibiting marriage, was +established, that they might have neither wives or children on whom +to fix their love and attachment; and that being free from all family +cares, they might the more willingly devote themselves entirely to +warlike service. And the more to animate these gentlemen in the +service of the wars, and to encourage them to continue in the order +of nayres, they are privileged from all imprisonments, and from the +punishment of death on all ordinary occasions, except for the +following crimes; killing another nayre, or a cow which is an object +of worship, sleeping or eating with an ordinary woman, or speaking +evil of the king. When the king has received authentic information of +any of these offences having been committed, he issues a written +mandate to one of the nayres, commanding him to take two or three +other nayres in his company, and to slay the nayre who has committed +this offence against the laws. In obedience to this warrant, they +attack him with their swords and put him to death where-ever they +happen to find him, and then affix the royal order upon his body, +that all may know the reason of his death.</p> +<p>It is not permitted to any nayre to assume arms, or to enter into +any combat, till he has been armed as a knight. When a nayre becomes +seven years old, he is set to learn the use of all kinds of weapons, +their masters first pulling and twisting their joints to make them +supple, and then teaching them to fence and handle their arms +adroitly. Their principal weapons are swords and targets; and these +teachers, who are graduates in the use of the weapons, are +called <i>Panycaes</i> , who are much esteemed among the nayres, and +all their former scholars, however advanced in life or however high +their dignity, are bound at all times to give them due honour and +reverence when they meet; likewise, every <i>nayre</i> is obliged to +take lessons from these professors for two months yearly, all their +lives: By this means they are very skilful in the use of their +weapons, in which they take great pride. When a nayre desires to be +armed as a knight, he presents himself before the king, accompanied +by all his kindred and friends, and makes an offering of sixty gold +fannoms [55]. On which he is asked by the king if he is willing to +observe and follow the laws and customs of the nayres, to which he +answers in the affirmative. Then the king commands him to be girt +with a sword, and laying his right hand on his head, utters certain +words as if praying in so low a voice that he is not heard. The king +then embraces the young nayre, saying aloud in their language, "Take +good care to defend the Bramins and their kine." On this the nayre +falls down and does reverence to the king; and from that time he is +considered as a knight, or member of the fraternity of nayres. When +any of the nayres enters into the peculiar service of the king or of +any individual noble, he binds himself to die with and for him, and +they keep their oaths. For, if their master should happen to be slain +in any war or otherwise, they will fight till they are all slain; and +if they cannot accomplish their purpose at the time, or happen to be +absent at the slaughter of their master, they go afterwards in search +of the person who has done the deed, and never leave off till they +are themselves slain.</p> +<blockquote>[55] This is described by Castaneda as a coin equal in +value to three crowns.</blockquote> +<p>The Malabars are much given to soothsaying, and have lucky and +unlucky days. They worship the sun moon and stars, the fire, cows, +and the first thing they meet on going out of a morning, believing +every manner of vanity. The devil is often in them, but they say it +is one of their gods or <i>pagods</i> , as they call him. But whosoever +or whatsoever it may be, it constrains them to utter terrible words, +which are believed by the king. When the devil enters into a nayre, +he goes with a naked sword before the king, shaking and trembling and +giving himself many wounds, saying, "I am such or such a god, and am +come to tell thee such and such a thing," crying out, and behaving +himself like a madman or one possessed. If the king makes any doubt +of what he says, he continues to roar still louder and to slash +himself more severely, till the king gives credit to his assertions. +There are other tribes or lineages of people among the Malabars, of +various sects and divers customs, of whom it were too tedious to +speak in this place, who are all under obedience to the several kings +and nobles. The Moors alone are exempted from this obedience, on +account of the large customs they pay for their merchandize, owing to +which they are held in high estimation at Calicut.</p> +<p>Having come to anchor on the outside of the bar or reef of +Calicut, the general sent one of the Portuguese convicts on shore, in +one of the almadias which had conducted the ships to this port; +instructing him to see what kind of a place it was, and to make trial +of what kind of a reception might be looked for, seeing we were +Christians, and as the general believed that the people were likewise +Christians. When this man landed, he was immediately surrounded by +great numbers of the natives, staring at him as a stranger. These +people asked of the fishermen what man this was whom they had brought +on shore? to which they answered, that they supposed him to be a +Moor, and that he belonged to the three ships which were riding +without the bar. But the people of Calicut wondered much to see a +person who was clothed so very differently from the Moors who came +from the Red Sea. Some of these people who had knowledge of Arabic +spoke to this man, but he could not understand or answer them, at +which they were much astonished. Yet, believing him to be a Moor, +they conducted him to a house where two Moors dwelt who came +originally from Tunis and had established themselves in Calicut. On +his appearance, one of these Moors whose name was Bontaybo[56], who +could speak Spanish, immediately recognized him for a Portuguese, +having often seen people of our nation at Tunis in the reign of King +John, in a ship named La Reyna which often traded to that port. As +soon as Bontaybo saw the Portuguese, he exclaimed in Spanish, <i>Devil +take you, what brought you here</i> ? He farther inquired which way he +had travelled so as to arrive at Calicut? To this the banished man +answered, telling how many ships our general had brought with him; at +which Bontaybo was much amazed, wondering how they could possibly +come by sea from Portugal to India. He then asked what they sought at +so great a distance from home? And was answered that they came in +search of Christians and spices. Bontaybo then asked why the kings of +France and Spain and the Doge of Venice had not sent their ships +likewise? Because, said our man, the king of Portugal would not allow +them. To this Bontaybo said, he was much in the right. After some +farther conversation in this way, Bontaybo gave him good +entertainment, commanding certain cakes of wheat flour and honey, +called <i>apes</i> by the Malabars, to be set before him; and then +said that he would accompany him to the ships to wait upon the +general.</p> +<blockquote>[56] By De Faria, this man is named Monzayde.--Astl.I. +30.</blockquote> +<p>Bontaybo accordingly came on board our general, whom he +immediately addressed in Spanish, saying, "Good luck! good luck! many +rubies, many emeralds. Thou art bound to give God thanks for having +brought thee where there is abundance of all sorts of spices, +precious stones, and all the other riches of the world." On hearing +this, the general and all the people were greatly astonished, not +expecting to meet any one so far from home who understood their +language; and even shed tears of joy for this happy circumstance, and +their safe arrival. They all then joined in humble and hearty thanks +to the Almighty, by whose favour and assistance alone this great +happiness and good fortune had been accorded to them. The general +embraced Bontaybo, whom he made to sit beside him, and questioned him +if he were a Christian, and how he came to Calicut. Bontaybo told him +frankly that he was a Moor from Tunis in Barbary, and had come to +Calicut by way of Cairo and the Red Sea, and explained how he came to +know the Portuguese, as has been already mentioned. He farther +declared, that he had always been well disposed towards the +Portuguese nation, having always found them worthy of confidence and +friendship in all their dealings; and, having been a friend to them +in times past, he would not discontinue his good will, and was ready +and willing to do every thing in his power to serve them, and to +assist them in the objects for which they had now come to Calicut. +The general gave him many thanks for his good will, and promised to +reward him liberally for the friendly aid he might give to him and +his expedition, expressing his extreme satisfaction at being so +fortunate as to meet such a person in this place, believing that God +had sent him here to promote the great objects of this voyage, for +which he passed through so many and long continued dangers, being +quite sensible that he must have reaped little profit from all his +labours without such friendly assistance.</p> +<p>The general then requested information from Bontaybo, as to the +character of the king or zamorin of Calicut, and whether, in his +opinion, he would willingly receive him as ambassador from the king +of Portugal. Bontaybo represented the zamorin as a prince of good and +honourable dispositions, who, he was convinced, would gladly receive +the general as ambassador from a foreign king; more especially, if +the objects of his voyage were to establish a trade with Calicut, and +if the general had brought with him any merchandize proper for that +purpose; since the advantages which the zamorin derived from the +customs upon trade formed the chief source of his revenue. He farther +informed the general, that the zamorin resided at this time at +Panane, a village on the coast about five leagues from Calicut; and +advised that the general should send a message there to notify his +arrival, and the reasons of his coming. The general was well pleased +with this advice and presented certain gifts to Bontaybo, along with +whom he sent two of his men to Calicut, requesting Bontaybo to direct +them on their way to Panane, which he did accordingly. When these +messengers came into the presence of the zamorin, one of them, named + <i>Fernan Martyn</i> , declared to him, by means of an interpreter, +"That he waited upon his highness on the part of his general, who had +arrived in the port of Calicut with three ships, having been sent +there by the king of Portugal with letters to his highness, which the +general begged permission to present to him." On hearing this +message, and before giving any answer, the zamorin commanded each of +the two messengers to be presented with a piece cotton cloth and two +pieces of silk, such as he used in his own apparel; after which he +inquired of Fernan Martyn what king it was who had sent him these +letters, and how far his dominions were from thence. Fernan fully +answered these inquiries, adding, that he was a Christian prince, and +that those whom he had sent in the ships now at Calicut were +Christians; and related what great and numerous dangers they had +passed through during their voyage. The zamorin was much amazed at +the incidents of the voyage which Fernan related at some length, and +expressed his satisfaction that so powerful a prince of the +Christians should think of sending an ambassador to him from so great +a distance. He then desired Fernan to inform the general, that he +heartily welcomed him and his people into his dominions, advising him +to bring his ships to anchor near a village called <i>Pandarane</i> +some way below where the ships then lay, as a far better harbour than +Calicut which is an open and very dangerous road for shipping. The +zamorin desired likewise that the general might come by land from +that place to Calicut, where he would be ready to receive him. After +this, the zamorin sent a pilot to navigate the ships to the harbour +of Pandarane; but, on coming to the bar of that port, the general did +not think it advisable to enter so far within the harbour as the +pilot proposed, fearing lest he might expose himself to danger by +reposing too great confidence in these people, and placing himself +too much within their power. In this he acted with much prudent +foresight, by which he wisely avoided the injuries which were +afterwards attempted against him at this place.</p> +<p>On his arrival at Pandarane, the general received a message from +the kutwal[57] of Calicut, intimating that he and other nobles +awaited him on shore by order of the zamorin, to conduct him to the +city, and that he had permission to land whenever he pleased[58]. But +as the day drew near a close, the general returned an answer excusing +himself from landing that night. He immediately called a council of +the other captains and principal officers of the fleet, to take their +advice on the present emergency, to whom he intimated his intention +of going to visit the king of Calicut on purpose to settle a treaty +of trade and amity. Paulo de Gama, his brother, strongly objected to +his venturing on shore; alleging that although the natives of the +place were Christians, as they still believed them, yet there were +many Moors among them who were much to be feared as his mortal +enemies; since these people at Mozambique and Mombaza, where they had +only passed by their ports, endeavoured to destroy them all, they +were much more to be feared at Calicut where we had come on purpose +to enter into competition with them in trade, by which their profits +would be diminished. It was therefore the more probable that they +would use every effort to destroy the general, on whom our whole hope +of safety and success depended; and, however much the zamorin might +regret the commission of such a deed, he could not restore him to +life: besides which, the Moors were inhabitants of the place, where +they had much interest, whereas the general was an utter stranger. +Likewise, it was quite impossible for them to be assured that the +king of Calicut might not have leagued with the Moors for his death +or captivity; either of which would ruin their voyage and prove the +destruction of them all, and all the toils and dangers they had +passed through would prove in vain. To prevent all this danger, he +strongly urged that the general should on no account go on shore, but +should depute one of the captains, or some other person in the fleet +in his stead; alleging that commanders in chief ought never to +subject themselves to personal danger, unless in cases of the most +urgent necessity.</p> +<blockquote>[57] The title of kutwal is of Arabic origin, and +properly signifies the governor of a fort or castle, but the office +may be different in different places. In some instances, the kutwal +seems to have been the deputy-governor, sheriff, or judge of a +town.--Astl.I. 30.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[58] Such are the expressions used by Lichefild; but I +suspect the sense here ought to have been, That the kutwal required +De Gama to land immediately, that he might go to Calicut, on purpose +to be presented to the zamorin.--E.</blockquote> +<p>All the officers were of the same opinion. But the general +answered, that even if he were perfectly assured that his landing +were to occasion his instant death, he would not refrain from going +to visit the king of Calicut, to endeavour to settle amity and trade, +and that he might procure some spices and other commodities from the +place, by means of which their discovery of Calicut might be proved +on their return into Portugal: As otherwise, if we returned without +any of the productions of the Indies, their discovery would be +discredited, and their honour and veracity called in question. "Think +not therefore," said he, "but I will rather die, than leave it in +hazard that the long time we have already spent, and may yet employ, +shall be lost, and others sent to ascertain the truth of our +discoveries, while envious persons may have it in their power to +discredit our services. Neither do I run into such hazard of death, +nor expose you to such dangers as you suppose; seeing that I am going +to a city inhabited by Christians, and to a king who wishes the +concourse of many merchants in his dominions, as the more of these +that frequent his port so much the greater must be his revenue from +the customs upon trade. It is not my intention to stay long on shore, +so as to give opportunity to the Moors to complot against me; as I +propose only to talk with the king and to return in three days, by +which time you may have every thing in readiness for our departure. +If I should have the good fortune, by the will of God, to establish +trade and amity with the king of Calicut, I would not exchange the +honour and credit of that transaction for any treasure that could be +given me; neither can the king of Calicut settle this affair so well +with any other person, as he will honour me the more for being the +captain-general of this fleet and the ambassador of our king. Should +any other go in my stead, the king might look upon himself as +slighted and insulted, under an idea that I do not esteem him worthy +to be visited by myself, or that I do not trust him on his word and +assurance. Besides, it is not possible for me to give sufficiently +ample instructions to any one I might send, to enable him to do what +may be necessary under every circumstance that may arise, as I myself +might do. Even if it should chance that they kill me, it were better +this should happen in the discharge of my duty, than that I should +preserve my life by neglecting to perform it. You, my friends, remain +at sea in good ships: And if you hear of any mischance befalling me, +my desire is that you shall immediately depart and carry home news of +our discovery. As for our present subject, there need be no farther +argument; as I am determined, with the blessing of God, to proceed to +visit the king at Calicut."</p> +<p>When this determination was made known the captains made no +farther objections, and chose out twelve persons to accompany him, +among whom were Diego Diaz his secretary, Fernan Martinez the +interpreter, John de Sala who was afterwards treasurer of the Indies, +and nine others; and Paulo de Gama, his brother, was appointed to act +as captain-general during his absence. The general, before going on +shore, gave pointed orders that no person should on any account be +permitted to come on board the ships; but that all who were desirous +of any intercourse with them should remain in their boats or +almadias. He likewise directed that Nicholas Coello should come every +day with his boat well armed as near the shore as he could with +safety, on purpose to keep up an intercourse between the ships and +himself. All these things being settled, the general went on shore +with his twelve attendants, all in their best attire; their boat +furnished with much ordnance, dressed out with flags and streamers, +and sounding trumpets all the way from the ships to the shore. On +landing, the general was received with every demonstration of respect +by the kutwal, attended by 200 nayres, and a great concourse of +natives, both of the country and from the city of Calicut. After +compliments were passed, the general was placed in an <i>andor</i> or +litter, which the king of Calicut had sent for his use. In this +country it is not customary to travel on horseback, but in these +andors. This vehicle is like a horse-litter, except that they are +very plain with low sides, and are carried by four men on their +shoulders, who run post in this manner, carrying the king or any +noble person when on a journey, and going at a great rate. The person +in the andor may either sit or lie as he pleases; and certain +servants carry umbrellas, which they call <i>bueys</i> , to shelter the +person in the andor from the sun and rain. There are other andors +which have a curved cane over them like a bow, and are so light that +they can be carried by two men.</p> +<p>The general being mounted in one andor and the kutwal in another, +they set out for a town called Capocate[59], all the rest being on +foot; but the kutwal appointed certain people of the country to carry +the baggage of our men, which was restored to them at Capocate, where +the party stopped for refreshment, the general and his people being +in one house and the kutwal in another. Our people were here provided +with boiled fish, with rice and butter, and some of the country +fruits which are very good, though quite different from ours. One of +these fruits is called <i>lacas</i> , and another Mango, and they have +figs likewise. The water was excellent, and as good as any in +Portugal. After resting and refreshing themselves at Capocate, the +general and his suite were embarked in a vessel called +an <i>ensangada</i> , consisting of two almadias lashed side by side. +The kutwal and his train embarked in many other boats; and the whole +went up a river which discharges itself into the sea at this place. +The numbers of people that came to the river side to view our men as +they passed was quite countless, by which it appears that the country +was well inhabited. After going about a league up this river, our +people came to a place where many large ships were drawn up on the +shore. The whole party here disembarked and proceeded by land, the +general and kutwal in andors as before, being surrounded by thousands +who were curious to see the strangers, even many women pressing into +the crowd with their children slung at their backs.</p> +<blockquote>[59] In Astley, I. 81. this place is named +Kapokats.--E.</blockquote> +<p>From this place the kutwal carried the general to one of their +pagodas or idol temples, into which they entered, and which the +kutwal said was a church of great holiness. This the general believed +to be the case, fancying it to be a church of the Christians; which +he the more readily believed, as he saw seven little bells hung over +the principal door. In front of this entry, there stood a pillar made +of wire as tall as the mast of a ship, on the top of which was a +weathercock likewise made of wire. This church was as large as a +moderate convent, all built of freestone, and covered, or vaulted +over with brick, having a fine outward appearance as if its inside +were of splendid workmanship. Our general was much pleased with this +church, as he actually believed himself in a Christian country, and +gladly entered along with the kutwal. They were received by the +priests, who were naked from the waist upwards, having a kind of +petticoats of cotton hanging down from the girdle to their knees, and +pieces of calico covering their arm-pits, their heads legs and feet +bare. They were distinguished by wearing certain threads over their +right shoulders, which crossed over their breasts under their left +arms, much in the way in which our priests used formerly to wear +their stoles when they said mass. These men are called kafrs[60], and +are idolaters, serving as priests in the pagodas of Malabar; and on +the general going into the pagoda, they took holy water with +a <i>sprinkle</i> from a font, and threw it over the kutwal and him +and their attendants. After this, they gave them powdered sandalwood +to throw upon their heads, as used to be done amongst us with ashes; +and they were directed to do the same on their arms. But our people, +as being clothed, omitted this latter part of the ceremony, complying +with the other.</p> +<blockquote>[60] Kafr is an Arabic word, signifying an infidel or +unbeliever; and is applied by the Mahometans to all who do not +believe the doctrines of Mahomet, and especially to all who worship +images, including the Roman Catholics. The priests mentioned in the +text were obviously bramins. The origin of the term here used by +mistake, was obviously from the interpretation of Bontaybo, the +friendly Moor; and explains the mistake of De Gama in believing the +Malabars to have been Christians. Bontaybo applied the same +significant term of kafr to the image worshippers of all +denominations, without discriminating one species of idolater from +another.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In this pagoda they saw many images painted on the walls, some of +which had monstrous teeth projecting an inch from their mouths, and +some had four arms; all of them so ugly that they seemed like devils, +which raised doubts among our people whether they were actually in a +Christian church. In the middle of the pagoda stood a chapel, having +a roof or dome of freestone like a tower, in one part of which was a +door of wire, to which there led a flight of stone steps. On the +inside of this tower an image was observed in a recess of the wall, +which our men could not see distinctly, as the place was somewhat +dark, and they were not permitted to go near, as none were allowed to +approach except the priests. But from certain words and signs, our +people understood this to be an image of the Virgin; on which the +general and his attendants went upon their knees to say their +prayers[61]. John de Sala, however, being very doubtful that this was +not a Christian church, owing to the monstrous images on the walls, +said, as he fell on his knees, " <i>If this be the devil, I worship +God</i> ," on which the general looked at him with a smile. The kutwal +and his people, as they approached the chapel, prostrated themselves +three times on their faces with their hands extended before them, +after which they arose and said their prayers standing.</p> +<blockquote>[61] On this part of the text, the author, or the +original translator, makes the following singular marginal +reflection:--"The general deceived, committeth idolatry with the +Devil."--E.</blockquote> +<p>From this place they went forwards to the city of Calicut, and +were taken at their arrival into another pagoda similar to the +former. After this, on entering the city, the crowd was so great that +they could hardly make their way through the streets. The general was +astonished to see such multitudes, and praised GOD for having brought +him in safety to this city, humbly beseeching his divine mercy so to +guide him on his way that he might accomplish the objects of his +expedition, and return safely into Portugal. At length the pressure +of the crowd became so great that the bearers were unable to get +forwards, and the whole company were forced to take shelter in a +house. They were here joined by the kutwals brother, a nobleman who +was sent by the king to accompany the general to the palace, and had +many nayres along with him. The procession again set out, preceded by +many trumpets and sacbuts sounding all the way; and one of the nayres +carried a <i>caliver</i> , which he fired off at intervals. After they +were joined by the kutwals brother, the mob gave way for the +procession to pass, and shewed as much reverence as if the king +himself had been present. There went in the procession at least 3000 +armed men, and the multitudes of spectators, in the streets, at the +doors and windows, and on the roofs, were quite innumerable. The +general was well pleased at his honourable reception, and said +pleasantly to those of his company, " <i>They little think in Portugal +how honourably we are received here</i> ."</p> +<p>The procession arrived at the palace an hour before sunset. Though +only constructed of earth, the palace was very extensive and seemed a +handsome structure, having great numbers of trees interspersed among +the different buildings, with pleasant gardens full of fine flowers +and odoriferous plants, and many fountains; as the zamorin never goes +out of the palace while resident in Calicut. On arriving at the +palace, several caymals and other noblemen came out to receive the +general, who led him to a large square immediately in front of the +gates, whence they passed through four several courts, at the gate of +each of which there were ten porters who were obliged to lay about +them with sticks among the people to clear the way. On coming to the +gate of the house in which the king resided, they were met by the +chief bramin, or high priest of the royal household, a little old +man, who embraced the general, and conducted him and his people into +the palace. At this time the people pressed forwards with much +eagerness to get a sight of the king, which they very seldom do as he +goes very rarely out of the palace; and the multitude was so great +that some of them were stifled in the throng, which would likewise +have been the case with two of our men, if they had not gone on +before, with the assistance of the porters, who severely hurt many of +the mob, and forced them to make way. On passing the last gate, the +general and his attendants entered along with the noblemen into a +great hall, surrounded with seats of timber raised in rows above one +another like our theatres, the floor being covered by a carpet of +green velvet, and the walls hung with silk of various colours. The +king was of a brown complexion, large stature, and well advanced in +years. He lay on a sofa covered with a cloth of white silk and gold, +and a rich canopy over his head. On his head he had a cap or mitre +adorned with precious stones and pearls, and had jewels of the same +kind in his ears. He wore a jacket of fine cotton cloth, having +buttons of large pearls and the button-holes wrought with gold +thread. About his middle he had a piece of a white calico, which came +only down to his knees; and both his fingers and toes were adorned +with many gold rings set with fine stones; his arms and legs were +covered with many golden bracelets. Close to his sofa there stood a +gold shallow bason on a gold stand, in which was <i>betel</i> , which +the king chewed with salt and <i>areka</i> . This last is a kind of +fruit about the size of a nut, and is chewed all over India to +sweeten the breath, and is supposed to carry off phlegm from the +stomach and to prevent thirst. The king had likewise a gold bason on +a golden stand, into which he spat out the betel when chewed; and a +gold fountain with water for washing his mouth. The king was served +with betel by an old man who stood close to the sofa; all the others +who were in the presence held their left hands to their mouths, that +their breaths might not reach the king; and it is thought unseemly +for any one to spit or sneeze in the presence.</p> +<p>When the general entered the hall in which the king sat, he +stooped or bowed down three times according to the custom of the +country, lifting up his hands as one that praised God. The king +immediately made signs for the general to draw near, and commanded +him to be seated on one of the seats; and the rest of the Portuguese +came forwards, making similar reverences, and were likewise commanded +to sit down opposite the king. Water was then presented to all the +company to wash their hands, which was very refreshing, for, though +it was then winter, they were very hot. They were then presented with +figs and jakas, and the king was much pleased to see them eat, +laughing at them and conversing with the old man who served him with +betel. Our people being thirsty, called for water, which was brought +to them in a golden ewer, and they were directed to pour the water +into their mouths as it is reckoned injurious to touch the cup with +their lips. They accordingly did as they were directed; but some +poured the water into their throats and fell a coughing, while others +poured it beside upon their faces and clothes, which much amused the +king. After this, the king desired the general by an interpreter, to +speak to those who were present as to the purpose of his coming to +Calicut. But the general was not satisfied with this, and signified +that he was ambassador from the king of Portugal, a powerful prince, +and that Christian princes were not used to receive the embassies of +other sovereigns by means of a third person, but by themselves in +person in the presence only of a few of their principal persons: and +this being the usage of his country, he chose to deliver his message +only to the king himself. The king agreed to this, and commanded the +general and Fernan Martinez who acted as interpreter, to be conducted +into another chamber, which was adorned with as much magnificence as +the first.</p> +<p>As soon as the king entered this chamber, he took his seat on a +sofa, attended only by his interpreter, the chief bramin, the old man +who served him with betel, and the comptroller of his household. The +king then asked the general, from what part of the world he was come, +and what were his desires. He answered, that he was ambassador from +the king of Portugal, the most powerful of the Christian sovereigns +in the west, both in extent of dominions, numbers of people, and +riches. That he and his predecessors, hearing that there were +Christian kings and princes in the Indies, of which the zamorin of +Calicut was the chief, were exceedingly desirous of sending some of +their captains to discover the way, that they might enter into +friendship with the king of this country as brothers; and for this +reason he had been sent to his highness: Not that the king his master +had any need of his riches, having abundance already and more than +was needed both of gold and silver and other valuable things. That +all the former captains who had been sent at great charges upon this +discovery, after having employed a year or more in vain and having +consumed all their victuals, had returned again into Portugal. But +that the present king Don Manuel, being anxious to bring this great +enterprize to a successful conclusion, had entrusted him with command +of three ships well supplied with provisions, commanding him not to +return to Portugal without discovering the way to the Christian king +of Calicut, and would certainly order his head to be cut off if he +returned without fulfilling his orders. The said king his master had +given him two letters to deliver to his highness, which he would +present next day as it was now somewhat late; when he would convince +his highness that the king of Portugal was his friend and brother, +and should request of highness, in confirmation of friendship, to +send an ambassador to the king of Portugal, as was the custom among +Christian princes. The zamorin expressed his satisfaction with this +embassy, and told the general that he made him welcome to his +capital; and, since the king of Portugal desired to be his friend and +brother, he would be the like to him, and should send an ambassador +to him as desired. The zamorin then made inquiry into many +circumstances respecting Portugal; how far distant it was from +Calicut, how long the general had been upon the voyage, and other +things: And as it grew late, the king allowed him to retire, first +asking him whether he would reside with the Moors or the Malabars; +but as the general chose rather to have a house to himself, the king +gave orders to a Moor who was his factor, to accompany him, and to +provide him with every thing necessary for his accommodation.</p> +<p>Leaving the palace late, it being now towards ten o'clock, the +kutwal and the rest who had accompanied him there, escorted him back +to where he was to lodge; and as they were on their way, all on foot, +there fell such rain that the streets ran in torrents, insomuch that +the factor gave orders to some of the people to carry our general on +their backs. The general was displeased at this and at the delay, and +asked angrily at the factor if he meant to carry him all night +through the streets. The factor made answer that he could not do +otherwise, as the city was large and much scattered. He then +conducted him into his own house to rest for some time, and procured +a horse for him to ride; but, as the horse had no saddle, the general +preferred going on foot. At length he was brought to a very good +lodging, to which his people had previously brought all his +baggage.</p> +<p>Next day, being Tuesday, the general was greatly rejoiced to see +so promising a commencement of his business, and resolved upon +sending a present to the zamorin; upon which he sent for the kutwal +and the kings factor, to whom he shewed the present which he proposed +sending. This consisted of four <i>capotas</i> or cloaks of scarlet +cloth, six hats, four branches of coral, twelve <i>almasares</i> , a +box containing seven brass vessels, a chest of sugar, two barrels of +oil, and a cask of honey. The kutwal and factor laughed in derision +at this present, saying, that this was no fit present for their king, +the poorest merchant presenting one more valuable. They desired him +rather to send gold, as the king would accept, of nothing else. The +general was offended at this, saying, if he had been a merchant he +would have brought gold; but, being an ambassador, he had brought +none. That what he now offered were his own goods, and not belonging +to the king his master; who, being uncertain if he should ever reach +Calicut, had given him nothing to offer as a present to the zamorin. +But, at his next coming, knowing now certainly the route, the king +his master would send gold and silver and otter rich articles. To +this they answered, that these things might be, but it was the custom +of this country for every stranger who had speech of the king to make +him a present in proportion to the greatness of his rank. The general +replied it was very proper their customs should be observed, and +therefore he desired to send this present, which he could not make +more valuable, for the reasons already assigned; and if they would +not suffer it to be carried to the king, he should send it back to +his ships. They answered he might do so, for they would not consent +to have such a present sent to the king. The general, much +displeased, said he would go speak with the king himself, and would +then return to the ships, meaning to have informed the king of all +that had passed in regard to the intended present. This they said was +very proper; but, as they would be detained long at court in +attending him, they were obliged in the mean time to go upon other +business, and would return to escort him to court, as the king would +be angry if he went without them, he being an entire stranger; and +besides, he could not go in safety unaccompanied, because of the +great numbers of Moors who resided in that city. Giving credit to +their words, the general consented to this arrangement, and said he +would wait for their return, which he expected would be without +delay: But they did not return all that day, as they had been gained +over by the Moors to thwart the purposes of the general.</p> +<p>The Moors in Calicut had received information of the transactions +of the Portuguese at Quiloa, and of the taking of the <i>sambuco</i> +off Melinda; and knowing that we were Christians, were very jealous +of our arrival at Calicut. Bontaybo had told the Moors that our +purpose was not merely to discover Calicut from curiosity, but that +spices were in great estimation in Portugal, which abounded in gold +and silver, and to which all kinds of merchandize was at present +transported that went from Calicut by way of the Red Sea; and +finally, that the settlement of a direct trade by the Portuguese with +Calicut would tend greatly to the profit of the zamorin. All this the +Moors very well understood: But, considering that we were Christians, +they believed, if we should establish trade with Calicut, that their +own commodities would fall in price, and most of their profits be +destroyed. Wherefore they consulted together how to induce the +zamorin to take the general prisoner, to seize our ships, and to kill +all our men; that they might not return into Portugal with any +intelligence concerning Calicut. Upon this they associated themselves +with some of those who were in greatest credit with the zamorin, to +whom they procured access, and represented to him, That he ought not +to be deceived by the Christians, for the general was no ambassador +as he pretended, but a pirate who went about to rob and plunder +whereever he came. They asserted having received undoubted +intelligence of this from their factors in Africa; where after +entering into a friendly correspondence with the <i>xeque</i> , who +even visited the general in his ship, gave him many presents, and +provided him with a pilot to bring him to Calicut, he had battered +the town with his ordnance, and killed several of his subjects. That +he had afterwards taken some <i>sambucos</i> laden with merchandize, +treating the xeque and his subjects like enemies. In like manner they +misrepresented the conduct of the general at Mombaza and Melinda, +turning every thing that had occurred to his dishonour. They reasoned +from these misrepresentations, that he could not be an ambassador +sent to maintain peace and amity, as he would not, in that case, have +been guilty of these base hostilities, and would assuredly have +brought the king a present worthy of the sovereign he pretended to +come from.</p> +<p>The king was much amazed at this discourse, and told the Moors +that he would consider and determine what was proper for him to do. +The Moors also told the kutwal of all that they had said to the king, +with whom he was in great credit, and requested of him to persuade +the king not to listen to this embassage. The kutwal then went to the +king, who told him all that the Moors had said, and the kutwal +advised him to do as the Moors had requested. On this the king +changed his good intentions towards the general, yet endeavoured to +conceal his purposes. The Moors then waited on the general under +pretence of friendship, offering to instruct him how best to conduct +himself, saying that it was customary for all persons who came from +other places to Calicut on business with the king to bring him a +present. On this the general shewed them the present he had proposed +making, which the kutwal and the factor had made so light of; and, +with whom they agreed, saying it was by no means a fit present, and +would rather seem a mockery, and give offence. Even Bontaybo agreed +in this opinion; and asked the general why he had not brought better +things, as he knew that Portugal abounded in all manner of rich +commodities. But the general excused himself as formerly, by saying +that it was quite uncertain whether he might ever have come to +Calicut.</p> +<p>The general remained the whole of this day in his lodgings, much +displeased that the kutwal and factor had not returned according to +promise, and was at one time resolved to have gone to court without +them; yet thought it better to wait till next day. In the afternoon +of the Wednesday, the kutwal and factor made their appearance, when +he mentioned his dissatisfaction at their long absence; but they +talked of other things, and gave him no answer on that subject. At +length they accompanied him to the palace; but the king, having +greatly changed his mind towards him, made him wait three hours for +admission, and then ordered that only two of his people should be +admitted into the presence along with himself. Though the general +considered this separation of his people as not looking well, he went +into the presence attended by Fernan Martinez and Diego Diaz, his +interpreter and secretary. The king did not receive him so well as +formerly, and said with a severe countenance that he had expected him +all the preceding day. Not willing to give him the true cause of his +absence, lest it might lead to a conversation respecting the present, +the general said he had tarried at home to recover from the fatigue +of his long voyage. On this the king observed, that he pretended to +have been sent on an embassy of friendship from a rich and powerful +king, and that he did not well understand what kind of friendship was +intended, since he had sent him no present. To this the general +answered, That it was not to be wondered that the king his master had +sent no present to his highness, considering the extreme uncertainty +of his being able to come to this place by a way never before +attempted, and unknown till now. But, now that the way was +discovered, and God spared him to return to Portugal, his master +would assuredly send him princely gifts, worthy of them both: And if +his highness would have the goodness to give credit to the letters +which he had brought from the king his master, he would there learn +the intentions of the king of Portugal in sending him to Calicut. +Instead of desiring to see the letters, the king asked him whether he +was sent in search of stones or of men; and if sent to discover men, +how came it that the king his master had sent no present? And since +it was manifest that he had brought him nothing, he demanded of him +to send him the golden image of the Virgin, which he understood was +in his ship.</p> +<p>The general, much concerned to find the king so much changed +towards him, on account of not bringing him a present and amazed at +this strange demand, said that the image of the Virgin Mary of which +his highness had been told, was only of wood gilt, and not of gold; +and besides, as this holy image had protected him during his long +perils on the sea, and had brought him so far in safety, he was +unwilling to part with it. The zamorin made no reply to this, but +immediately demanded that he should produce the letters from the king +of Portugal. One of these was written in the Portuguese language, and +the other in Arabic; and the general explained that this had been +done, because the king his master did not know which of these might +be understood in the dominions of his highness: And, since he now +knew that Portuguese was not understood in India, whereas Arabic was, +he requested that some Christian of the Indies who understood Arabic +might be employed to interpret the letter, because the Moors were +known to be enemies to the Christians, and he was afraid lest they +might purposely give it a wrong interpretation. The king gave orders +to this purpose, but no Indian could be found who was able to read +the letters, or at least who would acknowledge that he could read +them. Seeing that it was now necessary that it should be read by the +Moors, the general requested that Bontaybo should be one of those +appointed for the purpose, placing more reliance on him than the +others, as he was an acquaintance. The king accordingly commanded the +letter to be read by him and other three Moors; who, having first +read it over to themselves, interpreted it aloud to the king, to the +following effect: "As soon as it became known to the king of +Portugal, that the king of Calicut was one of the mightiest kings of +all the Indies and a Christian, he was anxious to establish a treaty +of amity and commerce with him, that he might procure spices, which +were in great abundance in his country, and to procure which the +merchants of many parts of the world trade thither: And, if his +highness would give a licence to send for spices, he would send many +things from his kingdom which were not to be had in the dominions of +his highness; or if these things were not satisfactory, of which the +general could shew him some samples, he was willing to send money, +both gold and silver, to purchase the spices. And finally referring +his highness to the general for farther information."</p> +<p>On hearing this letter interpreted, and being desirous that his +revenues might increase by the resort of many merchants to his +dominions, the zamorin evinced his satisfaction at what he had heard; +and assuming a more friendly deportment towards the general, asked +him what were the articles of merchandize that could be had from +Portugal. De Gama named many different kinds; particularly mentioning +such as he had samples of along with him, and likewise their money, +and requested permission to go on board his ships that he might bring +these things to his highness, offering to leave four or five of his +men in his lodgings during his absence. Giving now more credit to the +general than to what had been said by the Moors to his prejudice, the +king told De Gama he might go on board when he pleased, taking all +his men with him, as there was no call for any of them remaining on +shore. He likewise said the general might freely bring his goods on +shore, and sell them to the best advantage. The general was greatly +satisfied with this permission, of which he had no hopes at the +first, on seeing the unfriendly reception he had met with at the +commencement of his audience. He went back, therefore, to his +lodging, accompanied by the kutwal; and the day being near a close, +he deferred returning on board that night.</p> +<p>De Faria gives a somewhat different account of what passed at this +second audience[62]. "It was wonderful that the zamorin, not knowing +how to be properly assured of the truth, should rely on the faith of +him who was accused by his ministers. For, as if he had really known +in what detestation the Portuguese hold a lie, although to their own +advantage, he sent for De Gama, and told him plainly that he had been +informed his embassy was all a counterfeit, and that he was some +banished man or a fugitive: Yet at the same time offered, even if it +were so, to give him a kind reception, and to make him handsome +appointments in his service; and promised to rely entirely on his +word for information respecting the truth of the whole story. De Gama +heard the king to an end with a firm countenance, and declared +himself highly sensible of the confidence reposed in him. He then +proceeded to answer all that had been alleged against him, which he +completely overturned by irrefragable argument in a long and eloquent +speech, preserving the utmost gravity and composure throughout the +whole. The zamorin eyed him steadfastly the whole time, hoping to be +enabled to judge of the truth or falsehood of his assertion by his +countenance; and concluded, from the unconcernedness of his looks, +the eloquence of his words, and the firm gravity of his whole +demeanour, that no deceit could lurk under such appearances of +sincerity, that the Moors had accused him maliciously, and had +imposed on his ministers. He therefore frankly allowed De Gama +permission to return to his ships, and to land his merchandize, if he +had any: Saying, that while that was doing, he would prepare a +satisfactory answer to the letter of the king of Portugal."</p> +<blockquote>[62] Astley, I. 24. a.</blockquote> +<p>On the next day, being the last of May, the kutwal sent a horse to +the general to carry him to Pandarane; but having no furniture, he +requested to be supplied with an <i>andor</i> , which was sent +accordingly, when De Gama immediately set out for Pandarane, all his +people accompanying him on foot. The kutwal remained at Calicut, but +a considerable number of nayres escorted the general on his way. When +the Moors learnt that the general was gone to the ships, they went +together to the kutwal, making large offers of money to him, if he +would pursue the general, and detain him a prisoner under some +feigned pretence; when they would take some opportunity of having him +slain, in such way that the blame should not attach to the kutwal. +And when he objected that the zamorin might punish him for detaining +the general contrary to his orders, they engaged so to deal with the +zamorin as to obtain his pardon for that offence. Induced by a large +bribe, and encouraged by this promise, the kutwal followed De Gama in +such haste that he soon passed our men, who lagged behind on account +of the great heat. On overtaking De Gama, he asked by signs why he +was in such haste, and where he was running to? The general answered +in the same manner, that he was running to avoid the heat. On coming +to Pandarane, as his men were not come up, the general declined going +into the town till they should arrive, and went into a house to get +shelter from the rain. The people did not get to the town till near +sunset, having lost their way; on which the general said if it had +not been for their absence he would have been by this time on board. +The general immediately desired the kutwal to order him to be +furnished with an almadia or pinnace, to carry him and his people on +board; but the kutwal said it was now late, and the ships so far away +that he might miss them in the dark, for which reason he had better +stay till next day. The general then said, if he were not immediately +furnished with an almadia, he would return to the king and complain +that he was detained contrary to his license, and even mentioned as +if he meant to return immediately to Calicut. To dissemble the more, +the kutwal said he might have thirty instead of one, if he needed +them, and pretended to send out to procure almadias, while at the +same time he commanded the owners to hide themselves that they might +not be found.</p> +<p>In the mean time, while messengers were dispatched on pretence to +seek almadias, the general, having a strong suspicion that evil was +intended towards him, walked leisurely along the water side, and sent +off Gonzales Perez and two other mariners, to go on before and +endeavour to find Nicholas Coello with his boats, and to caution him +to keep out of the way, lest the kutwal might send off to seize his +boats and men. While Perez and the others were absent on this errand, +it drew far into the night; and not choosing to go off till he learnt +what success Perez had met with, he at length agreed to stay all +night. Having placed De Gama in the house of a Moor for the night, +the kutwal pretended that he would go in search of the three mariners +who were absent; but he did not return till next morning. The general +then required to have an almadia to carry him and his people on +board. Before answering, the kutwal spoke some words to his nayres in +their own language, and then desired the general to give orders to +have the ships brought near the shore oh which he should have leave +to depart. On this the general became still more afraid that some +treachery was intended; yet answered boldly, that he would give no +such order while he remained on shore, as that would make his brother +believe he was a prisoner and had issued this order under restraint, +on which he would immediately depart for Portugal without him. The +kutwal then threatened stoutly that he should never be allowed to go +off, unless he complied with this demand. The general, in return, +declared he should immediately return to Calicut if not allowed to go +on board, and make a complaint of his conduct to the king. The kutwal +even dared him to do this, yet took care it should not be in his +power, as he had ordered the doors to be kept shut and guarded by +armed nayres, to prevent any of the Portuguese from going out. Yet it +was the will of God that the kutwal dared not to kill the general or +any of his men, although the Moors had bribed him with a great sum of +money, and notwithstanding his great credit with the zamorin. His +anxiety to have the ships brought near the shore was, that the Moors +might be able to board them and kill all their people; and, seeing it +in this light, the general was equally determined to prevent their +nearer approach. Finding he could not prevail on the general to +command the ships to be brought near the shore, and having no +pretence to justify either keeping him prisoner or offering him any +wrong, the kutwal next endeavoured to persuade him to order the sails +and rudders on shore; at which the general only laughed, saying the +king had given full permission to go on board without any such +conditions, and assured him the king should be fully informed of all +his unjust proceedings.</p> +<p>The general and his people now pretended to be in want of +necessaries from the ships, and requested leave to send some of his +people on board, while he should remain on shore; but this the kutwal +refused, and our people began to be seriously alarmed. At this time +Gonzalo Perez returned, supposing the general at liberty and that he +waited for him and his companions. Perez informed De Gama that he had +seen Coello, who waited for him with the boats near the shore. The +admiral was exceedingly anxious that the kutwal should not know of +this circumstance, lest he might send out a number of armed almadias +to capture them; and therefore urged Perez to return secretly to give +Coello warning to return to the ships and keep constantly on the +alert for fear of an attack. When Coello got this intelligence, he +immediately set off, and the kutwal caused him to be pursued by +several almadias full of armed men, but he made his escape. The +kutwal made another attempt to induce the general to order his +brother to bring the ships near the shore, but in vain; for the +general told him, his brother, even if he were to write such an +order, would not obey, or, were he disposed to do so, the other +officers in the ship would prevent him. The kutwal observed that he +could not give credit to this, as he was sure any thing he commanded +would be obeyed. But no arguments could prevail on the general to +this measure, which he was satisfied was meant for facilitating the +destruction of the fleet to gratify the Moors.</p> +<p>The whole of this day was spent in this manner, and in the night +our people were confined in a large paved yard surrounded with walls, +and under even a stronger guard than attended them during the day; +and even the general began to fear as well as the men, that they +would be separated from one another. Yet he trusted, when the zamorin +should come to know the usage they had received, he would give orders +for their release. That night, the kutwal came to sup with the +general and sent a supply of fowls and rice. Finding that he could +not prevail over the constancy of De Gama, he determined at last to +set him at liberty. Next day, therefore, being Saturday the second of +June, he desired the general, since he had promised to the king to +bring his merchandize on shore, that he ought to do so; as it was the +usage of all merchants who came to Calicut to land their goods and +crews, and not to return to their ships till all was sold; and he +promised, when this was done, to give him free liberty to depart. +Although the general gave very little credit to his fair words, he +yet said, if the kutwal would provide almadias for the purpose, he +would order his goods on shore; but was certain his brother would not +allow the boats to leave the ships while he was detained on shore. +The kutwal was now content to get the goods into his power, as he +understood from the general they were of great value, and allowed the +general to send off a message to his brother. He therefore sent off a +letter by two of his men, in which he gave his brother an account of +his situation, confined to his lodging but otherwise well used, and +desiring him to send some of the merchandize on shore to satisfy the +kutwal; but, directing him, in case he was much longer detained, to +believe that he was kept prisoner by order of the zamorin; whose only +object was to get the Portuguese ships into his power, not having +time to arm his own ships for that purpose. For this reason, if not +set at liberty immediately after the goods were landed, he required +his brother to return without delay to Portugal, and inform the king +of all that had happened; that the trade of so fine a country might +not be lost to his country. And farther, to inform the king in what +state he remained, trusting that his royal master would send such an +armament as would enforce his restoration to liberty.</p> +<p>On receiving this letter, and a circumstantial relation from the +messenger of all that had happened on shore, Paulo de Gama +immediately sent the goods; but said in answer to the general, that +he could not answer to his honour to return to Portugal without him, +and he trusted God would enable the small force he had still in the +fleet, with the aid of his ordnance, to compel the kutwal to liberate +him. On the merchandize being landed, the general delivered it over +into the custody of Diego Diaz as factor, with Alvora de Braga as his +clerk, whom he left in a house provided for them by the kutwal; after +which he went on board the ships. He then refused to send any more +goods on shore, till those already there were sold and paid for, and +determined not to run himself again into danger by venturing on shore +after what had already past. At this the Moors were grievously vexed, +as they thought it more easy for them to have destroyed him on land +than on board the ships. On purpose to entice him to land once more, +the Moors made a mock of his goods, pretending they were good for +nothing, and did all in their power to prevent them from selling. +Thinking that the zamorin knew nothing of all these transactions, he +sent him an account of the whole five days afterwards, by his factor, +of all that had happened, and of the injurious conduct of the Moors +respecting the sale of the goods. The king seemed much offended by +these proceedings, sending the general word that he would punish all +those who had used him ill, yet the kutwal remained unpunished. The +king likewise sent seven or eight merchants of Guzerate, who were +idolaters, to buy the goods, accompanied by an honest nayre, to +remain with Diaz at the factory to defend him against the Moors. Yet +all this was only done colourably, that the Moors might not appear to +suborn the merchants; for these men bought nothing, and even beat +down the price of the commodities, to the great satisfaction of the +Moors; who now boasted that no person would buy our goods any more +than they. Yet none of the Moors durst venture to our factory, after +they heard a nayre was stationed there by the kings order. If they +did not love us before, they hated us ten times worse now, and when +any of our men landed, they used to spit on the ground in contempt, +calling out Portugal! Portugal! But by the especial order of the +general, our people took no other notice than merely laughing at +their insolence.</p> +<p>As none of the merchants would buy our goods, the general supposed +that this was occasioned by their being lodged at Pandarane, where +none of the merchants of Calicut resided; and requested leave, by a +messenger, from the zamorin, to have the goods removed to the city. +This permission was immediately granted, and the king issued orders +to the kutwal to see them removed, and even to pay the persons who +carried them, that nothing belonging to the king of Portugal might be +subject to any charges in his country. The general would not trust +himself any more on shore, although Bontaybo, who frequently came off +to visit him, advised him to wait on the king, lest the great credit +of the Moors might again prevail over his mind. But considering this +man as a Moor, the general never put much trust in him, nor informed +him of his intentions; yet always received him kindly, and gave him +money and other gifts, that he might bring him intelligence of what +was passing on shore.</p> +<p>After the Portuguese merchandize was removed to Calicut, the +general permitted one man daily from each of the ships to go on +shore, to see the city and to purchase any thing they had a mind for; +always taking especial care that one party returned on board before +another landed. Our people were courteously received and entertained +by the natives, and were even lodged in their houses occasionally. +They bartered several things on shore, such as bracelets of brass and +copper, pewter, and other European articles, for the productions of +the country, as freely and quietly as if they had been in Lisbon. +Fishermen, and others of the idolaters came off to the ships, selling +fish, cocoa-nuts, and poultry, for biscuit or money; while others +came off with their children, merely to have a sight of our ships. On +all these occasions, the general commanded them to be well treated +and to have food given them, to conciliate the people and to secure +the friendship of the zamorin. This continued till the tenth of +August, during which time the ships had always some of the natives on +board.</p> +<p>Seeing the quietness of the people, and their familiarity with his +men, who never met with any injury from the Moors or nayres, the +general believed the zamorin was willing to preserve friendship and +peace with the subjects of Portugal, and determined upon establishing +a factory in Calicut for the sale of his commodities, although very +little of what was landed had as yet been sold. By this means, he +hoped to lay a sure foundation for the establishment of trade, +against the next expedition which the king his master might send, if +GOD pleased to send him home with the intelligence of the discovery. +Accordingly, with the advice and concurrence of the captains and +other principal officers of the fleet, he sent a present by Diego +Diaz to the zamorin, consisting of scarfs of different colours, +silks, corals, and various other articles. Diaz was desired to say to +the king, that the general begged his highness to excuse his +presumption in sending such a present in token of his entire devotion +to his service, having nothing worthy of the acceptance of so great a +prince. That the time now drew near when it would be necessary to +depart on his return to Portugal; and therefore, if his highness +meant to send an ambassador to the king of Portugal, he had better +give orders that he might soon be ready to embark. Presuming upon +what his highness had already agreed to, and on the kindness hitherto +shewn to him and his people by his highness, he requested permission +to leave a factor and clerk in Calicut along with his merchandize, as +a memorial of peace and amity between his highness and the king of +Portugal, as a testimony of the truth of the embassy with which he +had been entrusted, and in pledge of farther embassy from the king +his master as soon as the discovery was made known. He likewise +prayed his highness to send on board as a full confirmation of his +having actually made the voyage to India, a <i>bahar</i> of cinnamon, +another of cloves, and a third of some other spices, which should be +paid for by the factor out of the first sales of the goods in his +possession. It was four days after Diaz received this order before he +could get access to the zamorin, though he went every day to the +palace for this purpose. At length he was admitted to audience; and +on seeing Diaz with his present, the king asked him what he wanted in +so stern a manner that he was afraid of being killed. After +delivering the message from the general and wishing to deliver the +present, the king refused to see it, and commanded that it should be +delivered to his factor. The answer he gave to the message was, that +since the general wished to depart he might do so, but must first pay +him 600 <i>serasynes</i> [63], according to the custom of the +country.</p> +<blockquote>[63] Called in +Astley <i>sharafins</i> .--Astl.</blockquote> +I. 36. +<p>Diaz, on his return to the factory with the present intended for +the king, was accompanied by many of the nayres, which he thought was +from respect: but immediately on entering the house, the nayres +remained at the door, forbidding him or any other person to go out. +After this, a proclamation was made through the city, forbidding any +boat or almadia to go on board our fleet on pain of death. Yet +Bontaybo went off secretly, and gave warning to the general not to +venture on shore or to permit any of the people to land; as he had +learned from the Moors, that any who might do so would surely lose +their lives. Bontaybo said farther, that all the fair words of the +king proceeded from dissimulation, that he might entice the general +and his people on shore to kill them all; all which evil intentions +were occasioned by the Moors, who made the king believe that the +Portuguese were thieves and pirates, who had come to Calicut to steal +such merchandize as should be brought there; and who had come to spy +out the land, that they might return with a great armament to invade +his dominions. All this was confirmed by two Malabar idolaters, and +the general was in great uncertainty how best to proceed on the +present emergency. That same night, after dark, a Negro slave +belonging to Diaz came off, with the information that Diaz and Braga +were made prisoners, and with an account of the answer which the king +had given to his message, what he had ordered to be done with the +present, and of the proclamations which were made through the city. +Diego Diaz, being anxious to have these things communicated to the +general, had bribed a fisherman to carry this man on board, as he +could not well be recognized in the night owing to his colour. The +general, though much offended at these injurious proceedings, was +unwilling to depart till he might see the end of these things, and +therefore waited to see whether anyone might come off to the ships. +Next day, being Wednesday the 15th of August, only one almadia came +off, in which there were four boys, who brought fine precious stones +for sale. Although the general believed they were spies, he received +them kindly, and gave no hints of having heard that Diaz was made a +prisoner; expecting that others of more importance might come on +board through whom he might procure the enlargement of Diaz and +Braga. By these boys he wrote to Diaz, but couched in such a manner +that it might not be understood if it fell into any other hands. The +letter was delivered according to its direction, and the boys told +the king of their reception on board, by which he believed that the +general knew not of the imprisonment of his people. On this he sent +off other persons to the ships, who were strictly enjoined not to +disclose the treatment which the factor had experienced. This was +done out of policy to deceive the general and to detain our ships, +till the king might be able to send his own fleet to set upon him, or +till the ships might arrive from Mecca to take him prisoner.</p> +<p>Some of the Malabars continued to come off daily, all of whom the +general commanded to be well entertained, as he saw none of +sufficient importance to be detained. But, on the Sunday, six +principal Malabars came on board, attended by fifteen men in another +pinnace. Believing that the king would liberate Diaz and Braga in +return for these men, he made them all prisoners; and sent a letter +in the Malabar language, by two of the native boatmen, to the kings +factors, demanding his factor and clerk in return for those men he +had detained on board. On perusal of this letter, the kings factor +communicated the same to the king, who commanded him to take the +Portuguese to his own house, that he might not appear to have had any +hand in their detention; and then to restore them to the general in +return for the Malabars, whose wives had made a great clamour about +the detention of their husbands.</p> +<p>Seeing that his people were not sent on board, the general weighed +anchor on Wednesday the 23d of August and set sail, meaning to try if +this shew of going away would have the effect of recovering Diaz and +Braga, in return for these Malabars whom he had detained. The wind +being contrary, he came to anchor in an open road, four leagues from +Calicut, where the ships remained till the Saturday. As there was no +appearance of getting back his people, De Gama again set sail; but +for want of wind had to come again to anchor, almost out of the sight +of land. An almadia now came to the ships with certain Malabars, who +said that Diaz and the others were in the kings palace, and would be +assuredly sent on board next day. Not seeing the detained Malabars, +these people believed they had been all put to death. This affected +delay proceeded entirely from craft, that they might gain time to fit +out the Calicut fleet, and for the arrival of the ships from Mecca, +when their combined force might environ and destroy the Portuguese. +The general ordered these messengers to go back to Calicut, and not +to return without his men or letters from them, as otherwise he +should sink them; and that if a satisfactory answer was not sent him +without delay, he would cut off the heads of all the Malabars whom he +had detained. The Malabars returned to Calicut with this message; and +a wind springing up, the general made sail, and came to anchor off +Calicut about sunset.</p> +<p>Next day, seven almadias came off to the fleet, in one of which +were Diego Diaz and Alvora Braga, the others being filled with many +of the natives. These people, however, were afraid to come on board, +and put Diaz and Braga into the boat which was astern of the generals +ship, and then put off to a little distance, waiting for the generals +answer. Diego told the general, that when the king learnt of his +having sailed, he sent for him to the palace, assuming a pleasant +countenance as pretending to be ignorant of his imprisonment, and +asked him why the general had kept his subjects as prisoners on +board. On being told the reason, he said the general was in the +right. He then asked if his own factor, who was present, had extorted +any presents; for he well knew that one of his predecessors had been +put to death not long before, for taking bribes from merchant +strangers. After this, the king desired Diaz to request the general +to send him the stone pillar having the cross and the arms of +Portugal, which he had promised to set up; and to know whether he +would leave Diaz as factor in Calicut. Diaz likewise presented a +letter for the king of Portugal, which was written on a palm leaf by +Diaz, and signed by the zamorin, to the following effect:</p> +<p>"Vasco de la Gama, a gentleman of thy house, came to my country, +of whose arrival I was very glad. In my country there is abundance of +cinnamon, cloves, pepper, and precious stones. The commodities I wish +to procure from your country are, silver, gold, coral, and +scarlet."</p> +<p>Convinced of the duplicity of the zamorin, De Gama made no answer +to the message; but sent back all the nayres whom he had detained, +desired them to tell the king he should return the others who were in +custody, on receiving back his merchandize. He sent however the stone +pillar which had been required. On the next day Bontaybo came on +board, saying that the kutwal, by order of the zamorin, had seized +all his property, alleging that he was a Christian who had come +overland to Calicut as a spy from the king of Portugal. Bontaybo +said, he was sure this bad treatment had proceeded from the +suggestion of the Moors; and, as they had seized his goods, he was +sure they meant personal violence, on which account he had made his +escape. The general gave him a kind reception, offering to carry him +to Portugal, promising that he should recover double the value of his +goods, besides, that he might expect to be well rewarded by the king +of Portugal. To this arrangement Bontaybo gladly consented, and had a +good cabin assigned him by order of the general. About ten o'clock +the same day, three almadias full of men came off to the ships, +having some scarfs laid on their benches, as being part of our goods; +and these were followed by four other almadias, one after the other. +The Malabars pretended that they had brought off all the goods, which +they offered to put into his boat, and required him in return to +deliver up the rest of the prisoners. But convinced this was a mere +deception, the general desired them to go away, as he would have none +of their merchandize, and was resolved to carry the Malabars to +Portugal as witnesses of his discovery. He added, if God spared his +life, he should convince them whether the Christians were thieves, as +the Moors had made the king of Calicut believe, who had therefore +treated him with so much injustice. He now commanded several cannon +to be fired, on which they were afraid and made off.</p> +<p>It was certain, if the kings ships had been afloat that they would +have been sent to attack our ships; but they were all hauled upon +shore on account of the winter season. Wherefore we may attribute it +to Providence that our ships happened to arrive here at this season, +that thereby they might escape and carry home news of having +discovered the Indies, to the great advancement of the Catholic +faith.</p> +<p>Although greatly rejoiced at having made the discovery of the +route to Calicut and the Indies, he was much distressed at the +behaviour of the zamorin, believing that the next expedition that +might be sent out would be subject to great danger; but as he was +unable to do any thing more at this time, he consoled himself with +the knowledge he had thus acquired of the safe navigation, and that +he had procured specimens of the spices, drugs, precious stones, and +other commodities which were to be procured at this place. Having now +nothing to detain him here, he departed from Calicut, carrying with +him the Malabars whom he had made prisoners; as he hoped by their +means a good agreement might be entered into with the zamorin on +sending out the next fleet from Portugal. On the Thursday after his +departure, being becalmed about a league from Calicut, about +sixty <i>tonys</i> , or boats of the country, came off to the fleet +filled with soldiers expecting to have taken all our ships. But the +general kept them off by frequent discharges of his artillery, though +they followed him an hour and a half. At length there fell a heavy +shower of rain attended with some wind, by which the fleet was +enabled to make sail, and the enemies returned to the land. He now +proposed to direct his course for Melinda; but made little way along +the coast, by reason of calms. At this time, having in mind the good +of the next ships which might come to Calicut, he thought fit to send +a soothing letter to the zamorin, which was written in Arabic by +Bontaybo; in which he apologized for having carried off the Malabars, +as evidences of his having been at Calicut. He said he was sorry that +he had left no factor, lest the Moors might put him to death; and +that he had been deterred by the some cause from having frequently +landed himself. That, notwithstanding all that had happened, the king +his master would be glad to have the friendship of the zamorin, and +would assuredly send him abundance of all those commodities he might +need; and that the trade of the Portuguese to his city would +henceforth redound to his great profit. This letter was entrusted to +one of the Malabars, who was set on shore and ordered to deliver it +to the zamorin.</p> +<p>Continuing his course along the coast, the fleet came on the +ensuing Thursday among certain rocky islands, from one of which that +was inhabited there came off several almadias, having fish and other +victuals for sale. The general treated these people kindly, giving +them shirts and other articles to their great contentment; and, with +their approbation, set up a cross on the island, which was named <i>El +padron de Sancta Maria</i> . As soon as night approached, and the wind +began to blow from the shore, the fleet made sail, always keeping +near the land. On the Thursday after, being the 19th of September, +they came in sight of a pleasant high land, off which lay six little +islands, where he came to anchor. Going here on shore in search of +fresh water, a young man was met with, who was or pretended to be a +Christian. This person carried our men to a river, where they found a +spring of excellent water issuing out of the rock; and for his +services they gave him a red nightcap. Next morning four natives came +off in a small boat, with many gourds and cucumbers for sale. These +people said that their country produced cinnamon, and two of our +people were sent onshore to see whether this were true, who brought +with them two green boughs which were said to be cinnamon, of which +they had seen a large grove, but it turned out only to be the wild +kind. At their return, these men were accompanied by more than twenty +natives, who brought hens, gourds, and cows milk for sale, and who +said, if the general would send some of his men on shore, he might +have abundance of dried cinnamon, hogs, and poultry: But he dreaded +treachery, and would not allow any of his people to go on shore. Next +forenoon, when some of our men went to a part of the shore at some +distance from the ships to cut wood, they suddenly came in sight of +two boats lying close to the land, and returned with intelligence of +what they had seen; but the general would not send to inquire what +these might be until after dinner. In the mean time, one of the men +in the top gave notice that he saw eight large ships out at sea, +which were then becalmed. The general gave immediate orders to have +every thing in readiness in case of an attack, and as the wind served +both fleets, they soon came within two leagues of each other. The +enemies perceiving our fleet approaching, fled towards the shore; but +one of their rudders breaking, the men belonging to that ship escaped +in their boats, and Coello immediately took possession, expecting to +find it laden with rich commodities. Nothing was found however, +except cocoa-nuts and a kind of sugar called <i>melasus</i> , which is +prepared from palms or date trees. He also found on board many bows +and arrows, swords, spears, and targets. The other seven ships were +run aground, so that our ships could not get near them, as drawing +too much water; but our people followed in their boats, and drove +them out of their vessels by firing upon them with their ordnance. +Next day, while our fleet was at anchor, seven men came off from the +land in an almadia, who reported that these eight ships had been sent +by the zamorin from Calicut to capture our fleet, as they had been +informed by some of the fugitives[64].</p> +<blockquote>[64] De Faria says that this fleet belonged to a pirate +named Timoja, of whom frequent mention will be made hereafter; and +that the eight ships were so linked together, and covered over with +boughs of trees, that they resembled a floating island.--Astl.I. 38. +a.</blockquote> +<p>From this place the general removed to the island +of <i>Ansandina</i> , at a short distance, where he was told he might +procure good water. This island is very small, and only a league from +the continent. It contains several woods, and two cisterns, or +conduits, built of freestone, one of which is six feet deep, supplied +with excellent water from certain springs; and the sea around has +great quantities of fish. Before the Moors traded with India, this +island was well inhabited by the native idolaters, having many goodly +buildings, and especially some fine pagodas. But when the Moors +resorted to this coast from the Red Sea, they used to take in their +wood and water at this place, and abused the inhabitants so +intolerably that they abandoned the place, and pulled down most of +their pagodas and all their other buildings. These Gentiles were +natives of that part of the continent which belongs to the king +of <i>Narsingas</i> , and used often to repair thither to perform their +devotions to three black stones which were in a chapel of one of the +pagodas, which still remains. This island is +called <i>Ansandina</i> [65] in the Malabar language, which signifies +the Five Islands, and is so named because there are other four +islands round about.</p> +<p>Coming to anchor here, the general sent Coello on shore with an +armed escort, to examine the country, and to see if there were any +convenient place for new-graving their ships bottoms, as they had +been long at sea and had a long run before them. Every thing being +found convenient, and the measure approved of by all the captains, it +was determined to lay their ships successively aground for this +purpose. The ship called the Berrio was first laid on shore; and +while occupied in repairing and cleaning her bottom, many of the +natives came off from the continent to sell victuals to our people. +While this was going forwards two small brigandines were seen rowing +towards our ships, ornamented with flags and streamers on their +masts, beating drums and sounding trumpets, and filled with men who +plied their oars. At the same time, five similar vessels were seen +creeping along shore, as if lying by to help the others if needful. +The Malabars who supplied our people with provisions, warned the +general to beware of these vessels, which belonged to pirates who +roamed about in these seas, robbing all they met under pretence of +peace[66]. The general believed he might have taken these two +vessels, if he had allowed them to come close up with his ships, but +did not choose to run any risk; wherefore, as soon as they came +within gun-shot, he ordered all the cannon belonging to the two ships +which remained afloat to be fired at them; on which, calling out in a +loud voice, <i>Tambarane! Tambarane!</i> which is their name for God, +they fled away. Nicholas Coello, who was in his boat, followed after +them, firing off his ordnance; but the general, fearful of any +mischance, called him back by signal.</p> +<blockquote>[65] More probably Anche-diva, or Ange-diva.--Astl.I. 38. +b.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[66] These vessels seem more probably to have been the +squadron of Timoja. --Astl.I. 38. c.</blockquote> +<p>Next day, when the general and all his men were on shore at work +upon the Berrio, twelve natives, who appeared to be men of some +consequence, came to the island in two small <i>paraos</i> , and +presented a bundle of sugar canes. These people asked permission to +go on board the ships, as they had never seen any such before; but +the general was much offended with this, fearing they might be spies. +While engaged in conversation with these men, other two <i>paraos</i> +made their appearance, having as many men. But those who came first, +seeing the general displeased, advised these new comers not to land. +When the Berrio was repaired, the generals ship was brought aground +to receive the same attentions.</p> +<p>While the general and the other captains were on shore, busied in +the repairs of the San Michael, there came one day a man in a +little <i>parao</i> , seemingly about forty years old, and not of that +country, as he was dressed in a <i>sabaco</i> , or gown of fine cotton +reaching to his heels, his head covered with a kerchief or towel, +which partly covered his face, and wearing a faulchion or crooked +cymeter at his girdle. Immediately on landing, he went up and +embraced the general, as if he had seen or known him before, and +treated the other captains with the same politeness. He told them he +was a Christian, born in Italy, and had been brought when a child +into the Indies. That he now dwelt with a Moorish lord named + <i>Sabayo</i> , who ruled a certain island called Goa, about twelve +leagues from thence, and who had 40,000 horsemen on that island. +That, as his dwelling was now among the Moors, he conformed +externally to their worship, though in his heart a Christian. That +learning certain men had come in ships to Calicut, such as had never +been seen before in the Indies, and that no one understood their +language, he immediately understood that they must be + <i>Frangnes</i> ,[67] for so the Christians are named in the Indies. +That he was desirous of seeing them, and had asked leave +of <i>Sabayo</i> to come and visit them; which, if he had not +obtained, he would have died of vexation. That Sabayo had not only +granted him leave for this purpose; but desired, if he found the +strangers to be from his country, to offer them any thing they might +stand in need of which his country produced; particularly spices and +provisions. And besides, if they would come and live with him, Sabayo +would entertain them honourably, and give them sufficient to live on. +The general asked many questions concerning the country of Sabayo and +other things, to which he made answer. After which he requested to +have a cheese from the general, to send on shore to a companion, as a +token of having been well received. The general suspected some +mystery in this man, yet ordered a cheese and two new loaves to be +given him, which he sent away to his companion. He continued talking +with great volubility, and sometimes so unguardedly as to raise +suspicions of his being a spy. On this Paulo de la Gama, who +particularly suspected him, inquired of some of the natives if they +knew who this man was; they immediately told him he was a pirate, who +had boarded many other ships while laid aground. On receiving this +information, the general ordered him to be carried on board his ship, +then aground, and to be whipped well till he should confess whether +all that he had said was true or false; also, what was his purpose in +coming thither, and whether he were actually a Moor or a Christian. +He still insisted that he was a Christian, and that all he said was +true, declaring the information given by the natives to be entirely +groundless. The general now ordered a more cruel torment to be +inflicted to extort confession, causing him to be hoisted up and down +by the members: when at length he declared he would tell the truth. +He then acknowledged himself a spy, sent to discover how many men the +general had, and what were their weapons, as he was much hated on all +that coast for being a Christian; and that many <i>atalayas</i> or +foists were placed in all the bays and creeks of the coast to assail +him, but dared not till they were joined by forty large armed vessels +that were getting ready to fall upon him. But he said he knew not +certainly when these vessels might be ready. The general now ordered +him to be confined under hatches, intending to carry him into +Portugal, as a fit person to give the king his master intelligence +respecting the Indies, and ordered him to get refreshing victuals, +and that his cure should be looked well after.</p> +<blockquote>[67] Frangnes, Franghis, or Feringays, a common name all +over the East for Europeans; assuredly derived from the Francs or +French, long known as the great enemy of the Mahometans, by their +exploits in the crusades.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On receiving this information of the designs of his enemies, the +general would stay no longer than was necessary for completing the +repairs of his own ship, which was got ready in ten days. About this +time, the general was offered 1000 <i>fanons</i> for the ship which +had been taken by Coello; but he refused to sell any thing to his +enemies, and ordered her to be burnt. When the generals ship was +ready, and the fleet had taken in a supply of water, they departed +from the island of <i>Ansandina</i> , or Anchediva, on the 5th of +October 1498, steering directly out to sea on their course for +Melinda. After sailing about 200 leagues from that island, the +Moor[68] whom they had taken prisoner, seeing no prospect of escape, +now made a full and true confession. He acknowledged that he lived +with Sabayo, the lord of Goa, to whom word was brought that the +general was wandering about in those seas, like one who knew not +where he was, upon which orders were given to fit out a powerful +fleet to make him prisoner. In the mean time, learning that the +general was at the isle of Anchediva, Sabayo commanded him to go +thither to visit him, to get intelligence of his strength and +intentions, and to endeavour to entice him to Goa; where it was +Sabayos intentions to make him and all his people prisoners, and to +employ them in his wars against the neighbouring princes, as they +were reported to be valiant men. After this confession, the general +gave this man better treatment, allowing him both clothes and money. +Some time afterwards he became a Christian, by the name of Gaspar de +la Gama, taking his name of Gaspar from one of the three kings of the +Magi[69], and his surname from the general, who stood god-father at +his baptism.</p> +<blockquote>[68] De Faria says this person was a Jew, and that he +made the sign of the cross from the shore to be taken on +board.--Astl.I. 39. b.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[69] Or rather one of the three kings of Collen.--Astl. +I. 39.</blockquote> +<p>The general pursued his course for Melinda, where he proposed to +take on board an ambassador from the xeque of that place. In the +early part of this voyage he endured severe storms and contrary +winds, which were succeeded by calms, during which the heat of the +sun was quite insufferable, and the voyage much delayed, insomuch, +that water began to grow scarce, and the people had to be put on +short allowance. Owing to these circumstances, the people were +afflicted with the same disease in their gums, from which they had +formerly suffered such great distress in the river of Good Signs[70], +on the outward voyage. Their arms and legs also swelled, and many +tumours broke out over their bodies, proceeding from a pestilent +stinking humour, which threw them into a flux, of which thirty +persons died. From the continuance of calms and contrary winds, and +the mortality among the people, the whole company became amazed, and +believed they should never be able to get out from their present +distressing situation; insomuch, that they solicited the general to +return to Calicut, or some other part of India, and submit to what +God might appoint, rather than to die on the sea of these terrible +diseases, for which there was no remedy, especially as both +provisions and water began to fail. De Gama reasoned with them to +little purpose, as they had been now four months at sea, and there +hardly remained, sixteen persons in each ship able to do duty, some +of whom even were afflicted with the diseases of which the others had +died. It is even said that Paulo de la Gama and Nicholas Coello had +agreed to return to India, if any wind should spring up that would +have served for the voyage.</p> +<blockquote>[70] Since called Cuama.--Astl. I. 39. c.</blockquote> +<p>At length a favourable wind sprung up unexpectedly, and in sixteen +days they came in sight of land on Wednesday the 2d of February 1499, +at which the mariners were much rejoiced, and soon forgot all their +past troubles and dangers. As they came near the land towards +evening, the general gave orders to keep their heads out to sea +during the night, to avoid rocks or shoals. As there were no person +on board who knew where they were, a Moor alleged they had steered +direct for Mozambique; saying there were certain islands 300 leagues +from the shore, and directly over against that place, where the +natives were continually subject to the disease which had been so +fatal to our men. When morning came, they stood towards the land, +when they came before a large and goodly city, surrounded with walls, +having fair and lofty houses, and a large palace on a height in the +middle of the city, seeming to be a magnificent building. This city +is called Magadoxo, and stands on one side of the Gulf of India on +the coast of Ethiopia[71], an hundred and thirteen leagues from +Melinda, the situation of which I shall explain hereafter. Knowing +this to be a city of the Moors, he would not stop at this place, but +commanded many shots of ordnance to be fired as he sailed past. Not +being sure how far it was to Melinda, and fearing to overshoot that +port, he lay too every night; and on Saturday the 5th of February, +lying over against a village of the Moors, named Pate[72], 103 +leagues from Magadoxo, there came off eight <i>terradas</i> , or boats +of that country, filled with soldiers, and making direct for our +fleet, from whence we shot off so many pieces of ordnance, that they +soon fled back to the shore, and our people could not follow for want +of wind. Next Monday, being the 7th of February, the fleet arrived at +Melinda. The king immediately sent off his congratulations to the +general on his arrival, with a present of fresh provisions. De Gama +sent Fernan Martinez on shore to return the compliments of the king, +to whom he sent a present. On account of the great number of sick on +board, the fleet stopped here for ten days, during which time he +caused a land- mark to be erected on shore, with leave of the king, +as a token of friendship. Having provided provisions and water for +the ships at this place, he departed on the morning of Wednesday the +17th of February, taking with him an ambassador from the king of +Melinda, to negotiate a treaty of perpetual peace and friendship with +the king of Portugal.</p> +<blockquote>[71] Magadoxo is in lat. 2° 20' N. and about 45° +40' E. long.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[72] Pate stands on the coast of Zanguebar, on the Rio +Grande, one of the mouths of the river Zebee, in lat. 1° 50' S. +and about 41° 20' E. long. --E.</blockquote> +<p>Considering that there were not sufficient men remaining for +navigating all the ships, the general and the other captains agreed +to burn one of them, and the San Rafael was chosen to be sacrificed, +because she was all open, and had not been brought aground at +Anchediva when the other two were repaired. Accordingly, after taking +out all her stores and merchandize, which employed them during five +days, she was burnt at certain shoals, called the Shoals of St +Raphael[73]. During these five days, the fleet procured a +considerable quantity of hens from a village on the coast +called <i>Tangata</i> . Leaving this place, the two remaining ships +came on the 20th February to the island of Zenziber, which is in six +degrees of S. latitude, at ten leagues distance from the continent. +This is a considerable island, having other two in its neighbourhood, +one called <i>Pemba</i> , and the other <i>Moyfa</i> . These islands are +very fertile, having abundance of provisions, and great quantities of +oranges. The inhabitants are Moors, who are by no means warlike and +have few weapons, but are well clothed in silk, and cotton vestments, +which they purchase at Mombaza from the merchants of Cambaya. The +women are ornamented with jewels of gold and silver, the former being +procured at Sofala, and the latter from the island of St Lawrence, or +Madagascar. Each of these three islands has a separate king, who, +with all their subjects, are of the Mahometan religion.</p> +<blockquote>[73] De Faria says this ship was lost on the shoals +called after her name but the men were saved.--Astl.I. 40. +a.</blockquote> +<p>When the king of the island of Zenziber was informed of the +arrival of our ships, he sent immediately to compliment the general, +accompanied with great presents of the fruits and other productions +of the country, and requested his friendship, to which the general +gladly agreed and sent suitable answers. After remaining here eight +days for refreshments, the general departed on the 1st of March, and +came to anchor beside the isle of St George in the bay of Mozambique. +Next day he caused a mark to be erected on this island, where he went +on shore and heard mass; and departed thence without any intercourse +with the inhabitants of Mozambique. On the 3d of March, he came to +the island of St Blas, where the ships remained for some time to take +in water, and to provide a stock of sea wolves, and <i>solitarios</i> , +which were salted to serve as provision for the remainder of the +voyage, and for which they were most thankful to God. Departing from +thence, they were driven back by a westerly wind right contrary; but +Providence sent them a fair wind, by means of which they doubled the +Cape of Good Hope with infinite pleasure on the 20th of March, all +the remainder of the crews being now strong and in good health, with +the cheering prospect of speedily returning to Lisbon. They now had a +fair wind, which lasted them twenty days, and sped them on towards St +Jago. The fair wind now failed them and delayed their voyage. Trying +the lead on Thursday the 25th of April, they found twenty-five +fathom; and the least water they had all that day was twenty fathom, +on which account the pilots concluded they were on the shoals of the +Rio Grande.</p> +<p>Of the rest of this voyage, till the arrival of the general at the +island of St Jago, I have found no account; except that, when, +approaching that place, Nicholas Coello parted company one night with +the general, and made direct for Portugal, that he might carry the +first intelligence to the king of the discovery of India; and arrived +at <i>Cascais</i> on the 10th of July 1499[74]. He went immediately to +the king, whom he informed of all that had befallen the general in +his discovery of the Indies, and of the commodities which had been +brought from thence; of which discovery, and of the prospect which it +held out of a direct trade with India by sea, the king was as glad as +when he had been proclaimed king of Portugal.</p> +<blockquote>[74] De Faria alleges that Coello was separated by a +storm near Cape Verd, and arrived at Lisbon, thinking De Gama had got +home before him.--Astl. I. 40. b.</blockquote> +<p>After the separation of Coello, De Gama pursued his voyage for the +island of St Jago, both because his brother Paulo was sick with +consumptive complaints, and because his ship was in very bad +condition; all her seams being open. At that island, he freighted a +caravel, in hope of being able to get his brother home to Portugal, +and left John de Sala in charge of his own ship, to have her repaired +and new rigged before proceeding for Lisbon. The general and his +brother left St Jago in the hired caravel for Lisbon; but the disease +of Paulo de Gama increased so rapidly, that he was forced to put in +at the island of Tercera, where Paulo de Gama departed this life like +a good Christian and a worthy gentleman. When he had buried his +brother, Vasco de Gama set sail for Portugal, and arrived at Belem in +September 1499; having been two years and two months absent on this +voyage. Of 108 men whom he had taken with him, only fifty[75] came +home alive; which was a large proportion, considering the great and +numerous dangers they had gone through.</p> +<blockquote>[75] De Faria says fifty-five, and that they were all +rewarded by the king.--Astl. I. 40. c.</blockquote> +<p>When the general had returned thanks to God for his preservation +and success, he sent notice of his arrival to the king, who sent +Diego de Sylva y Menesis, Lord of Portugalete, and many other +gentlemen, to conduct him honourably to court, which they did through +a prodigious concourse of people, eager to see the man who had made +so wonderful a voyage, and whom they had long thought dead. Being +come into the presence, the king honoured him as one who, by the +discovery of the Indies had done so much for the glory of God, for +the honour and profit of the king of Portugal, and for the perpetual +fame of the Portuguese name in the world. The king made him +afterwards a knight, and gave him and his heirs permission to bear +the royal arms of Portugal, as also to set at the foot of the +escutcheon two does, which are called gamas in the Portuguese +language. He also gave him a perpetual pension or rent-charge of +300,000 rees[76] yearly, out of the tythe fish in the village +of <i>Sinis</i> , in which he was born, and a promise of being made +lord of that village; and till these grants were executed in form, he +allowed him 1000 crowns a-year; which, after the royal grants were +made, reverted to the house of the <i>Contratation</i> of the Indies. +It was also granted, that when the trade with India should be +established, he might bring home spices to the value of 200 ducats +yearly, without paying any duty. He also gave him other possessions +and rents, and a note of remembrance or promise to make him a +lord[77]. Nicholas Coello was promoted to be a gentleman of the royal +household, and received possessions and rents to bear his +charges[78]. The king himself, in consequence of these discoveries, +assumed the new title, of <i>Lord of the conquest and navigation of +Ethiopia, Arabia, Persia, and the Indies</i> .</p> +<blockquote>[76] The translator values this pension at 200l. a-year, +perhaps equal in present value to 2000l.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[77] This does not appear to have been actually done +until his return from India the second time, as will be mentioned +hereafter.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[78] According to Astley, but without quoting any +particular authority, De Gama had a grant from the king of the title +of Don for himself and his descendants, and a pension of 3000 ducats: +Coello was raised to the rank of Fidalgo, or gentleman, and had an +appointment of 100 ducats yearly.--Astl.I. 40.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION III.</p> +<p> <i>Voyage of Pedro Alvarez Cabral to India in 1500; being the +second made by the Portuguese to India, and in the course of which +Brasil was Discovered.</i> </p> +<p>The certainty of a navigable communication with India, and the +vast riches that were to be had in that country, being now +ascertained, the king resolved to prosecute the discovery, on purpose +to spread the gospel among the idolaters, and to augment his own +revenues and the riches and prosperity of his subjects. For these +purposes, he determined to attempt the settlement of a factory in +Calicut by gentle means; hopeful that they might be persuaded to a +friendly intercourse, and might afterwards listen to the word of +God.</p> +<p>He therefore commanded that a fleet of ten ships and two caravels +should be got ready against next year, to be well laden with all the +commodities which De gama had reported to have current sale in +Calicut. There went others also to Sofala and Quiloa, where also he +commanded factories to be established, both on account of the gold +which was to be found there, and that the ships might have a place to +touch and refresh at in their way to and from India. Over the fleet +intended for Calicut, he appointed Pedro Alvarez Cabral, a gentleman +of an honourable house, to be captain-general, Sancho de Toar being +captain of his ship. The names of the other captains, so far as have +come to my knowledge, were Nicholas Coello, Don Luis Continho, Simon +de Myseranda, Simon Leyton, Bartholomew Diaz, who discovered the Cape +of Good Hope, and his brother Diego Diaz, who had been purser to +Vasco do Gama in the former voyage. Of the caravels, Pedro de +Tayde[1] and Vasco de Silviera, were captains. Arias Correa was +appointed supercargo of the whole fleet, and was ordered to remain as +factor in Calicut, having Gonsalo Gil Barboso and Pedro Vas Caninon +as his clerks. Two ships were to remain with the merchandize at +Sofala, where Loriso Hurtado was to be factor. In the whole of this +fleet there embarked 1500 men[2].</p> +<blockquote>[1] It will appear in the sequel that there was another +captain named Vasco de Tayde.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] Astley says only 1200,--Astl. I. 40.</blockquote> +<p>The general was instructed, besides settling the factories, that +if the zamorin would not quietly consent or give sufficient lading to +the ships, he should make cruel war upon him for his injurious +conduct to Vasco de Gama. If the zamorin consented to the +establishment of a factory and trade, the general was secretly to +request him not to allow any of the Moors of Mecca to remain or to +trade in Calicut, or any other harbour in his dominions, and to +promise that the Portuguese should hereafter supply all such +commodities as used to be brought by the Moors, of better quality and +cheaper than theirs. That he should touch at Melinda, to land the +ambassador who had been brought from thence by De Gama, together with +a present for the king of that place. Along with this fleet, the king +sent five friars of the order of St Francis, of whom Fra Henrique was +vicar, who was afterwards bishop <i>Siebta</i> , and who was to remain +in the factory to preach the Catholic faith to the Malabars[3].</p> +<blockquote>[3] According to Astley, there were eight Franciscan +friars besides the vicar, eight chaplains, and a chaplin-major; and +that their orders were to begin with preaching, and in case that +failed, to enforce the gospel by the sword. In other words, to +establish the accursed tribunal of the inquisition in India, to the +eternal disgrace of Portugal, and of the pretended followers of the +ever-blessed Prince of Peace.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The fleet being in full readiness, the king went in procession, on +Sunday the 7th of March 1500, to hear mass at the monastery of Belem, +accompanied by the captain-general, whom he took along with himself +behind the curtain in the royal seat, to do him the more honour. +After mass, Don Diego Ortis, bishop of Viseu, preached a sermon, in +which he gave high praise to Cabral for undertaking the command of +this expedition, as serving not only the king his temporal master, +but the eternal GOD his spiritual Lord, drawing many comparisons in +his favour from the Grecian and Roman histories. Mass being ended, a +banner of the royal arms of Portugal was delivered to the bishop, who +solemnly blessed it, and returned it to the king, who delivered it to +Cabral, that it might be displayed at his main-top. The bishop then, +gave a bonnet to the general, which had been blessed by the pope, and +placed a rich jewel with his own hands on his head, and gave him his +blessing. When these ceremonies were ended, the king accompanied the +captain-general to the water side, where he and the other captains of +the fleet took leave of the king, kissing his hands, the king giving +them Gods blessing and his own; after which all went on board, and +the whole fleet saluted the king by discharging all the ordnance of +all the ships: But the wind being foul, the fleet could not depart +that day, and the king returned to Lisbon.</p> +<p>Next day, being the 9th of May 1500, having a fair wind, the fleet +weighed by signal from the general, and set sail at eight in the +morning[4]. " <i>The whole fleete having wayed, did then begin to cut +and spread their sayles with great pleasure and crie, saieng +altogether</i> , Buen viage, <i>that is to say, a luckie and prosperous +voyage. After all this, they beganne all to be joyfull, every man to +use his severall office: The gunners in the midst of the ship, +hailing the maine sheets with the capsteine: The mariners and ship +boys, some in the forecastell haling bollings, braces, and martnets: +Others belying the sheets both great and small, and also serving in +trimming the sayles, and others the nettings and foretop sayles: +Other some vering the trusses, and also beleying brases and toppe +sayle sheets, and coyling every sort of ropes. It was wonderful to +see such a number of diversities of offices in so small a roome, as +is the bredth and length of a ship</i> ."</p> +<blockquote>[4] The remainder of this paragraph is given in the +precise words and orthography of the original translator, Nicholas +Lichfild, as a curious specimen of the nautical language of Britain +in 1582.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Going on their voyage with a quarter wind, they came in sight of +the Canaries on the 14th of March, and passed St Jago on the 22d. On +the 24th of the same month, the caravel commanded by Vasco de Tayde +parted company, and was never seen afterwards[5]. After waiting two +days for the missing ship, the fleet proceeded on its voyage, and on +the 24th of April, came in sight of land. This was cause of much joy, +as it was supposed to be a country which had not been discovered by +De Gama, because it lay to the west[6] of their course. Cabral +immediately sent off the master of his ship in a small boat to +examine the country, who reported that it appeared pleasant and +fertile, with extensive woods and many inhabitants. The fleet was +brought to anchor, and the master sent again on shore to examine more +narrowly into the state of the country and its inhabitants. His +account was that the natives were well proportioned, and of a swarthy +colour, armed with bows and arrows, and all naked. A storm arising at +night, the fleet weighed anchor and stood along; the coast, till they +found a good harbour, in which they all came to anchor, naming +it <i>Puerto Seguro</i> , or the Safe Port, as it was quite secure in +all weathers. Our men took two of the natives in an almadia or canoe, +who were brought to the admiral, but no one could understand their +language. They had therefore apparel given them, and were set on +shore much pleased. This encouraged the rest of the natives to mix +with our people in a friendly manner; but finding nothing to detain +him here, the general determined to take in a supply of water, not +knowing when he might have another opportunity. Next day, being in +Easter week, a solemn mass was said on shore under a pavilion, and a +sermon was preached by Fra Henrique. During service, many of the +natives gathered around, who seemed very merry, playing and leaping +about, and sounding cornets, horns, and other instruments. After +mass, the natives followed the general to his boat, singing and +making merry. In the afternoon our men were allowed to go on shore, +where they bartered cloth and paper with the natives for parrots and +other beautiful birds, which are very numerous in that country, and +with whose feathers the natives make very shewy hats and caps. Some +of our men went into the country to see the towns or dwellings of the +natives, and reported that the land was very fertile, and full of +woods and waters, with plenty of fruits of various kinds, and much +cotton.</p> +<blockquote>[5] According to De Faria, this vessel parted in a storm +near Cape Verd, and returned to Portugal.--Astl. I. 41. +a.</blockquote> +<p>As this was the country now so well known by the name of Brasil, I +shall not say any more about it in this place, except that the fleet +remained here for eight days; during which a great fish was thrown +ashore by the sea, greater than any <i>tonel</i> , and as broad as two. +It was of a round form, having eyes like those of a hog, and ears +like an elephant, but no teeth; having two vents under its belly, and +a tail three quarters of a yard broad, and as much in length. The +skin was like that of a hog, and a finger in thickness. The general +ordered a high stone cross to be erected at this place, and named his +new discovery <i>La tierra de Santa Cruz</i> , or the Land of the Holy +Cross. From hence he sent home a caravel, with letters to the king, +giving an account of his voyage hitherto, and that he had left two +exiles[7] in this place, to examine the country; and particularly to +ascertain if it were a continent, as appeared from the length of +coast he had passed. He sent likewise one of the natives, to shew +what kind of people inhabited the land. Considering the great length +of the voyage he had to perform, Cabral did not deem it proper to +spend any more time in examining this new country, but departed from +Puerto Seguro[8] on the 2d of May, steering his course for the Cape +of Good Hope, which was estimated to be 1200 leagues distant, and +having a great and fearful gulf to cross, rendered dangerous by the +great winds which prevail in these seas during most part of the +year.</p> +<blockquote>[6] By some unaccountable mistake, the translation of +Castaneda by Lichefild says to the <i>east</i> .--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] It appears that Cabral had twenty malefactors on +board for such purposes, who had received pardon on condition of +submitting to be landed on occasions of danger.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[8] Puerto Seguro is in lat. 16°S. and about long. +39° 40'W. This country of Brasil derived its name from the +dye-wood so called.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the 12th of May a great comet appeared in the heavens, coming +from the east, and was visible during ten days and nights, always +increasing in splendour. On Saturday the 23d of May, there arose a +great storm from the north-east, attended with a high sea and heavy +rain, which forced the whole fleet to take in their sails. On its +abatement they again spread their foresails; and falling calm towards +night, the ships astern spread out all their sprit-sails to overtake +the rest. On Sunday the 24th the wind again increased, and all the +sails were furled. Between ten and eleven o'clock of that day a +water-spout was seen in the north-west, and the wind lulled. This +deceived the pilots as a sign of good weather, wherefore they still +carried sail: But it was succeeded by a furious tempest, which came +on so suddenly that they had not time to furl their sails, and four +ships were sunk with all their men, one of which was commanded by +Bartholomew Diaz, the discoverer of the Cape of Good Hope. The +other <i>seven</i> [9] were half filled with water, and had been all +lost if a part of their sails had not given way to the tempest. Soon +afterwards the storm veered to the south-west, but still continued so +violent that they had to drive all that day and the next under bare +poles, and the fleet much separated. On the third day the wind became +more moderate, coming round to the east and north-east, attended by a +heavy swell, and the waves run higher than had ever been seen before, +yet the fleet joined again to their great joy. This wind and high sea +continued for twenty days, during all which time the ships had to lie +to, and were so tossed that no one thought it possible to escape +being swallowed up. During day, the sea was black as pitch, and at +night it appeared like fire. The general, with Simon de Myranda and +Pedro de Tayde, bore up to windward during this long continued gale; +while all the rest submitted to the wind and went at Gods mercy.</p> +<blockquote>[9] Originally, according to Castaneda, there were only +ten ships and two caravels: Both the caravels have been already +accounted for as having left the fleet; and after the loss of four +ships, six only ought to have remained. Astley makes the whole fleet +originally to have consisted of thirteen vessels, which will allow of +seven now remaining. --E.</blockquote> +<p>When the storm abated, the general found that, with only two other +ships in company, he had doubled the Cape of Good Hope without having +seen it. On the 16th of July they fell close in with the coast of +Africa, in lat. 27°S. but the pilots did not know the coast, and +the general would not allow any one to go on shore. They could see +great numbers of people on the land, yet none came down to the shore +to view the ships. Having no hope of procuring provisions from the +natives, the seamen caught great plenty of fish at this place; after +which the general pursued his course close along shore, where he +constantly saw many people, and great numbers of cattle feeding along +the banks of a river which fell into the sea in that +neighbourhood.[10] Proceeding in this manner, the general came to +Sofala, with which the pilots were unacquainted, near which lay two +islands,[11] close by one of which two vessels lay at anchor. These +immediately made for the shore on seeing the Portuguese ships, and +being pursued were taken without resistance. The principal person +belonging to these vessels was a near relation[12] of the king of +Melinda, and was going from Sofala to Melinda with gold. The people +were so much afraid on seeing our ships, that they threw a great part +of the gold into the sea, and most of them escaped on shore. The +general was much concerned at his loss, especially that it should +have fallen on the subject and relation of a prince who was in +friendship with the king his master; and after shewing him every +civility, restored the two vessels with all the remaining gold. The +Moor asked Cabral if he had any witches on board, who could conjure +up his gold from the bottom of the sea? Cabral answered, that the +Christians believe in the true God, and do not practice or give +credit to witchcraft.</p> +<blockquote>[10] This part of the voyage is very indistinctly +described. From the lat. of 27°S. where Cabral is said to have +fallen in with the eastern coast of Africa, to Sofala, in lat. +19°S. the coast stretches out nearly five degrees to the east, to +Capes Corientes and St Sebastian, with many rivers, the great bays of +Delogoa and Asnea, and the islands of Bocica or Bozarnio, all of +which must have been seen by Cabral during the slow navigation close +along shore, but all of which are omitted in the +text.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[11] Named Inhazato. Sofala is in lat. 13°S. and +almost 36°E. from Greenwich.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[12] According to De Faria, this person was uncle to the +king of Melinda, and was named Sheikh Foteyma.--Astl.I. 41. +b.</blockquote> +<p>Learning from this Moor that he had overshot Sofala, and not being +inclined to turn back, the general continued his voyage to +Mozambique; where he arrived on the 20th of July and took in a supply +of water, and procured a pilot to carry him to the island of Quiloa, +towards which he directed his course. In this part of the voyage he +saw several fertile islands, belonging to the king of Quiloa, who is +a powerful prince; his dominions extending from Cape Corientes almost +to Mombaza, along nearly 400 leagues of coast, including the two +islands near Sofala, that city itself and several others to +Mozambique, many more all the way to Mombaza, with a great number of +islands; from all which he derives large revenues.[13] Yet he has few +soldiers, and lives in no great state. His constant residence is in +an island named Quiloa, near the continent of Ethiopia, an hundred +leagues from Mozambique. This island is full of gardens and orchards, +with plenty of various kinds of fruits, and excellent water, and the +country produces abundance of <i>miso</i> [14] and other grain, and +breeds great numbers of small cattle; and the sea affords great +plenty of excellent fish. The city of Quiloa is in lat. 9°25'S. +and long. 40°20'E. handsomely built of stone and lime, and +pleasantly situated between fine gardens and the sea, having +abundance of provisions from its own island and from other places on +the continent. The king and the inhabitants of the city are Moors of +a fair colour using the Arabic language, but the original natives of +the country are Negroes. The Moors of Quiloa are richly dressed, +especially the women, who wear many golden ornaments. They are great +merchants, enjoying the principal trade in gold at Sofala, whence it +is distributed over Arabia Felix, and other countries; and many +merchants resort thither from other places. Hence there are always +many ships in this port, which are all hauled upon the beach when not +in use. These ships[15] have no nails, but are sewed together by rope +made of <i>cairo</i> , and have their bottoms payed with wild +frankincense, as the country produces no pitch. The winter here +begins in April and ends in May.</p> +<blockquote>[13] In modern maps this extensive line of coast is +divided into the following separate territories, Inhambane, Sabia, +Sofala, Mocaranga, Mozambico, and Querimba; which will be illustrated +in future portions of this work.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[14] This word <i>miso</i> is probably an error of the +press for mylyo, by which the African grain named millet is +distinguished in other parts of Castaneda. The <i>small cattle</i> of +the text are probably meant for sheep, as they are frequently thus +contradistinguished in other parts of the original from <i>great +cattle</i> , not here mentioned.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[15] These vessels were probably precisely similar to the +Arab <i>dows</i> of the Red Sea and Persian Gulf, which will be +afterwards more particularly described.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On arriving at Quiloa, and receiving a safe-conduct for that +purpose, the general sent Alonso Hurtado, attended by seven of the +principal officers, to wait upon the king, signifying that Cabral had +come here with the fleet of the king of Portugal to settle a trade in +the city, and had great store of merchandize fit for that purpose; +and to say that he was desirous to confer with his highness on this +subject, but had been forbidden by the king his master to go on +shore. The king agreed to give Cabral an audience afloat; and, on the +following day Cabral waited for the king in his boat, which was +covered over with flags, and attended by all the other captains in +their boats; as now Sancho de Toar and other two ships had joined +company again. The king came in an almadia, accompanied by many +principal Moors in other boats, all decked with flags, and with many +trumpets, cornets, and sackbuts, making a great noise. On the arrival +of the king, the whole Portuguese ordnance was fired off, by which +the king and his train were much alarmed, not having been accustomed +to such a salute. After mutual civilities, the letter from the king +of Portugal was read, proposing the settlement of trade between the +two nations, to which the king of Quiloa assented, and agreed that +Alonso Hurtado should wait upon him next day with an account of the +kinds of merchandize the Portuguese had to dispose of, for which he +promised to give gold in exchange. But when Hurtado went next day on +shore, the king made many excuses for not performing his promise, +pretending to have no need of the commodities, and believing that the +general came to conquer his country. The true reason was because he +was a Moor and we were Christians, and he was unwilling to have any +trade or intercourse with us. After this the general remained three +or four days, to see if the king would change his mind; but he +continued inflexible, and strengthened himself with armed men, as +jealous of being attacked.</p> +<p>Finding that nothing could be done here, the general went on his +voyage, and arrived at Melinda on the 2d of August. At this port he +found three ships at anchor belonging to Moorish merchants of +Cambaya; but, though laden with great riches, he would not meddle +with them, out of respect for the king of Melinda. On coming to +anchor the general saluted the king with all his ordnance; on which +the king sent a complimentary message of welcome, with a present of +many sheep, hens, and ducks, and great quantities of fruits. The +general sent a message in return, intimating that he had come here by +orders of the king of Portugal, to know if his highness had any +service which the fleet could perform for him, and to deliver a +letter and a rich present from the king of Portugal, which he would +send whenever his highness pleased to give his commands. The king was +much pleased with this message, and detained the messenger all night, +most part of which he spent in making inquiries respecting the +kingdom of Portugal. As soon as it was day, the king sent two +principal Moors to wait upon the general, declaring his joy at his +arrival, and desiring, if he had need of any thing in the country, to +command all there as his own. The general then sent Aries Correa, the +factor-general of the fleet, on shore to deliver the letter and +presents, accompanied by most of the principal officers, and having +all the trumpeters of the fleet sounding before him. The present +consisted of the rich caparison of a riding-horse, of the most +splendid and shewy fashion. The king sent the nobles of his court to +receive Correa in great state, and several women who had censers or +perfuming pans which filled the air with a delightful odour. The king +received Correa in his palace, which was very near the water side, +sitting in his chair of state, and accompanied by many noblemen and +gentlemen. The letter, which was written hi Portuguese on one side +and Arabic on the other, being read, and the present laid before the +king, he and his nobles all in one voice gave thanks to God and +Mahomet for granting them the friendship of so great a prince. During +the three days which the fleet continued here, Correa remained on +shore at the kings particular request, in which he constantly +employed himself in inquiries concerning the customs of the king of +Portugal and the conduct of his government.</p> +<p>The king of Melinda was very anxious to have Cabral to come on +shore to the palace, but he excused himself as having been ordered by +his master not to land at any port, with which the king was +satisfied, yet desired to have an interview on the water. On this +occasion, though the palace was very near the sea, he went on +horseback to the shore, having his horse decorated with the rich +caparisons sent him by the king of Portugal, which were obliged to be +put on by one of our men as none of the natives knew their use. On +coming to the shore, certain principal natives waited at the foot of +the stair, having a live sheep, which they opened alive, taking out +the bowels, and the king rode over the carcase of the sheep. <i>This +is a kind of ceremony that the witches there do use</i> .[16] After +this he went to the water side, with all his train on foot, saying in +a loud voice certain words of incantation. The interview with the +general took place on the water in great ceremony, and the king gave +him a pilot to carry the fleet to Calicut. Cabral left two banished +men at Melinda to inform themselves of all the circumstances of the +country to the best of their abilities. One of these, +called <i>Machado</i> , when he had learned the Arabic language, went +afterwards by land to the straits of the Red Sea, and from thence by +Cambaya to <i>Balagarte</i> , and settled with the <i>sabayo</i> or lord +of Goa, passing always for a Moor. This man was afterwards very +serviceable to Albuquerque, as will be seen hereafter.</p> +<blockquote>[16] Thus the translation of Castaneda by Lichefild. It +was more probably a superstitious ceremony to guard against +witches.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Leaving Melinda on the 7th of August, he came to Ansandina or +Anche-diva, on the 20th of that month, where he waited some days for +the fleet of Mecca, which he meant to have attacked. While there, the +whole of the crews confessed and received the sacrament. No ships +appearing, the fleet left Anchediva and sailed for Calicut, coming to +anchor within a league of that place on the 13th of September. +Several almadias came off immediately to sell victuals: And some of +the principal nayres, with a Guzurat merchant, brought a message from +the zamorin,[17] declaring his satisfaction at the arrival of the +general at his city, in which every thing he might need was at his +command. The general made a polite answer to the king, with thanks +for his civility, and gave orders to bring the fleet nearer to the +city, in doing which all the ordnance was fired as a salute, to the +great astonishment of the natives, the idolaters among them saying +that it was impossible to resist us. Next day one Gaspar[18] was sent +on shore to the zamorin, desiring to have a safe-conduct for a +deputation from the general to wait on his highness; and along with +Gaspar the four Malabars who had been carried away from Calicut by +Don Vasco de la Gama were sent on shore. These men were all finely +dressed in Portuguese habits, and the whole inhabitants of the city +came out to see them, rejoiced to find they had been well treated. +Though the zamorin was well pleased with the safe return of his +subjects, he refused allowing them to come into his presence as they +were only fishermen, or of a low cast; but he sent for Gaspar, whom +he received with civility, and whom he assured that our people might +come on shore in perfect safety. On receiving this intelligence, +Cabral sent Alonso Hurtado to the zamorin, intimating that the +Portuguese fleet had come on purpose to settle trade and friendship, +and that the general wished for an audience in which to arrange these +matters with his highness. But had orders from the king his master +not to go on shore without sufficient pledges for his security; among +whom he demanded the kutwal of Calicut and Araxamenoca one of the +chiefs of the nayres.[19] On this occasion Hurtado was accompanied by +a person who could speak the language, to act as his interpreter.</p> +<blockquote>[17] In an account of this voyage by a Portuguese pilot, +inserted in the collection of Ramusio, the name of the reigning +zamorin is said to have been Gnaffer. Ramus. I. 125.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[18] Probably the person who was carried prisoner from +Anchediva by De Gama, in the former voyage.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[19] According to De Faria, the hostages demanded on this +occasion were six principal men of the Bramin cast, whose names were +brought from Portugal by Cabral, by the advice of Bontaybo or +Moncayde, the Moor who went off with De Gama.--Astl. I. 43. +b.</blockquote> +<p>The zamorin was unwilling to send the hostages required, alleging +that they were old and sickly, and offered to send others who were +better able to endure the hardships of living on board. Yet he +afterwards, at the instigation of the Moors, was against sending any +hostages; as they made him believe that the general shewed little +confidence in his promise, which was derogatory to his honour and +dignity. This negociation lasted three days, as Hurtado insisted on +this as a necessary preliminary. At length, desirous of having trade +settled with us, owing to the advantages which would accrue to his +revenue, the zamorin agreed to give the hostages required. On which, +leaving the command of the fleet in his absence to Sancho de Toar, +Cabral directed that the hostages should be well treated, but on no +account to deliver them to any one even although demanded in his +name. On the 28th of December, Cabral went on shore magnificently +dressed and attended by thirty of his principal officers and others, +the kings servants, in as much state as if he had been king of +Portugal; carrying with him rich furniture for his apartments, with a +cupboard of plate containing many rich pieces of gilt silver. He was +met by many principal nayres, sent by the zamorin to wait upon him, +and attended by a numerous train, among whom were many persons +sounding trumpets sackbuts and other musical instruments. The zamorin +waited for him in a gallery close by the shore, which had been +erected on purpose; and while the general went towards the shore, +accompanied by all the boats of the fleet, dressed out with flags and +streamers, the hostages were carried on board his ship, where they +were loath to enter till they should see the general on shore, lest +he might return and detain them; but were at last reassured of their +safety by Aries Correa. On landing, Cabral was received in great +state by several <i>caymals, pinakals</i> , and other principal nayres; +by whose directions he was placed in an <i>andor</i> or chair, in +which he was carried to the <i>serame</i> or hall of audience, where +the king waited his arrival.</p> +<p>The serame or gallery, was all hung round with rich carpets, +called <i>alcatifas</i> ; and at the farther end the zamorin sat in an +alcove or recess resembling a small chapel, with a canopy of unshorn +crimson velvet over his head, and having twenty silk cushions under +him and about him. The zamorin was almost naked, having only a piece +of white cotton round his waist, wrought with gold. On his head he +wore a cap of cloth of gold resembling a helmet. In his ears he had +rich jewels of diamonds, sapphires, and pearls, two of the latter +being as large as walnuts. His arms, from the elbows to the wrists, +were covered with golden bracelets, set with numberless precious +stones of great value; and his legs, from the knees to the ankles, +were similarly adorned. His fingers and toes had numerous rings, and +on one of his great toes he wore a ruby of great size and wonderful +brilliancy. One of his diamonds was bigger than a large bean. All +these were greatly surpassed by his girdle of gold and jewels, which +was altogether inestimable, and was so brilliant that it dazzled the +eyes of the beholders. Beside the zamorin was a rich throne or state +chair, all of gold and jewels; and his <i>andor</i> , in which he had +been carried from the palace was of similar richness, and stood near +him. He was attended by twenty trumpeters, seventeen of whom had +silver trumpets, and three of them gold, all the mouth-pieces being +finely wrought and set with jewels. Although in full day, the hall +was lighted by many silver lamps, in the fashion of the Moors. Close +by the king there stood a spitting basin of gold, and several silver +perfuming-pans, which produced an excellent odour. Six paces from the +king, he was attended on by his two brothers, who were the nearest +heirs to the kingdom; and a little farther off were many noblemen, +all standing.</p> +<p>On entering the hall, and seeing the splendid state of the +zamorin, Cabral would have kissed his hand, as is the custom of +Europe; but was informed that this was not customary among them, and +therefore sat down in a chair near the king, which was appointed for +him as an especial honour. He then delivered his letter of credit +from the king of Portugal, written in Arabic, and then said, that the +king his master, willing to cultivate trade and friendship with the +zamorin and his subjects, had given him orders to require permission +to establish a factory or house of trade in Calicut, which should +always be supplied with every kind of merchandize that was in demand; +and requested the zamorin to supply a sufficient loading of spices +for the ships under his command, which he was ready to pay for, +either by means of the commodities he had on board, or in ready +money. The zamorin seemed or affected to be pleased with the embassy, +and said that the king of Portugal was welcome to every thing in his +city of which he was in need. At this time the present from the king +of Portugal to the zamorin was brought forwards; which, among other +things, contained, a richly wrought basin and ewer of silver gilt; a +gilt silver flaggon and cover of similar workmanship; two silver +maces; four cushions, two of which were cloth of gold, and the other +two of unshorn crimson velvet; a state canopy of cloth of gold, bound +and fringed with gold; a carpet of rich crimson velvet; two very rich +arras hangings, one ornamented with human figures, and the other with +representations of trees and flowers. The zamorin was much satisfied +with this present, and said the general might either retire to his +lodgings for rest and refreshment, or might return to his ships as he +thought best; but, as the hostages were men of high cast and could +not endure the sea, who could neither eat or drink while on board +consistent with their customs, it became necessary that they should +come on shore. Wherefore, if the general would return to his ship and +send these men on shore, and inclined to come back next day to +conclude all matters relative to the trade of Calicut, the same +hostages should be again sent on board. As the general placed +confidence in these assurances of the zamorin, he went on board, +leaving Hurtado and other seven of his people in charge of his +valuables that were left on shore. When at the water side and ready +to embark, a servant of one of the hostages, who was dispatched by +the comptroller of the zamorins household, went before in an almadia +or small pinnace, and gave notice to the hostages that the general +was coming on board. On which they leapt into the sea, meaning to +escape to land in the almadia with the servant: But Aries Correa went +immediately with some of the Portuguese mariners in a boat, and +retook two of the hostages, with three or four of the Malabars +belonging to the almadia: The rest of the hostages, among whom was +the kutwal, got to the city.</p> +<p>When Cabral came on board and learnt what had happened, he ordered +the two remaining hostages to be secured below deck, and sent a +complaint to the zamorin against the conduct of the hostages, laying +all the blame on the comptroller. He desired the messenger to inform +the zamorin of the situation of the two remaining hostages, and to +say that they should be liberated whenever the Portuguese and the +goods on shore were sent back to the ships. Next day the zamorin came +to the shore accompanied by 12, 000 men, and sent off the Portuguese +people and their commodities to the ships in thirty almadias, with +orders to bring back the hostages. But none of the Malabars in the +almadias dared to approach the ships, being afraid of the Portuguese, +and returned therefore to the land without delivering our people and +commodities. Next day, the general sent some of his own boats to land +the pledges, but at some distance from the almadias; on which +occasion Araxamenoca, one of the hostages, leapt into the sea with an +intention to escape, but was retaken; and while our people were +busied in securing him, the other hostage made his escape. The +general was astonished at the want of truth and honour in these +people, and gave orders to keep Araxamenoca in strict custody; but +finding at the end of three days that the zamorin did not send for +him, and that during all this period he refused all sustenance, +Cabral took compassion on him and sent him to the zamorin, requesting +that two of our men who remained on shore might be sent on board, +which was complied with.</p> +<p>After waiting three days without any message from the zamorin, the +general sent one Francisco Correa to inquire if he inclined to +confirm the agreement between them, in which case he would send Aries +Correa on shore to treat with his highness, for whose safety he +required hostages. The zamorin answered that he was perfectly willing +to have the trade established, and that the general might send Aries +Correa or any other person on shore for that purpose, and transmitted +two grandsons of a rich merchant of Guzerate as hostages. Aries +Correa went accordingly on shore, and was accommodated by the orders +of the zamorin with a convenient house for himself and his goods, +which belonged to the Guzerate merchant, who was likewise commanded +to assist Correa in regard to the prices of his merchandize and all +other things relating to the trade and customs of the place. But this +man being a friend to the Moors of Mecca, thwarted him in all things +instead of giving him assistance. The Moors were determined enemies +to our people, both for being Christians, and lest their credit and +advantageous traffic in Calicut might suffer by the establishment of +our trade in that port. Wherefore, by means of their confederacy with +the Guzerate merchant, they took our goods at any price they pleased, +and intimidated the Malabars from trading with us. The Moors +concluded that the establishment of our factory would lower the price +of such commodities as they had to sell, and would inhance the value +of the spiceries, drugs, and jewels which they took in exchange. On +this account they thwarted Correa in all his transactions, offering +higher prices than ordinary for every article, by which he was +constrained to buy every thing at a very dear rate. If at any time he +wished an audience of the zamorin, the Moors always contrived to be +present, that some of them might speak against him. In this conduct +they were assisted by <i>Samicide</i> [20], a Moor, who was admiral of +Calicut; who likewise hindered any of our people of the factory from +going on board the fleet, and detained any of our boats that +approached the shore, pretending to do this by command of the +zamorin.</p> +<blockquote>[20] Named by De Faria, Coje Cimireci.--Astl. I. 44, +a.</blockquote> +<p>On learning this sinister conduct of the Moorish admiral of +Calicut, and suspecting some intended treachery, the general gave +orders to the fleet to weigh their anchors, and to remove out of the +harbour, lest they might be attacked by the zamorins fleet, and that +he might take counsel with the other captains for the safety of the +expedition. On learning this, the zamorin inquired the reason from +Correa, who urged the injurious behaviour of the Moors, and told him +all that they had done. The zamorin immediately gave orders that the +Moors should discontinue their villanous conduct towards us, and even +removed the Guzerate merchant from our factory, appointing +one <i>Cosebequin</i> [21] in his place, who, though a Moor, was a very +honest man and behaved to us in a friendly manner. This man was of +great credit in Calicut, being the head of all the native Moors of +that country, who are always at variance with the Moors of Cairo and +of the Red Sea, of whom the admiral Samicide was the chief. The +Zamorin gave farther orders, that our factory should be removed to a +house close to the shore which belonged to Cosebequin, that our +merchants might have greater freedom to buy and sell, without any +interruption from the Moors. For the greater security, a deed of gift +was made of this house by the zamorin to the king of Portugal and his +successors for ever, a copy of which, signed and sealed by the +zamorin, was enclosed in a casket of gold that it might be conveyed +to Portugal; and permission was given to display a flag of the royal +arms of Portugal from the top of the factory[22]. On receiving +intelligence of these favourable measures, Cabral brought back the +fleet into the harbour of Calicut, and sent his compliments of thanks +to the zamorin for his gracious and favourable dispositions. After +this, our factory had tolerably good fortune in conducting its trade +by the assistance of Cosebequin: and the natives, finding our factory +favoured by the zamorin, behaved so very civilly to our people that +they could go about wherever they pleased, with as much freedom and +safety as in Lisbon.</p> +<blockquote>[21] Called Coje Bequi by De Faria; or rather Khojah +Beki, or Beghi: But most of the foreign names are so corruptly given +that it is difficult to rectify them.--Astl. I. 44. b.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[22] According to De Faria, this house was granted not +without great difficulty, and was taken possession of by Correa with +sixty men.-- Astl. I. 45.</blockquote> +<p>During the subsistence of this friendly intercourse, a large +Moorish ship was descried from Calicut on its voyage from Cochin for +Cambaya; and the zamorin requested our general to make prize of the +ship, alleging that it contained a peculiarly fine elephant which he +wished to possess, and which had been refused to him although he had +offered more than its value. The general answered that he would do +this willingly to gratify his highness; but, as he was informed the +ship was large and well manned, both with mariners and soldiers, it +could not be expected to surrender without resistance, in which some +men might be slain on both sides, and it was therefore necessary he +should have the sanction of his highness to kill these people in case +of resistance, which was accordingly granted. Upon which the general +sent Pedro de Tayde in his caravel, accompanied by a valiant young +gentleman named Duarte, or Edward Pacheco, and by sixty fighting men, +with orders to take this ship. Along with them the zamorin sent +certain Moors, that they might witness the manner of fighting used by +the Portuguese. The caravel gave chase to the Moorish ship till +night, and then lost sight of her; but in sailing along shore by +moon-light, they saw her riding at anchor, ready for defence, judging +her to be about 600 tons burthen, and to contain 300 fighting men. +Pacheco, according to his orders, did not think proper to lay the +Moorish ship on board, but commanded his ship to be brought to, +intending to sink the Moorish ship by means of his ordnance, in case +of necessity. The Moors made light of our small force, which they +greeted with loud cries and the sound of musical instruments, after +which they played their ordnance against our caravel. They were +bravely answered by our men, and one of our balls struck them between +wind and water, so that the Moorish ship took in much water; and many +of their men being killed and wounded by our shot, they bore away for +the bay of Cananor, which was very near, and came there to anchor +beside other four Moorish ships. Pacheco followed them and continued +to batter them with his guns, and had assuredly taken them had not +certain <i>paroas</i> belonging to the Moors come from the port of +Cananor to their assistance. The night growing very dark, Pacheco +quitted the bay lest his caravel might be set on fire by the Moors, +and came to anchor close to an island at a short distance, having had +nine of his men wounded by arrows during the engagement.</p> +<p>Next morning Pacheco again attacked the Moorish ship, which at +last yielded, to the great displeasure of the natives of Cananor, who +had flocked to the seaside intending to have succoured the Moors; +but, on Pacheco sending a few shots among them, they all dispersed. +Pacheco came next day to Calicut with his prize, where the zamorin +came down to the water side to see the Moorish ship, giving great +praise to our people for their prowess, being much astonished that so +great a ship should be taken by one so much inferior in size and +number of men. The general commanded this ship to be delivered to the +zamorin, together with the seven elephants that were on board, which +were worth in Calicut 30,000 crowns. He also sent a message to the +zamorin, saying that he need not be astonished at this action as he +would perform much greater actions to serve his highness. The zamorin +returned thanks for what had been done, and desired the brave men who +had performed this gallant action to be sent him, that he might do +them honour and reward them as they deserved; and he bestowed large +presents upon Pacheco in particular. Some affirm that the performance +of this gallant feat by so small a number of our men against such +great odds, raised fear and jealousy of the Portuguese in the mind of +the zamorin, and made him anxious to get them away from his country; +for which cause he gave his consent to the treachery which was used +against them, as I mean to shew in the sequel[23].</p> +<blockquote>[23] According to De Faria, this event was occasioned by +the Moorish admiral of Calicut, without the knowledge of the zamorin, +who instigated Cabral to the attempt in hope of injuring the +Portuguese, and sent information to the Moors to be on their guard. +He adds that Cabral, having discovered the fraud, restored the ship +and cargo to the owners, whom he satisfied for their damages, in +order to gain the favour of the rajah of Cochin.--Astl. I. +45.</blockquote> +<p>The Moors of Calicut were more terrified than ever at the +Portuguese in consequence of the capture of this ship, and were much +offended by the favour bestowed by the zamorin upon our men for their +gallantry on this occasion. They believed that all this was done, out +of, revenge against themselves, for the injuries they had done us, +and was intended to induce them to retire from Calicut; especially as +our people brought there as great store of merchandize as they did, +and bought as many spices. Taking all this into consideration, they +procured an audience of the zamorin, to whom one of their number made +the following oration in the name of all the Moors.</p> +<p> <i>"Emparather[24]</i> of all the Malabars, as great as the +mightiest sovereign of the Indies, and most powerful among the +princes of the earth. We are astonished that you should debase +yourself by receiving into your country these enemies of your law and +strangers to the customs of your kingdom, who seem pirates rather +than merchants. We should not wonder at your so doing were your city +in want of the commodities they bring, or could not otherwise dispose +of the spiceries they purchase: But we, whom you have long known and +whose fidelity you are well assured of by experience, have always +done both to the great increase of your revenue. You appear to forget +all this, by receiving those whom you do not know into your favour, +and employing them to revenge your injuries, as if your own numerous +and faithful subjects were incompetent for the purpose. In this you +dishonour yourself, and embolden these strangers to hold your power +in contempt, and to act as we know they will hereafter, by robbing +and plundering all merchant ships that frequent your port, to the +ruin of your country, and who will at length take possession of your +city. This is the true intent of their coming into these seas, and +not to trade for spices as they pretend. Their country is almost 5000 +leagues from hence, and the voyage out and home is attended by many +dangers through unknown and stormy seas, besides the great cost of +their large ships with so many men and guns; Hence at whatever prices +they may dispose of their spices in Portugal, it is obvious such a +trade must be carried on with great loss; which is a manifest proof +that they are pirates, and not merchants, who come here to rob, and +to take your city. The house you have given them for a factory, they +will convert into a fort, from whence they will make war on you when +you least expect it. All this we say more from the good will we owe +you, than for any profit; for, if you do not listen to our advice, +there are other cities in Malabar to which we will remove, and to +which the spices will be conveyed for us."</p> +<blockquote>[24] Perhaps meant by Lichefild instead of emperor; or it +may be some native term of dignity.--E.</blockquote> +<p>To this harangue the zamorin gave a favourable answer, saying that +he would give attention to all they had said, of which indeed he +already had some suspicions. That he had employed the Portuguese to +seize the ship to try their courage, and had allowed them to load +their ships, that the money they had brought to purchase goods might +remain in the country; and finally, that he would not forsake them in +favour of the strangers. The Moors were by no means satisfied with +all this, because the zamorin did not order us to depart from +Calicut, and did not stop our trade, which was their chief purpose. +Though disappointed in these views, they continued to intermiddle in +our affairs, particularly by buying up the spices and sending them +elsewhere, in hope of irritating our people, and bringing on a +quarrel, that they might have a pretext to attack us. This they were +much inclined to bring about, as, being greatly more numerous than +our men, they hoped the zamorin would take part with them against us. +They likewise used all possible means to draw over the common people +of Calicut to their side, and to excite them to enmity, against us, +by making them believe that our people had injured them.</p> +<p>Through those devices, our factor was unable to procure more +spices than sufficed to load two ships in the course of three months, +from which the general was convinced that the friendly assurances of +the zamorin was little to be depended on; and if he had not been +afraid of not being able to procure a sufficient supply elsewhere, he +would have gone to another port: But, having already consumed a long +time and been at heavy charges, he determined to remain at Calicut, +and sent a message to the zamorin, complaining of the delays, which +ill accorded with the promises of his highness, that the whole fleet +should be loaded in twenty days, whereas three months were now +elapsed and the loading of two ships only was procured. He urged the +zamorins promise that the Portuguese ships were to be first loaded; +whereas he had assured information that the Moors had bought up great +quantities of spices at lower prices, and sent them to other places, +and begged the zamorin to consider that it was now time for the ships +to begin their voyage to Portugal, and that he anxiously wished for +dispatch. On receiving this message, the zamorin pretended to be much +surprised that our ships were still unprovided with a loading, and +could not believe that the Moors had secretly bought up and removed +the spices, contrary to his orders; and even gave permission to the +general to take those ships belonging to the Moors which were laden +with spices, paying the same prices for the spices which had been +given by the Moors. This intelligence gave much satisfaction to the +Moors, as a favourable opportunity for drawing on hostilities with +the Portuguese; and, accordingly, one of the principal Moorish +merchants began immediately to load his ship: openly with all kinds +of drugs and spices, and suborned several Moors and Indians, who +pretended to be the friends of our factor, to insinuate that he would +never be able to find a sufficient loading for our fleet, if he did +not seize that ship. Correa listened to this insidious advice, which +he communicated to the general, urging him to take that Moorish ship, +as he had license from the zamorin to that effect. The general was +exceedingly unwilling to proceed to this extremity, afraid of the +influence of the Moors with the zamorin, and of producing hostilities +with the natives. But Correa remonstrated against delay, protesting +that the general should be responsible for all losses that might +accrue to the king of Portugal through his neglect. Over-persuaded by +this urgency of the factor, the general sent all the boats of the +squadron on the 17th of December to take possession of the Moorish +ship.</p> +<p>When this intelligence was received on shore, the Moors thought +this a favourable opportunity of destroying our people, and +immediately raised a great outcry against the Portuguese, incensing +the people of the city to join with them in complaining to the +zamorin; to whom they went in a tumultuous manner, representing that +we had bought and shipped a much larger quantity of drugs and spices +than the value of all our merchandize, and not contented with this, +were for taking all like thieves and pirates; they blamed the zamorin +for permitting us to trade in the city, and requested his license to +revenge themselves upon us for the loss of their vessel. The +faithless and inconstant king save them the license they required; on +which they immediately armed themselves, and ran furiously to our +factory, which was surrounded by a wall eight or ten feet high, and +contained at that time seventy Portuguese, among whom was Fra +Henriques and his friars. Of our people in the factory, only eight +were armed with crossbows, all the rest being only armed with swords, +with nothing to defend them but their cloaks. On hearing the tumult, +our people went to the gate of the factory, and seeing only a few +assailants, they thought to defend themselves with their swords +against a mischievous rabble, but the numbers of the Moors soon +increased, and galled our people so severely with their spears and +arrows, that they were forced to shut the gates, after killing seven +of the enemy, hoping to be able to defend themselves by means of the +wall. In this conflict four of our men were slain, and several +wounded, and all the remainder mounted the wall to defend it by means +of the crossbows, judging that the assailants were at least four +thousand men, among whom were several nayres.</p> +<p>Cores now found himself unable to defend the factory against so +great a force, and therefore hoisted a flag as signal to the fleet. +The general was at this time sick in bed, having been just blooded, +and was not therefore able to go in person to relieve the people in +the factory; but immediately sent all the boats of the fleet, well +manned, under the command of Sancho de Toar. But he was afraid to +venture on land with so small a force against so great a multitude, +or even to approach too near the shore, lest the enemies might assail +him in their almadias and tonis. He lay off, therefore, at a +considerable distance, where he remained a spectator of the valiant +defence made by our people at the factory, whence they killed great +numbers of the assailants. But their enemies always increased in +numbers, and they at length brought up certain engines to beat down +part of the wall, in which they at length succeeded. On this, our men +issued out by a door which led towards the sea side, in hopes of +being able to fight their way to the boats, in which attempt Corea +was slain, and fifty more of our men were either killed or made +prisoners, twenty only escaping who swam to the boats, most of whom +were much wounded. Among these were Fra Henriques, and Antonio, the +son of Aries Corea, then only eleven years old; who hath since done +many noble feats of arms in the Indies and other places, as I shall +afterwards declare in the <i>Fourth</i> Book of this history.</p> +<p>The general was much concerned at this event, not only for the +loss of his men, but on seeing how little confidence could be reposed +on the promises of the zamorin after all the presents he had +received, and the services which had been performed for him. He had +now spent three months at Calicut, during which he had only loaded +two of his ships, and knew not how to procure loading for the rest; +especially as he could not expect a favourable reception at Cochin on +account of having captured the ship with the elephant as before +related. Considering the treason which had been practised on our men, +the general determined upon taking a signal revenge, if the zamorin +did not make an ample excuse for what had taken place, and make a +full reparation by immediately providing the rest of the ships with +lading. The zamorin, however, had no such intentions, being much +pleased with what the Moors had done, and even ordered all the goods +in our factory to be seized, to the value of 4000 ducats. He likewise +ordered all of our people who had been taken on shore to be made +captives, four of whom died of their wounds. Seeing that no message +or excuse was sent by the zamorin all that day, the general held a +council with his officers as to the proper steps to be taken on the +present emergency; when it was determined to take immediate and ample +revenge, without giving time to the zamorin to arm his fleet. On +this, orders were issued to take possession of ten large ships which +lay in the road or harbour of Calicut, which was done after some +resistance, many of their crews being killed or drowned, and others +made prisoners who were reserved to serve as mariners on board our +fleet. Some spices and other merchandize were taken in these ships, +and three elephants, which were killed and salted as provisions for +the voyage; and it appeared that 600 Moors were slain in defending +these ships. After every thing of value was taken from the Moorish +ships, they were all burnt in sight of the city. Many of the Moors +embarked in their almadias to attempt succouring their ships, but our +men soon put them to flight by means of their ordnance.</p> +<p>The zamorin and the whole city of Calicut were much mortified to +see so many ships destroyed, and them unable to help, but their +astonishment and terror were much increased by the events of the +ensuing day. During the night, the general ordered all the ships of +the fleet to be towed as near as possible to the shore by means of +the boats, and spread out at some distance from each other, that they +might be able to reach the city with their ordnance; which, as soon +as day broke, was directed to play upon the city in every direction, +doing vast damage among the houses. The natives brought down to the +shore such small pieces of ordnance as they possessed, which they +fired off against us, but without being able to do us any injury; +whereas not a shot of ours missed taking effect, either among the +multitude of our enemies which flocked to the shore, or on the +buildings of the city, both the houses of the inhabitants and the +temples of their deities receiving incredible damage. So great was +the consternation, that the zamorin fled from his palace, and one of +his chief nayres was killed by a ball close beside him. Part even of +the palace was destroyed by the cannonade. Towards afternoon two +ships were seen approaching the harbour, which immediately changed +their course on seeing how our fleet was employed; on which the +general ceased firing against Calicut, and made all sail after these +two ships to Pandarane, where they took shelter among other seven +ships lying at anchor close to the shore and filled with Moors. +Finding that our fleet could not get near enough to attack them, +owing to shallow water, and considering that it was now late in the +season for his voyage back to Lisbon, the general resolved to be +contented with the revenge he had already taken upon Calicut, and +made sail for Cochin, where he was informed there was more pepper to +be had than even at Calicut, and where he hoped to enter into a +treaty with the rajah of that place.'</p> +<p>On his way towards Cochin, Cabral took two ships belonging to the +Moors, which he set on fire, after taking out of them some rice which +they had on board. On the 20th of December the fleet arrived at +Cochin, which is nineteen leagues to the south of Calicut, and is in +nine degrees towards the north[25]. Cochin is in the province of +Malabar, on a river close to the sea, and is almost an island, so +that it is very strong and difficult of access, having a large and +safe harbour. The land in its neighbourhood is low and intersected by +branches of the river into many islands. The city itself is built +much after the same manner with Calicut, and is inhabited by +idolaters, with a good many Moorish strangers, who come hither to +trade from many countries, two of whom were so rich as to have each +fifty ships employed. This country does not abound in provisions, but +produces large store of pepper, even Calicut being mostly supplied +from hence: But as Calicut is greatly more resorted to by merchants, +it is therefore much richer than Cochin. The king is an idolater, of +the same manners and customs with him of Calicut; but his country +being small he is very poor, and has not even the right to coin +money, being in many respects subordinate to the zamorin; who, on his +accession to the throne always goes to Cochin, and takes possession +of that kingdom, either retaining it in his own hands, or restoring +the rajah as he may think proper. The rajah of Cochin, consequently, +is bound to assist the zamorin in all his wars, and must always be of +the same religion with his paramount.</p> +<blockquote>[25] The latitude of Cochin is almost 10º N. while +Calient is about 11º 10'.--E</blockquote> +<p>Having come to anchor in the harbour of Cochin, the general sent +one Michael Jogue[26] on shore with a message to the rajah, as he +feared to send Caspar on shore, lest he might run away. This person, +though an idolater and a stranger, had come aboard our fleet with the +intention of becoming a Christian, and of going into Portugal, and +our general had him baptised by the name of Michael. He was ordered +to give the rajah of Cochin an account of all that had happened at +Calicut, and that Cabral had brought great store of merchandize to +barter for the commodities of Cochin; or if the rajah were not +satisfied with these, he was willing to give ready money for what he +wanted; requesting to be furnished with loading for four of his ships +in either way, as most agreeable to the rajah. To this message the +rajah[27] made answer, that he was exceedingly glad of the arrival of +the Portuguese, of whose power and valour he had already heard, for +which he esteemed them highly, and that they were welcome to purchase +what spices his country afforded, either in barter for their goods, +or for money, as they thought proper. He added, that the general +might freely send any agents he pleased on shore to make purchases +and sales, and sent two principal nayres as hostages for their +safety; conditioning only, that they might be changed daily for +others, because any of that cast who chanced to eat even once on +shipboard could never appear again in the rajahs presence. Cabral was +well pleased with this promising beginning, and immediately appointed +Gonzalo Gil Barbosa as factor, who had been assistant to Aries +Correa, giving him Laurenço Morena as clerk, and Madera de +Alcusia as interpreter, with four of the banished men as +servants.</p> +<blockquote>[26] This Michael Jougue or Joghi, is said to have been a +bramin, or Malabar priest; one of these devotees who wander about the +country, girt with chains and daubed with filth. Those wanderers, if +idolaters, are named Jogues; and Calandars if Mahometans.--Astl. I. +47. a.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[27] The rajah who then reigned at Cochin is named +Triumpara, or Trimumpara, by De Faria, De Barros, and other early +writers.--Astl. I. 47. b.</blockquote> +<p>On receiving notice of the landing of Barbosa, the rajah sent the +register[28] of the city to meet him, accompanied by many of the +nayres, or principal men of the court, who brought him to visit the +rajah, who was much inferior in dress and appearance of state to the +zamorin, even the hall of audience having only bare walls, seated +around like a theatre, in which the rajah sat with very few +attendants. Barbosa presented to the rajah, in name of our general, a +basin of silver filled with saffron, a large silver ewer filled with +rose water, and some branches of coral, which the rajah received with +much satisfaction, desiring his thanks to be returned to the general; +and after some conversation with the factor, and interpreter, he gave +orders for them to be properly lodged in the city. The general gave +especial orders that no more than the seven persons already mentioned +should remain on shore, thinking it imprudent to risk a greater +number, in case of experiencing a similar misfortune with what had +lately happened at Calicut. But there was here no cause for distrust, +as the rajah of Cochin was a person of truth and honour, as appeared +by his good usage of our men, the quick dispatch that was used in +loading our ships with spices, and the orders he gave to his people +to afford every assistance, which they did with much alacrity and +zeal: so that it seemed ordained of God, that the trade should be +transferred from Calicut to Cochin, for the advancement of the +Catholic faith in the Indies, and the enrichment of the crown of +Portugal[29].</p> +<blockquote>[28] In other parts of Castaneda, this officer is called +the kutwal--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[29] According to De Barros, the rajah of Cochin was +offended by the conduct of the zamorin, on several accounts, and +among the rest for monopolising the trade on the Malabar +coast.--Astl. I. 43. a. We may easily conceive that one strong ground +of favour to the Portuguese at Cochin, was in hopes by their means to +throw off the yoke of the zamorin.--E.</blockquote> +<p>After the ships were laden, two Indians came to wait upon the +general, who said that they were brothers, and Christians, born in +Cranganore near Cochin, who were desirous of going to Portugal, and +thence to visit the Pope at Rome, and the holy sepulchre at +Jerusalem[30]. Being asked by the general what kind of a city +Cranganore was, whether it was entirely inhabited by Christians, and +whether these Christians followed the order of the Greek or Roman +church, one of them gave the following answers.</p> +<blockquote>[30] One of these Christians died during the voyage, but +the other, named Joseph, arrived in Portugal. This is the <i>Josephus +Indus</i> , or Joseph the Indian, under whose name there is a short +voyage in Grynæus: which properly speaking is only an account +of Cranganore and its inhabitants, particularly the Christians and +their ceremonies, with some account of Calient, Kambaya, Guzerat, +Ormuz, and Narsinga, very short and unsatisfactory.--Astl. I. 48. +b.</blockquote> +<p>Cranganore is a large city in the province of Malabar on the +mainland, standing near the mouth of a river, by which likewise it is +encompassed, inhabited both by idolaters and Christians, and by some +Jews who are held in small esteem. It is much frequented by +strangers, among whom are merchants from Syria, Egypt, Persia, and +Arabia, who come thither to purchase pepper, a great deal of which +commodity is gathered in its territories. It has a king of its own, +to whom all the Christian inhabitants pay a certain tribute, and have +a quarter of their own in the city, where they have a church +resembling ours, in which there were crosses, but no images of the +saints, and no bells, being summoned to prayers by the priests as in +the Greek church. These Christians hail their popes, with twelve +cardinals, two patriarchs, and many bishops and archbishops, all of +whom reside in Armenia, to which country their bishops always went +for consecration. He had been there himself along with a bishop, +where he was ordained a priest. That this rule was observed by all +the clergy of the Indies and of Cathay, who have to go to the pope or +Catholicos of Armenia for consecration. Of their two patriarchs, one +resides in the Indies, and the other in Cathay[31], their bishops +residing in different cities as it may seem convenient. Their tonsure +is made in form of a cross.</p> +<blockquote>[31] Called Caitaio in the original, but obviously +Cathay, or Northern China, in which we have formerly seen that there +were Nestorian Christians.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The cause of their having a pope is said to have been on the +following account: 'When St Peter was residing at Antioch, there +happened a great schism, occasioned by Simon Magus, on which Peter +was called to Rome to assist the Christians in overthrowing that +heresy; and, that he might not leave the eastern church without a +shepherd, he appointed a vicar to govern at Antioch, who should +become pope after the death of Peter, and should always assist the +pope of Armenia. But, after the Moors entered into Syria and Asia +Minor, as Armenia remained always in the Christian faith, they came +to be governed by twelve cardinals. Marco Polo, in writing concerning +Armenia, mentions this pope or Catholicos, and says there are two +sects of Christians, the Nestorians and Jacobites, their pope being +named Jacobus, whom this Joseph named their Catholicos. The priests +of Cranganore are not shaven in the same manner with ours, but shave +the whole head, leaving a few hairs on the crown and they have both +deacons and subdeacons. In consecrating the elements, they use +leavened bread and wine made of raisins, having no other in the +country. Their children are not baptized till they are eleven days +old, unless they happen to be sickly. They confess as we do, and bury +their dead after a similar manner. They do not use the holy oil to +the dying, but only bless them; and when any one dies, they gather a +large company and feast for eight days, after which the obsequies are +celebrated. If any person dies without making a testament, their +lands and goods go to the nearest heir; but the widow is entitled to +her dower if she remain a year unmarried. On going into church they +use holy water. They hold the writings of the four Evangelists in +great veneration. They fast during Lent and Advent with much +solemnity, and on Easter Eve they neither eat nor drink the whole +day. They have regularly sermons on the night of Holy Friday, and +they observe the day of the Resurrection with great devotion. +Likewise the two following days, and the ensuing Sunday, are +particularly kept holy, because on that day St Thomas thrust his hand +into the side of our Saviour. Ascension Day, Trinity Sunday, the +Assumption and Nativity of the Blessed Virgin, Candlemas Day, +Christmas Day, all the days of the apostles, and all the Sundays +throughout the year, are kept with much devotion. They sanctify in a +particular manner the first day of July every year in honour of St +Thomas, but they could give no reason why this was done. They have +also native friars and nuns, who live with much regularity. Their +priests also live chastely, as those who do otherwise are debarred +from executing their functions. They allow of no divorce between +married people, who must live together till death. They receive the +sacrament regularly three times in every year. They have among them +certain learned men, or great doctors, who keep schools, in which +they teach the Scriptures, and likewise some excellent +interpretations which were left in old times by their ancient +doctors. Their dress is similar to that of the Moors. Their day +consists of forty hours; and, having no clocks, they judge of the +time of the day by the sun, and in the night by the motion of the +stars[32]. The general was very glad to receive this Joseph and his +brother, and gave orders to provide them with a good cabin in his +ship.</p> +<blockquote>[32] In Lichefilds translation, the account of the day of +these Indian Christians runs thus, which we do not pretend to +understand: "They have their day, which they do +call <i>Intercalor</i> , which is of <i>forty</i> hours."<br> +This account of the Christians found in India by the Portuguese, is +exceedingly imperfect and unsatisfactory; but it would lead to a most +inconvenient length to attempt supplying the deficiency. Those of our +readers who are disposed to study this interesting subject, will find +it discussed at some length in Mosheim, and there is a good abstract +relative to these Oriental sects given by Gibbon, in the Decline and +Fall of the Roman Empire.--E.</blockquote> +<p>While Cabral remained at Cochin, he received messages from the +kings of Cananor and Coulan, both considerable princes in the +province of Malabar, requesting him to come to their ports, where he +should be supplied cheaper than at Cochin, and giving him many offers +of friendship. He made answer, with his hearty thanks, that he could +not now visit their ports, having already begun to take in his +loadings bet that he should certainly visit them on his return to +India. Immediately after the Portuguese ships were laden, a fleet of +twenty-five great ships, and other small vessels was descried in the +offing; and notice was sent by the rajah of Cochin to our general, +that this fleet contained fifteen thousand fighting men, and had been +fitted out on purpose to make him and all his people prisoners. At +the same time the rajah offered to send men to his assistance, if he +stood in need; but the general answered he had no need of any such +aid at the present, as he trusted, with God's blessing, to convince +his enemies they were ill advised in seeking now to attack him, +having already given them a trial of his strength; alluding to what +he had already done to them at Calicut. The enemy continued to hover +off at sea, but did not venture to come nearer than a league, though +they seemed in fighting order. Seeing this shyness, the general +weighed anchor, and went out with all his fleet against them, having +on board the two nayres who were hostages for the factory on shore, +but his intentions were to have returned with them to Cochin. Soon +after leaving the harbour, a great storm arose with a foul wind, so +that he was forced to come to anchor without attaining to the enemy. +Next morning, being the 10th January 1501, the wind came fair, and +being desirous to attack the fleet of Calicut, the general made sail +towards them; but missing the ship commanded by Sancho de Toar, who +had parted from the fleet in the night, and that being the largest +and best manned ship of the fleet, he deemed it prudent to avoid +fighting with so large a force, especially as many of his men were +sick. The wind, likewise, was now quite fair for beginning his voyage +home, and was quite contrary for going back to Cochin to land the +hostages. He determined, therefore, to commence his voyage, and stood +out to sea; the enemy following him during the whole of that day, but +returned towards Calicut when night drew on. Cabral now turned his +attention to the forlorn nayres, who had been five days on board +without eating, and by dint of much and kind entreaty, he at length +prevailed on them to take food.</p> +<p>On the 15th of January, the fleet came in sight of Cananore, which +lies on the coast of Malabar, thirty-one leagues north of Cochin. +This is a large city with a fine bay, the houses being built of +earth, and covered with flat stones or slates, and it contains many +Moors who trade thither for many kinds of goods. The neighbourhood +produces hardly any more pepper than is necessary for its own +consumpt; but has plenty of ginger, cardamoms, tamarinds, mirabolans, +cassia-fistula[33], and other drugs. In several pools of water near +this city there are many very large alligators[34], similar to the +crocodiles of the Nile, which devour men when they come in their way. +They have very large heads with two rows of teeth, and their breath +smells like musk, their bodies being covered all over with hard +scales like shells. In the bushes near this city there are many large +and very venomous serpents, which destroy men by means of their +breath. There are bats likewise as large as kites, which have heads +like a fox and similar teeth, and the natives often eat these +animals. The city of Cananore abounds in fish, flesh, and fruits, but +has to import rice from other places. The king or rajah is a bramin, +being one of the three kings of Malabar, but is not so rich and +powerful as the zamorin, or even as the rajah of Coulan. The general +came to anchor at this port, both because he had been invited by the +rajah, and because he wished to take on board some cinnamon, of which +commodity he had not as yet any on board. He accordingly purchased +400 quintals, and might have had more if he would, but refused it; on +which the people of the place concluded that he had no more money. On +this coming to the knowledge of the rajah, he sent him word that he +would trust him with any quantity he had a mind for of that or any +other commodity, till his return from Portugal, or the arrival of any +other in his stead. The rajah was induced to make this offer, from +his knowledge of the just dealings of the Portuguese, and their +faithful performance of their promises. The general sent his hearty +thanks to the rajah for his liberality, promising to inform the king +his master of his good will, and assuring his highness that he might +depend on his constant friendship.</p> +<blockquote>[33] Named Canyfistola in Lichefilds +translation.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[34] Lagartos in the original.</blockquote> +<p>Cabral now took on board an ambassador from the rajah of Cananore +for the king of Portugal, who was sent to conclude a treaty of amity +between them. Departing from Cananore, and standing across the gulf, +he took a great ship richly laden on the last of January: But on +learning that it belonged to the king of Cambaya, he permitted it to +proceed on its voyage uninjured; sending word to that sovereign, that +the Portuguese did not come to the Indies to make war on any one, +excepting indeed with the zamorin of Calicut, who had scandalously +broken the peace which had been made between them. He therefore only +took a pilot out of this ship, to conduct him through the gulf +between India and Africa. While continuing their voyage, and +approaching the African shore, a great storm arose on the 12th of +February, by which in the night the ship of Sancho de Toar was driven +on shore, and taking fire was entirely burnt, the men only being +saved. As the tempest still continued, they were unable to stop at +Melinda, or any other place till they came to Mozambique, where they +cast anchor, in order to take in water and to refit their ships, the +seams of which were all open. From this place, the general dispatched +Sancho de Toar to discover Sofala, with orders to make the best of +his way from that place to Portugal, with an account of its +productions.</p> +<p>The ships being refitted, Cabral resumed the voyage to the Cape of +Good Hope, near which they again experienced a violent storm, in +which one of the ships was separated from the fleet, after firing +signals of distress, and was never seen again during the voyage. At +length, after many great storms and dangers, which it were tedious to +recount, Cabral doubled the Cape on Whitsunday the 22d of May; whence +continuing his voyage with a fair wind, he came to anchor at Cape +Verd, where he found Diego Diaz, who had separated from the fleet on +the outward bound voyage. Diaz had been driven into the Red Sea, +where he wintered and lost his boat, and as most of his men died from +sickness, his pilot could not venture to carry him to India. He +endeavoured therefore to find his way back to Portugal; but after +leaving the Red Sea, his men were so consumed with hunger, thirst, +and sickness, that only seven of his crew remained. After remaining +some time at Cape Verd waiting in vain for the missing ships, Cabral +proceeded on his voyage, and arrived safe at Lisbon on the last day +of July, in the year 1501. Soon after his arrival, the ship which had +separated in a storm off the Cape of Good Hope, came in; and shortly +after that, Sancho de Toar arrived from Sofala. He described Sofala +as a small island close on the continent of Africa, inhabited by a +black people called Caffres; and reported that much gold is brought +to this place from certain mines on the adjacent continent; on which +account Sofala is much frequented by Moors from India, who barter +merchandize of small value for gold. He brought along with him to +Lisbon a Moor whom he had received as an hostage or pledge for the +safety of one of his own men, whom he had left there to acquire a +knowledge of the country and its language; and from this Moor they +got ample information respecting the people and trade of those parts +of Africa, which I shall afterwards communicate. Including this last +ship, there returned six to Portugal out of the twelve which had +sailed on the voyage for India, the other six having been lost.</p> +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>Note.--In the Novus Orbus of Simon Grynaeus, p. 202-211, there is +an article entitled, <i>Short Account of India, by Joseph, an Indian +Christian, who accompanied Cabral[A] to Lisbon in 1501</i> . We were +inclined to have inserted this account at this part of our collection +as an ancient and original document: But, on an attentive perusal, it +is so jejune, contused, and uninstructive as not to merit attention. +It evidently appears to have been penned by some person in Cabral's +ship during the voyage home, from repeated conferences with Joseph: +But, as the writer of this article informs us himself, many +particulars were unknown to Joseph, because he had little intercourse +with the idolaters, or because the reporter could not understand the +answers which Joseph made to his inquiries.--E.</p> +<blockquote>[A] In Grynaeus, Pedro Alvarez de Cabral, is named Peter +Aliares.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION IV.</p> +<p> <i>Voyage of John de Nueva, being the third made by the Portuguese +to India</i> .</p> +<p>Is the same year 1501, supposing all differences to have been +settled amicably at Calicut by Cabral, and that a regular trade was +established both there and at Sofala and Quiloa, the king of Portugal +dispatched three ships and a caravel from Lisbon, under the command +of John de Neuva, a native of Galicia in Spain, who was accounted a +valiant gentleman; having under his orders, Francisco de Navoys, +Diego Barboso, and Hernando de la Pyna, as captains of three of the +ships. Two ships of this fleet were destined to carry merchandize to +Sofala[1], and the other two to Calicut, and all the four contained +only eighty men[2]. The instructions given to Nueva were, that he was +to touch at the island of St Blas, where he was to wait ten days if +any of his ships had separated. He was then to proceed for Sofala, +where, if a factory were settled he was to deliver the goods destined +for that place before going to India. If a factory were not already +settled there, he was to do every thing in his power for that +purpose, leaving Alvaro de Braga there as factor, with the +merchandize embarked in the caravel for that market. From Sofala, he +was to proceed to Quiloa; and thence directly to Calicut. He was +farther directed, in case of meeting with Cabral, to obey him as +general, and desire him to settle a factory at Sofala, if his own +attempt should fail.</p> +<blockquote>[1] It afterwards appears that one vessel only was +destined for this particular trade: Perhaps the second was meant for +Quiloa.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] According to Astley, I. 49. the crews of these four +vessels consisted in all of 400 men.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Nueva left Lisbon on this voyage in March, four months before the +return of Cabral, and arrived in safety at the isle of St Blas; where +he found a letter in an old shoe suspended from the branch of a tree, +written by Pedro de Tayde[3], informing him that the fleet of Cabral +had passed this island on its way back to Portugal, and giving an +account of what had happened at Calicut, of the good treatment the +fleet had received at Cochin, where some of our men remained, and of +the friendly disposition of the king of Cananor[4]. On consulting +with the other captains, it was judged improper to leave the caravel +at Sofala, in these circumstances, as their whole force did not +exceed eighty men; wherefore they proceeded directly for Quiloa, +where they found one of the exiles who had been left there by Cabral, +from whom they received a particular account of all that had happened +at Calicut, and of the loss of several of his ships, all of which he +had learnt from some Moors. From Quiloa Nueva sailed on to Melinda, +where the king confirmed the intelligence he had received from the +exile at Quiloa[5]. Thus fully instructed in the state of matters, +Nueva deemed it prudent to keep all the ships of his small squadron, +and sailed across from Melinda to Anchediva, where he came to anchor +in November, intending to take in a supply of water at that place. +While here, seven large ships belonging to Cambaya, which were bound +for the Red Sea, appeared off the anchoring ground, and seemed at +first disposed to attack our ships; but being afraid of the +Portuguese ordnance, they continued their voyage. From Anchediva +Nueva proceeded for Cananor, where he had an audience of the rajah, +from whom he received particular notice of all that had happened in +Calicut to Cabral, and of the offer which the rajah had made to load +all his ships at Cananor. The rajah assured him of his earnest desire +of doing every thing in his power to serve the king of Portugal, and +pressed him to take in his loading at that port; but Nueva declined +this offer for the present, until he had consulted with the factor at +Cochin, for which port he took his departure from Cananor. On his way +between Cananor and Cochin, Nueva took a ship belonging to some of +the Moorish merchants at Calicut, after a vigorous resistance, and +set it on fire.</p> +<blockquote>[3] Called de Atayde by Astley.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] According to Astley, I. 49. Nueva discovered in this +outward voyage the Island of Conception, in lat. 8° S. But this +circumstance does not occur in Castaneda.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] Before arriving at Melinda, Nueva gave chase to two +large ships belonging to the Moors, one of which he took and burnt, +but the other escaped.--Astl. I. 49.</blockquote> +<p>On his arrival at Cochin, the factor who had been left there by +Cabral came on board with the rest of his company, and acquainted him +that the rajah was greatly offended with Cabral for leaving the port +without seeing him, and for carrying away the hostages; yet had +always kindly entertained and the other members, of the factory, +lodging them every night in the palace for security, and always +sending a guard of nayres along with any of them who had occasion to +go out during the day, on purpose to defend them from the Moors who +sought their destruction, and who had one night set fire to the house +in which they lodged before their removal to the palace. He also +informed Nueva that the Moors had persuaded the native merchants to +depreciate the price of the Portuguese merchandize, and not to take +these in exchange for pepper, so that unless he had brought money for +his purchases he would have little chance of procuring a loading. On +this intelligence, and considering that he had not brought money, +Nueva immediately returned from Cochin to Cananor, expecting to +procure his loading at that port, in consequence of the friendly +dispositions of the rajah towards the king of Portugal[6]. On his +return to Cananor, he found that money was as necessary there for his +purchases as at Cochin: But, when the rajah, was informed of his +difficulties from want of money, he became his security to the native +merchants for 1000 quintals or hundred weights of pepper, 450 +quintals of cinnamon, and fifty quintals of ginger, besides some +bales of linen cloth[7]. By this generous conduct of the rajah, Nueva +procured a loading for his ships, and left his European merchandize +for sale at Cananor under the management of a factor and two +clerks.</p> +<blockquote>[6] According to De Faria, Nueva took in a part of his +loading; at Cochin, with a view perhaps to preserve the credit of the +Portuguese nation at that place.--Astl. I. 50. a.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] In the original this linen cloth is said to have been +made of <i>algadon</i> , a word left untranslated by Lichefild, +probably <i>al-cotton</i> , or some such Arabic word for cotton: The +linen cloth, therefore, was some kind of calico or +muslin.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the 15th December, while waiting for a fair wind to begin his +homeward voyage, the rajah sent notice to Nueva that +eighty <i>paraws</i> were seen to the northward, which were past +mount <i>Dely</i> , and that these vessels were from Calicut, sent +expressly to attack the Portuguese ships; and the rajah advised him +to land his men and ordnance for greater security: But the general +was not of this mind, and sent word to the rajah that he hoped, with +the assistance of God, to be able to defend himself. Next day, being +the 16th of December, before dawn, about an hundred ships and paraws +full of Moors came into the bay, sent on purpose by the zamorin, who +was in hopes to have taken all our ships and men. As soon as Nueva +perceived this numerous armament, he hoisted anchor and removed his +squadron to the middle of the bay, where he ordered all his ships to +pour in their shot against the enemy without intermission. Doubtless, +but for this, the enemy would have boarded his ships, and they were +so numerous it would have been impossible for him to have escaped; +but as the Moors had no ordnance, they could do our people no harm +from a distance, and many of their ships and paraws were sunk, with +the loss of a vast number of men, while they did not dare to approach +for the purpose of boarding, and not a single person was killed or +hurt on our side. The enemy towards evening hung out a flag for a +parley; but as Nueva feared this might be intended as a lure, he +continued firing, lest they might suppose he stopped from weariness +or fear. But the Moors were really desirous of peace, owing to the +prodigious loss they had sustained, and their inability to escape +from the bay for want of a fair wind. At length, most of his ordnance +being burst or rendered unserviceable by the long-continued firing, +and seeing that the Moors still kept up their flag of truce, Nueva +ceased firing and answered them by another flag[8]. Immediately on +this, a Moor came to Neuva in a small boat, to demand a cessation of +hostilities till next day. This was granted, on condition that they +should quit the bay and put out to sea, which they did accordingly. +Although the wind was very unfavourable, Nueva stood out to sea +likewise, which the enemy could hardly do, as their ships and paraws +can only make sail with a fair wind. Notwithstanding all that had +happened, Nueva was constrained to come to anchor close to the fleet +of the enemy, and gave orders to keep strict watch during the night. +At one time they were heard rowing towards our fleet, and it was +supposed they intended setting our ships on fire; on which Neuva +ordered to veer out more cable, to get farther off. Perceiving that +the boats of the enemy continued to follow, he commanded a gun to be +fired at them, on which they made off; and the wind coming off shore +and somewhat fair, they made sail for Calicut.</p> +<blockquote>[8] According to De Faria, five great ships and nine +paraws were sunk in this action. De Barros says ten merchant ships +and nine paraws.--Astl. I. 50. c.</blockquote> +<p>Nueva, after returning thanks to God for deliverance from his +enemies, took his leave of the rajah of Cananor, and departed for +Portugal, where he arrived in safety with all his ships[9].</p> +<blockquote>[9] On this part of the voyage, Astley remarks, on the +authority of De Faria, that Nueva touched at the island of St Helena, +which he found destitute of inhabitants; though it was found peopled +by De Gama in his first voyage, only four years before. What is +called the island of St Helena in De Gamas first voyage, is obviously +one of the head-lands of St Elens bay on the western coast of Africa. +The island of St Helena is at a vast distance from the land, in the +middle of the Atlantic ocean.--E.</blockquote> +<p>After the departure of Nueva from Cananor, one of his men named +Gonsalo Pixoto, who had been made prisoner and carried to Calicut, +came to Cananor with a message from the zamorin to Nueva, making +excuses for all that had been done there to Cabral, and for the +attempt against his own fleet at Cananor, and offering, if he would +come to Calicut, to give him a full loading of spices, and sufficient +hostages both for his safety and the performance of his promise.</p> +<p>SECTION V.</p> +<p> <i>The Second Voyage of De Gama to India in 1502; being the Fourth +made by the Portuguese to the East Indies</i> .</p> +<p>As the king of Portugal felt it incumbent upon him to revenge the +injurious and treacherous conduct of the zamorin, he gave orders to +prepare a powerful fleet for that purpose; the command of which was +at first confided to Pedro Alvares de Cabral, but, for certain just +considerations was taken from him and bestowed on Don Vasco de la +Gama. Every thing being ready, De Gama sailed from Lisbon on the 3d +of March 1502, having the command of thirteen great ships and two +caravels[1]. The captains of this fleet were, Pedro Alonso de +Aguilar, Philip de Castro, Don Lewis Cotinho, Franco De Conya, Pedro +de Tayde, Vasco Carvallo, Vincente Sodre, Blas Sodre, the two Sodres +being cousins-german to the captain-general, Gil Hernand, cousin to +Laurenço de la Mina, Juan Lopes Perestrello, Rodrigo de +Castaneda, and Rodrigo de Abreo; and of the two caravels Pedro +Raphael and Diego Perez were commanders. In this powerful squadron +they carried out the materials of a third caravel, which was directed +to be put together at Mozambique, and of which Hernand Rodrigues +Badarsas was appointed to be commander. Besides this first fleet of +seventeen sail, a smaller squadron of five ships remained in +preparation at Lisbon, which sailed on the 5th of May under the +command of Stephen de la Gama[2].</p> +<blockquote>[1] According to Astley, much difference of opinion took +place in the council of Portugal, whether to continue the trade to +India for which it was requisite to employ force, or to desist +entirely from the attempt; but the profits expected from the trade, +and the expectation of propagating the Romish religion and enlarging +the royal titles, outweighed all considerations of danger; and it was +resolved to persist in the enterprize.--Astl.I. 50.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] The distribution, of this force is somewhat +differently related by Astley. Ten ships only are said to have been +placed under the immediate command of Vasco de Gama; five ships under +Vincente Sodre, who had orders to scour the coast of Cochin and +Cananor, and to watch the mouth of the Red Sea, on purpose to prevent +the Moors, or Turks and Arabs, from trading to India; the third, as +in the text, was under Stephen de Gama, but with no particular +destination mentioned; and the whole were under the supreme command +of Vasco de Gama, as captain- general.--Astl.I. 50.</blockquote> +<p>When De Gama had doubled the Cape of Good Hope, and was arrived +at <i>the farther end of the currents</i> [3], he went himself with +four of the smallest vessels to Sofala, sending on the remainder of +the fleet to wait his arrival at Mozambique. This visit to Sofala was +in consequence of orders from the king, to examine the situation of +the city and to endeavour to find a proper situation for a fort, that +the Portuguese might monopolize the trade in gold at that place. He +remained there twenty-five days, during which he settled a treaty of +amity with the king, and had leave to establish a factory; after +which mutual presents were interchanged, and De Gama departed for +Mozambique. In going out of the river from Sofala, one of the ships +was lost, but all the men were saved. At Mozambique he made +friendship with the king, who had proved so unfriendly in the first +voyage, and even obtained leave to settle a factor with several +assistants, who were left on purpose to provide victuals for such +ships as might touch here on the voyage to or from India. Here +likewise the caravel destined for that purpose was set up and +provided with ordnance and a sufficient crew, and was left for the +protection of the factory. On leaving Mozambique, De Gama sailed for +Quiloa, having orders to reduce the king of that place to become +tributary, as a punishment for his unfriendly conduct towards Cabral. +On his arrival in that port, Ibrahim the king came on board to visit +the admiral, afraid of being called to account for the injuries he +had done to Cabral. De Gama, knowing that he was not to be trusted, +threatened to make him a prisoner under the hatches, if he did not +immediately agree to pay tribute to the king of Portugal[4]. The king +from fear engaged to pay 2000 miticals of gold yearly, and gave one +Mehemed Aleones, a principal man among the Moors whom he hated, as an +hostage for the payment. The reason of his dislike to Mehemed was +this: Ibrahim was himself an usurper, having seized the government in +prejudice to the right heir, and was afraid that Mehemed intended to +dethrone him. When the king found himself at liberty, in consequence +of this arrangement, he refused to send the promised tribute, in hope +that De Gama might put the hostage to death, by which means he might +get rid of his enemy: But the Moor, on finding the tribute did not +come, was fain to pay the same himself, by which means he procured +his own liberty. While at Quiloa, the fleet was joined by the +squadron of five ships under Stephen de Gama.</p> +<blockquote>[3] Such is the expression in the translation by +Lichefild; but which I suspect ought to have been, "and had passed +Cape Corientes."--E.<br> +In Astley, the following incident is mentioned: When off Cape Verd, +Vasco de Gama met a caravel bound from La Mina, on the western coast +of Africa, carrying much gold to Lisbon. He shewed some of this to +the ambassadors whom Cabral had brought from Cananor, and who were +now on their return to India. They expressed much surprize at this +circumstance; as they had been told by the Venetian ambassador at +Lisbon, that the Portuguese could not send their ships to sea without +assistance from Venice. This insinuation proceeded from envy, as the +Venetians were afraid of losing the lucrative trade with India which +they had long enjoyed through Egypt. --Astl.I. 51.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] According to De Faria, De Gama began by cannonading +the city of Quiloa; but on the king consenting to become tributary, +all was changed to peace and joy--Astl.I. 51. a.</blockquote> +<p>Leaving Quiloa, De Gama proceeded with the whole fleet for +Melinda, where he took in water and visited the king[5]. Going from +thence for India, and being arrived off Mount Dely, to the north of +Cananor, he met a ship belonging to the Moors of Mecca, and bound for +Calicut, which was taken by our men after a stout resistance[6]. When +the ship surrendered, De Gama went on board and commanded the owners +and all the principal Moors to come before him, whom he ordered to +produce all their goods on pain of being thrown overboard. They +answered that they had nothing to produce, as all their goods were in +Calicut; on which De Gama ordered one of them to be bound hand and +foot and thrown into the sea. The rest were intimidated by this +procedure, and immediately delivered up every thing belonging to +them, which was very valuable; all of which was committed to the +charge of Diego Hernando Correa, the factor appointed for conducting +the trade at Cochin, by whose directions they were transported into +one of the Portuguese ships. De Gama ordered all the children +belonging to the Moors to be taken on board one of his own ships, and +vowed to make them all friars in the church of our Lady at Belem, +which he afterwards did[7]. All the ordinary merchandize belonging to +the Moors was divided among his own men; and when all the goods were +removed, he ordered Stephen de la Gama to confine the Moors under the +hatches, and to set the ship on fire, to revenge the death of the +Portuguese who were slain in the factory at Calicut. Soon after this +was done, the Moors broke open the hatches, and quenched the fire; on +which the admiral ordered Stephen de Gama to lay them, aboard. The +Moors rendered desperate by this inhuman treatment, defended +themselves to the utmost, and even threw firebrands into our ship to +set it on fire. Night coming on, Stephen had to desist, but was +ordered to watch the Moorish ship carefully that it might not escape +during the dark, and the Moors all night long were heard calling on +Mahomet to deliver them out of the hands of the Christians. When day +appeared, the admiral again ordered Stephen de la Gama to set the +ship on fire, which he did accordingly, after forcing the Moors to +retreat into the poop. Some of the Moors leapt into the sea with +hatchets in their hands, and endeavoured to swim to our boats; but +all of these were slain in the water by our people, and those that +remained in the ship were all drowned, as the vessel sunk. Of 300 +Moors, of whom thirty were women, not one escaped alive; and some of +our men were hurt.</p> +<blockquote>[5] According to Astley, De Gama was forced beyond +Melinda, and took in water at a bay eight leagues farther on; and +going thence towards India, he spread out his fleet that no ship +might escape him; in consequence of which he took several, but was +most severe on those belonging to Calicut. --Astl.I. 51.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] In Astley this ship is said to have belonged to the +soldan of Egypt, and was very richly laden, besides being full of +Moors of quality, who were going on pilgrimage to Mecca.--Astl. I. +51.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] DeFaria says there were twenty of these children, +whom De Gama caused to be made Christian friars, to make amends for +one Portuguese who turned Mahometan.--Astl. I. 51. c.</blockquote> +<p>De Gama came soon afterwards to Cananor, where he sent on shore +the ambassadors, and gave them a message for the king, informing him +of his arrival, and craving an audience. Upon this the rajah ordered +a platform of timber to be constructed, which projected a +considerable way into the water, covered over with carpets and other +rich cloths, and having a wooden house or pavilion at the end next +the land, which was likewise covered like the bridge, and was meant +for the place of meeting between the rajah and the admiral. The rajah +came first to the pavilion, attended by 10,000 nayres, and with many +trumpets and other instruments playing before him; and a number of +the principal nayres were arranged on the bridge or platform, to +receive the admiral in an honourable manner. The admiral came in his +boat, attended by all: the boats of the fleet decked out with flags +and streamers, carrying certain ordnance in their prows, and having +many drums and trumpets making a very martial appearance. The admiral +disembarked at the outer end of the platform, under: a general salute +from the ordnance of the boats, and was accompanied by all his +captains and a number of men well armed. There were carried before +him two great basins of silver gilt, filled with branches of coral +and other fine things that are esteemed valuable in India. The +admiral was received at the head of the platform by the nayres placed +there on purpose, and was conducted to the rajah, who waited; for him +at the door of the pavilion, and welcomed him with an embrace. They +then walked together into the pavilion, in which two chairs were +placed out of compliment to the admiral, on one of which the rajah +sat down, though contrary to his usual custom, and desired the +admiral to be seated on the other. At this interview a treaty of +friendship and commerce was settled, and a factory allowed to be +established at Cananor. In consequence of this, the admiral gave +orders for some of the ships to load here, while others were to do +the same at Cochin[8].</p> +<blockquote>[8] Castaneda, or rather his translator Lichefild, gets +somewhat confused here, as if this factory were settled at Cochin, +though the whole previous scene is described as at +Cananor.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Having settled all things to his mind at Cananor and Cochin, the +admiral proceeded with his fleet to the harbour of Calicut, where he +took several paraws in which were about fifty Malabars who could not +escape; but he forbore making any farther hostilities against the +city, till he might see whether or not the zamorin would send him any +message. Soon afterwards there came a boat with a flag to the +admirals ship, a which was a person in the habit of a Franciscan +friar, who was taken at first sight for one of those who had +accompanied Ayres Correa, and who they supposed had remained a +prisoner. On entering the ship, he saluted them, saying <i>Deo +gratias</i> ; but was immediately recognized as a Moor. He excused +himself for coming in that disguise, to secure permission of getting +on board, and said that he brought a message from the zamorin to the +admiral, about settling a trade in Calicut. To this the admiral made +answer, that he would by no means treat on this subject, unless the +zamorin would previously satisfy him for all the goods which had been +seized in the factory, when he consented to the death of Correa and +the rest who were there slain. On this subject three days were spent +ineffectually in messages between the zamorin and the admiral, as the +Moors used every influence to prevent any friendly agreement. At +length, perceiving that all these messages were only meant to gain +time, the admiral sent notice to the zamorin that he would wait no +longer than noon for his final answer, and if that were not perfectly +satisfactory and in compliance with his just demands, he might be +assured he would wage cruel war against him with fire and sword, and +would begin with those of his subjects who were now prisoners in his +hands. And, that the zamorin might not think these were only words of +course, he called for an hour-glass, which he set down in presence of +the Moorish messenger, saying that as soon as the sand had run out a +certain number of times, he would infallibly put in execution all +that he had threatened. All this, however, could not induce the +zamorin to perform his promise; for he was of an inconstant and +wavering disposition, and influenced by the counsels of the Moors. +The outward shew he had made of peace was only feigned, or occasioned +by the fear he had of seeing so great a fleet in his port, from which +he dreaded to sustain great injury; but the Moors had now persuaded +him into a contrary opinion, and had prevailed on him to break his +word.</p> +<p>When the time appointed by the admiral was expired, he ordered a +gun to be fired, as a signal to the captains of his ships to hang up +the poor Malabar prisoners, who had been distributed through the +fleet. After they were dead, he ordered their hands and feet to be +cut off and sent on shore in a paraw, accompanied by two boats well +armed, and placed a letter in the paraw for the zamorin, written in +Arabic, in which he signified that he proposed to reward him in this +manner for his deceitful conduct and repeated breach of faith; and, +in regard to the goods belonging to the king of Portugal which he +detained, he would recover them an hundred fold[9]. After this, the +admiral ordered three of his ships to be warped during the night as +near as possible to the shore; and that these should fire next day +incessantly on the city with all their cannon, by which vast injury +was done, and the royal palace was entirely demolished, besides +several other houses belonging to the principal inhabitants of the +place. The admiral afterwards departed for Cochin, leaving Vincente +Sodre with six well armed ships to command the coast, who was to +remain in India when the rest of the fleet returned to Portugal, and +was likewise directed to go upon a voyage of discovery to the straits +of Mecca, and the coast of Cambaya[10].</p> +<blockquote>[9] De Faria says the bodies of these unfortunate +Malabars were thrown into the sea, to be carried on shore by the +tide.--Astl.I. 52. a.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[10] By the straits of Mecca are here meant the straits +of Bab-el-mandeb, or the entrance from the Indian Ocean into the Red +Sea; and by the coast of Cambaya, what is now called +Guzerat.--E.</blockquote> +<p>From Calicut the admiral sailed for Cochin; and immediately on his +anchoring in that port, the rajah[11] sent on board certain hostages +to remain as his sureties; and when the admiral landed, the rajah +went in person to meet him. At this interview, the rajah delivered up +to the admiral Stephen Gyl and others who had remained in his +country, and the admiral presented a letter from the king of Portugal +to the rajah, returning thanks for the kindness he had shewn to +Cabral, and declaring his satisfaction at the settlement of a factory +for trade at Cochin. The admiral also delivered a present from the +king of Portugal to the rajah, consisting of a rich golden crown set +with jewels, a gold enamelled collar, two richly wrought silver +fountains, two pieces of figured arras, a splendid tent or pavilion, +a piece of crimson satin, and another of sendal[12]; all of which the +rajah accepted with much satisfaction. Yet, not knowing the use of +some of these things, the admiral endeavoured to explain them; and +particularly, ordered the pavilion to be set up to shew its use, +under which a new treaty of amity was settled. The rajah appointed a +house for the use of the Portuguese factory, and a schedule of prices +were agreed upon, at which the various spices, drugs, and other +productions of the country were to be delivered to the Portuguese +factors, all of which were set down in writing in form of a contract. +The rajah likewise delivered present for the king of Portugal, +consisting of two gold bracelets set with precious stones, a sash or +turban used by the Moors of cloth of silver two yards and a half +long, two great pieces of fine Bengal cotton cloth, and a stone as +large as a walnut taken from the head of an animal +called <i>bulgoldolf</i> , which is exceedingly rare, and is said to be +an antidote against all kipds of poison[13]. A convenient house being +appointed for a factory, was immediately taken possession of by Diego +Hernandez as factor, Lorenzo Moreno, and Alvaro Vas as clerks, and +several other assistants.</p> +<blockquote>[11] The rajah or king of Cochin has already been named +Triumpara, or Trimumpara, on the authority of De Barros, De Faria, +and other ancient authors; yet De Faria, in other instances, calls +him Uniramacoul--Astl. I. 52. b.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[12] It is difficult to say what may have been meant by +this last article. In old French writings <i>Rouge comme Sendal</i> +means very high red, or scarlet; from which circumstance, this may +have been a piece of scarlet satin or velvet.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[13] Of the animal called bulgoldolf in the text we have +no knowledge, nor of this stone of wonderful virtue; but it may +possibly refer to the long famed bezoar, anciently much prized, but +now deservedly neglected.--E.</blockquote> +<p>While the ships were taking in their cargoes at Cochin, a message +was brought to the admiral from the zamorin, engaging, if he would +return to Calicut, to make a complete restitution of every thing that +had been taken from the Portuguese, and that a treaty of friendship +and commerce would be immediately arranged between them. After +considering this message, the admiral ordered the messenger to +prison, meaning to take revenge on him in case the zamorin should +prove deceitful in this instance as he had already been in many +others[14]. After this precaution, he went to Calicut, more for the +purpose of endeavouring to recover the merchandize, than from any +expectation of procuring the friendship of the zamorin. For this +reason he took only his own ship[15], leaving Stephen de Gama in the +command at Cochin in his absence. The captains of the fleet were much +averse to this rashness; yet could not persuade him to take a larger +force, as he said he would be sufficiently protected by the squadron +of Vincente Sodre, which was cruizing on the coast, whom he could +join on any emergency. On his arrival at Calicut, the zamorin +immediately sent notice that he would satisfy him next day for all +the goods which had been taken from Cabral, and would afterwards +renew the trade and settle the factory on a proper footing. But as +soon as he understood that the admiral had come with so small a +force, he commanded thirty-four paraws to be got in readiness with +all expedition, for the purpose of taking his ship. And so +unexpectedly did these assail him, that the admiral was forced to cut +one of his cables and make out to seaward, which he was fortunately +enabled to do, as the wind came off from the land. Yet the paraws +pursued him so closely, that he must infallibly have been taken, if +it had not been for the squadron of Sodre making its appearance, on +sight of which the paraws gave over the chase and retired to +Calicut.</p> +<blockquote>[14] According to De Faria, this messenger was a bramin, +who left his son and nephew at Cochin as hostages, and accompanied De +Gama to Calicut, where he carried various messages between the +zamorin and the admiral. --Astl. I. 53. b.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[15] De Faria says he was accompanied by a +caravel.--Astl. 1.53. b.</blockquote> +<p>On his return to Cochin, die admiral immediately ordered the +messenger of the zamorin to be hanged[16]. The failure of this +treacherous attempt against De Gama gave much concern to the zamorin; +who now resolved to try if he could induce the rajah of Cochin to +refuse a loading to the Portuguese, and to send away their factory +from his port. With this view he transmitted a letter to that prince, +in the following terms:</p> +<blockquote>[16] The son and nephew of the messenger, according to De +Faria.--Astl.I. 53. c.</blockquote> +<p>"I am informed that you favour the Christians, whom you have +admitted into your city and supplied with goods and provisions. It is +possible you may not see the danger of this procedure, and may not +know how displeasing it is to me. I request of you to remember the +friendship which has hitherto subsisted between us, and that you now +incur my displeasure for so small a matter in supporting these +Christian robbers, who are in use to plunder the countries belonging +to other nations. My desire is, therefore, that for the future you +may neither receive them into your city, nor give them spices; by +which you will both do me a great pleasure, and will bind me to +requite your friendship in whatever way you may desire. I do not more +earnestly urge these things at the present, being convinced you will +comply without further entreaty, as I would do for you in any matter +of importance."</p> +<p>The rajah of Cochin answered in the following terms: That he knew +not how to expel the Christians from his city, whom he had received +as friends, and to whom he had passed his word for trade and amity. +He denied that his friendly reception of the Christians could be +construed as any offence to the zamorin, as it was the custom in the +ports of Malabar to favour all merchants who resorted thither for +trade; and declared his resolution to maintain his engagements +inviolate to the Portuguese, who had brought great sums of gold and +silver, and large quantities of merchandize into his dominions in the +course of their trade. The zamorin was much offended by this answer +of the rajah of Cochin; to whom he wrote a second time, advising him +earnestly to abandon the Portuguese if he had any respect for his own +welfare. The rajah of Cochin was not to be moved, either by the +persuasions or threatening of the zamorin, and sent a reply to his +second letter, in which he declared he should never be induced to +commit a base or treacherous action by fear of the consequences, and +was resolved to persist in maintaining his treaty of trade and amity +with the Portuguese. Finding that he could not prevail on the rajah +of Cochin to concur with him, he commanded twenty-nine large ships to +be fitted out in order to assail the Portuguese fleet when on its +return homewards, expecting that he should be able to destroy them +with more ease when fully laden.</p> +<p>The rajah of Cochin gave no intimation to the admiral of the +letters and messages which had been interchanged between him and the +zamorin, until he went to take leave; at which time, he declared he +would hazard the loss of his dominions to serve the king of Portugal. +The admiral, after many expressions of gratitude for his friendly +disposition and honourable regard for his engagements, assured him +that the king his master would never forget the numerous +demonstrations he had given of friendship, and would give him such +assistance as should not only enable him to defend his own dominions, +but to reduce other countries under his authority. He desired him not +to be in fear of the zamorin, against whom there should henceforwards +be carried on so fierce war, that he would have enough of employment +in defending himself, instead of being able to attack others. In this +the general alluded to the aid which the rajah might expect from the +ships that were to remain in India under the command of Vincent +Sodre. All this conversation took place in presence of many of the +principal nayres, of which circumstance the rajah was much pleased, +as he knew these people were in friendship with the Moors, and had +opposed the grant of a factory to us at Cochin[17].</p> +<blockquote>[17] In addition to the narrative of Castaneda, De +Barros, Maffi, and De Faria relate, that ambassadors came to De Gama +while at Cochin from the Christian inhabitants in Cranganore and that +neighbourhood, who they said amounted to 30,000. They represented, +that they knew he was an officer of the most Catholic king in Europe, +to whom they submitted themselves; in testimony of which, they +delivered into his hands the rod of justice, of a red colour, tipped +with silver at both ends, and about the length of a sceptre, having +three bells at the top. They complained of being much oppressed by +the idolaters; and were dismissed by De Gama with promises of a +powerful and speedy assistance.--Astl. I. 53. d.</blockquote> +<p>Having completed the loading of ten ships, the admiral sailed from +Cochin on his homeward-bound voyage; and when about three leagues +from Pandarane, he descried the Moorish fleet of twenty-nine large +ships coming towards him. After consulting with the captains of his +fleet, and the wind being favourable for the purpose, he immediately +bore down to engage them. The ships commanded by Vincente Sodre, +Pedro Raphael, and Diego Perez, being prime sailers, closed up first +with the enemy, and immediately attacked two of the largest ships of +the Moors. Sodre fought with one of these alone, and Raphael and +Perez assailed the other. Almost on the first onset, great numbers of +the enemies were so dismayed that they leapt into the sea to escape +by swimming. On the coming up of De Gama with the rest of the fleet, +all the enemies ships made off as fast as they could towards the +shore, except those two which were beset at the first, and were +unable to escape, which were accordingly taken possession of. De +Gama, considering that all his ships were richly laden, would not +pursue the flying enemy, being afraid he might lose some of his ships +on the shoals; but our men went in their boats and slew about 300 of +the Moors who had endeavoured to save themselves by swimming from the +two captured ships. These vessels were accordingly discharged of +their cargoes; which consisted of great quantities of rich +merchandize, among which were six great jars of fine earthen ware, +called porcelain, which is very rare and costly and much admired in +Portugal; four large vessels of silver, and many silver perfuming +pans; also many spitting basons of silver gilt: But what exceeded all +the rest, was a golden idol of thirty pounds weight, with a monstrous +face. The eyes of this image were two very fine emeralds. The +vestments were of beaten gold, richly wrought and set with precious +stones; and on the breast was a large carbuncle or ruby, as large as +the coin called a crusado, which shone like fire.</p> +<p>The goods being taken out, the two ships were set on fire, and the +admiral made sail for Cananor, where the rajah gave him a house for a +factory, in which Gonzalo Gill Barbosa was settled as factor, having +Sebastian Alvarez and Diego Godino as clerks, Duarte Barbosa as +interpreter, and sundry others as assistants, in all to the number of +twenty. The rajah undertook to protect these men and all that might +be left in the factory, and bound himself to supply lading in spices +to all the ships of the king of Portugal at certain fixed prices[18]. +In return for these favourable conditions, the admiral engaged on +behalf of the king of Portugal to defend the rajah in all wars that +might arise from this agreement; conditioning for peace and +friendship between the rajahs of Cochin and Cananor, and that the +latter should give no aid to any one who might make war upon the +former, under the pain of forfeiting the friendship of the +Portuguese. After this, the admiral gave orders to Vincente Sodre to +protect the coast with his squadron till the month of February; and +if any war should break out or seem probable between the zamorin and +Trimumpara, he was to winter in Cochin for the protection of that +city; otherwise he was to sail for the straits of the Red Sea, to +make prize of all the ships belonging to Mecca that traded to the +Indies.</p> +<blockquote>[18] De Faria alleges that the persons who were appointed +to settle matters relative to trade at this port, differed much upon +the price of spices: on which occasion many threatening messages were +sent to the rajah, who at length through fear complied with all the +demands of the Portuguese. He says that the rajahs of Cochin and +Cananor were as refractory and adverse at first as the zamorin; and +that when De Gama arrived at Cochin, the three princes combined to +make him winter there by fraud, and joined their fleets to destroy +him. That on the failure of this combination, a durable peace was +made with Trimumpara; and the rajah of Cananor, fearing the +Portuguese might not return to his port, sent word to De Gama that he +was ready to comply with all his demands, --Astl.I. 54, +a.</blockquote> +<p>All these matters being properly arranged, De Gama departed from +Cananor for Portugal on the 20th December 1502[19]; with thirteen +ships richly laden, three of which had taken in their cargoes at +Cananor, and the other ten at Cochin. The whole fleet arrived in +safety at Mozambique, where the ship commanded by Stephen de Gama +having sprung a great leak, was unladen and laid on shore to be +repaired. Seven days after their departure from Mozambique, the ship +commanded by Lewis Cotinho sprung a great leak, and they were forced +to endeavour to return to Mozambique to repair her; but, the wind +being contrary, they had to do this in a creek on the coast. +Continuing their voyage, they were assailed by a sudden tempest off +Cape Corientes, in which the ship commanded by Stephen de Gama had +her sails all split by the storm, owing to which she was separated +from the fleet, and no more seen till six days after the arrival of +the admiral at Lisbon, when she came in with her mast broken. The +storm having abated, during which the fleet took shelter under the +lee of Cape Corientes, the admiral prosecuted his voyage to Lisbon, +and arrived safe at Cascais on the 1st September 1503. All the +noblemen of the court went to Cascais to receive him honourably, and +to accompany him to the presence of the king. On his way to court, he +was preceded by a page carrying a silver bason, in which was the +tribute from the king of Quiloa. The king received him with great +honour, as he justly merited for his services in discovering the +Indies, and in settling factories at Cochin and Cananor, to the great +profit of the kingdom; besides the great fame and honour which +redounded to the king, as the first sovereign who had sent to +discover the Indies, of which he might make a conquest if he were so +inclined. In reward for these brilliant services, the king made him +admiral of the Indies, and likewise gave him the title of Lord of +Videgueyra, which was his own.</p> +<blockquote>[19] In Castaneda this date is made 1503; but from an +attentive consideration of other dates and circumstances in that +author, this must have been a typographical error.--E.</blockquote> +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>Note.--As De Gama did not return again to India till the year +1524, which is beyond the period contained in that part of Castaneda +which has been translated by Lichefild, we shall have no occasion to +notice him again in this part of our work. For this reason, it has +been thought proper to give the following short supplementary account +of his farther services in India.</p> +<p>"In 1524, Don Vasco De Gama, now Count of Videgueyra, was +appointed viceroy of India by John III. king of Portugal, and sailed +from Lisbon with fourteen ships, carrying 3000 fighting men. Three +were lost during the voyage, with all the men belonging to two of +them. While in the Gulf of Cambaya, in a dead calm, the ships were +tossed about in so violent a manner that all onboard believed +themselves in imminent danger of perishing, and began to consider how +they might escape. One man leapt over-board, thinking to escape by +swimming, but was drowned; and such as lay sick of fevers were cured +by the fright. The viceroy, who perceived that the commotion was +occasioned by the effects of an earthquake, called aloud to his +people, <i>courage my friends, for the sea trembles from fear of you +who are on it</i> . To make some amends for the misfortunes of the +voyage, Don George de Meneses, one of the captains, took a large ship +belonging to Mecca, worth 60,000 crowns, a large sum in those days. +After his arrival at Goa, the viceroy visited some forts, and issued +the necessary orders for regulating the affairs of his government; +but he had not time to put any of his great designs into execution, +as he died on Christmas eve, having only held the government of +Portuguese India for three months. De Gama is said to have been of +middle stature, with a ruddy complexion, but somewhat gross. His +character was bold, patient under fatigue, well fitted for great +undertakings, speedy in executing justice, and terrible in anger. In +fine, he was admirably fitted for all that was entrusted to his +conduct, as a discoverer, a naval and military commander, and as +viceroy. He is painted with a black cap, cloak, and breeches, edged +with velvet, all slashed, through which appears the crimson lining. +His doublet is of crimson satin, over which his armour is seen inlaid +with gold. He was the sixth successive governor of India, and the +second who had the rank of viceroy."--Astl. I 54. b.</p> +<p>SECTION VI.</p> +<p> <i>Transactions of the Portuguese in India, from the departure of +De Gama in December 1502, to the arrival of Alonzo de Albuquerque in +1503.</i> </p> +<p>As soon as the zamorin was assured of the departure of De Gama for +Europe, he determined on putting his threats in execution against the +rajah of Cochin, for which purpose he gathered an army at the village +of Panani, not far from Cochin[1]. This was soon known to the +inhabitants of Cochin, who were exceedingly afraid of the great power +of the zamorin, and were much dissatisfied with their sovereign for +incurring the displeasure of that prince out of respect to the +Christians, whom they inveighed against with much bitterness on all +occasions, and openly insulted wherever they were seen. Some that +were in high credit with the rajah said openly, that as the zamorin +was much more powerful than their state, our men ought to be +delivered up to him, as the war was entirely on our account, for whom +the kingdom ought not to be put in hazard. But the rajah, much +offended at these people, declared that he was resolved to defend the +Portuguese against the zamorin, trusting that God would favour him in +so just a cause. Yet many of his subjects were much inclined to have +seized the Portuguese belonging to the factory, but durst not, as the +rajah gave them a place of considerable strength to dwell in, and +appointed a guard for their security.</p> +<blockquote>[1] This army is said to have amounted to 50,000 men. +Panani is six leagues from Cochin.--Astl. I. 54.</blockquote> +<p>At this time Vincente Sodre arrived with his squadron in the bay +of Cochin, after having done much damage on the coast of Calicut, +both by land and sea. The Portuguese head factor sent Laurenzo Moreno +to inform Sodre of the preparations which were making by the zamorin +for the attack of Cochin, and requiring him in the name of the king +of Portugal to land with his men for its defence. But Sodre answered, +that his orders were to defend the sea and not the land; for which +reason, if the zamorin had prepared to attack Cochin by sea, he would +certainly have defended it; but as the war was to be carried on by +land, he could not interfere, and the rajah must defend himself. The +factor sent a second message, entreating him, in the name of God and +on his allegiance to the king of Portugal, not to abandon the factory +in this state of danger, as the power of the rajah was inadequate to +defend Cochin against the zamorin; and as the sole object of the war +was for the destruction of the factory and the ruin of the Portuguese +trade, it certainly was his duty, as captain-general for the king of +Portugal in these seas, both to defend the factory and to give every +assistance in his power to the rajah. But Sodre was immoveable, +pretending that he had been ordered to discover the Red Sea, where he +expected to make many rich prizes, and set sail from Cochin for Cape +Guardafui, preferring the hope of riches to his duty in defending the +factory of Cochin.</p> +<p>The zamorin collected his army, as already mentioned, at the +village of Panani, where, besides his own subjects and allies, +several of the principal subjects of the rajah of Cochin joined his +standard, deserting their own sovereign, and carrying along with them +all the power they were able to muster: Among these were the caimalls +or governors of Chirapipil and Cambalane, and of the large island +which is opposite to the city of Cochin. At this place, the zamorin +made a long speech to his assembled chiefs, in which he endeavoured +to justify his enmity to the Portuguese, whom he represented as +thieves, robbers, and pirates, and as having first commenced +hostilities against him without cause. He contrasted the quiet and +friendly conduct of the Moors, who had traded for 600 years with +Malabar, having never done injury to any in all that time, and had +greatly enriched the country, and had raised his city of Calicut to +be the greatest emporium in all the Indies: Whereas the Portuguese +had taken and destroyed his ships, made his ambassadors prisoners, +insisted on having their ships laden before those belonging to the +Moors, had taken a ship of the Moors, burnt ten of his ships in his +own harbour, had destroyed his city and forced him to escape for +safety from his palace; taking law and vengeance for pretended +grievances into their own hands, instead of applying regularly to him +for redress. And, since the rajah of Cochin was fully informed of all +these things, yet persisted in favouring the Portuguese in despite of +all remonstrances, he had resolved to make war upon him, to deprive +him of his dominions, and to drive these Christian intruders out of +India.</p> +<p>This address gave much satisfaction to all the assembled chiefs, +and most especially to the lord of Repelim, who entertained a rooted +enmity against the rajah of Cochin, who had dispossessed him of an +island called Arrnuul. The only person who opposed the zamorin on +this occasion was Nambeadarin[2], who was brother and next heir to +the zamorin. He strongly urged the impolicy of driving the Christians +from Malabar, to which merchants resorted from all places of the +world, seeing that the Portuguese had made richer presents to the +zamorin, than he had ever received before, and had brought much gold +and silver into the country for the purchase of commodities, which +was not usually done by such as came to make war. He represented the +attempt of the hostages to escape who had been given for the safety +of the Portuguese chief, and whom the zamorin was pleased to call +ambassadors, as the first cause of jealousy and distrust; yet they +were afterwards reconciled, and took the large Moorish ship at the +desire of the zamorin, to whom they presented the great elephant. He +said their conduct in trade and otherwise while in Calicut was quite +satisfactory to all except the Moors, who were envious against them +for interfering in their trade, and accused them falsely of taking +pepper against the will of the owners, which in fact they had done +themselves to prevent the Christians from loading their ships; nay +that this was so evident that even the zamorin had licensed the +Portuguese to take the pepper from the Moorish vessels. After which +the Moors had risen against them, slaying their men and seizing all +their goods. Yet, after all these outrages, they had given the +zamorin a whole day in which to offer reparation, and had not sought +revenge of their injuries treacherously like the Moors. That he saw +no cause of going to war against the rajah of Cochin for receiving +the Portuguese into his city like any other merchants who might +frequent his harbour, as had likewise been done by the rajahs of +Cananor and Koulan, who would not have done so if they had been +robbers and pirates. And if the zamorin meant to drive the Portuguese +from the Indies, besides making war on Cochin, it would be necessary +for him to do the same against Canauor and all the other princes on +the coast.</p> +<blockquote>[2] This person is named Naubea Daring by Astley, and is +said to have been nephew to the zamorin.--Astl. I. 56.</blockquote> +<p>The zamorin was a good deal staggered by the discourse of +Nambendarin, who had much credit and authority with him; insomuch, +that it is thought he would have desisted from prosecuting the war, +if it had not been for the Moors and the caymals, who represented +that it would be a great disgrace to his character to recede after +the assemblage of so great an army, and that it was to be expected +the rajah of Cochin might now agree from fear to do what the zamorin +had desired him. The zamorin then desired his sorcerers to point out +a fortunate day for marching forward with his army, which they did +accordingly, and promised him an assured victory. With this +assurance, on which he placed great reliance, the zamorin departed +from Panani, and took possession of Repelim, which is four leagues +from Cochin.</p> +<p>The rajah of Cochin had regular intelligence of all that passed in +the camp of the zamorin by means of spies, and was in great trouble +respecting the event, not having sufficient force for his defence, as +many on whom he most relied had gone over to the enemy. Even those +who remained served against their inclination, more especially the +inhabitants of Cochin, who abhorred our people, and said openly that +it were proper the rajah should either deliver them up to the zamorin +or send them away from Cochin, to avoid the impending war. Many of +the inhabitants of Cochin deserted the place for fear of the +consequences. The members of the Portuguese factory were much alarmed +by all these circumstances, and requested permission from the rajah +to withdraw to Cananor, where they might remain in safety till the +arrival of the next fleet from Portugal; hoping by this means to +remove the cause of war, and to satisfy the subjects of the rajah. +Trimumpara was displeased at this request, as not reposing sufficient +confidence in his word, and declared he would rather forfeit his +kingdom, and even his life, than deliver them up to the zamorin or +any other who sought to injure them; and that, although he might lose +Cochin in the war, there still were places of sufficient strength in +which to keep them safe till reinforcements should arrive from +Portugal. That although the zamorin had a great army, yet victory did +not always follow numbers, as a few valiant men were often victorious +over great odds, especially having justice on their side. He +therefore desired the factory to remain, and to pray God to give him +the victory. The Portuguese now offered to give him such aid as their +small number would allow; but he declined allowing them to expose +themselves to any danger on the present occasion, as his credit +depended upon the preservation of their lives, that they might +witness, for his faithful adherence to the treaty of amity which he +had formed with their nation. Upon this he placed them under the +safeguard of certain naires in whom he had confidence. After this, +the rajah called all his nobles into his presence, together with the +chief naires, who were the cause of all the murmurs against the +Portuguese, and addressed the assemblage to the following effect:</p> +<p>"I am much concerned to find that truth and loyalty should be +wanting among men of your quality. I do not wonder at the present +misconduct of the lower orders, who are often constrained by their +poverty and wretchedness to commit all manner of wickedness. But that +naires, who have always been noted for fidelity, should desire me to +forfeit the promise which I have made, to the captain-general in +behalf of the Portuguese, to defend them to the utmost of my power +against all violence as my own subjects, astonishes and distresses me +beyond measure. Under these assurances of protection, which were +given with your consent, these men were left in my city; and yet, +because you see the zamorin coming against me with more men than I +have, you would have me to break my promise. Were I so unjust, you of +all men ought to abhor me. If you dwelt with any sovereign on the +assurance of his word, how would you conceive of him, if he were to +treat you as you would now have me to act by these Christians? Is it +because you are afraid of the great power of the zamorin? Be assured +it were better for us all to die in the discharge of our duty, and +the preservation of our promise, than to live dishonoured. To me no +evil can be greater than to break my word, nor can there be a greater +dishonour to yourselves than to be the subjects of a false and +treacherous king. These Christians have brought much profit to me and +my country, and the zamorin might have kept them in his own city, if +he had permitted their factory to settle there in peace. Were it his +intention to drive the Christians out of India, and to make war on +all who receive them into their dominions, he ought to have begun +this war with the rajah of Cananor: But his cause of war is the envy +he has conceived at seeing me benefited by the trade which he has +lost through his own misconduct, and because he believes in his pride +that I am unable to withstand. But I trust in God and the justness of +my cause, that with your assistance, I shall obtain the victory, and +shall be able to protect the Christians, and preserve my honour +inviolate." This speech had great effect upon the assembled naires, +who were astonished at the constancy and resolution of the rajah. +They all therefore craved pardon for the fears they had entertained, +and promised to live and die in his service. The rajah immediately +called the factor and the rest of the Portuguese into his presence, +to whom he gave an account of all that had taken place between him +and the naires; and named before them the prince <i>Naramuhin</i> [3], +his brother and next heir, as general of the army which was destined +to act against the forces of the zamorin, commanding every one to +obey him in every respect as if he were himself present. Naramuhin +accordingly marched with 5500 naires, and entrenched himself at the +ford which forms the only entry by land into the island of Cochin, +and which is only knee- deep at low water.</p> +<blockquote>[3] In Astley this prince is called the nephew of the +rajah of Cochin.-- Astl. I. 55.</blockquote> +<p>When the zamorin received notice of the army of Cochin having +taken post at this ford, he was somewhat afraid, more especially as +he knew Naramuhin was considered to be the bravest and most fortunate +warrior in Malabar. He therefore made a fresh attempt to induce the +rajah of Cochin to accede to his demands, of delivering up the +Portuguese and their goods, otherwise threatening to conquer his +dominions, and to put all the inhabitants to the sword. Although the +rajah of Cochin was quite sensible of the inferiority of his military +force, and was convinced what the zamorin threatened might readily +happen, he yet determined to remain firm to his engagements, and sent +the following answer:</p> +<p>"If you had required with civility what you have proudly commanded +me, I should not have esteemed your valour lessened by your courtesy: +For with men of wisdom and power there is no need for insolent +vaunts. I have not as yet so sinned against God, that I should humble +myself to vain boasting, or think that he should grant you the +victory over me and those brave men who fight on my side. In spite of +all your pride, I trust even with the small number I have to defend +me in my just quarrel, that I shall be enabled to overcome you and +all my enemies. However much you may have practised deceit and +injustice, it has ever been my rule to avoid shame and dishonour, and +I will never consent to deliver up the Christians or their goods, +which I have engaged to defend."</p> +<p>The zamorin was much offended by this answer from the rajah of +Cochin, and vowed to destroy his whole country in revenge: Leaving, +therefore, the isle of Repelim on the last day of March, he entered +on the territories of Cochin, yet refrained from doing any injury, as +he now occupied those parts which belonged to the chieftains who had +joined him against their own sovereign. On the 2d of March, the army +of the zamorin made an attempt to force a passage by the ford which +was defended by prince Naramuhin; yet, in spite of all his prodigious +superiority of numbers, he was forced to retire with considerable +loss. Disappointed in this first essay, the zamorin encamped close by +the ford, and sent the lord of Repelim next day with a still stronger +force than had been employed in the first assault, to attempt forcing +the passage. He even joined several armed paraws in this attack; but +Naramuhin made a resolute defence, in which he was bravely seconded +by Laurenzo Moreno and several other Portuguese, and effectually +resisted every effort of the zamorins troops, who were obliged to +retreat with much loss. Several such assaults were made on the ford, +in all of which the zamorin lost many men, and was constantly +repulsed, insomuch that he became fearful of a sinister end to his +unjust enterprise, and even repented of having begun the war. He +sent, however, a fresh message to the rajah, requiring him to deliver +up the Christians as a preliminary of peace. But the rajah replied, +that as he had refused to do so unjust an action when he had some +reason to dread the superior power of the zamorin, it was absurd to +expect any such thing now, when the advantage in the war was +evidently of his side. He then advised the zamorin to beware of +continuing the war, as he would not now satisfy himself with defence, +but even hoped to give him a signal overthrow. And this certainly had +been the case, if the subjects of the rajah had not shamefully +deserted him in this war and given assistance to the enemy. The +zamorin almost despaired of success, and would have given over the +enterprize, if he had not been advised by some of his chiefs to +assail several other towns belonging to the dominions of Cochin, so +as to distract the attention of Naramuhin, and to weaken his force by +obliging him to send detachments for their defence. But that brave +prince provided against every emergency, and made so judicious a +disposition of his forces, that he repulsed every effort of the +enemy, and slew many of their men.</p> +<p>Foiled in every attempt with severe loss, by the bravery and +excellent dispositions of Prince Naramuhin, the zamorin corrupted the +paymaster of the troops of Cochin, who changed the usual order of +payment which had been daily made in the camp, and obliged the +soldiers to come up to Cochin for that purpose. Naramuhin was obliged +to submit to this arrangement, by giving leave to the naires to go +for their wages, yet charged them punctually to return to the camp +before day. But the treacherous paymaster kept them waiting till +after day-light, by which means the prince was left with very few +troops to defend the ford. Taking advantage of this concerted +stratagem, the zamorin made an assault upon the ford with his whole +force by sea and land, and constrained Naramuhin to retire with his +small band into a grove of palm trees, where he was surrounded by the +whole army of Calicut, yet fought the whole day against such terrible +odds with the utmost resolution, several times throwing his enemies +into disorder, of whom many were slain. But at length, overpowered by +numbers, he and two of his cousins who fought along with him were +slain, together with most of his faithful followers.</p> +<p>When this melancholy event was announced to the rajah of Cochin, +he fainted from extreme grief, and was for some time thought to have +actually expired. At this time, the naires were much exasperated +against our men, to whom they attributed the overthrow and death of +prince Naramuhin, and the desperate situation of their country, and +seemed much inclined to have put the Portuguese to death, or to have +delivered them up to the zamorin. On the recovery of the rajah, and +learning the designs of his people against our men, he called the +Portuguese into his presence; he gave them assurance that even this +reverse of his affairs should not alter his resolution of protecting +them, both against the zamorin and his own subjects. He then +addressed his assembled naires, urging them not to stain his honour +and their own by injuring the Portuguese, whom he and they had sworn +to protect. He exhorted them to persevere honourably and bravely in +defending their country and preserving their honour inviolate to the +Christians, and comforted them with the assurance that the Portuguese +fleet would soon arrive with sufficient reinforcements to drive out +the zamorin and to restore him to his dominions. In the meantime, he +proposed that they should retire with what force remained, into the +isle of Vaipi, which was of difficult access; and where they could +defend themselves till the arrival of the Portuguese fleet, more +especially as the winter was at hand, which would stop the progress +of the war for some time. The naires were astonished at the +resolution of their sovereign, and promised faithfully to obey his +commands in all things.</p> +<p>The zamorin made a new attempt to shake the resolution of the +rajah in his present adversity, by offering peace on condition of +delivering up the Portuguese and their goods; which the rajah +rejected with disdain as he had done all his former overtures. On +this the zamorin gave orders to destroy the whole country with fire +and sword, on which intelligence most of the inhabitants of Cochin +withdrew to other places. There were at this time in Cochin two +Milanese lapidaries belonging to the factory, named John Maria and +Pedro Antonio, who had been brought to India by Vasco de Gama. These +men deserted to the zamorin, to whom they conveyed intelligence of +the consternation which reigned among the inhabitants of Cochin, and +of the small number of men that remained with the rajah. These men +also made offer to the zamorin to make ordnance for him resembling +those of the Portuguese, which they afterwards did as will appear in +the sequel of this history, and for which service they were highly +rewarded. The zamorin now moved forwards with his army to take +possession of Cochin, and was resisted for some time by the rajah, +who was himself slightly wounded. But finding it impossible any +farther to resist against such prodigious odds, he withdrew to the +strong island of Vaipi, carrying all our men along with him and every +thing belonging to our factory. The zamorin, on taking possession of +the deserted city of Cochin, ordered it to be set on fire. He then +sent a part of his army against the isle of Vaipi, which was +valiantly defended by the rajah and his men and in which defence the +members of our factory contributed to the best of their ability. But +the winter coming on, and bad weather setting in, the zamorin was +obliged to desist for the present season, and withdrew his army to +Cranganor with a determination to renew the war in the ensuing +spring, leaving a strong detachment in the island of Cochin, which he +ordered to throw up entrenchments for their defence.</p> +<p>After his shameful desertion of Cochin, Vincente Sodre went with +his fleet towards the kingdom of Cambaya; meaning to capture the rich +ships of the Moors which trade to India from the Red Sea. He there +took five ships, in which in ready money only was found to the value +of 200,000 <i>perdaos</i> . Most of the Moors were slain in the +battle, and the ships burnt. From Cambaya he sailed for Cape +Guardafu; and as his ships were foul, he proposed to lay them aground +to be careened at the islands of <i>Curia Muria</i> [4]. Sodre arrived +there with his squadron on the 20th April 1503; and though these +islands were well inhabited by Moors, he resolved to venture on land, +considering that these islanders were by no means warlike, and stood +in fear of our men. The islanders accordingly behaved in a peaceable +manner, and sold our people such provisions as they had to spare. +Sodre laid one of his caravels aground for repair, on which he was +informed by the Moors that their coast was subject to violent storms +in the month of May, during which no ships were able to keep the sea, +but were unavoidably driven on shore and wrecked. Wherefore they +advised him strenuously to remove to the other side of the island, +which would then be a sure defence against the storm, after which had +blown over he might return to their part of the coast. Sodre made +light of their advice, conceiving they meant him some harm; and told +them that the ships of the Moors having only wooden anchors, might be +easily driven ashore, whereas his anchors were of iron and would hold +fast. Pedro Raphael, Hernan Rodriguez Badarsas, and Diego Perez were +convinced of the council of the Moors being good, and therefore +quitted these islands on the last day of April; but Sodre would not +listen to their advice and remained with his brother at Curia Muria. +According to the prediction of the Moors, a violent storm came on +early in May, by which the two remaining ships were driven from their +anchors and dashed to pieces. Vincente Sodre and his brother, with +many others lost their lives, and nothing whatever was saved out of +these two ships. The loss of these two brothers was considered as a +punishment of Providence, for basely abandoning the rajah of Cochin +and the factory in their imminent danger.</p> +<blockquote>[4] These are a cluster of islands, otherwise called +Chartan and Martan, on the coast of Yemen, between the latitudes of +17° and 18° north.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Those who were saved returned towards Cochin to succour our +people, and chose Pedro de Tayde[5] as their general. In their +passage from Curia Muria towards Cochin, they encountered several +severe storms, and were often in great danger of perishing. Being +unable to reach Cochin on account of the winds, they were forced to +take refuge in the island of Anchediva. A few days after their +arrival, a ship came there from Portugal, commanded by Antonio del +Campo, who had left Lisbon alone some time after Vasco de Gama, and +had been much delayed on his voyage in consequence of the death of +his pilot. He had encountered severe weather on the coast, and was +forced after much trouble and danger to take refuge in Anchediva. The +united squadron wintered in this island, where they suffered severe +hardships from scarcity of provisions.</p> +<blockquote>[5] Of the four officers mentioned in the text, three are +enumerated at the commencement of the former voyage of De Gama as +commanders of separate vessels. The fourth, Badarsas, is not in that +list of captains, and may have been appointed captain of Vincente +Sodres flag- ship.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION VII.</p> +<p> <i>Voyage of Alonso and Francisco de Albuquerque to India in 1503; +being the fifth of the Portuguese Expeditions to the East +Indies.</i> </p> +<p>Is the year 1503, supposing that the admiral Don Vasco de Gama had +quietly settled factories in Cochin and Cananor, the king of Portugal +did not consider it necessary to send any great fleet to India. He +therefore determined to send only six ships in two separate +squadrons, under separate generals. Alonso de Albuquerque, who was +afterwards governor- general or viceroy of India, commanded one of +these squadrons, having under him as captains, Duarte Pacheco and +Hernan Martinez Mascarennas, who is said to have died during the +voyage. The other squadron, likewise of three ships, was under the +command of Francisco de Albuquerque, cousin to Alonso, having as +captains Nicholas Coello and Pedro Vas de la Vega, the former of whom +sailed under De Gama in the first discovery of India. This latter +squadron sailed from Lisbon fifteen days after the other, yet arrived +first in India. Both squadrons encountered severe storms during the +voyage, in which the ship commanded by De la Vega was lost. Francisco +de Albuquerque, and Nicholas Coello, arrived at Anchediva in the +month of August, where they found De Tayde and the other captains who +had wintered there, as related in the former section. They here +received notice of the war between the zamorin and the rajah of +Cochin, and of the sinister events which had occurred at that place; +for which reason Francisco stood over with the whole fleet, now +consisting of six sail, to Cananor, where he expected to receive more +exact intelligence of the state of affairs in Cochin. They were here +received with great joy by the Portuguese factory; and even the rajah +of Cananor came on board the generals ship in person, and gave him a +distinct recital of what had happened at Cochin, and of the present +situation of Triumpara.</p> +<p>Alonso de Albuquerque lost no time in going to Cochin, where he +arrived on the night of Saturday the 2d of September 1503. +Immediately on his approach, the troops of Calicut who guarded the +entrenchments thrown up by the zamorin, abandoned their posts in the +island of Cochin and fled to Cranganor, according to orders to that +effect from the zamorin, who had received notice of the arrival of +our fleet at Cananor. On Sunday morning Francisco came to anchor +close to Cochin, when he was joyfully received by the inhabitants, +playing on various instruments of music, and was soon afterwards +visited by the Portuguese factor, who brought him a message from the +rajah. On the Monday morning, leaving his ships in good order, +Francisco took several boats well armed, and went to the island of +Vaipi to visit the rajah, ordering two caravels to follow for +security, in case of any of the Calicut paraws making their +appearance. The rajah received our general with infinite +satisfaction, greeting them with the exclamation, Portugal! Portugal! +as soon as our boats were within hail; which was answered by our +people shouting out, Cochin! Cochin! and down with the zamorin! On +landing, the rajah embraced Francisco de Albuquerque with tears in +his eyes, saying he only desired to live till restored to his +dominions, that his subjects might be satisfied of his just conduct +in suffering so much for the service of the king of Portugal. In the +name of that sovereign, Francisco gave hearty thanks to Triumpara for +his fidelity, and promised him ample revenge on his enemies. And as +his finances were much reduced, he made him a present of 10,000 +crowns from the chest belonging to the expedition, to serve his +present necessities, until he might be again able to draw the rents +of his own dominions. This gift was exceedingly acceptable to the +rajah, whose affairs were then at a very low ebb; and gave much +satisfaction to the natives, who were by it greatly reconciled to the +protection which their rajah had given to our men.</p> +<p>The rajah was immediately brought back in triumph to Cochin, amid +the joyful acclamations of his subjects, who henceforwards treated +our men with esteem and respect. The news of the rajahs return to +Cochin, and of the money which had been given him by our general, was +speedily communicated to the zamorin; who, in expectation of the +renewal of the war, sent orders to his caymals or governors on the +frontiers towards Cochin to make every preparation for defence. On +the very day on which the rajah returned to Cochin, Francisco de +Albuquerque resolved to commence hostilities by an attack on the +island directly over against Cochin, where he found the inhabitants +quite unprepared and off their guard, as they had no idea of being so +soon attacked: In this unprepared state, a great number of the +Calicut troops were slain, and several of the towns on the island +destroyed, after which the Portuguese returned to their ships without +loss. Next day Francisco made a fresh assault on the same island with +six hundred men, and was opposed by the caymal or governor for the +zamorin, with a force of two thousand nayres, part of whom were +spearmen, but the greater number armed with bows and arrows, and some +with swords and targets. After some resistance, but in which none of +them were hurt, our people made good their landing, and galled the +Indians so sore with their cross-bows, that they soon fled. The +Portuguese pursued quite across the island, and forced their enemies +to continue their flight across the water, leaving many of their men +behind both killed and wounded. Having now no enemy to oppose them in +the island, the Portuguese laid it entirely waste, and burnt all the +towns and villages it contained.</p> +<p>Adjoining to this island there lay another, +named <i>Charanaipin</i> [1], which belonged to a caymal who was +subject to the rajah of Cochin, but had revolted to the zamorin at +the commencement of the war. From some spies employed by the rajah of +Cochin, it was understood that this caymal had a force of three +thousand nayres, seven hundred of whom were archers, and forty were, +armed with matchlocks[2]; besides which all their towns were well +fortified with trenches. He had likewise several paraws provided with +ordnance, with which he was supplied by the zamorin, and these were +stationed in one of the harbours of the island, to defend it against +the Portuguese. Notwithstanding all these preparations, of which he +was well informed, Francisco Albuquerque went against this island the +day after he had reduced the former, and commenced his attack against +the harbour in which the paraws were stationed. The enemy were soon +driven by our ordnance from their boats, yet many of them continued +in the water up to their girdles to resist the landing of our troops, +annoying them as much as possible with stones, spears, and arrows. +They were at length driven from the water by our ordnance, but +rallied again on the shore, and bravely resisted our people in +landing for a long time. They were at length driven to take shelter +in a grove of palm trees, in which they defended themselves for a +short space, and were at the last driven to seek for safety in a +disorderly flight, in which they were pursued by our men. In the +pursuit, Pedro de Lares, who was constable to Francisco de +Albuquerque, being separated from the rest, was attacked by three +nayres all at once. One of these let fly an arrow which hit Pedro on +his breast- plate but without hurting him; on which Pedro levelled +his piece and shot him dead. The second nayre he likewise slew by +another shot. The third nayre wounded him in the leg with a weapon +called a <i>gomya</i> , and then endeavoured to run away, but Pedro +killed him, with his sword. On the enemy being put to flight, +Francisco divided his forces into three bodies, two of them +Portuguese, and the third composed of nayres in the service of the +rajah of Cochin, and marched all over the island plundering and +burning the towns and villages without resistance.</p> +<blockquote>[1] This seems to be the island named Chirapipil on a +former occasion.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[2] Thus I understand the expression in Lichefilds +translation of Castaneda, "Forty were armed with, +shot."--E.</blockquote> +<p>While thus employed, a considerable number of paraws arrived with +reinforcements from Calicut, from which a powerful body of nayres +landed in that part of the island where Duarte Pacheco happened to be +posted with a very inferior force, and had assuredly destroyed him +and his men, but that Francisco de Albuquerque came very opportunely +to his aid. Finding greater resistance than he expected, and fearing +lest the caymal might attack him in the rear, while engaged in front +with the nayres of Calicut, Francisco detached a part of his troops +under Nicholas Coello, assisted by Antonio del Campo and Pedro de +Tayde, to assault the residence of the caymal, who was slain bravely +fighting in its defence. At this place one of our men was slain and +eighteen wounded. In the mean time, Francisco de Albuquerque and +Duarte Pacheco defeated the reinforcements from Calicut, and forced +them to take refuge on board their paraws, leaving many of their men +slain and wounded on the shore. After this signal victory, by which +the greater part of the three thousand nayres belonging to the caymal +and many of those from Calicut were slain, Francisco de Albuquerque +conferred the honour of knighthood on several of his officers who had +signalized themselves on the occasion. He then wasted the whole +island with fire and sword.</p> +<p>Francisco determined in the next place, to attack the country of +the lord of Repelim, for which purpose he departed with his troops by +water from Cochin, and reached a town in that territory, four leagues +from Cochin, about eight o'clock next morning. Near two thousand +nayres, five hundred of whom were armed with bows and arrows, were +stationed, on the beach of the isle of Repelim to repel this attack; +but were soon forced by our ordnance to retire into a grove of palms, +on which Francisco landed with his troops, the van being led by +Nicholas Coello. The enemy resisted for some time under the shelter +of the trees, and wounded some of our people; but were at length +forced to take to flight, after losing a good many of their men, who +were shot by our cross-bows and <i>calivers</i> [3]. Our troops +followed the nayres, who took refuge in the towns of the island, in +which much greater slaughter was made of the enemy than in the field, +as they were crowded together and more exposed to our shot. On taking +possession of the town, Francisco gave it up to be plundered by the +nayres of Cochin, who assisted him on this expedition, that they +might not consider the conduct of the Portuguese on this occasion +proceeded from any inclination for plundering the country, but from a +desire to revenge the injuries which had been done to their own +rajah.</p> +<blockquote>[3] Caliver is the old name of the matchlock or carabine, +the precursor of the modern firelock or musket.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On his return from this victory, Francisco was joyfully received +by the rajah of Cochin, who desired him to desist from any farther +operations against the enemy, as he considered himself sufficiently +revenged. But Francisco requested his permission to continue the war, +as he was still unsatisfied till he had taken effectual vengeance on +the zamorin, and accounted it no trouble to fight in the service of +the rajah. He seized, however, the present opportunity of the high +favour in which he stood with the rajah, to solicit permission for +constructing a fort at Cochin, for the protection of the Portuguese +factory during the absence of the ships. This request was immediately +complied with; the rajah even offered to be at the sole charge, and +Francisco lost no time in proceeding to construct the intended fort. +As there were neither stones, lime, nor sand to be procured, it was +necessary to build the castle of timber; which the rajah ordered to +be immediately provided for the purpose, and brought to the spot +appointed, which was close to the river side, as best adapted for +resisting the assault of the Calicut fleet in any future attempt +against Cochin. The rajah sent likewise a great number of his +subjects to carry on the work; saying that our people had already had +enough to do in the operations of the war: But Francisco commanded +our people to work in constructing the fortifications, the +foundations of which were laid on the 26th September 1503. The +inhabitants of Cochin were astonished at the diligence with which our +people laboured at this work, saying there were no such men in the +world, as they were equally good at all things.</p> +<p>On the 30th September, four days after the commencement of the +fort, Alonso de Albuquerque arrived with his ships at Cochin, having +been delayed on his voyage by severe storms and contrary winds, yet +brought all his men with him in excellent health. Francisco was much +pleased at his arrival; and a portion of the fort being allotted to +those newly arrived, it was soon finished. Though built of timber, +this castle was as strong and handsome, as if it had been constructed +of stone and lime. It was of a square form, each face being eighteen +yards, with bulwarks or bastions at each corner mounted with +ordnance. The walls were made of two rows of palm trees and other +strong timber, firmly set in the ground, and bound together with iron +hoops and large nails, the space between the two rows of timber being +rammed full of earth and sand, and the whole surrounded by a ditch +always full of water[4]. The day after this fort was finished, which +was named Manuel in honour of the king of Portugal, the captain- +general with all his people made a solemn procession, in which the +vicar of the fort bore the crucifix under a canopy carried by the +captains of the fleet, preceded by trumpets and other instruments of +music. The fort was solemnly blessed, and consecrated by the +celebration of mass; after which friar Gaston preached a sermon, in +which he exhorted his hearers to be thankful to God, who had +permitted the inhabitants of the small western kingdom of Portugal to +construct a fortress in this distant region, among so many enemies of +the Catholic faith. He expressed a hope that this might be the +forerunner of many other establishments of a similar nature, to the +advancement of the true religion among the heathen, and the glory of +Portugal. He likewise desired his hearers to keep always in mind the +high obligations they owed to the rajah for the good service he had +rendered to the king of Portugal on this occasion. A faithful report +was carried to the rajah of this part of the discourse, who was much +gratified, and gave thanks for the same to the two generals.</p> +<blockquote>[4] A very ordinary precaution in India, to guard the +passage of the wet ditch in fortified places, both against desertion +and surprise, is by keeping numbers of crocodiles in the +water.--E.</blockquote> +<p>After completing the fort, the Portuguese renewed the war, and +made an attack on two towns belonging to the lord of Repelim on the +coast, about five leagues from Cochin, having learned from spies that +they were but slightly garrisoned. On this expedition the generals +took a body of seven hundred men, and departing from Cochin about two +hours before day, they arrived at their destination about nine +o'clock next morning. These towns had a population of six thousand +people, besides children, and were only defended by three hundred +nayres, all bowmen. Alonso de Albuquerque with part of the forces +landed at the nearest town, and Francisco with the remainder of the +forces at the other, which was only about a cannon-shot distant from +the former. In the first town the enemy was completely surprised and +run away, and the place was set on fire without resistance. On seeing +the people run away, our men pursued and slew many of the fugitives, +and when wearied of the pursuit they plundered and destroyed the +country. In the mean time the alarm was spread over the +neighbourhood, and about 6000 nayres assembled, who made an attack +upon our men as they were embarking, so that they were in great +danger: In particular, Duarte Pacheco, not being able to find his +boat in the place where he had left it, was closely pursued; and +though he and his company defended themselves valiantly, and killed +many of the enemy, eight of his men were wounded with arrows. So +superior was the number of the enemy on this occasion, that Pacheco +and his men had assuredly been all slain, if the rest of the troops +had not again landed to his rescue; on which the enemy lost heart and +run away, leaving the field of battle strewed over with their slain. +After the defeat of the nayres, our men set fire to fifteen paraws, +which were drawn up on the beach, and carried away seven which were +afloat.</p> +<p>The lord of Repelim was much grieved at the destruction of his +towns; and being afraid of our people making an attack on another +about a league farther up the river, he sent a strong detachment of +his nayres for its security. The generals, however, resolved to +follow up their victory, and to do all the evil in their power to the +territories of this lord. For this purpose, after allowing their men +some time for rest, they departed about midnight, while it was still +so dark that they could not see each other in the boats, expecting to +come upon their enemies by surprise by dawn of next morning. The +boats in which Alonso de Albuquerque and his party were embarked got +considerably a-head of the rest, and arrived at the town which it was +intended to attack a good while before day. Weary of waiting for the +rest, he landed his men, and gave orders to set the town on fire. At +first they were successful in this rash enterprise, as the ordinary +inhabitants were a cowardly unarmed people. But the garrison of above +two thousand nayres, having assembled on the alarm, attacked Alonso +and his men with great fury and forced them to retreat to their +boats, after killing one man and wounding several others of the +party, which only consisted originally of forty men. Alonso and his +soldiers would not have been able to make good their retreat, if the +sailors who remained in charge of the boats had not fired off a +falcon[5], or small piece of ordnance, on which the nayres gave over +the pursuit. By this time day broke, and Francisco de Albuquerque +approached with the rest of the boats; and seeing the perilous +situation of Alonso, he commanded the ordnance in the boats to be +played off against the enemy, on which they fled from the shore. At +this time Pacheco, who was somewhat astern of the rest, observed a +great number of armed nayres marching along a narrow passage to +reinforce the others at the town; and brought his boat so near the +pass, that he completely stopt their passage that way. The whole of +our men were now landed, and soon constrained the enemy to take +flight with considerable loss; after which they set the town on fire, +but did not think it prudent to pursue the runaways, as they were not +acquainted with the country.</p> +<blockquote>[5] A falcon or faulcon is described as a small cannon of +two pound shot. The following enumeration of the ancient English +ordnance, from Sir William Monsons Naval Tracts, in the reigns of +Elizabeth and James the First, is given in Churchills Collection, +Vol. III. p. 803. I suspect the weight of the basilisk, marked 400 +pounds in this list, may be a typographical error for 4000.--E. +<pre> + Names. Bore. Weight. Shot. Powder. Random + inches. libs. libs. libs. paces. + Cannon-royal 8-1/2 8000 66 30 1930 + Cannon 8 6000 60 27 2000 + Cannon-serpentine 7 5500 53-1/2 25 2000 + Bastard cannon 7 4500 41 20 1800 + Demi-cannon 6-3/4 4000 30-1/2 18 1700 + Cannon-petro 6 3000 24-1/2 14 1600 + Culverin 5-1/2 4500 17-1/2 12 2500 + Basilisk 5 400* 15 10 3000 + Demi-culverin 4 3400 9-1/2 8 2500 + Bastard culverin 4 3000 5 5-3/4 1700 + Sacar 3-1/2 1400 5-1/2 5-1/2 1700 + Minion 3-1/2 1000 4 4 1500 + Faulcon 2-1/2 660 2 3-1/2 1500 + Falconet 2 500 1-1/2 3 1500 + Serpentine 1-1/2 400 3/4 1-1/2 1400 + Rabanet 1 300 1/2 1/3 1000 +</pre></blockquote> +<p>After this exploit, Duarte Pacheco and Pedro de Tayde went with +their divisions to destroy another town at some distance, in their +way towards which they fought and defeated eighteen paraws belonging +to the zamorin, and then set the town on fire. From thence they stood +over to the island of <i>Cambalan</i> , the caymal of which was an +enemy of the Cochin rajah, where they destroyed a large town. From +that place, Pacheco went with five armed paraws of Cochin to burn +another town, where he met with considerable resistance, and slew a +great number of the enemy, seven of his own people being wounded. +After setting the town on fire, he retired towards Cochin, and was +forced to fight with thirteen armed paraws of Calicut, which he +defeated with the assistance of Pedro de Tayde and Antonio del Campo, +who fortunately joined him in this emergency. On their defeat, the +Calient paraws retired into a creek, where one of them ran aground +and was taken by Pacheco; but our men being worn out with hard +rowing, were unable to pursue the rest, and returned to Cochin. On +receiving an account of these transactions, the rajah was much +satisfied with the revenge which had been taken of his enemies, and +requested of our generals to discontinue the war, to which, however, +they were by no means inclined.</p> +<p>On account of the war, no pepper was brought from the country to +sell at the factory in Cochin, neither dared the merchants to go out +in search of that commodity, insomuch that the factory had only been +able to procure 300 <i>bahars</i> [6], and the factor requested the +generals to go in quest of some which was to be procured at a place +about nine leagues from Cochin. For this purpose the two generals and +all their captains set out from Cochin under night, that their +intentions might not be discovered by the enemy. On the way Pacheco +destroyed a whole island, in which he fought against six thousand of +the enemy with his own company only, and the two generals put +thirty-four paraws to flight. After this Pacheco and del Campo +destroyed a town on the continent, where they defeated two thousand +nayres, many of whom were slain, without any loss on their side. +After this, the generals sent on the <i>tony</i> [7] for the pepper, +which carried such merchandize as was meant to be given in exchange; +and for its protection Pacheco and three other captains accompanied +it with two hundred men, and five hundred Cochin paraws[8]. In +passing a narrow strait or river, our people were assailed from the +banks by a vast number of the natives armed with bows and arrows, but +were defended by their targets, which were fixed on the gunwales of +their boats. Leaving one of his captains with fifty Portuguese t +protect the tony, Pacheco with the other two captains and the troops +belonging to the rajah, made towards the shore, firing off his +falcons against the enemy, whom he forced to quit the shore with much +loss; after which he landed with his troops, most of whom were armed +with hand-guns. The enemy, who were full two thousand strong, +resisted for a quarter of an hour, but at length took to flight after +having many slain. Pacheco pursued them to a village, where the +fugitives rallied and were joined by many nayres, insomuch that they +now amounted to six thousand men, and our people were in great +jeopardy, as the enemy endeavoured to surround them, and to intercept +their return to the boats. But our men defended themselves manfully, +and fought their way back to the shore, where the natives divided on +each hand, being afraid of the shot of the falcons, which slew great +numbers of them, and our men re-embarked without having a single man +killed or wounded.</p> +<blockquote>[6] Two weights of that name are described as used in +India for the sale of pepper and other commodities, the small and the +large bahar; the former consisting of three, and the latter of four +and a half peculs. The pecul is said to weigh 5 1/2 pounds +avoirdupois: Consequently the smaller bahar is equal to 16 1/2, and +the larger to 24 3/4 English pounds. A little farther on in the +present work of Castaneda, 4000 bahars are said to equal 1200 +quintals; which would make the bahar of Cochin equal to thirty +Portuguese pounds.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] This is a species of bark of some burthen, then used +on the Malabar coast.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[8] Such is the expression of Lichefild; which I suspect +ought to have been 500 nayres of Cochin in paraws.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The zamorin was much displeased at the successes of our people +against his confederates, and by the loss of many of his paraws in +these several actions, and was even afraid lest the Portuguese might +eventually dispossess him of his dominions. He used every exertion +therefore to prevent us from procuring pepper, being in hopes, if our +ships were constrained to return to Portugal without loading, that +they would come no more back to India. He used his influence +therefore even with the merchants of Cochin to refuse supplying +pepper to our ships, which they did so effectually, under pretence of +the war, that, in spite of the influence of the rajah, and +notwithstanding high offers of reward from Francisco de Albuquerque, +the factory had only been able to procure 1200 quintals or 4000 +bahars[9] of pepper; and even that was got with hard fighting, some +hurt to our own men, and infinite loss of lives to the enemy. Unable +to procure any more pepper in Cochin, Alonso de Albuquerque went to +Coulan in search of that commodity, accompanied by Pedro de Tayde and +Antonio del Campo, knowing that the government of that state was +desirous of having one of our factories established in their city, +and had solicited both Pedro Alvares Cabral and the lord admiral De +Gama to that effect; and Alonso was determined to go to war with the +people of Coulan unless they gave him loading for his ships.</p> +<blockquote>[9] The quantity in the text is probably exaggerated +considerably, as only a few pages before, the factory at Cochin is +said to have only been able to procure 300 quintals.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Coulan is twelve leagues from Cochin, and twenty-four from Cape +Comorin. Before the building of Calicut, Coulan was the principal +city of Malabar, and the port of greatest trade on that coast. Its +buildings, more especially the temples and shrines of their idols, +are larger and more splendid than those of Cochin. The haven is +excellent, the country is well stored with provisions, and the +condition of the people resembles in all things what has been +formerly said of the inhabitants of Calicut. The inhabitants are +idolatrous Malabars, having among them many rich Moorish merchants, +more especially since the war broke out between us and the zamorin, +as many of these merchants had left Calicut to reside at Coulan. They +trade with Coromandel, Ceylon, the Maldive islands, Bengal, Pegu, +Camatia, and Malava. The rajah or king of this state rules over an +extensive kingdom, in which there are many rich cities and several +good harbours; by which means he has a large revenue, and is able to +maintain a great military force, but the men are mostly of a low +stature: He entertains in his palace a guard of three hundred women, +armed with bows and arrows, who are very expert archers, and they +bind up their breasts very tight with bandages of silk and linen, +that they may not stand in the way of using their bows. This rajah +usually resides in a city named Calle, and is generally at war with +the king of Narsinga[10].</p> +<blockquote>[10] In Astleys Collection, I. p. 55. Coulan or Koulan is +said to have been governed at this time by a <i>queen</i> or rana. By +Narsinga Bisnagar is to be understood, which was one of the +sovereignties into which the Decan or southern peninsula of India was +then divided--E.</blockquote> +<p>In the city of Coulan, which is governed by certain officers or +aldermen, there is a church which was built by the apostle St Thomas, +who came here to preach the Catholic faith, and made many converts +both among the idolaters and others, who have handed down the +Christian belief from generation to generation, so that there are at +least twelve thousand families of Christians scattered abroad in the +country, in which they have churches in many places. The king who +then ruled in Coulan, being much displeased at the numbers of his +subjects who were converted to Christianity, banished St Thomas from +his dominions, who then went to a city called Malapur or Meliapour, +on the coast of the dominions of Narsinga, and was followed by the +Christians of Coulan, and even by many of the idolaters. He is said +to have retired into a solitude in the mountains, where he died, and +whence his body was removed for interment in a vault of the church he +had built at Coulan. This church is now deserted and entirely +overgrown with trees and bushes, and is kept by a poor Moorish +zealot, who subsists on alms which he receives from Christian +pilgrims, and even some of the idolaters give alms at this tomb.</p> +<p>On the arrival of Alonso de Albuquerque at the harbour of Coulan, +the governors of the city came on board to visit him, and settled a +treaty with him, in which it was stipulated that we were to have a +factory in the city, and that they should provide a loading with all +possible dispatch for the three ship he had along with him. While one +of his ships was taking in a lading in the harbour, the other two +always kept out at sea watching all ships that passed, and obliging +every one they could descry to come and give an account of themselves +to Albuquerque as captain- general under the king of Portugal. He +offered no injury to any of these, unless to such as belonged to the +Moors of the Red Sea, all of which that fell in his way were first +plundered and then burnt, in revenge for the injuries they had done +to the Portuguese. When the house for the factory was finished, and +the ships laden, Alonso left there Antonio de Sola as factor, with +two clerks, Rodrigo Aranso and Lopo Rabelo, an interpreter named +Medera, and two friars to serve as chaplains, together with other +assistants, being twenty in all; after which he returned to +Cochin.</p> +<p>About this time Francisco de Albuquerque received a message from + <i>Cosebequin</i> , a friendly Moor of Calicut who has been formerly +mentioned, giving him notice that the zamorin was determined to make +another attack on Cochin so soon as the Portuguese fleet had departed +for Europe, and to fortify it in such a manner as should prevent them +from having any farther intercourse with that country. With this view +the zamorin had entered into treaties with all the rajahs and leading +nayres or nobles of Malabar, and it was even rumoured that those of +Cananor and Coulan had secretly entered into terms with him against +the Portuguese and the rajah of Cochin[11]. He said farther that the +Moorish merchants had promised large assistance for carrying on the +war, as they were exceedingly desirous to exclude the Christians from +trading to India. About the same time a letter came from Rodrigo +Reynel to the same effect, saying that the zamorin was levying +troops, and had caused a great number of cannon to be prepared for +the war: Reynel likewise said that the Moors of Cochin were decidedly +in the interest of the zamorin, and were therefore to be looked to +with much jealousy. The rajah likewise informed Albuquerque, that +from certain bramins who had come from Calicut he was informed of the +intentions and preparations of the zamorin for reducing Cochin; and +as he had little reliance on his own subjects, he requested some +Portuguese troops might be left for his defence. Francisco gave the +rajah assurance of protection, and even that the Portuguese would add +to his dominions at a future period, in reward for his fidelity and +friendship to their nation, and as a compensation for the injuries he +had suffered in their cause.</p> +<blockquote>[11] The western coast of India below the Gauts, is +divided into three portions, the Concan in the north, after this the +coast of Canara, and in the south, the country of Malabar, reaching +from Mount Deli to Cape Comorin. At the present period, Malabar was +divided into seven kingdoms or provinces: Cananor, Calicut, +Cranganor, Cochin, Porka, Coulan, and Travancore; which last was +subject to the kingdom of Narsinga or Bisnagar. Cananor, Calicut, and +Coulan only were considered as independent rajahs, the others being +less or more subjected to the authority of these +three.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The rajah was much pleased with this assurance; and as Francisco +found he could have no more pepper at Cochin, he determined upon +returning to Portugal, when he had appointed a fit person to remain +as captain-general in India. He found this matter difficult, as none +of his captains were willing to remain with the small force which he +was able to leave behind. At length Duarte Pacheco willingly accepted +the charge, and the rajah was much pleased with his appointment, +having already sufficient proof of his valour. Pacheco was +accordingly left at Cochin with his own ship and two caravels +commanded by Pedro Raphael and Diego Perez, and a pinnace, with +ninety men in health besides others who were sick.[12] As much +ordnance and ammunition was likewise given him as could possibly be +spared from the homeward bound ships. All these things being settled, +Francisco de Albuquerque sailed for Cananor, where he proposed to +endeavour to procure the liberty of Rodrigo Reynel and the others who +were at Calicut. But the zamorin sent him word that there was no +necessity to take this person away, who was desirous of remaining in +India; and if the captain-general would remain he should have the +pepper which was promised.[13] At this time Alonso de Albuquerque +returned from Coulan, and joined Francisco at Cananor; and a letter +was brought from Rodrigo Reynel, giving information that the zamorin +was certainly resolved to attempt the conquest of Cochin, as soon as +the Portuguese ships should leave the coast; and that his only +intention in making an offer of pepper was with a view to prevent +them from burning the ships which were then in the harbour of +Calicut.</p> +<blockquote>[12] According to Astley, his whole force consisted of +110 men. Vol. I. p. 65.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[13] This story of Reynel and the pepper promised by the +zamorin, is so confusedly told in Lichefild's translation of +Castaneda, as to be altogether unintelligible.--E.</blockquote> +<p>All matters being arranged, the Portuguese fleet sailed from +Cananor on the 31st of January 1504. Alonso de Albuquerque and +Antonio del Campo came to Lisbon on the 23d of August, and presented +to the king 400 weight of seed pearls, which are called <i>Alhofer or +Ragges</i> , 144 pound weight of great pearls, and eight of the +oysters from which the pearls are procured. [14] He gave likewise to +the king a diamond as big as a large bean, and many other jewels; and +two Persian horses of wonderful swiftness. Francisco de Albuquerque +and Nicholas Coello, who left Cananor some time after Alonso, were +cast away on the voyage and never more heard of. Pedro de Tayde was +driven to Quiloa, where his ship was lost on the bar and most of his +men drowned. From Quiloa he went to Mozambique in a <i>zambucco</i> , +where he afterwards died; but left a letter in which he gave a +particular account of the state of affairs in India, which he ordered +to be, delivered to the first captain who might put in there from +Portugal[15].</p> +<blockquote>[14] In Astley the weight of the large pearls is reduced +to 40 pounds. Even with that correction, the immense quantity of +pearls in the text is quite incredible. There must be some error in +the denomination, but which we are unable to +correct.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[15] The remainder of this section is taken from Astley, +I. 56, being there appended to the abridgement of the voyage of the +Albuquerques. It is an isolated incident, having no apparent +connection with the history in the text, yet seemed proper to be +preserved in this place. --E.</blockquote> +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<p>Antonio de Saldanna, the last of the three commanders who were +sent to cruise in the north of the Red Sea, having lost Diego +Fernandez Peteira, came to anchor at a place called St Thomas, on the +east side of the Cape of Good Hope, which was made famous by the name +of <i>Aquada del Saldanna</i> , or Saldannas watering-place, on account +of his having lost several of his men there in endeavouring to land. +At this time Ruy Lorenzo was parted from him in a storm which drove +him to Mozambique, whence he held on his course for Quiloa, where he +took some small prizes. Being ambitious to distinguish himself, he +went to the island of Zanzibar, twenty leagues short of Mombasa, +where he took twenty small vessels. After this he appeared before the +town of Mombasa, the king of which place sent out a number of armed +almadias or paraws to take his ship: But Lorenzo armed his long boat +with a crew of thirty men, which took four of the almadias and killed +a great many of the Moors. The king sent an army of 4000 men to the +shore under the command of his son, who was killed with some others +at the first volley; on which one of the Moors ran out from the ranks +with a flag of the Portuguese arms, craving a parley. Peace was soon +concluded, by which the king agreed to pay 100 <i>meticals</i> of gold +yearly as a tribute to the king of Portugal[16].</p> +<blockquote>[16] Mombasa belonged to the Portuguese for near 200 +years. In 1698 it was very easily taken by the Muskat Arabs, who put +twenty Portuguese to the sword.--Astl.</blockquote> +I. 56. a. +<p>From Mombasa, Lorenzo sailed for Melinda, the king of which place +was much oppressed by him of Mombasa, on account of his connection +with the Portuguese. On his way he took two ships and three small +vessels called <i>zambuccos</i> , in which were twelve magistrates of +Brava, who submitted their city to the king of Portugal, and engaged +to give 500 meticals of yearly tribute. On his arrival at Melinda, he +found that a battle had been fought between the kings of Melinda and +Mombasa, in which neither could claim the victory. Antonio de +Saldanna likewise arrived at Melinda about this time, and by his +mediation peace was restored between these princes. Saldanna and +Lorenzo went thence to the mouth of the Red Sea, where they defeated +some Moors at the islands of <i>Kanakani</i> [17] beyond Cape Guardafu. +On the upper coast of Arabia, they burnt one ship belonging to the +Moors which was laden with frankincense, and they drove another on +shore which carried a number of pilgrims for Mecca.</p> +<blockquote>[17] No islands of that name are to be found on our maps. +The islands of Socotora, Abdul Kuria, and los dos Hermanas, are to +the eastwards of Cape Guardafu: Chartan Martan, or the islands of +Kuria Muria, are a considerable distance N.N.E. on the outer or +oceanic coast of Yemen.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION VIII.</p> +<p> <i>Transactions of the Portuguese in India under Duarte Pacheco, +from the departure of Alonso and Francisco de Albuquerque in January +1504, till the arrival of Lope Suarez de Menesis with succours in +September of that year.</i> </p> +<p>After the departure of the Albuquerques from Cananor, Duarte +Pacheco, who was left with the command in India, remained there for +some time to take in provisions, having along with him the caravel +commanded by Pedro Raphael, while the other ship of his small +squadron, under the command of Diego Perez, was repairing at Cochin. +Pacheco anchored with his own ship off the harbour of Cananor, and +dispatched Raphael along the coast to oblige all ships which passed +that way to come to Cananor in acknowledgment of Pacheco as +captain-general in the Indies. Several were brought in by Raphael, +and were constrained to give a full account from whence they came, +whither bound, and what they were laden with. In case of their +containing any pepper, more especially if bound for Calicut, he used +to take that commodity from them; and carried his command with so +high a hand, that he became the terror of these seas. One night while +thus at anchor, a fleet of twenty-five ships came suddenly to the +anchoring-ground where he lay, which he suspected to have been sent +from Calicut on purpose to attack him. Considering himself in +imminent danger, he immediately slipped his cables, not having time +to weigh anchor, and made sail to gain the windward of this fleet, +upon which he directly commenced firing. They were mostly small ships +laden with rice, and made off with all the haste in their power, +though some of them ran aground. One of the vessels of this fleet was +a large ship belonging to the Moors of Cananor, having nearly 400 men +on board, who resisted for some time, shooting off their arrows, and +even endeavoured to take our ship. When day was near at hand, and +after having nine men slain in the action, the Moorish captain at +length submitted, and told Pacheco that he belonged to Cananor.</p> +<p>After some time spent in this manner, Pacheco made sail for +Cochin, and in the passage fell in with several ships belonging to +the Moors, taking some, and burning or sinking others. On landing at +the fort of Cochin, he learnt from the factor that the reports of the +zamorin making preparations for the renewal of the war, were +perfectly true, and even that the Moorish inhabitants of Cochin were +adverse to the rajah for having taken part with the Portuguese +against the zamorin. Being informed likewise that the Cochin rajah +was in great fear of this new war, he went next day to visit him, +carrying all his boats well manned, and fenced with raised sides of +boards to defend his men from the missile weapons of the enemy. They +were likewise furnished with ordnance, and all decorated with flags +and streamers in a gallant manner, hoping thereby to inspire +confidence in Trimumpara, who was much dejected at the small force +which had been left for his defence. In a conference between them, +the rajah said to Pacheco, that the Moors asserted he was left in the +Indies for the sole purpose of removing the merchandize belonging to +the Portuguese in the factory at Cochin to Cananor and Coulan, and +not to defend him against the power of the zamorin; which he was even +disposed to think were true, in consideration of the smallness of the +fleet under his command. Pacheco felt indignant at the suspicion +which the rajah entertained, and endeavoured to convince him that he +had been imposed upon by the Moors out of enmity to the Portuguese, +assuring him that he would faithfully exert himself in his defence. +He pointed out to him the strength of the natural defences of Cochin, +which were all narrow, and defensible therefore by a few valiant men +against any number of assailants. The rajah was greatly relieved by +these assurances, and Pacheco went to visit the different places by +which the island of Cochin might be assailed, all of which he +diligently fortified, more especially the ford, which he strengthened +with a row of stakes, both to prevent the enemy from wading across, +and to hinder any of their vessels from passing.</p> +<p>In the mean time he was informed by letter from Rodrigo Reynel, +that a principal Moor in Cochin, in concert with several others, were +contriving to quit that city; and had been twice secretly at Calicut +to confer with the zamorin on this subject. Pacheco was a good deal +concerned at this intelligence, and proposed to the rajah to have +this Moor executed for his treasonable intercourse with the zamorin. +But Trimumpara would by no means consent to this measure; saying that +it would occasion a mutiny among the Moors, by whom the city was +furnished with provisions in exchange for goods, and be thought it +were better to dissemble with them all. Pacheco then said that he +would have a conference with the Moors, meaning to use policy with +them, since the rajah did not approve of violent measures; and to +this the rajah consented, giving orders to his naires to obey the +orders of Pacheco. In pursuance of this plan, Pacheco went to the +dwelling of this chief Moor, named <i>Belinamacar</i> , close by the +river, taking with him a guard of his own men well armed, and +requested that person to send for some other leading men among the +Moors, whom he named, saying that he wished to consult with them on a +subject of great importance to them all. When they were all +assembled, he made them a speech to the following effect.</p> +<p>"I sent for you, honest merchants, that I might inform you for +what purpose I remain in the Indies. It is reported by some, that I +mean only to remove the factory and the goods belonging to the +Portuguese to Coulan and Cananor: But my sole purpose is to defend +Cochin against the zamorin, and even if necessary I will die in your +defence. I am resolved to meet him in Cambalan, by which way it is +said he means to invade you; and, if he has the boldness to meet me, +I hope to make him prisoner and to carry him with me into Portugal. I +am informed that you intend to go away from Cochin, and to induce the +rest of the inhabitants among whom you are the chiefs, to do the +same; but I am astonished men of your wisdom should leave the country +in which you were born, and where you have dwelt so many years, from +fear of vain reports. Such conduct were even disgraceful for women, +and is therefore much more so for you who are men of wisdom and +experience. If you should be disposed to remove from hence when you +shall actually be in danger, I should hardly blame you: But to do so +before that danger is apparent, and even before a single battle has +been fought, must proceed either from cowardice or treachery. You all +well know, that only a very short while ago, a very small number of +our Portuguese defeated thousands of those same enemies who now +threaten to invade us. You may allege that we were then more in +number than now, which was assuredly the case. But we then fought in +the open field, where numbers were necessary; and we now propose only +to fight in narrow passes, in which a small number will suffice as +well as a multitude. You already know that I can fight, as it is I +who have done the greatest injury to the enemy in the late war, which +the rajah can well vouch. As for me I shall never yield, and I have +more to lose, being overcome, than any of you. Put your trust +therefore in me and my troops, and remain where you are till you see +the event of our defence. Your sovereign remains in his port, and +wherefore should you go away? I and the Portuguese who are with me, +remain in this far distant country to defend your king, and you who +are his natural born subjects: Should you then desert him and your +country, you would disgrace yourselves and dishonour me, by refusing +to repose confidence in my promise to defend you against the zamorin +and all his power, were it even greater than it is. Wherefore, I +strictly enjoin that none of you shall remove from Cochin, and I +swear by all that is holy in our faith, that whoever is detected in +the attempt shall be instantly hanged. It is my determined purpose to +remain here, and to have the port strictly watched day and night that +none of you may escape. Let every one of you, therefore, look well to +his conduct, and be assured, if you do as I require, you shall have +me for your friend; but if otherwise, I shall be your mortal enemy, +and shall use you worse even than the zamorin."</p> +<p>The Moors endeavoured to clear themselves from what had been +alleged against them, but Pacheco would not listen to their excuses, +and departed from them in anger, and immediately brought his ship and +one of the caravels with two boats, which he anchored directly +opposite the city of Cochin, with strict charges to let no one leave +the city by water. He likewise appointed a number of paraws to guard +all the creeks and rivers around the city; and ordered every boat +that could transport men or goods to be brought every night under the +guns of his ships, and returned to their owners in the morning. In +consequence of all these precautions, the people of Cochin were so +much afraid of him, that not one of the Moors or Malabars dared to +leave the city without his permission, and henceforwards continued +quiet. Notwithstanding all these cares, Pacheco used to make nightly +invasions into the island of Repelim, where he burnt the towns, slew +the inhabitants, and carried away much cattle and many paraws; on +which account the Moors of Cochin, astonished that he could endure so +much fatigue, gave out that he was the devil.</p> +<p>Mean time the zamorin collected his forces in the island of +Repelim, where he was joined by the lords of Tanor, Bespur, Kotugan, +Korin, and many other Malabar chiefs, making altogether an army of +50,000 men. Four thousand of these were appointed to serve by water, +in 280 vessels, called <i>paraws</i> , <i>katurs</i> , and <i>tonys</i> ; +with 382 pieces of cannon intended to batter the Portuguese fort at +Cochin; and the rest of the troops were appointed to force a passage +across the ford of the river, under the command of Naubea Daring, +nephew and heir to the zamorin, and Elankol, the lord of +Repelim[1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] This paragraph, enumerating the forces of the +zamorin, is added to the text of Castaneda from Astley, Vol. I. p. +56.</blockquote> +<p>Intelligence of all this was conveyed to Cochin, and that the +zamorin proposed to invade that city by the straits of Cambalan. +Rodrigo Reynel, who sent this intelligence by letter, lay then very +sick and died soon after, on which the zamorin caused all his goods +to be seized. On the approach of the zamorin, the Moors of Cochin +would very willingly have induced the inhabitants to run away, but +durst not venture to do so from the fear they were in of Pacheco. He, +on the contrary, that all might know how little he esteemed the +zamorin and all his power, made a descent one night on one of the +towns of Repelim, to which he set fire. But on the coming up of a +great number of armed naires, he was forced to retreat in great +danger to his boats, having five of his men wounded, after killing +and wounding a great number of the enemy. On their return to Cochin, +the targets of our men were all stuck full of arrows, so great was +the multitude of the enemies who had assailed them. The rajah came to +visit Pacheco at the castle on his return from this enterprize, and +expressed his satisfaction at his success, which he considered as a +mighty affair, especially as the zamorin and so great an army was in +the island. Pacheco made light of the zamorin and all his force, +saying that he anxiously wished he would come and give battle, as he +was not at all afraid of the consequences, trusting to the superior +valour of his own men.</p> +<p>As the people of Cochin remained quiet, Pacheco now prepared for +defending the pass of Cambalan. Leaving therefore a sufficient force +to guard the castle, and twenty-five men in the caravel under the +command of Diego Pereira to protect the city and watch the conduct of +the Moors, taking with himself seventy-three men in one of the +caravels and several armed boats, he departed for Cambalan on Friday +the 16th of April 1504[2]. On passing the city, Pacheco landed to +speak with the rajah, whom he found in evident anxiety; but making as +if he did not observe his heaviness, Pacheco addressed him with a +cheerful countenance, saying that he was just setting out to defend +him against the zamorin, of whom he had no fear of giving a good +account. After some conference, the rajah ordered 500 of his naires, +out of 3000 who were in his service, to join Pacheco, under the +command of <i>Gandagora</i> and <i>Frangera</i> the overseers of his +household, and the caymal of <i>Palurta</i> , whom he directed to obey +Pacheco in all things as if he were himself present. On taking leave +of Pacheco, while he exhorted him to use his utmost efforts for +defending Cochin against the zamorin, he desired him to be careful of +his own safety, on which so much depended.</p> +<blockquote>[2] The particular distribution of the force under +Pacheco at this time is thus enumerated in Astleys Collection: In the +fort thirty-nine men; in the ship left to defend Cochin twenty-five; +in the caravel which accompanied him in the expedition to Cambalan +twenty-six; into one boat twenty-three; and in the boat along with +himself twenty-two; making his whole effective force 135 men; +seventy-one only of which went along with him to defend the +pass.--Astl. I. 56.</blockquote> +<p>Pacheco arrived at the passage of Cambalan two hours before day, +and seeing no appearance of the zamorins approach, he made an attack +on a town on the coast of the island about the dawn, which was +defended by 300 naires, all archers, and a small number armed with +calivers, or match-locks, all of whom were embarked in certain +paraws, and endeavoured to defend the entrance of the harbour. They +were soon constrained by the cannon of the Portuguese to push for the +shore and quit their paraws, but resisted all attempts of the +Portuguese to land for near an hour, when they were completely +defeated after losing a great many of their number, killed or +wounded, and our men set the town on fire. Having taken a +considerable number of cattle at this place, which he carried off +with him, Pacheco returned to defend the pass of Cambalan. At this +time the zamorin sent a message to Pacheco, offering him a handsome +present, and proposing a treaty for a peace between them: but Pacheco +refused accepting the present, and declared he would never make peace +with him while he continued at enmity with the rajah of Cochin. Next +day, the zamorin sent a second message, proudly challenging him for +daring to obstruct his passage into the island of Cochin, and +offering him battle, declaring his resolution to make him a prisoner, +if he were not slain in the battle. To this Pacheco made answer, that +he hoped to do the same thing with the zamorin, in honour of the day +which was a solemn festival among the Christians, and that the +zamorin was much deceived by his sorcerers when they promised him the +victory on such a day. Then one of the naires who accompanied the +messenger, said smiling as if in contempt, that he had few men to +perform so great an exploit; whereas the forces of the zamorin +covered both the land and the water, and could not possibly be +overcome by such a handful. Pacheco ordered this man to be well +bastinadoed for his insolence, and bid him desire the zamorin to +revenge his quarrel if he could.</p> +<p>That same evening, the rajah of Cochin sent a farther +reinforcement to Pacheco of 500 naires, of whom he made no account, +neither of these who were with him before, believing they would all +run away; his sole reliance, under God, was on his own men, who +feasted themselves that night, that the zamorin might learn how much +they despised all his threats, and how eager they were for battle. +Early next morning, Pacheco made a short speech to his men, exhorting +them, to behave valiantly for the glory of the Christian name and the +honour of their country, and promising them an assured victory with +the assistance of God; by which their fame would be so established +among the natives that they would be feared and respected ever after. +He likewise set before them the rewards they might assuredly expect +from their own sovereign, if they behaved gallantly on the present +occasion. His men immediately answered him that they hoped in the +ensuing battle to evince how well they remembered his exhortations. +They all then knelt down and sung the <i>salve regina</i> , and +afterwards an <i>Ave Maria</i> , with a loud voice. Just at this time, +Laurenço Moreno joined Pacheco with four of his men armed with +calivers, who were all anxious to be present in the battle, and of +whose arrival the general was extremely glad, as he knew them to be +valiant soldiers.</p> +<p>In the course of the night, by the advice of the Italian +lapidaries who had deserted to the enemy, the zamorin caused a sconce +or battery to be erected directly over against the place where +Pacheco was stationed, on which five pieces of ordnance were placed, +from which great service was expected in the ensuing battle, owing to +the narrowness of the pass. On the morning of Palm Sunday, the +zamorin marched forwards with 47,000 men, partly naires and part +Moors, and accompanied by all the rajahs and caymals who had joined +him in this war. Of these, the rajah of <i>Tanor</i> had 4000 naires; +the rajahs of <i>Bybur</i> and <i>Curran</i> , whose countries lay near +the mountains of Narsinga, had 12,000 naires; the rajah of + <i>Cotogataco</i> , which is between Cochin and Cananor close beside +the mountains, had 18,000 naires; the rajah of <i>Curia</i> , which is +between Paniani and Cranganor, had 3000 naires. Naubea Daring, the +prince of Calicut, and his brother Namboa, who were particularly +attached to that part of the army composed of the zamorins immediate +subjects, had a large body of men whose numbers I do not +particularize. Their warlike instruments were many and of divers +sorts, and made a noise as if heaven and earth were coming +together.</p> +<p>Before day, the van of this prodigious army arrived at the sconce +of the Italians, and began immediately to play off their ordnance +against the caravel, which was so near that it was an absolute +miracle that not a single shot did any harm. But our cannon were +better served, and every shot did execution among the enemy: and so +well did they ply their guns, that before sunrise above thirty +discharges were made from our caravel. At day-break, the whole of the +enemies fleet, consisting of 169 barks, came out of the rivers of the +island of Repelim to attack our small force. Sixty-six of these were +paraws, having their sides defended with bags of cotton by advice of +the Italians, to ward off our shot; and each of these had twenty-five +men and two pieces of ordnance, five of the men in each paraw being +armed with calivers or matchlocks. Twenty of the foysts or large +barks were chained together, as a floating battery to assault the +caravel; besides which, there were fifty-three <i>catures</i> and +thirty large barks, each of which carried sixteen men and one piece +of ordnance, besides other weapons. Besides all these armed vessels, +there were a great many more filled with soldiers, so that the whole +river seemed entirely covered over. Of this numerous fleet, which +contained near 10, 000 men, Naubea Daring was admiral or commander in +chief, and the lord of Repelim vice-admiral. All these advanced +against the Portuguese, setting up terrible shouts, which was +answered alternately by sounding all their military instruments of +music. The whole of these people were almost naked, having targets of +various colours, and made a very gallant appearance. On the approach +of this prodigious fleet, our caravel and boats were hardly +discernible, so completely did the enemy cover the face of the water. +Terrified by so prodigious a multitude, the naires of Cochin all ran +away, only Grandagora and Frangora remaining, who were on board the +caravel, or they would have done like the rest. Indeed their presence +was of no importance, except to serve as witnesses of the valour of +our men.</p> +<p>Our people plied their ordnance and small arms so incessantly that +the air was quite darkened with smoke, and as the boats of the enemy +were very numerous and without order, they hindered each other, and +our fire did prodigious execution among them, several of their paraws +being torn to pieces and great numbers of their men killed and +wounded, without any hurt on our side. The twenty-five paraws[3] +which were chained together were now brought forwards, and gave much +annoyance to our men, who were now likewise much fatigued, as the +battle had continued a long time. The captain-general gave orders to +fire off a <i>saker</i> ,[4] which had not been, hitherto used during +the battle. By the time this had been twice fired, it did such +terrible execution among the thick of the enemy as to sink four of +their paraws, and all the others made the best of their way out of +the battle, eighteen of the paraws being sunk in all, and vast +numbers of the enemy slain and wounded. On the defeat of this +squadron, which was commanded by Prince Naubea Daring, Elankol, the +lord of Repelim, who was vice-admiral, came forward with a fresh +squadron, and gave a proud onset, commanding his paraws to lay the +caravel on board; but the Malabars had not resolution to put this +order into execution, and held off at some distance. The zamorin also +approached with the land army, doing his utmost to force the passage +of the ford; but all their efforts were in vain, although this second +battle was more fiercely urged than the first. Though the battle +continued from daybreak to almost sunset, the enemy were able to make +no impression, and were known to have lost 350 men slain outright, +besides others, which were above 1000.[5] Some of our men were +wounded, but none slain; for the balls of the enemy, though of cast +iron, had no more effect than as many stones thrown by hand. Yet our +barricades of defence were all torn to pieces, and one of our boats +was very much damaged, which was entirely repaired during the +night.</p> +<blockquote>[3] A very short space before these are only stated as +twenty; but the numbers and names in the text seem much +corrupted.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] In a former note we have given a list of the names +and circumstances of the English ordnance near this period. In that +list the saker is described as a light cannon of only 5-1/2 pound +ball, now looked upon as one of very small importance; we may +therefore conclude that the other cannon used on the present occasion +could hardly exceed <i>falcouns</i> , or +two-pounders.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] Such is the unintelligible expression in Lichefilds +translation. In the account of this war compiled by the editor of +Astleys Collection from the Portuguese historians, the enemy are said +to have lost in the former part of this battle, twenty paraws sunk, +180 persons of note, and above 1000 common men; while in the second +attack, nineteen paraws were sunk, sixty-two fled, and 360 men were +slain. In this account, a third naval engagement is mentioned, in +which sixty-two paraws were sunk, and sixty fled; after which 15,000 +men were defeated by land, and four towns were burnt by +Pacheco.--Astl. I. 56.</blockquote> +<p>The rajahs and other chiefs who were allied with the zamorin, lost +all hope of ever being able to get the victory over the Portuguese, +and were sorry for having joined in the war so greatly to their own +dishonour. Being afraid the captain-general might burn and destroy +their towns and houses, which were all situated on the banks of +rivers, they were anxious to leave the army of the zamorin, and to +give over making war on the Portuguese. Some among them withdrew +privately from the camp of the zamorin to the island of Vaipi with +all their men, and reconciled themselves with the rajah of Cochin: +These were <i>Maraguta, Muta</i> Caymal, his brother and cousins. The +zamorin was exceedingly mortified by the discomfiture of his people, +and severely reprimanded his chiefs for their pusillanimous conduct, +in allowing themselves to be defeated by such a handful of men. The +two Italian deserters, while they acknowledged the valour of the +Portuguese in the late action, represented that it would be +impossible for them to continue to bear up long against such vast +odds without reinforcements, and recommended the frequent reiteration +of assaults, under which they must necessarily be at last overthrown. +All those rajahs and chiefs who were for continuing the war, joined +in opinion with the Italians. The zamorin made a speech, in which he +recapitulated the defeats they had sustained and the defection of +some of his allies, who had entered into treaty with the rajah of +Cochin. He stated how short a period of the summer now remained for +continuing the operations of the war, which must soon be laid aside +during the storms and rain of the winter season, when it was +impossible to keep the field; and that, on the conclusion of winter, +a new fleet would come from Portugal with powerful reinforcements to +the enemy, who would then be able to carry the war as formerly into +his dominions, to their utter loss and destruction. He concluded by +giving his opinion that it was necessary for him to make peace with +the Christians. Naubea Daring, the prince of Calicut, made a long +speech, in which he defended the Portuguese against the imputation +thrown upon them by the Moors of their being thieves and pirates. He +recapitulated all their conduct since their first arrival in India, +showing that they had always conducted themselves with good faith, +whereas they had been forced into war against Calicut by treachery +and oppression. He concluded by strongly recommending to negotiate +peace with the Christians, as otherwise the city and trade of Calicut +would be utterly destroyed, to the irreparable injury of the zamorins +revenue, which was of more importance to him than the friendship of +the Moors, whose only object was their own profit. The zamorin was +greatly moved by this discourse, and recommended to the other chiefs +that they should concur with the prince, in procuring the +establishment of peace. This opinion was by no means relished by +Elankol, the lord of Repelim, who had confederated with the Moors to +urge a continuance of the war, and endeavoured to impress upon the +zamorin that his reputation would be destroyed by proposing peace at +this time, which would be imputed to him as an act of cowardice. The +principal Moors, likewise, who were present in the council used all +their art and influence to induce the zamorin to persevere; and it +was at length determined to continue the war.</p> +<p>One <i>Cogeal</i> , a Moor of Repelim who had been a great +traveller, and had seen many warlike devices, proposed a new +invention for attacking the caravels at the ford, which was +considered to be perfectly irresistible. Cogeal directed a floating +castle to be built of timber on two boats or lighters, which were +firmly secured by two beams at their heads and sterns. Over this the +castle or square tower was strongly built of beams joined together by +bars of iron and large nails, carried up to the height of a lance or +spear, and so large that it was able to contain forty men with +several pieces of ordnance. It was proposed that this castle should +be brought Up to grapple with the caravels, by which the Portuguese +might be attacked on equal terms. On seeing this machine, the zamorin +liberally rewarded Cogeal for his ingenuity, and gave orders to have +other seven constructed of the same kind. By means of his spies, +Pacheco got notice of the construction of these floating castles, and +likewise that the enemy were preparing certain fireworks to set the +caravels on fire[6]. To keep off the fireships and floating castles, +he constructed a species of rafts, made of masts or spars eight +fathoms long, and bound together with iron bolts and hoops. Several +of these, which were likewise eight fathoms broad, were moored with +anchors and cables, at the distance of a stones throw from the +caravels. Likewise, to prevent the caravels from being overlooked by +the floating castles, one Peter Raphael built certain turrets on the +decks of the caravels of spars set upright, in each of which seven or +eight men had room to handle their arms. At this time the rajah of +Cochin visited Pacheco, whom he earnestly exhorted to provide well +for defence against the zamorin; as he was well assured his own +subjects would desert him, if Pacheco were defeated. Pacheco +upbraided Trimumpara for his tears, desiring him to call in mind the +victories which the Portuguese had already gained over the enemy; and +requested of him to return to his capital showing himself confident +among his people, and to rest assured that he and the Portuguese +would keep the pass against every force the zamorin might bring +against it.</p> +<blockquote>[6] Castaneda tells a long ridiculous story at this +place, of a ceremonial defiance of the zamorin, not worth inserting. +In Astley, I. 56. we are told that the Moors of Cochin were detected +about this time communicating intelligence to the enemy, and that +Trimumpara allowed Pacheco to punish them. On which he put five of +their chief men into strict confinement, giving out that they were +hanged; which gave much offence to the rajah and his +people.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In expectation of an immediate attack, Lorenco Moreno returned to +the caravels with as many of his people as could be spared from the +factory. Pacheco made all his people take rest early in the night, +that they might be able for the expected fatigues of the ensuing day, +on which he had intelligence that the grand attack was to be made. +About midnight, his small force was summoned under arms; when, after +confession and absolution, he made a speech to his men, exhorting +them to behave themselves manfully in the approaching conflict. They +all answered, that they were resolved to conquer or die. About two in +the morning, some of the most advanced vessels belonging to the +Calicut fleet began to fire off their ordnance, as they approached +towards the pass. The zamorin was himself along with the land army, +which exceeded 30,000 men, accompanied with many field pieces. +Elankol, the lord of Repelim, who commanded the vanguard, advanced to +the point of <i>Arraul</i> , which in some measure commanded the ford, +at which place he began to throw up some ramparts or defences of +earth. Pacheco landed secretly at the point with a detachment of his +troops, on purpose to prevent the enemy from throwing up +entrenchments, and a sharp skirmish ensued, in which many of the +enemy were slain. On the appearance of day, Pacheco retired to his +boats, though with no small difficulty, owing to the vast numbers of +the enemy who thronged around; yet got off with all his people +unhurt, having effectually hindered the proposed intrenchments.</p> +<p>The land army of the enemy now brought their ordnance to the +point, where they began a furious cannonade upon; the caravels, yet +without doing us any harm, as our people were all effectually secured +by means of high wooden defences on the gunwales of their vessels; +whereas every shot of ours made prodigious havoc among the enemy, who +were quite unsheltered. The zamorin sent orders to his fleet to come +on with all expedition, to deliver him and his men from this imminent +danger. The Calicut fleet now approached in most formidable order, +having several fire rafts in front, intended for setting our caravels +on fire. After them came 110 paraws, full of men, and every one of +them having ordnance, many of these being fastened together by means +of chains. After these came 100 <i>catures</i> and eighty <i>tonys</i> , +each of which had a piece of ordnance and thirty men. In the rear of +all came the eight castles, which kept close by the point of + <i>Arraul</i> , as the <i>ebb was not yet altogether entered</i> .[7] +The enemy came on with loud shouts and the sound of many instruments, +as if to an assured victory, and immediately began a furious +cannonade. Their fire rafts advanced burning in a most alarming +manner, but were stopped by the <i>canizos</i> , or rafts of defence, +formerly mentioned. By these likewise, the paraws and other vessels +of the enemy were prevented from closing with our caravels and boats, +which they seem to have intended. In this part of the battle many of +the paraws and other vessels of the enemy were torn to pieces and +sunk, and a great number of their men were killed and wounded. On the +turn of the tide, the floating castles put off from the point, and +were towed by boats towards the caravels. In the largest of these +castles there were forty men, in others thirty-five, and the smallest +had thirty, all armed with bows or matchlocks, besides ordnance; and +they seemed quite an irresistible force in comparison of ours, which +consisted only of two caravels and two armed boats.</p> +<blockquote>[7] Such are the words of Lichefild; which, perhaps may +have been intended to imply that there was not yet sufficient depth +of water to allow of their approach to the caravels; or it may mean +that they waited for the tide of ebb, to carry them towards the +Portuguese caravels, being too cumbrous for management by means of +oars.--E.</blockquote> +<p>When the largest castle came up to our floating defence, it +immediately commenced a tremendous fire of all its ordnance upon our +caravels; and at this time Pacheco ordered a <i>saker</i> to be shot +off, which seemed to do very little harm even at a second discharge. +The remainder of the castles now came into their stations, and the +battle raged with the utmost fury. What with incessant flights of +arrows, and the smoke of so many guns, our people could seldom see +the vessels of the enemy. In this extremity, the saker was discharged +a third time against the largest castle, which had been somewhat +shaken by the two former discharges. By this shot its iron work was +broken, some of its beams were forced from their places, and several +of the men on board were slain. By two other discharges of the saker +this castle was all torn in pieces, and was forced to retire out of +the battle. Still however the rest of the castles, and the numerous +fleet of small craft kept up the fight. Towards evening all the +castles were much injured, many of the paraws were sunk and torn in +pieces, and great numbers of the enemy slain; so that at length they +were constrained to retire. On our side not one man was even wounded: +One only ball went through the caravel in which Pacheco commanded, +and passed among many of his men without doing any hurt. On the enemy +retiring, Pacheco gave chase in the two boats and some paraws; and +the caravels kept up a constant fire upon point <i>Arraul</i> , whence +they forced the zamorin and the land army to retire, after having 330 +of his men slain. After this great victory, the inhabitants of Cochin +became quite reassured, and were no longer in dread of the power of +the zamorin. Trimumpara came to visit Pacheco, whom he embraced, and +congratulated on his great prowess: Many of the principal naires of +Cochin went to compliment him; and even numbers of the Moorish +merchants brought him rich presents, hoping to secure his favour.</p> +<p>The zamorin was greatly disheartened by the overthrow of all his +mighty preparations, and losing all hope of victory wished seriously +to end the war. In a council of his allies and great men, they +represented the great losses they had already endured in the war with +the Portuguese, and proposed to treat with them for peace. His +brother Naubea Daring, who had always been averse to the war, seemed +to believe that Pacheco would refuse any treaty, and advised rather +to defer making an offer of peace till the arrival of the next +captain-general from Portugal. This prince was likewise of opinion +that the Calicut army should still keep the field till the coming on +of the rainy season made it advisable to retire; as it would look +like flight to retreat at this time. Yet he recommended that no more +attacks should be made on the pass, in which attempts they had +already met with so much loss. Elankol, the lord of Repelim, urged +the continuance of the war, and to make reiterated assaults on the +Christians, which must be at last successful; by which means all the +Portuguese that were in Cochin, Cananor, and Coulan would be +destroyed. He advised likewise, to send false intelligence to these +places, saying that they had taken our caravels and slain all our +men; on which news the people of Cananor and Coulan would put the +people in our factories to death. This was accordingly done; but as +the inhabitants of these places had already received notice of the +real state of affairs, they gave no credit to this false story. Yet, +owing to the malice of the Moors who dwelt in these places, our men +were in great danger and durst not come out of their factories, and +one of our men was slain in Coulan.</p> +<p>By the persuasion of Elankol and the Moors, the zamorin +reluctantly consented to try the event of another battle: And, the +castles being repaired, a fresh assault was made both by land and +water, with many more men and vessels than before. This battle +continued longer than the other, and the enemy was overthrown with +far greater loss than they had ever received before. In consequence +of this new victory, the inhabitants of Cochin became quite confident +in their security from the power of their enemies; and the rajah, who +had hitherto been in much dread of the event, became quite elated. He +now came to visit Pacheco in a chair of state, with far more +splendour than he had ever assumed since the commencement of the war. +When this was told in the enemies camp, the chiefs urged the zamorin +to a fresh attack, lest the rajah of Cochin might hold him in +contempt. He desired them to cease their evil counsels, from which he +had already sustained great loss, and which would still lead him into +greater danger; but to leave him to consider what was best to be done +for revenge against his enemies.</p> +<p>The zamorin gave orders to some of his naires in whom he reposed +great confidence, that they should go to Cochin on some false +pretence, and endeavour to assassinate the general of the Portuguese +and such of his men as they could meet with. But the naires are an +inconsiderate people unable to keep any of their affairs secret, so +that this shameful device became immediately known to Pacheco, who +appointed two companies of the Cochin naires to keep strict watch for +these <i>spies</i> ; one company at the ford, and the other along the +river, waiting by turns day and night. By this means +these <i>spies</i> were detected and made prisoners. The chief + <i>spy</i> was a naire of Cochin, of the family or stock of +the <i>Lecros</i> who had certain other naires attending upon him, who +were strangers. On being brought before him, he ordered them to be +all cruelly whipt and then to be hanged. The Cochin naires +remonstrated against this punishment, because they were naires whose +customs did not allow of this mode of execution; but he would not +listen to their arguments, saying that their treachery richly merited +to be so punished. The Portuguese officers represented to him the +great troubles which the <i>rajah</i> of Cochin had endured for giving +protection to their nation, and how much this action might displease +him, when he was informed of naires having been put to death in his +dominions without his authority. Besides, that this might give +occasion to some of those about the rajah, who were known to be +already unfriendly to the Portuguese, to insinuate that the captain- +general had usurped the authority from the rajah, and might in that +way wean his affections from them. Pacheco was convinced by these +arguments that he had acted wrong, and immediately sent to +countermand the execution. Two of them were already <i>half-dead</i> ; +but <i>those who were still living</i> , he sent to the rajah, +informing him that they had deserved death, but that from respect to +him he had spared their lives. The rajah was singularly gratified by +this mark of respect, and the more so because there happened to be +then present several of his principal nobles and some chiefs from +other places, besides sundry of the chief of the Moors of Cochin, who +had endeavoured to impress on his mind that the Portuguese were +willing to assume the command in his dominions[8]. Henceforwards +Pacheco had such good intelligence, that all the subtle devices of +the zamorin were counteracted.</p> +<blockquote>[8] This seems the same story which has been already +mentioned in a former note, from Astleys Collection; but which is +there related as having taken place +with <i>Moors</i> .--E.</blockquote> +come on, from which Pacheco naturally concluded that the zomorin +would soon break up his encampment, on which occasion he was fully +resolved to give them an assault, having sufficient experience of the +pusillanimity of the enemy. But the zamorin, being afraid that +Pacheco might attack him at his departure, gave out that he intended +to make another assault on the ford with a greater fleet than ever, +and even directed the floating castles to be repaired. He even gave +out that he meant to assail the passage of <i>Palurte</i> and the ford +both at once; that Pacheco might occupy himself in preparing to +defend both places, and he might have the better opportunity to steal +away unperceived. Accordingly, on the evening of Saturday, which was +the eve of St John[9], the whole army of the enemy appeared as usual, +and Pacheco fully expected to have been attacked that night. Next +morning, however, he learnt from two bramins that the zamorin had +withdrawn with all his army into the island of Repelim. Pacheco was +much disappointed at this news, yet he made a descent that very day +into Repelim, where he fought with many of the enemy, killing and +wounding a great number of them, and then returned to the ford, where +he remained several days, because the rajah was still afraid lest the +zamorin might return and get across the ford into the island of +Cochin. +<blockquote>[9] The nativity of St John the Baptist is the 24th June; +the eve therefore is the 23d, yet Castaneda has already said that +June was ended.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The month of June was now ended and the rainy season, or winter, +began.</p> +<p>The zamorin was so crest-fallen by the great and repeated losses +he had sustained in this war from a mere handful of men, that he +resolved to retire into religions seclusion, that he might conciliate +the favour of his gods, and dismissed his allies and chiefs to act as +they thought best. His princes and nobles endeavoured to dissuade him +from this resolution, but he continued firm to his purpose, and went +into the <i>torcul</i> or religious state of seclusion, accompanied by +some of his chief bramins or chaplains. Soon afterwards, his mother +sent him word that great changes had taken place in Calicut since his +seclusion. That many of the merchants had already deserted the place, +and others were preparing to follow. That the city was becoming ill +provided with victuals, as those who used to import them were afraid +of the Christians. Yet she advised him never to return to Calicut, +unless he could do so with honour; and that he should therefore +continue in seclusion for a time, and afterwards endeavour to recover +his credit and reputation by victory, or lose all in the attempt. On +this message which greatly increased his discontent, the zamorin sent +for his brother, to whom he confided the government of his dominions +till such time as he should have completed his religious austerities +in seclusion.</p> +<p>On this strange resolution of the zamorin, the rajahs and nobles +who had joined him in the war departed to their own countries, most +of which lay on the coast. And being under great apprehensions that +Pacheco might reduce their dominions, they endeavoured to enter into +treaties with him for peace and concord; for which purpose they sent +messages to Trimumpara, requesting that he would act as mediator +between them and Pacheco. The rajah of Cochin was a prince of a mild +and forgiving disposition; and forgetting all the past injuries they +had done him in these wars, he undertook the office of mediation, and +sent them safe conducts to come to Cochin to make their peace. On +their arrival, he accompanied them to wait upon Pacheco, and even +became their advocate with him to accept of their proferred +friendship, which he readily consented to at the desire of the rajah. +Some of these princes were unable to come personally, but sent their +ambassadors to solicit peace, which was accorded to all who asked it. +Several even of the great Moorish merchants of Calicut, that they +might quietly enjoy their trade, forsook that place and came to dwell +in Cochin, having previously secured the consent of Pacheco. Others +of them went to Cananor and Coulan, by which means the great trade +which used to be carried on at Calicut suddenly fell off.</p> +<p>Owing to the great resort of Moors to Cochin, in whom Pacheco +could not repose much confidence, and because, by the orders of +Naubea Daring, the paraws of Calicut frequently made excursions into +the rivers, the captain- general continued for a long while to defend +the passage of the ford, where he often fought with and did much +injury to his enemies. He made frequent incursions, likewise, into +the island of Repelim, whence he carried off cattle and other +provisions, and often fought with his enemies, always defeating them +with much slaughter[10]. At length Elankol, the lord of that island, +wishing to put an end to the miseries of his country, waited on +Pacheco and entered into a treaty of friendship with him, making him +a present of a great quantity of pepper, which was abundant in his +country[11].</p> +<blockquote>[10] About this time, in consequence of a message from +the Portuguese factor at Coulan, stating that the Moors obstructed +the market for pepper, Pacheco went to that place, where he made five +Moorish ships submit, and settled the pepper market on fair terms, +yet without doing them any harm.--Astl. I. 57.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[11] According to Astley, the zamorin lost 18,000 men in +this war in five months, and desired peace, which was granted by the +rajah of Cochin.-- Astl. I. 57. Yet this could hardly be the case, as +the first operation of the new commander-in-chief in India was to +cannonade Calicut.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION IX.</p> +<p> <i>The Voyage of Lope Suarez de Menesis to India, in 1504; being +the sixth of the Portuguese Expeditions to the East Indies.</i> </p> +<p>Learning the necessity of sending powerful succours to protect the +Portuguese trade from the hostilities of the zamorin, the king of +Portugal fitted out a fleet of twelve[1] large ships in 1504, of +which the command was given to Lope Suarez de Menesis, who had been +captain of the <i>Mina</i> on the coast of Guinea in the reign of John +II. The captains of these ships were, Pedro de Mendoza, Lionel +Cotinho, Tristan de la Silva, Lope Mendez de Vasconcelles, Lope de +Abreu, Philip de Castro, Alonso Lopez de Castro, Alonzo Lopez de la +Cocta, Pero Alonzo de Aguilar, Vasco de la Silvero, Vasco Carvallo, +and Pedro Dynez de Sutunell: All of whom were gentlemen by birth or +service. Having embarked many valiant soldiers, the whole fleet left +Lisbon on the 22d of April and arrived on the 2d of May near Cape +Verd. Having observed during this part of the voyage, that several of +the ships were very irregularly navigated, not keeping in their +proper course, by which they had run foul of each other; some pushing +before, while others lagged behind, and others stood athwart the +order of the fleet; Suarez convened an assemblage of all the +captains, masters, and pilots of the fleet, to whom he communicated +the following written instructions: 1. As soon as it is night, every +ship shall keep in regular order a-stern of the admiral; and no +vessel to carry any light except in the binnacle and in the cabin. 2. +The masters and pilots to keep regular watch, taking special care not +to run foul of each other. 3. All to answer the signals of the +admiral. 4. As soon as day appears, every ship shall come to salute +the admiral, and all are carefully to avoid getting before him during +the night. The penalty for breach of any of these articles was a fine +of ten crowns, besides which the offender was to be put under arrest +without being entitled to wages, and so to remain to the end of the +voyage. As some of the masters and pilots had been very negligent, +allowing some of the ships to fall aboard of others, he removed these +to other ships. By this attention to discipline, the fleet was kept +afterwards in good sailing order.</p> +<blockquote>[1] These are said to have been the largest ships +hitherto built in Portugal, and to have carried 1200 men; perhaps +soldiers, besides their ordinary crews.--Astl. I. 57.</blockquote> +<p>In the month of June, at which time they reckoned themselves off +the Cape of Good Hope, the fleet was surprised by a heavy storm, and +had to drive for two days and nights under bare poles in imminent +danger of being cast away, the weather during all this time being +wonderfully dark, so that the ships were in great hazard of running +aboard of each other. To guard against this danger, the admiral +caused guns to be fired at intervals from all the ships, to give +notice of their situations, and the better to keep company. On the +subsidence of the storm, the ship commanded by Lope Mendez was +missing, and the admiral caused the fleet to lie to for some days in +hopes of her reappearance. While in this situation, two of the ships +ran foul of each other, by which a large hole was broken in the bow +of one of the ships, through which she took in so much water as to be +in great danger of sulking. The admiral immediately bore up to her +assistance, and encouraged the crew to stop the leak, and even sent +his boats on board to give every aid. By great exertions they got the +leak effectually stopped, by nailing hides over the hole, and +covering the whole with pitch. On St Jameses day, 25th July, the +fleet arrived at Mozambique, where they were well received by the +governor, who supplied them abundantly with fresh provisions, and +sent off the letter which Pedro de Tayde had written respecting the +state of affairs in India a short time before his death, as formerly +mentioned. The admiral expedited the refitting of the ships which had +been so much injured, as quickly as possible, and departed from +Mozambique on the 1st of August. The king of Melinda sent off one of +his principal Moors to visit the admiral, to whom likewise he sent +sixteen of our men who had deserted from Pedro de Tayde.</p> +<p>Having stopt only two days at Melinda for refreshment, the fleet +sailed across for India, and came to Anchediva, where they found two +Portuguese ships commanded by Antonio de Saldanna and Ruy Lorenzo, +who were much afraid of our fleet, suspecting it to have belonged to +the Rumes[2]. Saldanna informed Suarez, that he had been sent out the +year before from Portugal along with Lorenzo, as vice-admiral, with +orders to explore the Red Sea and adjacent countries. That they were +separated in a storm off the Cape of Good Hope. That Lorenzo +proceeding alone in the voyage, had taken a ship belonging to the +Moors near Sofala, out of which he had taken a large quantity of +gold, and had left the hull at Melinda. That Saldanna prosecuted his +voyage to Cape Guardafui, where he had taken many rich prizes, +without having entered the Red Sea; after which he had sailed to +India, and the winter coming on, had taken shelter in Anchediva, +where he was afterwards joined by Lorenzo. At this place, Lope Mendez +de Vasconcelles, who had been separated in the storm off the Cape of +Good Hope, rejoined the fleet. The admiral used every expedition to +get the fleet ready to proceed for Cananor, where he arrived on the +1st of September, and was informed by the factor of the events in the +war with Calicut; and how he and his companions in the factory had +been often in great hazard of their lives.</p> +<blockquote>[2] The Turkish empire, as succeeding that of the Romans +or Greeks of Constantinople, is still called <i>Rumi</i> in the east. +It will be afterwards seen, that these <i>Rumes</i> , Romans, or Turks, +made some powerful efforts to drive the Portuguese from India, as +greatly injurious to the Indian trade with Europe through the Red Sea +and Egypt.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The day after his arrival, the admiral went on shore in great +state to visit the rajah of Cananor, attended by all the captains of +the fleet in their boats, decorated with flags and streamers, and +armed with ordnance, all the boats crews being dressed in their best +apparel. The admirals barge had a rich awning, and was dressed out +with carpets, on which stood a chair of state covered with unshorn +crimson velvet and two cushions of the same for his feet. His doublet +and hose were of satin of divers colours, wrought diamond fashion; +his shoes of black velvet, studded with gold; his cap covered over +with gold buttons. Over all he wore a loose robe or gown of black +velvet, in the French fashion, trimmed all round with gold lace. From +his neck hung a triple chain of gold enamelled, from which depended a +golden whistle. His rapier and dagger, which were borne by a page, +had handles of pure gold. Two lackeys preceded him in splendid attire +and six trumpeters with silk flags. He was also accompanied by a band +of wind instruments, in a small boat In another boat were the +presents which he carried for the rajah from the king of Portugal. +There were, six beds of fine Holland, with their pillows of the same, +all wrought with gold embroidery. Two coverlets or carpets of unshorn +crimson velvet, quilted all over, having three guards of cloth of +gold, that in the middle a span in width, and the others two fingers +broad. The bedstead was gilded all over, having curtains of crimson +satin, fringed with cold thread. On putting off from his ship, all +the fleet saluted him with their cannon; then the trumpets and drums +sounded for a long time; after which the organs never ceased to play +till the boats reached the shore, where vast numbers of Moors and +Gentiles waited to receive the admiral.</p> +<p>On his landing, the admiral Was conducted into a <i>sarame</i> or +house appointed for his reception and audience of the rajah, in which +he ordered the bed and all its rich furniture to be set up, close to +which was placed a chair for the admiral to sit upon. Soon +afterwards, the rajah was brought to the house, carried in a rich +chair of state, preceded by three armed elephants, three thousand +nayres, armed with swords, spears, and targets, and two thousand +armed with bows and arrows. The admiral, apprized of the rajah's +approach by the fleet saluting him with all their guns, went to the +door to receive him, where they embraced. Then going together into +the apartment, the admiral presented him with the bed already +described, on which the rajah immediately lay down, and the admiral +sat down beside him in the place appointed. They here conferred +together for two hours, when they were interrupted by the barking of +a greyhound belonging to the admiral, which wanted to attack one of +the elephants.</p> +<p>Soon afterwards a Moor from Calicut waited upon the admiral, +having along with him a Portuguese boy, who brought a letter from +some of our men who were captives at Calicut ever since the time of +Cabral being there. This boy informed the admiral, that the zamorin +was so humbled by the defeats he had sustained from Pacheco, that he +had gone into religious seclusion. That many of the Moorish merchants +had gone from Calicut to other places, as they could carry on no +trade there owing to the war, and that even provisions had become +extremely scarce. That the zamorin and the prince of Calicut, and the +magistrates of that place, were exceedingly desirous of peace with +the Portuguese, for which reason they had sent him to the admiral, +and had allowed the Portuguese prisoners there to write him to that +effect, which they had done accordingly, but chiefly in hopes that he +would free them from captivity. After reading the letter, the admiral +would have sent a written answer, meaning to have sent it by the +Moor. But the boy told him, they had no permission to carry any +letter, and that he must return along with the Moor, as the people of +Calicut had threatened to put all their Portuguese prisoners to death +in case he did not return. On this account, the admiral gave the boy +a verbal message for the prisoners; saying that he would very soon +come to Calicut, where he would anchor as near as possible to the +shore; and as the captives were allowed to go about the city without +irons, they might find an opportunity to come off to the fleet either +in boats or by swimming.</p> +<p>Suarez went accordingly with the fleet to Calicut, where he came +to anchor on Saturday the 7th September; and presently afterwards the +boy who had been to visit him at Cananor came on board, accompanied +by a servant of Cosebequin, who brought the admiral a present from +the rulers of Cochin, and a message requiring a safe conduct for +Cosebequin, that he might come on board to treat for peace. The +admiral refused to accept of any present until such time as peace +were restored; but sent word that Cosebequin might repair on board +without fear, as a servant of the king of Portugal; he sent a private +message at the same time to the Portuguese prisoners, advising them +to use their best endeavours to escape. On receiving this message, +Cosebequin was sent on board by the governors of Calicut, to treat of +peace, carrying with him two of the Portuguese captives. They +requested he would wait three or four days, by which time they +believed the zamorin would come out from his seclusion, and that they +were convinced he would agree to all that should be required. The +admiral answered, that unless they would deliver up the two Italian +deserters he would agree to no terms; but he sent no message for the +liberation of our captives, as he thought they might easily escape. +As soon as the Italians learnt that the admiral had demanded them, +they suspected the captives would run away of which circumstance they +gave notice to the governors, requiring them to secure the Portuguese +captives, as they were men of consideration, and that a peace might +be procured in exchange for them almost on any terms the zamorin +pleased to prescribe. On this advice, the governors took care to +prevent the captives from escaping, and became less urgent in their +desire of peace. Owing to this, they remained in captivity till Don +Francisco de Almeida became viceroy of India, though some made their +escape in the interim, and others of them fell victims to the +diseases of the climate.</p> +<p>After waiting some days, and finding no friendly steps taken by +the governors of Calicut towards a peace; and being likewise without +hope of recovering the captives, Suarez resolved to take revenge by +cannonading the city of Calicut, which he did for a whole day and a +night, during which time he did prodigious damage, destroying the +palace of the zamorin, several of their pagodas or idol temples, and +many of the houses, and slew a great number of the inhabitants. For +this service, he brought seven of his smallest ships as near the +shore as possible, and advanced all the boats of the fleet, likewise +carrying ordnance, close almost to the beach. After this he departed +for Cochin, where he arrived on Saturday the 13th of September. He +landed next day near the Portuguese castle, in as great state as he +had done before at Cananor, and was received with many marks of +satisfaction by Trimumpara. After embracing, they went hand in hand +into the hall, in which a chair of state was placed for the admiral. +As the rajah sat on the cushions on the floor, according to the +custom of the country, and was therefore much lower than the admiral, +he commanded his chair to be removed somewhat farther from the rajah, +by which he greatly offended the native chiefs who were present at +the interview. He now delivered to Trimumpara a letter from the king +of Portugal, in which great compliments and many thanks were given, +for the favour and protection the rajah had vouchsafed to the +Portuguese. To this the rajah answered, that he had been amply +repaid, by the good service which Duarte Pacheco had rendered him in +the war with the zamorin. Next day, the admiral sent a large sum of +money to Trimumpara, as a present from the king of Portugal, who knew +that his finances had been greatly injured ill consequence of the war +with Calicut.</p> +<p>Soon after, Suarez sent Pedro de Mendoza and Vasco Carvallo with +their ships to guard the coast of Calicut, with orders to capture all +ships belonging to the Moors that were laden with spices. He likewise +dispatched De la Cocta, Aguilar, Cotinho, and Abreu, to go to Coulan +to take in their loading, being informed that spices were to be had +there in abundance. He likewise sent Tristan de la Silva with four +armed boats up the rivers towards Cranganor, against some armed +paraws of Calicut which were stationed in that quarter. In this +expedition, Silva had a skirmish with these paraws and some nayres on +the shores of the rivers; but falling in with a Moorish ship laden +with pepper, he captured her and brought her to Cochin, where he and +the other captains loaded their ships, as spices were now procured in +great abundance.</p> +<p>Duarte Pacheco happened to be off Coulan when he learnt the +arrival of Suarez; and knowing that his own command was ended so soon +as the new captain-general should arrive at Cochin, determined to +attempt some exploits while he remained master of his own conduct. +With this view, he put to sea on the 22d of October, and soon after +got sight of a ship at a great distance, to which he gave chase all +that day and part of the night. The chase was driven into Coulan, +when Pacheco learnt that she <i>belonged to the confederates[3]</i> , +and was bound from Coromandel. He immediately afterwards descried +three ships of Calicut, to which he gave chase, keeping as near the +coast a possible to take the advantage of a land breeze. In the +morning he put off to sea in chase of the vessel, which he was unable +to get up with till towards evening close to the land; after a brave +defence, as the ship had many men, she at length yielded; and not +chusing to encumber himself with so many prisoners, he landed a part +of her company, and made the rest prisoners in irons in his own ship. +Learning that this was one of the three ships belonging to Calicut of +which he was in search, he put two of his men on board the prize, +with orders to keep him company. Being arrived directly abreast of +Cape Comorin, he met with a sudden whirlwind, by which he was nearly +cast away, and when this subsided, he came to anchor within a league +of the shore, where he remained all night. While at anchor thirty of +his Moorish prisoners made their escape, twelve of whom were retaken +by means of his boat. Pacheco remained for some time off the Cape in +expectation of the other ships of the Moors coming round from +Coromandel, but none making their appearance, he went to Coulan with +the ship he had captured, which he delivered to the factor at that +city with all its rich merchandize. He then went to Cochin, where he +put himself under the command of Suarez.</p> +<blockquote>[3] This expression is quite inexplicable, unless we may +pick out very darkly that it belonged to the Calicut confederacy +against the Portuguese. Yet Castaneda, or his imperfect translator +Lichefild, does not inform us whether this vessel was made a prize. +Lichefild seems almost always to have had a very imperfect knowledge +of the language of the author, often to have mistaken his meaning or +expressed it with great obscurity, and sometimes writes even a kind +of jargon, by endeavouring to translate verbally without being able +to catch an idea from the original.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The zamorin had now resumed the government, having withdrawn from +the <i>torcul</i> or religious seclusion. He had dispatched one of +his generals with a fleet of eighty paraws and fifty ships[4] to +defend the passages of the rivers, and to obstruct the trade of +Cochin with the interior; and had likewise set on foot a considerable +land army under the prince Naubea Daring. It was the intention of the +zamorin to stand on the defensive only while the Portuguese fleet +remained in India, and to renew the war against Cochin after their +departure. But the admiral Suarez, by the advice of all his captains, +resolved to make an attack on Cranganor, a town belonging to the +zamorin, about four leagues from Cochin, whence the enemy had often +done much injury to the dominions of Trimumpara during the late war. +For this purpose, Suarez took fifteen armed boats with raised +defences on their gunwales, and twenty-five paraws belonging to +Cochin, all armed with cannon, and accompanied by a caravel, the +whole manned with about 1000 Portuguese soldiers, and an equal number +of nayres from Cochin. The armament arrived before day +at <i>Palypuerto</i> , where it had to wait for daylight, not daring to +attempt the passage of certain shoals, as the boats were heavily +laden. On arriving at Cranganor, the fleet of Calicut was found drawn +up ready to repel the Portuguese attack. The Calicut commander was +posted in the front, in two new ships chained together, which were +full of ordnance and well manned; chiefly by archers. In the rear of +these ships, and on both flanks, the paraws of Calicut were arranged, +all full of armed men.</p> +<blockquote>[4] According to Astley, from De Fariz only <i>five</i> +ships; and indeed in the sequel, Castaneda only mentions <i>two</i> +ships as employed, on the present occasion and three others that were +drawn up on shore.--E.</blockquote> +<p>On the arrival of the Portuguese flotilla, the battle immediately +commenced by the discharge of ordnance on both sides. Five Portuguese +captains who led the van, pushed on to attack the Calicut admiral in +his two chained ships, which they carried by boarding after a brave +resistance, in which that officer and two of his sons with many +others of the Malabars were slain. After the capture of these ships, +the paraws made little resistance, and soon took to flight. Suarez +immediately disembarked his troops, which soon put Naubea Daring to +flight, who commanded the land army of Calicut. The Moors and +Malabars in their flight, plundered the houses of Cranganor, which +was immediately afterwards set on fire by the Portuguese. Certain +Christian inhabitants of the place came to Suarez and prayed him not +to burn their city, representing that it contained several churches +dedicated to the Virgin and the Apostles, besides many Christian +houses which were interspersed among these belonging to the Moors and +Gentiles. For their sakes, Suarez ordered the conflagration to be +stopped; yet many of the houses were destroyed before that could be +effected, as they were all of wood. After the fire was quenched, our +men plundered the houses belonging to the Moors, many of whom had +formerly dwelt in Cochin. The two ships, and several paraws which had +been taken in the before mentioned engagement, were set on fire, and +other three ships that were found drawn on shore.</p> +<p>At this time Suarez was joined by the prince of Cochin, who +informed him that Naubea Daring remained with his army at no great +distance, and intended to return to Cranganor after his departure. A +considerable force was therefore sent against Naubea Daring; but +immediately on seeing their approach, the troops of Calicut fled. On +the return of the Portuguese flotilla towards Cochin, Suarez was +disposed to have destroyed another town which lay near their passage; +but the prince of Cochin represented that half of it belonged to him, +and prevailed on the admiral to spare it, as he could not destroy one +part without the other. Suarez, therefore, returned to Cochin, where +he knighted some of his officers for their bravery during the last +engagement. A few days after his return, there came an ambassador +from the rajah of <i>Tanor</i> , whose dominions are next adjoining to +those of Cochin. This ambassador represented, that his master had +hitherto adhered to the zamorin, and had assisted him in all his wars +against Pacheco. But that the zamorin, since he had come out from his +religious seclusion, had redoubled his arrogant ideas of his +irresistible power, and in reward of the services of the rajah of +Tanor, now threatened him with war and conquest. He farther +represented, that on the late occasion, when the general of the +Calicut forces was in full march for the relief of Cranganor, the +rajah of Tanor had placed 4000 of his nayres in ambush in a defile in +their line of march, who had defeated the troops of Calicut, and hod +slain 2000 of them. On this account the rajah of Tanor was in great +fear of the zamorin, and humbly requested assistance from the +admiral, promising in return to become subject to the king of +Portugal.</p> +<p>For this purpose, the admiral sent Pedro Raphael in a caravel to +Tanor, with 100 soldiers, most of whom were crossbow men. It chanced +that on the very day of his arrival at Tanor, the zamorin arrived +before that city with his army and gave battle to the rajah; but, +chiefly owing to the valour of Raphael and his company, the army of +the zamorin was defeated with great slaughter. In reward for this +well-timed succour, the rajah of Tanor became subject to the king of +Portugal. In consequence of this defeat, the zamorin was much +humbled, and lost more credit with the Moors than by all the +victories which Pacheco had obtained; as these had been obtained by +strangers, while the present victory had been gained by a native +prince. In consequence of these reverses, seeing no likelihood of +ever being able to recover their trade, all the Moors who dwelt in +Calicut and Cranganor determined upon removing to their own country +with their remaining wealth. For this purpose, they fitted up +seventeen large ships at <i>Pandarane</i> , which they armed on purpose +to defend themselves against any attack from our men, and loaded them +with all expedition for Mecca. Besides these, they loaded a great +number of paraws and tonys with such goods as the ships were unable +to contain.</p> +<p>The season now approached for the return of the fleet to Portugal, +and Suarez appointed Manuel Telez de Vasconcelles[5] as +captain-general of the Indies, with whom he left a ship and two +caravels, of which last Pedro Raphael and Diego Perez were captains. +The admiral presented these officers to the rajah of Cochin, who +would much rather have procured Duarte Pacheco to remain, having +great confidence in his valour and attachment to his service, but +dared not to request this of the admiral, as he was of a haughty +disposition. In a conference between Pacheco and the rajah, the +latter entreated him to remain in India if possible, as he did not +think himself quite secure from the enmity of the zamorin; and even +urged him to remember that he had promised not to leave him till he +had made him king of Calicut. Pacheco answered, that he left him in a +good situation, his country being restored to quiet, and the zamorin +so much humbled that he was no longer to be dreaded; as a proof of +which the Moors were about to depart from Calicut, seeing their trade +entirely ruined. And that he hoped to return from Portugal, and to +serve him longer and to greater purpose than he had done hitherto. +The rajah was somewhat satisfied with this answer, and craved pardon +of Pacheco that he had not rewarded his services as they deserved, +because he was extremely poor; yet requested he would take as much +pepper as he pleased. Pacheco refused to accept of any thing; saying, +he hoped to find the rajah rich and prosperous on his return to +Cochin, and then he would accept a reward. The rajah gave Pacheco a +letter for the king of Portugal, in which he set forth all his +gallant actions during the war, strongly recommending him to his +majesties favour.</p> +<blockquote>[5] At the commencement of this section, Castaneda names +this person Lope Mendez de Vasconcelles; in Astley, I. 58, he is +called Manuel Tellez Barreto.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The admiral Suarez departed from Cochin on the 27th December[6], +taking with him the whole of his fleet, even those captains who were +to remain in India. His intention was to have come to anchor in the +harbour of Paniani, on purpose to visit the rajah of Tanor; but from +foul weather, and bad pilots, the fleet could not make that port, and +was driven to Calicut and Pandarane. Being off these ports and with a +scanty wind, the admiral detached Raphael and Perez with their +caravels, to examine if there were any ships of the Moors at anchor. +While on this service, ten paraws came off to attack them, and an +engagement ensued. On the rest of the fleet hearing the sound of the +ordnance, they bore up as close to the wind as possible, and came to +anchor[7]. In a council of war, it was resolved to attack the +seventeen ships of the Moors, which lay all aground; and as the ships +were unable to get near them, because they lay within the bar, the +attack was determined to be made by the boats of the fleet, with +orders to set the Moorish ships on fire. This being resolved upon, +the admiral and all the captains of the fleet embarked in the boats, +taking with them all the soldiers belonging to the expedition.</p> +<blockquote>[6] In Lichefilds translation of Castaneda, this date is +made the 27th September, which is an obvious +mistake.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] By some strange blunder, Lichefild says they came +to <i>Cananor</i> ; but from all the circumstances in the contexts, it +is obvious that the fleet came to anchor on the outside of the bar at +Pandarane.--E.</blockquote> +<p>The Moorish ships were all drawn on the beach in a close line, +having their sterns to the shore, and were well armed with ordnance, +and had many soldiers on board armed with bows and arrows, a +considerable number of them being men of a fair complexion[8]. +Besides all these, the Moors had two pieces of ordnance on a small +bulwark or redoubt which flanked the passage of the bar. Our boats, +seeing all these formidable preparations, returned towards the +fleet[9], whence they towed several caravels within the bar to assist +the boats in the attack. After a severe conflict, in which the +Portuguese had twenty-five men killed, and 127 wounded, the whole +seventeen ships of the Moors were boarded and taken, with the loss of +2000 men. But as the Moorish ships were all aground, the victors were +under the necessity to burn them, with all the rich merchandize they +contained. Owing to this severe loss, the Moors deserted the city of +Calicut, which by the cessation of trade became much distressed for +provisions, insomuch that most of its inhabitants withdrew to other +places. The zamorin was so much humbled by this succession of +disastrous events, that he remained quiet for a long time +afterwards[10].</p> +<blockquote>[8] Arabs probably, whites in the estimation of the +Portuguese as compared with the native blacks of +Malabar.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[9] This part of the story is very confusedly translated +by Lichefild. According to his relation, in one sense, the admiral +alone returned in his boat for the caravels; while, by another part +of his expressions, the whole boats returned for the admiral and the +caravels.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[10] According to Astley, a peace was concluded between +the Portuguese and the zamorin immediately after the victory obtained +by the rajah of Tanore; but this does not agree with the +circumstances just related respecting the destruction of the Moorish +fleet in the harbour of Pandarane, which would hardly have been done +during a time of peace--E.</blockquote> +<p>The particular incidents of this engagement are so confusedly +related in Lichefilds translation of Castaneda as to baffle every +attempt to reduce them into intelligible order. Among these, the two +following are more distinctly told. Tristan de la Silva endeavoured +to board a ship which appeared to be the admiral, of which the +captain and a numerous crew were Turks. A little before De Silva got +up to this ship, the crew had fired off a piece of ordnance which lay +on the upper deck, and which by its recoil broke a large hole in the +side of the ship. The Turks were so intent on defending themselves +against the Portuguese boats, that they neglected to barricade this +hole, of which the people in De Silvas boat took advantage to get on +board; Alonzo Lopez the master, and Alvaro Lopez one of the kings +servants, now town-clerk of Santarem, being the first who entered by +the hole. A desperate conflict ensued on deck, in which many of the +Turks were slain, others hid themselves below the hatches, and others +leapt into the water, most of whom were drowned, as they were covered +with shirts of mail.</p> +<p>The caravel commanded by Pedro Raphael, one of these brought +within the bar to co-operate with the boats, was struck by a ball +from the battery on shore, which killed three men and dangerously +wounded other ten. In the confusion occasioned by this accident, +another shot killed the master at the helm, and the caravel drove +with the tide of flood right under the bows of a large Moorish ship +full of men which had not yet been attacked by the boats. In this +situation, a great number of the enemy boarded the caravel, <i>and +used our men very ill</i> . The caravel afterwards drifted on certain +rocks, where she remained till the end of the battle. The situation +of the caravel was now perceived by the admiral, who ordered +effectual succour to be sent to Raphael. The succours boarded the +caravel, which was quite full of Moors, whom they drove out with +great slaughter; but all of our men belonging to that caravel were +sore hurt.</p> +<p>On the next day, being the first of January 1505, the admiral went +with the fleet to Cananor, to take in the rest of his lading. He was +here informed by the factor of the humbled situation of the Moors, +from whom, in his opinion, the Portuguese had no longer any thing to +fear in India. Being ready to depart for Europe, the admiral made an +oration to Manual Telez, and those who were to remain with him in +India, giving them instructions for their conduct after his +departure; and as the enemy was so greatly humbled, he considered +that such a fleet as had formerly been left by Albuquerque was quite +sufficient, in which he left an hundred soldiers. Indeed the zamorin, +as has been already said, was sick of the war, and remained quiet +after the departure of the admiral.</p> +<p>Departing from Cananor, Suarez arrived off Melinda on the 1st of +February; where, without landing himself, he sent Antonio de Saldanna +to bring away the rich prizes he had formerly made at Cape Guardafui. +From Melinda, the fleet went to Quiloa, on purpose to enforce the +payment of the tribute from the king of that place. Departing from +thence on the 10th of February, he arrived safe at Lisbon on the 22d +of June 1505[11], without any incident worth relating[12]; carrying +with him two ships more than had accompanied him to India, all laden +with rich commodities, and was received by the King Don Manuel with +great honour.</p> +<blockquote>[11] By some strange typographical mistake, Lichefild +makes this date 1525, both in the text and in a marginal note, thus +adding no less than twenty years to the true chronology. In Astleys +Collection, the conclusion of this voyage is dated 22d July 1506; but +we have chosen to retain the regular series of dates as given by +Castaneda. Owing to the mistake in Lichefilds translation not being +detected till a part of this chapter was printed off, it has been +repeated in our introduction to this article, which our readers are +requested to correct.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[12] In Astley, the ship commanded by Pedro Mendoza, is +said to have been stranded during the homeward voyage, fourteen +leagues from the <i>Aguada</i> , or watering-place of St Blas, and +never more heard of.--Astl. I. 58.</blockquote> +<p>When the king learnt the great service which Pacheco had performed +in India, he expressed his high approbation of his conduct in a +public procession. The king went, in all the splendour usually shewn +on <i>Corpus Christi</i> day, from the high church to that of St +Domingo, accompanied by Duarte Pacheco. After solemn service, a +sermon was preached by Don Diego Ortis, bishop of Viseo; who, by the +kings command, gave a rehearsal of all that had been performed by +Pacheco in the war against the zamorin. On the same day, a solemn +festival was held in all the churches of Portugal and Algarve. The +king sent letters on the occasion to the pope and all the princes of +Christendom, announcing all these notable acts and victories which +had been performed in the Indies.[13]</p> +<blockquote>[13] Astley concludes the account of the honours +conferred on Pacheco in the following words: "But soon after +imprisoned, and allowed him to die miserably. A terrible example of +the uncertainty of royal favour, and the little regard that is had to +true merit!"--Astl. I. 58.</blockquote> +<h2><a name="chapter2-7" id="chapter2-7">CHAPTER VII.</a></h2> +<p align="center"><b> <i>Letters from Lisbon in the beginning of the +sixteenth century, respecting the then recent discovery of the route +by sea to India.</i> </b>[1]</p> +<blockquote>[1] Novus Orbis Grynæi, p. 94-102.</blockquote> +<p>INTRODUCTION.</p> +<p>The following letters bear to have been written by some Italian +public agents and merchants, to their employers and friends, and +contain a curious record of the first impressions made on the public +mind by the wonderful discoveries which navigation was then opening +up to the European world. They are selected from the <i>Novus +Orbis</i> , a work which was published by <i>Simon Grynæus</i> +early in the sixteenth century. According to M. de la Richarderie,[2] +this collection was formed by Hans Heteirs, canon of Strasburg, and +was printed under the care of Simon Grynæus, by Isaac Hervag, +in folio, at Basil in 1532. We learn likewise that it passed rapidly +through several editions, having been reprinted at Basil in 1535, +1537, and 1555; and at Paris in 1582. The edition used on the present +occasion is printed at Basil in 1555 by Jo. Hervag. Its principal +contents, besides those translated for the present chapter, are the +voyages of Cada Mosto, already given; the discovery of America by +Christopher Columbus, which will form the first article in our +subsequent volume; the voyages of Vincent Alonzo Pinzon, and of +Americus Vespucius, which will be attended to hereafter; and the +travels of Marco Polo, which have been already given at full length +from a better source.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Bibl. Univ. des Voy. I. 55, and V. 486.</blockquote> +<p>The language of the <i>Novus Orbis</i> is perhaps the most +barbarous Latin ever composed for the press, and its punctuation is +so enormously incorrect that it would have been easier understood +without any points whatever.</p> +<p>As already mentioned, the edition here used is dated in the year +1555, little more than fifty years after the discoveries they +commemorate; and the letters themselves are dated in 1501, 1502, and +1503, immediately after the return of the earliest of the Portuguese +voyages from India. Indeed the first letter seems to have been +written only a day or two after the arrival of the first ship +belonging to Cabrals fleet.</p> +<p>This work is accompanied by a very curious map of the world, on +one planisphere, much elongated to the east and west, which may be +considered as a complete picture of the knowledge then acquired of +the cosmography of our globe. The first meridian is placed at the +island of Ferro, and the degrees of longitude are counted from thence +eastwards all round the world, so that Ferro is in long. 0° and +360° E. In every part of the world, the outlines are grossly +incorrect, and it would serve no purpose to give an extended critical +view of this map; yet a few notices respecting it may gratify +curiosity.</p> +<p>Europe is singularly incorrect, especially in the north and east. +America, called likewise <i>Terra Nova</i> , has an approximated +delineation of its southern division, stretching far to the south, as +if the cosmographer had received some tolerable notices of Brazil, +Cape Horn, and the coasts of Peru and Chili. But instead of the +continent of North America, the island of Cuba is delineated in a +north and south direction, reaching between the latitudes of 10° +and 50° north; leaving a small strait or passage between its +southern extremity and the Isthmus of Darien into the South Sea. +About twelve degrees west from Cuba the island of Zipangri is placed; +and at least twenty degrees east from Cathay or China. At sixteen +degrees east from the northern end of Cuba, a large island is placed +in the <i>Oceanus Magnus</i> or Atlantic, called <i>Terra Cortesia</i> ; +which the cosmographer seems to have intended to represent the +kingdom of Mexico, recently discovered by Cortez; though placed +almost in lat. 50° N. Perhaps this may be an error +for <i>Corterealis</i> , an early navigator, who is said to have made +discoveries on the eastern coast of North America.</p> +<p>In Africa there is an approximation towards its true shape; yet +the <i>Caput Viride</i> , or Cape Verd, is placed to the north of the +river Senegal, instead of between that river and the Gambia; and the +sources of the Nile are brought down to lat. 15° S. at least +twenty-two degrees too far to the southwards.</p> +<p>Asia, with India and China, are too much distorted for criticism. +Calicut is placed in the peninsula of Cambaya or Guzerate. +The <i>Aurea Chersonesus</i> and <i>Regnum Malacha</i> , or Malacca, are +separated by a great gulf, while the latter is placed so low as +30° S. latitude. This much may suffice for an account of the +incorrect yet curious specimen of cosmographical knowledge which had +been acquired by the learned in Europe about 300 years ago.</p> +<p>To these four letters we have added a short account of several +curious circumstances relative to the trade of the Europeans with +India at the commencement of the sixteenth century, or three hundred +years ago; which, though not very accurately expressed, contains some +curious information.</p> +<p>SECTION I.</p> +<p> <i>Letter from the Venetian Envoy in Portugal to the +Republic</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] This letter is dated on the 20th of June 1501, and +obviously refers to the voyage of Cabral, who had returned from India +not long before. The writer is described as a native of Crete, and +envoy from the lords of Venice to the king of +Portugal.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Most serene prince, &c. Believing that your highness has been +already informed by the most excellent legate, of all the memorable +things which have occurred in this place, and particularly respecting +the fleet so lately dispatched for India by the king of Portugal, +which, by the blessing of God, has now returned with the loss of +seven ships; as it originally consisted of fourteen sail, seven of +which only have come home, the other seven having been wrecked in the +voyage. Their voyage was along the coasts of Mauritania and Getulia +to Cape Verd, anciently called <i>Experias</i> ; off which the islands +called the <i>Hesperides</i> are situated. From thence they explored +lower <i>Ethiopia</i> towards the east, beyond which the ancients +never penetrated. They sailed along this <i>eastern</i> coast of +Ethiopia to a line corresponding with the meridian of Sicily, about +five or six degrees <i>within</i> the equinoctial, the gold mines +belonging to the king of Portugal being about the middle of that +coast.[2] Beyond that coast of the gold mines, and nine degrees to +the south of the <i>winter tropic</i> ,[3] they came to a great +promontory called the Cape of Good Hope, which is almost 5000 miles +distant from our country. From thence they came to the cape anciently +called <i>Prasum</i> , which was considered by Ptolemy as the extremity +of the southern regions, all beyond being unknown to the ancients. +After that they reached the country of the <i>Troglodites</i> , now +called <i>Zaphala</i> , or Sofala, which our ancestors affirm to have +abounded in gold, infinitely more than any other part of the earth. +Stretching from Sofala across the <i>Barbaric Gulf</i> ,[4] they came +into the Indian Ocean, and at length to the city of Calicut. Such was +their voyage, which carefully calculated, as following the coasts of +the ocean, extends to the prodigious length of 15,000 miles; but +which, if the lands and mountains would allow in a direct line, were +greatly shorter.</p> +<blockquote>[2] The strange geographical language here used is +inexplicable, probably because the ideas of the writer were confused. +He seems to mean the <i>Mina</i> in Guinea, which is <i>five or +six</i> degrees <i>within</i> the equator, or to the north; but is at +least 18º west from the meridian of Sicily. --E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] Meaning the tropic of Capricorn, on which the sun is +during our winter solstice--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] The recession of the coast inwards from Cape Delgado +to Melinda, which may be called the Bay of Zanzibar.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Before passing the Cape of Good Hope, in consequence of being +forced out of their course by a S.W. wind, they discovered a new +country to which they gave the name of the <i>Land of Parrots</i> , +because they found, there an incredible number of these birds, of +many beautiful colours, some of them a cubit and a half in length and +more. We have seen two of these birds, and can vouch for the truth of +the description. On exploring this extensive coast, the navigators +believed that it must necessarily belong to a continent, as they +sailed along it for the space of 2000 miles without having seen +either extremity. Its coasts are inhabited by people of a tolerably +handsome appearance, who go quite naked.[5]</p> +<blockquote>[5] In the map of Grynaeus already mentioned, +this <i>Terra Psittacorum</i> or Land of Parrots, is placed on +the <i>south-west</i> coast of Africa, between the Cape of Good Hope +and Congo. Yet there can be no doubt that the recent discovery of +Brazil on the <i>eastern</i> coast of South America is here alluded +to: Consequently, instead of the <i>lebeccio vento</i> , or S.W. wind +of the text, it would naturally have required a S. E. wind to force +the Portuguese fleet so far to the westward of its intended +course.--E.</blockquote> +<p>In this voyage they lost four ships. Two others were sent to the +gold mines, which are not yet returned; and seven only reached +Calicut, where they were honourably received, and had a house +allotted them by the prince, and there they brought their ships to +anchor. Soon afterwards there assembled many boats of the Moors and +other neighbouring people, and some frigates belonging to the great +sultan, all the people belonging to which conspired together against +the Christians, being exceedingly adverse to the coming of the +Christians into these parts, lest they should diminish their profits. +They insisted therefore to have their ships first loaded, to the +great dissatisfaction of the Christians, who immediately complained +to the king of the insolence of the Moors, but soon discovered that +he favoured them. The king of Calicut was a person of very doubtful +faith, and made the following answer: That it did not seem equitable +for the Moors to be permitted to finish their traffic before the +Christians; and gave orders accordingly, that the Christians might +carry on their trade. The Moors trangressed this decree, and took +away the goods of the Christians at pleasure; upon which disputes +arose between the Christians and the Moors, in which the whole +inhabitants of the city took part with the Moors. Whereupon a great +slaughter was made of the Christians, above forty of them being +slain; among whom was their principal factor, when endeavouring to +escape by swimming. In revenge for this cruelty, the Christians made +severe reprisals; as they burnt ten ships belonging to the prefect of +Syria, that is the sultan; and destroyed a considerable portion of +the city by means of their <i>catapults</i> and <i>bombards</i> [6], +many houses being burnt to the ground, as they are covered with +thatch like cottages, and exceedingly combustible.</p> +<blockquote>[6] The author assuredly uses these words to denominate +two kinds of ordnance or cannon then used in the Portuguese ships of +war.--E.</blockquote> +<p>After this, the fleet left Calicut, and went to another kingdom +named Cochin, about forty miles distant, being conducted thither by a +Jew who assumed the Christian faith. The king of Cochin hated the +king of Calicut exceedingly, and on that account received the +Christians with much kindness. Spices are in greater abundance at +Cochin than at Calicut, and the Christians carried off such riches +from Cochin as I dare scarcely venture to report; for they allege to +have purchased a <i>cantarus</i> of cinnamon, which is a considerable +measure, for one gold ducat. The king of Cochin gave two hostages to +the Portuguese, in assurance of their safety, and sent even +ambassadors to the king of Portugal. In the mean time, the king of +Calicut fitted out an immense fleet against the Christians, in +revenge for having burnt the ships in his harbour. This fleet +exceeded 150 ships, and carried 15,000 men, yet on account of a north +wind which they were unable to contend with, they dared not to attack +the Portuguese ships, and withdrew from Cochin. As their great +numbers were considerably formidable, the Portuguese ships went to a +certain island in which the body of St Thomas is interred, the lord +of which received them kindly, and gave them some relics of that holy +person in token of friendship: He even offered them greater +quantities of spices than they had ever seen before, without money, +trusting that they would pay for them on their return from Europe: +But, being already laden, the Portuguese declined this friendly +offer.</p> +<p>The Portuguese fleet employed fourteen months in this voyage, and +returned to Lisbon in spring; but they say that it may be made much +sooner, now that the course is well known, and may even be +accomplished in ten months. All the ships that reached Calicut +returned, except one which was lost on certain rocks, but the crew +saved, which ship was of six hundred tons burden. As yet only one +caravel has come into port, but the rest are said to be not far off. +This lately arrived ship came into port on St Johns day, 6th May, at +which time I happened to be with the king, who addressed me in these +words. " <i>Hah!</i> congratulate me, good sir, as my fleet is already +in the river, loaded with all kinds of spices." I received the news +joyfully, as became me, and made my compliments of congratulation to +the king. The tidings were welcomed with exceeding joy and all kind +of festivity, with the sound of trumpets, cymbals, and flutes, and +the continual firing of cannon. On the day following there was a +solemn thanksgiving, at which all the people assisted. When I again +waited on the king, he desired me to apprize your serenity of his +good fortune, saying that you may send your ships hither in safety to +purchase his spices; adding, that he should take such measures as to +prevent the prefect of Syria, that is the sultan[7]; from procuring +spices in India. He founds this hope assuredly on the success which +his fleet had lately in contending with the numerous vessels of the +Moors, and has no doubt of being able to reduce India under his own +authority. The ship already arrived is commanded by a Tuscan named +Bartholomew, a native of Florence. Her cargo consists of +300 <i>cantari</i> or quintals of pepper, 120 cantari of cinnamon, 60 +cantari of lac, and 15 cantari of castor and other perfumes of that +kind[8]. They have no cloves or ginger, having been prevented by the +Moors, as these could only be procured at Calicut; neither have they +any of the lesser spices. They had purchased many pearls of different +sorts, which were all lost in the disturbances at Calicut, in which +many of their men and much riches were destroyed.</p> +<blockquote>[7] By the sultan or prefect of Syria, twice so designed +in this dispatch, is evidently meant the Mameluk sultan of Egypt; but +who was soon afterwards defeated and slain by the Turkish emperor. +The ineffectual exertions of the Mameluks and Turks, instigated by +Venice, to obstruct the Portuguese trade in India, will be afterwards +mentioned.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[8] It is difficult to say what is meant by +a <i>cantarus</i> in the text; perhaps a quintal or 100 pounds. The +castor of the text, and other perfumes, may mean musk, civet, and +ambergris.--E.</blockquote> +<p>I must not omit to mention, that there have lately arrived +messengers from <i>Ubenus</i> [9] king of Ethiopia to the king of +Portugal, bringing gifts of ivory and many other things. These are +soon to return in two ships, which are to go to India after stopping +at the new gold mines. While this ship which has first arrived was on +its voyage home, it met two ships steering their course from +the <i>new gold mines</i> [10] for India. These; thinking themselves +lost, or that they would be plundered by the Christians, offered to +pay them a ransom of 15,000 ducats for leave to continue their +voyage: But the Christians, though tempted by so much gold, gave +these people many gifts and permitted them to continue their course, +that they might hereafter be allowed a free trade with their +country.</p> +<blockquote>[9] Perhaps the king of Congo, or some other prince of +the west coast of Africa is here alluded to; or perhaps the xeque or +prince of the Moors at Sofala.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[10] By the new gold mines Sofala seems indicated, as +contradistinguished from the <i>old</i> gold mines of Guinea. The +story of the two ships on their voyage to India from Sofala, +obviously alludes to the Guzerate vessels, more particularly +mentioned already in the voyage of Cabral --E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION II.</p> +<p> <i>Letter from certain Merchants and Bankers of Spain,[1] to their +correspondents in the cities of Florence and Venice, respecting a +treaty of peace and league between the kings of Portugal and +Calicut.</i> </p> +<blockquote>[1] This letter has no date, but must have been very +early in the sixteenth century, probably in 1504, from the +circumstance to which it alludes at its commencement. Although said +to be from <i>Spain</i> , there is every reason to suppose it was +written from Lisbon, as we find Portugal frequently considered +as <i>in</i> Spain, which it actually is in the most extensive +geographical sense.--E.</blockquote> +<p>We have been informed by those who were on board of the fleet +which sailed from Lisbon to India in May 1502, and returned on the +15th December 1503, that the king of Calicut has concluded a peace +with our sovereign on the following conditions. As a compensation for +the slaughter of our men, he is to pay 4000 <i>bahars</i> of pepper, +equal to 12, 000 quintals. That the Moors shall not be allowed to +trade there from any place whatever, excepting only those who are +natives of Calicut; and that these even shall not be permitted to +trade with Mecca. That our king, if so inclined, may build a fort at +Calicut, and shall be supplied with a sufficient quantity of stones, +lime, and timber for that purpose by the zamorin, paying for these on +delivery. That the king of Calicut shall aid and favour the +Portuguese in all things, and that it shall be competent for our king +to appoint one of his own subjects to administer justice among the +Portuguese resident in that city, even with the power of life and +death, and without appeal to the zamorin. That when any of our people +shall revolt from or be disobedient to our commercial agent, they +shall immediately be delivered up to be judged by the aforesaid +Portuguese consul. If any captive Moors are detained, they shall all +be delivered up to our agent. That the two Milanese lapidaries, who +had gone from Rome to India, and who there acted as military +engineers and shipbuilders in the European fashion, to the disgrace +of the Christian profession, and the vast injury of the Christians, +should be delivered up in chains to the admiral of our fleet. That +the kings or rajahs of Cochin and Cananore shall be included in this +treaty as co-allies, mutually sharing all danger and advantages with +the other contracting parties: So that if any one shall take arms +against any of the parties to this treaty, he shall be declared an +enemy to all the parties hereby confederated. If any of the parties +to this league shall act contrary to its stipulations, the power of +all the rest shall act against him, as a perfidious person, a +traitor, and an enemy to good faith; all the contracting parties +using their utmost to preserve the present peace and alliance +inviolate. While the Portuguese fleet might remain in the harbour of +Calicut, all other ships whatever were to be refused access, at least +until after ours were laden: But when there were sufficient goods for +all who wanted them, then all ships Were to be at liberty to load; +provided always that the accustomed prices should not be augmented, +and expressly that the profit to the venders should never exceed 8 +per cent which was usual in that port.</p> +<p>These are the conditions of peace and alliance which have been +stipulated, to the great honour and renown of our sovereign, as must +be evident to every one; as henceforwards he may not only be +accounted sovereign of India, but has imposed laws on Turkey and the +prefect of Syria[2], since by this treaty all access to the city of +Calicut is debarred to their traders. We do not even doubt that, in +four years from hence, through the vigorous measures of our king, our +sailors may safely navigate to Constantinople and Alexandria, the +present most celebrated marts of eastern commerce, and shall take +signal vengeance on the Moors by whom they have been infamously and +frequently abused. For this purpose a fleet of twelve sail was fitted +out this year, which found the rajah of Cochin expelled from his +dominions, having fled for refuge from the hostilities of the king of +Calicut to a strong place in a certain island. The only reason he +could assign for the hostilities of the zamorin was, that, faithful +to his engagements, he refused to deliver our people to the king of +Calicut, and chose rather to live in exile than to betray his trust. +In this extremity, our fleet brought opportune aid to the friendly +rajah, and having landed troops for his assistance, they marched +boldly against the perfidious zamorin, routed his forces with great +slaughter, and triumphantly restored the rajah of Cochin to his +dominions.</p> +<blockquote>[2] This, as formerly observed, alludes to the Mameluk +sultan of Egypt, through whose dominions the trade between India and +Europe was entirely carried on before this era. This treaty of peace +and alliance between Portugal and Calicut, may possibly have been +proposed at this period, but certainly was not then agreed to; as +there were long wars with the zamorin before his power was reduced +under the influence and dominion of the Portuguese.--E.</blockquote> +<p>This kingdom is not far distant from the straits of the Red Sea, +where they have erected a very strong fortress[3], and are building +another in the mouth of the bay of Cochin, provided with all kinds of +warlike artillery, by which to repel the enemy, and to provide a safe +station, for our fleet; nor shall we recede from thence, however +adverse the natives may be to our remaining; and when the same shall +be done in the bay of Calicut, it will not then be difficult to +defend these stations and the adjoining coasts against all +aggressors. Our ships which remained in these seas last year made no +small booty, as they took one morning five ships bound from the +kingdom of Cambaya for Mecca, the shrine of Mahomet, in which they +found 1000 <i>cantari</i> or quintals of clean cloves, besides a large +quantity of the same spice not freed from the husk as is usual with +us. These ships had likewise castor and other perfumes of that +kind[4], sanders wood, amber, purified lac, and excessively fine +linen, and a large sum in gold and silver coin; insomuch that the +value of this prize exceeded 200,000 ducats.</p> +<blockquote>[3] This is rather an anachronism, as at this period the +Portuguese had no fortress on the Red Sea.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] The <i>Castor</i> of the text was probably musk, and +its <i>amber</i> ambergris. --E.</blockquote> +<p>Having thus informed you of the wealth of that country, which +abounds in almost every thing, we now proceed to relate that two of +our ships above mentioned have been cast away in a storm near the +mouth of the Red Sea, their commander Vincentius and above six +hundred men having perished, but the other two were saved[5]. Another +vessel, which escaped that dreadful tempest, was soon afterwards +dashed to pieces against a rock; so that the sea was covered with +dead bodies and with rich merchandize of all kinds: Thus, as the +proverb says, wealth ill acquired is ill lost. Of all these ships one +small caravel only rode out the storm, and brought intelligence of +the destruction of the others.</p> +<blockquote>[5] This alludes to the misfortune of Vincente Sodre and +his squadron, already more distinctly related in the preceding +chapter.--E.</blockquote> +<p>We have now to inform you, that our king has given permission to +all who choose to proceed to India and to carry on trade, providing +that he is paid a quarter part[6] of all returns, and that they +purchase from him for the purpose such ships as he thinks proper, and +the price of these ships must be paid before setting out on the +voyage; because, considering the loss of ships which he has already +sustained, he is desirous that others should now bear the risk: It +will therefore require large funds to embark in this trade, so that +we hardly believe the king will find any to engage on these +conditions; but of this we shall inform you from time to time as it +may occur. It must not, however, be concealed that the circumstances +of this trade are by no means established on certain principles, +which can only be determined by future events.</p> +<blockquote>[6] The expression of the original, <i>ex centenario lucro +quadrugenarium</i> , is not easily understood: It is here translated a +quarter part of the return cargo, conformably with the regulations of +Don Henry for the trade of Guinea, as already stated in Vol. I. p. +204, from which the present were probably copied.--E.</blockquote> +<p>A Portuguese of the former fleet touched at a certain port in the +kingdom of Sofala, and visited a gold mine of which he relates +wonderful things. He assured us that a ship of the Christians had +been there, and speaks of incredible quantities of gold to be found +there. On this account, our king is resolved to erect a strong fort +at that place, to keep the barbarians under subjection, and to keep +away the Indians and the inhabitants of Cambaya, lest they should +make themselves masters of the mine. He will therefore immediately +seize upon this mine for his own use, which we certainly believe to +have been the mine whence Solomon derived such vast riches, and where +the queen of Sheba dwelt, who went to visit Solomon, as related in +holy writ. These things are of such importance that they ought not to +be concealed from you; and our king is to be deemed happy and +fortunate; because he hath made the discovery of such vast +riches.</p> +<p>It is believed by many that they will soon obtain permission from +the king to go to India, paying him at the rate of 25 per cent. and +taking his ships as before mentioned. It appears to be his wish that +the merchants should send out their own factors or supercargoes with +the care of their goods, but without any authority, as he wishes to +rule in all things, and that every thing may be directed by his +officers, even the expences of the merchants. The trade in spiceries +is to remain exclusively in the viceroy, and is not to be permitted +to the merchants; for which reason it is not believed that this +Indian trade will be very profitable: But we shall give you due +information of all these things as they occur. We have formerly +written you that Cairo failed in its commercial prosperity from the +very same cause; and if this great eastern trade shall be +appropriated by the king, it will certainly occasion a Babylonian +confusion in the state, and very deservedly: For at Cairo the Moors +were in use to maltreat the Christians exceedingly, and they are now +perhaps suffering for that error, as they will not any longer be +allowed to carry away any kind of spices, or jewels of all kinds, or +pearls and other valuable commodities; as by means of the Portuguese +forts, they will in future be debarred from trading to Calicut and +Sofala; for all which you will be thankful to God.</p> +<p>Concerning the gold mine of Sofala, which we mentioned before, and +of which such wonderful things are told, it is said our king will be +the sole proprietor in two years, which must prove of vast +importance; as from that place, which is now possessed by the +idolaters, all India and Persia used to procure the whole of their +gold; although the mouth of the bay is under the dominion of a king +of the Chaldeans[7], at which place the trade is carried on with the +idolaters by the Moors, who bring yearly their ships from Cambaya +laden with low-priced articles, which they barter for gold. These +goods are coarse cotton cloths, silks of various fashions and many +colours, but chiefly of the Turkish fabric. The king of Quiloa, an +island about sixty leagues from Sofala, it is said, will have to quit +that place from fear of the idolaters. At Quiloa all ships going to +Sofala have to stop and pay tribute, before going to the mine of +Sofala. When they get to Sofala, they have to remain there six or +eight months before completing their affairs; carrying from thence +gold, ivory, and wax, all of the best kind. After this they have +again to touch at Quiloa, and to pay a tax for their gold. Thence +they go to Cambaya or Mecca. In our ships there are twelve or fifteen +agents of the king of Quiloa, who pays a tribute yearly to our king +of 1500 <i>metigals</i> , each of which metigals is worth 150 ducats, +or in all 225,000 ducats. That king depends so entirely on the king +of Portugal, that our king may dethrone him whenever be pleases to +send there a force of 1000 men, which would oblige the king of Quiloa +to run away; and it is believed this will be done shortly, the thing +being so easy, and by this means an yearly revenue of 500,000 ducats +would be secured.</p> +<blockquote>[7] It is difficult to guess what bay, and who may be the +king of the Chaldeans here alluded to. Perhaps the town of Sofala, +the emporium of the gold trade of Eastern Africa, which was ruled by +an Arabian prince or sheik. By the idolaters in the text, are +apparently meant the Negroes of the interior, where the gold came +from by way of Sofala.--E.</blockquote> +<p>If you have properly considered what those ships may bring which +are daily expected, you will find that they will at least import +about 222 quintals of all kinds of spice: And we shall ship for you +of all these, using our endeavours that you may never be in want of +them. Even after the before mentioned treaty with the king of +Calicut, no small risk still remains to those who navigate to the +Indies, on account of a certain archipelago, containing about 14,000 +islands[8], and owing to the narrowness of a certain strait which is +scarcely navigable. We shall persist notwithstanding, as by custom +and experience these dangers will become of no consequence. At length +we expect to have the glory of having discovered almost the whole of +the world, and those parts of it especially to which the ancients +never penetrated. It only remains for us to go to the island of +Taprobana, or Ceylon, which according to Pliny is exceedingly rich in +gold, gems, and ivory. Thus by our anxious endeavours, we shall lay +open the whole of India to our trade. By letters from thence, it +appears that our merchandize is not much valued in these parts, and +that <i>crusadoes</i> ought to be sent out, if we wish to have our +affairs speedily conducted, as other goods remain long in hand: For +the Indians purposely procrastinate, that they may beat down the +value of our commodities. The Indians give a high price for brass and +alum; but this last must be white not red, and in large pieces, as +they despise the small. They do not care for coral, unless large and +finely wrought, which otherwise bears no value. Lead is valued, if in +large bars. Quicksilver and amber are in no request. Wrought brass +bears a low price, as it is always manufactured over again in their +own fashion, so that the cost of manufacturing in Europe would be +thrown away. All other goods besides these mentioned are in no +demand, and will therefore bring small profit.</p> +<blockquote>[8] This alludes to the Maldives and +Lakedives.--E.</blockquote> +<p>SECTION III.</p> +<p> <i>Letter from Peter Pasquali, orator of the Venetian republic at +the court of the king of Portugal, to his brothers dwelling in +Lisbon</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] This letter is dated 9th October 1501. It is probable +that Pasquali would hardly write this <i>from</i> the court of +Portugal to his brothers in <i>Lisbon</i> ; it being more likely that +they resided in Venice.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Beloved brothers! I formerly wrote you by Peter Verzo the carrier, +informing you of all the news of this place; and now write again by +Bartholomew Marquesi, the uncle of Dominic Benedicto of Florence, +that you may be informed of our affairs, and may be assured of our +desire to write whenever an opportunity offers. Know, therefore, that +the vessel which was sent out last year towards the north by the king +of Portugal under the command of Caspar Corterato, has now returned. +He reports having discovered a continent about 2000 miles from hence, +in a direction between the north-west and the west, hitherto utterly +unknown. He is likewise said to have sailed almost 800 miles along +its coast, without finding any end; on which account it is considered +to be a continent, and not an island: and its coast appears to join +with another land, formerly discovered almost under the very +north[2]. But the vessel was unable to proceed so far, on account of +the sea being frozen, and from excessive falls of snow. It is +concluded, from the number of rivers which descend from the snowy +mountains, that this land must be a continent, as no island could +possibly supply so many rivers. The land is said to be well +cultivated. The houses of the inhabitants are constructed of wood, +covered with hides or the skins of fish. The vessel now arrived has +brought over seven of the natives of both sexes, and the other ship, +which is hourly expected, is said to have fifty. In stature, colour, +appearance, and dress, these people are very like the <i>Cingani</i> . +They are clothed in the skins of fish and otters, and other hairy +skins like those of wolves; wearing the fur side inwards in winter, +as we do, and outwards in summer; but these are not fashioned or +sewed together, being used in their natural forms. These are +principally worn on their arms and shoulders, and their loins are +girded with many cords made of sinews. They appear a savage people, +yet not impudent, and are well made in all their limbs. Their faces +are punctured with many marks, like the Indians, having six or eight +punctured lines, more or less according to their fancies, in which +they seem to take great delight. They have a language, which is not +understood by any one, although interpreters of almost every tongue +have been tried. Their country is destitute of iron, yet they have +swords edged with sharp stones; and their arrows are pointed by the +same means, and are sharper even than ours. Our people brought from +thence part of a broken sword with gilded ornaments, which seemed of +Italian manufacture.</p> +<blockquote>[2] The discovery here referred to, seems to have been +the coast of Labradore; and the other country under the north may +possibly be Greenland. This voyage was probably in quest of a +north-west passage to India.--E.</blockquote> +<p>A certain boy is said to have been seen in that country, having +two silver balls banging from his ears, which certainly appeared to +be engraved after our manner. On the whole, it may be concluded that +this country is a continent, not an island, and that is a new +discovery; for if any ships had ever been here before, we should +assuredly have heard something respecting it. The coast abounds in +fish, particularly salmon, herrings, and many others of that kind. +There are forests, which abound in all kinds of trees; so that <i>they +build</i> [3] ships, with masts, yards, benches, and all things +conformable. On this account the king of Portugal has resolved to +convert this discovery to profit, both on account of the abundance of +wood which is fit for many purposes, and because the natives, being +accustomed to labour, may become very useful, and indeed I have never +seen better slaves. I have deemed it consistent with our friendship +to acquaint you with these things; and when the other vessel arrives, +which is daily expected, I shall communicate other particulars.</p> +<blockquote>[3] In this passage we surely ought to read <i>ships may +be built</i> .--E.</blockquote> +<p>The fleet has sailed for Calicut, and the king has ordered that it +shall seize the fleet of Mecca, that the soldan of Syria may neither +have access there in future nor may export any more spices. The king +of Portugal is satisfied that every thing shall go according to his +wishes in this respect, and the court and all the nation are of the +same opinion. Should this purpose succeed, it is incredible how +abundant this kingdom must soon become in all kinds of riches and +merchandize; and from hence the ships of Venice in particular will +have to bring their accustomed articles of trade. To us truly, who +formerly sustained this branch of commerce entirely by our own +resources, this decree will be injurious, unless he shew us +favour.</p> +<p>SECTION IV.</p> +<p> <i>Letter from Francis Sagitta of Cremona, from Lisbon, directed +to the Venetian orator Peter Pasquali, residing at the Court of +Castile</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] This letter is dated 16th September 1502; and by it +P. Pascquali appears to have gone from Portugal into +Spain:--E.</blockquote> +<p>Most excellent orator! In two former letters, I have promised to +omit no opportunity of informing your excellency what kind of +merchandize might be brought in four vessels which were expected +daily from India. They are now arrived, and I shall truly state all +the merchandize which they have brought, which is as follows: One +thousand quintals of pepper; 450 quintals of cinnamon; about fifty +quintals of ginger; fifty quintals of lac: and as much cotton as may +be bought for 400 ducats. The reason assigned for having brought so +small a quantity of spice is, that they agreed among themselves, +after sailing from hence, that two of the ships should steer for the +gold mine, and the other two for Calicut. On this account, each took +only such goods as it was thought would be valued in the ports to +which they were bound. But when these ships came to Calicut they were +not allowed to trade, and were obliged to go to other places. On +going to Cananore, they there learnt what had been done by Peter +Aliaris, the factor at Cochin for the king. The king or rajah of +Cananore received our people honourably, and offered to supply our +commanders gratuitously with all kinds of spices; but, thanking him +gratefully for this kindness, he declined the offer, saying that he +must go in the first place to the kings factor at Cochin, and would +then return and accept his spices on credit. Setting out therefore +for Cochin, he transacted business with the royal agent, Peter +Aliaris; but as the ships did not bring money for their purchases, +and as the goods they brought were in small request, and they could +not therefore succeed in making purchases, the commander resolved to +return to Cananore, where the rajah had expressed so much good will +for the Portuguese, and where he bartered his merchandize for spices +at a good profit. He here left three persons, with the ships factor +and a clerk, because the rajah had advanced money on credit for the +spices, that they might not appear to have cheated the rajah. Yet +after all, the ships had to come away only half loaded, because they +had not taken out money for their purchases, and their goods were in +no request. The conclusion from this is evident, that the Indians +have no demand for our goods, and that money alone is especially +desired by them, and of which they are in great need.</p> +<p>It has been reported since, that these kings of the Indies gave as +much merchandize to our admiral without price as would load four +ships, out of fear of the Christians; especially the king of Calicut, +who has been told by his soothsayers to beware of the ensuing year, +as the stars threaten him with a great slaughter of his men by the +Christians, and that his kingdom even would be deserted, owing to +dread of that people. We have this intelligence from three men who +escaped from the battle at <i>Araschorea</i> with the barbarians. The +same thing is reported by a native of Bergamo, who had dwelt +twenty-five years at Calicut, which is likewise confirmed by a native +of Valentia, who had sojourned there six years. In the meantime the +king of Calicut fitted out a large fleet to attack our ships at +Cananore; but they immediately sought for safety by setting sail. On +this account the king of Portugal has ordered eight or ten ships of +burthen to be fitted out by next January, of which seven are already +built. Two ships have been sent out this summer, one of which is of +700 tons burthen, and the other of 500. There is a third in the port +of Lisbon of 450 tons; two others at Madeira, one of 350, and the +other of 230 tons; another is fitting out at Setubal carrying above +160 tons. Besides these six, a caravel is to be added which lately +came from the island of Chio, all of which are entirely at the royal +charges; and two are to be fitted out by the king for certain +merchants, one of 450 tons and the other of 350. It is agreed between +these merchants and the king, that the king shall be at the sole +expence of the voyage and payment of the sailors, as in his service. +That the merchants shall carry out as much money as may suffice for +all their purchases; and on the return of the ships half of the goods +shall belong to the king, and the merchants shall be at liberty to +sell the other half for their own behoof. It appears evident to us +that this mode of conducting business will be greatly more to the +benefit of the merchants than going entirely at their own risk, as +has been done hitherto; so that the king will probably find abundance +of people willing to trade to India on these conditions. We have +accordingly a share in these two ships; but of the event, God alone +can judge.</p> +<p>SECTION V.</p> +<p> <i>Of the Weights and Money of Calicut, and of the places whence +they procure their Spices</i> [1].</p> +<blockquote>[1] This Section is taken from the <i>Novus Orbus</i> of +Grynaeus, p 63. in which it forms part of the navigations from Lisbon +to Calicut, attributed to the pen of Aloysius Cadamosto. The +information it contains respecting the principal commodities then +brought from India to Europe, and their prices, is curious: Yet there +is some reason to suspect that the author, or editor rather, has +sometimes interchanged the bahar and the faracula, or its twentieth +part, in the weights of the commodities. Several of the names of +things and places are unintelligible, probably from corrupt +transcription.--E.</blockquote> +<p>Having already treated concerning the articles of commerce of all +kinds in the Indies, it is proper to give some account of the prices +and weights of these. In the city of Calicut a <i>bahar</i> of nutmegs +is sold for 450 <i>favi</i> . A bahar consists of four quintals, of 100 +pounds each, and twenty <i>favis</i> are equal to a ducat. A bahar of +cinnamon costs 390 favi. A <i>faracula</i> , or the twentieth part of a +bahar of dried ginger, is six favi. A faracula of candied ginger is +twenty-eight favi. A bahar of tamarinds thirty favi. A bahar of the +best pepper 400 favi. A bahar of <i>zerombeci</i> forty favi. A bahar +of myrabolans 560 favi. A bahar of zedoary thirty favi. A bahar of +red sanders eighty favi. A bahar of lac 260 favi. A bahar +of <i>sanasius</i> 160. A bahar of mastic 430 favi. A <i>faracula</i> +of camphor 160. A bahar of pepper 360. A faracula of frankincense +five favi. A faracula of benzoin six favi. A faracula of aloes wood +400 favi. A faracula of cassia eleven favi. A faracula of rhubarb 400 +favi. A bahar of cloves 600 fevi. A faracula of opium 400 favi. A +bahar of white sanders 700 favi. A mitrical of ambergris, or six +ounces and a quarter. A bahar contains twenty faraculas. A faracula +fourteen aratollae and a third; as twenty-three Venetian aratollae +are equal to twenty-two Portuguese pounds. A golden ducat is equal to +twenty favi.</p> +<p>As to those things which are carried from Europe for sale at +Calicut, a faracula of brass sells for forty-five favi. A faracula of +white coral for 1000. A faracula of silver for twenty favi. A +faracula of spurious coral for 300. A faracula of alum twenty. An +almenum of saffron sells for eighty favi: the almenum exceeds the +Portuguese pound two aratollae and a half, and is therefore equal to +about three Venetian pounds.</p> +<p>It appears proper to mention the regions from whence the various +spices are brought to Calicut. Pepper is brought from a certain tower +near the coast, about fifty leagues beyond Calicut. Cinnamon comes +from a country called <i>Zolon</i> , Ceylon, 260 leagues beyond +Calicut, and from no other place. Cloves come from the district +of <i>Meluza</i> , which is twelve Portuguese leagues from Calicut, and +is in the country of Cananore. Nutmegs and mastic come +from <i>Meluza</i> , which is 740 leagues from Calicut[2]. Castor, +which is musk, comes from a certain region called Pegu, 500 leagues +from Calicut. Fine pearls come from the coast of <i>Armuzi</i> [3], 700 +leagues from Calicut. Spikenard and myrabolans from the province of + <i>Columbaia</i> [4], 600 leagues from Calicut. Cassia <i>in +twigs</i> [5] is procured in the territory of Calicut. Frankincense is +brought from <i>Saboea</i> [6], 800 leagues distant. Aloes-wood, +rhubarb, camphor, and calinga, is sent from the country of Chiva[7], +4000 leagues from Calicut. Myrrh from the province +of <i>Fastica</i> [8], 700 leagues distant. Calicut produces + <i>zeromba</i> [9]; and Cananore sends cardamoms, being only twelve +leagues distant. Long pepper is found in <i>Same</i> [10]. Benzoin +from <i>Zan</i> , 700 miles from Calicut. Zedoary is produced in the +territory of Calicut. Lac comes from the city of <i>Samoterra</i> [11], +500 leagues distant. Brasil wood from the region of <i>Tannazar</i> , +500 leagues. Opium from the coast of <i>Adde</i> , 700 leagues.</p> +<blockquote>[2] Meluza may possibly be the city of Malacca, then a +great emporium of Indian trade; but it is impossible to reconcile or +explain Meluza in Cananore twelve leagues from Calicut, and Meluza +740 leagues from thence.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[3] This may possibly refer to the island of Ramisseram +in the straits of Manaar, between Ceylon and the Coromandel coast, +near which the famous pearl fishery is still carried +on.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[4] Evidently Cambaya or Guzerat.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[5] Probably Cassia lignea, or in rolled up bark like +twigs, to distinguish it from the drug called Cassia +fistula.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[6] Perhaps the coast of Habesh on the Red +Sea.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[7] Probably a typographical error for +China.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[8] Alluding to some part of the coast of +Arabia.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[9] Perhaps Zedoary, repeated afterwards under its right +name.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[10] Same and Zan probably are meant to indicate some of +the Indian islands. Same may be Sumatra. Zan may be some port in +Zangibar, on the eastern coast of Africa.--E.</blockquote> +<blockquote>[11] Samoterra probably alludes to some port in the Bay +of Bengal. Tannazar, almost certainly Tanaserim in Siam. Adde, +probably is Adel or Aden in Arabia.--E.</blockquote> +<h2>END OF VOLUME SECOND.</h2> +<hr align="center" width="50%"> +<hr align="center" width="25%"> +<div>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 10803 ***</div> +</body> +</html> |